^^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-i,
1.0
1.1
lii|2£ 12^
|jo ^^ !■■
S; 1^ 12.0
u
IL25 M 1.4
U&
Hii^l
1.6
FhologrEiphic
Sdmces
Carporation
23 WIST MAIN STtHT
WnSTIR,N.Y. 14SM
(716) 173-4303
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Instituta for Historical IMicroroproductions / institut Canadian da microraproductions historiquas
\
\
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques
The Institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
D
D
D
D
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur
I I Covers damaged/
Couverture endommagAe
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurte et/ou pellicula
I I Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
□ Coloured maps/
Cartes giographiques en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
Relii avec d'autres documents
Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
La re liure serrie peut cause: de I'ombre ou de la
distortion le long de la marge intArieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, thsse
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, iorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas M filmtes.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires supplAmentaires;
Various pagings.
L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'ii lui a 4tA possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dtns la mAthode normale de filmage
sont indiquAs ci-dessous.
I I Coloured pages/
D
Pages de couleur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagies
Pages restored and/oi
Pages restaur6es et/ou pelliculies
Pages discoloured, stained or foxei
Pages d^coiories. tacheties ou piquies
r~~| Pages damaged/
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
I ~| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
I I Pages detached/
El
Pages d^tachdes
Showthrough/
Transparence
I I Quality of print varies/
Quality intgaie de I'impression
Includes supplementary material/
Comprend du materiel supplimentaire
Only edition available/
Seuie Edition disponibie
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure,
etc., ont M film6es d nouveau de fapon A
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
The
tol
Th«
po(
oft
filn
Ori
be(
the
sioi
otl\
firs
sioi
ori
Tht
sht
Tl^
wh
Ma
difl
ent
be(
rigl
req
me
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est fiimA au taux de rMuction indiquA ci-dessous.
10X
14X
18X
22X
26X
30X
>/
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
aire
details
ues du
t modifier
ger une
> filmage
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:
National Library of Canada
The images appearing here are the best quality
posaible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in Iteeping with the
filming contract specifications.
L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grAce h la
ginArositA d«:
BIbliothdque nationale du Canada
Les images suivantes ont 4tA reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la netteti de I'exemplaire filmd, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
lies
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les exempiaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimie sont fllmte en commen9ant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la
derniire page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second
plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exempiaires
originaux sont filmte en commenpant par la
premiere page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The !ast recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur la
derniire image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbols — ► signifie "A SUIVRE", le
symbols V signifie "FIN".
ire
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many f.'ames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
filmAs d des taux de reduction diffirents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour 6tre
reproduit en un seul clich6, il est fllm6 A partir
de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche d droite,
et de haut en bas. en prenant le ncmbre
d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la mithode.
»y errata
ed to
tnt
ne pelure,
ipon it
1
2
3
32X
1
2
3
4
5
6
AN
ELEMENTARY
GEEEK GEAMMAE
\/
BY
WILLIA.M W. GOODWIN, Ph.D., LL.D.,
BUOI FfiOriSBOB OF aBBBK LIISBATUiUt IN HABTABD OOLLiaii
UEVISED AND ENLARGED EDITION,
%
-■■.pm
m
■fm
;v1
■■■X
J
ROSE PUBLISHING COMPANY.
p/^
<i
^^uTV"* >ti ,f'
•"#'
-0
tmm-
h«5'8'
|;«79
*' -r
& H '
i^r
;'<^
'1^
%
^1 ^ < ^ •'
PREFACE.
This Grammar is partly a revised edition of the
Elementary Greek Grammar published in 1870, and
partly an independent work. The part which precedes
the Inflection of the Verb contains the substance of the
former edition revised and enlarged, with many additions
to the Paradigms. The part relating to the Inflection of
the Verb, §§ 88 — 127, has been entirely re-written, and
increased from fifty to one hundred pages. Part III.,
on the Formation of Words, is entirely new. The Syn-
tax is in most parts substantially the same as in the
former edition ; but some changes and numerous addi-
tions have been made, the chief increase being in the
sections on the Prepositions. Part V., on Versification,
is almost entirely new, and is based to a great extent on
the Rhythmic and Metric of J. H. H. Schmidt, which
has just been published in an English translation by
Professor J. W. White. I have not followed Schmidt,
however, in making all iambic and anapaestic verses
trochaic and dactylic ; and I have followed the ancient
authorities in recognizing cyclic ana^jaests as well as
cyclic dactyls. I have adopted the modern doctrine of
log'aoedic verses, which enlarges their dominion and
reduces them to a uniform J measure, thus avoiding
Iv
PREFACE.
many of the incongruities which beset the common
theory of thesvj verses.
The Catalogue of Verbs is increased from nineteen to
thirty-two pages, and contains a greater number of verbs
and gives the forms more completely than the forr^er one.
The object has still been to present only the strictly
classic forms of each verb, and thereby to save the learner
from a mass of detail which he may never need. It is
surprising how simple many formidable verbs become
when all later and doubtful forms are removed. In pre-
paring the Catalogue I have relied constantly on Veitch's
Greek Verbs, Irregul'^r and Defective, a work in the
Clarendon Press Series, for which every classical scholar
will bless the author.
It will be seen that the enlargement has been made
chiefly in the part relating to the Inflection of the Verb.
There I have adopted ^§ 108) the division of verbs in eo
into eight classes which is employed by G. Curtius : this
reduces many of the apparent irregularities of the Greek
verb to rule and order. In the former edition I adopted
Hadley's addition of a class of " reduplicating '* verbs.
I have omitted this class as unnecessary in my present
arrangement. Of the six verbs (apart from verbs in fxv
and verbs in <TKa>) which composed this class, ^^vyvoiiai,
iaxo>^ and irlirrw are now assigned by Curtius to his
" mixed class " ; the first syllable of tUto) is now not
considered a reduplication by Curtius; fii/iv(o is used
only in the present stem ; while TiTpdm seems too late a
form to affect classification. The chief innovation which
I have now ventured to make in the classification of Cur-
tius relates to the large class of verbs which add e- to the
common
Ti^er one.
PREFACE. V
stem in certain tenses not belonging to the preseiit stem.
I have no thought of disputing the remark of Curtius
that this phenomenon and the addition of e- in the pres-
ei ' :em (as in Box-, Bokc-o)^ are to be explained on simi^
V r principles. But it seems obvious that the former is
not, like the latter, a process by which the present stem
is formed from the simple stem, aud it therefore has no
place in the classification which we are here considering.
Further, the addition of e- in other tenses than the pres-
ent occurs in every one of the eight classes of Curtius, so
that it must confuse the classification to introduce it
there at all. I have therefore included this among the
modifications of the stem explained in § 109, thus class-
ing it with such phenomena as the addition of a- in
certain verbs and other modifications which affect only
special tenses. (See § 109, 8.^) In § 120, 1, I have
followed the doctrine of F. D. Allen, stated in the
American Philological Transactions for 1873 (pp. 6-19),
by which Homeric forms like 6p6(o for opduy are explained
by assimilation.
I fear I may have offended many scholars in giving the
present stems of Xug), \&^(Ot XetTrw, &c. as \i>-, \€7-, \et7r-,
&c., and not as \vo(^€)', \e7o(e)-, \et7ro(6)-, &c. I have
been careful to state in several places (see foot-notes,
pp. 82 and 144) that the latter is the better approved and
more correct form of expression ; but I have not ventured
to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the
tense stems with the variable vowel-attachment. A slight
reflection showed me that this must be made by a pro-
* See also the Proceedvigs of the American Philological Association for
1879.
vl
PREFACE.
fessional etymologist, who can settle, at least consistently,
the many doubtful questions which still bcbct the subject
of tense stems. I was finally decided by finding that
G. Curtius himself had made no change in this respect
in the latest edition (1878) of his Schulgrammalik^ and
continued to call \v-, Xey-, XetTr -, &c. present stems,
evidently thinking the other forms too cumbrous for a
school-book. I have had no hesitation in following his
example.
The sections on the Syntax of the Verb contain a con-
densed statement of the principles which I have explained
at greater length in a larger work. Syntax of the Moods
and Tenses of the Greek Verh^ to which I must refer more
advanced students, and especially teachers, for a fuller
exposition of this subject.^ I must still confess myself
unable to give any general definitions which shall include
all the uses of either the indicative, the subjunctive, or
the optative, and yet be accurate enough to meet modem
scientific demands. The truth must be recognized that
these moods were not invented deliberately to express
certain definite classes of ideas to the exclusion of all
others, and then always held rigidly to these pre-deter-
mined uses. On the contrary, their various uses grew up
gradually, as language was developed and found new ideas
to express. Both the Greek and the Latin inherited most
of their modal forms through a line of ancestors now lost.
^ For a still fuller explanation of the classification of conditional sen-
tences here introduced, with the corresponding arrangement of relative
clauses, I must refer to articles in the Transactions of the American Philo-
logical Association for 1873 and 1876, printed also in the Journal of PhU
lology. Vol. v. No. 10, pp. 186-206, and Vol. viii. No. 15, pp. 18-38.
PREFACE.
Vtt
and each language employed these forms, partly in con-
formity with tradition, and partly to suit its own peculiar
needs and tendencies of thought. We must have a far
better knowledge of the uses of the moods in the original
Indo-European tongue and of the earliest uses in both
Greek and Latin than we are likely ever to get from our
present stock of material, before we can hope to trace
historically each use of the moods in the classic languages.
Investigations made through the Sanskrit, like those of
Delbriif>k, are looking in the right direction ; but scholars
differ widely in their interpretation of the results thus
obtained, and the moods are used too vaguely in Sanskrit
(compared with Greek or Latin) to be decisive in the
comparison. We know enough, however, not to be sur-
prised when we find the same idea expressed in Latin by
the past tenses of the subjunctive, and in Greek by the
past tenses of the indicative, especially whon we find the
two constructions coincide in a few instances in Homeric
Greek.
Much that is contained in the Notes of this Grammar,
especially all in the smallest type, is intended to be used
for reference, or to be read by the mc e interested pupils
as they study the remainder of the book. A great change
has gradually come upon the study of grammar in these
practical days ; and no teacher (it is hoped) now believes
in cramming pupils in advance with grammatical details
which they are not expected to use or even understand
until they have learnt the language in some other way.
I £,m strongly of the opinion that a pupil should begin to
translate easy sentences from Greek into English and from
English into Greek as soon as he has learnt the forms
via
PREFACE.
absolutely necessary for the process. The true time to
teach each principle of grammar (beyond the most general
rules, which every student of (J reek will have already) is
the moment when the pupil is to meet with it in reading
or writing ; and no grammar which is not thus illustrated
as it is taught ever becomes a reality to the pupil. But
it is not enough for a learner merely to meet each con-
struction or form in isolated instances ; for he may do this
repeatedly, and yet know little of the general principle
which the single example partially illustrates. Men saw
apples fall and the moon and planets roll ages before the
principle of gravitation was thought of. It is necessary,
therefore, not merely to bring the pupil face to face with
the facts of a language by means of examples carefully
selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state-
ment of the general principles which show the full
meaning of the facts and their relation to other prin-
ciples.* In other words, systematic practice in reading
and writing must be supplemented from the beginning by
equally systematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics
are not learnt by merely observing the working of levers
and pulleys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments
on gases; although no one would undertake to teach
either without such practical illustrations. I have, there-
fore, no faith in classical scholarship which is not based
on a solid foundation of grammar ; while I still believe
that more attention to practical illustration than has
generally been paid is urgently needed, and that the
* These objects seem to me to be admirably attained in the First Lessons
in Oruk, which was prepared by my colleague, Professor J. W. White, to
be used in connection with this Grammar.
PREFACE.
study of grammar may thus be relieved of most of its
traditional terrors and made what it should be, a means,
not an end. These remarks apply especially to syntax,
the chief principles of which have always Keemed to me
more profitable for a pupil in the earlier years of his
classical studies than the details of vowel-changes and
exceptional forms which are often thought more seasona->
ble. The study of Greek syntax, properly pursued,
gives the pupil an insight into the processes of thought
of a highly cultivated people ; and while it stimulates hia
own powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more
careful expression by making him familiar with many
forms of statement more precise than those to which he
is accustomed in his own language. The Greek syntax,
as it was developed and refined by the Athenians, is a
most important chapter in the history of thought, and
even those whose classical studies are limited to the
rudiments cannot afford to neglect it entirely.
One of the best practical illustrations of any language,
ancient or modern, one which is available even for those
who have no teachers, is committing to memory passages
of its best literature, and using them as a basis for both
oral and written exercises. This " natural method," which
has proved so successful in teaching modern languages,
can be made of great advantage in classical education by
a skilful teacher ; although I am convinced that in the
ancient languages it should always be accompanied by
careful grammatical study, and especially by constant
reference to a systematic grammar. As an important
aid, however, it cannot be too highly commended, and it
can hardly begin too early.
PREFACE.
I have not thought that the subject of Pronunciation,
in its only practical form, belongs properly to Greek
grammar. The question of the ancient sound of the
Greek letters is too extensive, and involves too much
learned discussion and controversy, to be treated in a
work like this. A very different question, it seems to
me, is the practical one. How are boys to be taught to
pronounce Greek in our schools? Even if we had a
complete ancient account of Greek pronunciation, —
which we are very far from having, — it would be a much
harder task to teach boys of the present day to follow
it than it would be to teach them to pronounce French
or German by rules without the help of the voice. The
chief practical considerations here are simplicity and
uniformity. For more than a generation, until very re-
cently, there has been no system of pronouncing Greek
in the United States which could claim notice on the
ground of uniformity. Only our oldest scholars remember
the prevalence of the so-called " English system," which
uses English vowel-sounds and Latin accents ; and this
would now be unintelligible in most of our schools and
cr.ii >ges. ]viy own efforts have been exerted merely
towards bringing some order out of this chaos. Our
scholars have generally assumed that the written accents
should be used ; and, whatever theory of ancient accent
we may hold, it will be admitted that the Greeks marked
the first syllable of dydprniroi^ and the Romans the first
syllable of homines^ in the same way. The English vowel-
sounds are not easily combined with Greek accents,
especially when a short penultimate is accented, as in
irpayfiaTtov. Harvard College has for the past eighteen
PREFACE.
xl
ciation,
Greek
of the
) much
id in a
sems to
,ught to
had a
ition, — '
I a much
follow
French
e. The
;ity and
very re-
g Greek
on the
member
' which
and this
ools and
merely
Ds. Our
accents
it accent
marked
the first
h vowel-
accents,
td, as in
eighteen
years recommended schools to use the Greek accents, and
to pronounce a as a in father^ rj and e as ^ m fete and
men, i as i in machine, leaving further details to each
teacher's discretion. The American Philological Asso-
ciation has twice recommended the same; and to this
extent some degree of uniformity has thus been secured
within the last ten years. The other sounds have generally
remained as they are in the English system, with the
exception of ov, which is generally pronounced like ou
in group. Perhaps the majority pronounce av like ou in
house (as the Germans do). To those who ask my advice,
I am in the habit of recommending the following system,
which I follow chiefly from its simplicity, and because it
is adopted by more scholars in the United States than
any ether, not pretending that all the sounds (e.g*. those
of ei and the aspirated consonants) rest on a scientific
basis : —
a as a in father, ^ as ^ in fete, e as e in men, i as i in
machine, eo as o in note, v as French u; short w.wels
merely shorter than the long vowels ; — at as ai in aisle,
€1 as ei in height, oi as oi in oil, vl as ui in quit or wi in
tvith, av as ou in house, ev as ejA in feud, ov as ou in group;
a, y, ^, like a, rj, to; — the consonants as in English,
except that 7 before k, 7, f, and y(^ has the sound of n,
but elsewhere is hard ; that 6 is always like /// in thin ;
«md that ;^ is always hard, like German ch, I have
always pronounced if like English z, but it would prob-
ably be more correct to give it the sound of soft ds (not
that of German ^), as it is a double consonant (§ 5, 2).
Many scholars prefer to pronounce €i like ei in eight ;
and this has much to be said in its favor on several
xU
PREFACE.
grounds. I do not think we have any positive knowl-
edge of the sound of et before it reached the sound of I
(our ee), and I have held to that of ei in height simply
to avoid another change from both English and German
usage.
I need not enumerate here the familiar works to which
I am indebted for most of the facts of Greek Grammar.
These have been collected so often and so thoroughly, that
there is little room for originality except in the form of
presentation. The best examples of every principle have
alreaxiy been used scores of times, and I have never
hesitated to use them again. I must again acknowledge
my deep obligations to the late Professor Hadley for his
kind permission to use the valuable material in his pub-
lished works, and for the friendly aid and advice on
which I constantly depended for many years. The influ-
ence of his profound learning and his noble example will
long survive in American scholarship. I am greatly
indebted to all who have given me their counsel during
the preparation of this book. I must mention particularly
Professors F. D. Allen, Addison Hoge, M. W. Humphreys,
and J. W. White. Professor Caskie Harrison of Sewanee,
Tennessee, has done me the great kindness of sending me
an elaborate criticism of Part I. and the whole Syntax
of my former edition, with discussions of many of the
most impoitant points. I have often been aided by his
remarks in revising these portions of my work ; and even
when I could not agree with his opinions, his criticisms
have shown me some weak points in my former state-
ments.
:ii
PREFACE.
xiu
My special thanks are due to Mr. Henry Jackson, of
Trinity College, Cambridge, who has kindly read the
proofs of the English edition, published at the same time
with this, and has given me many valuable suggestions
during the printing.
W. W. GOODWIN.
Harvard College, Cambridge,
October, 1879.
CONTENTS.
Introduction. — The Greek Language and Dialects
Pau
PART I. — LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
§ 1. The Alphabet ....
§§ 2, 3. Vowels and Diphthongs .
§ 4. Breathings ....
§§ 5-7. Consonants and their Divisions
§ 8. Collision of Vowels. — Hiatus .
§ 9. Contraction of Vowels
§ 10. Synizesis
§ 11. Crasis
§ 12. Elision
§ 13. Movable Consonants .
§ 14. Metathesis and Syncope .
§§ 15-17. Euphony of Consonants
§ 18. Syllables and their Division
§§ 19, 20. Quantity of Syllables .
§§ 21-23. General Principles of Accent
§ 24. Accent of Contracted Syllables .
§ 25. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives
§ 26. Accent of Verbs . . . ,
§§ 27, 28. Enclitics ....
§ 29. Proclitics . . . . ,
§ 30. Dialectic Changes in Letters
§ 31. Punctuation>Marks
5
6
6,7
7,8
8
8-10
10
10, 11
11, 12
12
13
13-16
17
17, 18
18-20
20, 21
21, 22
22, 23
23, 24
24,25
25
25
xvl
CONTENTS.
PART II. — INFLECTION.
§ 32. Definitions. — Inflection, Root, Stem, Ending .
§ 33. Numbers, Genders, Cases ....
26
. 26, 27
NOUNS.
§ 34. Three Declensions of Nouns 28
§§ 35, 36. Stems and Terminations of First Declension . . ,28, 29
§ 37. Paradigms of First Declension 29, 30
§ 38. Contract Nouns of First Declension 30, 31
§ 39. Dialects of First Declension 31
§§ 40, 41. Stems and Terminations of Second Declension . . 31, 32
§ 42. 1. Paradigms of Second Declension 32, 33
2. Attic Second Declension 33
§ 43. Contract Nouns of Second Declension . . . . 33, 34
§ 44. Dialects of Second Declension 34
§ 45. Stems and Case-endings of Third Declension . . .34, 35
Note. Coi.iparison of Case-endings in the Three Declensions 35
§ 46. Nominative Singular of Third Declension . . . . 36, 37
§ 47. Accusative Singular of Third Declension .... 37
§ 48. Vocative Singular of Third Declension .... 38
§ 49. Dative Plural of Third Declension 39
§ 50. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Mute or
Liquid Stems 89~41
§§ 61-56. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Stems in
2 or Vowel Stems (chiefly contract) .... 42-47
§ 57. Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension . . . . 47, 48
§ 58. Gender of Third Declension ....... 49
§ 59. Dialects of Third Declension ...... 49
§ 60. Irregular Nouns 49-52
§ 61. Local Endings, -Oi, -dev, -de, &c 52
ADJECTIVES.
§§ 62-64. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions . . 53, 54
§ 65. Contract Adjectives of the Firet and Second Declensions . 54-56
§ 66. Adjectives of the Third Declension 56, 57
§ 67. First and Third Declensions combined .... 57-59
§ 68. Participles in -tav, -ay, -fts, -vs, -wy 59-61
§ 69. Contract Participles in -owv, -euv, -ouv . . . . 61, 62
§ 70. Declension of m^a^ toMs, and ir/>aos 62, 63
CONTENTS.
xvli
•
26
. 26,
27
28
. 28,
29
. 29,
30
. 30,
31
31
. 31,
32
. 32.
33
•
33
. 33,
34
•
34
. 34,
35
isions
35
. 36,
37
•
37
38
•
39
or
in
39-41
42-47
47, 48
49
49
49-52
62
. 53, 54
54-56
. 56, 57
57-59
. 59-61
61, 62
. 62, 63
Comparison of Adjeotiyei<
§ 71. Comparison by -Tf/jos, -totoj 64
§ 72. Comparison by -luv, -(j-toj 64, 65
§ 73. Iwegular Comparison 65, 66
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
§ 74. Adverbs formed from Adjectives 67
§ 75. Comparison of Adverbs 67
NUMERALS.
§ 76. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Numeral Adverbs . . 68, 69
§ 77. Declension of Cardinal Numbers, &c 69, 70
THE ARTICLE.
§ 78. Declension of b,i\,r6 71
PRONOUNS.
§ 79. Personal and Intensive Pronouns 71-73
§ 80. Reflexive Pronouns 73, 74
§ 81. Reciprocal Pronoun 74
§ 82. Possessive Pronouns 74
§ 83. Demonstrative Pronouns 74, 75
§§ 84, 85. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns . . . . 76, 77
§ 86. Relative Pronouns 77, 78
§ 87. Pronominal Adjectives and Adverbs 78, 79
VERBS.
§§ 88-91. Voices, Moods, T-^nses, Numbers, and Persons . . 79-81
§ 92. Tense Stems. — Principal Parts of a Greek Verb . . . 81-84
§ 93. Conjugation. — Two Forms: Verbs in w and Verbs in fu . 84, 85
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 12.
§ 94. Present Stem of Verbs in w 85
§ 95. 1 . Synopsis of the Regular Verb in w . . . . 85-91
2. Meaning of the Forms of the Verb 92, 93
§ 96. Paradigm of the Regular Verb in « 94-110
§ 97. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verbs with
Consonant Stems . 111-114
§98. Contract Verbs in aw, eci;, and ow ..... 115-118
xviii
C0NTENTS.
i
§ 99.
§100.
§101.
§102.
§103.
§104.
§105.
§106.
Augment.
Temporal Augment
and Reduplication
Syllabic and
defined
Augment of Imperfect and Aorist Indicative .
Augment of Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect
Attic Reduplication
Augment of Diphthongs
Syllabic Augment prefixed to a Vowel . .
Augment of Compound Verbs ....
Omission of Augment
Verbal Stems.
§ 107, 108. Formation of Present from Simple Stem. — Eight
Classes of Verbs in w
109. Modification of the Stem in certain Tenses .
110. Fonnation of the Seven Tense-Stems . . . .
111. Table of Tense-Stems
119
119, 120
120, 121
122
122
123
123, 124
124
125-131
131-135
135-141
141
Personal Endings.
§ 112. Table of Personal Endinf s. — Connecting Vowel .
§ 113. 1. Connecting Vowels of .he Indicative
2. Personal Endings of Indicative with Connecting Vowel
§ ll:t. Terminations of the Subjunctive
§ 115. Terminations of the Optative
§ 116. Terminations of the Imperative
§ 117. Terniinations of the Infinitive, Participles, and Verbal
Adjectives
§ 118, Periphrastic Forms
Dialects.
§ 119. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in w.
§ 120. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs .
coif JUOATION OF VEBBS IN |iu
§§ 121, 122. General Character of Verbs in fu. — Two Classes .
§ 123. 1. Synopsis of Verbs in -rjixi, -ufu, -vfii
2. Paradigms of peculiar Tenses
3. Full Synopsis of Indicative
§ 124. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the /tti-form .
§ 125.- Enumeration of the /xt-forms
§ 126. Dialectic Forms of Verbs in fu
§ 127. Inegular Verbs in fii. — Paradigms ....
142-144
144, 145
145, 146
146
146-148
148, 149
149, 150
150, 151
151-153
154, 155
156-158
158, 159
159-165
165, 166
167
168-170
170-172
172-179
igiBfami.LkiJM Bg
CONTENTS.
xix
119
119, 120
120, 121
122
122
123
123, 124
124
125-131
131-135
135-141
141
142-144
144, 145
el 145, 146
146
146-148
148, 149
149, 150
150, 151
151-153
154, 155
156-158
158, 159
159-165
165, 166
167
168-170
170-172
172-179
PART III. — FORMATION OF WORDS.
§ 128. 1. Simple and Compound Words ....
2. Verbals and Denominatives
3. Suffixes
§§ 129, 130. Formation of Simple Words ....
§ 131. Formation of Compound Words ....
§ 132. Meaning of Compounds
180
180, 181
181
182-187
187-189
189, 190
PART IV. — SYNTAX.
§ 133. Subject, Predicate, Object 191, 192
§ 134. 1. Subject Nominative (of Finite Verbs) ... 192
2. Subject Accusative (of Infinitive) . . . . 192
3. Subject of Infinitive omittsd 192
Notes. Subj. Nom. omitted, Impersonal Verbs, &c. . 192, 193
§ 135. Subject Nominative and Verb 193, 194
§ 136. Predicate in same Case as Subject 194, 195
§ 137. Apposition 195, 196
ADJECTIVES.
§ 138. Adjectives agreeing with Nouns
§ 139. Adjective used as a Noun .
THE ARTICLE.
§ 140. Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun)
§ 141. Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article)
§ 142. Position of the Article
§ 143. Pronominal Article in Attic (6 /jl^v . . . 6 Si, kc).
PRONOUNS.
§§ 144, 145. Personal and Intensive Pronouns .
§ 146. Reflexive Pronouns
§ 147. Possessive Pronouns
§ 148. Demonstrative Pronouns
§ 149. Interrogative Pronoun
§ 150. Indefinite Pronoun
§ 151. Relative Pronoun as related to its Antecedent .
§ 152. Relative with omitted Antecedent
§§ 153, 104. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives
§ 155. Relative in Exclamations, &c
§ 156. Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new Case .
196-198
198, 199
199, 200
200, 201
201-204
£04, 205
205, 206
206, 207
207
208
208
209
209, 210
210
210-212
212
212
CONTENTS.
THE CASES.
I. NominatiTe and VooatiT*.
§ 167. 1. Nominative, as Subject or Predicate
2. Vocative used in addressing
212
213
1!^
II. Aeoniative.
Remark. — Various Functions of the Accusative ... 213
§ 158. Accusative of Direct (External) Object . . . . 213
§ 159. Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object) . . . 213-215
§ 160. 1. Accusative cf Specification {Synecdoche) . . . 215
2. Adverbial Accusative 215
§161. Accnaative oi Extent of Time nr Space . . . . 216
§ 162. Terminal Accusative (Poetic) 216
§ 163. Accusative after Ni) and Md 216
Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying
§ 164. To ask, teach, clothe, conceal, deprive, divide, &c. . . 217
§ 165. To do anything to or say anything of a Person . . . 217, 218
§ 166. To name, appoint, consider, &c. (Predicate Accusative) . 218
III. Oenitive.
Remark. — Various Functions of the Genitive . . . .
§ 167. Genitive after Nouns (Adnominal) ....
§ 168. Partitive Genitive (specially)
§ 169. 1. Genitive after Verbs signifying to be, become, belong, &c.
2. Partitive Genitive after Verbs signifying to name,
make, &c
§ 170. Partitive Genitive after other Verbs ....
§ 171. Genitive after Verbs signifying
1. To take hold of, touch, claim, hit, miss, begin, &c. .
2. To taste, smell, hear, remember, forget, desire, spare,
neglect, ad/tnire, despise, &c
3. To rule or command
§ 172. 1. Genitive after Verbs of Fulness and Want .
2. Accusative and Genitive after Verbs signifying to fill
§ 173. Causal Genitive, —
1. After Verbs expressing Praise, Pity, Anger, Envy, &c.
2. After Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, &c.
3. In Exclamations •
218
219, 220
220
221
221
221, 222
222
222, 223
223
222
223, 224
224
224, 225
225
CONTENTS.
xxi
212
213
218
219, 220
220
221
221
221, 222
222
§174.
§176.
§176.
§177.
II
It
II
213
213
1 § 1^«-
213-215
215
1 ^ '^'"
215
216
216
1 ^"
216
M § 182.
fl § 183.
217
■'
. 217, 218 '
218
^H Rema
Genitive as Ablativo. — Genitive of Separation . . 225
Genitive after Comparative . 225, 226
Genitive with Verbs of surjiass-
ing, beinfi inferior, &c 228
1. „ „ Genitive of Source . . . 226
2. „ ,, Genitive (Poetic) of Agent or
Jnatruincnt 226
Genitive after Compound Verbs 226
Genitive of Prvx or Valm 227
Note. Genitive after d^tos and d{(6(» . . . 227
1. Genitive of Time within which 227
2. Genitive of Place within which (Poetic) . . . 227
Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives . . . 227, 228
Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting Posses-
sion, &c 228
Genitive with Adverbs 229
Genitive Absolute (see also § 278, 1) . . . . 229
222, 223
■jm
223
jB
222
fl
223, 224
B
224
W §189
224, 225
m ^^^^
225
'S
lY. Dative.
Remark. — Various Functions of the Dative .
§ 184. Dative expressing to or for: —
1. Dative of Indirect Object
2. Dative after certain Intransitive Verl s .
3. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage .
Note 6. Ethical Dative ....
4. Dative of Possession (with elfd, &c.) .
5. Dative denoting that with t sped to which, &c.
§ 185. Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding Verbs .
§ 186. Dative of Eesemblance, Union, and Approach
Note 1. Dative after Verbs signifying to discourse with or
coTiUend with
§ 187. Dative after Compound Verbs ....
§188. 1. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instrument
Note 2. Dative after x/><4oMa*, wse .
2. Dative of Degree of Difference (with Comparatives)
3. Dative of Agent (with Perf. and Plup. Pass. ) .
4. Dative of Agent (with Verbal in -Woj or -t^ov) .
5. Dative of Accompaiiimeni (sometimes with oi>t6s)
Dative of Time
Dative of Place (Poetic)
Note 1. Occasional Use iu Prose (Names of Attic Demes)
230
230
230, 231
231, 232
232
232
232
232
233
233
233
234
234
234
234
235
235
235
236
m
xxii
CONTENTS.
\y-
PREPOSITIONS.
|§ 191, 192. Prepositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 238-242
§ 193. I repositions in Composition taking their own Cases . . 242
ADVERBS.
§ 194. Adverbs qualifying Verbs, Atyectives, and Adverbs . t48
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
Voices.
§ 195. Active Voice 243
§ 196. Passive Voice 248
§ 197. Agent after Passive Verbs (inrS and Genitive) ... 244
Note 2. Passive Construction when Active has two Cases 244
§ 198. Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive . . . 24f 245
§ 199. Middle Voice (three Uses) 246, 246
Tenses.
Teniei of the Indicative.
§ 200. Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) .... 246-248
§ 201. Primary and Secondary Tenses of Indicative . . 248
Teniei of Dependent Xoodi.
§ 202. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 248
1. Distinction between Present and Aorist in this Case 249
9. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) . . 249
3. Future Infinitive not in Indii'ect Discourse (exceptional) 250
4. Future Optative (used only in Indirect Discourse) . 250
§ 203. Optative and Infinitive in Imiirect Discourse . 250, 251
Note 1. Present Infinitive and Optative includes
Imperfect 251
Note 2. Infinitive after Verbs of Hoping, Promising, &c.
(two Constructions allowed) 251
§ 204. Tenses of the Participle 252
Onomie and Iterative Teniei.
§ 205. 1. Gnomic Present, expressing Hahit or General Truth . 252
2. Gnomic Aorist ,, ,, ,, ,« • 252,253
3. Gnomic Perfect ,, „ ,, ,, . 253
§ 206. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with Aif , . . • 253
3..
CONTENTS.
xxiii
The Particle "Av.
§ 207. Two Uses of the Adverb "Av .
§ 208. 'Af with the Indicative
1. Never with Present or Perfect
2. Witli Future (chiefly Homeric)
3. With Secondary Tenses (see § 222)
§ 209. "Av with the Subjunctive
§ 210. "Av with the Optative (always in Apodosis)
§ 211. "Av with the Infinitive and Participle (in A|)odosis)
§ 212. Position of dv. — "Av repeated, or used in Ellipsis
263, 264
264
254
254
254
264, 265
255
265, 256
256
The Moods.
General Statement and Olaiiifloation.
§ 213 1. Various Uses of Indicative 266, 257
2. Various Uses of Subjunctive 267
8. Various Uses of Optative 258
4. The Imperative 258
6. The Infinitive 258
§ 214. Classification of Constructions of Moods .... 269
I. Final and Object Claniei after tvc^ m«, 8ir«»t, |i^.
§215
Three Classes of these Clauses 259
Note 1. Negative Particle in these Clauses . . 260
§ 216. Final Clauses (after all the Final Particles) : —
1. With Subjunctive and Optative .... 260
2. With Subjunctive after Secondary Tenses . . 260, 261
3. With Secondary Tenses of Indicative . . . 261
§ 217. Object Clauses with 6irui after Verbs of Striving, &c. . 261, 262
Note 4. "Oirws or 6irm jui) with Fut. Ind (elliptically) 262
§ 218. Object Clauses with fi-^ after Verbs oi Fearing, &c. . . 262
Note 2. MiJ or 6irws fi-ff used elliptically . . 262
Note 3. MiJ with Present or Past Tenses of Indicative 262, 263
II. Conditional (Sentences.
§ 219. 1. Definition of Protasis and Apodosis
2. Use of iv (Horn. Ki) in Protasis and Apodosis
3. Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodo3it .
§ 220. Classification of Conditional Sentences . .
263
268
263
263-267
XXIV
CONTENTS.
Four Forms of Ordinary FrotasU.
§ 221. Present and Past Conditions with simple Indicative . , 267
Note. Future sometimes used in these Conditions . 267
§ 222. Present and Past Conditions with Secondary Tenses of In-
dicative (dv in Apodosis) 267, 268
Note 1. "Ai* sometimes omitted in the Apodosis . . 268
Note 2. "ESet, exRW* &c. with Infin. in Apodosis
(without Av) 268
§ 223. Future Conditions. — Subjunctive with i&p in Protasis . 269
Note 1. Future Indicative with et in Protasis . . 269
Note 2. Ei (without &v or Ki) in Protasis (Homeric) . 269
§ 224. Future Conditions. — Optative in Protasis and Apodosis 269, 270
NcvE. 'A.V very rarely omitted here .... 270
Present and Past General Suppositions.
§ 225. Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis
Note 1. Indicative with d (occasionally)
270
270, 271
» i I
Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences.
§ 226. 1. Protasis contained in Participle or other Word . . 271
2. Protasis omitted. — Potential Indie, or Opt. with Hlv 271, 272
3. Infin. or Partic. in Indirect Discourse forming Apodosis 272, 273
4. Infin. (not in Indirect Discourse) forming Apodosis . 273
§227. 1. Protasis and Apodosis of different Classes . . . -273,274
2. A^ introducing an Apodosis 274
§ 228. E/ after Verbs of Wondering (davfii^w), &c. . . . 274
III. Relative and Temporal Sentenoea.
§ 229. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained . . 274, 275
§ 230. Relative with Definite Antecedent .... 275
§ 231. Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. — Conditional Relative 275
§ 232. Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence (corresponding
to those of ordinary Protasis, §§ 221-224) . . 275, 276
§ 233. Conditional Relative Sentences in Present and Past General
Suppositions (as in Protasis, § 225) . . . 276, 277
Note 1. Indicative with 6<tti.s, for Subj. with 6s &v . 277
§ 234. Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences . . 277
§ 235. Assimilation in Conditional Relative Sentences . . 277, 278
§ 236. Relative Clauses expressing Purpose, &c. (with Fut. Ind.) 278
J^
CONTENTS.
XXV
Note 1. Subj. and Opt. in this Construction (Homeric) 278
Note 2. 'E^' 4> or i<f! i^e with Future Indicative . . 278
§ 237. "dare (sometimes ibs) with Indicative .... 279
§ 2^8. Causal Relative Sentences 279
Temporal Particles signifying Until, Before that.
§ 239. Constructions after ^wj, ^ore, axpi, &c., until . . 279, 280
§ 240. Hplv with the Finite Moods (see also § 274) . . 280, 281
Note. Uplv ii, Trpdrepov ij, irpdadev ij, used like irpU 281
IV. Indirect Disoonrse.
§ 241. Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions . . . 281
Note. Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse . 281
§ 242. General Principles of Indirect Discourse. — Use of dv. —
Negative Particles 281, 282
Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse.
§ 243. Indie, and Opt. after 6ti or ws, and in Indirect Questions 282, 283
Note 1. Pres. Opt. occasionally represents Imperfect 283
§ 244. Subj. or Opt. in Indirect Questions, representing Interroga-
tive Subj 284
§ 245. Indie, or Opt. with dv (unchanged) .... 284
§ 246. Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotations . . . 285
Note. When Infinitive is said to be in Indirect Discourse 285
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sent* ices.
§ 247. Rule for Dependent Clauses in Indii*ect Quotation . . 285, 286
Note 1. One Verb changed to Optative, while another
is unchanged 286
Note 2. When Dependent Aor. Indie, can be changed to
Optative 286
§ 248. Single Dejiendent Clauses in Indirect Discourse, indepen-
dently of the rest of the Sentence. — Four Classes . 287, 288
§ 249. 1. "Oirws used for wj in Indirect Quotation (rare) . . 288
2. Homeric Use of 8 for &tl (rare) 288
y. Cansal Sentences.
§ 250. Causal Sentences with Indicative .... 288, 289
Note. Optative sometimes used after Past Tenses (see
§248) ..,,,.,.. 289
XXVI
CONTENTS.
VI. Expression of a Wish.
§ 251. 1. Optative in Wishes (with or without eWe, &c.)
2. Indicative in Wishes (with eWe, &c.)
Note 1. 'O^eXoi' with Infinitive in Wishes .
289
290
290
VII. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhortations,
and Prohibitions.
§ 252. Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, &c.
§ 253. First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations
§ 254. Present Iniper. or Aor. Subj. in Prohibitions
290
290, 291
291
VIII. Subj. like Fut. Indie, in Homer. — Interrog. Subj.— Subj. and
Fut. Indie, with ov |ji^.
§ 255. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as simple Future
§ 256. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt)
§ 257. Subjunctive and Future Indicative with oi fii^ .
291
291
292
§258.
§259.
§260.
§261.
§262.
§263.
§264.
§265.
§266.
§267.
§268.
§269.
§270.
The Infinitive.
Infinitive as Verbal Noun 292
Infinitive as Subject (Nom. or Accus.) or Predicate (Nom.) 292
Infinitive as Object of a Verb: —
1. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 293
2. In Indirect Discourse (with Time of Tenses preserved) 293, 294
Infinitive with Adjectives, Nouns, and Adverbs . . 294
1. Infinitive {with the Article) after a Preposition . . 295
2. Infinitive (loith the Article) as Genitive or Dative . 295
1. T.ifinitive (with or M'ithout tov and /tnj) after Verbs of
Hindrance, &c 295
Note. Double Negative fi^ ov with this Infinitive 295, 296
2. Infinitive with t6 or t6 /xt; (or rb firj oi) after V<^rbs of
Negative Meaning 296
296
296, 297
297
297, 298
298
298
298
298
Infinitive with Adjuncts and the Article, as Noun
Infinitive expressing a Purpose
Infinitive after Hxttc or w$
Infinitive after iip' Up or etf) ^s
Absolute Infinitive (generally with <is or Sffov) .
Note. 'EkCjv dvai, willingly, rb vGv elvai, &c.
Infinitive as Imperative
Infinitive expressing a Wish (like Optative) .
CONTENTS.
xxvu
28!
290
290
ons,
290
290, 291
291
,bj. and
291
291
292
)
292
292
§ 271. Infinitive in Laws, Treaties, Proclamations, &c. . 298, 299
§ 272. Infinitive (with or withont t6) expressing Surprise . 299
§ 273. Infinitive in Narration (with Verb of Saying understood) 299
§ 274. Infinitive with vplv (see also § 240) 299
The Participle.
§ 275. Participle as Verbal Adjective. — Three Uses . . . 209
§ 276. 1. Participle with a Noun (expressing simple Attribute) . 300
2. Participle with Article = he who or those who with a Verb 300
§ 277. Participle defining the Circumstances of an Action : —
1-6. Various Relations denoted by this Participle . 300, 301
Notes. Various Adverbs used with this Participle 301, 302
§ 278. 1. Genitive Absolute (see also § 183) .... 302
2. Accusative Absolute (of Impersonal Verbs) . . Z^%
§ 279. Participle with Verbs (like Infinitive) : —
1. With Verbs signifying to begin, cease, repent, &c. . . 303
2. With Verbs signifying to perceive, find, or represent . 303
3. With irepiopdb) and c^opdia, overlook, &c. . . 303, 304
4. With \avdavb), rvyxoivu), and <p0avu .... 304
§ 280. Participle (like Infin.) in Indirect Discourse (see § 246) 304, 305
Note 1. A^X6j or <f>avep6s elfii with Participle . . . 305
Note 2. ^tjvoiSa and avyyiyvuifKu with a Participle in
Norn, or Dat. SDii
293
293, 294
294
295
295
295
295, 296
If
296
296
296, 297
297
297, 298
298
298
298
298
Verbal Adjectives in -Wos and -Wov.
§ 281. 1. Personal Construction of Verbal in -Hos
2. Impersonal Verbal in -riov (or -ria)
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
§ 282. 1. Direct and Indirect Interrogatives
2. Direct Interrogatives, — 'H, 8.pa, ov, fir), imwv
3. "AWo Ti i} ; or AWo rt ;
4. Indirect Questions wich ci (Homeric ^ or ije)
5. Alternative Questions, — USrepov . ,.1}, kc. .
NEGATIVES.
§ 283. 1, 2. Oil or /lit; with Indie, Subj., Opt., and Imper.
3. Negative with Infinitive ....
4, 6. Negative with Participles and Adjectives
305
9m
306
307
307
807
807, 308
308
308
XXVlll
CONTENTS.
6. M?7 with Infin. after Verbs with Negative Idea (§263) 308
7. Mr? oi) with Infinitive (after Negative Leading Verb) . 309
8. 9. Two or more Negatives in one Clause . , . 309, 310
PART v.— VERSIFICATION.
§284.
§285.
Foot. — Ictus. — Rhythm and Metre
Times
§286.
1. Long and Short Syllables. —
2. Enumeration of Feet
3. Place of the Ictus in a Foot
4. Anacrusis
1. Resolution and Contraction
2. Syncope ....
3. Irrational Time .
4. Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest
5. Syllaba Anceps
§ 287. 1. Rhythmical Series and Verse
2. Close of Verse
3. Catalexis
4. Pauses
§ 288. 1. Caesura ....
2. Diaeresis
§ 289. 1. Verses ....
2. Monometers, Dimeters, &c.
3. Rising and Falling Rhythms
4. Systems and Strophes .
§§ 290, 291. Trochaic Rhythms
§§ 292, 293. Iambic Rhythms
§§ 294, 295. Dactylic Rhythms
§§ 296, 297. Anapaestic Rhythms
§ 298. Anapaestic Systems
Note. Iambic and Trochaic Systems
§§ 299, 300. Logaoedic Rhythms"
§ 301. Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Timed
§ 302. Dochmiacs
Arsis and Thesis
311, 3i2
312
313, 314
314
314
314, 315
315
315
315
315
315, 316
316
316
316
316
316, 317
317
317
317
318
318, 319
319, 320
321, 322
322, 323
823
323
323-325
325, 326
326
APPENDIX.
Catalogue of Verbs 329-360
Indexes
• * •
361-393
TABLE OF PARALLEL REFERENCES.
11, 312
812
13, 314
314
314
14, 315
315
m
315
315
15, 316
316
816
316
816
16, 317
317
317
317
318
18, 319
19, 320
21, 322
22, 323
323
323
523-325
25, 326
326
This includes all cases in which references to the former edition are affected by
changes in numbering made in the new edition; except those in §§ 88-132 and
Part v., which are too much changed to make any such comparison possible.
Old Editicm.
§ 3 (paragraph 2).
§ 4, 1, Note.
§ 7 (par. 2).
§ 9, 4, Note.
§ 13, 2.
§ 16, 1, Note.
§ 16, 5 (par. 2), &
Notes 1 & 2.
§ 16, 5, N. 3.
§ 19, 1, Note.
§ 25, 3, Note.
§ 29, Note.
§ 37, 2, N. 2.
§ 42, 2, Note.
§ 47, Note.
§ 53, 2, N. 1.
§ 64 (par. 2).
§ 56, 1, Note.
§ 59, 1 (par. 2).
§ 59. 2.
§ 59, 3.
§ 59, 4.
§ 70 (end).
§ 70, Note.
§ 72, 1 (last line).
§ 72, 2 (end).
§ 77, 2, N. 4 (end).
§79, 1, N.2 (last
4 par.).
§ 82, Note.
§134,
§141,
§142.
§142,
§142,
§145,
§159,
§163,
§166,
§173,
2 (par. 2).
N. 6 (par. 2).
1 (par. 3).
2, N. 5.
4, N. 1 & 2.
1 (par. 3).
(par. 3).
Note.
N. 1.
1 (par. 3).
Nev> Edition.
§ 3, Note.
§ 4, 1, Note 1.
§ 7, Note.
§9,4,Notes2&l.
§ 13, 2 & 3
§ 16, 1, N. 2.
§ 16. 6, and Notes 1
&2.
§ 16, 6, Notes 3 & 4.
§ 19, 1, Note 1.
§ 25, 3, Notes 1, 2, 3.
§ 29, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 37, 2, Notes 2 & 3.
§ 42, 2, Note 1.
Omitted.
Omitted.
§ 54, Note.
§ 56, Note.
§ 59, 2.
§ 53, 1, N. 3.
§ 53, 3, N. 4.
§ 52, 2, N. 4.
§ 70, N. 1.
§ 70, N. 2.
§ 72, 1, Note.
§ 72, 2, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 77, 2, N. 5.
§ 79, 1, Notes 3-6.
§ 82, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 134, 3.
§ 141, N. 7.
§ 142, 1, Note (end).
§ 142, 2, N. 6.
§ 142, 4, Notes 5 & 6.
§ 145, 1, Note.
§ 159, Remark.
§ 163, Notes 1 & 2.
Included in § 164.
§ 173, 1, N. 1.
Old Edition.
§ 173, 1, Note.
§ 180, 2, N. 1.
§ 184, 3, N. 5.
§ 184, 3, N. 6.
§ 189, Note.
§ 190, Note.
§ 191, 1, 2, 3.
§ 192, 1-6.
§ 195, Note.
§ 201 (par. 5).
§ 206 (par. 3).
§ 207, 2 (par. 3).
§210 (par. 2).
§ 213, 1 (par. 4).
§219, 3 (par 2).
§ 220 Mast par.).
§ 223 (par. 3).
§ r24. Note.
§ 225 (par. 3).
§ 225 (par. 4).
§ 226, 2 (par. 3).
§ 226, 3.
§ 226, 3, Note.
§ 228 (par. 3).
§232, 3 (par. 3).
§ 235, Note.
§ 239, 2, Note.
§ 242, 1 (par. 3).
§ 242, 3 (par. 2).
§ 244 (par. 3).
§251, 2, N. 1
(par. 2).
§ 260, 1 (par. 3).
§ 261, 1, Note.
§261, 2 (par. 3).
§ 263, 2 (par. 3).
§ 269 (last clause).
§ 279, 1.
§ 279, 2 & Note.
§ 283, 8 (par. 2).
§ 283, Note.
New Edition.
§ 173, 1, N. 2.
§ 180, 1, Notes 1 «& 2.
§ 184, 3, N. 6.
§ 184, 3, N. 5.
§ 189, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 190, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 192, 1, 2, 3.
§ 191, 1.-VI.
§ 195, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 201, Rem.
§ 206, Rem.
§ 207, 2, Rem.
§ 210, Note.
§ 213. 1, Rem.
§ 219, 3, Note.
§ 220, Rem. 1.
§ 223, Rem.
§ 224, N. 1.
§ 225, Rem.
§ 225, N. 2.
§ 226, 2, N. 1.
§ 226, 3 & 4.
§ 226, 4, N. 1.
§ 228, Note.
§ 232, 3, N.
§ 235, 2.
§ 239, 2, N. 1.
§ 242, 1, Note.
§ 242, 3, Note.
§ 244, N. 2.
§ 251, 2, N. 2.
§ 260, 1, N. 1.
§ 261, 1, N. 1.
§ 261, 2, Rem.
§ 263, 2, Note.
§ 269, Note.
§ 279, 1 & 2.
§ 279, 4 & Note.
§ 283, 9.
5 283, 1, Note.
GREEK GRAMMAR.
INTRODUCTION.
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS.
The Greek language is the language spoken by the Greek
rata. In the historic period, the people of this race called
themselves by the name Hellenes^ and their language Hellenic.
We call them Greeks, from the Roman name Graeci. They
were divided into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians. The
Aeolians inhabited Aeolia (in Asia), Lesbos, Boeotia, and
Thessaly ; the Dorians inhabited Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete,
some cities of Caria (in Asia), with the neighboring islands.
Southern Italy, and a large part of Sicily ; the lonians in-
habited Ionia (in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean
Sea, and some other places.
In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a record
(before 850 B.C.), there was no such division of the whole
Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians as that which
was recognized in historic times ; nor was there any common
name of the whole race, like the later name of Hellenes.
The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in South-eastern
Thessaly, of which Achilles was king ; and the Greeks in
general were called b}' Homer Achaeans, Argives, or
Danaans.
2
INTRODUCTION.
The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known as
the Aeofic and Doric dialects. In the language of the lonians
we must distinguish the Old lonic^ the New lonic^ and the
Attic dialects. The Old Ionic or Epic is the language of
the Homeric poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New
Ionic was the language of Ionia in the fifth century b.c, as
it appears in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was
the language of Athens during her period of literary eminence
(from about 500 to 300 B.C.).*
The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form
of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of
Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated,
for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of
the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic
has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in
respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects.
The literary and political importance of Athens caused her
dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever Greek was
spoken ; but, in this very extension to regions widely sepa-
rated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little modified by
various local influences, and lost some of its early purity.
The universal Greek language which thus arose is called the
Common Dialect. This begins with the Alexandrian period,
the time of the literary eminence of Alexandria in Egypt,
which dates from the accession of Ptolemy II. in 285 b.c.
The name Hellenistic is given to that form of the Common
Dialect which was used by the Jews of Alexandria who made
• The name Ionic includes both the Old and the N"ew Ionic, but not the
Attic. Wlion tlie Old and the New Tonic are to 1)6 distinguished in tlie
present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Horn, (for Homeric) is used for the former,
and Hdt. or Herod. (Herodotus) for the latter.
INTRODUCTION.
Dwn as
onians
nd the
age of
le New
).c«) as
ic was
[linence
)d form
lasis of
treated,
tions of
iC Attic
)rm8, in
;ts.
sed her
lek was
ly sepa-
ed by
purity,
led the
period,
Egypt,
5 B.C.
mmon
made
not the
bd in the
former,
the Septuagint version of the Old Testament (283-13.5 b.c.)
and by the writers of the New Testament, all of whom were
Hellenists (i.e. foreigners who spoke Gre6k). Towards the
end of the twelfth century a.d., the popular Greek then
spoken in the Byzantine Roman Empire began to appear in
literature by the side of the scholastic ancient Greek, which
had ceased to be intelligible to the common people. This
poi-uiar language, the earliest form of Modern Greeks was
called Romaic ('Pw/natKi;) , as the people culled themselves
'Piafiaioi. The name Romaic is now little used ; and the
present language of the Greeks is called simply 'EAAi/i/iKiy,
while the kingdom of Greece is 'EAAas and the people are
"EXAt/vcs. The literary Greek has been greatly purified
during the present century by the expulsion of foreign
words and the restoration of classic forms ; and the same
process has affected the spoken language, especially that of
cultivated society in Athens, but to a far less extent. It is
not too much to say, that the Greek of most of the news-
papers now published in Athens could have been understood
without difficulty by Demosthenes or Plato. The Greek
language has thus an unbroken history, from Homer to the
present day, of at least 2,700 years.
The Greek is descended from the same original language
with tlie Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic,
Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the Indo-
European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of languages.
Greek is most closely connected with the Italian languages
(including Latin), to which it bears a relation similar to the
rtill closer relation between French and Spanish or Italian.
This relation accounts for the striking analogies between
y
fi
1.1 1'
i
4 INTRODUCTION.
Greek and Latin, which appear in both roots and termina-
tions ; and also for the less obvious analogies between Greek
and the German element in English, which are seen in a few
words like me, is, know, &c.
PART I.
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
THE ALPHABET.
§ 1. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters : -^
A
B
r
A
E
z
H
e
I
K
A
M
N
n
o
n
p
T
r
X
w
n
a
7
h
€
V
${>
I
K
\
V
f
o
TT
P
a 9
T
V
•A
X
to
Equivalent.
a
b
g
d
e (short)
z
e (long)
th
i
k or hard c
1
m
n
X
o (short)
P
r
s
t
u or y
ph
kh
ps
o (long)
Name.
AX<f>a
Brjra
rdfjL/jia
AeKra
*E y^i\6v
ZijTa
^Hra
Srjra
KiivTra
Adfi^Ba
Mv
m
m
*0 filfcpov
ni
'p&
Tav
T yjriKop
^t
i
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
Delta
Epsilon
Zeta
Eta
Theta
Iota
Kappa
Lambda
Mu
Nu
Xi
Omicron
Pi
Rho
Sigma
Tau
Upsilon
Phi
Chi
Psi
Omega
Remark. The Greek v was represented by the Latin y, and was prob-
ably ponounced somewhat like the French u or the German «. For
remarks on Pronunciation see ths Preface.
.
6
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§2.
Note 1. At the end of a word the form s is used, elsewhere the
form <r; thus, a-varaa-is.
Note 2. Two obsolete letters — Fau or Digamma (F or g) equivalent
to V or W, and Koppa ( *p ), equivalent to Q — and also the character
San(JJ)), a form of Siyma, are used as numerals (§ 76). The first of these
had not entirely disappeared in pronunciation when the Homeric poems
were composed, and the metre of many verses in these is explained only
by admitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are
explained only on the supposition that F has been omitted: see § 53, 3,
N. 1; §54, N.; §108, IL, 2.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
§ 2. The vowels are a, e, tj, i, o, w, and v. Of these,
e and o are always short ; rj and co are always long ; a, i,
and V are sometimes short and sometimes long, whence
they are called doubtful vowels.
Note. A, f, rj, o, and a> from their pronunciation are called open
vowels; t and u are called c/ose vowels.
§ 3. The diphthongs (hl-(f>doyyoiy double sounds) are
at,, av, €1, €v, 01, ov, r}v, vi, a, y, «. These are formed by
the union of an open vowel with a close one ; except w,
which is formed of the two close vowels. The union of
a long vowel (a, rj, w) with i forms the (so called) im-
proper diphthongs a, y, «. The Ionic dialect has also a
diphthong cav.
Note. In a, rj, w, the t is now written below the first vowel, and
is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line ;
as in THI K12MOIAIAI, rfj Ka)n<o8ia, and in "Qixero, axtro. This i
was written as an ordinary letter as long as it was' pronounced,
that is, until the first century B.C.
BREATHINGS.
§ 4. 1. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of
a word has either the rovgh breathing (' ) or the smooth
breathing ('). The rough breathing shows that the
vowel is aspirated^ i.e. that it is preceded by the sound
* I
§6.]
CONSONANTS.
; a? h
whence
of h ; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not
aspirated. Thus opdvt seeing, is pronounced horon ; but
op&v, of mountains, is pronounced oron.
Note 1. A diphthong takes the breathing (like the accent) upon
its second vowel. But a, jy, and a> take it upon the first vowel, even
when the i is written in the line. Thus otx<Tai, fv(f)paiv(Oy Ai/kui^;
but axfTo or "Qi^fTo, a8o) or "AiSu, jjfif iv or "HtSf ir. On the other
hand, the breathing of aidios CAibios) shows that a and i do not
orm a diphthong.
Note 2. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. When this
character was taken to denote long e (which once was not distinguished
from c), half of it I was used for the rough breathiug ; and afterwards the
other half I was used for the smooth breathing. From these fragments
came the later signs ' and '.
2. The consonant p is generally written p at the begin-
ning of a word. In the middle of a word pp is often
written pp. Thus p^rcjp (rhetor), orator ; dpprjTOf;, un-
speakable ; Ilvppofi, Pyrrhua (^pp = rrJi).
CONSONANTS.
§ 5» 1 . The consonants are divided into .
lalnalSf t, )&, <^, /a,
palatals, k, y, x*
Unguals, t, 8, 6, a-, X, v, p.
2. The double consonants are i, xj/, ^. E is composed of k
and o ; »//, of tt and <t. Z generally arises from a combination
of 8 with a soft « sound (originally dj) ; hence it lias the
effect of two consonants in lengthening a preceding vowel
(§1^,2).
§ 6. By another classification, the consonants are divided
into semivowels and mutes.
1 . The semivowels are X, /*, v, p, and <r ; of which the first
four aro called liquids, and o- is called a sibilant. M and v
8
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§7.
are also called nasals ; to which must be added y before k,
y, x» or $, where it has the sound of r, as in dyxvpn (ancora) ,
anchor.
2. The mutes are of three orcfer* .• —
smooth mutes, tt, k, t,
middle mutes, y3, y, 8,
rough mutes, <^, x, 0.
These again correspond in the following classes : —
labial mutes, tt, )8, ^,
pcdatcU mutea, Ky y, Xi
lingual mutes, t, 8, 6.
Note. Mutes of the same order are called co-ordinate ; those of
the same class are called cognate. The smooth and rough mutes,
with 0-, ^, and >/r, are called surd (hushed sounds) ; the other con-
sonants and the vowels are called sonant.
§ 7. The only consonants which can stand at the end of a
Greek word are v. p, and s. If others are left at the end in
forming words (cf. § 46, 1), they are dropped.
Note. The only exceptions are found in the proelitics (§ 29)
fK and ovK (or ovx)j which have other forms, «^ and ov. Final ^
:ind yjr (ko- and na) are no exceptions.
EUPHONY OF VOWELS.
COLLISION OF VOWELS. HIATUS.
§ 8. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a diph-
thong, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In tlu^
middle of a word this could be avoided ])y contraction (§9).
Between two words — where it is called hintus, and was
especially offensive ^ — it could be avoided by rrasis (§ 11), by
elision (§ 12), or by adding a movable consonant (§ 13) to the
former word.
Cr\TRACTION OF VOWELS.
§ 9, Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong,
are often united by eontraction in a single long vowel or a
m
[§7.
§9-1
EUPHONY OF VOWELS.
9
diphthong ; as ff>iXe(o, <f>LX.(t) ; <^iXee, c^iAei ; Ti)i,ae, rifxa. It
seldom takes place unless the former vowel is open (§ 2,
Note).
The regular use of contraction is one of the characteristics
of the Attic dialect. It follows these general principles : —
1. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (§3) simply
unite in one syllable ; as nCxii, nix^i ; yipdi, yepai; pato-To?,
pacTos.
2. If one of the vowels is o or w, the;* are contracted into w.
But €0, ooy and oe give ov. Thus Br]\6r)T€y BrfXHre ; i^iAcuxri,
^iXu)(n ; rifudofjiiv, rifjiwfiiv ; Tifidiaficv, rifiCifiev ; BrjXowy BrjXia ; —
but yci/eos, ycVous ; ttAoos, ttAovs ; voe, vov.
Note. In contract adjectives in oos (§ 65) o is dropped before a
and Tj, ai and 17 ; as inXoa, dnXa ; dTrXd;;, dirXfj ; AnXoai, dTrXal ; dirkorjy
dirXfj.
3. If the two vowels are a and c (or rj) , the first vowel
sound prevails, and we have d or rj. Aa gives d, erj or rjc gives
rj ; but €€ gives ct. Thus, irifiat, irifia ; Tt/u,d?yrc, Ti/xarc ; Tei;(ca,
Tci;(iy ; /u,vaa, /lii/a ; ^lAciyre, ^iA^€ ; ti/ui^ci/tos, Tt/x^vros ; c^iAee,
c<j!>(A6t.
Note. In the first and second declensions, ta becomes 5 in the
dual and plural, and in all numbers after a vowel or p (§§ 38, 65) ;
it also becomes a in the third declension whenever it follows a
vowel (§ 52, 2, N. 2; § 53, 3, N. 3). In the dual of the third
declension tt sometimes becomes t; (§ 52, 2; § 53, 1, N. 2). In the
accusative plural of the third declension fas generally becomes fis
(§ 51. 2).
4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong
beginning with the same vowel. Further, c is always ab-
sorbed before 01, and in contract nouns and adjectives also
before at. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diph-
thong is contracted with the ^rsif vowel of the diphthong, and
the second vowel disappears unless it can be retained as iota
subscript (§3) in ^, iy, or oi. Thus, /umai, /xvat ; /xvaa, /mvci;
ffii\€€L, <l>iXti ; <t>t.\€y, '^lA^ ; Brfkooi, Si/Aoi ; vooi, vQ ; St/Aoov, BrjXov ;
<6iAcot, ^tAoi ; ;^vo-€ot, ^(pva'o'i ; ;(pv<r€ai, )(pv<ral (cf. ciTrAoai,
10
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§10.
uTrAai) ; Tifidfi, TifiS. ; ri/Jidrj, rtfi^ ; Tifidoi, riuui ; Ttfidov, TifiS> ;
<f>i\€ov, ff>LX.ov ; Avcai, \vr) (v. Note 1 ) ; Xvriai, Xvy ; /xc/nn/oio,
^tfiv^o ; TrAaKoei?, TrXaKoOs (v. N. 2).
Note 1. In the second person singular of the passive and middle,
eat (for fam) gives a form in f i as well as that in ^ ; as Xvrat, \vri
or \vn. (See § 113, 2, N. 1.)
Note 2. In verbs in 6a>, oti and orj give ot ; as 8T)\6tis, 8t)\ois ;
Brjkof], 8i;Xoi (cf. AirXoT], iirX^, 2, Note). Infinitives in dtiu and otti'
lose I in the contracted form; as rifidfiu, Tifidv; SrjXoeiu, 8tj\ovv (§ 98,
N. 5).
5. The close vowels (i and v) are contracted with a follow-
ing vowel in some forms of nouns in is and vs of the third
declension. (See § 53, 1, N. 3 ; § 53, 2.)
Remark. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declen-
sion, contraction is confined to certain cases ; see §§ 53, 67. For exceptions
in the contraction of verbs see § 98, Notes 1, 2, 3.
SYNIZESIS.
§ 10. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a
diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the sake
of the metre, without being contracted. This is called syni-
zesis (cruvi^T/o-is, settling together). Thus. Oiol may make but
one syllable in poetry ; o-n/^ea or xpvfrita may make but two.
CRASIS AND ELISION. '
§ 11. 1 . A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word Is often
contracted with one at the beginning of the following word.
This is called crasis (Kpaa-i^, mixture). The cor on is (') is
placed over the contracted syllable. The first of the two
words is generally an article, a relative pronoun, or kui.
Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction (§9), but
with these modifications : —
{a.) A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last
vowel before crasis takes place.
[§10.
§12.]
CRASIS AND ELISION.
11
{b) The article drops its final vowel or cliphthong in crasis
before a. The particle roi drops oi before a ; and Kai drops
tti before t], av, cu, ov, and the words ci, cis, oi, al.
2. The following are examples of crasis : —
To oi/o/ia, Toxji/ofia', tu ayadd, rdyaOd] to ivavriov, TovpavrioPy 6 €K,
ovK ; o cTTi, oviri ; TO ifioTiov, ooinaTiov (§ 1 / , i^ ; a uc, av ; Kat ai/, Kav ;
Kai (iTa, Kara ; — 6 dvijp, di/i}p ; ol d8e\(f>oi, &8(\<f>oi ; tco dv8pi, rdvdpi ;
TO avTo, Tovro ; tov avrov, ravTov ; — Tot up, rav (/xtWot av, fievrav^ ;
Tot Spa, Tapa; — »cat auToj, Kavros', Koi avrrf, )(aijTT) (§17, 1); Ka\ ft,
Kfl ; Kai oi), Kov ; Ka\ oi, )(ol ] Ka\ at, ;^at- So tyu oiba, tyada ; 2) avOpamf,
uvdpumf ; rfj inapjif Ttynapfi j Trpot\a>v, Trpoijxoiv.
Note 1. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough
breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable,
taking the place of the coronis ; as in &v, &vT)p.
Note 2. In crasis, erepos takes the form artpos, — whence Qarepov,
6»aTf>a), &c. (§11, 1, i; §17,1.)
Note 3. Crasis, like contraction (§ 10), may be left to pronun-
ciation in poetiy. Thus, /iij ov makes one syllable in poetry; so pi}
flbevai, fTTfl ov.
Note 4. A short vowel at the beginning of a word is sometimes
dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong. This is called aphaeresis
(^d<f)aipca-is, taking off). Thus, p,fi ^ya> for p.fi tyto; nov *ariv for ttoC
(OTiv] cyo) *(f)diniv for tyo) (<f)dvriv.
Note 5. Crasis is much more common in poetry than in prose.
§ 12. 1. A short final vowel may be dropped when the
next word begins with a vowel. This is called elision. An
apostrophe ( ' ) marks the omission. E.g.
At ipov for 8tu epov\ dvr* fKfivrfs for dvri tK(ivT]s'i \eyoip.* av for Xe*
yoipi av ; oKX* fvdCs for dK\a fvdvs , fn dvBpuma for iiri dvBpci>n(o. So
((p!* fTtpia'^ vvxff o\t}v for viiKTa oXrjv (§ 17, 1; 16, 1).
2. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it comes
before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here no apos-
trophe is used. B,g.
*An-atT«'a) (diro and aheoi), bi-e^dKov (8td and ?/3aXoi/). So d(f)-aip((o
Cdrrd and aiptw, § 17, 1) ; 8f\-T)pfpos (Se/ca and r)p,fpa).
12
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§13.
Note 1. The poets sometimes elide at in the verbal endings /xat,
o-oj, Tat, and o-^at. So oi in ot/xot, and larely in fioi.
Note 2. The prepositions nfoi and np6, the conjunction ot;, that,
and datives in t of the third declension, are not elided in Attic
Greek. The fonn or stands for oxf, token.
Note 3. The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel even before a con-
sonant. Thus in Homer we find dp, Av, k6.t, and irdp, for Upa, dvd, Kurd,
and irapd. In composition, Kdr assimilates its r to a following consonant
and drops it before two consonants; as /cdj3j8a\e and KdKxave, for Kari^aXe
and KariKTave ; — but KaTdaveif for KaraBaveiv (§ 15, 1).
Note 4. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers
(as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use.
MOVABLE consonants.
§ 13. 1. Most words ending in on, and all verbs of the
third person ending in e, add v when the next word begins
with a vowel. This is called v movable. E.g.
liatn 8i8a><Ti raOra; but iraaiv (8a>Kfv (Kflva. So dibaai /not; but
bidaxrip €fiot.
Note 1. *Eoti takes v movable, like third persons in o-t. The
Epic Ke (for av) adds v before a vowel. The enclitic vvv has an
Epic form vv. Many adverbs in -dev (as rrpoadep) have poetic forms
in -df.
Note 2. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of
a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in
poetry, to make position (§ 19, 2).
2. Ov, not, becomes ovk before a smooth vowel, and ovx
before a rough vowel ; as ovk avros, ovx ovra. M-q inserts k
in ixrjK-eri, no longer, (like ovk-€ti) .
'Ek, from, becomes c| (cks) before a vowel ; as ck 7roAf<«>s,
but ii aoTcos.
3. Ov. j>9, thus, and some other words may drop s before a
consonant ; as ovruys c^ci, ovru) doKci.
i
§16.]
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.
13
METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE.
§ 14. 1 . Metathesis is the transposition of two letters in a
word ; as in Kpdroq and Kopro?, strength ; 6dp(To<: and Spdao^,
courage. (See § 109, 7, a.)
2. Syncope is the omission of a vowel from the middle of a
word ; as in TTa.ripo<i^ Trarpos (§ 57) ; Trrrja-ofiai for TrcTTytro/Aat
(§ 109, 7, b).
Note 1. When u is brought before p or X by syncope or meta-
thesis, it is strengtnened by inserting /3; as ixfo-fffiftpia, midday, for
fif<TTm(^f)pux {nftros and fffifpa) ; pcp/3Xa>Ka, Epic perfect of /SXcuo-ko),
go, from stem /ioX-, /iXo-, (/iXo>-, § 109, 1), /Lie-^Xa)-Ko, fif-fi^Xat-Ka.
At the beginning of a word such a /bi is dropped before /3; as in
/SpoTos, mo-tal, from stem pop-, upo- (cf. Lat. morior, die), fi^po-ros,
/SpoToj; so /SXtTTO), <aA:e honey, from stem ptXtT- of pc'Xt, Aoney (cf.
Latin we/), by syncope pXtT-, p/3Xtr-, /3XtT-, /SXi'tto) (§ 108, IV.).
Note 2. So d is inserted after p in the oblique cases of dvrjp, man
(§ .57, 2^, when the v is brought by syncope before p; as dubpos for
dvtpo:;, av-pos.
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.
§ 15. 1. A rough consonant (§ 6, 2) is never doubled;
but ■ir<f}, Kx, and tO are always written for ^tf>, xx» ^.nd 66,
Thus Sa7r</>(o, Ba»c;(os, Kar^avai', not 2a(^<^u>, Ba;^os, Ka66avv,v
(§ 12, N. 3). So in Latin, Sappho^ Bacchus.
2. Initial p is doubled when a vowel precedes it in forming
a compound word ; as in dvappvm-ta {dvd and piirrm) . So
after the syllabic augment ; as in tppL-jrrov (imperfect of pivroi) .
But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in €vpoo<i, tvpovi.
§ 16. The following rules apply chiefly to euphonic
changes made in the final consoimnt of a stem in adding the
endings, especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of
verbs : —
14
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§16.
1 . Before a lingual mute (t, 8, ^) , a labial or palatal mute
must be of the same order (§ 6, Note), and another lingual
must be changed to o-. E.g.
IfTpitnai (for Tcrpt/S-Tai), bibderai (for btbtx-Tai), irXtx^^vai (for
ir\fK-vr}vaC), (\fi(f)dr]v (for iXfin-drjp), ypdfibrfv (for ypa0-8»;i/) IlfTreKT-
Tai (TTfntid-Tai), (■nfitrBrjv (fnfid-drfv), ^/orat Q8-Tai), tart (18-Tf).
Note 1. 'Ek, from, in composition retains k unchanged; as in
fK'dpofiri, fK-Bf(ns.
Note 2. No combinations of different mutes, except those here
included and those mentioned in § 15, 1, are allowed in Greek.
When any such arise, the first mute is dropped; as in irfnfiKa (for
TTfnfid-Ka). When y stands before k or ;^, as in avy-xiui (avu and
Xeo)), it is not a mute but a nasal (§ 6, 1).
2. No mute can stand before o- except v and k (in if/ and |) .
B and <^ become ir before <r ; y and x become k ; t, 8, and 6
are dropped. E.g.
Tpiyjro) (for Tpt^-<ro>), ypdyjroi (for ypa(f>-(Ta>), \(^a> (for Xcy-cro))
n(i(Toi> (for TTft^-tro)), atrui (for afi-ao)), (rdypaai (for cr<a^aT-o-t), eKiriai
(for fXTTiS-o-t). So <3!)X6> (for*0X€/S-O, e'XTrtv (for {"XttiS-s), vv^ (for
vvKT-s). See examples under § 46, 2.
3. Before /*, a labial mute (tt, j8, <^) becomes /a ; a palatal
mute (k, X ' becomes y ; and a lingual mute (t, 8, 0) becomes
(T. E.g.
A(\€ipp.ai (for XeXeiTT-pai), rerpippai (for rerpi^-fiai), yty pap.p.ai
(for yfypa<f)-pai) f ireirXtyfiai (for »re7rX6K-/biat), rtrevyiiai (for reTfux-
/iat), jjcrp.ai (for r)8-/btat), •niiTfUT-p.ai. (for TrfTret^/iiat).
Note. When 77/* or /u/i/* would thus arise, they are shortened to 7^ or
fifi ; as ^\^7xw, ^X^Xe7-)tMH (for A7;Xe7x-Aittt, ^X7;Xe77-/Mit) ; K&p.TrTW, Kixafi-
/HOI (for KeKafiir-fJMi, KCKafifi-fmi) ; ir^/iirw, ir^vefifiai (for ireircfiv-fiai, verrefifi-
fMi). (See § 97, N. 2.)
'Ek here also remains unchanged, as in iK-fmv$dv(t>.
4. In passive and middle endings, <r is dropped between
two consonants. E.g.
A(\(t(f)d€ (for XfXfin-adf, § 16, 1), yfypa(f)de (for yfypa<f)-ade),
yfypd(f)dai (for y€ypa(fi-o-dai), irt(l)dv6ai (for 'iTe(\)av-aBai).
Note. In the verbal endings o-at and ao, o- is often dropped after
a vowel; as in Xve-o-at, Xveat, Xv^, or Xvct (§ 9, 4, N. 1). Stems in
§16.]
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.
15
r^O.
i
f<r of the third declension also drop o- before a vowel or another o-.
(See § 52, 1, Note.)
5. Belbrc a labial mute (tt, ft, <f}) v becomes jx ; before a
palatal mute (k, y, x) it becomes y (§ 6, 1). HJ.ff.
*EfiiTiiTT(o (for fv-mrrrat), avfi^aivto (for trvv-^iuai), ffi(f}av^s (for
tif<pavris). ^vyxfoi (for awxtfo), (rvyyturjs (for <rvv-yevt)i).
6. Before another liquid v is changed to that liquid ; before
a- it is generally dropped and the preceding vowel is length-
ened (€ to €t, o to ov) . £!.g.
''EWe irrto (for eVXftTro)) cfifitva (for fv-fitva>), (Tvpptat (for trvv-pta}).
MtXdf (for /ifXav-s). <« (lor eVj), Xvovo-i (for Xuo-i/o-t, § 112, 2, Note).
So f(nr(i(T-fim (from 07r€i'8&)) for ((nrfvb-fiai, (trirevfr-fiai (§ 16, 3).
Note 1. The combinations w, v8, v6, are often dropped together
before o- (§ 16, 2 and 6), and the preceding vowel is lengthened, as
above (§ 16, 6); as wao-t (for iravr-ai), yiyds (for ytyaws), Xe'ouo-t
(for XfovT-trt), Tttffto-i (dat. plur. for riQf m-aC), riBfis (for ridtw-s),
8ovs (for fioi/T-r), a-nda-oi (for o-7r<i'8-<ra)), Xvovtra (for \voin-aa),
XvOflaa (for XvtffKr-rra), Tracra (for navT'aa).
Note 2. N standing alone before at of the dative plural is
dropped without lengthening the vowel; as dat/ioo-i (ior Saifiov-ai).
Compare wao-t (for vavr-ai), N. 1.
So vT in adjectives in fts, but never in participles; as \apu(n (for
\apifvT-(ri) ; but Tttff t<rt, as given above.
Note 3. The preposition ev is not changed before o-, p, or f^.
2i3i/ becomes a-va- beiore o- and a vowel, but o-u- before o- and a con-
sonant or before f. Thus, eVpoTrro), o"U(ro"tToj, crufvyoy.
Note 4. Some verbs in v<o change v to o- before fiai in the perfect
middle (§ 109, 6, Note) as (baivu), nif^ma-iiM (for 7r<(^ai/-^at) ; and
the V reappears and is retained before o-at in the second person, as in
ir((f>av-(rai. (See § 97, 4, with N. 2.)
7. The following changes occur when •,, representing an
original j of the root ja (pronounced ya), follows the final
consonant of a stem.
(a) Palatals (x, y, x) and rarely other mutes with such an i be-
come a-a- (later Attic tt) ; as (f)v\d<r(r-(o (stem ^vXok-) for (^vXax-co) ;
fjtraaiv, worse, for ^K-t-a)i» (§ 73); Ta<r <T-a> (ray-), forrny-t-cD; (Xda-arav,
less, for eXax-i-av (comp. of ptxpor, § 73) ; rapao-o-o) (rnpa^-) , for
Tapa;^-t-<i) ; Kopvatr-d) (^Kopvd-), for Kopvd-i-ot.
(h) A (sometimes y or yy) with i forms f ; as (ftpdC-oi (</>paS-), for
<f)pa8-i-a}; Knpi(-(o (»copt8-), lor Kop(S-i-a>; Kpd^-0) (<cpay-), for Kpay-i-a>',
p.((<ov (Ion.) or fifi^tov (comp. of fieyas, great), for fuy-i-av (§ 73).
II
16
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
Kir.
I' 'l?i
('I
lit
(c) A with t forms XX; as ^oXXoi/, more (comp. of fidk-a), for
fidk-i-ou\ oTcXX-o) (oT«X-), for <rr«X-i-a); c[XXo-/iat (iX-), leap, for
dX-co/iat (cf . Lat. salio) ; (!XXor, o^Aer, for aX-i-or (cf. Lat. alius).
(d) N and o with i undergo metathesis (§ 14, 1), and t is then
contracted witn the preceding vowel ; as ^lv<o (^>av-), for (frnv-i-ot
(cf. Lat. fug-i-o from stem fug-)', rdv-ta (t«i/-), for rcv-i-a>; dutlpwv
(^Afitv-), better, for dfitp-i-tav, xtip<av (stem x'P")» ^orse, for j(«p'i-wv
(§73); Kti-pta («*p-)» ^or K(p-(-o>; xpt^i/o) (»(pt»/-), for icptv-i-a (« be-
coming t) dfiCvat (a/iiJi^), for aftvi^-(-a>; (r<$po) for avp-i-at (v'i becoming
v). So fifXaiva rfem. of /xcXar, black, stem /ifXav-) for /irXav-t-a
(§67); adtTfipa (lem. of aarrip, saving, saviour, blcm crur^p-), for
(Towfp-i-a.
§ 17. 1 . When a smooth mute (tt, k, t) is brought before
a rough vowel (either by elision or in forming a compound
word) , it is itself* made rough. £.y.
*A<f>iTffu (ior dn-irjpi), KaOaipta (for Kor-atpcca), a^' 5>i' (for dno iv),
vvxff oX>;i/ (for vvKTa Sknu, § 12, 1 ; § 16, 1).
So in crasis, where the rough breathing may affect even a conso-
nant not immediately preceding it. (See examples in § 11, 2.)
Note. The Ionic dialect does not observe this principle, but has
(for example) citt^ oH, dirirfpi (from diro and Irfpi).
2. In reduplications (§ 101, 1) an initial rough mute is
always made smooth, to avoid two rough consonants in suc-
cessive syllables. E.g.
Tl€<f)VKa (for <f)(d}VKa), perfect of <^vci>; Ktxriva (for x^XV^")* perf.
•oixdoKd', TfBrjKa (for 6 driKa), perf. of ^aXXa>. So in rl-Brfpn (for
ei-er^pt), § 121, 3.
Note. A similar change takes place in a few verbs which origi-
nally had two rough consonants in the stem ; as rpt^w (stem rptf^'
for 6pt<^-), nourish, f ut. 6pfy^<o, aor. pass. iOpiiftdtjv ; Tpex<o (tP*X' ^^^
Bp(x-)i **""» f^^' Bpi^opxu', fTd<f>Tjv, from ffaTrrw {Ta<f>- for oa(f>-\ bury;
see also Bpxmra, Tv<f)a>, and stem (dair-), in the Catalogue of Verbs.
So in fTvOriv (for tBvdrjv) from $v<o, and «Ti0rjv (for fdeBrjv) from
TiOrffu. So in 0pi$, hair, gen. rpt^or (stem rptv- for Bptx-) ; and in
raxvs, swifl, comparative Batrvav for dax-u»v, § 16, 7, a). Here the first
aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost. See § 110, VI. N. 3.
3. The ending 6i of the first aorist imperative passive be-
comes Ti after Orj- of the tense stem (§ 116, 3) ; as XvOrfri (for
kv6-q-$i) , <f>dv6r]Ti (for tJMvOrj-Bi) ; but i^avrj^Oi.
[Sir.
«19-]
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
IT
\-a)y for
eap, for
lius).
is then
' (fxiV-t-fO
dfiflvav
Xtp-i-oav
I) (ti be-
ecoming
fxfXav-i-a
tp-), for
t before
[npound
OTTO &v),
a conso-
.2.)
but has
mute is
in Buc-
a), perf.
hifn (for
ich origi-
Bin rptif)'
[rptx- for
, bury ;
Verbs.
r)y) from
and in
) the first
V^I. N. 3.
3ive be-
rjTi (for
SYLLABLES.
§ 18. 1. A Greek word lias as many syllables as it
has separate vowels or dlplithonj^s. The syllable next
to the last is called the peftult (pen-ultima, almost last) ;
the one before the penult is called the antepenult.
2. A pure syllable is one whose vowel or diphthong
immediately follows another vowel or diphthong ; as the
last syllable of ^iXio), oIkiu, '^^pva-eo^.
Note. In most editions of the Greek authors, the followh'g rules
are observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line : —
1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin
a word (which can be seen from the Lexicon), and mutes followed
by p or V, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combi-
nations of consonants are divided : tlius, e-^o), t'-yu), f-ant-pa, vt-Krap,
u-Kpfj, Se-vpos, pi-Kp6v, Trpd-ypa-Tos, irpd(r-<Ta), (X-ttis, tv-hou.
2. Compound words are divided into their original parts ; but
when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in comixj-
sition, the compound is divided like a simple word : thus npoau-yia
(from Trpos and aya) ; but ira-pd-ya (from trapd and ayw).
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
§ 19. 1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a
long vowel or a diphthong ; as in rlfiri, KTeivoa.
2. A syllable is long by position when its vowel is fol-
lowed by two CO .sonants or a double consonant ; as in
oprv^.
3. When a vowel short hy nature is followed by a mute
and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e. either long or
short) ; as in tckvov, vwvo^, v^pt<;. But in Attic poetry
such a syllable is generally short ; in other poetry it is
generally long.
Note 1. A middle mute (/3, y, 8) before \, p, or v generally
lengthens a preceding vowel ; as in dyvas, iSi/SX/oi^, 86ypa.
18
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
L§20.
NoTK 2. E in *K is lonjf when a liquid follows, either in compo-
sition or in the next word ; us tKKtyu, <k vfuv (both -w -).
§ 20. T\\v. (luuiitity of most Hylhibles can be seen at once.
ThuM >; and u> and all diphthongH are long by nature ; c and o
are short by nature. (See § 2.)
When a, t, and v are not long by position, their quantity
must generally be learned by observation. But it is to be
I'cmembered that
1 . Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis is long ;
as a in yc'pd (for yepaa), UKutv (for dcKu>v), and Kav (for Ktti dv).
2. The endings a? and vq are long when v or vr has been
dropped before a- (§ 16, 6, and N. 1).
3. The accent often shows the quantity of a vowel. (See
§21, 1; §22.)
The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will be
stated below in the proper places.
ACCENT.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
§ 21. 1. There are three accents, the acute, ('), the
grave (^), and the cirrumflex ("). The acute can stand
only on one of the last three syllables of a word, tlie cir-
cumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only
on the last. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable
long by nature.
Remark. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of
Byzantium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B. c, in order to teach
foreigners the correct accent in [)ronouncing Greek. By the ancient
theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was
said to have the grave accent ; and the circumflex, originally formed
thus '\ was said to result from the union of an acute and a following
grave.
[§ 20.
conipo-
it onec.
c and o
[uantity
is to be
is long ;
KOI av) .
las been
. (See
} will be
22,]
ACCENT.
19
Note 1. The grave accent is never used except in jiluce of the
iicute in the cu.s(; nuMitiontul in § 'Jli, I, anil uccusiunully un the
indefinite pronoun m, rt (§ 81).
NoTK 2. The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second
vowel of a diphthong. (See § 4, 1, Note 1.)
2. A word is called oxytone {sharp-toned) when it has the
acute on the last syllable ; paruxt/tone, when it has the acute
on the penult ; proparoxytone^ whon it lias the acute on the
antepenult.
A word is called perispomenon when it has the circumflex
on the last syllable ; properispoinenon, when it has the circum-
flex on the penult. These terms refer to the shape of the
mark ( '^ " * ) as twisted, or circumjlexed, Trepio-Troj/Aci'os.
A word is called barytone {grave or Jlat-toned) when its last
syllable has no accent, i.e. when (on the ancient theory) it
has the grave accent.
3. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible
(§ 22), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especiall}'
the case with verbs (§ 26). (See § 25, 1, Note.)
('). the
|,n stand
the cir-
ve only
syllable
phanes of
r to te.ich
le ancient
mflex was
ly formed
following
§ 22. !• The antepenult cannot be accented if the
last syllable is long either by nature or by position.
If accented, it takes the acute ; as TreXe/cu?, dvdptDTro^.
2. The penult, if accented, takes the circumflex if it is
long by nature and if at the same time the last syllable is
short by nature; as p^rjXov, vrfaof;, ^\i^. Otherwise, if
accented, it takes the acute.
Note 1. Final at and ot are considered short in determining the
accent; as avOpamoi, pfjaoi: except in the optative mood, and in tlie
adverb oikoi, at home ; as rt/i^o-at, Trot^o-oi (not rintjaai or iroitjffoi).
Note 2. Genitives in cws and ewv from nouns in ts and vs of the third
declension (§ 53, 1, N. 2), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and uv
of the Attic second declension (§ 42, 2), and the Ionic genitive in c« of the
first (§ 39, 3), allow the acute on the antepenult ; as ivJjyewv, irdXtus,
Ti/ipeu (T^Tjs). For Cbairep, oX5c, &c., see § 28, N. 3.
20
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§23.
."! S
§ 23. !• An oxytone changes its acute to the grave
before other words in the same sentence ; as tov<; irovrj-
pov<i a\ OpcoTTOuf; (for Tov<i irovr^pov^ dvOpcoTrov^^.
Note. This change is not made hefore endilica (§ 28) nor before
an eUded syllable (§ 24, 3), nor in the intenogative rtf, rt (§ 84).
It is generally made before a connna, but not before a colon.
2. When a dissyllabic prci)osition follows its case, it throws
its accent back to the penult ; as rovriav iript, about these.
This is called anastrophe {avaaTpo<fiy, turning back).
This occurs in Attic prose only with irepl, but in the noets with
all the dissyllabic prepositions except dua, 8id, dfi<f>i, and dvri- In
Homer it occurs when a preposition follows a verb from which it is
separated by tmesis (§ 191, N. 3); as o\f<rai lino, having destroyed.
Anastroplie takes place also when a preposition stands for itself
compounded with tariv, as ndpa for mtiifa-nv
ACCENT OP CONTUACTED SYLLAULES.
§ 24. 1 . A contracted syllable is accented if either of the
original syllables had an accent. If it is a penult or ante-
penult, the accent is regular (§ 22). If it is a final syllable,
it is circumflex' k1 ; but if the original word had the acute on
the last syllablo, this is retained. JH.ff.
Tiliufifvos from ..^
but /Sf/3a)s from /3f/3u-...
(§21, 1, Rem.) that the
and ' ; no that rifidoi giv
Ttnadfiwos, (piXfire from <f>i\ffT€ , Tifiui f I'om r(/ida> ;
\ffiauii. This proceeds from the ancient principle
inf. fll« fivfllinflpY f^ninna fi*n.iTi ' niwl ' iiairoi* -fv/-*!!!
circumflex comes from ' and ' , never from
gives Ti}i£i, but jSf^awy gives /3f/3a)s
Note. If neitiicr of the original syllables had an accent, the
accent is not affected by co.\traction ; as rlfxa for rt'/xae.
Some exceptions to the lule of § 24, 1 will be noticed under the
declensions. (See § 43, Note; § Go.)
2. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that of
the second remains ; as rtiya^a for ra dyaOdy ty<38tt for cyo> oi3u,
KuTu for Kai cira ; ruAAa for ra uAXa.
3. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose
tl>"ir accent with the elided vowel ; other oxytones throw the
[§23.
§25.]
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
21
accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to
tb3 grave (§ 23, 1, Note). E.g.
'Ett' avT(a for eVl avT^, aXX' thttv lor oKKa (infu, <^r)^ (ya> for (j)rjfu
(ya>, KCLK cttt; for kokci en-i;.
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
§ 25. 1 • The place of the accent in the nominative singu-
lar must generally be learned by observation. The other cases
accent the same syllable as ♦he nominative, if the last sellable
permits (§ 22) ; otherwise, the following syllable. E.g.
OaXaffffa, ^aXdacnjs, 6aKacr(Tav, OuKavaai, doKaaaais ; Kopa^, KopoKoSt
KopaKfs, KopaKiov] irpayfutf irpdyp-aros, 7rpuy/iaTo)j/ ; oSovs, odoPTos, 6^6vtu)i/,
oSovaiv.
The kind of accent is determined as usual (§ 22); as j/^o-os,
vrjaov, v^trou, v^aoi, vrjaon. (See also § 25, 2.)
Note. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent
(§21, 3) : — {a) contracted adjectives in oos (§ 43, N. 3): (b) the neuter
singular and vocative singular of adjectives in wv, ov (except those in
<t>p(av, compounds of (ppriv), and the neuter of comparatives in (av\ as et)5cU-
liwv, €iS5aifj.ov (§ 66) ; /SeXrfwi', PiXrlou (§ 72, 2) ; but Satippuv, dattppov :
(c) many barytone compounds in tjs in all forms ; as a^rd/jKijs, aUrapKes,
gen. pi. avrdpKwv ; tpiXa'K'ridrfs, <pi\d\r)0es''y but dXrjOi^s, c,\ri6ii; — this in-
cludes vocatives like Stih-paTfj, Ari/xdadeves (§52, 2, N. 1). {d) tlie vocative
of syncopated nouns in rjp (§ 57), of compound proper names in uv, as
'Aydfjxfivov, Avrdfiedov (except AaKeSdi/xov), and of 'ATr6\\(t}v, IloffeiSQv,
ffWTij/j, saviour, and (Horn.) Sd-i^p, hroOicr-in-law, — voc. "AiroXXoi', n6<r6i-
iovy ffWTfp, dSifp.
2. The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxytones
of the first and second declensions is cdrcumflexed. In the
frst declension, o)v of the genitive plural is circumflexed
(§36, Note), except ill the feminine of barytone adjectives
and participles in os, which is spelt and accented like the
masculine and neuter. E.g.
TijjLTJSt Tififi, Ttfxaiv, Tifioiv, Tiftaii', dtov, dt^, dfoiv, 6(S)V, dtois] also
8iKa)v, 80^011/ (fiom fiiKT), 86^a)y but a^iav, Xfyofifvatv (fem. gen. plur.
of a^ios, Xeyo/ifvof, {J 62, 3).
Notk. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension
(§ 42, 2) are exceptions.
22
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS,
[§26.
3. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent the
last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers : here
o)v and otv are circumflexed. £.g.
e^r, servard, 6t}t6s, dtfri, Brfroiv, Btfrmv, drjtri.
Note 1. Ilatr, child, Tpwr, Trojan, Sat, torch, £^a>r, slave, <f)S>s,
light, ovs, ear, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive
dual and plural ; so nas, all, in both genitive and dative plural : as
irals, irai86s, iraiSi, nauri, but iraihav ; way, -iravros, navri, ndvrav, jratrt.
Note 2. The interrogative ris, tIvos, rivi, &c., always accents the
first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles; as &u, ovros, ovri,
ovTwv, o^o"t; /3as, ^dvTos.
Note 3. Some further exceptions occur in irregular nouns, and
others will be noticed under the different declensions.
\ I
ACCENT OF VERBS.
(' i
I
§ 26. Verbs throw the accent as far back as the last
syllable permits ; as l3ov\ev<o, PovXtvofiw, fiovXvova-iv ; irapi^ui,
7rdp€^€, aTToSiS'iifiij aTrdSorc.
Note 1. This applies to compound as well as simple verbs. But
the accent (in compound verbs) can never precede the augment :
thus, irapfixov (not Trdpftxoi'). So when the verb begins with a long
vowel or a diphthong not augmented ; as e^evpov (not e^fvpov).
Note 2. Participles in their inflection are accented as nouns
(§ 25, 1), not as verbs. Thus, ^ovXevcuu has in the neuter ^ovXfvov
(not /3ovXcuoi') ; (biKtatv, <bi\a>v, has d>iK(ov (not (hiKeov), (bikovv
(§ 69).
Note 3. The chief exceptions to the principle just stated (§ 26)
are these : —
(1.) The following forms accent the penult : the first aorist
active infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive, the perfect
passive infinitive and participle, and all infinitives in rat or ptv
(except those in ptvai). Thus, ^ovXtva-ai, ytvtaSai^ 'XiKvvBai, XfXw-
ptuos, iaravai, 8i86vat, XcXuKffat, 86ptv and 86p(vai (both Epic for
iovpai) .
Add the compounds of 8df, «, dts, and <rxfs ; as dn68os.
(2.) The following forms have the acute on the last syllable : the
second aorist active participle, participles in eis, ovr, vs, and <or, and
[§26.
§28.]
ENCLITICS.
2d
present participles in as from verbs in fti. Thus, Xwo)!/, \vdeis,
8180VS, 8fiKvvs, \t\vKoiSj icTTas (pres.), but Xvcras and orijo-as (aor.).
Add the imperatives tSe, ftVe, tXde, tipc, and Xu^f .
(3.) The following circnmjiex the last syllable : the second aorist
active infinitive m eiv, and the second person singular of the second
aorist middle imperative in ov, except when the latter is com-
pounded with a (lissyliahic preposition (not elided). Thus, XtTrrti',
AtTToO, irpohov, aTT-oXov, a^-ov (but Koradovy Trepidov).
Note 4. For optatives in 01 and ai see § 22, Note 1. Some other
exceptions occur, especially in irregular verbs (like ciftf and ^ri/d.) See
also § 122, N. 2.
ENCLITICS.
§ 27. An enclitic is a word which loses its own accent, and
is pronounced as if it were part of the preceding word ; as
avOpuxTToi T£ (like hominesque in Latin) . The enclitics are :
1. The personal pronouns fiov (/xcv), /xot', /uc ; aov (o^co, o-eS),
<Toi (toi)^ o-e (t€, TiV, TV, accus.) ; ou, 01, €, and (in poetry)
ar<f)i(rL (with Ionic or poetic <T<f>i, (r<^tV, o-«^€, o-^oic, (r^coiV, ar<f>€u)Vy
(Tc^eas, (r<^as, (T<f>€a, to, cC, €^€i', /aiV, wV, § 79, 1).
2. The indefinite pronoun tIs, ti, in all its forms ; also the
indefinite adverbs Trov, tfo^i, 717;, iroi, tto^cV, Trore, 7r<o, TTois.
These must be distinguished from the interr jgatives tis, irov,
TT^, &c. (§ 87).
3. The present indicative of dfii, be, and of <^);/u.i, «ay,
except the forms el and <^.
4. The particles y€, tc, toi, Trcp, vtV (not vvv) ; and the Epic
K€ (or KcV), ^j/r, and pa. Also the inseparable -8c in oSc,
Tova-Se, &c. (not §€, ii*<) ; and -^e and -xt in €i^€ and i/ai'^i
(§28, N. 3).
§ 28. The word before an enclitic retains its own accent,
and never changes a final acute to the grave (§ 23, 1).
1 . If its last syllable is accented, the accent of the enclitic
is merely dropped ; as Ti/xat re, rifiCtv re, o-o^>o9 rts, KaXSts <l>rj<nv.
24
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
[§29
2. If its last syllable is unaccented and it has not the acute
on the penult, it receives from the enclitic an acute on the
last syllable as an additional accent, while the enclitic loses
its accent ; as avOpuyrros ns, Sti$6v /tot, TraiScs rivts, ovtos ia-riv,
€t TIS.
3. If it has the acute on the penult, it receives no second
accent. A monosyllabic enclitic here drops iis accent; a
dissyllabic enclitic retains it. Thus, tovtov yc, ttoo-os tis,
dv8p€<i Tii/e's (but TraiSc's Tivcs) , ovtw ffiyaLV (but oCrds <f>r)<riv) ,
Note 1. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis
falls upon them: this occurs especially (1) when they begin a sen-
tence, (2) when the preceding syllable is elided. The personal
pronouns generally retain their accent after an accented preposition ;
here €fwv, efioi, and tfif are used (except in irpos pt). The personal
pronouns of the third person are not enclitic when they are direct
reflexives (§ 144, 2) ; <r0to-t never in Attic prose. 'Eori at the
beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies existence or possibility,
becomes eort; so after ouk, pt], el, as, /cat, dXX* (for tiXXa), and toOt*
(for Tovro).
Note 2. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes
an acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as
et Tis Ti aoi <f)r}(riv, if any one is saying anything to you.
Note 3. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound
word, the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate
word. Thus, olrivos, t^Tiw, Stprivav, fotritfp, uxTTf, otfie, rovabt, «it<,
otJTf, pf]Tej are only apparent exceptions to § 22.
puoulitics.
tjj
i
§ 29. A proclitic is a word which has no accent, and is
pronounced as if it were part of the following word. The
proclitics are the articles 6, yj, oi, ai, and the particles «', ws,
OV (^OVK, OVx), CIS («)? ^K (c^)? ^V (civ).
Note 1. Oi« takes the acute at the end of a sentence; as nas yap
ov'i for why not ? 'Qs and soraetinies «V and ts take the acute when
(in poetry) they follow their noun ; as jcaitwi/ e^, from evils ; Btos «5f ,
as a God. 'Qs is accented also when it means thus ; as iis elnev, thus
he spoke. This use of &s is chiefly poetic; but rat &p. ecen thus, and
ov$' m OJ* p^^* wy, not even thus, sometimes occur in Attic pros§,
§31.]
DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS.
25
Note 2. When 6 is used for the relative os (§ 140), it is accented
(as in Oil. ii. 262) ; and many editors accent all articles when they
are demonstrative, as in //. i. 9, 6 yap ^aaiKfji j^oKadfis.
DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS.
§ 30. 1. The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of tf
where the Attic has d ; and the Doric b}^ the use of a where
tlie Attic has rj. Thus, Ionic ytve-j for ytved, i^a-o/iaL for ida-ofiai
(from Idofiai, § 109, 1) ; Doric Ti/ido-o) for Tifirj(TiD (from Ti/naw) .
But an Attic d caused by contraction (as in Tifid from rt/uiae) ,
or an Attic rj lengthened from e (as in ^lAjyo-w from <fnXc<o) ,
§ 109, 1), is never thus changed.
2. The Ionic often has «, ov, for Attic c, o ; and rfi for
Attic « in nouns and adjectives in ctos, €lov; as ^«i/os for
^eVos, fiovvo^ for fiovos ; ^acrtA.7;ios for )8a(riA,«os.
3. The Ionic does not avoid successive vowek, like the
Attic; and it therefore very often omits contraction (§9).
It contracts «o and tov into cu (especially in Herodotus) ; as
7roi€Vfi€v, iroiaJ<Ti (from 7rot€o/i,ej', Troieoutn) , for Attic ttoiov/aci/,
TToiova-i. Herodotus does not usg v movable (§ 13, 1). See
also § 17, 1, Note.
PUNCTUATION MARKS.
(US,
yap
hen
§ 31. The Greek uses the comma ( , ) and the period ( . )
like the English. It has also a colon, a point above the
line ( • ) , which is equivalent to the English colon and semi-
colon. Its mark of interrogation ( ; ) is the same as the
English semicolon. The mark of exclamation (!) is some-
times used in modern editions of Greek authors.
.i;v
PART II.
INFLECTION.
§ 32. 1. Inflection is a change in the form of a
word, made to express its relation to other words. It
inchides the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns,
and the conjugation of verbs.
2. Every inflected word has a fundamental part, which
is called the stem. To this are appended various letters
or syllables, called endings^ to form cases, tenses, persons,
numbers, &c.
Note. Most words contain a still more primitive element than
the stem, which is called the roof. Thus, the stem of the verb n/xao),
honor, and that of the noun rtfiij, is rt/ia-, that of n'o-tr, payment.,
recompcmte , Is Tttrt-, that of Tt/i*tos, held in honor., is riyno-, that of
TifirjfjM (TifjiTjfmTos), raluntinn, is rt/nfj/iiaT- ; but all these stems are
developed from one root, rt-, which is seen pure in the verb Tia>,
honor. In tiw, therefore, the stem of the verb and the root are the
same.
I The stem itself may be modified and assume various forms in
different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same ver^'J stem may
in different tenses appear as Xiir-, Xctn-, and Xotn--; and the same
nominal stem may appear as rifia- and rifii]-.
§ 33. 1. There are three numbers ; the singular, the
dual, and the plural. The singular denotes one object,
the plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used
to denote two objects, but even here the plural is movp,
common.
§33.]
INFLECTION.
27
4
2. There are three genders; the masculine, the fem-
inine, and the neuter.
Note 1. The f/rammatical gender in Greek is very often different
from the natural gender. Especially many names of things are
masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine, femi-
nine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take the
form adapted to either of these g'aders. The gender is often indi-
cated by prefixing the article ; hs (6) dv^p, man ; (Jf) yvvfi, looman ;
(to) npayfia, thing. (See § 78.)
Note 2. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are
said to be of the common gender: as (6, 17) ^for, God or Goddess.
Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one
grammatical gender, are called epicene (cVikoivos) ; as 6 deros, the
eagle ; fj d\<i>nrj^, the fox.
Note 3. The gender must often be learned by observation. But
names of males are generally masculine, and names of females fem-
inine. Most names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine; and
most names of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine. Most
nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine; as fj dptrr], virtue,
eKiris, hope. Diminutive nouns are neuter; as naidiov, child. Other
rules are given under the declensions (§§ 35, 40, 58) and in § 129.
3. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive, dative,
accusative, and vocative.
The nominative and vocative plural are always alike.
In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are
alike in all numbers ; and in the plural these cases end
in a. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are
always alike ; and the genitiv e and dative dual are always
alike.
Note 1. The cases have in general the same meaning as the cor-
responding cases in Latin; as Norn, a man (as subjectj, Gen. of a
man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a mar (as object), Voc. man.
The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the
Greek genitive and dative. (See Remark before § l.':7.)
Note 2. All the cases except the nominative and vocative are
called obliqu£ cases.
28
INFLECTION.
LS34.
NOUNS.
§ 34. There are three declensions of nouns, in which
also all adjectives and participles are included.
Thusc correspond in general to the first three declensions
in Latin. (See § 45, 2, Note). The first is sometimes called
the A declension, and the second the declension; these two
together are sometimes called th^ Voi^el declension^ as opposed
to the third or Consonant declension (§ 4.5, 1). The principles
which are commoii to adjectives, participles, and g"! jtantives
are given under the three declensions of nouns.
Note. The name noun (6voiia), according to ancient usage, includes
both substantives and adjectives. But by niot'.ern custom noun is often
used as synonymous with substr.iitiv^e, and it is so used in tho present
work.
\i . I
FIRST DECLENSION.
Ir!
§ 35. Stems of the first declension end originally in a,
which is often modified into r) in the singular. The nom-
inative singular of feminines ends in a or ?; ; that of mas-
culines ends in a? or i;?.
§ 36. The following table shows the terminations in all the
cases of this declension. These consist of the final a (or 17) of
the stem united with the case-endings (§32,2). See § 4i;, 2, N.
Sthgular.
Dual.
Plural.
Fi'inhiine.
AfascuHne.
Ma:,c. and Fern.
Masc. and Fern.
N.
a 1,
as T)s
N. ai
Ct.
as or t|s TjS
ou {for ac)
N. A. V. d
G. wv (for d«v)
P.
^ orH Tl
t ^
G. D. atv
D. ais
A.
OV t)V
dv T|V
A. ds
V.
a ij
tt aori)
V. «<.
IS 34.
§37.]
FIRST DECLENSION.
29
N<jTE, Here, a;j in most cases, the relation of the stem to the termina-
tions must b(j oxp ained by rofcrcnce to the earlier forms of th«f lungunge.
Tims, dv of the genitive plural (§ 25, 2) is contracted from the Homeric
Awv (§ 39); and ov of the genitive singular comes IVom the Homeric ao
(through a ibrm eo) by contraction. The stem in a may thus be seen in
all the cases of ohla and Ta/i/as, and (with the change of a to ■»; in the
singular) also in all the other paradigms. (See § 45, 2, Note.) The forms
in a and 17 have no case-endings.
§ 37. 1- The nouns (?/) rt/i?/, honor^ (^7) oUia^ house,
(//) x^P^^ land, (r/) Moitaa, Muse, (6) TroXiTrj^i, citizen,
(6) Ta/ita<?, steward, are thus declijied : —
Singular.
N.
Tl|i^
oIkCA
X«&pa
Movo-a
iroXfrtjs
rafiCas
G.
TlHf|«
oUCas
X<&pas
MOVTTIS
itoXCtov
ra\kiov
D.
Tl|ixi
oU^qi
X«ip«f
Movtr^
iroXCrg
Ta|i(f
A.
Tl|l^V
olKfav
X«ipav
Moiio-av
iroXfrtiv
Ta|fc(av
V.
TllftVj
oUCa
X«ipa
Dual.
Mov<ra
iroXira
ra|i(d
N. A. V.
ri|id
oli:fa
X«ipa
Movcra
iroXfro
rai&Ca
G. D.
Tifjiaiv
oUCaiv
Xt&paiv
Plural
Movo-aiv
iroXCraiv
ra^iaxv
N.
TifiaC
olKCai
X»pai
Movo-ai
iroXirai
Ta|Ji(ai
G.
Tl|&WV
oIkiwv
XfJipUV
Movo-wv
iroXiTwv
Ta)iiwv
D.
Tifiais
oUCais
X«^pcus
MotSo-ais
iroXCrais
Ta|i(ais
A.
Tlfids
oUCas
X«ipa$
Movo-as
iroXCras
ra|i£as
V.
Ti|ia(
oIkCoi
:-"• -^
MoOo-ai
iroXinai
Ta|Ji£ab
The following show varieties of qiHintity and accent : —
Od\aa-(ru, sea, BaXdcra-qq, Oakda-a-r}, ddXaa-aav ; PI. ddXaa-crat, &C.
yftfiVfjoi, bridge, y€<fivpa<;, yetftvpa, yi<fivpav ; PI. yi^vpai, &C.
fTKia, shadow, o-klq.^, (tkiR, a-Kidv ; PI. crKiai, (tkiCjv, o-Kiais, &C
yvo) fir), opinion, yv(ofir]<i, yvta/xtj, yvu>fJir)v ; PI. yvCifiat, yvo)fx5>v, &C.
TTfipa, attempt, ireipa?, Trupq., inlpav ; PI. Trcipai, Trciputv, &C.
2. Nouns ending in a preceded by e, t, or p, and a few
proper names, retain a throughout the singular, and are
II
80
INFLECTION.
[§88.
declined like oUia or x^P^ (those with a like ye^vpa or
trelpa). Other nouns in a are declined like Movaa.
NoTK 1. The nouns in tjs which have a in the vocative singuhir
(like TToXiTijr) are chiefly those in njs, national apiHjllutives (like
TJf p<rTjs, a Persian, voc. Ilcpo-a), and compounds (like yfwfxfrprjs,
it yeometer, voc. yew/icrpa). Afo-TTorijr, master, has voc. dfOTToru.
Mo.st other nouns in rjs have the vocative in i;; as Kpopibrjt, son uj'
Kronus, Kpovidt}
Note 2. The termination a of the nominative singular is always
short when the genitive has i;s. It is generally long when the gen-
itive has as; the exceptions, which can always be seen bv the accent
(§ 22), are chiefly (a) most nouns ending in pa preceded by a diph-
thong or by V (as polpa, y(<f)vpa), (h) most abstract nouns formed
from the stems of adjectives in ijp or oos (as dXij^eta, tvuoia), (t)
most compounds in eia (as /icao-yrta) , ((/) common nouns in eta and
rpia designating females (as /Sao-tXf ta, queen, ^uKrpia, female harper"^:
hut ^a^da, kingdom (with d).
Note 3. Ai* of the accusative singular and a of the vocative sin-
gular agree in quantity with a of the nominative. The quantity
of all other vowels may be seen from the table in § 30.
Note 4. The nouns in a always have recessive accent (§ 21, 3).
Contract Nouns of the First Declension.
§ 38. Most nouns in aa, ea, and ea?, are contracted
(§9). Mvda, fiva, mina^ a-vKca, a-vKrj^ Jig-tree^ and *Epfie-
a<i, 'Epfirjif, Hermes (^Mercury)^ are thus declined : -~
1
' — r
( — 1 .» ^
^ — ^^,
Singular.
1!
N.
{nvAa) |iva
(avKia) <n>Kf|
('E/3/ieaj)
'Ep|i{)s
G.
(/uciia;) |ivas
((Tv/ceas) <rvKfj$
('Ep/ieou)
'Ep|MV
D.
{Hvdq) |iv$
{avKetf) trvK^
('EpM^9)
•EpKiTJ
A.
{liviav) |ivav
{(JVKkav) oia<Kfjv
('Ep/xeai')
'Epnf|v
V.
{p»6a) |iiva
(o-vfcea) (TUKf)
Ihial.
CEpMeo)
•Ep|*fi
N.
A. V.
{nv6.a) |iva
((TUKea) (TVKa
('Ep/ixea)
'Epffca
G.
D.
(jiviaiv) (ivaiv
{avKkaw) trvKoXy
('Ep/ucatv) 'Epfiaiv
I.
«41.]
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
SECOND DECLENSION.
31
(fivdm) |ival
{fivauv) |ivwv
(fxvdais) (ivais
(jivdai) |Jivas
(fivdai) (fcvai
Phinil.
(avKiai) cruKat
(avK(aii) OMKoXi
(avKfai) o-VKOS
('Ep/icaO 'Eppat
('K/jjucuic) 'Ep(iwv
('E/3/x(a(s) 'Epiiais
('E/>M^as) 'Ep|ias
( 'E/>/ita() 'Eppiat
NoTK 1. Bop/ar, North wind, which appears uncontracted in Attic,
has also a contracted form Boppas, (with irregular p^), gen. (of Doric
form, § 39, 3) Boppu, dat. bopp^, ace. Ooppau, voc. Buppa.
Note 2. J'or ca contracted to d in the dual and the accusative jdural,
see § 9, 8, Note. For contract adjectives of this class, see § 65.
Dialects.
§ 39. 1. Ionic j;, r)s, rj, T)u, in the singular, for d, as, 9, dv. Doric
d, as, 9, av, for 1;, &c. in the same cases. (See § 30.) The Ionic
generally uses the uncontracted forms of contract nouns.
2. Nom. Siny. Horn, sometimes a for rjs; as lirnoTa for fn-TroVi;?,
horseman. (Compare Latin poeta = iroiTjrfjs-)
3. Gen. Siny. For ov, Ilom. ao, eo), sometimes o; as 'Arpet'Sao,
'Arpet'dco), /Sopeo) : Ildt. (a>, rarely ea> for ifto (sometimes coo in old
Attic proper names) : Doric d (rarely in Attic nouns in as).
4. Gen. Plur. Horn. d(ou, eau (whence, by contraction, Attic av,
J)oric av) ; as vavrduv, vavTiwv (Att. vavroiv) : Hdt. iav.
5. Dat. Plur. Poetic ato-t, Hom. r/ai, ^s] Hdt. jjs', as rt/natat,
MoixTj/fn or Moucn/r (for Movcats). .
SECOND DECLENSION.
§ 40. The nominative singular of most nouns of the
second declension ends in 09 or ov (gen. ov). Those in
09 are masculine, rarely feminine ; those in ov are neuter.
NoTK. The stem of nouns of this declension ends in o, which is
sometimes lengthened to a. It becomes e in the vocative singular ;
and a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of neuters.
§ 41. The following table shows tlie terminations of nouns
in OS and ov in this declension, that is, the final o of the stem
(with its modifications) united with the case-endings : —
"i
>. *:
8S
INFLECTION.
[§42.
Singula 11.
Dual.
Plukal.
Afusc.
it' Fein. Neuter.
Afasc, Fern., «fr Neuter.
Masc. it; Fem. Neut
N.
ot ov
N. ot, &
G.
ov (for 00)
N. A. V. w (foi o)
G. Mv (fur owv)
D.
(p I'ur Oi)
U. D. oiv
1). Oil
A,
W
A. ov« (for ovt) &
V.
t OV
V. 01 a
Note. Looking at the original forms of these terminations (§ 36, Note),
we see the stem in o in all the cases except in the vocative singular in e and
the neuter plural in a. (See § 45, 2, Note.)
§ 42. 1. The nouns (o) \0709, word^ (Jf) vrjaoti, island^
(o, r;) avdptoTTO'i, man or human being^ (Jf) 6h6<i, road,
(^To) hCipov, gifl^ are thus declined : —
«
Singular,
t
N.
\6yn
v1)o-of
&v9p«nrof
&8^
8wpov
G,
X^YOv
v^cow
&v9p<frirov
&80C
SttpOV
D.
X<w
V^O*!))
dv6p(&iry
&8<p
8wp<p
A.
X^^ov
W^o-ov
ftvOpwirov
hh6v
8Mpov
V.
\6^t
viJoTf
Av6pA»ir«
Dual.
bU
8«apov
N. A. V.
\6yc»
V^O-tt
dvOptfriTM
&81&
8««pw
G. D.
X«$Yoiv
V^O'OIV
dv9p<«»iroiv
Plural.
&8otv
8(iSpoiv
N.
\6yoi
vf)o-oi
dvOpcoiroi
&80C
8<3pa
G.
Mymv
vVjo-wv
dvOpwifttv
&8aiv
Swpwv
D.
\6y019
vyjo-ois
dvOpwirois
&8ots
8wpoi$
A.
X<Syov$
v^(rovs
dvOpMirovs
680VS
Sttpa
V.
X0701
v{)o-oi
dvOpMiroi
680C
Supa
i 1
Thus dechne i/o/xo?, /om;, KtVSvro?, danger, TroraiJLo'i, river,
/8iG<f, /i/tf , ^amros, cfea^A , crvKov, jig., IfiaTiov, outer garment.
I
§43.J
SECOND DECLENSION.
88
Note. The nominative in ot is sometimes used for the vocative
in «; as i 0»Xot (§ 157, Note). e«of, 6'o</, has always etos as
vocative. *Afi«X0of, hrothcr^ has voc. {idt\(f>f.
2. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this de-
clension end in w? (gen. a>), and a few neuters in <av
(gen. ft)). This is often called the Attic dedemion. The
nouns (6) vem, temple^ and (to) dvcoyeayv, hall, are thus
declined : —
N.
0.
D.
A.
V.
N. A. V.
0.
D.
Singular.
V«tt»f
V«4&
vc<p
v«&v
iivdyvav
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. A. V.
G. D.
V<M
&va»Y«pv
Plural.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
N. A. V.
G.
D.
v«p
v<«St
VC4^
i,v«fry«tt
The accent of these nouns is irregular (N. 2). (See § 22, N. 2;
and § 25, 2, Note. See also § 53, 1, N. 2.)
Note 1. Some masculines and feminines of this class may drop
1/ of the accusative singular; as Xuyur, accua. \ay<av or Xayo>. So
'Adats, TAi/^Atfo)!/ or*A^o); Km, t^v KStv or K<a; and Kt'us, Tews, Mivas-
"Eus, dawn, has regularly ri7i/''E».
Note 2. Most nouns in ews which follow the Attic declension have
older forms in ios or tjos (with reversed quantity); as Horn. \i,os, people,
Att. Xciij ; Dor. pd6i, Ion. i'7j6j, Att. vedis ; Horn. McvAdoj, Att. MevAews.
In words like Mei/Acwj, the oiiginal accent is retained. (See § 53, 3, N. 1 ;
§ 54, Note.)
nver^
Contract Nouus of the Second Declension.
§ 43. Many nouns in eo9, oo<;, eov, and oov are con-
tracted. JVo'09, i;o£)<?, mind, and ocrreov, 6<tjovv, hone, aro
thus decliv (' : —
8
!»-
^ii
84
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Singular.
(v6ov)
{v6(p)
{voop)
(vie)
vovs
vov
vovv
vov
INFLECTION.
[§44.
Dual.
Plural.
N.
{v6oi) voi
N.A.V. (viw) v»
G.
(v6u}v) vuv
G. D. (p6oiv) voiv
D.
{v6ois) vois
A.
(vdovs) voOs
V.
{v6oi) vo£
N.A.V. {dffriw) 6«rT«4
N.V.A
(dar^a) io-ra
G. D. (offT^oiv) ivroiv
G.
(darHwv) 6irr(av
D.
(dffT^Ols) ioTOis
i'l
N.A.V. (d<TT^ov) 6<rTovv
G. (offT^ov) doTOv
For the forms in tos and oov, which are generally adjectives, see
§65.
Note. The accent of these contract forms is irregular in seve-
ral points : —
1. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual contra^^t ca> and
o» into CO (not <5). See § 24, 1.
2. Adjectives in eos circumflex the last syllable of all contract
forms; as xpvfrcoi., xpvaovs (not vpvaovs, § 24, 1), golden. So Kavtov,
Kavovp, basket. Except a> in the aual, just mentioned.
3. The contracted forms of compounds in oos follow the accent of
the conlrac*ed nominative singular; as duTiiruooi, avrinvovs, blowing
ag::in,st, gen. avrintfoov, dvriTrvov (not dvrinvov), &c.
For ea contracted to a in the neuter plural, see § 9, 3, Note.
Dialects.
§ 44. 1. Oen. Sing. Epic oio (for q/o), Doric o> (for oo)', as
Gfoio, fifya\a>. Attic ov is contracted from oo.
2. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Epic ouv for oiv\, as lirvoiiv.
3. Dat. Plur. Ionic and pcptic ouri for oiy ; as tmroKri.
4. A re. Plur. Doric wy or or for ovs ; as vofian, tois "Kvkos.
5. The Ionic generally omits contraction.
THIRD DECLENSION.
§ 45. 1. This declension includes all nouns not be-
longing to either the first or the second. Its genitive
singular ends in c? (sometimes w?).
[§44.
§45.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
85
Note. This is often called the ConsonarU Declension (§ 34), because the
stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems, however, end in a
close vowel (t or u), some in a diphthong, and a few in o. The last two are
supposed to have ended originally in a consonant (f or <r). See § 53, 3 ;
§ 54 ; § 55.
2. The stem of a noun of the tiiird declension cannot
always be determined by the nominative singular ; but it is
generally found b}- dropping os (or ws) of the genitive.
The cases are formed b}- adding to the stem the following
endings (which here arc not united with any letter of the
stem) : —
lot be-
jnitive
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
Masc. <fc Fem.
Ncut.
Masc, Fem., Ncut.
Masc.
<fc Fem.
Nci
N. t
None.
N.
cs
&
G. o». -js
N. A. V. c
0.
fi)V
D. X
G. D. oiv
D.
trt
A. &0T V
None.
A.
as
d
V. None, or like N.
None.
V.
cs
d
Note. The following comparison shows the relations of the
case-endings in the three declensions : —
Sing. — Nom. 1st decl. masc. r; 2nd masc. and fem. s, neut. v
(Lalj. s, wj); 3rd masc. and fem. s (Lat. s).
Gen. 1st masc. o, fem. r; 2nd o or to, making ov or oto with o of
the stem. (cf. Lat. i)\ 3vd os (Lat. is).
Dat. All decl. t; 1st and 2nd i in q, rj, o> (Lat. t, ai, ae, o).
Accus. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd l for fi (Lat. m) ; 3rd v
(T^at. m), or a for av or afi (Lat. em), cf. ripm-v with Lat. turri-m,
o-86vr-a(y) with Lat. dent-em.
Dual. N. A, V. 1st and 2nd a and o of stem lengthened to a and
<u; 3rd e.
G. D. 1st and 2nd ti/; 3rd otv.
Plur. — Nom. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd t; making at and ot
with a and o of the stem (cf. Lat. i)\ 3rd es (Latin es; neut. 3rd
a (Lat. a).
Gen. 0)1/; in 1st and 2nd contracted with a or o of the stem to at
(cf. Lat. WW, om).
Dat. 1st and 2nd tf (older to-t) ; 3rd an.
Accm. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd r (for vy), df and ovi coming
from avs and oi/p (Lat. as, os) ; 3rd ay (for avi) retaining a (Lat. es) :
neut. 3rd a (Lat. a).
The vocative is either like the nominative or without a case-
ending.
INFLECTION.
[§46.
FORMATION OF CASES.
I,. -
(I
M
Nominative Singular.
§ 46. The forms of the nominative singular of this de-
clension are numerons. and must be learned partly by
practice. The following are the general principles on which
the nominative is formed from the stem.
1. In neuters, the nominative singular is generally tlie
same as the stem. Stems ending in t (including vt) regu-
larly drop the r (§ 7). B.ff.
2Q)/ia, body, (rafiaT-os'i neXav (neuter of /bi/Xdr), black, /ifXavos',
\v(rau (neuter of Xixras), haoing loosed, \\xravT-oi', irav, all, iravr-os',
Tidiu, placintj, tiB(vt-os ; xapUv, graceful, \apUvT-os ; 8i86u, f/iving, di-
dovTos'i \iyop, saying, Xeyovr-oi', 8eiKin')u (v), showing, 8€Ikuvvt-os. For
the masculine nominatives of these adjectives and participles, see
below, § 46, 2, 3, and Note 1.
Some neuter stems in ar change r to s in the nominative, and
a few to p; as ripas, prodigy, repaT'os; rjnap, liver, rjiraT-os-
2. Masculine and feminine stems (except those included
under 3 and 4) form the nominative singular by adding s and
making the needfui euphonic changes (§ 16). £.g,
*vXa|, guard, (]>v\aK-os', yv^, vulture, yvir-os; </)X€\|f, vein, <^X(/3-or
(§ 16, 2); iXnis (for A7ri8s), /«"/>«, f\m8-os (§ 16, 2); xap^s, grace,
\dpiT-os', opvts< bird, opvi$-os; vv^, night, i>vKT-6i\ fida-Ti^, scourge,
pda-Tiy-os', (rdXniy^i trumpet, ad\Tnyy-os. So Aidr, AJax, Atai/r-os
(§ 16, 6, N. 1); \v(ras, Xvaavr-os '^ nds, iravr-os', rideis, Ti6eirr-os', \api-
eis, vapievT-os', dtiKviis (v), dfiKvvi/r-os. (The neuters of the last five
words, Xvtrav, nav, rtdev, xaplfv, and 8eiKvvv, are given under § 46, 1.)
3. Masculine and feminine stems in v and p lengthen the
last vowel, if it is short, but are otherwise unchanged in the
nominative. HJ.g.
Aibiv, age, aiau-os', 8aip,a)u, divinity, 8aipop-os', Xipfjv, harbor, Xipiv-
os; Btjp, beast, $r)p-6s', drip, air, dip-os.
Exceptions are pcXdr, black, peXap-ut', rdXas, wretched, rdXav-os',
els, one, tv-os; KTfis, comb, Krtv-os', pis, nose, pip-os', which add s-
4. Masculine stems in ovt generally drop r, and form the
nominative like stems in i/ (§ 46, 3). E.g.
\f (OP, lion, XeoPT-os] Xiy<av, speaking, XiyopT-os\ &p, being, opr-oS'
§47.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
87
Note 1. Masculine participles from verbs in o>/i( change ovt to
ovi (§ 46, 2); as StSovr, (I'uHng, Movt-os (§ 10, 0, N. 1). So a few
nouns in ous; as ohovs, tooth, obovr-os. Neuters in ovt- are regular
(§ 46, 1). In TTovff, noh-os, foot, -o8i becomes -ovs.
Note 2. The perfect active participle (§ 68), with a stem in or,
forms its nominative in tos (masc.) and os (neut.) ; as XeXvKoif, hav-
ing loosed, XtXvKos, gen. XfXvKor-os.
Note 3. For nominatives in r)s (es) and os, gen. eoi, see § 52, 1, Note.
A few other peculiar formations in contract nouns will be noticed below,
§§ 53-56.
and
Accusative Singular.
§ 47. 1 • Most masculines and feminines with stems ending
in a consonant form the accusative singular by adding a to
the stem ; as (fivka^ (0uAaK-), <^i'AaKa ; AeW (Acovt-), lion^ Ac-
OVTU.
2. Nouns in 19, o^, aus, and ovs, if the stem ends in a vowel
or diphthong, change s of the nominative to i/ ; as tto'Ais, state,
TToAii' ; Ix^v's, fish, l)(6vv ; vav^, ship, vavv ', /3ovq, ox, ^ovv.
But if the stem ends in a consonant, barytones of these
classes have v in prose (rarel}'^ a) and 1/ or a in poetry, while
others have only the form in a ; as Ipi?, strife, cpiv (poet, also
IpiSa) ; 6pvi<i, bird, opviv (poet. 6pvi6a) ; cucAtti?, hopeful, evfXinv
(cvc'ATTtSa) ; while cAtti?, hope, has only iXmSa; ttov's (ttoS-),
foot, n-oSa ; iraiq (iraiS-), child, TraiSa.
Note 1 . ^AnoWav and noaeiSmv (lloo-ftddcof) contract the accusa-
tive into 'AttoXXo) and Iloafida, after dropping v.
For a similar contraction of ova into w, and of ovts and ovas into
ovf, see the declension of comparatives, § 72, 2.
Note 2. For accusatives in ea (tor eaa, eFa) from nouns in t/j and eus,
see § 52, 1 , Note, and § 53, 3, N. 1 ; and for those in w (for oa or wo) from
nouns in w or ws, see § 55.
OVT-OS-
r
88
INFLECTION.
[§48.
V I
: I
5'
Vocative Singular.
§ 48. 1. The vocative singular of masculines and femi-
nines is generally the same as the nominative.
2. But in the following cases, it is the same as the stem : —
(a) In barytones with stems ending in a liquid ; as Baifxwv
(Sai/xov-) , divinity, voc. 8aifiov ; pi^tap (prjTop-) , speaker, voc.
prjTop ; a(a(f}p(Dv ((To)(f>pov') , continent, voc. a-wffipov.
But if the last syllable is accented, the vocative is the same
as the nominative ; as X. ifir]v (Xifitv-) , harbor, voc. Xip-^v ; uWyp
(ai^cp-),, sky, voc. ai07]p.
(b) In barytone nouns and adjectives whose stems end in
vT, final T of the stem being dropped (§ 7) ; as yiya9 (yiyavr-),
giant, \OC. yiyav; AtW {Xeovr), lion, \0C. Aeoi/ ; )(apUiq {^a-
puvT-), graceful, voc. x'^P^^^'
But all participles of the third declension have the A'ocative
and nominative alike. (Compare kvviv, lov»iiiy, voc. \vm;
with XcW, lion, voc. \iov.)
(c) In nouns and adjectives in is (except those in Is Ivo^),
€vs, vs, and avs. These drop s of the nominative to form the
vocative; as rv/jams (rvpawih-), tyranny, voc. rvpawi (§ 7) ;
TToAis (TToAt-) , state, voc. ttoXi ; i\Ovi, l\Ov ; /iaaiXevs, fiatriXtv
(§ 53, 3, N. 1) ; y/oavs, ypaC (§ 54, Note) ; iraU (for Trais),
TTOL (for Trai). So in /3ovs, )8oi) (§ 54), and sometimes in
OiSiTTous, OlSiirov, Oedipus.
(d) In nouns and adjectives in t/s, gen. to; (ois). These
form the vocative in cs (§ 52) ; as SwK/jaTT^s, voc. StoK/aarcs
(v. Note) ; rpn^pr)^, voc. rpi^pcs ; dXry^iys, VOC. dAiy^e's.
Note. For the recessive accent of many vocatives, as 'Aydfie/ivov, Ztiffpo-
Tfi, "AvoWov, KaK68aifJLov, see § 25, 1, Note.
3. Nouns in w, gen. ous (§ 55), form the vocative in oi. So
a few in civ, gen. oOs (§ 55, N. 2) ; as arjStav, voc. diySoi.
[§48.
/ WvJ.^v
/ff^iv
r ■
§60.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
89
Dative Plural.
§ 49. The dative plural is formed bj^ adding a-i to tiie
stem. E.g.
*vXa^ {(f)v\aK-), (f>v\a^i ', pfj Totp (prjrop-), pfjTopai ; e\ms (f\nt8-),
f\iTi(Ti] iroiis (ttoS-), iroai ; Xewu (Xfo>T-), Xeovat ; ^iii^<av {8aipov-),
dalpoai ; ridfis {ridevr-), Tt6uai : ^apieis ixaptevr-), xapUai ; (ordr
(la-raw-), i<rraai ; bfiKvvi (bdKvvvr- ), deiKpinri ; ^amXfvs OaatXfv-),
(iaaiXfiKTi', liovs (/3ov-), ^oval; ypavs (ypav), ypavai (§ 54). For the
euphonic changes, see § 16, 2 and 0, with notes.
For a change in syncopated nouns, see § 57.
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
§ 50. The following are examples of the most com-
mon forms of nouns of the third declension with mute or
liquid stems.
For the formation of the cases of these nouns, see §§ 46 —
49. For euphonic changes in nearly all, see § 16, 2 and § 46.
For special changes in Xewv and ylyas, see § 16, 6, N. 1.
I. Masculines and Feminines.
6 ((S>vXaK-) Tj (^Xc^-) TJ (troXiriYY-) 6 (Xcovt-)
watchman.
vein.
Singular.
truvipet.
lion.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
<i>t»XaS
<|>vXaKos
<^vXaKi
<^vXaKa
<|»vXa$
4.x^
<|>Xcpds
<i>Xcp£
<|»X^^
Dual.
ordXiriY$
crdXiriYYOS
o-dXiriYyi
cdXiriyya
cdXiriYt
X^VTOS
X^OVTi
X^ovra
X^v
N. A. V.
G. D.
^vXaKc
^vXdKOiv
<t>XcPotv
Plural.
<rdXiriYy<
traKirCyyow
XIOVTC
XcdvToiv
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
<|>vXaKcs
^vXdKttv
^vXa(t
^vXaKas
4»x<pttv
♦X«|,i
(rdXtri'YYCS
(ToXirCYYMV
(rdXiri'Y^i
(rdXiriYyas
X^OVTCS
XcdvTMV
X^OVCTi
Xiovras
T
i, 40
INFLECTION.
[§ 50.
1
i (-yi-yovT-)
giant.
^ (Xa|iira8-)
torch.
Singular
i\ (filirl8-)
hope.
b ^ (ipvie-)
bird.
N.
0.
D.
A.
V.
yCyat
yCYivTOi
ylYivri.
ylyavra
ylyav
Xa|iird3 .
XofiirdSos
Xa|iird8i
XapirdSa
Xaiitrds
Dual.
IXirCs
4Xir(8oS
4Xir(8i
<XirC8a
iXirC
5pvi«
JpvtOos
0pvi6i
dpviv (6pvi9a)
6pvi
N. A. V.
G. D.
yCyavr*
YiYdvToiv
Xa|iird8c
Xa|iird8oiv
Plural.
<Xirt8<
iXirCSoiv
tfpviOc
dpvtOoiv
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
Yf-yavrcs
^fydvTMV
ylyao'^
YC^avras
Xa|fcird8cs
XafiirdSttV
Xaiiirdirt
Xa|fcird8as
JXirCScs
IXiriSuv
<Xir£<ri
4Xir£8as
tpvtOcs
6pvl0t»v
6pvuri
((pviOas
h II
N.
O.
D.
A.
V.
N. A. V.
G. D.
»r. V.
o.
D.
A.
h (iroificv-)
shepherd.
iroip.'fiv
irotpivi
iroifUva
iroi|ii^v
iroi)Uyoiv
iroi\Uvt9
iroipivMV
iroipi<ri
iroi|Uvaf
6 (al»v-)
age.
Singular.
aU&v
aUavos
alwva
ali&v
Dual.
alwvc
alwvoiv
Plural.
alwvcs
aU&vttv
aUa<ri
alttvas
leader.
1\yHL&v
r\yt\i.6vo9
i\yt\k6vi.
VJYCiiovc
^YC|fcdvoiv
i\yt\Lov»v
b (8ai|iov-)
divinity.
8a(|U)v
8af|M>vos
8a£)iovi
8aC|iova
Salfiov
8al)M>vc
8ai|u>'voiv
8a(|u>v(s
Sai|ioVwv
8aC|M<ri
8af|iovas
§50.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
41
i(^7iTop.) i(eT|T.) 6(ix.) &(ei|p-)
orator. hired man. salt. beast.
tiose.
N.
O.
D.
A.
V.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
i^^Topi
^^Topa
^{JTop
^'^Topc
(&T|T6pOlV
j&'^TOpCS
^1)T(jpMV
l^'/JTOpO'l
i&'^Topas
wtJTOS
Otjrf
Of^ra
ef|Te
Otp-oiv
Singular.
&Xs
aXds
oXC
ftXa
ftXs
Dual.
&Xc
aXoiv
Plural.
9f|Tes &Xcs
8t)T«v aXwv
6iier£ aX(r£
O^ras &Xas
Mip
Otipos
eript
Ofipa
e^p
Ofipc
6i)potv
6fip€S
6i)pwv
9T|p<rC
9f)pas
^ivotv
TO (<rA»)iaT-)
body.
II. Neuters.
t6 (ir^ar-)
end.
'r6 (^irar-)
liver.
N. A. V.
G.
D.
<rii>|ia
CtifUliTOS
crcG|iaTi
Simular.
iripas
■r^aros
"Tjirop
iiiraTos
<|iraTt
N. A. V.
G. D.
trMparc
a-w|fcdroiv
Dual.
iripaTt
ircpdroiv
4jiraTe
I^OTOIV
N. A. V.
G.
D.
<ru|u&'ra
(ra»p,diuv
crt&iiao't
Plural.
ir^ara
ircpdrcov
ir^oo-i
ijiraTci
iyir&rav
O
c
42
INFLECTION.
[§61.
STiiMS ENDING IN 2, OR IN A VOWEL OR DirilTIIONG.
§ 51. 1. Most nouns of the third declension in which
a vowel of the stem directly precedes a vowel in the
case-ending are contracted in some of their cases.
2. The contracted nominative and accusative plural
have the same form, t See ?iuw ver, § 53, 3, N. 3.)
Note. The collision oF vowei iwoviils in these nouns is often caused
by dropping the final consonant <J tlit .vi-in usually <r or F. (See § 45, 1,
Note.)
is
<i n
II \
STEMS IN ES.
§ 52. 1. Nouns in t;? and o?, gen. eo?, are contracted
whenever e of the stem precedes a vowel.
Note. A comparison of kindred languages shows that the original
stem of these nouns ended in ea, in which a is dropped befoie a vowel or
another a in the case-ending (§ 16, 4, Note.) The genitive yivioi, there-
fore, stands for an original form 7ci'e(r-os, which, howevei', is never found
in Greek. (See § 56, Note.) The proper substantive stems change es
to 0$ in the nominative singular (as in yivo^, rctxos); the adjective stems
lengthen es to i}s in the masculine and feminine, and retain es in the neu-
ter. (See § 66.) A few adjectives in tfp-qi are used substantively, as
Tpi-fiprjs {triply fitted, sc. mOs), trireme.
2. The nouns (?;) rpi'^prjft (^rpirjpea--'), trireme, and (to)
yepo<i (^yei/ea-^, race, are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
Tpi^pris
■y^os
G.
(rpnfipfos)
rpi^povs
(7eWos)
yivov9
D.
(rpf^pei)
Tpi^pci
(7ei'ei)
yv€i
k.
(rpi-^pea)
Tpl^ptl
ytvo9
r.
TplfJpW
Dual.
^os
N. A. V.
(rpi-fipee)
Tpi^pri
(7ei'ee)
•y^
G. D.
(TpiTJp^Oll^)
rpi^poiv
(7ei'e'oii')
Ycvoty
§53]
THIRD DECLENSION.
48
Plural
N. V.
(T/Jtrjptcs)
Tjiiifip»is
(yit>€a)
-yivt,
G
frpLiipewv)
Tp.rjpwv
YcWttV
Ycvwv
D.
Tpi^P'Tl
■y^v«rt
A.
hpi/jpfai)
TpiVjpets
(761/60)
-y^vt]
Tote 1. Like the singular o*" TiJifjprjs are declined proper names
ill tjs, gen. («os) our, as ^rjfiotrdfvrjs, ScoKparrys : for accusatives in rjv 1
iee § 60, 1 (>') i auu for the accent of the vocatives Arffioadevts, w
2a)KpaT(i, &c., see § 25, 1, Note. Tpirjprjs has recessive accent in
the contracted genitive and dative dual and gen. plural. Some other
adjectives in rjs have this in all forms (§ 25, 1, N. ; § 66).
Note 2. When the termination ea is preceded by a vowel, it is
generally contracted into a; as vyifjs, healthy, accus. sing. vyUa, vy '
(sometimes vyt^); XP*°^' ''^*'' ^^- ^- ^' P^"*'- XP<a- I" the dual, »#
is irregularly contracted into ij.
Note 3. Proper names in KXe.vs are doubly contracted in tii
dative, sometimes in the accusative, llfpiKKfrjs, PericLns, L U'ls
declined (see also § 59, 3) : —
n(piK\f)s
ricpiKX^OVS
(IlepiK\€fi)
n«piKX^d
IIcpCkXcis
Note 4. In proper names in xXeiys Homer has ijoi, ijt, ija, Herodotus
ioi (for ffoj), t't, to. In adjectives in e tjs Homer sometimes contracts ec to
ec as, €iK\erji, ace. plur. ci^KXetas for ti)KXceas.
N.
{IJepiKXeris)
G.
( IlfpifcXf eos)
D.
{IleptKM'i)
A.
(IleptKX^fa)
V.
(riepfKXees)
IIcpiKXct
(poet. XIcpuXi})
stems in I, T, or ET.
§ 53. Nouns in t? and i (stems in t), v<; and v (stems
in i;), contract only the dative singular, and the nomina-
tive, accusative, and vocative plural. Nouns in eu? gener-
ally contract only the dative singular and the nominative
and vocative plural.
1. Most stems in t, with a few in v, change their final
t or u to e in all cases except the nominative, accusative,
and vocative singular.
The nouns (r;) ttoXki, city (stem TroXt-), 7rr);^u?, cubit
(ttt^^^D), and darv, city {darv-), are thus declined : —
!
44
INFLECTION.
[§53.
Singular.
N.
ir6\w
irf|xv«
AOTV
G.
ir6\tm
irVJx«««
Atrrcos
(poet, dartus)
D.
iir6\(i)
irtfX<i
(TiJxfO w^X«'
(&aT€i)
&VT<i
A.
irtfXiv
iri)xw
&<rTv
V.
iroXt
irf|xv
Dual.
AOTV
N. A. V.
ir6\H
w^X««
AVTM
G. D.
iroX^oiv
■>rt)X^oiv
Plural.
dcrWoiv
N. V.
(ir6\ffs)
trtfXcis
(ir^X«s) •T^X'W
{dare a)
dorrii
G.
ir<$Xciiiv
ir^X«"V
iLvriwv
D.
ir6X«n
irVjx«o-t
6.<rrt<n
A.
(ttuXcos) irdXcis
(TT^XfOS) W^X"«
(darea)
d<rTT|
Note 1. Nouns in t are declined like iIo-tv] as (to) <rivani mus-
tard, gen. aivdnfos, dat. (o-tvdrreV), o-d/uTrft, &e.
Note 2. The genitives in fats and cui' of nouns in tr and vs ac-
cent the antepenult. So genitives in tus of noims in u. The dual
rarely contracts te to t) or «.
Note 3. The original i of the stem of nouns in ts (Attic gen. fws) is
retained in Ionic. Thus, 7r6\ts, ir6\ios, (ir6Xit) ttoXi", ir6\ti'; plur. 7r6Xtes,
TToX/wj'; Horn. 7roX/f(r<rt (Hdt. ttoXjci), iriX<aj (Hdt. 7r6Xt"s). Homer has
also TrAXet (with 7r6Xei) and v6\€<ti in the dative. There are also E{)ic
forms 7r6XT7os, ir6X7;i', irtSXi/ej, v6\r]ai. The Attic, poets have a genitive in
eoj. The Ionic has a genitive in fos in nouns in I's of this class.
2. Most nouns in u? retain v and are regular ; as (i)
l^Oifi OxOv-)i fish, which is thus declined : —
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
N. ixe^
N.
ixe^«
G. ixeiK>«
N. A. V. ixev«
G.
lX0^v
D. lxe« (Horn. IxOv:)
G. D. Ixdvoiv
D.
IxMcn.
A. IxWv
A.
dxeias) ixeo*
V. IxW
Note 1. "Eyxf^vs, eel, is declined like IxBvs in the singular, and
like itrjxvs in the plural.
'i!
§54.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
45
NoTF. 2. Adjectives in vs are declined in the masculine like
nfjxvs, and in the neuter lilie n<rrv. But the masculine genitive ends
in «os (lil<e the neutfr); and «os and ta are not contracted. (See
§ 67.) "AtTTv is tlie principal noun in u; its genitive aaTtut^ is
poetic.
3. Nouns in €v<i retain ev in the nominative and voca-
tive singular and dative plural ; as (6) fiaa-LXev^, kuiy
(stem ^aaiXev-^, which is thus declined : —
Suujular.
Dual.
Plural.
N. Pao-iAtvv
N. V. (/3a(TiX^e$) Pa(riX(t$
G. Pao-iX^ws
N. A. V. pao-iX^«
0. Pao-iX^wv
D. (^aaiUi) paeriXii
0. D. pao-iXrfoiv
D. Pao-iXfvo-i
A. pao-iX^a
A. pao-iX^as
Y. Pao-iXci)
NoTK 1. The stem of nouns in evs changed ev to tF {% 1, Note
2) before a vowel of the ending. Afterwards f was dropped, leav-
ing the stem in c. (See § 54, Note.) The cases of these nouns
are therefoie perfectly regular, except in ©s of the genitive, and
long a and as of the accusative, where fwr, ta, ear come (by inter-
change of quantity) from the Epic i;os, i;a, i/as (Note 4).
NoTK 2. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) have ^r (con-
tracted from ^fs, N. A) in the nominative plural of nouns in €vp; as
tTrrr^p, ^a<TiKf}i, for hntii, /Sao-tXeis. In the accusative plural, eas
usually remains uncontracted ; but here cis is sometimes found,
rarely ^s.
NoTK 3. When a vowel precedes, fuf of the genitive singular
may be contracted into wf, and ea of the accusative singular into 5;
rarely tas of the accusative plural into ay, and iuiv of the genitive
plural into u>v. Thus, Ilft/jatfus, Peiraeiis, gen. Iletpatews, Ilftpata*;,
accus. JJf ipaUa, Uftpaia'i [xo^^^r] (i kiv<J of measure ; gen. \of(iis, \oais,
ace. \oia, xoa, xoias, x^^^'i Acopiei/y, Duriaii, gen. plur. Acopte'coi/, Aoj-
pt(ov, ace. Aojpiiasy A<opias.
Note 4. In nouns in eus, the Doric and Ionic have e.r/. paeiXhs for
^aaiX^wi ; the Epic has /3a<rtX^os, ^aaiXrj'i, jSacrtX^a ; jSaatX^cj, /Soo'tX^wi',
^affiXrieaai, ^aaiXr/as,
STEMS IN OT OR AT.
§ 54. The nouns (6, rj) /3ov<s, ox or cow (stem jSov-), (17)
ypav<i, old woman (stem ypau-), and (rj) vav<Sy ship (stem mu),
fire thus declined : -^
40
INFLECTION.
n 55.
Singular.
N.
9ov«
W«v«
vavt
0.
P<Hif
YP««i«
v«w4
D.
pot
Ypdt
vnc
A.
Pofiv
YpaOv
vavv
V.
pov
-ypou
Dual.
v«ft
n; a. v.
p<{«
Ypac
ȴ
G. D.
pootv
Ypdolv
Plural.
VfOtV
N. V.
p<{<t
Ypa««
v^n
0.
Powv
Ypdwv
V<WV
D.
pov<r<
YpaxxrC
VaXKTl
A.
Povf
TTpaws
vavt
^uTK. The stfiiih of these nouns became /3of-, >/)of-, and mf- twfoie
a vowel of the ending (conipai-e the Latin bov-is and nav-is). Afterwards
F was dropped, leaving /3o-, -ypd-, and I'd-. (See § 53, 3, N. 1.) In Doric
and Ionic, vavj is much more regular in its declension than in Attic :
Dor. voOs, vd6i, mi, vavv ; pi. »»a«j, vdCnr, i/apfft or vdtffffi, vaat.
Ion. vrivs, vi}6s or v(6:, vrjl, v^a or via ; pi. v^s or via, vijiii* or veuv,
vrivffl (vT^taai or I'^eaffi), vrjas or I'^oj.
In Attic, it changes va- to cc- or vt}:
STEMS IN on fi.
§ 55. Some feminincs in o\ contract 6o<s, oi', 6a. in the sin-
gular into ovs, o7y and w, and form the vocative singular irregu-
larly in oi. The dual and plural (which rarel}' occur) follow
the second declension. 'Hxw (^), echo, is thus declined : —
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Shigular.
^X»
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
^Ix«
^Xolv
X. V.
G.
D.
A.
Plum I.
^Xol
^X«v
^XOV$
S«7.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
47
NoTK 1. AtAur, nhamc, and the Ionic ^wy, nwniinf/, form their
oblique cases like rixo} (but with 10, not a>, in the accusative singu-
lar) ; as aida>r« aidovs^ atdot, a(d<u, — ffoist ^ovf, ^oi, ^u.
Nouns in ox, gen. uor are regular, but are sometimes contracted;
as 7pa>r, hcro^ rjpiaos^ fjpo'h or ffptp, fjpwa or rjpiat &c.
NoTK 2. A few nouns in tav (untiv, iimujp, and ar^hmv, nif/hthiffale)
occasionally have forms like those of nouns in «o; as gen. cuoOr,
drjiovs ; accus «uca ; voc. dtjfioi.
NoTK 3. The uncontracted forms of these nouns in oos^ 6t, and
6a are not used. Herodotus has an accusative singular in ovv ; as
'lovv for *1«, from 'I©, Jo, gen. *loCt.
STEMS IN AS, on IN AS AND AT.
§ 56. 1. Neuters in as, gen. aos, are contracted when the
o of the stem is followed by a vowel ; as (t6) yfpa<i, prize, which
is thus declined : —
Singular.
N.A.V. Y^pat
D. (7'poi) Y<pai
Dual.
N.A.V. {yepat) yipd
G. D. (yepdoiv) ytpifV
Plural.
N.A.V. (yipaa) yipa
G. (yepduv) Y«pMV
D. ylpdo\
2. A few neuters in as, gen. aros, drop t and are contracted
like ycpas ; in Attic prose only (to) Kepos, horn, gen. Kcpdros
(Kcpaos) Kcp(i>9 ; dat. Kcpdri (Kcpai) Kcpai;plur. KtpaTa (Kcpaa)
Kcpd ; gen. Kcpdroiv (Kcpauii') Kcpwv ; dat. Ktpaxn.
Note. The original stem of nouns in as, gen. aot, is supposed to
have ended in o<r (§ 52, 1, Note), which dropped <r before a vowel or <r, but
retained it in the noniinative. Neuters in as, aroj, which drop t, have one
stem in ar and another in as, the latter appearing in the nominative sin*
gular.
Syncopated Nouns.
§ 57. Some nouns in rjp (stem in cp), gen. epos, are sj'n-
copated (§ 14, 2) by dropping e in the genitive and dative
singular. In the dative plural, the}' change tp to pa before
(Ti. The accent is irregular ; the syncopated genitive and da-
tive being oxytone (except in ^rjfxT^Trjp) , ancl the vocative
48
INFLECTION.
l§57.
Ill
ti !
'i
singular having recessive accent (§ 25, 1, Note), and ending
in £p as in barytones (§ 48, 2, a),
1. YiaTTqp {b)^ father, and Bvydrqp (^), daughter, are thus
declined : —
Singular.
iroTiip
{iraT4po%) irarpos
(naripC) irarpC
iraWpa
N.
G.
D.
A.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
irdrcp
iraWpc
iraWpoiv
Trarcpcs
iraWpwv
irarpdcrt
traWpas
Ovydnip
(^iryar^pos) Ovyarpo's
(dvyaripi) OvyarpC
OvyaWpa
OiS^arcp
Dual.
Plural.
OvyaWpc
OiryaT^poiv
Ovyar^cs
OvYaWpMV
OvyaTpdcri
OvyaWpas
Note 1. Mi^r^p (17), mother, and -yatrTiyp (^), he.Uy, are declined
and accented like irarrjp. Thus, fifirrip has (prjTfpos) pijrpos, and (pi;-
Tept) prjTpi; plur. pijWpcs, nqrepiov, &c.
*A(TTfip (6), star, has aorpao-i in the dative plural, but is otherwise
regular (without syncope).
Note 2. The uncontracted fomis of all these nouns are often used by
the poets, who also syncopate other cases of dvydrrip.
2. 'Avi/p (6), man, drops c whenever a vowel follows ep, and
inserts 8 in its place (§ 1*, N. 2). It is thus declined : —
Dual.
N. A. V. (Avipt) &v8pc
G. D. (dp^poiv) dvSpotv
Plural.
N. V. (avipes) AvSpcs
G. (apdpwv) &v8pwv
D. &v8pd(rt
A. (avUpas) &v8pa«
Singular.
N. avijp
G. (av^poi) dvSpds
D. (iv^pi) &v8p£
A. (di'^pa) dvSpa
V. iLvtp
3. The proper name ArjfirJTrfp syncopates all the oblique
cases, and then accents theirs* syllable. Thus, gt ' (Arjfir'i-
T€pos ) Aiy/xiyrpos ; dat. (Ai;/>ir;Tept) AyfirjTp. \ accus. {Arjfir'jTepa)
ArjfxrjTpa ] VOC. ArjfirjTip,
I
§60.]
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
49
Ctoiider of the Third Declension*
§ 58. The gender of many nouns in this declension must
be learned by observation. A few general rules, however, may
be given.
1. The following are masculine: substantives ending in
dv, -qv^ CV5, most of those in >/p, wp, and wv (gen. wvos), and all
that have vto<; in the genitive. Except (r/) <l>prjvi mind.
2. The following are feminine : those in aus, nys (gen. rrj-
T05), as (gen. aSos), to or ws (gen. ovs), and most of those
in i;.
3. The following are neuter : those in a, i, v, op, op, os, and
as (gen. aros or aos) .
Dialect*.
§ 59* 1. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Homeric ouv for otv.
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric cero-i, €<rt, o-o-i, for ai.
3. Most of the uncoutracted forms enclosed in ( ) in the para-
digms, which are not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or
Herodotus; and some of them occur in the Attic poets. For spe-
cial dialectic forms of some of these nouns, however, see § 52, 2,
N. 4; § 53, 1, N. 3, and 3, N. 4; § 54, Note; § 55, N. 3. , o
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
§ 60. 1- («) Nouns which belong to more than one de-
clension are called heteroclites. Thus <TKi6To<i, darkness^ is usu-
ally declined like Xoyos (§ 41), but sometimes like ycVos
(§ 52, 2). So OIUttovs, Oedipus, has genitive OiStTroSos or
OiSiTTov, dative OiSiVoSi, accusative OiSiVoSa or OIBCttow.
(b) Especially, proper names in 77s (gen. cos) of the third
declension (except those in kA.c'i/s) have also an accusative in
r]v like those of the first ; as A^z/uioo-^cVt^s, accus. A-qixoa-Oivrjv or
^rjfxoo'dtvr), 2(i>Kpar)/s, 2<uKpaT7yr or Sw^cpar?;. So nouns in ds
(gen. ai/Tos or a^os) have poetic forms like the first decleu-
50
INFLECTION.
§
[§60,
sion; as IIoAvSo^s, voc. U.oX.v8dfia (Horn.); Atas, accus
Aiac.
2. Nouns which are of different genders in different cas^.
are called heterogeneous ; as (6) o-itos, corn, plur. (ra) o-ira ]
(6) SecTfio^, chain, (oi) Sta-fioi and (ra) Sea-fid.
3. Defective nouns have only certain cases ; as ovap,
dream., oi^cA.09, use (only nom. am' accus.) ; (rrjv) vi(f)a, snow
(only accus.).
4. Indeclinable nouns have one form for all cases. These
are chiefly foreign words, as 'A8a/x, *l<rpa7;A. ; and names of
letters, "AXi^, B^ra, &c.
5. The following are the most important irregular nouns : —
* 1. "AtS^p, Hades, gen. ou, &c. regular. Horn. 'AtSf/s, gen. ao or
fcD, dat. T], ace. t}v\ also "Ai'Sos, ''Ai'St (from stem *A(8-).
2. tiva^ (6), king, apcucros, &c., voc. ava^ (poet, ai/a, in addressing
Gods).
3. "ApTjs, Ares,''Apf05, or^Apfcos, ("ApcV) "Aptt, (''Apfa)''Apf; or^Apiyp,
*Apfs (also 'Apt s).
■^ 4. Stem (dpv-), gen. (toO or r^s) dppos, Inmh, dpvl, dpm\ pi. api/*y,
apvo)!', apmo-t, api/ar. In the nom. sing. dpv6s (2d decl.) i? used.
5. yd\a Qi'i), milk, yoKaKTos, yaAoKri, &C.
6. yovv (jo), knee, yovaros, yovari, &c. (from stem youar-)', Ion.
and poet, yovvaros, yoiivart, &c. ; Hom. also gen. yovi/dp, dat. yowi,
pi. yoiiva, yovvau, yovvtaau
w 7. yui/ij (iy), M'//J?, yvvaxKoi. yvvaiKi, yvuatKa, yvvai; dual yvvaiKt,
yvvaiKolv, pi. -yuvatKef, yvvacrcoi', yvvm^i, yvvaiKai.
8. fifVSpov (to), /r(?e, ov, reg. (Ion. 8fv8p(ov), dat. sing. fieVdpft;
pi. bivbpfvi.
9. fidpu (to), spear (cf. yoKt;), SdpoToj, Sopart or Sop/; pi. bopara,
&c. Ion. and poet. hovpa.To<i, &c. ; also gen. bovpos, dat. Soup/, 8opt, or
dopet; dual doOpf ; pi. 8ovpa, dovpuv, 8ovpf<Tai.
10. Zevp (^ol. Afvr)' ^<^ws Aidf, Aii, £iia, ZcC Ion. and poet. Zfj-
i/ds, Zi/M, Zfjva.
11. Geptj (t]). Justice (also as proper name, Themis), gen. et'pi-
fior, QtnioTos, QiptTos, Qiynos (Hdt.); dat. eepto-Ti; ace. Qip-urra or
Y
s. u '^ ■'
§60.]
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
51
6e/Luv; voc. QefjLi; pi. BefiKTTts, Btfiiaras'i all Ion. or poet. In Attio
prose, indeclinable in Btfus iari/fas est.
» 12. 6pi^ (fi), hair, Tpt^os, rpixh &c., dpi^i (§ 17, 2, Note).
^* 13. Kapd (to), head, poetic; in Attic only iicvu., accus., and voc.
sing. Horn. Kapij, gen. KaprjTos, Kapfjaros, Kpdarof, Kparos', dat. KapijTi,
KapfjiiTi, icpdariy Kpari (trag. Kapa) ; ace. (tov) Kpara, (to) Kaprj or Kcip ;
phir. noni. Kapa, KoprjOTa, KpaaTa', gen. KpaTav', d'lt. Kpaai; acc. like
nom. with (tovs) Kparas', uoni. and acc. pi. also Kaprjva, gen. Kaprj-
1<OV.
14. Kpivou (to), Ulij, ov, &c. In plural also Kpivea (Hdt.) and KpL-
Vf<Tl
15. Kvoiv (o, 7), ^/o<7, voc. Kvov. the rest from stem kvi/-, Ki'i/09, kvvI,
Kvva, pi. Kvpes, Kvvatv, Kvai, Kvvas.
16. \as (6), .s/o?jc, Ho .1. \das, poetic; gen. "Saos (or Xoou), dat.
Xm, acc. X&av, Aav; dual Xae; plur. Xaui/, Xrietrrrt.
■ 17. XiTTo (Horn. XiV*, generally with f\ai<o, oil), fal, nil: proba-
bly XiVa is neut. accus. , and XtV is dat. for Xtn-i. See Lexicon.
18. pdpTvs (6, f}), witness, pdprvpos, &c., dat. pi. fidprvtri.
19. pd(TTi^ (17), ivhip, gen. pdaTiyos, &c., Iloni. dat. pdcrrl, acc.
fldcTTlV-
20. 019 (17). sheep, olos, on, oW, pi. oies, oiwi/, olaiv, oias, Honi. otV,
oi'oy, oiV, oi'ff, 01101/, oif aai (oiWi, oftro-i), ot?. Aristoph. has dat. oi*.
'^ 21. oveipos (6), oveipov (to), dream, gen. ou; also oi/op (to), gen.
ovdpaTos, dat. oi/eipart; plur. oveipaTa, ovapuTcou, oveipaai.
22. oo-o-f (to)), dual, e^es, poetic; plur. gen. oaa-atv, dat. oaaots or
oaaoKTi-
23. opj/if (6, »/), bird, see § 50. Also, from stem dpvX-, pi. opi/fts,
opveav. acc. opveis or opvis.
2-4. ouf (to), 'YT, wTof, wTt'; pi. wra, cuto)!/ (§ 25, 3, N. 1), oxrt.
Horn, also gen. ovaros; pi. ovaTa, ovaai.
25. Ilia'^ (^), Pnijr, YIvkvo^, YIvkvI, UvKva (for ITcuk-oj, &C.).
20. TTpfCTlUvs (o), "/^/ ;«a», ('WrT (properly adj.), poetic, acc. npi-
(TJivv (as adj.), voc. itptafiv; pi. TrpcV/Sets (Ep. irpe<T$r}es), chiefs, elders:
the common word in this sense is npfa-^vrrjs, distinct from irpfa^tv-
r^p. nptcrdvs = ambassador, w. gen. irpicrlifaii, is rare and poetic in
sing.; but common in prose in plur., Trpco-jSft?, irpeV/Sfaiv, TrpeV/Sect,
TTpfa^ds (like Tr^x^s)^ npea^evri}^, ambassador, is connnon in sing.,
but rare in plural.
27. nvp (to) ^ fire, nvpos, nvpi; pi. (t«j) nvpd, esp. watch-fires.
28. (TTTfof or o-TTftoff (to), t'rt/Y^, Epic; antiovs, (nriji, (rrrdiau, ani)fa-ai
or antcrtTi,
52
INFLECTION.
l§61.
29. v8ap (to), watery vbaros, vSari, &c., dat. plur. vHaai.
30. vlos (6), son, viov, &c. leg.; also (from stem vit-) wiVov, (vU'i)
vifl, (v«a), viff, uieoif; (ylfts) vitis, vieatu, vietrt, (vttas) vitls. Hom.
also gen. vlos, dat. i»a, ace. uia, dual vtf ; pi. vUs, vldai, vlas.
31. x^lp C"?)' ''O'^^j X'V*^^' X"P*' ^^- 5 but ;^f/:»oii' (poet, xupoiv) and
Xfp(ri (poet. ;^et/jeo-(ri or ;^f tpftrt) : poet, also xtpos, X*P*'» ^^'
32. (yooj) YoOr (6), « measure, x^of' X°*» X^f^* X°^^h X°<*s (cf. /Sous,
§ 54). Att. also gen. xows, &c. (§ 53, 3, N. 3).
'' 33. (xoos) xoi's (o)> Jnound, ^oofj xot> x**^" (like /3oCr, § 54).
34. XP'^^ (°)' ■''^■"^ XP'*'''''^' XP^'''h XP^"*"^'^ poet, also xpooy, XP^*-
Xpoa; dat. xp<» (o"ly Jw «" XP¥' "t«r).
X
x
LOCAL ENDINGS.
§ 61. These endings ma^' be added to the stem of a n'>un
or pronoun to denote place : —
-Oi, denoting where; as dWoOi, elsewhere; ovpavoBi, in
heaven.
-^€1/, denoting w/*ewce / as oiKo$€v,from home; avroOev, from
the very spot.
-Se, (-^6 or -crc) , denoting whither ; as McyapaSc, to Megara ;
oiKttSc {xYVGg.), homeward.
NoTK 1. In Homer, the forms in -Bi and -dev are governed by a
preposition as genitives; as 'iXco^t irpo, before Ilium; i^ &\66fv, from
the sea.
NoTK 2. Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found
with the ending t in the singular and ai in the plural; as 'Ict^^oi, at
the Isthmus ; oIkoi (oIko-i), at home; 'Adfjvqai, at Athens. These
forms (and indeed those of § 61) are commonly classed among
adverbs.
NoTK 3. The Epic ending <^t or (j>iv forms a genitive or dativo
in both singular and plural. It is somet'.nes locative, as K\iair)(f>i, in
the tent ; and sometimes it has other meanings of the genitive or
dative, as ^ir)(f>i, with violence. So after prepositions ; as irapa vav<pi,
hi) the ships.
§62] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS .>3
ADJECTIVES.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
§ 62. 1. Most adjectives in 09 have three endings, 0?,
7], ov. The masculine and neuter are of the second de-
clension, and the feminine is of the first; as ao(f)6<i,
(To^^i <To<l>6p, wise.
2. If a vowel or p precedes 0?, the feminine ends in « ;
as d^iof;, d^ia, a^iov, worthy. But adjectives in 009 have
07] in the feminine, except those in /:oo9; as tt7r\oo9,
aifKorif atrXooVi simple ; a6p6o<i, aOpoa, aOooov, crowded.
3. So(f)6<i, wise, and af to9, worthy^ are thu^ declined : —
,
Singular.
N.
<ro({>os
vo^iy
o-o^xiv
AJws
a|la
&|iov
G
(ro(t>ov
(ro<t>i)S
o-otjrav
d|U>v
d$(as
d|£ov
D.
o■o4^^
«ro4»]n
oro<|>(p
decs,
dgfif
dgtcp
A.
(ro4>6v
<roi^f|V
o-tMJxiv
dgtov
di<:ov
&|iov
V.
(ro<H
a-o^i\
O-Oi^V
d|ie
d|ia
d|iov
Dual.
N. A. y. <ro4^i& (To^ cro^
G. D. <ro<^iv (To^Nitv <ro(t>oiv
P/'wraZ.
N. V.
co^oC
(ro<t,a£
(ro<)>d
G.
(ro(|>wv
<ro4>wv
(TO^MV
D.
CiX^lS
o-o^ais
cro<|K>is
A.
croi|>ov$
o-o^as
(TOt^d
d^Cw &££a d|£u
d|Coiv d|laiv d|f9'
Agioi &|iab &|»^
d|iu»v a|£(i>v d^t«Mr
cmiois d|iais i'^o\.%
d^Cous d|£as u^^a
So fiaKpo^, fiaKpd, fiaKpov, long ; gen. fiaKpov, fxaKpa^^ fiaKfjov ;
dat. fiaKpw, fiaKpa, /xaKpw ; acc. /xuKpov, fiaKpav, fiaKpov, &C., like
o^ioq.
All participles in os are declined like tro<^ds.
54
INFLECTION.
[§63.
J
"\
V
fA/
NoTK. Proparoxytones in or have recessive accent also in the
feminine ; as a$ios, a^im (not d$iai, like d|ia). For the accent of
av in the feminine of the genitive plural of barytones, see § 25, 2.
§ 63. Some adjectives in os, especially compounds, have
onl}' two endings, os and oi', the feminine being the same as
the masculine. They are declined like u-o(f>6q, omitting the
feminine ; as aAoyos, dXoyov ; gen. dAoyou ; dat. uXoyw, &c.
Note. Some adjectives in or may be declined with either two
or three endings.
§ 64. A few adjectives of the second declension end in
0)5 and wv, and are declined like veo)<i and di/ciycoji/ (§ 42, 2).
"lAcws, gracious, and dyj/pcus, free from old age, are thus de-
clined : —
Shujiilar.
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
tXccos
tXcu
acMv
tXcM
tCXctpv
tXcip
tXctps
tXcwv
V'Xc<i>v
CXcii)
tXcuv
tX«(>s
tX(o>
Dual.
Plural.
d7^p«s
dY^po)
d>y^p«j»
dY^pwv
d-y^pwv
ayi\p(a
d-y^pfp
d-y^pwv
dY^po
dTrtpipv
dY^pw
Mp<pv
d^^pcp
dy^ptav
d^^ptps
dYifjpws
dY^pM
dY^jpaiv
ttT'lPS^
d-y^p«
For the accent of Xkeaa, see § 22, Note 2.
§ 65- Many adjectives in cos and oo<; are contracted. Xpv-
>s, golden., upyvp€o<s, of silver, and aTrAoos, simple, are thus
1 ■ ^
declined : —
N. (xpiJffeos) xpv^o^
G. (xpvffiov) xpvtrov
D. {xp'>ffi(^) XPVflTw
A. (xpwo'toj') XP^'*''')^V
Singular.
{xpvffia) XP«<»^
(XPffftaj) XPV<''^S
(Xpi'o-^9) XP««r^
(xpi'o^^ai') XP"*''^^
(xpvffiov) xpvtTOV
(xpw^(^) XPVO-V
(xpiJfffoi') yjpwovv
§65.] ADJECTIVES— FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 55
N. (xpiJffeot) XP^<''<>^
G. (x/ofc/wf) xpvtrwv
D. (xpvff^ots) xpvirois
A. (x/>v(r^oi;;) xpvvovs
Dual.
(Xpw^o) Xpuflra
(xpi'o'^oti') xp^oi^atv
Plural,
(xp«5ffcat) XP^"'*'^^
(xpi'ff^w*') \pviruv
(Xpuff^atj) xpvtrats
(xpfo'^as) xpv*'*'^^
(XPVffioiv) xpv<rotv
(XP«5<rea) xpvca
(xpiffiuv) \pwuv
(xpvffioii) xpvo'oit
(XPi5<rco) Xpvo"*
N. (d/!>7i$/ofo;) dpyvpovs
G. {apyvpiov) &pYvpov
D. (dp7u/)^v) oLp^vpi^
A. (dp7()/3eoi') dpYvpoOv
N. (apyvp^w) &pY\ipc&
G. (d/}7u/3^(i') dpYvpoiv
N. {&py6pfoi) dpyvpot
G. (apyvpiuv) Apyvpfiv
D. (d/}7i;p60(s) &p'yvpots
A. (apyvpiov% ) dp^upovs
N. (d7r\6oj) airXo{>s
G. (av\6ov) airXoC
D. (d7r\6v) airX^
A. (dir\6oi.) airXoSv
N. (dTrX6w) airXtt
G. (dir\6o(i') airXoiv
Singular.
{apyvpia) dpyvpa
(dp7u/)^as) dp^vpas
{a.pyvpi(i.) dpYvp^
{apyvpiav) dp^vpav
Dual.
(&pyipcov) dpYvpofiv
(d/>7i;/3^ou) apYvpov
(apyvpiifi) dpYvp<^
{^pTfipeov) dpYupovy
(d/)7i^p6a) dpyvpa (apfy\)^>i(x>' Ap^vpu
(dp7up^a(i') dpYvpaiv (apyvpio<.v) apYVpotv
(d/07i}/06a()
dpYvpat
{dpy6p(a)
dp-yvpa
(d/J7i;/)fw»')
dp^puv
{apyvpiuv
dpTvpMV
! (apyvphais) dp^upats
{apyvp4ois
) apYvpois
B (apyvpias)
dpYvpds
{apytipea)
dpYwpo
Singula-)
{&w\6v)
dirXf)
(av\6ov)
dirXoOv
{av\6r)s)
dirXfjs
{airXdov)
airXov
i&irUv)
dirX^
{air\6(i>)
dirXt^
{aw\6r)i')
dirXf)v
{air\6oy)
dirXovv
Dual.
(dirX6a)
dirXd
(dTrXAw)
dirXu
{air\6aiv)
dirXaiv
{air\6oiv)
dirXotv
56
INFLECTION.
ne^
N. (air\6ot) airXot
G. (dTrXuuf) airXwv
IX [airXdois) dirXois
A. (air\6ovs) ct-rrXovs
Piural.
{airXitai) 4irXat
{airXdui') airXwv
(dir\6ais) ft<irXats
(d7r\6as) 4irXas
{air\6a) airXa
( d7rX6<i>i') dirXwv
(dir\6o({) aTrXois
(dirX6a) dirXd
For the accent, see § 43, Note. For irregular contraction, see
§ 9, 2, Note; and § 9, 3, Note. No distinct vocative fuiuis occur.
l\\
THIRD DECLENSION.
§ 66. Adjectives belonging only to the third declen-
sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as
the masculine. Most of these end in 7;tf ana €<?, or in cdv
and ov. 'A\r)6/)<i, true^ ir^Truiv, ripe, and ev^aifxav, happy,
are thus declined : —
Singular.
M. F. N.
K dXT)% dXTiO^s
G. {dXitedoi) dXijeovs
St (dXve^i) a\r\9(l
A. {dXrieia) aXr\Bi\ dXT)M«
V. dXi^e^s
Dual.
N. A. V. (dX»;^ee) aKr\Ofi
6. D. {dXrieioiv) iXr\9oiv
Plural.
N. V. {dXvBifs) dXtiOcis (dXr}0(a) iXr\9H
G. {dXrjd'ewv) dXT|6<«v
D. &XT)M<ri
A. (dX7;0ias) dXiiOcts {dXridea) i\i\9fi
Singular.
M. F, N. M. F. N.
K
irivmv ir^irov ciSaCfAuv c48ai|iOV
&
ir^vovos ciSaCfiovos
D.
ir^irovi €v8a<(u>vi.
A.
ir/irova Wirov cv8a(|fcova cfi8ai|iov
V.
tr^irov <tf8ai|fcov
II «e.
§67 1 ADJECTIVES -FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 57
Dual.
rXa
rXwv
rXois
TXd
ni, see
occur.
eclen-
iie as
in 0)1/
appy.
N.
A
V. irtfirovi
«v8aC|iovc
G.
D.
viir6voiv
Plural.
<i8ai|i<$voiv
N.
V.
ir4irov\% irfirovo
cii8al|iov(S cv8ai|iova
Cl.
ircirtfvwv
ci8at|Ji6vwv
D.
w^irocTk
ci8aC|io(ri
A.
ir^irovas W-irova
c{i8a£|iova9 cv8a()iova
For the accent of the form (Cdaifiov see § 2"), 1, Note.
Note 1. One adjective in wv, e<ca>i', eKovaa, (k6v, willing, has
three endings, and is declined like participles in av (§ 68). So its
compound, Ukuv (ockui/), umvilling, aKovaa, ^kov.
NoTK 2. The poetic tSptr, knowing, has ace. 'ibpiv, voc. tfipt, nom.
pi. Idpia.
NoTK 3. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are
generally declined like those nouns; as tviXms, fiopefnl , gen. fve'X-
nidos'i tvxapii, (jmceful, gen. €vxdpiTos (§ 50). But compounds of
TTUTtjp and pfirrjp end in up (gen. opof), and those of rroKts in is
(gen. ifiof).
NoTK 4. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one
ending, which is both masculine and feminine; fi^ (j}vyas, (f>vydbos,
fuf/ilice : anais, airaiboi, c'hildlcsx ; dyva>s, dyvioros, unknotvn ; uvoXkis,
dudXKidos, xceak. The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter.
A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first declen-
sion, ending in ar or i^y; as yfvvdbai, noble, gen. ytvvdbov.
■f.
ll|fcOV
ll|M>V
FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED.
§ 67. 1. Most adjectives of this class end in u?, em t/,
or in 669, ecraa, ev.
Three end in a<?, — 7ra?, iraaa, nav, all; /^eXa?, fieXaiva,
fxeXav, black; and rdXa^i, raXaiva, raXav, wretched.
2. r\vKv^, mveet, '^apUt'i^ graceful^ ira^, alL and /zeXa?,
blacky ai"e thus declined : —
Singular.
N. yXvkvs "YXyKcia
G. yXvk^os "YXvKeCas
D. (7\i'k/i) Y^VKci -yXwicfiij
A. ^XvKiv -YXuKtiav
V. ^XiNCv -yXiiKeio
^XvKv
"yXvK^os
'yXvKv
^XVKV
58
INFLECTION.
[8 07.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
Dual.
ykvKtCa
Plural.
(yXvKifi) ^XvKcis YXvKctoi
yXvk^wv yXvmimv
YXvK^tri Y^VK(^^<
yX«>k<«
YXvKfolV
yXvk^a
yXvk^mv
YXvK^trt
^XuK^a
Sivgular.
N.
Xopfiis
XapCco-tra
XapC<v
0.
XopfcvTos
XapUa-a'i\%
XOpCfVTOt
D.
XapC<VTi
xc^ti^Tinn
Xapt<vTi
A.
XOfCcvra
Xc^><c<r<rav
XopUv
V.
XapUv
XupUa-va
Dual.
XapUv
N. A. V.
Xap£<VTc
\apU<nra
XopfcvTc
G. D.
XapUvToiv
XopUo-o-aiv
Plural.
XapUvTOiv
N.
XopfcvTcs
XapU(r(r(u
Xopfcvra
a
XOp^VTMV
Xapwrtrwv
XopUvTwv
D.
Xoptwri
\apU<rva»,%
Xoptfo*^
A.
XopUvras
XapUo'a-as
XopCcvra
V.
XoplcvTcs
XopCfo-o-ai
Xoptcvra
N. ira$ iraoxi irav fiAas
G. vavT<$s ird<rT|S iravrds |«iXavos
D. iravrC frdo^ iravrC fiiXavt
A. irdvra iroUrav irdv i^^Xava
y. |i«Xav
N. A. V.
6. D.
Dual.
(fclXoiva |tAav
|fc<Xa(vi)« ii^avo9
IMXaCvn )UXavi
|icXatvav |UXav
licXfuva |UXav
(fc^Xave i&cXaCva (fc^Xavc
|i(Xdvoiv |MXa£vcuv luXdvoiv
[§07.
§68.] ADJECTIVES — FIKST AND THIKD DECLENSIONS. 5y
I
Plural.
N.
irAvTis
irao-at
irdvra
|UXav(«
lUXoivai
|UXava
0.
irdvTwv
iracrwv
irdvrwv
(MXdvwv
(uXaivwv
|fc(Xdvwv
D.
iro<ri
irdo-ais
irdo-i
|UXavi
picXaCvats
|ti(Xaa-v
A.
irdvras
ird(ras
irdvTO
|UXava«
|i<XaCva«
|UXava
V.
|UXav««
|i^\aivah
|i^Xava
For the feminine of /iAav, see § 16, 7, (il).
NoTK 1. The Jouic feminine of adjectives in wr ends in «a or
(t). Homer has f r/x'o (for dpiiv) as accnsative of dpvs, fcide. For
the dative plural of adjectives in <tf, see § 16, 6, N. 2.
NoTK 2. Some adjectives in i)ctff, ijtaaa, fjfv, contract these end-
ings to ,^(, ^aaa^ ^u; and some in otis, ottraa, otv, contract these to
ovs, oiiaaa. ovv\ as rifii^fis, rifirifffaa, rifxijiv, — I'ififjs, Tififjaaa, rtfxfjv, —
valuable; gen. Ti/iijcin-or, Ttfir^eaarjs, — tih^vtos, Tifi^aarjs, &c. So
TrXaicdcif , irKaKotaaa, TrXaxocf — TrKaKOvs, TrXaKovaaa, irXaKovv, — Jlal ;
gen. TrXaKofi/ror, TrXaKocca?;;, — liKaKovvroi, •n\aKova<Trii ] but not <^ci)-
i/i}((r, <f)<iiin^«(T<ra, (fxovijiv, vocal.
Note 3. One adjective in r/v, — r«pi}i/, reptiva, riptv, tender (Latin
tener), gen. reptvos, rtpduris, repfvos^ &c., — is declined after the
analogy of piXas. So aparju (or uppriv), Spafv, male, gen. apatvos,
which h;.s no feminine form.
DIV
&V09
DlVi
av
av
av<
&V01V
§ 68. To this class belong all active and all aorist
passive participles. Aixav, loosing., i<rTd<t, erecting^ ridet'i,
placing, BeiKvvf, showing (present active participles of
/ivo), i<TT7)ixi, Ti6r)fjLi, and BeUvvfii), and XeXvKcoft, having
loosed (perfect active participle of Xucd), are thus de-
clined : —
Singular.
N. Xv«v Xvovira Xvov
G. XiiovTos Xvov(rr|s Xuovtos
D. XvovTi Xvovcru Xvovn
A. Xvovra Xvovcrav Xvov
y. Xvwv Xvovira Xvov
Dual.
ivra.9 icrrdo'a lo^dv
lo^dvTos io^d(n]s lo^dvros
io-rdvTi IwrdoTi Urrdvri
io^dvTo lo^do'av lo^dv
lordt lo^oxi to-rdv
N.V.A. Xvovrc Xvovca Xvovtc
G. D. Xvovroiv Xvovo-oiv Xvdvroiv
tordvre lo^do'a lo^dvT*
io~rdvTOiv lo^do'aiv lo^dvroiv
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0 I^Ki 1^
I 1.1 l.-^Kfi
fM 1^ "'-^
I
ff%
v,
0>
*.^«>
V
/.
HiotDgrafAiic
Sciences
Corporation
4
^^
m
v
V
<^
33 WIST MAIN STRIH
WIMTIR.N.Y. USM
(71«)t72-4503
4^
60
INFLECTION.
[§68.
I u
Plural.
N. v. XttfOVTcs XvoiKrat Xvovra
G. XikSvtmv XvoiNTMV Xv6vruv
D. Xvou<n Xvovoxus Xvovck
A. Xttfovras XvoOo-as Xvovra
UrrdvTcis Icrroo-ai Urr&vra
UrrdvrMv itrrairm loTdvrwv
loTcUn lirrdirais Ifrratn
lordvras tordtras IcrrdvTa
The accent of the neuter singular appears in j3owXcwa»i/, ffoiiXti-
ovaoy (iov\€vov. (§ 26, N. 2.)
• 1*1
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Singular.
8<ucvtSc Scucvfkra Scikvvv riMt -n^tlau TiWv
SmKVVVTOS 8<lKVVirT|S 8«IKVWVT0« TiWvTOS Tie«Urtl« Tl(kvTO«
SciKVWTt 8«iKVV4rt| SciKvvvrt tiWvti rt.9ti<rjji tiWvti
SciKVvvTa 8<iKv6(rav ScikviSv TiMvra neclirav ti«v
8cucviS« SciKviNra Scikvvv TiOcCfi ri9tlau tiMv
Ihial.
N.A.V. Sakvvvtc 8ciKvv<ra SciKvvvrf " TiO^vrc riOcto-a tiOIvtc
G. D. SaicvvvToiv Scikvvoxuv 8<iicvi>vToiv tiO^vtoiv riOctoxuv tiO^vtoiv
Plural.
N. v. SciKvvvTcs SciKvinrai SciKyvvrr,
G. SciKVvvrMV 8ciKvv(rMV 8<ikvvvtmv
D. SciKvOfTi ScbKviNrais Scucvfiori
A. SciKvvvras ScucviNrat SciicvvvTa
TiMvTcs Tt,9ct(rai •nUvra
rMvrmf rtOfurwv rMvmv
riOct(ri Ti9<£(rais nUtlm
rMvTai TiOcfcras rid^vra
Singular.
N.
XcXvKws
XcXvKvta.
X«XVK^
G.
XiXvKiSTos
XcXvKvtas
X<Xvk4tos
D.
XcXvK^i
X«XvicvCq^
XcXvK^i
A.
XcXvK<{ra
XcXvKvtdv
X<XvK<S$
V.
X«XvK(i«
XcXvKvta
Dual.
XcXvK(Ss
N. A. V.
XcXvKitrf
X(XvKv£a
XcXvK^
G. D.
XcXvK^TOlV
X«XvKuCaiy
XiXvK^iV
§69.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 61
Plural.
N. V.
XcXvkiSth
XcXvKviai
XcXvK^a
G.
X(XvK<{r«»v
XcXvKviwv
XcXvKdTMV
D.
XcXvKdcri
XcXvKvtais
XcXvK(S<ri
A.
\<\vK6ras
XcXvKvCot
XcXvKdra
Note. All participles in tav are declined like \v<av: for ovva in
the feminine, for ovr-aa, see § 16, 6, N. 1. Participles in ovs are
declined like \va>v, except in the nominative and vocative singular ;
as 8i8ovs, 8i8ovaa, 8i86u, giving; gen. diBoprosy dtdovatjs ; dat. dtdovrt,
BibovvTi, &c. Aorist active participles in as are declined like tords ;
as 'Kvaasy \v(ra<Ta, Xvtrau, having loosed; gen. Xvaavros, "Kvtrdarrfs] dat.
\vaavTi, Xvadat], &c. Aorist passive participles in ctr are declined
like Tidels; as \vdeis, Xutfeto-a, \vBiv, loosed ; gen. "KvO^vtos, 'KvBeiarfs]
dat. Xvdevri, \v6eia7], &c. When the accent differs from that of the
paradigm, it follows the general principle (§ 25, 1). See § 117, 2.
§ 69. Participles in dcov, itov, and otov are contracted.
Tifj.da)p, Ti/jL&v, honoring^ and <f>tX€ODv, <f>i\6t>Vy loving, are
declined as follows : —
Singular.
N. {rifMuv) Ti|fcuv (rifiaovffa) ri|uao'a {Tt/mov) Ti|fc6v
G. {TifMOVTOs) ri|AuvTOS {rifmoiffris) Ti|u&on)S {TifMOvroi) Ti|fcwvTO«
D. {TlfMOVTt) Ti|IMVri (TlfiaoiffXl) Tl|U&<rQ {TlfMOmi) Tl|i«»VTl
A. {rtfiaoPTa) Ti|fcMVTa {Tifiaov<rw) ri|fcwo'av JIti/mov) n|JMav
V. (nuduv) Ti|JbMv {rifidovaa) TifAavi. (ri/idov) Ti|fcAv
Dual.
N. (Tifidoirre) rifJiuvTC {rifiao^ffa) Ti|u&<ra (Tt/xdovTe) Ti|iMVT«
G. (ri/Mdm-oiv) Ti|uavTOiv {rifMoiffaiv) Tifittoxiiv (TifmivTow) rt^^vrow
Plural.
N. {ri/idotrrei) Ti|iMVTCS (rt/ndouffot) Ti)i«Mrab (rtjudoin-a) Tifiwyra
G. (rt/uoAiTwi') ri|M«VT«»v (rt/uiovo'wi') Ti|i«Mrwv {rifjuidPTuv) rt|M&VTaiv
D. (rifidovffi) Ti)iiw(rk (rt/iaoiJffotj) Ti|u&<rais (rt/xdoutf-t) rk|fc«Mri
A. (rifidovrai) Ti|iwvras (rifxaoiaas) Ti|u&o'a8 (rifidovra) Ti|ittVTa
V. (rindovrei) ri|i«avrcs (rifidovaai) Ti|ji«Mrai {Ti/idovra) Ti|fc«vra
62
INFLECTION.
Singular.
L§7a
N. (jftCKibiv) ^iX&v {(pCKiovaa) ^1X000*0 {ipiKiov) ^iXoiiv
G. {(ftCKiovToi) <^iXo0vTO9 (0tXco(/(n}s) ^i\ov(n)s {4>iK4ovToi) ^iXoOvros
^iXoOvTi {<fti\€oiMJxi) ^tXowrD (jpiKiovrC) ^iXofhrri
^iXoOvra (^tX^uffaf) <^iXou(rav ((ftCKiov) (^iXofiv
^iXwv (^tX^oucra) (^iXoikra ((jtiKiov) ^iXovv
D. (^tX^oi^t)
A. (jpCKiovTo)
Dual.
N. (^iX^oi^e) ^iXoOvTC (^tXcoi^ffa) (^iXoinra (^tX^oi^rc) ^iXof^c
G. (jiffiKibyTOiv) ^iXovvToiv {(ftCKioiaaiv) ^iXoi/traiv {<pCK€bvTOiv) i^iXoivToiv
ll
\
1
I
N. (^tX^oiTes)
G. (0(Xe6in-(tfv)
D. {(f>i\iovffi)
A. (0tX^oi^oj)
V. (<t>iK4ovTti)
Plural.
<^iXo{iVT<$ (^tX^ovcrat) ^iXofwrai {tfi^^ovTa) ^lAoOvra
^iXovvTttV (^tXcouffwi') «^iXov«r«av {^pCKibvrtav) ^iXoilvTMV
^iXoOiTi (0(X6ot/(ra(s) ^iXovirais {(fnXiovci) i^iXoiitri
^iXovvTOt (^iXeot/aas) ^iXov<ras (^tX^oi^a) (^iXovvra
^iXovvTCS (jfiiKiovam) (^iXofkrai (jpCKiovra) ^iXoOvra
The present participles of verbs in 6a> (contracted w) are declined
like 0iX(op, the contracted form of <^tk(iav. Thus hrjKatv, SriXovaa,
briXovv, manifestituf : gen. brjKovvros, brjkovtnis ; dat. drjkovvri, br/Kovaji,
&c. The uucoutracted form of verbs in 6a> is not used. § 98, Rem.
Note. A few second perfect participles in aas of the fu- form
(% 124) have S»ra in the feminine, and retain <0 in the oblique cases.
They are contracted in Attic ; as (coraciir, corauo-a, forao's), contr.
ccrebr, iarmaa, eorrfy (irregular for ecrtus), standing: gen. taT&Tos,
iardxTrit^ (ararosy &c. But re^vccar, rtdvfottra, t(0p«6s, dead, from
6vfj<Tic<a, always remains uncontracted. See § 110, iv. (rf), N. 3.
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
§ 70. The irregular adjectives, fieya^, greats 7ro\u>,
muchy and irpao^t, mild^ are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
lUyat
IM-jfAXlJ
|ilya
iroXvs
iroXX'/|
iroXv
0.
IM-ydXov
liryAXtp
|iC7dXov
iroXXoO
troXXii$
iroXXoO
D.
|MY&X<|>
|M7<(Xtl
|MYaX<!>
iroXX^
iroX.\iO
iroXXt^
A.
fU-yav
|fcrydXi)v
Ulya
iroXvv
troXX^v
iroXv
V.
firydXi
JMY^I
M*lfa
■It
§70.]
ADJECTIVES — IRREGULAR DECLENSION.
63
Dual.
N. A. V. |irydX(» iirydXa |irydX»
G. D. itrydXoiv ifcrydXcuv fUY^Xoiv
Plural.
N. y. luydXoi iiry&Xai itrydXa
G. |irydX«v |ftrydX«v (fcrydXttv
D. |ft«YdXois iMYdXfus |j«y^iXois
A. iicydXovs |iryAXas iirydXa
iroXXo( 'voXXaC iraXXd
iroXXwv iroXXfiv iroXXAv
iroXXots iroXXats iroXXot«
iroXXoiir iroXXdt iroXX&
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
irpttot
irpdou
irp^
irpaov
irpoMta
upcuCcis
vpacCf
irpMtav
Dual.
irp&ov
irp^v
irpd<|>
irpaov
N. V.
G. D.
irp^
irpdoiv
irpacCa
irpac(aiv
Plural.
irpdM
irpdoiv
N. A.
G.
D.
A.
irpooi, irpacCt
irpa/<MV
irpdois, irpoiri
updovt
upacUu
irpocwv
irpa«CaiS
irpacCas
irpiUa
irpcUcav
irpdois, irpcUo%
irpcUa
Note 1. Most of the forms of ju^as and ttoXi/s are derived from stems
in 0, (leyoKo- and iroXXo-. IIo\\6s, 17, 6^, is found in Homer and Herodo-
tus, declined regularly throughout. In Homer, iroKh has forms iroKios,
ir6\i€%, wo\4<av, &c., which must not be confounded with Epic forms of
ir6\is (§ 63, 1, N. 3).
Note 2. Iloaot has two stems, one irpdo- (written also wpfO'') from
which the masculine and neuter are generally formed ; and one irpoi* (ne»'er
irp^tv-) from which the feminine and some other forms come (§ 67, *i).
There is an Epic form irfmin (Lyric vpiiii) coming from the latter stem.
The forms belonging to the two stems differ in accent.
1
6i
INFLE€T10N.
[§7t.
IM
'• I
I I
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
I. Comparison by -repot, -rarot.
§ 71. Most adjectives add t6/)o? to the stem to form
the comparative, and raro? to fonii the superlative.
Stems ill o with a short penult change o to m before repof
and Taro?. £.g.
Kov<f)os (kov^o-), light, Kovtfyortpos, lighter, Kout^^aror, lightest.
2o<f>6t (<ro<f>o-), wise, <ro<f)wT«pos, wiser, (ro^wraror, wisest-
2efAv6s {(Ttfipo-), august, aefivorepos, afiivoraroi.
TJiKpos liriKpo-), bitter, iTiKp6Ttpos, iriicpoTaTos.
O^i/ff (o^w-), sharp, 6$vT«pos, o^vtotos.
MfXas (/icXav), black, peXdurtpos, ftcXdi/raror.
'AXi;^r (akriBea-), true, aXrjdetrrtpos, aktidiaraTos. (§ 52, 1).
Note 1. Stems iii o do not lengthen o to o> if the penultimate
vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (§ 19, 3). See irtxpor
above.
Note 2. Metros, middle, and a few others, drop os and add aire-
pos and airaros ; as pitros, pftrairepos, pfaairarof.
Note 3. Adjectives in oos drop or and add (ortpos and toraror,
which are contracted with o to ovarepos and ovararos ; as (tCvoos)
(t>vovr, toell-disposed , evvovartpos, (vvov<rraros.
Note 4. Adjectives in ov add itntpos and iararos to the stem ;
as aaxjipoiv (a-w(f>pov-) , prudent, awt^povtarepoi, aartfipoviaTceros.
Note 5. Adjectives in etf change final cvr- of the stem to co--,
and add rtpos and raros; as p^aptetr (;fapi«ia'-), graceful, \apu<rr€pot^
Xapiforarot-
II. Comparison by -ittv, -loros.
§ 72. 1. Some adjectives in v; and po5 are compared
by changing these endings to kov and to-ro?. ^.^.
*Hivs, sweet, ^8ia>u, fjBiaroi.
Taxvs, swift, raxiatp (commonly dda«T<ov, § 17, 2, N.), rdxivrog.
AiiTXpos, Imse, aiaxit^v, ata-x^orot.
'Exdpoi, hostile, eyditou, (xditnos.
Kvbpit (poet.), giorious, Kv8ioiv,KvBi<rTos.
Note. Some adjectives have both ta>i't to-ros and rtpos, rarof.
^
3
4
§73.] IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 65
2. Comparatives in l(au, neuter lop, are thus declined : —
Dual.
Singular.
N. ^SCwv iiSiov
0. i^8tovo«
D. Ifitovt.
A. ifiloya ^SU Ifiwv
N. A. y. IfiUvf
0. D. ^voiv
I
Plural.
N. v. 'fjSfovcs VjSbvt VjStova ^8(m
6. 4j8i6vttv
D. IfiCwn
A. ^SCovat ijSCovs ifjSCova ^8(»
Note 1. The terminatious -ova, -ovti, -ovas may drop v, and be
contracted into -u and -ovs (§ 47, N. 1). The vocative singular of
these comparatives seems not to occur. For the recessive accent in
the neuter singulai', see § 25, 1, Note.
Note 2. The irregulai* comparatives in av (§ 73) are declined
like hbitav.
' /
III. Irregular Comparison.
§ 73* !• The following are the most important cases of
irregulai' comparison : —
1. &Ya0tfty good,
&|u<vMv (§ 16, 7),
{dpelup), Apurrot,
PfXrUtv, P^Turros,
(/S^Xrepos), (/SeXroTos),
tcpcCcnrttv or KpcCrrttv {Kpiaauv), icpdnoTotf
2. KaK^, had.
((piprepos),
Xf^v {\uluv, \ulTepoi),
KaKfoiv (Kaic(6repot),
XcCfMov (xfptfwv),
( xctp6re^s, x^P^'^^^P''^ ) ♦
Ijo'anav or Ijttwv (?(r<rwi'),
3. KoXos, heaviiful, Ka\X(«»v,
4. ii^YM, grcai.
|u(t«v (M^fwi', § 16, 7),
0ep«rTot),
XfvTOt.
KdKlOTOt,
X(CpiOTO$,
(ff*ct<rToj, rare) ;
adv. IfKioTo.
K£\XiOTo«.
fify^OTOf.
ill
,i,f '
66
INFLECTION.
|UKp((T4pOf,
[8 78.
6. ^Mtft6%»maU, |UKprfT<pot, |uicp^aTOt,
(Horn. IXdx«uh
fern, of <Xax^), iXdo-o-wv or IXdrrwv (§ 16, 7), IXAxioro*,
6. 6\ly9%, Utile, {vw-oXlj:uy, ratlier less),
7. irivr\t(ir€vrrr-),poor,irwitrrtpot,
8. iroKit, inttch, irX«U»v or irW«v,
(^■nlTfpos),
^XeUrcpos (rare),
(jifuXlwy, rare),
^iX^&r^ios (rare).
9. p^ot,easy,
(Ion. fnildios),
10. ^(Xot, ('ear,
(/iie(<rrot, rare).
6KlyurTot.
irtWlTTClTCH.
irXitoTTot.
^90TO«,
(^IJITOTOJ, ^l)«rTOj)'
^(Xrarof,
^iXaCraTot (rare).
Ionic or poetic forms are in ( ).
Note. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words
will be found in the Lexicon : —
alaxpos, dkyttvos, Spna^, &<f>6ovos, c^x^P*^' fiaBvs, ^Xa^, ^paivs, yr-
patos, yXvKvs, tiriX^ariiov, iirixapit, rjavxos, idior, laos, XdXor, poKap,
paKpoSt vios, itaKaios, iraxvs, ntnav, map, TrXr)<rios- npta^vs, irpoCpyov,
TTpmos, (nrovBaios, <rxo\aios, ^rvd^r, aKvs.
2. Some comparative^^ :*nd superlatives have no positive,
but their stem generally appears in an adverb or preposition.
^AvaTfpos, upper, aviyraros, uppermost, from ava, up; irpintpos,
former, jrpttrot or npatTurros, frst, from vpo, before : Karampos, lower,
KOTcn-aTos, lowest, from koto, downward.
See in the Lexicon dyvorcpor, at^prtpoi, xtplilav, 6frX6repo(, irpotru-
repor, piyiov (neuter), imtprtpos, vartpos, v^iav, (JMavrepos, with their
regular superlatives ; also eaxaroi and tc^dio-ror.
3. Comparatives and superlatives may be formed from
nouns, and even from pronouns. E.g.
Bao-tXrvr, king, fiaa^Ktvrepos, a greater king, /9ao-(Xcvrarof, the great-
est king,' Kkiimji, thief, KKtirriaTepos, KKtrtriararoi', kvoiv, dog, KviTfpos,
more impudent, Kvvraros, most impudent. So ainos, self, avrararos, his
very self ipBissimus.
I'l';
h
76.]
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
67
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
§ 74. 1. Adverbs are regularly formed trom adjec-
tives. Their form (including the accent) is found by
. I ' iging V of the genitive plural masculine to <?. E.g.
6ris, gen. plur. aKi\6iu>v, a\f}B6iv)\ (ra<j>b ^ . , .
i<ra<t>rist gen. plur. aa<l>to»v, aa<j>c»v) ; ntutros, wholly (nas, geu. plur.
TrdvTuv) .
Note Adverbs are occasionally formed thus from participles;
as bia<f)€p6vTm, differently, from hutx^pav (8M(f)fp6vTav) ; Teray/xei/wp,
regularly, from rcrayfici/or (rdo-cro), order).
2. The neuter accusative of an adjective (eithei singu-
lar or plural) may be used as an adverb. E.g.
ndXv and n-oXXa, much (ttoXus) ; fitya or ^cyaXa, greatly (jiiyas) ;
also fifydXcix, § 74, 1; yuovov, only (fiovosy alone).
Note. Other forms of adverbs with various terminations will
be learnt by practice. See § 129.
§ 75. The neuter accusative singular of the com-
parative of an adjective fo«ns the comparative of the
corresponding adverb ; and the neuter accusative plural
of the superlative forms the superlative of the adverb.
E.g.
2o(f>as (<ro<f)6s), wisely ; oo^arepov, more wisely: ao<f>a>TaTa, most
wisely. 'A^tfdm (aXrjOifi), truly; oKrfBfarfpov, oKijd^tTTaTa. 'Hbean
(^dur), sweetly, rjbto', {jdiara. Xcpuvrois (\apieii), yracefuUy : x^P**'
oTfpov, xapiifTTora. 2a>(f>p6v<os (o-ox^pov) , prudently; aa>(f)povfirrepov,
aai^povicrrara.
Note 1. Other adverbs generally form a comparative in repo),
and a superlative in raT©; as ava, above, dvorrfpoo, auaTaTa.
A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in repox; as ^e-
^MOTipos, more firmly, for fitfiaioTepou, from ^fj3a(o>r.
Note 2. MaXa, much, very, has comparative ftaWop (for naKutv,
§ 16, 7), more, rather; superlative ^uXto-ra, most, especially.
.NFLECTION.
[176.
i'
NUMERALS.
§ 76. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives,
and the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows : —
t
i
Sign
Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
1
a'
tU, ifcUif Iv, one
irpMTOt, first
dira(, once
2
r
SiOf two
8<irrfpot, seco7id
8{t, twice
3
V
rptlt, Tp(tt
rpCrot
rplt
4
8'
rhvapn, Wo-trapa
WrapTOt
rrrpdKit
5
«'
ir<vT«
iH)fcirTOt
irivTdKit
6
r'
«e
fKTOt
l{dKit
7
I'
4irTd
«p8otiio«
iirrdKit
8
1'
iKTI&
«y8oo«
AitrdKif
9
r
4vv4d
Ivarot
IvdKit
10
i'
S^Ka
S^Karot
8<KdKlt
11
la'
lv8<Ka
4v8<KaTo«
ivScKdKit
12
iP'
8<&8€Ka
SwS^Karot
8»8<KdKit
13
iV
rpio-KaCScKa
Tpi(ricai8^KaT0t
14
i8'
Tf<nrap<oicaf8<Ka
Tciro-apaKaiS^KaTos
15
w'
ircvTfKa(8<Ka
ircvTCKOi84KaTot
16
tr'
lKKaC8<Ka
lKKai84KaTO«
17
il'
iirTaKaC8cKa
firroKOiS^KaTot
18
^Tf
dKr«Kat8<Ka
dicr«>Kai8^KaTot
19
16'
IvvcaKcUScKtt
4vv«aK(u84KaTo«
20
k'
ftKO<ri
(Ikootos
clKO<rdKt«
21
ica'
ctt Kal ctKOO-i or
ctKO<riv <ts
irpMTOt Kal tUtoarrit
30
V
rputKOvra
TpifiKotmSs
TpicbcowdKit
40
1^'
TMnrapdtKovra
TCOVapaKOflTT^
50
v'
ff«VTT|K0<rT6s
iriVT1)K0VTdKlS
60
«'
i^Kovra
^KOTxtfs
j^KovrdKit
70
o'
ifl6ofJ\KOVTa
ip8o|ii)KO<rTtf«
ip80|i1|K0VTdKlt
80
if
678o^KOVTa
67801) Koirr^s
6Y8oi)KOVTdKl«
90
<?'
Ivcv^Kovra
4v«vi)K0<rTtf«
lv«vi|KovrdKit
100
p'
itta,r6v
lKaro(rr6«
iKarovrdKit
200
a'
8iaK<(inoi, ai, a
8iaKO<rio<rT6s
8iaK0<ridKif
300
t'
TptaKdirioi, ai, a
TpiaKOO-UXTTiit
400
v'
TcrpoKtSinoi, at, a
TtTpOKOtnOVT^f
'
[176.
177.1
NUMERALS.
69
ives,
Si^. Cardinal.
600 ^' irivrdKtfviOi, at, a
600 x' '(^tto-tos oi, a
700 ifr iinitt6o'iw,, as a
800 «•' iirrdK^vMi, cu, a
900 ^ Iv&ctfo^i, <u, a
1000 ,a \CKxoi, oi, a
2000 fi 8tox<Xioi, as a
3000 ,7 Tptox^^oi, ai, a
10000 > |ii»ptOi, ai, a
Ordinal.
mvraKoo'iovr^
4(aK<Nrio<rT<{t
iirraKOinooTot
)fcVpiOOT({f
Adverb.
XiXi^it
|LVpldKlt
Above 10,000, dvo nvpiadti, 20,000, rptls nvptdits, 30,000, &c.
were used.
Note. The dialects have the following peculiar forms : —
1—1. See § 77, Note 1. Epic rptraror, TtTparos.
12. Doric and Ionic dvwdrKa; Poetic 6voKai8€Ka.
20. EpiccWicoo-i; Doric ruan.
30, 80, 200, 300. Ionic rpifiKoura, oybctKovra, diijKoaioi, rpirjKoa'iot.
40. Herod. rttrtrip^Kovra.
§ 77. !• The cardinal numbers eh, one, hvo, two,
rpeh, three, and reaaape^ (or rerrape^), four, are thus
declined : —
as
vrdxit
s
dKiS
N.
ct«
|i(i
fv
G.
ivii
|uaf
iv6%
N. A. 8^
D.
M
|ii4
cvl
G. D. Svoty
A.
<va
|ilav
Iv
N.
Tpclt
Tp(a
T^o-o-apcs Wirtrapa
G.
TplMV
TC<ro-dpa>v
D.
rpurC
Wo'craptri
A.
Tp€tt
TpCa
Wovapas Wcrirapa
Note 1. Homer has fem. tS, t^r, &c., for /xi'a; and to) for m.
Homer has 8u« for Suo, and forms fioto), fiotoi (declined regularly).
For hvtiv, hvStVy dvoio-t, and other forms, see the Lexicon. At^o is
sometimes indeclinable. Herodotus has reo-rcpe;, aud the poets
have r/rpcurc
70
INFLECTION.
[§77.
{
I
f
I
if-
NoTR 2. The compounds oidtis and /ii;dm» no one, none, are de-
clined like tit' Thus, ov6tis, ovdtfAia, ov8«p', gen. oidtv6t, ovitfuas', dat.
oiilifvif oidtfii^ ; ace. ov8iva, oiidtfiiau, ov6iy, <&c. Plural forni8 some-
times occur; as ovdivts, ovliivtiiv, ovdiai, ov6ivas, fAtffiivfs, &o. When
ovdi or findc is separated from tU (as by a preposition or by Hv), the
negative IS more emphatic; as <{ oi/dtvot, from no one; ovV t^ iv6s,
from not even one.
Note 3. Both is expressed by Hn<f)<o, amho, dfi<f)oiv\ and by dfi<l>6-
Ttpotf generally plural, ayif^artpoi, ai, a.
2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclinable.
The higher numbers in loi and all the ordinals arc declined
regularl}', like other adjectives in os.
Note 1. When rpctr xal bixa and riaaapts itai Hko are used for
13 and 14, the first ptirt is declined. In ordinals we may say Tpiros
Koi dcxaror, &c.
Note 2. (a) In compound expressions like 21, 22, &c., 31, 32,
&c., 121, 122, &c., the numbers can be connected by xal in either
order; but if koi is omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, tls tal tUoai,
one and twenty, or tiKotri koi «U, twenty and one ; but (without koi) only
tXKoaiv th, twenty-one.
(b) The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 20, 38 and 39, &c. are often
expressed by iu6i (or dvoti/) diovris tiKoai (rpidicovra, TtaaapaKOvra, &c.) ;
as €Tij ivoi biovra rptdicovTa, 29 years.
Note 3. With collective nouns in the singular, especially n innos,
cavalry, the numerals in tot sometimes appear in the singular; as
T^v diaKoaioM iirnoVf the (troop of) 200 cavalry (200 horse) ; dmris fivpia
Koi TtrpaKoala (Xen. An. i. 7, 10), 10,400 shields (i.e. men with
shields).
Mvpiot means ten thousand : fivpiot, innumerable. Mvp'os sometimes
has the latter sense ; as fivpios xpovoi, countless time : ftvpta irtvia, in-
calculable poverty. For nvpla as numeral, see above.
Note 4. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters ; the two obso-
lete letters, Vau und Koppa, and the character San, denoting 6, 90, and 900.
(See § 1, N. 2.) The last letter in a numerical expression has an accent
above. Thousands begin anew with p., with a stroke below. Thus, ,owfV.
1868 ; pxK€, 2625 ; ,5»fe', 4025 ; ,/Sv', 2003 ; 0/*', 640 ; ph', 104. (See § 76,
second column.)
Note 5. The lettei-s of the ordinary fereek alphabet are often used to
number the books of the Iliad and Odyssey, each poem having twenty-four
books.
--»
§79.]
THE ARTICLE - PRONOUNS.
71
THK ARTICLE.
I
§ 78. The definite article 6 (stem to-), the, is thus de-
clined : —
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
N.
h 1i r6
N.
ol al
Td
G.
TOO Tf|« TOO
N. A. T(& (rd) r«i
G.
rm
D.
TV T^ T«p
0. D. TOtV (Talv) TOtV
D.
TOtfl Tatt
TOtt
A.
rdv T^v r6
A.
TOilt Tdt
Td
Note 1. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the in-
definite ris (§ 84) may be translated by a or an ; as av6pu>ir6s rtr, a
certain manj often simply a man.
Note 2. The feminine dual forms rd and ralv (especially rd) are
rare, and rc!> and row are generally used for all genders. (S 138,
N. 5). The regular nominatives rot and rat are Epic and Doric;
and the article has the usual dialectic forms of the first and second
declensions, as roio, rolti', rdutv, Toiai, r^orc, r^g.
PRONOUNS.
Peraonal and IntenslTe Pronouns*
§ 79, 1. The peraonal pronouns are iycl>, I, <rv, thou^
and oj5 (genitive), of hiniy of her, of it. A\n6<i, himself
is used as a personal pronoun for him, her, it, &c. in the
oblique cases, but never in the nominative. They are
thus declined : —
Singular.
N. hii
G. I|mO, |fto{(
0. l|io(, |io<
A. <K|U
ox>0
o^
ot
1
Duai.
a^Tot
avTov
avr^
avT6v
fill
aOroO
avri
N. A. v«S
G. D. vyv
0^
aivolv
a«Td
a^Tit
aiTotv
72
INFLECTION.
[§79.
N.
G.
D.
A.
{l|ftWV
Plural.
o-(^t« (o-^^a)
<r^C(ri
avToC avreU
avrwv ctvTMV
avTots avrats
avrovt avrds
atSrd
atSrcov
avrets
atSrd
Note 1. hMs in the nominative of all numbers, and as an adjec-
tive pronoun in the oblique cases, la inlemive, like ipse (§ 145, 1);
except in 6 avros, Ihe same (§ 79, 2V In the oblique cases it is the
ordinaiy personal pronoun of the tnird person (§ 145, 2).
For the uses of oC, of, &c. see § 144, 2. In Attic prose, o-^©/,
<r<f)a>ivy iT<\>«a, never occur ; ol and « (chiefly Epic) very rurely ; ot,
<r^««, (r<^<av, v^'urt, a<f)as, being the only common forms. The ora-
tors seldom use this pronoun at all, and the tragedians use chiefly
ff^tV (uc! trtfii) and <r</>c (Notes 2 and 3).
Note 2. The following is the Ionic declension of «yw, av, and
ot). The forms in ( ) are not used by Herodotus
1.
Sing. N.
iy,i) (iyibv)
<nJ (jivn)
G.
ifiev, fuv, from
ifUo
aio, 0fv
(to) e5
{i/jieto, ifUOev)
[atio, aiOfv)
(efo, mv)
D.
ifiol, luA
aoL, Toi (refr)
oX (ioi)
A.
it^*Hi
ci
Hi4)
Dual. N.
A.
{vui, vdi)
(ff^Q'C, o:pd))
{ff<ltb)4)
G.
D.
{vu>w)
(a^uu', o<l>wv)
(a<puai>)
Plur. N.
rifuU (Snnes)
i/fjL€is {Hfi/us)
G.
ilftiwv (iffielwi')
ifiiuv (pneluv)
a^ibtv {(Tifttluv)
D.
iffuv {dn/u)
i/fjuv (if/Afu)
ffiftlat, <r4>l{v)
A.
VH^as (&nfu)
viUa% (Umie)
c<f>4at (o-^etas), <r^
Hero lotus has also crifxU and atfyea in the^ plural of the third
pers^* , ,.iiich are not foiuid in Homer.
Note 3. S^c is used as both singular and plural, him, her, it,
them, by the tragedians.
Note 4. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a per-
^nal pronoun in all genders, and in both singular and plural. The
Ionic lorm fiiv is used in all genders, but only in the singular.
Note 5. The poets sometimes shorten the final syllable of ^filv,
fjftas, vfiiu, vfias, and <T<l>as, changing the circumflex to the acute, as
^fiiv, Tifidt, &c. ; and sometimes accenting rifuv, ^ftas, &c.
Note 6. Herodotus has avrtw in the feminine (not in the mas-
culine or the neuter) for avrS>v (§ 39). See § 83, N. 3. The Ionic
contracts 6 uiiroi into covroc or aiurcJr, and ro avro into roivro (§ 3).
§-^1
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
73
Note 7. The Doric has kfilv (for Attic t/utl); dju^s, afuuv, afiiv, a^U
(for ijiuls, iifiup, iifuv, rifiai); tO (for <nJ); Ho, rev, tcuj, tcoO (for <roO); rfv
(for <rof); vm^i and vfii (for v/iets and v/iai); tv for ol ; besides many of the
Ionic and poetic forms already mentioned.
2. ^ut6<? preceded by the article means the same ; as
awTo? avqp, the same man ; top avrov iroXcfiop, the same
war, (See § 142, 4, N. 6.)
Note. Avtos is often contracted with the article ; as ravrov for
Tov airroif', ravr^ for t^ airra; TauT,^ for rfj air^ (not to be con-
founded with TavTj} from oJtos). In the contracted form the neuter
singular has ravro or ravrov.
Reflexive Pronouns.
per-
The
\
§ 80t The reflexive pronouns are ifiavrov, ifiavrrjf;,
of mi/self; aeavrovt a-eavrijf;, of thyself; and eavrov, kav-
T^9, of himself herself itself They are thus declined : —
Singular.
Masc. Fein.
G. l|iavTod l|iavTf)s
D. <)MIVT^ {|iaVT^
A. <|iavnSv Ifiaur^v
Plural.
Masc. Fern.
^|fcWV aVTMV
V||JiCv a^rrois ^|itv avrati
^|ias aiuTOiuf i^|tas avrdt
Masc. Fern. Masc. TJ'em.
G. (THiVToO or (ravro{) trcavrfjs or vavTijs {l|i««v tkirrw
D. <r«avrf or o-avrip trcavTQ or travr^ ii^lv a^irots ityXv avrats
A. o-cavriv or vwrriv (rcavHiv or oxivnfv vfias ai5Tovs 6|mIs avrds
Masc.
Fem.
Neut.
Masc.
Fem.
Nc%U.
G.
D.
A.
lavrod
javnp
iavTov
kLvrfjt
{avH|v
^avToO
iavTo
JaVTMV
iavroCs
{avrwv
{avrats
iavrds
lavrwv
lavroSt
lavT&
contracted into
G.
D.
A.
a6ro0
avrov
a<iT{)«
a{rr^v
a{rro{f
airrip
o.inm
avTots
airrovs
airrwv
aiiraCt
avrd«
avrwv
a^otf
airrd
The contracted forms avrov, &c. must not be confounded with
avrov, &c. from avror. For (r0iuv avrav, &c. see Note.
74
INFLECTION.
[§«1.
Note. The reflexives are compounded of the personal pronouns
and ai/Tos, which appear separately in the plural of the first and
second persons. In Homer they are separated in all persons and
numbers ; as cot avr^, ol avr^, t airr^v. Even in Attic prose <rA&p
avTov, whiaiv ainois (avrais), <r<f}at avrovt (avrds), often occur. He-
rodotus has ffUQtvTovj ortoavTov, io^vrov.
Reciprocal Pronoun.
§ 81. The reciprocal pronoun is aWifkoDv, of one
another^ used only in the dual and plural. It is thus
declined : —
Dual.
G. &XX^\oiv &XXtjXaiv &XXijXoiv
D. dXXifjXoiv &XXijX(uv &XXifXoiv
A. &XXiiXa> dXXiiXa &XX^X«
Plural.
dXXijXttv &XXiiX«v &XXiiX«iv
&XX1JX01S &XXi)Xait &XXifXoi«
dXXijXovt &XXijXaf; AXXi|Xa
PoMcsstve Pronouns.
I
§ 82* The possessive pronouns are e/io?, mi/, a-o^;, thy,
rffiirepof!, our, vfierepo^, your, a^erepo^f their, and the
pootic o?, his. They are declined like adjectives in 09.
for (r<fifTfpos.
Note 2. "Os not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed
by the genitive of airro^, as 6 Trar^p avrov, his father.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
§ 83. The demonstrative pronouns are 0UT09 and o8e,
this, and eVeti/n?, that, ' They are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
O^TOf
avTi)
toOto
<8<
fiU
n{8<
G.
Tovrov
rainjt
•roiiTOV
Tov8c
Tl)flr6c
T0V8«
D.
Tovnp
ravrg
roimf
T^
T^
T^
A.
toOtov
Tttimiv
Toirro
T«{v8<
TTJjVOi
t68<
§83.]
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
75
Dual.
N. A.
roirrtt
ravra
rovrw
ri&8<
rdSc
ra<
G. D.
TOtlrroiv
ravraiv
rovroiv
Plural.
rotvSc
ratvSc
roivSc
N.
ovroi
afrat
ravra
otSc
at8c
rd8c
G.
rvbntv
rovruv
rovroiv
ruvSc
rMvSc
rwv8c
D.
rovrois
ravrais
rovrois
roio-8<
raio-8<
roSo-Sc
A.
Tovrovs
raiiras
ravra
Tovo-Sc
rdo-Sc
rd8i
Singular.
N. ImCvos lKctVT| iKctvo
G. iKctvOV <K<£VT)S ^KcCvov
D. IkcCv<p IkcCvh ^Kctvip
A. iKCtVOV {kcCvT|V JKCIVO
Plural.
N. IkcIvoi ^KcSvai iKctva
G. Ikc^vuv IkcCvwv {Kcfvw
D. Ikc£vois {Kc£vais Ixclvoit
A. IkcCvovs iKcCvas imtva
N. A.
G. D.
IkcCvo)
^KcCvoiv
Dual.
iKcCva
^KcCvaiv
IkcCvm
^KcCvoiv
Note 1. 'EKcicor is regular except in the neuter cWvo. "Oht is
merely the article 6 with the inseparable particle -8e added. For
its accent, see § 28, N. 3.
Other demonstratives will be found among the pronominal adjec-
tives (§ 87, 1).
Note 2. The demonstratives, including some adverbs (§ 87, 2),
may be emphasized by the addition of long t, before which a short
vowel is dropped. Thus ovroai, avnjt, tovti ; 68i, ^8i, rofit ; rovrout,
ravri, Toxrrmpi ; Toaoxrroo'i, o)d(, ovratai.
Note 3. Herodotus has rovreav in the feminine (not in the mas-
culine or the neuter) for tovtwi'. (For aireatv, see § 79, 1, N. 6.)
Homer has roio-deo-crt or roto-dco-t for roto-dc. Keivos is Ionic and
poetic for (Kewos.
76
INFLECTION.
l§84.
iy^i
!< :
IntcrrogatlTe luid Indefinite Pronouns.
§ 84. 1. The interrogative pronoun rtV, rt, who?
which? what? always takes the acute on the first syllable.
The indefinite pronoun rt?, tI, ant/ one^ some one, is en-
clitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last syllable.
2. These pronouns are thus declined : —
Imterrooative.
N. t£$ t(
0. tCvos, Toii
D. rlv^, T<p
A. rlva rl
Singular.
Indefinite.
rVf ti
rivtfs, Tov
TivA tI
Dual,
N. A.
T^ve
riW
G. D.
tCvoiv
Plural.
TIVOIV
N.
tCvcs
rlva
TiWs
G.
t(v«v
rivMV
D.
rUn
TMr£
A.
rCvof
rlva
Tivds
Tivd
Tivd
For the indefinite plural rim there is a form Srra (Ionic Satra).
Note 1. Oihis and fi^iy, poetic for ov^tis and uriBtU, no one, are
declined like rtr.
Note 2. The acute accent of tU is never changed to the grave
(§ 23, 1, Note). The forms tIj and ri of the indefinite pronoun
seldom occur with the gi-ave accent, as they are enclitic (§ 27).
The Ionic has reo and rev for tov, Wy for t^, rtav for rivtav, and
rcoto-t for rim ; also the same forms as enclitics 'for tov, t^, &c.
3. "AXKof;, other, is declined like avT6<i (§ 79, 1), hav-
ing dWo in the neuter singular.
§ 85. The indefinite ^eiva, such a ous^, is sometimes
indeclinable, and is sometimes declined as follows : —
l§84.
8 86.]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
77
Singular.
Plural.
(All Geuders.)
(Masc.)
N.
8<iya
Selves
G.
Sctvos
8c(v«>v
D.
8<tvi
A.
8€tva
SciVM
Relative Pronouns*
§ 86, The relative pronouns are 09, rj, 8» who, and
o<rTt9, ^Tt9, o T£, whoevev. They are thus declined : —
Sin^
lular.
1
N.
8s
A
8
G.
ol
^
oS
N. A. fi
D.
*
6
<?
G. D. otv
A.
8v
<|v
8
Jhial.
alv olv
N.
G.
D.
A.
Plural.
ot ot
«&v «&v
ols als
cits fts
&
«Sv
ols
&
N.
G.
D.
A.
N. A.
G. D.
N.
G.
D.
A.
80TIS
oJtivos, 8tov
tprivi, Sry
8vTlVtt
olvTivoiv
Singular.
■fJTlS
4|onvos
IJItivi
4|vTiva
Dual.
&TIVC
alvTivoiv
Plural.
otrivcs atrtves
«&VTiV«»V, 8t»V «&VTlVttV
olvTio-i, 8x010*1 alaruri
oHoTivas AoTivas
otrivos, 8tov
8 Tl
otvTivoiv
&Tiva
Svrivttv, 8twv
olo^uri, 8Touri
&riva
Note 1. "Oortf is compounded of the relative 5r and the indefi-
nite Tis, and is called the indejinile relative. Each part is declined
separately. For the accent see § 28, N. 3. It has a plural form
Hrra (Ionic Aaaa), from & Srra (§ 84, 2), for Sriva. "O rt is thus
written (sometimes 5, u) to distinguish it from Sn, that.
78
INFLECTION.
H87.
ii
i;
il
Note 2. Homer has oov, ajs, for ol, Ijs. The following are the
peculiar Homeric forms of ooriy : —
Singular.
N. 8Ti« 8 TTl
G. 8t<v, Srrco, ttrrtv
D. Srcfp
A. (Sriva 8 m
Plural.
Ktcmv
tfrivas
Herodotus has orrv, orey, orca>v, 6Teot<rti and cfcaa (Note 1).
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
§ 87. 1 • There are many pronominal adjectives which cor-
respond to each other in fonn and meaning. The following
are the most important : —
IntarrogatiTe. Indefinite.
■w6<xo%; howmuchl iroirds, of a cer-
quantus ? tain quantity.
DemonftratiTe. Relatire.
(rbaoi), roaoffSe, 8<roi, &K6aot, as
roaovTOi, so viuch, as many,
much, tantus. quantus.
JTOJOS; of what voihi, of a cer- (roTos), ToiStrSe, ofos, iwoioi, of
kind ? quails ? tain kind. toiovtos, such, which kind,
talis. [such] as, qua-
ils.
TrfKlKos ; how old?
how large ?
Kdade, ttiXikov- of which age or
Tos, so old or size, [as old] as,
so large, [as large] as.
irbrtpoi ; which of vdrepos {oT Tore- frepos, the one or ow&rtpoi, whicJi-
the two. p6s), one of two the other {of ever of the two.
(rare). two).
The pronouns t/i, tU, &c. form a corresponding series : —
rli ; who ? rU, any one. 88e, oCtoj, this, 8s, 8arii, who,
this one. which.
Note. TAo-os and roios seldom occur in Attic prose, tiIXIkos never.
Toa6aSe, roibaSe, and Tr)\iK6aSe are declined like t6(tos and Toia ; as
TwrSffSe, Toaifif, roffovBe, &c., — TotAffJc, roiA.8€ (d), roibvSe. (See § 28,
Note 3. ) TcxroDros, rotoSros, and TrfKiKovTos are declined like oiros (omit-
v^
^
VH "^^
%
\^
H
who,
I
$88.]
VERBS.
79
ting the first t in roirov, rouro, &c. ), except that the neuter singular has
or 01' ; as roioOros, tomuJttj, toioOto or toiovtov ; gen. TOioirov, tom6-
Ttit, kc.
2. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other,
like the adjectives given above. Such are the following : —
/ ^
InterrogatiTe.
iroO; where?
Indefinite.
ro'i, somewhere.
v^: which way? v-^, some way,
hmo f somehow.
TToi; whither? vol, to some
place.
v6dev; vfhence? woOtv, from
some place.
DemoDstratiTe. RelstiTe.
i^fda), ivravda, off, Hirov, where.
^K€i, there.
(ri), T^fie, Ta«5Tu, Vi fi^Vf v^hich way,
this way, thus, as.
cKeiae, thither, 6t, Bvoi, whither.
\t
\J^
'^
\ ■
irwi; how?
vbTt; whm,?
vrfvlKa ; at what
time?
{rbeev), {ipOep), 80ev, ivbOev,
(Keidev, thence. whence.
ir(S)i,insomeway, (ti&s), (&$), <S5c, il)s. Situs, in which
somehow. oiirui, thus. way, as.
irore, at some
time.
T&re, then.
{rrfvlKa), TijvtKd-
Se, ttjwkoOto,
at that time.
Sre, inr&re, when.
TjplKa, dirrfviKa, at
which time,
when.
ii
Note. There are no demonstratives corresponding to iroO and vdt, and
equivalents of different fonn are given above. Forms which seldom or never
occur in Attic prose are in ( ). "Ei'^o and evOev are relatives in prose, vjhere,
whence ; as demonstratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like iv$a
Kai tvda, here and there, ^vdep Kai fvdev, on both sides.
The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (§ 27, 2.)
VERBS.
§•88. 1. The Greek verb has three voices, the active,
middle, and passive.
Note. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject
performs an action upon himself or for his own benefit (§ 199),. but
sometimes it is not distinguished from the active voice in meaning.
The passive differs from tne middle in form in only two tenses, the
future and the aorist.
i
!
i
80
INFLECTION.
[§89.
If.
2. Deponent verbs are those which have no active
voice, but are used in the middle or passive forms with
an active sense.
Note. Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the
middle form. A few, wliich have an aorist (sometimes a future) of
the psissive form, are called passive deponents ; while the others are
called middle 'leponents.
§ 88. There are five moods^ the indicative, subjunc-
tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive. To these are
added, in the conjugation of the verb, p^-ticiples of all
the principal tenses.
Note. The first four moods, as opposed to the infinitive, are
called Jinite moods. The last four, as opposed to the indicaHve, are
called dependent moods.
§ 90. 1. There are seven tenses^ the present, imper-
fect, perfect, pluperfect, aorist, future, and future perfect.
The imperfect and pluperft ct are found only in the in-
dicative. The future and futui'e perfect are wanting in
the suljunctive and imperative. The future perfect be-
longs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes has
the meaning of the active or middle.
2. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect in-
dicative are called primary (or principal) tenses ; the
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called
secondary (or historical) tenses.
Note 1. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in
all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the second
future (passive). These tenses are generally of more primitive forma-
tion than the first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, &c. Very few verbs
have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the two forms gen-
erally differ in meaning (§ 92, 5).
Note 2. The aorist corresponds to the indefinite or historical per-
fect in Latin, and the Greek perfect corresponds generally to the
English perfect or to the definite perfect in Latin.
Note 3. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the paradigm
of the regular verb (§ 96), therefoi-e, includes paits of three different
verbs.
§92.]
TENSE STEMS.
ai
§ 91. There are three numbers, as in nouns, the singu-
lar, the dual, and the plural.
In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and opta-
tive, there are three persons in each number, the first,
the second, and the third ; in each tense of the impera-
tive there are two, the second and the third.
Note. The first person dual is the same as the first person plural, ex-
cept in a very few poetic forms (§ 113, N. 3). This person is therefore
omitted in the paradigms.
Tense Stems.
§ 92. 1. In a verb which has but one stem, like Xv'w, the
stem is the fundamental part which appears in all fonns of the
verb (§ 32, 2). In Xuw this fixed part is Av-, which is seen
equally (though with change in the quantity of v) in XtJ-to,
i-Xv-ov, Xv-crw, tAv-<ra, Xt-Xv-Ka, cXc-AiJ-kcii/, \€-Av-^ai, iXe-Xv-firjVt
€-Xv-6r}V. Xv^rjfTOfiau So in Xiy-m, ttXc/c-o).
2. The stem which is the basis of the present and imper-
fect, however, is often not the same as the stem which appears
in some or all of the other tenses. Thus in AeiTro (§ 95) , we
find the stem X«7r- in most of the tenses ; but in the second
aorists c-Xitt-ov and i-Xnr-6ii-qv we find the stem XiTr-. In ^atVo)
(§95) we have <j)aiv- only in the present and imperfect, and a
stem <f>av- (sometimes in the form ^-qv-) as the basis of the
other tenses. Again, in fiavOdvu), learn, we have the stem fiSiO-
in cfiaOov ; and in Xafipdvo), take, we have Xd/3- in eXa^oi'. (See
the Catalogue of Verbs.) As these stems XXir-, <f>av-, fiaO-,
Xa)8-, are simpler and more primitive than Xcitt-, <^ai»^, f^avOav-,
Xafipav; they are called the simple stems of these verbs.
Note. The simple stem, or (in verbs like Xv-w, Xey-a) the sin-
gle stem, is often identical with the root (§ 32, 2, Note) ; as XXtt-,
Xaj3-, Xv-, Xfy-, ir\(K-. In other verbs the stem is formed by adding
a suffix to the root ; as in Tt/ua-o) the single stem nua- (the same as
that of the noun n/n^, § 37, 1) is formed from the root rt- by adding
fia ; so in (fmlvm the simple stem ^av- is itself derived from the root
<Pa'. The term simple stem or stem (if there is but one) denotes the
6
82
INFLECTION.
[I 02.
■I
simplest form which appears in the conjugation of a verb, whether
it is the same as the root or not.
8. The stems of verbs are called vowel stems or consonant
stems, and the latter are called mtUe stems (including labial^
pedaled^ and lingual stems) or liquid stems, according to their
final letter. Thus we name the stems of tfukiut ((^lAc-) , Xcitto)
(XftTT-, Xiir-), rpifiut (rpi/S-), ypd<fxa (ypa^), itAcko) (ttXck-),
ffivSyoi (0€vy-, <f>vy-)^ irtCOia {yrtid-^ iri^-), <f>aiv<o ((^iv-, <^i'-),
0-TcAA(i) (OTCXX-, OTCX").
Note. A verb which has a vowel stem in all its tenses is called
a pure verb ; and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem in all its
tenses is called a mute or a liquid verb.
4. It will be seen by the synopsis (§ 95), that even the sin-
gle stem \v- appears in several modified forms in different tenses
of X.VU} ; as Xv->, Avo--, AcXvk-, and Xv^c- (or Xv^-) enlarged to
Xv^i/o--. In ifxuvo} the simple stem ^k- appears also as ^i/v-,
vcfJHiv^ fjtavOt- (or tfnivOrj-)^ <f>av€{r))-, and <l>avri<r-. In XctVo) we
find X«i/r-, XeXciTT-, Xci00c(i7)- ; and Xitt- is modified in Xe-XotTr-.
The form of stem which belongs to each tense (or group of
tenses) is called a tense stem^ and the forms of the verb which
are based upon it constitute a tense system.
The following tense stems * are distinguished in the Greek
verb : —
I. The Present stem, of the present and imperfect of all
voices ; as Xij- in Xv-w, c-Xv-ov, Xv-ofiat, i-\v-6firiv ; fftaiv- in <^aiV-<o,
«^ii^oi', &c. ; XciTT- in XeiTr-o), ^Xcitt-ov, XciV-o/uiai, &c.
II. The Future stem, of the future active and middle ; as
XiJcr-, in Xvtr-o), Xva-ofiai ; Xcii/r- in Xeii/^-w, Xci^-o/nat ; tfMvt- in
(<ftavi-u)) (fnivCif {<f>av€-ofiai) <l>avovfiai. Tlie last form (in e) be-
longs to liquid stems.
* The term tense stem is here used, in conformity with general usage in
elementary works, to denote the fixed form which (with certain internal
modifications) is the basis of a tense. Strictly, the present stem of Xiyu is
X«7- -4- a variable vowel (o or e) ; the aorist stem of \6u) is \v(r- ■+■ a or e,
fcc : see § 112, 4. This variable element is not included in the tense stems
M they are here given.
192.]
TENSE STEMS.
83
u
III. The Firs'*" AoRisT stem, of the aorist active and mid-
dle ; as Avo" in c-Awr-a, i-\v<T-d-fir)v ; <f>r)v in €-<(ir}vu, i-<fnjv-dfiriv.
Tlie last form (without a) belongs to liquid stems.
IV. The Perfect stem, of the perfect, pluperfect, and fu-
ture perfect. Of this there are four forms : (a) The Perfect-
Middle stem ; as AcXv- in ).i\vfiai and i\t\v-firp^y AcXcitt- in
Xiktifi-fxai and iKiXtifx-fi-qv (§ 16, 3), irffftav- in Triijta<T-fiaL and
€ir€<f>a(T-tirjv (§16,6,N.4). (6) The Perfect- Active stem ; as
AcAv-fc- in AcAuK-a and McAu/c-eii', irc<^av-K- (§ 16, 5) in 7r€<^ay-Ka
and e-Tret^y-Kciv. (<?) The Future- Perfect stem ; as AeAi)-o- in
XtXvv-ofiaiy AcActi/r- in AcAei^-o/iai. (rf) The Second- Perfect stem ;
as AcAoiTT- in AcAoiir-a and ^-AcAoiV-cii', wtffirjv- in vii^rfv-a and
c-7re«^i;i/-eii/.
V. The Second-Aorist stem, of the second aorist active and
middle ; as Aiir- in l-kiir-ov and ^-Aitt-o/xi/v.
VI. The First Passive stem, of the first aorist and the first
future passive ; as (a) Av^c- (or Av^-) in i-\vdri-v and (Av^e'-w)
Audu) (subj.), Aci<^^c(i/)- in i-X€i<f>Brf-v and (Aci^dc-d)) Ack^^cu
(subj.), tftavde^t))- in €-<t>(ivBri-v and ((^ai^dc-u)) <^i/^a> (subj.) ;
(i) Av^i;<r- in XvOrja-Ofiai, X.€i<f>Or)(r- in \€ufi$rj<T-oiiai.
VII. The Second Passive stem, of the second aorist and
the second future passive ; as (a) 4taLV€{ri) in €-<f>dvrj-v and
(<^ve-(a) (^ai'cu (subj.) ; {b] rfnivria-- in (^i/i/tr-o/mat.
Note. The three verbs Xi5«, Xe/ir«, and tpaluu, from which the preced-
ing examples are taken, give a general idea of the most common forms which
the seven tense stems assume.
5. The principal parts of a Greek verb (by giving which we
describe the verb) are the first person singular of the present,
future, first aorist, and (first or second) perfect indicative
active, the perfect and (first or second) aorist indicative pas-
sive, with the second aorist (active or middle) when one
occurs. E.g.
Ada), Xivta, tkvtra, XtXvKa, XfXvfiai. tXvdrfv.
ArtVo), X«t^fi>, XcXoiTra, XtXeinfuu, iXei(f)dr]Vf eXifrot .
^iVa>, (f>avii, €(f)riva, m<l>ayKa (and frc'^i^i/a), Trc^cr/xat, ((frnvdrfv (and
84
INFLECTION.
I §03.
Ilpdirtra), ^/o, npa^a^ ftrpa^a, nirrpaxa (2 pf. ninpuya), niirpayfuu,
ivpa\Briv.
2T«XXf), .s<?»ir/, orrfXu, ftrrriXn, >[<rraKKa) itrraXfiat, ttrr&Ktfv.
We thus give every tense system which is in use, with two tenses
formed from the perfect stem. Verbs with two perfects active, like
n-pncro-o), or with two aorists passive, like 0aiVa>, are very rare.
6. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the present,
future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. B.ff.
BovKofuu, fvixh, /Soi'Xijo-o/iai, /3r/3oi;Xi;pat, t^ovKrfdrjv.
riypoftai, Itccnme^ ytufivofim, ytyivr}ftai, tytvanrjv.
(AlBfOfuu) aidovfiai, respavt, aiScVo/iat, fjtifiTfini, rjdiadrjp,
2K(7rro/xat, vieic^ o-Kc^ofiai, iaKtixfuu, taKtyjrafirfv.
Conjugation*
§ 93. 1. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices,
moods, tenses, numbers, and persons in tlieir proper order.
2. These various parts of the verb are formed as
follows : —
(rt). By modifications of the stem itself in forming the dif-
ferent tense stems (§ 92, 4). These are explained in §§ 107-111.
(A). In all cases, by adding certain syiluliles to the tense
stems ; as in kv ofitv, Avo-cre, AcAu-rat, AcAvK-are. These sylla-
bles and their composition are explained in §§ 112-117.
(r). In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pre-
fixing c to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant), or
lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins witli a short vowel) ;
as in e-Au-oi/, c-Aucr-e, c-^T/iz-aro, c-AeAvK-cti/, and in riKovov, T^Kova-a,
imperfect and aorist of ukovw, to hear. This prefix or length-
ening does not belong to the tense stem, but disappears in the
dependent moods and in the participle.
A prefix, seen in Ac- of Ae'AuKa and AcAci/x/txai, in ttc- of ttc-
<f>aa-ixai, and e of tcrraXuai (§ 97, 4), for wliich a lengthening of
the initial vowel is found in ^Wayfiai (dAAay-) from dAAdo-o-w
(§ 97, 4), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and remains In
all the moods and in the participle.
These prefixes and lengthenings (e), called augment (increase) ,
are explained in §§ 99- 106.
iw.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN n.
W
8. There are two principal forms of conjugation of
Greek verbs, that of verbs in o) and that of verbs
in fit.
NoTK. Veibs in fu form h Hniiill class, compared with tliose in u, and are
distinguished in their iuHection almost excluHively in the present and second-
aurist systems, in the other systems agreeing with verbs in u. The conjiw
gation of the latter is therefore given first, und under this head are stated
the general principles which belong e([uully to both coiyugations.
1 .
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Q.
§ 94. The prese it stem of a verb in w is found by drop-
ping <i) of the i)reseni- indicative active, or o/xai of the present
indicative middle ; as Ava> (\v-), Xci'ttw (\ci7r-), irpdcra-ui (Tr/juo-o--) ;
j3ovkofiat, (/3ou\-), yiyvofiai (ytyv-).
Note. The simple stem, when there is one distinct from the present
stem, must be learnt by observation and by familiarity wiiii the principles
upon which the present stem is formed from the simple stem (§108).
§ 95. 1. Tlie following synopses include : —
I. All the tenses of Xvu), loose.
II. All the tenses of Xcitto), leave ; the second perfect and
pluperfect active and the second aorist active and middle be-
ing in heavy- faced ty\iQ.
III. All the tenses of ^aiVw, show ; the future and aorist
active and middle and the second aorist and second future
passive being in heavy-faced type.
The synopsis of Xvo), with tho iorms in heavier type in the synop-
ses of XftTTo) and (baiva, will thus show the full conjugation of the verb
in a>; and only these forms are inflected in § 96. For the peculiar
inflection* of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs
with consonant stems, see § 97.
Note. The paradigms in § 96 include the perfect imperative active of
Xi5w, Xf/irw, and if>alvu}, although it is hardly possible that this tense can
actually have been formed in any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, ui
some verbs (§ 118, 2, Note), it is given here to complete the illustration of
the forma. For the perfect subjunctive and optative active, which are
more common in periphrastic forms, see § 118, 2.
For the quantity of v in \6u, see § 109, 1, N. 1.
i
■r
86
INFLECTION.
I. XiH».
PASSIVE VOICE.
I. Xu-
IV. (a) XeXif.
IV. (c) XeXuc-
VI. (a) Xi;(?e(7;)-
VI. (6) XMi;-<r-
[§95.
ACTIVE
VOICE.
I. \0-
Present
Imperfect
Indicative.
Xvtt
{Xvov
SuIfjuTictive,
XVM
II. Xuff-
Future
XifVM
111. Xi7<r-
Aorist
IXwa
Xvo-0
IV. (6) \eX»;.„-
Perfect
Pluperfect
X^XuKli
IXcXvKliv
XiXvKw or
XiXvKtbs «(
MIDDLE
VOICE.
I. X?-
Present
Imperfect
Xi)0|uu
4Xv<S|fct|v
X^|MU
II. \v<r-
Future
Xv(ro|uit
III. XuV-
Aorist
^v<rd|iT|v
Xto-wiiai
IV. (a) XcXi;-
Perfect
Pluperfect
X^'iifiai
4XcXv|ii|v
XiXvii^'OfA
Present and Imperfect ) „ .,,.,„
Perfect and Pluperfect I ^"^' "' *^ ^*^^^*-
Future Perfect XcXvovimi
Aorist IXv9r\v
Future Xv9^ov)tai
XvOw (for \v94u)
[§95.
95.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Q.
I. XvM.
Optative.
Xvoifu
Xv<roi|&b
XtHraifjit
SXcXvKOi|&t or
X(XVK«1>S cCl]V
XvoC|M)V
X«Xv(ro{|&ip>
Xv6<(i|v
XvOT|<roC|Ai|i>
MIDDLE VOICE.
Xik>v
Xvc<r9ai
PASSIVE VOICE.
XitOifri
87
ACTIVE
VOICE.
Imperative.
XOi
Infinitive.
Xilciv
Participle
Xvirciv
X^KTttV
X«<rov Xvo-ai
[X^vKi, § 95, 1, N. ] X«XvK^vai
Xvo-r,?
XcXvK(l>S
Xvi{|UVOS
Xvcro<|Jiipr
XiKTCordai
X\i<rtf|i«vos
Xv<raC|Mpr
XOo-oi
XvcrcurOai
Xv<rd}uvos
XiXv|l/<VO$ iCT|V
X^vo-o
XcXij^ai
X(Xv|A^S
XtXWc -flat
XcXvo^lMVOt
Xvei)vat
XvOtft
Xv9^«veat
Xvei|0^|MVO«
88
INFLECTION.
[§96.
1< !•
Tense-stem.
I. XetTT-
II. X«^-
for XetTT-ff-
III. [Xetrl^-]
IV. (d) XeXotTT-
(8 109, 3)
V. XtT-
I. Xetir-
II. Xet^-
IV. (a) XeXetTT-
As Passive.
V. XtT-
II. XcCiTM (\iir-).
ACTIVE VOICE.
{Present
Imperfect
Future
Aorist
Indicative.
\el\l/w
[Act^o, &c.]
2 Perfect XiXoiira
2 Pluperfect {XcXotir«tv
2 Aorist IXiirov
MIDDLE VOICE.
J Present
Imperfect
Future
! Perfect
Pluperfect
Xeiirofiat
i\eiir6iJLr}v
Suljunctivi.
Xc/ttw
Not in good use.
X«XoCirA) or
XcXoiir«bs «&
XCirw
\elvufiat
'\el\j/ofiai
XAet/ifiat (§ 16, 8) "KtXti/JLfxivos Sf
iXeXelfi/iijv
2 Aorist 4Xiir6|ii|v
PASSIVE VOICE.
X(irM|uu
I. X«T- Present and Imperfect j ^^^^ ^^ .,^ ^^^^
IV. (a) XcXctTT- Pertect and Pluperfect )
^^- lg\g"^J*^''^" j Aorist Ae/0V X«0^w (for Xei0Ww)
VI. (6) Xct0^?7-<r- Future XeupffT^ofuu
\
i ■
i
[§96.
i
ft
f t
]
§95.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Q.
II. \iCtrw (Xiir-).
89
ACTIVE VOICE.
Optative.
\diroifii
Imperative.
XetTre
Infinitive.
\el\f/eiv
X«Xo£iroi|ii or [X^owre, § 95, N. ] XcXoiir^^ai
AcXoiirtbs cCi)v
X(iroi|u
XCirc
Xtirciv
\eiTotnriv
"Kelirov
MIDDLE VOICE.
Xelweffdai
XiiroC)M|v XiiroO
Participle.
XcXoiirt&s
XiiriSv
\uTr6iJxvot
XcXet^^ot (§ 16, 1 k 4) XeXct/iM^TOt
Xiir^(r6ai
Xiirdfuvos
PASSIVE VOICE.
XeXeiil/olfiify
\€\el\//e<rdai
XcXei^ifievoi
Xfupdelrjv
\el<f>Orfn
\ei<p6^vai
\ei<peels
\€i<p07i<ro{fJLr)it
"KcKftOi^tadai
X€i<p$T)<r6ft€vos
r
90
INFLECTION.
[§W.
\
\i
Tense-stem.
I. <paiv'
II. Nove-
ll I. ^r)v-
III. (JtaCvM (^v-).
ACTIVF. VOICE.
Indicative.
{ Present <palvu
i Imperfect Itftawov
Future {<t>&viw) ^avA
Aorist l^ijva
IV. (6) iretftayK- for j Perfect ir^0a7Afo
ire0oj'-/c-(§16,5) j Pluperfect iire<f>dyK€iv
IV. (d) ire<f>r)v
(§109,3)
I. ^ev-
il, tpdve'
III. ipijy-
IV. (a) Te0ai"
2 Perfect iriiftjjva
2 Pluperf. iir€<f>iiv€iv
MIDDLE VOICE.
i Present iftalpofMi
Imperfect i«paiv6fjir)v
Subjunctive,
ipcUvtt
ve^dyKu or
v€<payKCi)S &
ireiffT^vu or
4>atv<t>fuu
Future
Aorist
J Perfect TlipacfMi
I Pluperfect iveipdafiiiv
I. ^atf-
IV. (a) ire^f-
VI. (a) ^cw^cCtj).
VI. (ft)
VII. (a) 0ai'e(i7)-
VII. (p) imvTiff-
PASSIVE VOICE.
Present and Imperfect ) „ . ,,. , ,,
T> «• i. I ni -p ^ ( '*»?«< as %n Middle.
Perfect and Pluperfect )
Aorist iipdp0T}v
Future Wanting.
2 Aorist ^dvi)v
2 Future ^v^ano|Mu
ipafdw (for 4><i^p04(i))
^v& (for ^piu)
[§w.
8 96.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 0.
91
Optative,
(paluoifii
iiipap^oifu) ^voCfu
III. <^a<vM(^v.).
ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
(ipavieiv) ^vctv {<f>wiuv) ^y&v
j ::l'SriZ [W0«7.e.§95,N.] ,e^7.^.a. .e^a^^ci.
j ::f &r. t''*"'"' « ^5' ^-3 -*'"'^- -0'^'"^^
ire^ijyti); cFi;*'
:l
I
^awolfJLifv
MIDDLE VOICE.
^mUvov <palveff0at
<t>au>6ftM»ot
J (^awcffdot) J (^m6mci'oj)
Te^dl'dot (§ 16, 4) TC^CMT/UCTOS
PASSIVE VOICE.
<Pay$etri»
/
^pAvBtfTi
^vik
• ' * • . .,»
<l>av99jvai
tftaudHs
92
INFLECTION.
[§95.
2. The following table shows the meaning of each tense of
\vu)f Acoro), and <^aiV<u, in the indicative, imperative, infinitive,
and participle of the active voice : —
I. AiSw.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Pres.
/ loose or, am
loosing.
Loose thou.
To loose or to be
loosing.
Loosing.
Imp.
I loosed or
was loosing.
Fut.
I sJmU loose.
To be about to
loose.
About to loose.
Aor.
J loosed.
Loose thou.
To loose or to
Having loosed
(§202,1.)
have loosed.
or loosing.
Perf.
I have loosed.
(§118, 2, N.)
To have loosed.
Having loosed.
Plup.
I liad loosed.
The middle of \vu> commonly means to release for one^s self, or
to release some one belonging to one\ self hence to ransom (a captive)
or to deliver (one's friends from danger). See § 199, 3.
In the passive the tenses are changed merely lo suit that voice;
as / am loosed, I was loosed, J shall be loosed, I haiu- been loosed, &c.
The future perfect passive means / shall have been loosed (i.e. before
some future event referred to).
I. I
II. AcClTM.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Pres.
I leave ov am
leaving.
Leave tliou.
To leave or to
be leaving.
Leaving.
Imperf.
I left or waa
leaving.
Fut.
I shall leave.
To be about to
leave.
About tu leave.
2 Perf.
Iliave left (some-
times / have
failed or am
wanting).
(§ 118, 2, N.)
To have left.
Having left.
2 Plup.
I had left.
2 Aor.
I left.
Leave thou.
To leave or to
Having left or
(§202,1.)
have left.
leaving.
The passive of Xeiira is used in all tenses, with the meanmgs
/ am lefi, I was lefi, I haoe been left, I had been left, I shall have been
left, I was left, I shall be left. It also means lam inferior {left behind).
t§95.
§96.]
TENSES.
98
The middle of X*/ir« means properly to remain (leave one's self), in
which sense it diifers little (or not' at all) from the passive. But
the 2nd aor. 4\iir6fjLriu often means / left for myself (?is a memorial or
monument^ • «a with the present and future middle in composition.
't\nr6iiiriv ;n Homer sometimes means I tens left behind or teas inferior^
like the passive.
III. ^a(v».
Indicative.
Pres. / show or am
showing.
Imperf. / showed or loas
showing.
Fut. / shall show,
Aor. / showed.
1 Perf. / have shoivn.
1 Plup. / had shotvn.
2 Perf. / have appeared.
Imperative.
Show thou.
Infinitive.
To show.
Participle.
Showing.
To be about to
show.
To show or to
have shoivn.
Show thou.
(§ 202, 1.)
(§ 118, 2, N.) To have shown. Having shown.
About to show.
Having shoivn
or showing.
(§ 118, 2, N.) To have ap- Having ap-
peared, peared.
2 Plup. / had appeared.
The passive of <i>alv<ti means properly to he shoion or made evident;
the middle, to appear (show one's self). But these two meanings are
often hard Lo distinguish, and it is therefore sometimes impossible
to decide whether (pahofiai, irf<paafiai, &c. are passive or middle.
The 2nd fut. pass. <pav^aonat, I shall appear or be shown, does not
differ in sense from the fut. mid. tpavoVfiai ; but i<pdv6riv is generally
passive, / was shown, while 4<p<ivrtv is / appeared. The aor. mid.
i<priv^fir)u is transitive, 7 shoioed ; it is rare and poetic in the simple
form, but air€<privdfn/)v is common in the meaning / declared.
Note. The meaning of the various forms of the subjunctive
and optative cannot be fully understood until the constructions are
explained in the Syntax. But the following examples will make
them clearer than a mere translation of the forms, some of which
(e.g. the future optative) cannot be used alone : —
AvQifxey (or Xiffoifiev) ai/rSv, let US loose him; fiii \i<rrji ahriv, do not
loose him. 'Eav Xww (or Xuo-w) out^j', xa'pi^<''*t» if ^ (shall) loose him,
he will rejoice. "Epxo/nai, W avrhu Xuw (or \i(Tu), I am coming that I
may loose him. EWe Kioifjii (or Xvaaifit) avrSv, that I may loose him.
El \voifii (or Xicraifjii) avrhv, xa^pot &v, if I should loose him, he would
rejoice. "^HXeou 'Im avrhv Xvoifu (or X^xraifn), 1 came that I might loose
him. ETwov '6ti avrhv Xvoiini, I said that I was loosing Mm; etitov 2ti
avrhv Xiffaifii, I said that I had loosed him; fhov Jrt avrhv \i<roifit, I
said that I would loose him. For the difference between the present
and aorist in these moods, see § 202, 1; for the perfect, see § 202, 2.
if
I
i
94 INFLECTION. [§ 96.
§ 96. Avto in all its tenses, «,nd Xenro) and <l>aiva> in
I. Xte(Xv),
PRESENT.
Active
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Optative,
S.J 2.
(3.
Xii«*
X^
Xiqi
X^it
Xtei
(3.
Xvrrov
Xilrrov
XVT|T0V
Xvi|rov
XVMTOV
XV0<TT|V
XtSo|uv
XVCTC
Xiiovo-i
XtM»|MV
Xvi|t<
IMPERFECT.
Xvoi|icv
XvOlTt
XVMCV
S.J2.
(3.
IXvov
IXvct
IXv(
(3.
JXV'CTOV
iXu^iiv
■
p. -^2.
(3.
IXvoffccv
4Xvtrf
IXvov
FUTURE.
8.^2.
Xv'o^
XWnt
Xv'o^i
XtiSo-oiiii
Xvo>oi«
Xi;<r«i
-■\l
XWcyev
Xvvrrev
^
XvVIHTOV
XvO-0<T1)V
P.] 2.
(3.
Xvovvtn
Xvox>i)i(v
XwOiTC
Xvooiiv
]
}
I i
I
1,
r
\
i
f 96.1 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O. 95
the tenses above mentioned (§ 95), are thus inflected : —
to loose.
Voice.
PRESENT.
Imperative. Infinitive.
Ma.-
XWtw
p 5 2. XvCTOV
(.3. Xu
Xv«T€
TMV
p.
(2. XiJ,
(3. Xv.
Xvciv
XWruirav
or XvdvTttv
Participle.
Xiiicav, Xvovo-a,
X«ov (§ 68)
:;: ?
FUTURE.
Xflwv (§ «8)
96
8. -12.
(3.
Indicative,
fkwra
IX\Kra«
IXvcc
p. <■ 2. IXvo-arov
* ( 3. IXv<rdTT)v
\<.2.
4Xv<ra|MV
P. < 2. fKirart
( 3. IXvcrav
S. -j 2.
(3.
-]3:
p. ■<2.
13.
XAvKtt
XAvKas
XAVKC
X«XvKarov
XcXvKaruv
XcXvKafuv
XcXvKarc
XcXvKatrt
INFLECTION.
AORIST.
Subjunctive.
XvoTjt
Xi$<rg
XiS<n)Tov
XvcniTov
Xv<n)T<
XwCMTl
PERFECT
[§ 9«.
Active Voice qj
Optative.
Xv<rai|u
Xvo-ait, XWnat
Xiio-cu, Xv(rfi<
XtMraiTov
Xv<rafrt)v
Xv(rai|MV
XiitratTf
Xvo-OKV, Xt}o-«iav
X«X*K« (§ 95, 1, N.) X«XOkoi|ii (§96, 1,N.)
XcXviqis
XcXvK^I
X(XvKT|rov
XcXvKT)TOV
XcXvK«a|JMv
XcXvKr)T«
XcXvKOMn
XcXvKOlf
X«XvKOi
XcXvKOlTOV
XcX«ko£tt)v
XcXtSKOifUV
XtXvKOlTC
XcXvKotcv
PLUPERFECT.
S. ■J2.
(3.
*;
■» If
IXcXvKCiv
4X«X^KCIS
IXcAVKCl
4XcXvKClT0V
4XcXvkc£tt)v
IXcXvKClffcCV
IXcXvKcirc
4XcXiiKc<rav
or ^cXvKcio'av
[§ M.
Voice qf
at
lav
5, 1,N.)
I
I
I 96]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
\)7
Xt!a» (e(m/mu«(£).
AORIST.
Imperative. Infinitive,
Participle.
HI
Xvo-dTM
XOtrav (§ 68)
HI
Xiio-etrov
XvtrdTMv
p. J3.
Xvo-arc
Xvo'drcM'av
PERFECT.
XAvKc (§95, 1, N.) XcXvK^vai
XcXvK^TM
X(X«Ki&9, XcXvKvia,
XcXvK^ (§ 68)
HI
XcXtSxCTOV
XcXvK^r«»v
( 2. XcXvKcrc
Is.
XcXvKlT«i9Xiir
98
INFLECTION.
[f 08.
f
' ;i
S.-J2.
MI:
p. ■J2.
S. •J2.
13.
p.p.
(3.
•
X^
PRESENT.
Middle
Indicative.
^SfitiyMncWw.
Optative,
Xiie|uu
Xi»i|, X^fc
Xiwrai
XiM»|iai
XtHi
Xih|Tai
Xvel|fct|v
X^o
XlioiTO
•
Xih<reov
Xil«reov
Xin)v6ov
Xi(i)o^v
XVO<70T|V
Xv<{|Mea
X«}«re<
XlfoVTCU
Xv^|M9a
XiKi<r6«
XiMAVTOl
IMPERFECT.
Xvot|M9a
Xifoi<re<
XlblVTO
IXvrf|fci)v
<XiSov
IX^CTO
ixweov
IXW<r0i|v
IXv^iuOa
IXik<r9<
iXvOVTO
FUTURE.
Xifrofiai
Xikr^, Xilo-ci
Xihrmii
Xv(ro{|LT|v
XtS^oio
XlKTOiTO
Xvo-coOov
Xv<rc(r6ov
•
Xi{(roi(r6ov
Xv<r<$)u6a
XWc<rOc
Xw-OVTUl
ill
[i 06.
Mm
Middle
(eontinusd).
Voice,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN SI,
00
8.
is.
Imperative,
Xiiov
TRESENT.
Injlnitive.
) f2. XtSiofov
XWtOmv
52. Xi;«<ret
3 XWv0MO«v
or XtWipl
or XWv^Mv
Participle.
Xwrfjiivot, Xwo|Uvt|,
Xvrf|Mvov (J 62, 3.)
PUTURE.
XvowOai Xvo^iKvot, -tj, -ov
(§62,3.)
100 INFLECTION.
Il (>■
I ! S. S 2.
1 ^^"
^'\l
! P. -^2.
j f
Il i S. J2.
li "'^^^
f 1 1 p. ^ 2.
1 \ ^3.
I
1 : S. -^2.
1 i (3.
"is.
IXtMrd|iii)v
IXvo-aro
4XikrairOov
4Xv(rd<r6i)v
iXvord|M6a
4Xv<ra(r6c
JXVOUVTO
X^v|jiai
XAvo-ai
X^vrai
2. X^vo^y
X^'4»<r6ov
XcXi{|u6a
X^wrai
..ji
(3.
IX<Xi)(ii)v
IX^VTO
4X(XiIo^v
IXcXi(|ju:0a
iXAvtrOc
IX^VVTO
AORIST.
Subjunctive.
Xvo'«>|uu
Xiiirg
Xvert|T(u
XiioT|<r6ov
XWijvOoif
XutrcificOa
Xif<rT|(r9c
XltVttVTCU
PERFECT.
XcXvfUvof iS
XcXvfUvos ft
XcXv|Uvo8 ^
X(AV|Uv«* ^JTOV
XcXufUvM 4JT0V
XcXvfUvot <&)1€V
XcXv)Uvoi '7jr«
XcXv|Uvok cao%
PLUPERFECT.
[§ 96.
Middle
Optative.
Xv(ra£|fci|v
Xvvaio
Xv<rabTo
XWaio^ov
Xvo-a£(rOT|v
XtwaCiuOa
XihraurOc
XlloXUVTO
V<Xv|i/vot cCi|v
XcXv|iivo« <ti|«
XcXv|iivos cCi)
XfXv|Uv« <t«)rov or ctrov
X(Xv|i^v«i cl^i^v or ctTi)v
XiXv|Uvoi cti|)uv or <l|icv
XcXv)Uvot fti|T« or ctrc
XiXv|&4voi cti]9av or flcv
[§ 96.
§ 9«]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN fl.
101
Middle
(continued).
Foice.
-{I
p. J3.
Imperative.
XOcrai
Xv<rd(r0tt
Xilo-oo-Oov
Xv<rd<r6<i)v
\viratr9t
XvcdtrObxrav
or Xv<rd(r9(«v
AORIST.
Infinitive.
Xtlcao-Oai
Participle.
Xuo-dficvos, -ij, -ov
(§ 62, 3)
PERFECT.
V
I
rov or ctrov
Ptjy or «lTt|v
|KV or ct|JKV
|T« or ctre
|<raip or clcv
5, J 2. XAvox)
■p. 5 ^. X^v(r9ov
( 3. XcXvtrOMv
1^
2. X^vcrOc
P« -^ 3. XcXikrOiMrav
or X«!^ifir0(0ir
X«Xv<r6ai
XcXv|Uvos, -ij, -ov
(§ 32, 3)
"/'
1'
1 ^^^
INFLECTION.
[§96.
I;
X^
1 '
Possiw
m
». Present
Imperfect, Perfect, and
FUTURE Perfect.
i
7n(2tca<iv«.
>ywJ/M»urfm.
Optative
1 i 'S
Xc\i{o-o|iai
XcXiMrrrai
X(Xvaro(|&i|v
XcXvtroio
XcXinroiTO
1 1 ^-{l:
XiXihrctrOov
XcX^oitrOov
X(Xv(ro((rOi]v
1 "^'
XcXiKT^IMOa
X(Xi(o-«re<
X(Xv<rovTai
AORIST.
XcXv(ro(|MOa
XcXifo-otirOc
XtXvtroiVTo
p ' ('•
iXtWrjv
Xve»
Xvd(Ci|v
1 ' •
Xi.%
x«efi
XvOc£i|$
XvOcCi)
ll ''^''
CA1»dT|T0V
XvOfJTOV
XvOfirov
Xv9c(l|T0V, XvOciTov
Xv9ci^TT)v, Xv8(Cti|v
1 '3.
:1
4XvOt)|icv
<Xi«i|rc
IXv6iio«v
XvOMffcCV
XviKiTf
Xv9«kn
XuOcfniuv, Xvd(t|uv
XvO((i|Tf, XvOctrc
XvO((i|vav, XvOctcv
IP
FUTURE.
1 (1.
1 ^ ^^'
XvO^o^fuu
Xv6if|a^, Xv6i)vfi
Xv0^o-cTai
XvOiiirofiiTiv
XT>^<roM>
XvMjvoiTo
\^i\o-w9ov
-
Xv6^(r<Ho^v
Xv6T|<ro(v0i|v
11: i».
Xv0vDO^|M9a
<f
Xv9i|o-o{|u0a
Xv9^o-(n<r9(
XvO^OiVTO
[§96.
§ 96. J
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS IN 42.
103
{co7Uinued).
Voice.
Pluperfect Passive, same as Middle.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
X<XiS(rc<re«ii XcXvartf|Mvos, -ij, -w
(§62,3)
AORIST.
S.
5 2. XvOtin
{ 3. XvMra
jj 5 2. XiiOttov
*i3. XwC
XvO^TttV
12. XiiOri
la. XvMr
T€
Xv^iTCMray
or XvOlvTwv
XvO^vai
\\M%, Xve<l<ra, XvMv
(§68)
FUTURE.
Xv6^o-«a9afc
(§62,3)
104
INFLECTION.
i ll
fj.
Indicative.
\iKoiira
S. -< 2. XAoMTttS
X^oiirc
< 2. XcXoCirarov
' ( 3. XcXoCij^arov
/ 1. X(Xolira|MV
P. } 2. X<Xotirar<
( 8. XcXoCircun
SECOND PERFECT.
Subjunctive.
XcXo£ira>
X<XoCir||8
XcXoCirn
XcXo(tn|TOv
XiXo(in)Tov
XcXoCir«a|i«v
X«XoCin)T<
XcXo£ir«Nrt
Optaiive.
XcXofirot|jii
XcXoCirois
XcXoCiroi
X(Xo£iroiTov
XcXoiirofnf|v
X«Xotiroi|uv
XcXo£iroiTc
XcXoCiroicv
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
'I
S. •j2.
(3.
{X«XoCimv
IXiXoCtrcis
iX«Xo<irfi
T. 52.
IXiXo(ir«iTov
^(XoiirctTT|v
-
P. .5 2.
(3.
AcXoCir€i|uv
{XcXoCirciTf
<XcXo{ir«o-av
or 4X(Xo<ir«ioxiv
SECOND AORIST.
^•li:
iXiirov
IXiircs
IXiirc
XCirw
Xliqjt
XfiTTj
X(iroi|fci
X£iroi$
Xtiroi
Al
IXCircrov
XCin)Tov
XhniTov
XlirOiTOV
Xiirof<n|v
p. j2.
is.
IXCiro|uv
IX£irtTt
IXurov
XfirMfuv
XCin|Tc
XCircMTi
X(iroi|i(v
XCiroiTf
XCiroicv
[§96.
n. XiCmt
Active
ii!
I
? 'M.I CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN fl. ]
Q<i*h ^ fo«w.
Voice,
SECOND PERFECT.
Imperative.
Infinitive. Participle.
S 5 ^' ^oim
1 S. XcXoiirfrtt
■Q^ 5 2- X«Xo(ircTov
1 3. XcXoiirlTMv
XcXoiir^M X«Xoiin5«, XcXoiiruto,
XcXoiirds (§ 68)
p^ 5 ^- XcXofirtTf
c. 3. XcXoiirlntotiv
105
SECOND AORIST.
S.
1'-
(3.
AilKTW
J) 52. XflTfTOV
*(8.
p.
\l
Xiirctv
Xiirfrwv
XCirtrt
XiirlrcMrav
or XiirtfvTwv
Xiiniv, XiiroOo-o, Xitriv
(§68)
:
106
I,
: i
■ 1
i
INFLECTION.
SECOND AORIST.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
[§ »«.
XcClTM
Middle
8.^2.
13.
HI:
p. •<2.
(3.
IXCirov
4X(ircT0
IXCircvOov
IXiir^(r0i)v
IXCirco-Oc
iXCirovTo
X(irtt|i(u
X(in|Tai
XCin)<r6ov
XCin|(r6ov
Xiir(&|MOa
XCin|(r9c
XCirttvrai
Optative.
Xiiro(|ii|v
Xfirolo
XCiroiTO
XCiroio^v
Xiiro(<r6i)v
Xiiro(|MOa
X(irour6<
XCiroivTO
III. ^CvM
Active
FUTURE.
S.J2.
(3.
HI
P.-<2.
13.
Indicative.
{(pavierov) ^vctrov
{^aifiofuy) ^vo{||uv
{(pav^ere) ^vctrc
{ipapiovai) ^voOcn
Optative.
i<f>av4oifti) ^vot|u, or {<t>av€olriv) ^vo(i)v
{i/>av4oii) ^vot«, or {<pa»eolris) ^voCr\t
{(pavioi) ^vot, or (ipayeolri) ^voCi|
{<pav4oiToy) ^votrov, or (ipaveolrrrov) ^voCr\rov
i<f>av€olT'n»} ^vo£tt|v, or (^afeoti^i^i') ^voiVJTT|v
(ipavdotnev) ^vot|Ji«v, or {(payeol-nfuv) ^vo<i||&cv
{<pav4oiTe) ^votn, or {^veolrrre) ^vo<T|rc
{(pavioiev) ^voUv, or {,paveolriaav) ^vo(T|o-at
AORIST.
8. J 2.
(3.
"■Si
ft
Indicative.
f^va
{^varov
' 1. I^vafuv
P. ^ 2. I^van
lfi|vav
Subj'undive.
^V1|T0V
^V1)T0V
^vait or ^vciat
^vcu or ^v(u
^vaiTov
^va(Ti)v
^i^voMV or ^vf iav
[§ 96.
XfClTtt
Middle
we.
6ov
EOa
ro
[II. ^oXv»
Active
\v) ^VOfl|TOV
v) ^vo£t)|icv
) ^vo(i)rc
I*) i^vo(T|<rai
8 96.1 . CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
107
{continued).
Voice.
Imperative.
2. \iiroO
SECOND AORIST.
Infinitive.
HI
p ( 2. XCirc<r9c
. 3. Xiir^<r9»
Xfir«r9ov
Xiir^crOwv
Xiir/(r6(u
(0oi»-), to show.
Voica,
Xiir^irOcMrav
or Xiirtf<r6uv
FUTURE.
Infinitive,
(fftavieiv) ^avctv
XiirdfMvos, -ij, -ov
(§ 62, 3)
PartictjpJe,
(§ 69)
^vcw
r^vfiav
Imperative.
8.
4 3.
D.|2.
P.
is.
^vov
^varov
<HvdTwv
^vaTf
^vdnaioviv
AORIST.
Infinitive.
Participle.
(§68)
1 "
•
INFLECTION.
tS96.
1
^(VM
1'
FUTURE.
Middle
1
/tuftca^tvf.
Optative.
1 1 ^'^■
(iftcw^Ti, (paviei) ^v^, ^avct >
((papeolfi7i») ^vo(|ii)v
{(pavhiTo) <^voiTO
1 ''■^'
(0ai'/e(r0oi')
(tpavitaOov)
^v<t<r9ov
^avci(r9ov
{(pavioiadou) ^voiirGov
{tftaveolaBjjp) ^avo((rOi)V
1 ^'^'
((pavedfuda)
(<pavieff$€)
(ipavioPTai)
^VOfiVTOl
{(paveolfieffa) <^voC|M6a
{(pav^oiffde) <^avoi<r6<
{(pavioim-o) ^avoivto
m
AORIST.
Hi
Indicative.
/S't«&;i«nc<m.
Optative.
1 ■ ' '^^
j^varo
^vaC|iT|v
^vaM
1 °^''
l^vooOov
^vai<r9ov
^vcU(r0t|v
r '^^
^vavTO
^vi&|icOa
^vaiv6c
^VCUVTO
9
SECOND AORIST.
ift ' ' ' '
1 : 1 °'^'-
I^VT|TOV
^v{)tov
^vcCi)Tov or ^vctrov
4avciiJTt|v or ^vc<Tf)v
1 'g
^vc(T||fccv or ^v«t|uv
^vfCi)T< or ^vciTf
4av<(T)(rav or ^v<t(v
t§ 96.
§96.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O,
109
io
ITO
[|M9a
:<r9t
:vTO
^(Vtt
{continued).
Middle
Voice.
FUTURE.
Infinitive.
Participle.
(jPovieaBai) ^Vitv9ab
» " (§62.3)
AORIST.
1
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
1
(3.
^^vocrOcu.
^vdiuvot, -tj, -ov
(§ 62, 3)
;.
)3.
^^vairOov
«^vdcr9Mv
4
MI:
(^TjvdfrOoMrav
or ^vdo^v
Passive
Voice.
SECOND AORIST.
^
■i
MI:
<^v{)vai
(§68)
? 4^vttrov
r ^vc(ti)v
MI:
4»dvi)T0V
^aWJTMv
lit
r- {I:
4^dvT|TC
^vV|TM4rav
or <|>avlvTi»v
no
INFLECTION.
L8 96.
^a(vM (continued).
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE.
ill I I
■If 1
H
Indicative. Optative.
^vij<ro|uu ^vi)voC|fci)v
S. -^ 2. ^vijirg, ^vi)vci ^vijoroio
3. ■j2.
(3.
Infinitive. ParticipU,
-1i -ov (§ 62, 3)
■<3.
(3.
(^•ivi|<r«QrO(
<^vyj(rovT(u
^v^(rob(r6ov
(^VTiiroCirOTiv
^avi]<roC|M9a
^vifcrourOt
4^avT{(roivTo
Note 1. The uncontracted forms of the future active and middle
of <^atW, enclosed in ( ) above, and of other futures with liquid
stems, are not Attic, but are found in Homer and Herodotus. So
with some of the uncontracted forms of the aorist subjunctive passive
m (0), &c.
Note 2. The tenses of XctVco and <^tVa> which are not inflected
above follow the corresponding tenses of Xuo) ; except the perfect
and pluperfect middle, for which see § 97. AeXct/i-fiat is inflected
like rcVpt/i-fiat (§ 97, 3), and m<t>atr'fuu is inflected in § 97, 4.
Note 3. Some of the dissyllabic forms of Xva do not show the
accent so well as con'esponding forms with three or more syllables.
The correct accent will be seen in the following forms of kuXvu, to
hinder : —
Pres. Imp. Act.
Aor. Opt. - ci.
Aor. Imp. Act.
Aor. Imp. Mid.
K«&Xu<
K«iXikrai)u
K(&Xvo-ov
KiiXvfnu
kmXWtw
KttXvoxut or -liociat
KtfKva6.ro
KuXwr&(r9o
kmXWtov
KttiXiKrai or -ito-cu
KttXt&o-aTov
KuX6vwr9ov
&0.
&c.
&c.
kc.
Aor. Infin. Act. KttXdtrai.
The three forms KuXtorat, KuXvo-at, and noKvaai (Xvcrat, XOo-at, and
XOo-ai) are distinguished in form only by the accent. See § 26, with
N. 3 (1) ; and § 22, N. 1.
i 11
§97.]
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE.
Ill
Perfefit and Pluperfect Middle and Paulve of Verb! with
Consonant Stemi.
§ 97. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect middle and pas-
sive, many euphonic changes (§ 16) occur when a final
consonant of the stem comes before an initial /i, r, a, or
a0 of the ending (§ 118).
2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person
pUiral of these tenses is formed by the perfect participle
and etVt, are^ and ^<rav, were^ the present and imperfect
of cW he (§ 127)»
3. These tenses of Tpi^a (stem rpi^-^^ rub, irXeKo}
(TrXe^-), weave, ireldto (jreiB-), persuade^ and o-reWo)
(o-reW, <TT6\-, (TTaX-), send, are thus inflected : —
Perfect Indicative.
(\. WTpi|i|Lai
ir4ir\cY|Lai
irlir«ur|iat
foTaX)uu
vitrK^OA
irimurat
foToXirai
(.3. WTpiirrai
trinXtKTW.
ir^ircioTOi
foToXrcu
(2- rlrpi^eov
^' \ 3. T*Tpi<|»eov
niirXcxOov
ir^iriiirOov
foToXOov
ir^irXcxOov
ir^irciirOov
ivraK9ov
(\. TCTpt|fc|M6a
ircirX^Y|fccOa
ir(ir«<o-)M6a
l<rrdX|M6a
p. < 2. Wrpufiei
irlir\cx9c
ir^ircurOc
JfoToXOc
13. TiTpl)fc|UvOt
ircirXry|Uvoi
ircir<ur|Uvoi
loToXiiivoi
cUrt
cUri'
cUrC
<Ur{
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
Subj. TCTpi|&|i^vo« «S ir«irXry|i^vo« £ ireir«i(r|Uvos «S {oraXiUvos «S
Pcr/cc< Imperative.
g C2. tItp4o
' c 3. rcTpC^9«>
ir^irXc(o
ir^cM-o
IffToXtro
ircirX^X^
imrcCcrOtt
lirrdXOM
j^ 52. Wrpu^v
' ( 3. TtrpCt^v
ir^irXcx9ov
ir^«i(r6ov
COTaAOOV
ircirX^X^v
irfirc(<r9a)v
lordXOttv
p 52. Wrpif^
' ( 3. TCTpC^Ottoiav
ir<irX«x9«
ir^ircio^
fvroXOc
irtirX^OtMrav
irmUrOcMrav
lordXOwoxiv
or imrKfyj^
or irfir^(»^v
9r^9TdXewv
n
lii I
t
112
INFLECTION.
[§97.
4 Itrftd Infinitive and Participle.
Infinxtivi^ T«Tpt^9ai iriirX^x^^ ir«ir<tv6ai 4o~rdX6ai
Participle Trrpi)i)Uvo« ircirXryiUvot ir«ir«\flr|Uvet 4oTaX)Uvo«
M
Pluperfect
Indicative.
1.
{rrrp<|i|ii|v
4ir«ir<(o'|iT)v
4«TdX|ii)v
2.
<Wrpii|fO
Mitkil^o
4ir4ir«i<ro
firraXro
3.
WTpilTTO
Mitkmro
Miriurro
IotoXto
2.
iWrpi^Oov
MirXixOov
lir^ircio-Oov
foToXOov
3.
47rnrX<x9tfv
4ir<irf{T9T)v
<o~rdX9T|v
1.
<T<rp(|i|M9a
<ir<irX^Y|u6a
4irrir<{o-|uOa
<o^dX)u0a
2.
Mrpu^Oc
iir^irX«x9<
Iir^ir(ur9<
ftrraXet
3.
r<rpi|Ji)Uvoi
ir«irXry|iivei
ir«rci(r)Uvot
iirraXiM'voi
^ff-av
Ijo-av
l^o-av
^io•ov■
4. The same tenses of (TcXe'co) reXeS, (stem reXe-, § 109,
2), finish^ <f)aiv(i> {<l>av-)^ show, dWaa-ao) (dWar/-), exchange,
and iXeyx^ (€*^^7X")» coiivict, are thus inflected : —
Subj.
Opt.
-{I
%
Perfect Indicative.
ir4^ao'|fcai 4(XXaY|iai
ir4^v<rai 4)XXa(«u
ir^^vrai fiXXaitroi
v4<^v6ov ^XXaxOov
ir44>av6ov f^^^X^^
ir«^d<r|w9a ^XXdYiuOa
H^v9t 1iXXax9(
irc^oo'iUvoi ^XXa^iUvoi
Perfect Subjunctive and OjAative.
cS ir<^a(r}Uvot iS ^XXa-yiUvot
Perfect Imperative.
4iXXa(o
^XXdxec*
f^XXax^ov
^XXdxOttv
1iXXax6<
■fjXXdx9«Mrav
or TCT<X^o^v or irf^v9«»v or ^XXdxOttV
TnAcvfiai
rrr^Xco-ai
TfWXcorai
Tfr4X«r6ov
rrr^Xco-Oov
TCT(X4o'|u6a
tcWXctOc
TcrfX«r|Uvoi
TCTcX«<r)Uvos
>>
IX^Xryiuu;
IX^Xry(ai
4X^X<^Tai
iX^Xryx^v
4X^X<YxOov
4XT|X4Y|M9a
4X^Xrwte€
4XT|Xry|Uvoi
cUrf
«S 4XiiXry)Uvot «S
TCT4X«<ro
ir4^v(ro
rrrcX^irOca
ir<^v6«)
TfT4X«<r6ov
ir^^vOov
TvnkMtaiv
TtT4X«9>9c
ir^vee
Trr<X4<r6ttKrav
ir<^v6cMrav
<X^Xryto
IX^X<YX«»
IX^Xryx^ev
<Xi)Xfyx^v
4X^X«YXe«
or IXi|X4'yx'*'V
§97.]
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE.
113
^\Tftr.t Infinitive and Participle.
Inf. r<T<Mo-9ai irf^v6<u ^XXdx^ai 4XT)MYx9ai
Part. T«T(X«r|Uvot ir«^<r)Uvo« ^XXa\tUvo« 4XT|Xry|Uvo«
5'-
S. •<2.
13.
p. < 2.
(3.
JTIT«X<0-)iT)V
IrvriKvro
4T«T<X«jrT0
hrrtKiv9i\v
lT(T<X^9'|M0a
lr(T4Xio-9«
3. TCT(Xf(r|A^voi
Ijcrav
Pluperfect Indicative.
4ir<^(r(iT)v ^XXdY|fcT|V
M^vro
iir«^dv0T|v
ir«<^a<r)Uvoi
Ijo-av
1)XXa(o
ijXXaKTO
ijXXax6ov
^XXdxOriv
^XXdY|M9a
f^XXaxOc
^XXa^lA^voi
^<rav
{Xi)X^Y|jiT)V
<XVjXi-Y$o
iX^Xl^KTO
IXyjXi^Oov
iXTiMYX^v
4XT)X^'y|M0a
4X^Xi^9c
fXt|X(Y)Uvoi
Note 1. The regular third person plural in these tenses (rcrpt^-
irrah tircrrXtK-vTo. &c. formed like XiXvvraiy iXiXv-vro) could not he
pronounced. The periphrastic form is necessary also when -o- is
added to a vowel stem in these tenses (§ 109, 2), as in TtriXetr-fiai.
On the other hand, when final v ot a stem is dropped in these tenses
(8 109, 6), the regular forms in vrai and vto are used; as kX/vo),
KtKKi-fiat, KfKKivrai (not K«K\ifiivoi elai).
NoTF. 2. The euphonic changes in these tenses follow the prin-
ciples stated in § 16, 1-4. Thus rhpifi-fiai is for Ttrpi^-fiai (§ 16, 3);
riTpiyjrat for Ttrpi^-aai (§ 16, 2) ; rerpirtTai for TtToi^-rai (§ 16, 1) ;
Tf Tpi(f>-3ov tor rerpt^-aOov, Ttrpi^-dov (§ 16, 4 and 1). So irtir'Kty-pM
is for TTcn-Xf K-/ia( (§16, 3) ; iTf7r\€x-Bov for mirktK-adou (§ 16, 4 and 1).
niirna-pai is for ■ntnfi.6-}iai (§ 16, 3); mnd-irat for Trfnetd-aai (§ 16,
2) ; n«7r(i<r-Tai for ncneiB-Tai (§ 16, 1^ ; mrtficr-Bov for Tnnfi6-v6ov
(§ 16, 4 and 1). "EaraX-eov is for tfrTaK-adov (§ 16, 4); foraX-et
for taraK-adf.
In TfT€X«-<r-^nt, <r is added to the stem before /* and r (§ 109, 2),
the stem remaining pure before «r ; lingual stems change the lingual
(t, S, 6) to <r before p. and t (§ 16, 1 and 3) and before 6 (for ad,
§ 16, 4) ; these two classes of verbs therefore inflect these tenses
alike, though on different principles. On the other hand, the a
before p in nitfyaapai and €Trf(f>aa-priv is a substitute for >/ of the stem
(§ 16, 6, N. 4) ; which v reappears before all other letters, causing
the <T of o-tf to be dropped in aBov, crBe, &c. (§ 16, 4). In the fol-
lowing comparison the distinction is shown by the hyphens : —
TCT^C-0--|iai
ir^ircKT-iiai
W^Mur (lai
TcWXc-crat
ir<ir€i-o-ot
iri^v-a-ai
TeT^€-o"-Tai
iriireio'-Tai
•tri^v-rai
TfT^Xc-o-Oc
ir^ircicr-Oc
8
ir4^v-^
M
I
:.? I
\-'ii
U f
» !
114
INFLECTION.
[§97.
In ^Xaypai no change was required (§ 16, 3) ; IjWa-^ai is for
nWay-ffM (§ 16, 2) ; ^\aK-Tai for ^XXay-rat (§ 16, 1) ; fjXKav-dop for
riWay-Ldov (§ 16, 4 and 1), cf. mnXex-^ou (above). In fXijXcy-/aat,
yyfi (for yxM» § 1^' ^) d>*ops o"e y (§ 16, 3, Note) ; eX^Xey^^at and
«\Tj\«yK-Tai are for cXi;Xeyx-o'at and fXrjXeyx-Tai (§ 16, 1, 2); eX^Xfy;^-
Ot is for iXriKeyx-frde (§ 16, 4) ; see also § 102.
Note 3. (a) All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect
these tenses lilte Terpifi-fiah &c. ; as XeiVo), XeXtifi-fjuu; ypdcfxo (ypa0-),
write, ytypafi'fiai (§ 16, 3); piirra) (pt0-), throw, eppifi-fiat. But
v.'hen final fxir of the stem is reduced to p before p (§ 16, 3, Note),
the original tt recurs before other consonants; as KapirTut (Kapir-),
bend, K«Kap-pai, KfKapy^tai, KeKapir-rai, KfKap<f>-3f, iripnat (nepw), send,
ninep-pai, irentpylrai, ireirf pir-rai, TreTrt p<f)-df: compare with the latter
itiitep-pai from maaa (ttctt-), cook; inflected n-cn-f^oi, jreTrerr-Tat,
7rfrrf<p-Bf, &c.
(h) All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like irfirXeypai and
?>XXay-^t; as Trpdaao) (npay-), do, nenpay-pai ; rapacrao) (rapa;^-),
confuse, Tfrapay-pai; (f>v\dtTaa) (<f>v\aK-), irt^vXay-pai. But when y
before p represents yy, as in eXi^Xfy-fiat from fXey;^-*!) (end of N. 2),
the second palatal of the stem recurs before other consonants.
(c) All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like irinficf-
pai, &C.; as <^pa^to (<f>pa8-), tell, 7r(<f>pa(r-pai, 7r(<j>pa-(rai, 7rc(^pno--ra. ;
(Oi^tti (($18-), accustom, eiBiir-pai, tWi-aai, ft6ur-Tai, eidi<r-df, tWia-dai;
pluf. fWia-priv, (X6i-(TO, «Wur-TO ; airevBfo ((rrrfi'd-), pour, foneur-pai
(§ 16, 6), for t(nTfv8-pai, eairevv-pai (§ 16, 3), ftmet-acu, fayrfKr-Tcu,
€(m€ur-Bf.
(*l) IMost ending in i/ (those in ap- and vv of verbs in aivea or
vvm) are inflected like irf<f)a<r-pai, changing i; to o- before p (§ 16, 6,
N. 4), and retaining i; elsewhere; as v(f}aivu> ('j<f>av-), weave, v(f>aa-pai,
v(f}av-<rai, v(f)a»-TCU, vffiav-Be, v<f>dv-dai ; (njpaiva} (^trripav-), show, aetrr}-
puKT-pai] piaipa {;.uau-), pollute, ptpiaa-pai. Rarely such a v becomes
p, as ill 6^vv-a>, sharpen, at^vp-pai (later at^vtr-pm)', and even then
the V recurs before other consonants, as a^vu-trat, &^vv-Tai.
When final v of a s*flm is dropped (§ 100, 6), as in itXiV<», hcnd,
KfKXi-pcu, the stem becomes a vowel- stem., and is inflected like
XfX^-pai.
(e) Those ending in X or p are inflected like faraX-pai; as ayyc'XXw
(ayyfX-), announce, ^yyeX-pai; atpat (dp-), 7'aise. ?ip-pai ; iydpat (tytp-),
rouse, fyriytp-pai; trtipia (rrfp-), pierce, mnap-pai (§ 109, 4); no
change being made except the dropping of <r in ad after X or p
(§ 16, 4), as in tjyytX-dt and tyr]y(p-0ai.
1
i
S.
7D.
r-
[§97.
§98.]
CONTRACT VERBS.
11.^
at is for
X-$ov for
ijAcy-ftat,
Y^ai and
A^XeyX-
fil inflect
J, Note),
(»ca/iTr-),
T-), send,
ihe latter
rrcTrerr-Tai,
y-fiai and
(TOpax-)»
it when y
of N. 2),
nts.
ke 7r€7r€iri--
eaireiar-fiai
'trrrfur-TM,
aivm or
j:§ 16, 6,
i!(^cr-/iat,
becomes
!ven tlien
Ava, hcrifl,
icted like
iS ayyeXXw
JO) (tyfp-)'
4); no
■er X or p
Contract Verbs.
§ 98. Verbs in am, em, and om are contracted in the
present and imperfect. These tenses of Tifidto (rtiMa-^y
honor^ ^tXeo) (^tXe-), love, and BrfKoco (St/Xo-), manifest,
are thus inflected : —
I. ^2.
(3.
(a.
(rt/ictw)
Ti|i«a
(it^ci,€t$)
Tl|i4s
(rt/iact)
Tl|l4
(TifideTOv)
TlJiOlTOV
(Tt/i.deToi')
Tiffcarov
(Tt/iidoAievI
TI,|iM)tCV
(ri/adere)
Tl|iaTC
(Tt/idoufft)
Ti|i,«Mrb
a
13.
(rt/xdo;)
(Tt)u,<i?;s)
(TtMdij)
2. (rt/LidTjToi')
3. (Tt/LiaTjroj')
(rt/iictaj/ifi')
(rt/idTjre)
( Ti/id W(rt)
ri. (rtjudot/ixi)
5. •{ 2. (rtyudois)
1 3. (rt/udoi)
^ ( 2. (rt/xdotTOf)
* I 3. (Tt/LiaofT7;i')
S"*. (TiixdoifX€i>)
2. (rj/udoiTf)
3. (rt/idoi^f)
Tiffcqls
Tl|MlrOV
Tl|iaTOV
Tl|fc»)JkCV
TlflATC
Ti|i«Mrb
Tl|i<pS
Tl|li(^OV
Tl)ll(^TT]V
Tl|Jll{)|JlCV
Tl|i<pCV
ACTIVE.
Present Indicative.
(<f)l\€€TOP)
(<f>i\4eT0p)
(0t\cOl/<7t)
Present Subj
(<(>l\47)TOv)
{(piK^riTou)
(|>iX(a
i^iXcis
(^iXci
()>lXctTOV
<^lXctTOV
<)>iXovpv
^iXciTC
()>iXov<rk
unctive.
(|>lX(0
«l»iXtis
+iXti
<^iXf)rov
<)>iXf|rov
<}>i,Xu|icv
^kX^rc
<|>iX«Mri
Presold Optative.
(<f>i\eolTr}v)
{(piXioififv)
((ftiXioiTf)
(|>iXois
<{>iXoi
(^iXoiTOV
(|>iXo£ri)v
(^iXot|icv
<^i\oirc
<^iXol<v
{d7f\6(ij)
(8rj\6ets)
(577\6ct)
(SrjXSerov)
(57/\6eT0i')
(Sri\6ofiep)
{8r}\6eTf)
{Sri\6ovai)
(8-n\6'(ii)
(877X67,)
(577X677701')
(577X677701')
(Sr)\6wfi€v)
(577X67776)
(SrfKduxTt)
(SrfKdoifii)
(577X604$)
(577X601)
(577X601701/)
(577X00/7771')
(577X6ot;uei')
(5T7X6otT€)
(577X6016!')
8t|Xu
8i)Xois
StjXoi
8t)Xovtov
8t)Xovtov
8T|X0V|iCV
8t]XovTe
8T)Xov<ri
8i)\c»
8t)Xois
8T]\0t
8t|Xutov
8i)X<Srov
8T|X(0|tcv
StiXmtc
8i)\«Mri
8t)Xot|it
8i)Xoi«
8t|Xoi
8T)XotTOV
8tiXo£tt)i
8T)Xok|i(t
SifXotrc
8t)XoC<v
!
116
INFLECTION.
S.
(1. (
•J2. (
(3. (
or
{rifiaolrfv)
{rt/jLaolrfi)
TifJMoir))
< 2. (rifiaolrfTOv)
"is. (
(3.
Tifiaoii^riv)
{rifMolrifxev)
(rifiaolriTe)
[rifMolriffav
Tlffcl^V
Tl|Jl(^TOV
. TtiupViniv
Tl|i<pT|TC
ri|i<tfi](rav]
or
{(fnXeoltjv)
(ipiXfolri)
(tpiXeolriTOp)
(0t\eot77T7;i')
((piXeolfffifv)
((piXfolryre)
{(piXeolrjffav)
4^lXo(t|V
<^iXofi|rov
<^iXoi'/j'n}v
(t>lXo£T]T«
(|)iXoCi|0'av
or
(iTtXoolriv)
{SrjXoolrfs)
(driKooirj)
{Sr)\ooiriTOp)
(5rfKoon^TT}p)
(SriXoolrifiev)
(8r)\oolr)T€)
[8r)\oolriffav
[§ 98.
8i]Xo(i|v
8i)Xo£ii]$
8t|XoCi)
8T)Xo(t)TOV
8t|Xoi^tt)v
8t)XoCT)|uv
8t|Xo£i)tc
8T|Xo(T)(rav^
Present Imperative.
ifjLae)
(jifiaiTUi)
^' \ 3. (r
(2. (ri^tdcToi^
^13.
2. (rifidere)
rCffca
Tl|idT(l>
ri|ulTov
TifidTcav
TI,|iaTC
(0f\ce)
(0i\e^Tw)
(0tX^€TOI')
(^tXeeVwi')
(^iX^erc)
«|>£Xci
(t>iXtCTW
()>lXctTOV
^iXcCtwv
<^iXcZrc
(SijXoe)
(57;Xo^rw)
(577X6€TOI')
(SljXo^TWI/)
8^Xov
8T)X0VTa>
8T)XodTOV
8T)X0VTttV
(8r}\6€T€) 8i)Xovrc
is.
D.
p_ ) 3. (Tifm^ruaav) in|idTfi>(rav (^piXe^Twtrocv) <)>iX(lT<a(rav {SrjXoiTuaav) 8i|XovTaKrav
or or or ur or or . M
{rittadirruv) n)iwvTttV {«f>i\e6vT<av) (^iXovvrwv (drfXoipTUtv) 8T|XovvTtti> S^*
Present Infinitive,
(rtfideiv) Ti.|Jav ((piXieiu) (^iXciv {SriXdeiv) 8i)Xo{>v
rs.
;1£:
Present Participle (see § 69).
(rt/ido)!') Ti|i«i> (0(X^(>;i') <|>iXwv (StjXAuv) 8t)Xi
S. S 2. (^W/uaes)
!1. (i-rilJLd<
2. (irifid
3. (rr/ua
(^Tt/ldfTOf)
(iTi/JLairrjv)
(^Tt/udoMf)
dfTf)
(rr/fiaoi')
CT^IUAV
4r(|fca
iTlfldTOV
iTl|iC»|i(V
irl\tMV
Imperfect.
(((piXfirtjv)
(e<f>iX^onev)
(€(fnX^(Tf)
(f<f>lXeop)
4(f>iX(iTov
l4>lXov(<.€V
44>tX(iTc
I^CXovy
(eS^Xooj')
(eS^Xoej)
(e5?JXoe)
ISVjXovv
^Si^iXovs
j8^Xov
(eSrjXoeTOp) 48t|Xovtov
(eSrjXo^rrfp) &i\\ovTi]}f
(iSrjXoofXfp) l8rXov|A€V
((Sr)X6eTf) ^8T)Xo(rr(
(iSi^Xoop) 48^Xovv
1*.
[§98
/
/
§«8.]
CONTRACT VERBS.
uv
ir)v) 8i]Ko(i|V
irfi) 8l)Xo£vjS
Irf) 8t|XoCl|
iriTov) 8T)XoCt)TOV
i^tt;!/) 8t|Xoi^tt)v
irifuv) 8t)XofT||MV
irjre) 8t|Xo£t)TC
\ljjffav 8T|Xo(T|(rav^
)
frw)
8^Xov
8T)X0VTa>
■Tov) 8t)Xo0tov
hwv) 8t)Xovtmv
re) 8i)Xovrc
iruiaav) 8i|XovTaKrav
or
or
\o(tirr<av) 8T|XovvTttv
iv) 8i)Xovv
av) 8t)Xi
)oi') ^VjXovv
ocs) {8ifiXovs
oe) {8^Xov
UfTOI') i8T|X0VT0V
oiTyfv) 48tjXovTr)y
jojUf c) I8r Xov|A(V
Sere) ^8t)Xovt(
DOf) I8^0VV
5'-
(3.
"(3.
(3.
S.
D
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
{(piXiofiai) <{>iXov|Jiai
{(piX^erai) <|>iXciTai
{ipiXieadov) 4>iXci<r6ov
{^iX^effdov) <^iX(i<rOov
(0tXe6jueda) <|>iXov|Ji€6a
((piX^effde) <j>iXci<rOc
(rifidovrai) Ti|fc««VTai {<l>i\ioiTai) (|>iXovvTai
(TifiAofiai) Ti|fc«i>|xai
{7iHuji,Tiiideiyri^
(njuderat) Ti|iarai
(rifideadov)
(jiiideadov)
Ti)ia<r9ov
Tiu,a<r0ov
{Tina6fie0a) Ti|u&|iicOa
(Tifidej0e) n|ia<r6c
(drfXdofJMi) Br\\ov[uu.
(5j;>.6|;,S?;\6et)8TjXoi
{drjXderai) 8T|Xo{}Tai
{SrjXdeaOoi') 8T)Xov<r6ov
{8r)\6€<T0oi') 8'r|Xovir9ov
{5ri\o6u€da) 8T)Xovpic9a
{driXdeade) 8t|Xov<r6c
(STjXiSojTat) 8T|XovvTai
S.
D.
( 1. (r,
( 3. (Tt
^ J p.
(jifidufiai)
Vt/tdi;)
ifidtjTai)
( 2. (jifidTiadoy)
i 3. (Ti/Juir)<TdovJ
(1. (rifutibfJieOa)
2. (ji(ji,drj<T$e)
3 (T(/udui^ra()
j2. C
(3.
TlfiaolflTjv)
Tifidoio)
(rtfidoiTo)
''Irk S 2- (jifjidoiadov)
PW3.
!1. (rt/io
2. (Tl/id
3. (jkixd
(jifMolffdrjv)
(rifMolfieSa)
ifidoiade )
OIPTO)
Ti|iw)iai
Ti|jiaTai
TiiuUrOov
Ti|fca<rOov
Ti)u&|fcc9a
Ti|ia(r9c
TifAuvrat
Ti|tCp|tT|V
Tl|i<pTO
Ti|fcf<r9ov
Ti|up<r9t|v
Ti|jup)fcc9a
Ti|i<p<r9c
Tiffc^vro
H^ f 2. (jifidov)
(3. (Tt/ita^ff^w)
( 2. (Tifidtadov)
8. (ri/ia^aduv)
2. (Tt/ideo-^e)
3. {rifiaiffdu-
ffau or
[
Present Subjunctive.
(ipiX^ufmi) (^iX(»|Jiab
(^tX^i;) <^iXin
(0iX^i7Tat) <|>iX{\Tat
(0(X^i7o-^oi') (t>iXf|(r9ov
{<f»i\^rjff0ov) <^iXf\(r9ov
(0iXe(^/ie&a) <^iX(&|fcc9a
{<pi\4r)a0€) 4^Xfj<r9c
{<pi\^wpTai) (^iXwvrai
Present Optative.
{(piXeolfirfv) <|>iXoC|iiT|v
{<t>iKioiQ) <)>iXoio
(0tX^OtTo) <^iXotTO
(0tXe'o(0'&oi') <{>iXot(r9ov
(0(Xeo/(r0)7i') <)>iXol(r9T|v
(^(Xeo/jueda) <)>iXo£|ic9a
{(fnX^oiffde) i|>iXoi(r9c
{«pl\^0lVT0) <)>iXoiVTO
Present Imperative.
{STJ\6<afiai)
{8r]\6r}Tai)
{5r}\67)a0of)
(driK(yri<T0ov)
{Srji\odl)fji€0a)
{Srj\6Tia0e)
(SryXiwvTOt)
{SrjKoolfirfp)
{67)\6oio)
(SriXSoiTo)
{SriKdoiaOov)
{dT)\ool<r0T)v)
{dri\oolfie0a)
{8r)\6oi<T0e)
{Sr}\6otPTo)
TI|1U (0(X^ou)
Ti|Jid<r9a> {4>i\e^ff0(>))
rv)iaa-9ov {<f>i\^fa0ov)
Ti|fcd(r9c*v (0tXe^(r9(«;i')
TV|ia<r9c (^tX^ecr^e)
Ti|id(r9(Mrav (<f>i\e4a0<a-
or ffai' or
Ti|i4i(r9ttv ^iXe^o-^wi')
^iXoO
<{>iXc£o^ca
<|>iXciir9ov
<t>iXc(<r9tt>v
<|>iXct(r9c
4)>iXcC(r9w(rav
or
i^XcC(r9«>v
{8tj\6ov)
{Srj\oi(r0b))
{dri\6ea0op)
{8ri\o4<T0up)
{8v\6€<T0e}
{orji\o4a0u-
ffap or
8rji\oia0u>p)
8T)Xu)tab
8t)Xoi
8T]X<dTai
8T)XiMr9ov
8t|XtMr9ov
8T|X(&|Jic9a
8T)XcMr9c
8i]XwvTai
8i]Xo£|iT)v
8if|Xoto
8i)Xotro
8i|Xoiar9ov
8t]Xo£<r9T]v
8f)Xof|u9a
8i)Xoi(r9c
8|iXoivro
8t)Xov
8T)Xov(r9»
8T|Xov(r9ov
8T)Xov(r9wv
8i|Xo€<r9c
8T|Xotlf(r9«Nrav
or
8i)Xovir9«gy
I»
i*
118
INFLECTION.
l§08.
Pi'esent Infinitive,
(rifideffdai) T'.|Ml<r6ab (<f>i\ieff0at) t^tXcto-Oai (Sij\6effdai) 8T)Xoflcf0ab
Present Farliciple.
{rifiadfitvoi) n|ii(&|icvos (<f>i\e6nevos) <|>iXov|icvos (SrjXoi/utws) 8i)Xoiii|Uvos
'I
-I
1. {irifiadnriv) {Ti|i(&|fct)V
2. {(Tiiidov) in^M
3. (cTi/xdeTo) {Ti|iaTO
2. {erifideffOov) {Ti|ia<rOov
Imperfect.
{f.(fn\€6(JLT)v) {<^iXoii|ii|V {i8rf\o6iJi.r)v) lir\\ov\t.i\v
{e<fn\iov) i^XoH {i8r}\6ov) ^8t)Xov
(e^tX^ero) l4»iXctTO {edrjXdeTo) {8T|Xovro
{€<f>i\4e(76ov) {(^iX(i(r6ov (tdr)\6€a6ov) &r{Kovv99v
3. (irtiixtiadrfv) ^Ti|iid<rdi)V (kiftCKiiad-qv) (|<|>iX(l(r6i)v (idrjXoiadriv) ^8t|Xovo'9i)V
1. (en/xa6/xcda) in^\u9a {e(pi\e6fieda) ^iXov|u6a (idrjXodfieda) l8i)Xov)u6a
2. {€Tifxdfcr0€) {Ti|fcair6c {(ipiXieaee) 4^iXci(r6c (fdriXdeffde) <8i)Xov(r6c
3. (cVt/tdoiTo) 4Ti)iwvT0 {iffuX^ofTo) 4<|>iXovvro (idrjXdovTo) iBi\kovvro
Remakk. The imcontracted forms of these tenses are never used in
Attic Greek. Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Homer ; those ot
verbs in ew are common in Homer and Herodotus ; but those of verbs in
ow are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see § 120.
Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in fo) contract only ce and fti. Thu?
irXe'ft), w//, has pres. ttXco), TrXcIy, rrkel, TrXctroi/, TrXcofiev, TrXf ir«, vrXcovat ;
iniperf . rn-Xeoi/, (irXeis. eirXti, &c. ; infin. ttXciv; partic. itkiatv.
Aeo), hind., is the only exception, and is contracted in most forms;
as hoxxTL, dovfiai, dovvrai, (8ovv, partic. tav, 8oiiv. Aeo), to want, is
contracted like ttXcq).
Note 2. A few verbs in aco have rj for o in the contracted forms;
as fit^^do), 8t^a), tJiirst, 8t>/^.^r, 8t\/^.^, 8iyjrrJT€ ; imperf. ebl'^av, fbi^rjs,
fdiylnj] infin. Bi^frrjv. So (da, lire, Kvdat, ."tcrape, irdidd), hunger, cr/iua>,
smear, xpdco, give oraclea, with xp^onai, and y^d<o, rub.
Note 3. 'Ptydw, .shiver, has infinitive piyau (with piyovv), and
other similar forms in <a. 'l8p6(o, .sweat, has I8pu>ai, I8p^f}, l8p(ov-
Tl, &c.
Note 4. The third person singular of the imperfect active doe?
not take u movable in the contracted form ; thus f(f>iXf( or €<f>iK((v
gives c0iXci (never €<f>l\eiv). Except txP^" ^^ XP^" (^^^' fxp"*"' s*^*^
Not« 2), and a very few poetic forms.
Note 5. The present infinitive active of verbs in act and oat (in
av and ovu, not av and oip) is probably contracted from forms in atv
and oep. The infinitive in €v is Doric (§ 119, 14, c). See § 9, 4,
N. 2.
Note 6. The optative active in oiri<rav is very rare, and perhaps was
never used except (contracted) in verbs in eu. (See g 115, 4.)
l§08.
100.]
AUGMENT.
119
AUGMENT.
dai) 8T)Xo&cr9ab
UVOS) 8l]Xoil|MV0S
''(ir)") {8i)Xov|*i)V
>i') j8t|Xov
:To) {8i)Xovro
■adov) {8t)Xov(r6ev
'adr)p) l8T)Xov<r9T|V
ifxeda) l8T)Xov|ic6a
■ffSe) i8i)Xov(rec
iVTo) &i\\ovvro
never used in
>nier ; those ot
ose of verbs in
120.
id (fi. Thu.*
kf tre, TrXcovo't ;
'Xccof.
most forms;
to want, is
•acted forms ;
tatger, cr/iuo),
piyovv), and
, active does'
6 or €<f)iK((v
>r €Xpa«V) see
i> and ooi (in
forms in atv
See § 9, 4,
perhaps was
§ 99. 1. In the secondary tenses of the indicative,
and in the perfect and future perfect of all the moods and
the participle, the stem of the verb receives an augment
(i.e. increase^ at the beginning.
2. There are three kinds of augment, syllabic augment,
temporal augment, and reduplication.
(a) The syllabic augment prefixes e to verbs beginning
with a consonant ; as \v(o, ekvov.
(6) The temporal augment lengthens the first syllable
of verbs beginning with a vowel or a diphthong ; as a7«,
lead^ ijyov ; oiKeto, oIk<o, dwell, MKrjaa.
(<?) The reduplication prefixes the initial consonant fol-
lowed by e in forming the perfect stem of verbs beginning
with a consonant ; as Xvo), Xe-Xvxa ; 7pa^r >, write, ye-
ypa<f)a. Foi* Attic reduplication, see § 102.
Remark. There is an important distinction between the aug-
ment of the imperfect and aorist, which does not belong to the
tense stem and never appears except in the indicative, and the redu-
Elication or other augment of the perfect and future perfect, which
elongs to the perfect stem, and is therefore retained in all the
moods and the participle.
Imperfect and Aorist Indicative.
§ 100. 1. The imperfect and aorist indicative of
verbs beginning with a consonant have the syllabic
augment e. E.g.
Auo), (Xvof, eXvo-a, eXvo/L(i;y, eXvo'a/i?;!', ^\v6t}v\ ypd<f)tf, write, eypa^ov,
typayjfa, «ypd<br)v; plmu, throw, fppiinov, ipj^i;v (for pp see § Id, 2).
For the pluperfect of these verbs, see § 101, 4.
2. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs beg'n-
ning with a short vowel have the temporal augment,
which lengthens the initial vowel ; d and e become r), and
t, 0, V bftcome t, ca, 0. E.g.
120
INFLECTION.
[§ 101.
: t
1- !
■ i
1
^ i t
: '
'
Ik€T«VOV
insult,
For the augment of verbs beginning with a diphthong, see § 103.
Note 1. If the initial vowel is already long, no change takes
place in it, except that d generally becomes t] by augment; as
dffKew (ad- coutr. from dfd-), atruggle, ^dXrjaa. Both d and i; are
found in dvSKiaKto and cvaXoa', see also diw (poetic), hear.
Note 2. BovXofMi, wish, bvvafiai, be able, and fiiWa, inlend, often
add the temporal augment to the syllabic ; as €}iov\6fir)v or t}^ov\6-
firjv, €^ov\r}BT)v or fifiovKfjOrjv ; fdvvdfiijv or ^bvmfirjv, ibvvii&riv or ^Suv^-
Br^v, e/xeXXoi' or ^/ieXXov.
Note 3. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods
and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; as ttc-
(fipabov from <^pd^a>, tell; niir^ov from irtida (md-), persuade; rt-
rapnonrjv (§ 109, 4, N. 1) from rfpirw, delight; KekXafirfv and KfKXofifvos
(§ 109, 7, b) from xcXo/iat, command ; ^papovirom dpapiaK<o (dp-), Join;
upopov from opwpi. (6p-), rouse ; ireirdKatv (partic.) from 7rdXXa> (ttoX-),
shake; KfKdu<o (ftubj.) from Kappa (icap-), so Xe\dx<o from Xayxdva',
ntcpi^eadai, mf . from ^d^pai (^X8-), spare, so Xf-Xadeadai, Xe-Xa^tadai.
In the indicative a syllabic augment may be prefixed to the redupli-
cation; as fKfKkdpriv, ene^pop (from <j>ep-), eTre(f>pa8op.
Note 4. "Ayat, lead, has a second aorist with Attic reduplication
(§ 102), ^yayoi/ (dy-ay-), which adds the temporal augment in the
indicative, subj. dyay<o, opt. dydyoipi, inf. dyayeh, part, dyayatp;
mid. ^yayoptjp, dydyatfiat, &c., — all in Attic prose. See also the ao-
rists ^peyKa and ffpeyicop (from stem cVe*-, ip-eptK-, fpeyK-) of d>epu>;
oXoXkop (for dX-aXfK-op) of dXe^o), ward off; and tpepinop of tpima
(fpiTT-), chide.
Note 5. In Homer a liquid (especially X) may be doubled like p
(§ 15, 2), after the augment e; as eXXaxop for €Xa\op. So sometimes
<r ; as ia-atioPTo from aeicj.
Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect.
§ 101. !• Most verbs beginning with a consonant
augment the perfect and future perfect in all their forms
by prefixing that consonant followed by e. This is called
reduplication. E.g.
Aval, Xf-XvKa, Xe-Xvpai, Xf-XvKfpai, Xe-XvKots, X«-\vpipos', ypd<P<a, yi-
ypafJMf ye-y pdifiOai. So 6va, sacrifice, Tf-6vKa (§ 17, 2); ^atW (^y ),
ihovCy 'trf-<pa<rpai, irt-f^pBai ; x^'i'c^y d^^P^t K€-\Tipa.
§ 101.]
AUGMENT.
121
Note. Fir '-., s have « as augment in the perfect instead of
the reduplication, ayxdvui {\a\-),ofttiHn hij lot,tXKrf\a, eiXf/y/iot; Xap
^dva (Xa/3-), takcy dXij^a, ft\r;u/xa( (po^t. X(X?;/i/iai) ; Xcyo), collecty in
d>epa> ;
regular reduplication
8ta, from deida, fear.
2. Verbs beginning with ^«^o consonants (except a
mute and a liquid), with a aouble consonant (f, ^, -^/r), or
with p have the simple syllabic augment e in all forms of
the perfect and future perfect. U.g,
SrcXXo), semi, faroKKa] fijTc'o), seek, efi^Tijica; >/^ftSo), lie, eyjffvaiMai,
eylrevcTfAevos] pirrTo), throw, tppififtai, fppl<j>6ai (for pp see § 15, 2).
Note 1. Verbs beginning with yv, and some others beginning
with a mute and a liquid, take € instead of the reduplication ; as yi/w-
pi^ut, recognize, iyvapiKa; yiyvoxTKo) (yi/o-), know, eyvaKa', but k\(i(o,
shut, K€K\eiKa (regularly).
Note 2. Mipvfjaica) (pva-), remind, has pfpvrj fiat (memini), remem-
ber, and KTaopai, acquire, has both KtKTrjpai and cKTTjpat, possess. See
also Homer, pf. pass, of pinrcj and pviroat.
3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel have the tem-
poral augment in all forms of the perfect and future
perfect. E.g.
"Ayco, lead, ^^a, ^y/xat, rfyptvos] aKoXovdea, follow, r)Ko\ov6r)Ka, f)Ko-
XovBrjKepai; 6p66u>, erect, apdapai; 6pi((o, bound , &ptKa, upicrpai; aTifiou),
dishonor, f)Tipa>Ka, ffTip,(apai, fut. pf. r)Tipu>aopat; the fut. pf. is very
rare in verbs which have the temporal augment.
4. When the perfect has the reduplication, the pluper-
fect generally prefixes to this the syllabic augment e.
But when the perfect has the syllabic augment e (or et)
or the temporal augment, the pluperfect and the perfect
are augmented alike. E.g.
Avo), XeXujca. tKcXvKdv, \f>,vpai, eXeXvprjV, (TTeXXo), earoKKa, fordK-
Kfiv, «(TTd\pMtiaTa.\pT)v', Xa/i/Sdvo). etKrjcfia, €l\Tj<j)eiv; ayye'XXo), announce^
ijyyfkKa, ffyyeXKeiv, ^yycX/ixat, f)yye\pr)P.
Note. The reduplicated pluperfect sometimes ouii'ts the addi
tioual syllabic augment ; as irfirovdfo-av, TreinoKea-av.
i
il
122
INFLECTION.
[§ 102,
Attic Reduplication.
§ 102. Some verbs beginning with a, €, or o augment
the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two
letters to the common temporal augment. This is called
the Attic reduplication. E.g.
^Apoo), plough, dp-ripofiat] e/ieo), vomit, eufjfieKa', eXtyxa, prove, cXij-
Afyfiai, iXrjXf'ypijv; fXavuu) (eXa-), drive, eXrjXaAca, eXi^Xa^ut; aKOixo, hear,
oKijKoa (§ 110, IV. </, N. 1).
Other veibs which have the Attic reduplication are aydpu, d\(i<f)iu,
dXco), tyf ip<o, (pfidtii, ip\o^ai, ecr6iu>, oXXv/xt, upvvfii, opvTToi, (l)€pu>. See
also, for Ionic or poetic forms, atpeco, dXdopai. d\vKTfa>,dpupiaK<a, ipei-
7T<a, ex*^' fjpva, (o^v) d8a)8v(rpat, 8^a>, updut (oTTcoTra), opiyu), opvvpi.
The Attic redupl'-catiou Tso called by the Greek grar^'narians) ls not
peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer.
Note 1. 'Eje/po) (eyep-), rouse, has 2 perf. eyp-riyopa (for Jy-i;yop-a,
of. § 109, 3), but fy-T)y(pp,ai. For the Attic reauplication iu rjyayov,
2 aor. of ayo), in {jvfyKa and ijpfyKov of (/)fpa), and in Homeric SKoKkov
of aXc^o), see § 100, 2, N. 4.
Note 2. The pluperfect rarely takes an augment in addition to
the Attic reduplication. But dKovv>, hear, dKTjKoa, generally has fjKi]-
Kofiv in Attic; and djr-(o\a}\ei (of dn-oWvfii, dn-oKaXa), MfiafioKfi
(pi ofiwfii, ofioiftoKo), and di-apciovKvo (of 8t-opiaaoi, St-optapvyfJiai)
occur in Attic prose. See Homeric pluperfects of eXavvw and epddot.
Augment of Diphthongs.
§ 103. Verbs beginning with a d'lphthong take the
temporal augment on the first vowel of the diphthong.
ai or a becoming 77, ol becoming &>. E.g.
AiTtu), asli, fiTr,iaa] oiKeco, dwell, uKTja-a, <aKi)p,fvos', av^dva, increase,
T]v^T}tTa, ijv^Tjpai, r)v^r)dT)v ; adai, sing, §8ov.
Note. Oi is never augmented. Ei and ev are generally without
augment; but MSS. and editors differ in regard to many forms, as
^titaa-a or fjKaca (((Ka^&>, liken), ei/dou or rjv8ov (eilSu). sleep), evpjjKo and
evpfdr)v or rjvpriKa and ijvpeBrjv i^evpicrKca , find) , ev^tnirjv or rji^dpr^v (cy-
Xopai, praii). Editions vary alsf* in the augment of avaivat, dry, and
of some verbs beginning with ot, as oiaKoaTpo<pe<a, steer.
[§ 102.
igment
•st two
J called
ooe, eXr}-
v<o, hear,
I, aK(i(f>(o,
po). See
r»cft), ififi-
I, opvvfii.
is) js not
y-ijyop-a,
ii ^yayov,
a oKakKOf
lition to
has ^Ki;-
copiryfiai)
,kfc tlie
ithong.
increase,
without
orms, as
pijKa and
i/iijy (fv-
ilry, and
106.]
AUGMENT.
Syllabic Augment be/ore a Vowel.
123
§ 104. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syl-
labic augment, as if they began with a consonant. When e
follows the augment, cc is contracted into et. U.g.
'fi^co) (oiO-), push, (uxra, eaurfiai, (taadrju; dXtWofim, be captured,
ctiXuKu, 2 iior. ioKuiV (or i^utv)', iiypvfii (ay-), break, ea^a, 2 pi", tayai
fp8<i}, do, Ionic, 2 pf. eofrya; covfo/itut, buy, fwpovfJLffv, &c. ; idi^u, accus-
tom, ftdiaa, €i6tKa (from teB-)', idia, permit, ctdaa, ctdKu.
These verbs are, further, cXtWo), eXKca, eir<o, epydfo/nai, fpna, or
ipnvCdii eartdo), e^o), itjfu (e-), with the aoritsts tlSov and flXou (al^fw),
tne perfects 6ia>^a (^F(6-,b)d- for F(o6-) and cotKo (Ik-), and plpf. fIo-T»;-
Ktiv (for ((av) of tffrnui. See also Ionic and poetic forms under
6v8dvo), dnrto, fido/iat, ctXo), €(7rof, ftpo), cXtto}, evcu/it, (^a>, and e^ofiai.
Note 1. 'Opdco, see, and dv-oiya, open, generally take the tempo-
ral augment after the syllabic; as eopuv, iutpdKa (or iopoKo), eupdfiai',
du-f(pyou, du-€<fi$a (rarely Ijvoiyov, rjvoi^a, § 105, N. 3). Homer has
ii]vbavov from dybdvut, please : i<avo\6tt. imp. of oivo)(Ofui, pour wine :
and 2 plpf. (otknfi and (oapyfi from cXttco and epbu). 'Eoprd^fa, keep
holiday (Hdt. oprafw) has Attic imp. iatpra^ov.
Note 2. This form of augment is explained on the supposition that
these verbs originally began with the consonant F or some other consonant,
which was afterwards dropped : thus eWov, saw, is for 4Fi5ov (cf. Latin
vid-i) ; 4opya is for FeFopya, from stem Fepy- (§ 110, IV. d), cf. Eng. work
(German Werk) ; and Hpirw, creep, is for a-epwu (cf. Latin serj»o).
Augment of Compound Verbs.
§ 105. 1. In compound verbs, the augment follows
the preposition. Prepositions (except Trept and irpo)
drop a final vowel before the augment e. U.g.
Ilpoa-ypd(f)(t), iTpo(r-(ypa(f)uu, "npoa-ykypa^a', (la-dya>, fia-Tjyov (§ 26,
N. 1); fK-^dWw, f^-f^aWov (§ 13, 2); arvX- Afyoj, avu-f\eyov', vvfi-
ttXcko), (tvu-€7t\€kov (§ 16, 5) ; atry-xfo), aw-f^fov, a-vy-Kc^^vKa', avaKevd^a,
aw«TKfva^ov (§ 16, 6, JST. 3) ; d7ro-j3dXX(u, aTr-e/SaXXoi* ; — but Tre/jt-
i^aWov and Trpo-eXeyoi'. See § 131, 7.
Note 1. Up6 may be contracted with the augment; as trpovKeyov
and irpoxj^aivov, for irpoiXeyov and irpoi^aivov.
Note 2. Some verbs not themselves compounds, but derived from
nouns or adjectives compounded with prepositions (called indirect
124
INFLECTION.
!' I
Ul-
1
[§io«.
compuunds), are augmented after the preposition; as vTroTrrcvw (from
vnoirros), nuspect, vntimTtvov, &H if the verb were from vn6 and
uTTTfCoi; dndKoytofiai, defend one's self an-t\oyT}(rafir}v :, see also ckkXi;-
(rid(<o. Ilapavofita, transgress law, naprfvonow, &c. is very irregular.
Karrjyopfu) (tVom Karrfyopos), accuse, has Korrf^opovv (not tKarriyopovv).
See diairdo) and dioKovito in the Catalogue of Verbs.
Note 3. A few verbs take the augment before the preposition,
and others have both augments ; as KoBfConai, sit, tKadt(tTo ; Kadi(u>,
fKoBiCov; Ka6ti8ia, sleep, iitd6tvhov and Ka^Odoi/ (£p. KuQivhov)', dvixui,
T}Vftx6pT)v, fjv«<rx6prfp (or rjuaxopifv) . See axblrjpi, du<f)i€vwui, dfiq>t-
■vvofd, dfji7ri<rxopai, €vox\tu), and dfi<f)i(T^t]Tfa>, dispute, t]p(f)i<r^T)Tovv and
r)fi(f>tafirjTovp (as if the last part were -(r^Tfrtu).
2. Indirect compounds of Svo--, lU, and occasionally those
of cv, well, are augmented after the adverb, if the following
part begins with a vowel. U.ff.
^voraptarifa, he displeased, bvaifpiarovv ; (Vfpyfria, do good, tvrjpyi'
njKa (or fiffpy-').
Note. In other cases, compounds of 8v(r- are augmented at the
beginning, and those of c^ generally omit the augment.
3. Other indirect compounds are augmented at the begir
ning. See, however, 68o7rote'a*.
Omission of A ugment.
§ 106. 1 • In the imperfect and aorist, the temporal aug-
ment is often omitfctv' by Herodotus ; as in d/xci/ScTo and d/xci-
ij/aro (for rifi€i^€To and rifi€iil/aTo) ; and both temporal and
syllabic augment by the Epic and Lyric poets, as in ofiiXtov,
^X^^) ^K^ {^^^' iip-i^iov, tlxoV) e&<Ncc).
Note. The reduplication or augment of the perfect stem is very rarely
omitted. But Homer has S^x^Tot for 8c5^x«'''«"» fi'oni Sixopai, receive ;
and Herodotus occasionally omits the teniporal augment, as in KarappibSr}'
Kos (for Kar-ripp-), and he makes ewaXiWdryTiro as plpf. of ira\tXXo7^w,
repeat.
2. The Attic poets sometimes omit the augment in (lyric) choral pas-
sages, seldom in the dialogue of the drama. In Attic prose we have XPV*
for ixPV" (impf. of x/"J)» "must.
S 108.]
VERBAL STEMS.
125
VRRBAL STEMS.
ral pas-
ve XPV*'
Formation of the PreMiit Stem from the Simple Stem.
§ 107- That we may know to what present any verbal
form is to be referred, we must understand the relations which
exist in different classes of verbs between the present stem
and the simple stem (§ 92, 2). When these arc not identical
(as they are in Avw), the present stem is generally an enlarged
form of the simple stem ; as in kottt-o) (kott-), strike, fiavOdvta
{fiaO-}, learn, Sokc'-w (Sok), believe. In a few very irregular
verbs, however, there is no connection to be seen between the
present stem and the stem or stems which are in use in other
tenses; as in «/)cpa> (<^«p-), bear, fut. oio-w {ol-}, aor. rjvtyKa
(ci'cyK-).
§ 108. Verbs in w are divided into eight classes with
reference to the formation of the present stem from the simple
stem.
I. First Class. (Stem unchanged.) Here the present is
formed directly from the single stem of the verb ; as in Xu-w,
loose, Xc'y-u), say, ttAck-o), weave ^ ay-w, lead, ypd<f)-to, write.
Note. The pure verbs of this class which irregularly retain a short
Towel in certain tenses are given in § 109, 1, N. 2 ; those which insert <r
in certain tenses, in § 109, 2 ; and the verbs which add 6 to the stem in
some or all tenses not of the present system (as /SoiJXo/uat), in § 109, 8.
These and other verbs of this class which are peculiar in their inflection will
be found in the Catalogue of Verbs.
II. Second Class. (Lengthened Stems.) 1. This includes
ail verbs with mute simple stems which form the present stem
by lengthening a short vowel, a to >;, i to ct (sometimes to I),
V to €v (sometimes to v) ; as tt/jk-u} (tolk-), melt, AetV-w (Xitt-),
leave, <f>€vy-(i) (^vy-), Jlee, rpi/S-d} (jpX^-), rub, \f/vx^o) (i/'vx-),
cool.
Here belong, further, Kfj8<o (ko^-), Xi/^w (\ad-), ai^nut (o-ott-), nXft-
<f><i} (dXt</)-), cpciVa) (f pfTT-) , TTf 1^0) (ni$-), areifiia (<rTi^-), aTfj'x© («""t;i^-)»
^(tdo/xat (0t8-)) ^Xi/3» (^t/3-), TTwyw (Tryiy-), irevdofuu (jrv0-), Ttv\(a
120
INFLECTION.
[§ 108.
k ,
Ifi
:^
(\*^X')i r^" ('■»'</>■)» <t>piy<» (<t)pvy); with Ionic or poetic (pctKai
(«pu-). tptvyoftai («pCy-), >cev^o) (kC^-)* T/i^yw (ruay-), and (d&n- or
Ta</)-) stem of Ttdtjna and «to(^oi/; see also euro) (tit-). Tp«y<a (rpay-)
irregularly lengthens & to a>. See also § 08, V. Note 1 (ft).
2. Six verbs in cw with stems in v belong by formation to
this class. Those originally lengthened v to cv, which became
ef (§ 1, N. 2) before a vowel, and finally dropped F and left € ;
as ttAC-, irAcu-, TrXefS-o), ttAc-w, «at7.
These verbs are dia (Sv-), run, via (vv-), swim, jr\it» (rrXiJ-), sail,
nvia (npv-), breathe, pia (pv-), Jlow, xto> (x^-)^ /x'fir. The poetic
o-fvw (<ri5-), urge, has this formation, with tv retamed.
NoTK. Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem, as
TfjK- in rfiKO), vfv- in (vtFot) vim, in all tenses except in the second per-
fect, second aorist, and second passive tense systems ; as <f)fvya>, <f)tv-
^opai, f(f>vyov; rpKa, rq^a, ririjica, tTdicnv, pia (for p«Fa>), ptvaopm,
tppvrjv Exceptions are the perfect middle of d\ti<f>ut, iptUta, fptiira,
<rT(!^<a, Ttvx^u, the j)erfect active of pia and Tpl(ia), and most tenses of
xia and atvat. The lengthened stem of the second perfect (as in t«-
TijKo, XfXoiira, &c.) is explained on the general principle, § 109, 3.
III. Third Class. ( Verbs in Trrm^or T Class.) Simple labial
(tt, ^, <f}) stems generally add t, and thus form the present in
TTTO) (§ 16, 1) : as KOTTT-o) (xoTr-), cuty ^XdiTT-ia (/3Aaj8-), hurt^
fHirT'U) (pt<^), throw.
Here the exact form of the simple stem cannot be determined
from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the stem is to
be found in the second aorists fKOTnjv, tffKd^rjv, and (ppi(f>rjv; and in
KaXvirroo (koKv^-), cover, it is seen in Ka\v^-r), hut.
The verbs of this class are arrr-w {&<\)-), fidnT-to (^d(f)-), fiXdnr-o
(/3Xn/3-), ddTTT-to (Ta(f>-), 0pvirr-a> (Tpv(f>-), KdXvrrr-a) («ca\v/3-), Kdpirr-at
(«Ca/Un--), xXfTTT-'J) (xXfTT-), KOTTT-Ci) ((COTT-), KpxmT-Oi (upvfi- OT KpV(f>-) ,
KviTT-a> (>ci)0-), pdiTT-ca (pa(f)-), piirT-(o (pi(f)-), (TKdnT-w (aKa(f>-), <T«te-
TTTO/Liat (cTKeTT-), aKffnTo) ({TKrjir-), (TKotnTw ((Tkwtt-), Tvirrto (tvtt-), with
Homeric and poetic yvapTrroa (yvapTv-), iviirTui (cVlVr-), and fidpnTa)
(fiapn-). TtKTo) (tck-), probably for T(KT-a>, belongs here.
IV. FouKTH Class. (Iota Class.) This includes all verbs
in which occur any of the euphonic changes arising from the
addition of i to the simple stem in forming the present stem
(§ 16, 7). There are three divisions : —
1. ( Verbs in o-o-co or tto) and ^(o.) (a) Presents in o-o-w (ttw)
generally come from palatal stems, k, y, or \ with i becoming
I 108.]
VKRRAL STKMS.
127
trrr {rr). These have futures in ^oi; as Trpdatrut (irpdy-), </o,
fut. irpd4u}\ /xoAoo-o-o) (/AoAaK-, SCCtl ill /liaXaKOs), soften^ fut. iia-
Aa^bi; Topacrtrta (Taptt;^-, SCCll ill rapa^y'i)^ confuse, fut. rapd^ta.
Sec § 16, 7 (rt).
See also Krfpvatro) (terjpvK-), (f}v\d(r(ra (0uXa»t-), Trnjo-tro) (»rT»;«t-^,
<f)pi(r<Tto (<^pu-), dXXacro'a) (aXXdy-), pdaffto (pay), rdaaa (r^y-),
n-Xriiro-o) (n-Xi^y-), opvartroi (opv^')* ^'' ^^^ Catalogue, and many other
verbs in aaa.^
NoTK. A few presents in (T(T(o (ttw) come from lingual stems,
and have futures in o-o); as ipiatroi, row (from stem eper-, seen in
tptTT}!, rower), aor. ffpttra (§ U), 2). So also Apporro} (int. (ippmro)),
fiXirrta (peXtr-, § 14, N. 1), Xiatropm (Xtr-), Tracro-o), TrXdcro-o), ttrianto,
with d</>do-(rb> (Ildt.), and poetic Ipdcro-ia, Kopvavut (KopiiB-), piatTopai.
One has a labial stem, niaaa (n-fTr-), fooX', fut. Treyo).
(b) Presents in ^w may come from stems in 8 and have fu-
tHres in o-w, or from stems in y (or yy) and have futures in ^w ;
as tfipd^ta {<f>pd^)y say^ fut. <fipdxro}, 2 aor. (Epic) 7rc(^pa8ov ; <o-
/u,i^u) (ko/xiS-, seen in ko/aiSt^), carry, fut. Kopia-io; pH^m (p<y-), c?o,
poetic, fut. pc^w; KXd^u) (KAayy-, compare clango), scream, fut.
KXdy^co. See § 16, 7 (6).
See also dp7rd(a> (dpTroS-), davpd^o> (tfaupa^-), fpifw (cptfi-), ifu
(16-), uopi(<ii (i/oftiS-), 3fci) (oS-), TTcXd^'b) (TTcXafi-), (r<o^o) (o-o)8-), x^C^
(;(a8-) ; Kpd((i) (Kpay-) , (r(f>dCa> (trAoy-) , pvC<i> (m^^v) ' ff rumble ; <ra\ni(ui
(traXTTiyy-) ; with Ionic or poetic /3ucrTdf<w (/SaordS-), (cpt^o) (dcpiy),
Tpt'fw (rpty-), TrXdfw (»rXayy-) ; &c.
Note 1. Some verbs in f<a have stems both in 8 and y ; as 7rat^a>
(iraib-, iraiy-), play, fut. irai^ovpai (§ 110, II. N. 2), aor. (naura. See
also poetic forms of Apnd^a and i/do-<ra>.
Note 2. Nt'fo) (w/S-), u?a.s/t, has a labial stem.
2. ( Feris wiVA lengthened Liquid Stems.) (c) Presents in
\\(t) are formed from simple stems in \ with added i, At becom-
ing XX; as (TTcXXo), «ene?, for o-TcX-t-o); dyytXXo), announce, for
dyycX-i-o); <T(t>dX\u), trip up, for o-<^aX-i-a>. See § 16, 7 (c).
See also ^dXXo) OdX-), ^dXXo) (^dX-), okcXXo) (okcX-), 7rdXXa> (ttoX-),
irxeXXa) (cricfX-), TeXXo) (tcX-), aWopai (dX-), &C.
(d) Presents in aii/w, nvo), atpco, and €ip(o are formed from
simple stems ^r liv, €v, ap, and ep, with added t, which, after
' The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those
of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common xwe.
m
128
INFLECTION.
[§ 108.
ii m
metathesis, is contracted with the preceding vowel ; as <f>aiv(t),
show, for <f>c.if-i-o}, fut. tftavio', KxeiVo), kill, for KT«/-t-a); cdpo), raisCf
for ap-t-ta ; aireipo), SOW, for ctttc/d-i-o). See § 16, 7 (d) .
Those in Ivo), vvto, and vpta may be formed in the same way
from simple stems in Xv, vv, and vp, u becoming I, and v'i be-
coming V ; as Kptvo), judge, for KpXv-i-u), fut. KptvCt ; d/mvi/o), loarc?
q/^ for d/AUK-i-o), fut. ap-vvSi j avpto, draw, for (Tvp-i-to.
See also cvtftpaivta (€v<f>pav-), KepSatvto (KcpSar-), pxaivta (fitav-),
iripaivio (^ripav-), (T-qpaCvto {(Tr/fiav), i<f>aiv<i} (i<j>av-), reivu) (rev-),
poetic OitviD {Ocv), ytLVo/Jtai (yiv-), (Taip<o (<rap-), \aip<o (x«p-)> «yctp<«)
(eycp-), Kcipo) (Kcp-), iftOeipotJ^tfiOep-), Kktva) (. Xii^-), irXwo) (ttXuk-),
o^uvb) (o^iJv-), ai(r;(i;va> (aiff^'^v^), oX.o<f>vpopM (pXoijivp-), &c.
Note 1. *0<f>€iX(o (o<^cA-), 6e obliged, owe, follows the analogy of
stems in cv, to avoid confusion with 6<j>€X\(o (o<^eA-), increase; but in
Homer it has a regular "'orm oc^eAAo). Homer has eiAo/uai (e\-) /)rcss.
Note 2. Verbs of this division (2) regularly have futures and
aorists active and middle of the liquid form (§ 110, II. 2). For
exceptions (in poetry), see § 110, II. N. 4.
Note 3. Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this
class; as Bt/io) and Scpw in Class 1. For ^aivto, &c., see V. Note 1.
3. (Lengthened Vowel Stems.) (e) Here belong two verbs
in aio) with stems in av, KaOo, burn, and KXaiwy weep (Attic also
Koo) and KXdto). These stems Kav- and kXxlv- (seen in Kava-ta
and KXawrofiai) became ku/ti- and KXa/ri-, whence km- and KAai-
(see II. 2).
Note. The Epic forms other present stems in this way; so Saia> (8o-))
burn, fialonat (/uo-), seek, vaiw (^va-), inhabit, oirvlu (oiru-), marry, and per-
haps Saiojxci, divide,
V. Fifth Class. (N Class.) 1. Some simple stems are
strengthened in the present by adding v; as <f>6dv-<a {(f)6a-),
anticipate; tiV-o) (ti-), pay; <f}Oivo) {<f>Oi), tvaste; SaKv-u) (8aK-),
bite; Kap.v-*a (Ka;u.-), be weary ; T€fiv-<o (t«/w,-), cut.
So jSatVo) (fia-, fiav-, Note 1), ttivo) (tti-, see also VIH.), 8wa> (with
Sua)), iJom. (9vvo) (with Ovw), rush: for cAawto (cAa-), see N. 2.
2. Some consonant stems add av; a/naproVa) (afiapr-), err;
al(rOdv-ofiai {al<r$-) , perceive ; (ikaa-rdvo} (jSAaar-), sproUt.
If the last vowel of the simple stem is short, v (p. or y be-
fore a labial or a palatal, § 16, 5) is inserted after the vowel j
"!'
[§ 108.
,, raise,
ae way
i v'i be-
0. ward
a (tcv),
) iyeCpio
(ttAvv-),
lalogy of
o; but in
\-) press.
ures and
2). For
g to this
. Note 1.
;\ro verbs
ttic also
in Kawro)
md K\ai-
Saia> (8o-),
and per-
tems are
. {<f>ea-),
-0) (8aK-),
\vv(a (with
N. 2.
JT-), err;
or y be-
le vowel ;
§ 108.J
VERBAL STEMS.
129
as Xav0d.V'io(\a9-, Xav6-) , escape notice ; Aa/xj8ai/-a) (\tt/?-,Xa/x/8-),
take; ^lyyai/to (ffiy-^Oiyy-), touch.
So ai^av-o) (with aij^-at), Bapdau-o) (8ap$-), a7r-€;(dni/o/Liat («X^-),
tfai^o) (witli if-oj), poetic Kt^ai'-o) (ftX")' otSav-w (with oid-eo), Class 7),
oXt(T^ai/-(i) (oXtrr^-), 6a(f)paiv-opai ipa<pp-, N. 1), 6<f)\i(rKdv-u> (6(f>\-,
6(f)\urK-, yl.), with poetic aKiraiv-opai (aXXr-., N. 1), d^:f>av-(a (dX0-),
fpibaivoi (epi8-). With inserted »/, y, or /li, Avdav-o) (aS-), Xayxaiz-ea
(Xa;(-), pavddu-a> (pad-), irvvddv-opat (ttv^-), Ti;y;(av-(» (tu;(-), witn po-
etic ^avhuvbi (;(aS-), epvyyav-a> (epiJy-).
3. A few stems add vc : j8ui/c-cj (with /?v-w), sto/j i</7, iKvi-ofxai
(with iK-co), come, Kwi-ia (tv-), Hss; also apTr-i<r\yc-ofiaiy have
on, and vTr-urxvi-ofiai, promise, from lo-^-w (VIII.).
4. Some stems add i/v (after a vowel, vw) : these form the
second class (in vvpi) of \erbs in fiiy as SeiKw-fii (Scik-),
show, Ktpavw-fii (Kens-), mix, and are enumerated in § 125, 5.
Some of these have also the present in luu) (§ 122, N. 5).
Note 1. (a) Batvw (/3a-, ^av-), go, and 6(r<f)paivopai {6a<f)p-, 6a<bpav-),
smell, not only add v or av, but lengthen dv to ati/ on the principle of
Ciaf^s 4. They belong here, however, as they do not have the in-
flection of liquid verbs (IV. 2, Note 2). See also KrpSatW, paivat,
TfTpaiua, with Horn. dXiraivopai (aXtr-, dXtTov-) and fpidaiua.
(b) Some simple stems of this class lengthen a short vowel (on
the principle of Class 2) in other tenses than the present ; as Xap^duto
(Aq(3-), fut. Xrjyjfopai (X?;/3-) : SO daKVot, \ayxdva>, Xavddva, rvyxdvat.
See also fpvyydvta, ep^opat, ^evywpi, and nvvddvopai.
Note 2. 'EXavva (eXa-), rfriuc, is irregular in the present stem
(probably for eXa-uv-w). "OX-Xvpi (oX-), destroy, adds Xv instead of
vv (by assimilation) to the stem 6X-. Aappdo) {8dp-), subdue, adds va.
VI. Sixth Class. ( Verbs in o-km.) These add o-k or (after
a consonant) i<tk to the simple stem to form the stem of the
present; as yrjpd-a-Kto (yrjpa-), grow old, tvp-i<TKU) (eup-), Jind,
ap€-(TKta (dp€-), please, o-rep-icrKo} (crrcp-), deprive.
These verbs are, further, aX-i<TKopai, dp&X-ta-Kto, dpnXaK-ia-Kta
(poetic), dva\-i(TKa>, dna(f)-i(TK(ji (poet.), dpap-iaKd (poet.), ^d-<rK(o,
Qi-^poi-aK(a Opo-), ^i<a-(TKopai (/3io-), /3Xa)-(rK&) (/noX-, 3Xo-), yeyoiv-iaKO),
yi-yv(a-aKa> (yvo-), 8t-8pd-orKO) (8pa-), (iravp-iarKOi (poet.), ^j3d-(rKa>, Bvfj-
(TKat (dau-. Ova-), 6pw-<rK(o (dop-, 6po-), iKd-aKopai, ptdv-aKO), pi-pvTf-<rK<o
(pvd-), Tti-iti-aKoi (Ion. and Pind.), Trt-wpd-o-Ka), Tt-Tpa)-<r»ca) (rfm-)., <f)d-
oKoi, xd-o"»co)' See also the verbs in N. 3, and 6<f)Ki<rKdu(o.
Note 1. Many verbs of this class reduplicate the present stem
(§ 109, 7, c) by prefixing its initial consonant with t, as yi-yva-vKu>
iyvo-). *Ap-ap-i<TK(o (dp-ap-) has an Attic reduplication (§ 102, N. 1).
9
i
C'i'
'r;
UL :
]
i
1
1
i
!
1
I! •^ ffl
130
INFLECTION.
[§ 108.
Note 2. Stems in o lengthen o to <» before o-kw, as in ytyvoxTKO) ;
and some in a lengthen a to i;, as in uiuunaKa) (fiva-) and Bvna-Ka (dav-.
Qva; § 109, 7, a).
Note 3. Three verbs, aKi-<TKU) {oKvk-), avoid, didd-oKu {5i8t£x-)> teach,
and Xd-ffKU) (Xa/c-), speak, omit k or x before (tkw instead of inserting t. So
Homeric elaKU or lirKW (etVc- or ik-).
Note 4. These verbs, from their ending (tkw, are often called inceptive
verbs, although fow of them have any inceptive meaning.
VII. Seventh Class. (E Class.) A few simple stems
add € to form the present stem ; as Sokc-w (Sok-), seem, fut.
86$(i); wdt-io ((i^-), j»MsA, fut. axro) (§ 16, 2); ya/Mc-w (ya/w,-),
marry, fut. (ya/Acw) yafiio.
These verbs are, further, yrycocco), yrfdfo). KTtmeto, Kvptto, fiaprvptta
(with fiafyrvpofiai) i, pimfa (with pinTta), (fjikeot (v. Epic forms); and
poetic hariopai^ bovnto}, ctXe'cu, iiravptat, Kfvreo), Tiareopai, piyta, oruyeo),
ropco), and \paurpfm. See also TrexTeo) (7rf»c-, »re»cT-).
Most verbs in fa> belong to the first class, as Troteta (Trote-).
Note, A few chiefly poetic verbs form present stems by adding a in
the same way to the simple stem : see fipvxdofiai, yodu, 8ripidw, prjKdopxii,
prfTidu, pvKdopai.
VIII. Eighth Class. {Mixed Class.) This includes the
few irregular verbs in which any of the tense stems are so
essentially different from others, or which are otherwise so
peculiar in formation, that they cannot be brought under any
of the preceding classes. They are the following : —
aipiat (A-), take, fut. alpijcra), 2 aor. clXoi'.
dXc'^o) (dX«#t-). ward off, fut. aXf^^o-a> (§ 109, 8), dXe^Vo/xai, and
dXe^o/iat; 2 aor. a\a\Kov (Horn.) for ak-akfK-ov (§ 100, 2, X. 4).
yiyvopai (ytv- or yv-, yev(-, yn-), become, for yi-yevopat, fut. ytinj-
aopm, 2 aor. eyei/o/xi/f, 2 pf. yeyova (§ 109, 3) with ytydao-t, &C.
(§ 125, 4).
€0a {Ft6-, FatO-, a>d-)> ^^ accustomed, 2 pf. eiotBa, 2 plpf. eludtw.
fibou (FtS-, Id-), saw, vidi, 2 aorist (no present act.); 2 pf. olha,
know (§ 127). Mid. cifio/iat (poetic).
elitov {fin-, fp-,pe-), spoke, 2 aor. (i»o pres.); fut. {(pta)^ epw, pf.
«i-pT)-Ka. The stem eiw- is for t-tn (orl^,. N-Ffn-), and e'p- (pe-) is for
fep- {Fp(-), seen in Lat. rer-htuu (§ 109, 7. «). So tv-eVo).
fpXOfjMi {f'Kvd- or eX^-, f'Xev^-), </o, fut. fkfixropai (poet.), 2 aor.
^X^oc.
?p8<» (f'py-)' 'I'Ork, poetic, fut. ep^co; by metathesis f'py- becomes
pfy- in pc'fw (Class 4). Originally the stem was Fepy-, as in tpyov,
work, German Werk.
[§ 108.
§ 109.]
MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS.
181
:o) {$av-,
.), teach,
ig «. So
inceptive
e stems
!cw, fut.
fiaprvptf^
ms); and
DO, oTvyeo),
■)•
dding o in
I, ixijKdonai,
ludes the
9 are so
rwise so
nder any
lo-ouai, and
^^ 4). ,
tut. ytvt}-
\yda<ri, &c.
|2 pf. oifia,
I)) epw, pt-
|(pe-) is for
3t.), 2 aor.
^. becomes
Is in (pyov.
(a0i(o (<8-, <f)ay-), eat, fut. cdo/Luu, 2 aor. f(j)ayov.
«ra) (Attic only in comp.), />e about : mid. evofiai, follow (<ren- or
<r7r-, CTT-), fut. cyjronai, 2 aor. fcrnofiiju.
(X(o {(Tfx- or o-;^-, o-;(f-), /iat;e, fut. f^w or axw^> 2 aor. eap^oi* (for
<-o'e;(-oi'). Also tffyo) (tor (n-<re;(-a)).
opdo) (oTT-), nee, tut. oyjfoiiai, pf. ea)pu.»"a. See ctdoi/.
iraax<o {irad-, Trtvd-), suffer, fut. Treto-ouni, 2 pf. ntirovda, 2 aor. cTra-
TTtW (tti-, tto-), drink, fut. iriofiat, pf. 7re7ra)Ka, 2 aor. tirtov.
TTiTrra) (rrfT-. ttto-), ,/rt//, for Trt-Trer-o), fut. TrecroC/xat, pf. ne-nTfo-Ka,
2 aor. enftTov (Dor. fnfTou).
Tpe^o) {8pafi-, bpafie-), run, fut. dpap-ovfiai, pf. dedpdfirjKa, 2 aor.
oi/.
<^ep(a (ot-, eVfK-, by redupl. and sync. fveveK, fvtyK-), hear, fero;
fut. ouro), aor. ^wyjca (§ 109, 7, b), pf. ivr^vox-a (§ 109, 3, N. 2), eV-
^i/ry'/xat, aor. p. fjvexOijv.
For full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue.
Note. Occasional Homeric or poetic irregular forms appear even in
some verbs of the fir.st seven classes. See d/caxfi'w and yivbdvui in the
Catalogue.
Modification of Verbal Steins.
Remark. This section includes all those modifications of the
stem which follow recognized principles, or which occur in so many
verbs that they deserve special notice. For example, the change
from ripjd- in TiyLafa to rt/xjj- in Tip.r)a(a, that from arepy- in trrepycj to
(tTTopy- in 2 pf. earopya, that from o'T€X-(stem of (rreXXeo) to orfiX- in
<oT€iXa and iaraX- in (araX-Ka, and tliat from ^aX- (stem of /SoXXco)
to fie^Xij- (for /3f/3Xa-) in j3e/3Xi;»ca, all follow definite principles; while
that from n-t- to tto- in irlvo and that from n-ad- to n€v6- in ird(rx<o
(§ 108, VIII.) are mere irregularities.
§ 109. 1. Most stems ending in a short vowel
lengthen this vowel in all tenses formed from these
stems, except the present and imperfect. A and e be-
come t), and o becomes w ; but when « follows e, i, or p,
it becomes d. E.g.
Ttpdoi (rijia-), Iwnor, Tifirj-<T(a, (Tifirf-o-a, Terifirj-Ka, T(rifiT)-p,ai, tripfi-
6rjv\ (f)i\e<a (0iXf-), love, (PiXfjaoi, e(f>iXr]<Ta, iT«f)iXrjKa, ir€(f>tXTfpai, ec^tXij-
6tjv, i^riXoat (finXo-), show, dijXoiaa), &c. ; SO Ti<a, riata (l) ; fiaicpvoi,
haKpv<T(a (v). But €00), ed(r<o (a) ; idofiai, idaofiai (a) ; bpdoay Spdaa (a),
tUpaaa, b«8paKa.
Thi.s applies also to stems which become vowel stems by metathe-
sis (§ 109, 7), as /3aXXw (^aX-, /3Xa-), throw, pf. /3e/3Xi;-Ka; KdfjiV<o (»ca/Li-,
f :
! L
fl:
if
m
132
INFLECTION.
[§ 109,
Kfi&-), labor, KtHfiri-Ka; or by adding « (§ 109, 8), as Poi\ofiai (j8ouX-,
/3ouAe-), tcish, $ov\'ft-<rofxai, j3ei3ovAi)-/iat, ^j8ou\^-d»ji'.
Note I. AtJw, Zoose, generally has o in Attic poetry in the pres-
ent and imperfect (generally i) in Homer) ; in other tenses it has
i> only in the future and aorist active and middle and in the future
perfect. 'AKpodofiai, hear, has aKpodaofiai, &c. ; XP^^^^ 0^^^ oraclefi,
lengthens a to 17 ; as xph''^^ ^^- ^ rp^o-o) and frprja-a from stem
Tpa-', see Tf Tpaiv(o, bore.
Note 2. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary to
the general rule (§ 109, 1); as yf\a<o, laugh, yfXaaoum, tyiXdva;
dpKfa), suffice, dpKfaa, tjpKf<Ta; p-axofiai (/xa;(6-) Jight, pjaxitrofiai (Ion.),
iyiaxfodp.r]v.
(a) This occurs in the following verbs: (pure verbs) ayafiat, al8eo-
liat, aKtofiai, aXeo), ai>i;a>, dpK€oi, dpoat, dpixo, ycXdo), iXKv<o (v. cXko)),
fp.e<o, (pari), ^fa>, ^Xdco, kXcxo), break, ^e&), Trruo), cmdcii, rfXeoi, rpfo), ^Xda>,
XaKd<ji) ; and Epic oK^Sew, kotco), Xo6a>, vtiKfta, and the stems {ad-) and
(df-); — (other verbs with vowel stems) dpfOKa (dpf), axBopai
(d;(df-), fXauj/ft) (eXa-), (XdirKo/iat (IXa-), fifdv<TKu> (fifdv-) ; also all verbs
in avw(ii and tvpvfii, v.ith stems in a and c (given in § 125, 5), with
oXXvfii (oXe-) and ofivvf^u (ofio-).
(b) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ-
ent tenses in the following verbs: (pure verbs) atVeco, aipect, 8i(o, bind,
8voi (v. 8vvu>), epvu) (Kpic), dvco, sacrifice, KoKiui Xuo), /nuw, noBfo, tto-
vccd; — (other verbs) ^alvoi (/3a-), (vpiaKut {tvp-, eupt-), fidxonai
(fiaxf-)^ itivui (jtX-, TTO-), <^Bdv(ii (<f)6a-), ^divot ((f>6i-).
2. Many vowel stems have o- added, before all endings
not beginning with o-, in the perfect middle and first passive
tense systems. E.g.
Tf\f(i),^fivish, T(TfXe-(T-p.ai, fTcreXfO-fiTfu, eTf\((TdT)u (§ 97, 4); ye\d<a,
laugh , eye\d-a-dt}v, ytXaadfjuaf, ;^pd<ii), /y/pc orac/^.s", ;^pi7(ro), Kk\pr\-cr-pLai,
CXRW^I"-
This occurs in all the verbs included in 1, N. 2 (a), except dpoa,
so far as they form these tenses, and in the following: aKova, 8pd<o,
dpavfo, KeXfvoi, kXcio) (kXi/w), Kvdio, Kvalto, Kpova, KvXio), Xcvo), i/co), hea/>,
^v(o, Tratb), TraXaiA), TraucD, Trpto), add, ripa, vu), ;(da), XP^^^ pCP''<"f ^'^^^ P^^
etic pato). Some, however, have forms both with and without a-. See
the Catalogue.
3. In the second perfect the simple stem generally changes
€ to o, and lengthens other short vowels, a to 77 (after p to d),
o to €0, I to at, and v to cv. E.g.
Srepy-o), love, earopya', y ly vopai (y(v-). become, yfynva, fytydvtiv',
TiKTot (tck-), bring forth, Wrojca; (baivro (^«i/-). 7rf<j)r}va; Kpd(oi (Kpfiy-),
cry, KfKpdya; tijxo) (tok-), inell, rcrrjxa, iT(Ti}<(iv', XfiTro) (Xi7r-),XeXo(jro,
[§ 109.
\\e pres-
s it has
a future
oracles,
3111 stem
ntrary to
tye'KvKTa \
at (.Ion.),
fxai, albfo-
v. f\K<o),
CO), <^Xaci>,
(aa-) and
, axdofMi
) all verbs
, 5), with
in differ-
, fit'o), /^«»</»
no^eo), TTo-
endings
passive
); ycXao),
cept (ipoo),
VOVO),
jao),
and po-
»ut tr. See
y changes
r p to d)?
, cyfyiJi'fii'i
^0) (»(fK"iy-)»
r-),XcXoi7rai
§ 109.]
MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS.
133
So iydpw (^iy(p-),
i\f\olveiv\ iftfuyw (067-), flee, iti^ptvya, iirttpdyeiv.
rouse, iyp^yopa (§ 102, N. 1).
Note 1. Xlpdanu (irpdy-), do, has vfwpdya (§ 110, IV. (d), N. 2).
"EBw (49-), am accustomed, has irregularly elwda (wfl- for Fwd-, § 104) ;
and f^yvvfjLi iP&y) has dppuya (^w-y-), of. rpj^yw (t/jot-), § 108, II.
Note 2. This change of e to o occurs even in some first perfects
which aspirate the final consonant of the stem (§110, IV. b) : these
are iccKAo^a, fk*om kx/ittw (kAoit-), steal; e1\oxa, from \ey-w, collect;
TTCiroju^a f rem W/xir-o), send; rhpoipa (sometimes Terpafa) from rp(ir-u,
turn; rfrpopa (perhaps second perfect), from Tp4<p-(D, nonrish. So ;
becomes ot in itSoiKa (ii-),fear. In rldrtut {dt-),put, e becomes d in tc-
0ciKa aud Tc6cijuai; compare trlvw (n-i-), drink, irtnuKa and vivofxai (jito-),
4. In simple liquid stems of one syllal^lc, c is generally
changed to a in the perfect active, perfect middle, and second
passive systems. E.g.
SreXXo) (orrX-), semi, ((rroKKa, eoraX^at, faraXtju. (rTaXrjaoftai : Kcipa
(^Kcp-), shear, KcVapftat, eKdpt}v (Ton.); o-Trci'po) (o-Trtp-), .sfxt', €tr7rap/iat,
iimapr\v So in Sfpu, Kretco), pfipofxai, TeXXo), and ^Oiipui.
Note 1. Tlie same change of e to fi (after p) occurs in orpe^A),
/w?v», ((rrpa/Li/xai, eoTpdffiqv, arpatfiqa-opai (but 1 aor. caTpi<^Br]v, rare) ;
TpfTTti), /«»•/*, rirpaf^ (generally TeTpo<f>a), Terpappau (Tpdnrju (but
erp((f>dt)v, Ion. fTpd(f)6Tiv) : Tp(<f)at, nourish, rerpcxfia (late TfTpa<jt)a),
Tf Bpappai, «Tpd(f}r)v (but iBpfffiOr^v) \ also in the second aorist passive
of (kXcVto), .s7('«/, j'.XFK&i, weave, aud repTro), delight, iKkdnrfv, (nXaKTjv,
and (Epic) (rdpnr^v (1 aor. (k\(<I}Btiv, tTrXcx^J', fT(p<^6r)v, rarely Epic
«Tdp(f>6rjv). It occurs, further, in the second aorist (active or mid-
dle) of Krrti/o), /■///, Tf/u/o), CM/, TptVa), and Tt'pTro); viz., in cktovov
(poet.), trauov, (Tap,6pr)v, €Tpanov, (Tpan6pr}v, Terupnoprjv (Horn.); also
in several Homeric aud poetic forms (see 8epKopat, ntpda, and Trrryo--
O-ft)).
Note 2. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with
monosyllabic liquid stems. TetVo) («!»-), stretch, in which Tti/- diops
V in this system (§ 109, G), changes c to a in (Tddr)v and tK-radijao-
fiat.
5. Liquid stems lengthen their last vowel in the aorist
active and middle; as o-tcX\(o (o-tcX-), co-rciXa. See § 110,
III. 2, and the examples.
6. Four verbs in vw drop v of the stem in the perfect and
first passive systems, and thus have vowel stems in these
forms : — Kpivm (KpTi/-), separate, KcVpiKa, KCKptp,ai, iKpiOrjv ; kXiv(o
(kXIv), incline, kckXiko, K€Kkifiai, ckXi^i^v ; r-XtVw (irXvv-), wash,
Tren-Xv/Aat, ^Au^?;!/ ; tciVw (tcv-), stretch, TcraKa (§ 109, 4), tctu-
134
INFLECTION.
[§ 109.
/tut, irdOrjv, iK-TaO^(Tofiai. So KT«Va> ill soiiie poetic forms : see
also KtpSaivui.
Note. When final 1/ of a stem is not thus dropped, it becomes
y before Ka (§ 16, 5), and generally becomes o- before /xat (§ 16, 6,
N. 4) ; as <f>aiva) ((pav), iTf<l)ayKa, n-c^acr/biai, €(f)dvdT}P.
7. (a) The stem sometimes suffers metathesis (§ 14, 1) :
(1) in the present, as Ovt^ctkw {Oav-, Ova-), die, (§ 108, VI. N.
2) ; (2) in other tenses, as /3aAAo> (/SaA.-, /SAu-), throw, fie/SXtj-
Ktt, ^tf^Xrjfiaiy iftkrjOrjv ; BtpKofiai (ScpK-) , see (poetic), 2 aor.
ISpaKoi/ (^paK-, § 109, 4, N. 1).
(i) Sometimes syncope (§ 14, 2) : (1) in the present, as
yiyvofiai (yev-), become, for ■yt-yfv-o/utai ; (2) in the second ao-
rist, as irrToixriv for i-ireT-ofirjv ; (3) in the perfect, as Tmdvvvfii
(TTCTtt-), expand, TrcTrra/Aai for Trc-ircTa-fiai.
(c) Sometimes reduplication (besides the regular reduplica-
tion of the perfect stem) : (1) in the present, especially in
verbs of the sixth class and in verbs in fit (§ 121, 3), as yt-
yvtucTKOj, know, yi-yvofiai, i-arT7}fii ; (2) in the second aorist, as
ireCdio {irXB-), persuade, ire-irXOov (Ep.). Attic redupl. in aya>,
lead, i^yayoi/ (ay-ay-) ; SCO apaplaKUi. §110, V. N. 2; §100,
Notes 3 and 4.
8. E is sometimes added to the present stem, sometimes
to the simple stem, making a new stem in c. From this some
verbs form special tenses ; and others form all their tenses
except the present, imperfect, second perfect, and second
aorists (§ 90, N. 1). E.g.
BovXofiai (/3ouX-), wli^h, Pov\rf(rop.ai (fiovXe-, § 109, 1), &C.; alcrdd-
vopai (alad-), perceive, alaOriaopal (aladf-), jfo-^ij/iiat; fifua (fiev-),
remain, ptptvrjKa (/xei/e-) ; pA\opai (pax-)i,/if/hl, fut. {p.a\f-op.ai) paxov-
flat, (paxeadprfv, pfpdxipai', x^'^P*^ (x^P')* ^'cjolce, x'^'-PW*^ (x'**P*')»
Kfxdpr)Ka (xapf-).
(a) The following have the stem in e, in all tenses except those
mentioned; (1) formed from the present stem: aXc^ai. tiKOopai (Ion.),
tixOopai, (iovXopai, /Sdo-Ko), t^fo), want, (deXot and dcXto, epopMi and eipo-
pat (Ion.), (pp(o, fv8a>, (^a», KfXopai (poet.), pdxopai, pfHopat (poet.),
ptWco, pfXo), pvC<>>i i^fic/i', otopai, oixopai. ocfxiXto ntTopai; (2) formed
from the simple stem: ala-ddvopai (ata-d-). npaprdvoi (Atiapr-), &v8dya>
(iS-), dn-tx^dvopai (-^X^*)' oif^dvat (av^-), ffXaardvut (^Xatrr-), (vp'uTKta
(jfvp-), Kixdva {kix'), XdaKut (Xok-), pavddvoi (^paB-), oXiaBdvio (pXiaB-),
/S
P
a
110.]
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS.
135
oWvfit (dX-), 6(f}\t,<TKdv(i} (J)(p\-) ; see poetic d/bi7rXaKt(rK(i) and d?ra(^i'ff««»),
and the stem (8a-) .
(b) The following have the stem in e in special tenses; (1) formed
from the present stem : 8iM<tk{o, Kadi{^u), xXaio), fiiva>, pefua, iratci), ttcto-
fufilf^irra ; (2) formed from the simple stem : hapOavta (8ap6-), K^but
^iSHh), oacfipalvofiai {6(r(f)p-), neidca (nX6-), pea (pi>-), o-T<i/3a» (ari^-),
Twyxdi'w ('"L'X')' X^C*^ (x^')') ^^® ^^^^ yiyvopai, (\<i), rpfx*^- Xa/po)
(xop-) forms botii xa*P*" *"d xape-.
Note. In opwpi, swear, the stem 6p- is enlarged to ofio- in some
tenses, as in &po-aa; in AXltrKopai, he captured^ dX- is enlarged to
dXo-, as in &Kd>aopai. So rpv^oi, exhaust, Tpv\aa(o. So probably oixu-
pai, be gone, has stem oi^o- for olxc- in the perfect otxtn-ica (ci. Ion.
oixr}-pai).
olorBd-
paxov-
Xaipc),
&v8dvo»
fvpiaKta
I
Formation of Tenae Stems.
Remark. This section explains the formation of the seven
tense stems enumerated in § 92, 4. They are generally formed
from the simple stem of the verb (when this is distinct from
the present stem). But verbs of the second class commonly
have the lengthened stem (§ 108, II. Note) in all tenses
except in the second periiect, second aorist, and second pas-
sive tense S3^stems. The verbs enumerated in § 109, 8 form
some tenses from stems lengthened by adding e. The stem
ma}' be modified in different tenses as has been explained in
§ 109.
§ 110. I. {Present Stetn.) The present stem is the stem
of the present and imperfect in all the voices.
The principles on which it is deriv ed from the simple stem, when
they are not identical, are explained in § 108.
II. {Future Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add <r to
form the stem of the future active and middle. These vowel
stems Ungthen a short vowel (§ 109, 1) ; tt, /8, </> with o- be-
come ij/; K, y, X with a- become $; t, S, before a- are dropped
(§ 16, 2). Kg.
Tt/xd(i>, honor, Tipr^arat', dpdm, do, 8p^a>; kotttw {kott-), cut, Koyjroi',
^\ditT<ji OXa/3-), hurt, /3XcS/^ci>, ^\d^opai ; ypd(f>oi. write, ypdyf^at, ypdylro-
pai; TrXtKto, twist, ttXc^o); iTpdaaroi {npdy-), do, wpd^ia, npd^opai; rapdc-
(Tta {rapax'), confuse, rapd^to, rapd^opai; (f)pd{^(o {(fipab-), tell, <f>pda'<a
(for <l>pad-<r<ii) ] irtida, persuade, nctW (for n-et^-o-w). So airtvdtt,
136
INFLECTION.
[§ 110.
'j '
fxntv, trntitrw (for aiTfv8-<ra>, § 16, 2 and 6, N. 1) ; Tpf<pa, nourhhf
ep(y\fu>, Opi^opai (§ 17, 2, Note).
2. Liquid sU'ins add c (in pliicc of a) to tbnn the future
stem ; this e is contracted with u> and o/xat to aj and mmx
E.g. mJ
Latvia (^ai/-), show, fut. (j^avi-ut) (fiapat, ((fyavt-ofiai) (jiavovfiai] (rreX-
Xo) ((TTfX-), send, (crreXe'-a)) trrcXo), (orcXe'-o/iat) aTcXoO/xat ; v€fiu>, dicide,
(pf fi€-u)) pffiS)', KpiPia ixpip-), J'>dge, («c^.W- ,») Kpivu.
.\oTE 1. (At!i( Fn'ur\) a) i is Mures ^f KoKia, call, and
T(\fa>,fnish, KoKiaai and TfX«o ,.< * '3, 1, N. 2), drop o- of the future
stem, and contract »caXf- id ■ \t- \\'d\\ &> and o/nat, making KaXu,
Ka\ovpiMy TcXco and (poetic) rcXoii^iji. IT 'o futures have the same
forms as the presents. So oXXv/xt (oX-, okt- ,, desfroi/, has fut. oktaui
(Horn.), <5X«a) (Hdt ), 6\Si (Attic).
So fiax€aofiai, Homeric future of pdvopai (paxf-), fiyht, becomes
pa\ovpai in Attic. KaBf(opxii (cS-), sit, has Kadtdovpai.
(b) In like manner, futures in aaca from verbs in a»ia;/it (stems in
a), some in eo-o) from verbs in cwy/Lu, (stems in f), and some in <ier<a
fi'om verbs in a^at (stems in a8), drop cr and contract a&> and ea> to
S}. Thus JKtbdppvpi ((TKf8a-\ scatter, a-Ktbdaca, (rrKfdda)) aKtba; aro-
ptppvp-i (arope-), spread, aTopiaut, {arop(<o) aropS); /3j/3dfa) (/3t/3«6-),
cause to (jo, ^t^do-a>, (J^i^dni) /3t/3a). So e\avpa> (Aa-), ^r/we (§ 108, V.
N. 2), eXdo-o), (c'Xnb)) eXoi. For fut. eXdo). Kptpoio, &c., in Homer, see
§ 120, 1, (/.).
(c) Futures in to-w and to-o/xai from verbs in tfw (tS-) of more than
two syllables regularly drop <r and insert e; then tca> nnd tco/Liat are
contracted to «o and lovpai ; as Kopi((o, carry, Kouitro}, {Kopifu>) Ko/xtm,
Kopiaopxu, (Kopifopai) Kopiovpai, inflected like (f)iXcJ, <pi\ovpai (§ 98).
See § 120, 2, (o).
(«') Though these forms of future are called A ttic, because the
Attic dialect seldom uses any others in these tenses, they are yet
found in Other dialects and even in Homer, while the Attic occa-
sionally uses the full forms in oat.
Note 2. (Doric Future.) A few verbs sometimes add e to o- in
the stem of the future middle, and contract aiopai to aovfiai. These
are n-Xfo), .sail, irXevaovp^i (§ 108, II. 2) ; ttvco), breathe, npfvaovpai ;
j/e'o), stvim, pfv<rovp.ai; Kkaia, loeep, KKavarovpai (§ 108, IV. 3^; (f)fvya>,
flee, (f)fv^ovp.at ; mnra, fall, Trta-ovpai. See also Trat'^o) and irvpOdpo-
pai.
The Doric forms middle futures like these, and also active futures
in o-fo) contracted acj (§ 119, 6). These few are used in Attic with
the regular futures rrkevaopxii, Tri/fvo-o/^at, KKavaofiai, (fxv^onai (but
never nfaopai).
Note 3. A few irregular futures drop o- of the stem, which thus
has the appearance of a present stem. Such are ;^6a> and x^<>M^'>
§110.]
FORMATION OF TEXSE STEMS.
137
ocea-
lat. oi" veto, />o«/- • e8o/iot, from (a$i(o (f8-), eat; niofiai, troiii niuu)
(m-). drink.
: OTE 4. Afewliouid .aems iuM n like mute stems; KeXXa)(KeX-),
etic; so (pOelpci ( pdtp-), (Icstmi/, Ep. iii<^. >pd(p'j<o.
J^I. {First Aorist Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute steins add o-
to form the stem of the first aorist active and middle. The
I'Migtheniiig of a final vowel of the stem and the euphonic
changes of mutes before <r are the same as in the future
stem. E.g.
Tipaa, (Tip,r}(ra, irip.rjadfir)v\ 8pd(o, edpaaa'^i kottto), eKoyjra, (Koyj/^dprjv:
^XaTJTtj, f3Xa«/ra; ypd(f>a>, fypa\l/a, fypa^dpr^v\ irXfKa, i'nXt^a, cTrXf^''
fXTfu'., irpdaaoi, (irpa^a, (npa^dp,t)v\ rapdaao), €Tdpa^a\ (f>pd(<o, tcppaaa (fov
€(f)pa8-aa) ; nfiOa^enfiaa (§ 108, II. Note) ; OTtivbto, eaTrtiaa (for eant >
<ra)\ Tpedxo, tdpf^a, fdp(yjrdp.rfv (§ !7, 2, Note); ttjkch, melt, fin^s*
(§ 108, II. Note); nUio, sail, ^nXevou (§ 108, II. 2).
NoTK 1. Three verbs in ^t, 8i8a>pt (8o-), f/ive, Irffn («-), send ana
Tidrffii (d«-), put, form the aorist stem by adding k instead of •> iv
ix^, ebfiMca, fJKa, eBrjKo. These forms are seldom used except iu ci.e
indicative active, and are most common in the singular, where the
second aorists €8a>v, ^v, edqv, are not in use. (See § 122, N. 1.) Even
fiKaptfu and i6t]Kdpj)v occur, the latter not in Attic Greek.
Note 2. Xew, oour, has aorists txta (Hom. fxfva) and exedfirjv,
correspoiiding to the futures ;(ea) and x^^l'^'' (II- ^- ^)' ErTrov, said,
has also first aorist 6?7ra; and <^epoi, bear, has Ijvfyk-a (from stem
«Vf yic-) .
For Homeric aorists like ejSTjo-ero, ibiacTo, l^ov, &c., see § 119, 8.
2. Liquid stems form the first aorist stem by lengthening
their last vowel, a to >? (after i or p to a) and « to ct. JH.g.
^aivat (<f>av-), €(\>rjv-a, ecjtr/vdfiTjv (rare); ffreXXo) (oreX-), co-retX-a,
€VretX-d/ii»;i' ; ayye'XXo) (ayytX-), announce, ^yy€i\a,f)yy€iKdfiriv; nepalixa
(ntpdv-),Jinish, €7r€pava; p.taivcd(pidv-), stain, ip-idva; pfp(o,diride, evfifxa,
(V(ipMp.r]v', Kpiu<OfJud(/c, fKpiva', dfivvu), keep off, fjpvva, ^pvvdp.r}v', <p6fipui
(0(9fp-), destroy, €(p6eipa. Compare the futures in II. 2.
Note 1. A few liquid stems lengthen av to dv irregularly; as
Kep8aiuto, gain, €Kfp8apa. A few lengthen pdp to prjv', as Tfrpaivw, bore,
tT€Tpr}va.
Note 2. Atpco (dp-), raise, and aXXo/xut (aX-), leap, have ^pa, f/pd-
tirjv, r)\dp,iiv (augmented) ; but a in the other mood« , as Spa, apat, Spa-
fiat, apaip.r)v, dXo^ei/of (all with a).
IV. {Perfect Stem.) {a) Perfect Middle Stem. The stem
of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive consists of
(^
138
INFLECTION.
rS "0.
ll
the simple stem (in verbs of tiie second class, of the present
stem) with the required reduplication or augment prefixed ; as
\v-ijj, \i\vfjLaif iXtKvixrjv ', AciV-u), AcAcitt- (§ 108, 11. Note), A<-
\fififiai, iXiXtififjirjv,
The stem may be modified (§ 109) as follows: —
(1) A short final vowel is regularly lengthened; as 0(X(-a), ir«f)i-
\r)fjLai, (iTe(f>i\fffirjV] dpa<o, bedpofiat. (§ 109, 1.)
(2) Some vowel stems add a\ tcXc'-o), TercX«o-/iai. (§ 109, 2.)
(3) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change c to
a; as OTcXXo) ((rreX-), earaX^t, taraXfirjif. (§ 109, 4).
(4) A few stems in v drop i/, and others change v to a. (§ 109, 6 )
(5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as jSaXXo) (/3aX-), throw, ^i-
/3Xi;-/iat (/3Xa-). (§ 109, 7.)
For the euphonic changes made in consonant stems on adding the end-
ings, see § 97, N. 2.
(b) Perfect Active Stem. The stem of the first perfect and
pluperfect active is formed by adding k to the reduplicated or
augmented simple or present stem (§ 108, II. Note), except
when this ends in a labial or palatal mute. Stems ending in
TTor/iyK or y, aspirate these letters, making them or x, while
final <^ and x remain unchanged. E.g.
Av<o, XfXv/f-, XeXvKO, iKtXvKfiV, veoa (vv, veF-), swim, vtvevKO', ireida,
persuade, irenfiKa (for rre-irftB-Ka). Kdirra (kott-) , cut, K(Ko<fia', /SXaTrrca
(/3Xa/3-), hurt, fii^\a(f)a ; Tmjo-o-o) (irTrjK-), cower, enrrixa ', npaaaoi (npay-),
do, TTfirpaxtt, fircrrpaxtiv', ypa({)(o, write, yfypa(f>a, (y(ypa<f>(iv', opvaata
(opvx-), diy, opiipvxa. So Kop.i(ui (/coyitS-), carry, KtKOfiiKa (§ 16, 1,
N. 2).
This stem may be modified (§ 109) in various ways : —
(1) A short final vowel is regularly lengthened ; as d>{X(a>, 7r€(f>i'
\T)Ka. (§ 109, 1.)
(2) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change e to
a; as o-rcXXo) (o-TeX-), f(rTa\Ka, tara\Kfiv. (§ 109, 4.)
(3) A few labial and palatal stems change e to o, as in the sec-
ond perfect. (§ lp9, 3, N. 2.)
(4) A few stems in v drop v, and become vowel stems. (§ 109, 6.)
(5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as /3dXXw (/3oX-, /SXa-), /3f-
ffKfjKa. (§ 109, 7, a.)
9110.]
FORMATION JF TENSE STEMS.
\3\)
wbile
^09,6.)
NoTK. The only form of first |H'rf«'ct fouml in Honu-r is tliiit in ku of
verbs having; vowel stfins. The pcrtcct in ku of liquid and lin<{U!il sttins,
and tilt! uspii'uti'd (k rlccts ol lulnal and [tahital istcnis, l)ulon^ tu a lutur
di!Volo[>inont of the langua^u.
(c) Future Perfect Stem. The stem of the future perfect is
formed by adding cr to the stem of the perfect middle ; as AcXv-,
AcAuo--, XiKviTUfiai ; y/Jtt<^-, ytypa(f>-y ytypui//-, yiypdipofiui ; Acitt-,
AeAetTT-, AcAcn/^-, AcAcii/^oyuai ; irpda-aoi (Trpuy-), irtirpay-^ Trfirpa^-,
ireTT/jri^o/xai.
NoTK 1. The future perfect is found m only a small number of
verbs. Its stem, when a consonant precedes o-, is subject to all the
euphonic changes noticed in the future stem (§ 110, II. 1).
NoTK 2. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the
future perfect active; $vj)aK<o, die, has T(6ur)$a>, xhall be dead, formed
from TtdvrjK; thr^ stem of jierf . T«6vr)Ka, am dead : and larript, ttct, has
iaTrj^oi, Khali stand, from cVti^k-, stem of jierf. tarrfKa, stand. In
Homer, we have also K(xapr)(rui and Kfxapf}<Topai, from x°^P<^ (X"P')^
rejoice; and kckuSijo-o), (irreg.) from xdC<^ (xoS-),y<W</.
(d) Second Perfect Stem. The stem of the second perfect
and pluperfect is always the simple stem with the redupli-
cation (or augment) prefixed. The stem is generally modified
by changing e to o, or by lengthening other short vowels.
See § 109, 3, with the examples.
For second perfects and pluperfects of the /;ii-form, see § 124.
Note 1. Vowel stems do not form second perfects; dKov-(o, hear,
is only an apparent exception, as oKtiKoa is for aK-rjKoF-a with f omit-
ted (§ 102).
NoTK 2. Few veros have both a fir^t and a second perfect. In
TTpdaaoi (irpdy), do, we have mTrpdxa, have done, am\ irinpdya, fare
(icell or ///); so dvoiyo), open, dv-taxa (trans.), dv-tatya (intrans.).
Note 3. The second perfect stem appears especially in the Homeric
dialect, which has many second perfects not found in Attic ; as Trpo-^i^ovXa
from poi'>\ofiai, wish, ni/^v^a from fi^Xu, canceni. Homer has many varie-
ties of the 2 perfect participle of the Att-form ; in dftif, gen. auras (some-
times adros), fem. avta, as yeyaiii, /3f/3at6s ; in v^s, gen. r?wTos or 7;6tos, tem.
■nvla, as TeOvriilis, Ttevqun-os or -6tos, reevrfvia. Herodotus has fws, ewaa,
c6s, gen. €u>tos, eibav^, as iareus, &c., some forms of which [e.g. iffTeura,
TfOvrCxri) occur in Homer. The Attic contracts ows, auxra, a6s, to w$,
Qffa, 6s (§ 69, N.), gen. wros, (bffrjs, &c., but leaves Tedmuss (of dvT^ffKw)
uncontracted.
Note 4. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle in
Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long one; as
apripiis, apSpvici ; redrfKiis, redSXvia.
140
INFLECTION.
[I no.
i; Hi
ftr
1 1
V. (Second Aorist Stem.) The stem of the «e(!Oiul aorist
jiftivo juul iiiiddlo is thi' simple stem of* the verb, to which the
secoiul uorist hIuikIs in the same rehition in vvliich the imper-
fect stands to the present stem ; as AciVw (Aitt-) , 2 aor. cXittoi/,
iKiTrvfirfv (impf. iKtiiroVf i\€iw6iJLr)v) ; Xa/x^dviit (Au)3-), /aX:<?, 2 aor.
NoTK 1. A few second aorist stems change c tofi; as rifivto
(t*/!-), cul, irafiov, trafiofirfu. See § 100, 4, N. 1.
NoTK 2. A few stems are syncopated (§ 109, 7); as n-crofiai
(n«T-\Jii/, 2 aor. m. «Vto/*fji» for tntT-onriv] tytifnv (<y*p-), 7'ouHe, fiyp6-
firjv lor riytp-oftnu'y ^\dov, went, from stem eXi;^-, for rjXvduv (Horn.);
iirofuu {(Ttit-), follow, (an6ftriv, for iirfir-ofiTjv t, ?;(w (<r«x-)» ^itice, iaxov
for e-atv'ov. So the Homeric (KtK\ufir)u, tor t-M-Kt\-ofit)v, or KtK\6fir)v,
from KcXofiai, commawl ; SKoKkov, for n\-aXcK-oi/, from dX«^o) (dX**-),
want ojl': for these and other reduplicated second aorists, see § 100,
Notes 3 and 4.
NoTK 3. For second norists of the M«-form, like t^i^v, see § 125, 3.
VI. {First Passive Stem.) Tlie stem of the first aorist pas-
sive is farmed by adding $€ to the stem as it appears (omit-
ting the reduplication or augment) in the perfect middle or
passive, with all its mo<Vfications (IV. «) : in the indicative,
imperative, and infinitive, 6t becomes Orj. In the future pas-
sive o- is added to Orj^ making the stem in 6q(r. E.g.
Av(o, XeXv-ziat, iXidriv (Xvft;-), (XvOe-u) Xu^to, \vdt-ir)V, \v6^-uat, \v-
$(is (\vdf-vT-), Xv^^o"- o/Liat ; irpdaato (npay), mnpay-pat, (irpax-drfv
(§ 16, 1), irpaxdfia-opai; ndOat, persuade, niitfifr-pat. (§ 10, 3; § 108,
II. Note), «irfia6r)v, Trfiadrjaopai', <f)i\(Ui, 7rc-(/>tX<;-/iat (§ lO*' 1), ((f)iKri-
6rjv] Tipdo), T(-Tipt)-pai, fTiptjOijv, Tipr)dr}<ropai', reXco), TfT(X(-a-fU!i (§ 109,
2), (Te\i<r-6riv, T(\(adrj(Topai ;, kKipo, K^xki-pat (§ 109, 6), (kXi-Btiu, k\i-
$fiaopat', Tfivoi (rtv), Ttra-^i (§ 109, 4 and 6), frdOrjv, (k radtjaopai.
Note 1. Tpiiru has r^rpafifMi, irp^tpdrju (Ion. iTpd<p0r)i>); rpitpu) has
redpaniMi, i0pi<f}0T)y ; and <TTpe<f>u has ^aTpafifiai, with (rave) earpitpdrfv
(Ion. and Dor. iffrpdupdrjp). 4>a/cu has vitpaapai (§ 16, 6, N. 4), but
Note 2. N is added in Homer to some vowel stems before 9 of the ao-
rist passive ; as lipiiu, erect, XSpUfMi, Ibpiv-driv (Attic ISpiSdrjv). So Horn. ^kXIv-
eifp and iKplvd-nv (§ 109, 6).
Note 3. For ^T^^»>»'(for ide-Oriv), from rldrtiu (dt-), and Mdyiv (for ^^u-
Oniv) from^t^w, sacrifice, see § 17, 2, Note. We have, however, iOpi<pdfiv and
T€0pdiff6ai from rpiipta, nourish, perhaps to distinguish these forms from
irpiipbijv and rerpAipBai from rpiirta, turn.
i.ii:
8111.]
FORMATION OF TENSK STKMS.
141
VII. (Second Passive Stem.) The stem of the second aorist
passive is formed by adding c to the simple stem : in the
indicative, im[)erative, and infinitive, c becomes ?/. In the
second future passive o- is added to tliis ;;, malting tlie stem
in -qv. The only regular modification of the stem is the change
of e to tt explained in § 109, 4. E.g.
TTiji/ (Horn.) with subj., by metathesis, rpantm. ^iL'0 the examples
in § 109, 4, and N. 1.
Note 1. The simple stem of verbs of the second class, which
seldom appears in other tenses (§ 108, II. Note), is seen in the
second passive system ; as (r^n-ci) (<rrwr-), corrupt, iaanriv, aranrjtrofiai ;
rfiKb) (tok-), melt, traKrjv', pia (pv-), J^ow, ippvr\u^ pvi^o-o/iat; ipdina
(ipXn-), throw dotcn, riptmjv (i)oetic), but 1 aor. fipti(f)6r}v (tpan-).
NoTK 2. Tl\rj(r<r<o (irXrjy-), Htrike, has 2 aor. pass. (irKriyriv, but in
composition t^-fTrMyrjv and Kar-tTrX^yrju (as if from a stem TrXay-).
NoTK 3. The only verb which has both the 2 aor. passive and
the 2 aor. active is Tptirot, turn, which has all the six aorists.
§ 111. The following table shows the seven tense stems
(so far as they exist) of \vw, XciVcu (Aitt-), irpao-a-w (Trpdy-),
<f>aivtii (</)ai'-), and o-TcXAo) (orcA-).
I. Present (all voices).
II. Future Act. & Mid.
III. Aorist Act. & Mid.
IV. Perfect-
(a.) Mid.
(6.) Act.
(c.) Fut. P.
L(rf.) 2 Perf.
Xw-
Xikr-
XcXv-
XcXiiK-
AcXvo*-
V. 2d Aor. Act. & Mid.
( First) (a.) 1 Aor. Xve«(Ti)-
^^' i Pass.! (6.) 1 Fut. XiJeiicr-
Xciir-
X(i^-
XcXciir-
XcXcit|r-
XcXoiir-
Xlir-
Xci<^Oc(t)).
Xcu^OtIO--
irpeurv-
irpa(-
irpo{-
irjirpa-y-
ir«irpox-
ircirpa(-
trcirpo"y-
^IV- OTiXX-
^av<- OTfX«-
^V- OTIlX-
irc^v- ioToX-
irc(|>a'yK- IotoXk-
ir€<|»t|v-
irpaxOc(T))- <|>av9c(i|)*
VII.
( 2(1 |(r^)2 Aor.
I Pass. J (6.) 2 Fut.
^avc(i))- <rToX€(tj)-
142
ft
1!
m
INFLECTION.
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
[§ 112.
§ 112. 1. The endings which are peculiar to the different
persons of the verb are called personal endings These have
one form for the active voice, and another for the passive and
middle ; but the aorist passive has the endings of the active
voice.
2. The personal endings, which are most distincli}
preserved in verbs in /ai and other primitive forms, arc as
follows : —
ACTIVE.
Primary Tenses. Secondary Tenses.
»ing. ].
|ii or —
vor —
2.
S (o-s)
«
3.
«ri (ti) or —
Dual 2.
TOV
TOV
3.
TOV
T1]V
Plur. 1.
|l€V (|iCS)
)1CV (|1«S)
2.
T€
T€
3.
v<ri (vTi)
V or <rav
PASSIVE AND MIDDLI.
rrimary Tenses. Secondary Tenses.
o-o
|jiai
trai
TOt
o-9ov
cOov
|icOa
vrai
TO
o-9ov
o-0tiv
|icOa
o-Oc
VTO
Note. The active endings fn and o-t in the first and third person
singular are not used in the indicative except in verbs in /it, verbs
in a> having no endings in these i)ersons. The original ending ai of
the second person singular is found only in the Epic »o-<n', thou art,
in all other verbs being reduced to o-. In the third person singular
rt is Doric, as TtOrfTi for ridrjai ; and it is preserved in Attic in eV-rt,
?ie is. In the first i^erson pliu'al fits is Doric. In the third person
plural vai always drops v and lengthens the preceding vowel, as in
Xvouo-t for \vo-v(Ti (§ 16, 6) ; the original form wt is Doric, as (f)fpovTi
for (f)fpov(ri (hiitferunt). The perfect indicative active of all verbs,
and the present indicative active of verbs in fii (§ I'Jl, 2, d), have
dct (for ap(Ti) in the third person plural.^
u
1 Among the original active endings, inherited from tlie parent langr .(fl;e
of the Greek, Latin, Sanskrit, German, Ac, were /it, at, n, in the singular,
and »^t in the third person plural. In the past tenses, these were first
shortened by dropping t, and became fi, s, t, and vr, in which form they
n]>poar in Latin, as in rra-tn, pva-s, ,ra-t, era-nt. In /«, i-t, and rt, hjkI
iu the original fxfi in the first person plural (compiuo Latin mus), we see
§ 112.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
143
3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle, and
in both aorists passii'e (except in the subjunctive and opta-
tive) , the endings are added directly to the tense stem ; as
\i\v-fiai, AcAu-trai, XeXu-rat, AcAu-vrat, i-XeXv-firjv ; i-XvOrj'Vt
i-XvOrj-s, l-XiOrj, i-XvBrj-aav (§111).
So also in verbs in fii, in most of the forms which are
peculiar to that conjugation (§ 121, 1) ; as <^a-/u,€V, ^a-re, from
<f)r]fjiL (<f)a-), say ; to-Ta-ftai, larra-crai, icrTa-Tai, Icrra-vrai, from
la-Trjfii, set (§ 123).
4. In other parts of the verb the tense stem appears in a
prolonged form, consisting of the fixed portion and a variable
vowel (sometimes a diphthong), to which the endings are
affixed. This formation will be seen by a comparison of the
present indicative middle of TiOrjfjn (n^c-) with that of 0iAe'w
(«^iA€ in its uncontracted (Ionic) form : —
T£0c-|iab <|>iX^-o-)j.ai Ti6^-|i46a i^iXc-d-picOa
TlOc-o-ai <|>iX^-c-(<r)ai rCOc-o-Oc (^i\^-e-(r6c
TlOi-rat «^iX^-c-Tai TlOt-vrai <^iX^-o-vTai
Tl9(-<r9ov ^lU-c-o-Oov (For TCOtjui see § 123.)
Compare also the perfect Xc-Xv-f/.ai, Ac'-Au-rai, Xi-Xv-a-Oe,
Xe-Xv-vrat, (§ 112, 3), with the present Xv-o-fiaiy Au'-c-rai, Aw'-c-
the roots of the personal pronouns, /, thou, hr, and ive (compare /u^, tr^, t6v,
and the Epic dfi-fiei), which were originally appended to the verbal root,
instead of being prefixed as in English. These forms therefore really
include the pronoun, which is commonly said to be omitted.
A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the prim-
itive verb be (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin es-), as it
appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and Lithuanian
(the most primitive modern language, still s2)ol:cn on the Baltic), will illus-
trate the (jreek verbal endhigs.
Singular.
sue
Santkril.
Greek. Latin.
1. as- mi
i\i-\Ll (for l<r-|ii) [fjs-um
2. asi
la-<rC es
3. as~ti
i<r-rC es-t
Plurfl.
1. s-mas
Icr-fi^v (Dor, (l|i^s) [e]s-u-mus
2. s-tha
ia--ri «'s-tis
3. s-a-nti
i-vrl (Doric) [e]s-u-nt
Old Slavic. Lithuanian.
yes-m' es-mi
yesi est
yes-t' es-ti
yes-mi
yes-te
8-U-t'
e.s-me
es-te
es-ti
it ,.
144
INFLECTION.
(.§ 1J3.
a-diy \v-o-vTai. The vowel which thus completes the stem
is called a con/necting vowel ; ^ and it appears (sometime*
with o and e lengthened to w and «) even when the ending
is dropped (§ 113, 1), as in Acyu> (for kiyo-fii) and \iyu (for
Acyc-Tt).
Indicative.
§ 113. 1 . The original connecting vowel in the indicative
of verbs in ^ (except in the aorist active and middle, and
the perfect and pluperfect active) was o before /u, or i/, and
elsewhere «. In the singular of the present and future
active, \vhen /u.i and n were dropped and o-i became a-
(§ 112, 2, Note), the primitive o and c were lengthened
into (o and n..^
The connecting vowel is a in all persons of the first aorist
middle ; also in the perfect and first aorist active, except
1 The name "connecting vowel" belongs to the doctrine formerly held,
by which this vowel was made a third element in the formation of the verb,
distinct from both the stem and the ending. The more correct view con-
siders it a part of the tense stem, which thus consists of the fixed portion
{e.g. Xey-, \u-, XetTr-, in the present) and a vowel sound which varies accord-
ing to the following letter {e.g. \eyo- or Xe7e-). In the original language
it was uniformly a, as it appears in the Sanskrit bhara-mi (below). In an
elementary work, it is more convenient to treat this variable formative
suffix separately, so that the tense stems are given (as in § 95) in their
shorter forms (Xu-, XetTr-, &c.).
^ The supposed original forms of the present indicative of \iyu) and the
Latin lego are thus given by G. Curtius (Gricchisckes Vcrbum, I. p. 200).
The actual forms of the Sanskrit present bharami, I bear (= <f>4p(a, fero),
are given on the right, and the Attic forms of X^yw on the left.
Attic Greek.
Primitive Greek.
Irimitive Latin.
Sanskrit.
Xiyta
XcYO-|j.i
lego-m(i)
bhara-mi
X^'ycis
\tyi-(ri
lege-s(i)
bhara-si
Xfyei
Xcy«-Ti
lege-t(i)
bhara-ti
X^YO-|i.cv
Xryo-)iics
lego-mas
bhara-mas
\iy(-rt
Xry€-T€
lege-tes
bhara-tha
\iyova-i
XCYO-VTI
lego-ut(i)
bhara-nti
for Xcyo-v<ri
(§ 16, 6)
From Xfyo-fii comes Xiyw, from Xc7c-(rt conies X^yeis, and from Xeye-ri
comes Xt'yet for Xeyetr (§ 7).
§113.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
145
■
in the third person singular where it is c. In the plii-
perlect active it is « ; but in the third person phual it is
c (rarely «).
2. The personal endings of the indicative, as thej- appear
in verbs in ta united with the connectin;^ vowels, are as
follows : —
I.
ACTIVE
•
Pres. & Fut.
Perf. Aor.
Jmpf. d 2 Aor.
Plup.
(\. <a
&
ov
CIV
s.
] 2. CIS
as
cs
CIS
(3. Cl
c
c
Ct
D.
^2. erov
J 3. rrov
arov
arov dTtjv
fTOV
€THV
CITOV .
ClTTJV
i 1. OfiCV
a|MV
0|tCV
Cl)MV
P.
J2. €T€
are
rr€
CITC
( 3. ovct
oori av
ov
CO'ttV
(for ovo-i)
(for ov<ri)
or Mo-av
■is I
IT. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE,
5'-
S. <2.
(3.
-I3:
p. ■<2.
(3.
Pres., Fnt., and
Fut. Perf.
0|jiai
Xl or Cl (for co-ai, cat)
crai
corOov
co^ov
O|xc0a
co-Be
ovrai
Impf. Pass. £ Mid.,
£ 2 Aor. Middle.
OHT|V
cv (for co-o, co)
CTO
co"9ov
vr9r\v
ofJicOa
co-Oc
OVTO
Aor. Middle.
OfJlTIV
ci> (for 00*0, ao)
aTO
ao'Oov
ao-Oriv
a|xc6a
ao^c
avTO
Ie7e-Ti
By adding these terminations to the unprolonged tense
stems as the}' are given in § 111, all the tenses of the in-
dicative, except those included in § 112, 3, may be formed.
The latter may be formed l)y adding the personal endings
given in § 112, 2 directly to the tense stems.
Note 1. The endings am and ao in the second person singular of
the passive and middle drop a after a connecting vowel (§ 16, 4, N.),
10
146
INFLECTION.
r§ 114.
::■
and are then contracted with the connecting vowel (§ U, 4, X 1).
Thus, Xvrj or XiJft is for Xveaat, Xvfat; eXvov is for rAuco-o, i\vto;
cAvo-o) (aorist middle) is for f^ivaaao, eXvoao. The uncontracted
forms (without er) are common ii Ionic Greek (^ 119, 2).
Note 2. The second persons jSoOXet (of (iovXofuu, wish), oiti (of
oXofiaiy think), and o\lr(i (of o^ofiai, fut. of opaw, Nff) have no forms
in jj.
Note 3. A first person dual in fttdov is found very rarely in
poetry; as XtXeifinedop (pf. pass, of Xdnci).
Note 4. The Attic writers sometimes have rj (contracted from
the Ionic ea, § 119, 4) for eti* in the first person singular of the
pluperfect active, as ifitfiadfjKr].
Note 5. In Homer tov and aBov are sometimes used for ttjv and
aOrjv in the dual. This occurs rarely in the Attic poets, who some-
times have TTjv for tov in the second person. The latter is found
occasionally even in prose.
Subjunctive.
§ 114. The Subjunctive has the primary endings with
long connecting vowels, w, rj, and y, for to (or o), c, and « of
the indicative, as follows : -
Passive and Middle.
Sing. Dual. Plural.
wfjiai (i)|jLc6a
i]irOc
wvTat
Acth
'^E.
Sing.
Dual
Plural.
I.
w
WftCV
2.
Tis
tyrov
TJTt
3.
Tl
TJTOV
«0"l (f(
y\ (for T|<rai, rjai) T|<rOov
Tjrai ifirOov
For the perfect subjunctive passive and middle see § 118, 1.
Note 1. The aorist passive subjunctive (both first and second),
which does not omit the connecting vowel (§ 112. 3), has the active
terminations (JJ 114) contiacted with final e of the stem; as \vdf-a>,
Xvda>; <Pave-T]s, ^ai'^r; oruAe-?;, aTToK^.
Note 2. The subjunctive of verbs in rjfn and afii has the above
terminations contracted with preceding t or o of the stem; as Tidw
(for Tide-at), 8i8(afxai (for 8i8o-a)nai). doifift' and dutvrai (Ion. dtuficv,
eicivrm). See § 122, N. 4 ; § 126, 7 (a).
Optative.
§ 115. The optative has the secondary personal endings
(§ 115^, '/?), preijeded ly a nioJul s-.gu i or t>; (t€ before final v
of llie tiiivu jiersoa i)lural).
li'i
§ 115.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
147
1. Verbs in w have a connecting vowel o (in the first aorist
active and mirUUe, u) in the optative. This is contracted willi
e (or u), maiving <u or ai (oic or ate). Tlie first person singu-
lar active has the ending fit for v (§ 112, 2), except in some
contract foims (see 4). Adding the endings we have
i>vTat
3ond),
I active
I above
IS TlOui
[dings
inal V
Active.
Passive and Middle.
Sing.
Dual.
Plural
Sing. Dual.
Plural.
1.
Ol|Jll
Ol|fcCV
Ol|iT]V
oi|u6a
2.
Ol«
01T«V
OlT€
oio (f'oi oi<ro) ourOov
ourOc
> »
• >•
Ol
OlT1)V
OICV
oiTO oi(r0t]v
OIVTO
Aorist Active
.
Aorist AJiddle.
1.
ai|fci
ai|JLcv
ai)ii)v
at|Jic9a
2.
ais
aiTov
aiTc
aio (for aitro) a'trOov
aicrOc
3.
ai
aiTTJV
aicv
aiTo ate 9t]v
aiv-o
For j>eriphrastic forms of the perfect optative see § liS, 1.
the aorist passive see below, 3.
For
2. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in rjfjLc
and oifiiy the final vowol of the tense stem (a, c, or o) is con-
tracted with I into ai, «, or oi, to A^hich the simple i- ladings fiqi .
&C. are added ; as 'urra-i-firfv, la-Taifiqv ; Oe-t-fx-qv, 6dix.r]v ; 8o-i-
fxrjvy Boiix-qv. (See § 122, N. 4.) See also the cases of per-
fect optative middle in rjfirjv in § 118, 1, Note.
3. The present and second aorist active of the /ni-foni
(§ 121, 1), and both aor'sts passive in all verbs, have tli
ending v in the first person singular and a-av in the third per-
son plural. Here the modal sign is irj, witli which a, t, or o
the stem is contracted to airj, €irj, or oir} ; as la-Ta-Lrj-i; larTuirft ;
In the dual and [)lural, forms with i for tr/, and uv for ufo-av
in the third person plural, are much more common than the
longer forms ; as (rroifxci/, crrauv, for <rTair)fA.€V, (TTairja-av. ( See
§123,2.)
4. In the present active of contract verbs, forms in omv,
oir/c, oiT) (for o-itj-v, &c.) are more common in the singular ihnik
the regular forms in oi/xt, ots, oi (see 1), but less common in
III
m
m
(i
i' •
if
148
INFLECTION.
r§ 116.
tl»e dual and plurr.1 : the third j[)eison phiral in oirja-av is voiy
rare.
Both the forms in otrjv and those in oi/ai arc contracted with
a of the tense stem to (or)v and ut/ii, and with c or o to oirjv and
oifxi ; as Tifia-o-irj-v, rifiaoirjv, rifjuorfv ; <fii\€-o-ir]-v, c^tXcoii^v, <fii-
\oiriv; or)X.o-o-ir]-v, Br}Xooir}Vy SrjXoirjv ; Tifia-o-i-fii^ rifidoifii, Ti/Ltoj/wi;
<j>i\€'0-i-fii, fjiiXtoi/xi, <f>i\oifii; Sr)\o-o-i-fiij SrjXooifii, SrjXoifii. (See
§ 98.)
Note 1. A few verbs have oiriv in the second perfect optative;
as eKnf(f)fvya, iKnf(t>€vyoirjv. The second aorist optative of t^a, hare,
is (Tx°h^ (o"Xo*M* i" composition).
Note 2. The Attic generally uses the Aeolic terminations «ns,
tie, and fiav, for ms, at, auv, in the aorist optative active. See \vu>
and <f}aiP(o in § 96.
Imperative.
§ 116. 1. The personal endings of the imperative are as
follows : —
Active.
Passive and Middle.
Sing.
Dual. Plural.
Siiig. Dual. Flural.
2.
Gior —
TOV Tf
<ro <r6ov <r9c
3.
T<i»
T«v ToMrav or vtwv
(rOa> orOwv (rOw<rav or (tOmv
6^1 is alwaj's dropped after a connecting vowel.
2. The regular connecting vowel of the imperative is e ;
but before v it is o. In the aorist active and middle it is a.
But the second ;3erson singular in the aorist active ends in oi/,
and in the aonst middle m ai.
connecting vowels are as follows
The cndnigs united with the
•
Active.
Passive and Middle.
Sing.
2. c
3. CT«
Dual. Plural.
rrov er«
CTwv cTuirav
or OVTMV
AyRisT Active.
Sing. Dual. Plural.
ov (for (vo, €o) c<r6ov nr9t
fo-Ow vr9uv c<rOu(rav
or co-Ouv 1
Aorist Middle. 1
2. ov
3. ana
arov arc
aruv arciMrav
or avTwv
ai atrOov ao-Oc 1
aa0«) a(r6a>v ao-OoMrav 1
or a<r0«v |
r§ 116.
is very
2d with
Lr)v and
i-qv, <f>i-
Tifiiafii ;
. (See
iptative ;
(o, hare,
ons €ias,
See \vut
e are as
LE.
ural,
rOc
If or (tOmv
-e IS f ;
it is a.
fs in ov,
ith the
Plural.
rOc
rOoio-av
c<r8wv
rOc
rOoxrav
a<r6tt>v
§ 117.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
149
3. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active termina-
tions (Oi, TO), &c.) directly to B-q of the tense stem, after which
6i becomes n (§ 17, 3); as XvOrj-ri, Au^tJ-tw, &c.
The second aorist passive adds the same terminations to rt
of the tense stem {Ol being retained) ; as ^at/ry-^i (fiavrj-TU) ;
(TTaAr^-^l, O-TttXTj-TO), &C.
Both aorists have cvtwi/ in the third person plural.
Note. For the form of the imperative in verbs in fii, see § 121, 2,
(b) and (c).
The Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal Adjectives.
§ 117, 1. The terminations of the infinitive of verbs in w
(including connecting vowels) are as follows : —
€€1-1/ (cont. fX'v)
€rVat
at
Present and Future Active
Second Aorist Active
Perfect Active
Aorist Active
Aor. Pass, (no connecting vowel) mt
Perf. Pass, and Mid. ,, cr^at
Aorist Middle a-a-Oai
Other tenses, Pass, and Mid. i-adai.
All /Ai-forms add mt (act.) or aOat (pass, and mid.) di-
rectly to the tense stem.
2. The stem of the active participle ends in it (t in the
perfect), which is joined to the tense stem by o (a in the ao-
rist) ; except in the aorist passive (§ 112, 1) and in /At-forms,
which add vt directly to the stem.
The passive and middle participle ends in /ici/os (stem
/XCV0-), which is preceded by o (a in the aorist middle) ; ex-
cept in the perfect and in //i-forms, which add /xcvos directly
to the tense stem.
Note. Participial stems in vt add era to form tlie stem of the
feminine; as Xuoi^-ora. Xuow<Ta; iaravr-cra, laTCKra] XvOfvr-ara, \vdfia-a.
(§ 16, 6, N. 1.) Perfects in ws, 6tos (stem in t) have an irregular
feminine in via. Participles in fifi/os form the feminine iu fifutj.
For the declension of participles, see §§ 62, 68, 60.
150
INFLEITION.
a 118.
.11)
f
u
Ml
3. Tlio stem of the verbal adjectives in tos and tco? is
forn)<\) by adding to- or tco- to die stem of the verb, which
has the same form liere as in the aorist passive (with the ne-
cessary change of <fi and ;( to tt and k, § 16, 1) ; as AwTfk,
A,uT€Os (stems Av-ro-, Xv-tco-) ; rpiTrros, ttcio-tc'os (stems rpnTr-ro-,
TTctcr-Tco-) ; TttKTos, TaKTcos, from TtttTo-uj (stcni ray-) , aou'. pass.
Note 1. The verlml in ros is sometimes equivalent to a p?rfect
passive participle, as Kpink. decultd, raKTos, ordered: and some-
times expresses capability^ aa Xutok, cajmblc of Iu'dkj looitt'i, aKovaros,
audible.
NoTK 2. The verbal in rros is equivalent to a future passive par-
ticiple (the Latin participle in dus) ; as Xutfos, //int mmt be loosed,
.solvendus ; rt/ii/Tfos, to be /mnored, honorandus.
For the impersonal use of the neuter in rtov in an active sense,
see Syntax, § 281, 2.
PEKIPHRASTIC FORMS.
§ lis 1. The pei-fect subjunctive and optative middle
and passive is generally formed by the perfect participle with
o) and d-qv^ the subjunctive and optative of dfxi, be ; as A«Au/u,e'-
vo<i (-ry, -oi/) w, AeAv/xeVn? (-?;, -ov) urjv. See the paradigms.
Note. A fev/ verb with vowel stems form these tenses directly
from the stem: Krn-o/.iai, Krw/nm, acquire, ipi. KfKTrifiai, possais ; subj.
KfKTomai (tor K€-«Tn-a)/iat), k(kt^, KfKT^rai; opt. K€KTafir}u (for Kf-KTa-
OlflTJv), K€KTaO. KfKT^TO, aud KeKTT^firjV (for K€KTT) l-flT)V, § 115, 2), KCKT^O,
KfKTjjTo, KfKTr]fjL(6a\ — fiifiv^icTKU) (nvii-) , remind, pf. fiefivrffini,, remember :
suh], fiefivoifiat, fiffivtafxfBa (Hdt. fi(fiv(a>fieda)', opt. fKfivafirjv (Hom.
fiffivea}To),or fiffiinjfirjv. So poetic K(K\^fir)v (for KfKKrf-i-fitjv) of KaXeo),
and Homeric XtXi-To (for XeXv-i-ro) or \f\vvTo of Xw'o). See also pr.
opt. SatvvTO of Saivvfii-
2. The perfect subjunctive and optative active is more fre-
quently expressed by the perfect active participle with w and
itrp' than b}' the special forms given in the paradigms ; as AcAu-
Ku)s w and AeAuKojs elr^v for AcAvko) and AcAi;f(ot/jti.
Note. The perfect imperative can be expressed by the perfect
participle and la^t, co-tcd, &c. ; as (IprjKlas tirra, let him have spnlen
(before a given time); dprjfxevov earoi (§ 202, 2, N. 1). The forms
like \(\vKe, XcXotTTf, &c. weie probably used only when the perfect
had the meaning of the present; as vdo-KO) (xau), gape, pf. Kextjua,
imper. Kexh^fre, gape. (See § 95, 1, Note.)
I
§ liy.J DIAIA%(TIC AND I'UKTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 12. 151
3. The futuic perl'ect actiie, for which very few verbs have
a special form (§ 110, IV. c, N. 2), is generally expressed by
the perfect participle with arofxai (I'uture of ci/i-t, be) ; as iyvwKo-
Tcs cavt/ic^a, we shall ham learnt.
4. Even tlic perfect and pluperfect indicative are occasion-
ally expressi'd by the perfect participle and ei/u.i'; as ycyovais
ia-TL for ye'yove, TrcTrotr/Kws r/v for iTmroi-^Kei.
5. The periphrastic third person plural of the perfect and
pluperfect indicative middle and passive, formed by the parti-
ciple and cwri and ^a-av, is necessary when the stem ends in a
consonant (§ 97, 2). The participle may be used in all gen-
ders ; as ovToi XiXeififitvot iia-i, these {men) have been left ; avrai
AcXcc/x/jtcvat cicrt'; Taxrra XeXeifx/xcva iari (§ 135, 2).
Note. Here, however, the Ionic endings arm and aro for vrai
and vro (§ 119, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose; as rr-
Tdx-arm and fTfTd)(-aTO (Thiicyd.) for TtTayfifvoi (t<ri and ^aau.
6. A periphrastic future is sometimes formed by fiikko), in-
tend^ be about (to do) , and the present or future (seldom the
aorist) infinitive ; as fxeKko/x^v tovto iroulv (or iron^aeiv) , we are
about to do this. (See § 202, 3, Note.)
DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 0.
§ 119. 1. The Doric has the personal endings fits for fiev, rav
for rrjv, n&v for firjv, oirt for ovai, wvri for oxrt, avri for aai. The pcots
have fieada for neda.
2. When a is dropped in aai amd ao of the second person (§ 113,
2, N. 1), Homer often keeps the mincontracted forms eat, rfai, ao, eo.
Herodotus always has eat and ao, but generally rj for i^at. In both
Homer and Hdt. eo may become fv. In Homer o-ai and ao some-
times drop 0- even in the perf. and pluperf ; as fiffivrjai for jue/iw;<rat,
eWvo for eaa-vcTo; sometimes a is doubled, as in KeKaaaai (KCKaer/xat) .
3. The Ionic has arai and aro for vrai and iro in the third person
Slural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for vro in the oj^ative.
efore these endings n, 3- k, »iid y are aspirated (<f), x) ? ^^ KpvtTTU)
(Kpv^-), K(Kpv<p-aTai\ X*-ya). X«Xf;)(-arat, 'Ke'KexaTO- Hdt shortens T] to
e V)efore arai and aro'i as oiKf-aTai (pf. of cmkco)), Att. Skij-vtoi; eVert-
pi-aro fplpf. of Tifida}), A«. rreriprf-rfTo. Hom. rarely inserts 8 be-
tween the vowel of a stem and ora* .!'■ aTo (see e'Xnvvw and pulvca).
: '
152
INFLECTION.
[§ 119.
II
m
i!
These forms sometimes occur in Attic (§ 118, 5, Note^. Hdt. has
arai and aro also in the present and imperfect of verbs m fu.
4. Homer and Herodotus have ca, tas^ 'fC")* for Attic ttv^ tis, ti,
in the phiperfect active, as crr^ijTrca; whence comes the (especially
older) Attic 1st pers. in 7, as €fifnaOr}Kr} (§ 113, 2, N. 4).
5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the uncontracted forms
of the future (in ra> and fo/nat) of liquid stems; as fitpiay, Attic ix€vu}.
When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs in t<a
(§ 120, 2, a).
6. The Doric has o-fo), aiofiai (contracted (Ta>, aovfiai or o-eO/xat) for
0-0), aofiai in the future. The Attic has aovfiai in the future middle
of a few verbs (§ 110, II., N. 2).
7. In Homer a- is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the
fni'.r<! and aorist, as rcAcci), TtXea-ao); Ka\f<o, cKaXeacra; Konl^a, fut.
KOfU<r<0 (§ 110, II., N. 1, C), Hom. fKOflKTCra, fKOflKTodfiTjV.
8. In Homer aorists with o- sometimes have the inflection of sec-
ond aorists ; as l^ov, l^ts, from Iki/f ofiat, come ; f^rjatro (more common
than f^fjaaro) from ^aiva), go.
9. In Homer rjaau of the aor. pass, indie, often becomes €i/; as
&pfiT]6fu for wpfifi&Tjtrav, from opuda, urge. So in the 2nd aor. act. of
verbs in yn (§ 126, 4).
10. Homer and Herodotus have iterative endings vkov and <TKOfjLri»
in the imperfect, and in the second aorist active and middle. Hom.
has them also in the first aorist. These are added to the tense stem,
with c (a in first aorist) inserted after a preceding consonant; as
ex<t>y imp. €;^-c<r>coi'; epvat, 1 aor. fpitr-aaKf ; <f)fvy(o ((f)vy-), 2 aor. (^vye-
(TKov. Verbs in «a have ctaKov or «rKov in the imperfect; as KoKie-
(TKov, TrtoXeo-Kcro ; verbs in aa have a-aaKou or acrtcoi/; as yodatrKe,
piKuoKoptv. Rarely other verbs have aaKou in the imperfect; as
KpvirrufTKov from Kpvirrw.
These forms are confined to the indicative, and they generally (in
Hdt. always) omit the augment. They denote repetition; as tto)-
\«(TKtTo, he went (regularly).
For /itt-forms with these endings see § 126, 5.
11. Some verbs have poetic stems, made by adding $ preceded by
a vowel (generally a or e) to the present or tne second aorist tense
stem; as dpwaO-t 8iu)Kad-, <j)\fyfd-, from dpCvo), icard off^ dtcoKca, pur-
sue, <l>Xiy(ii, burn. From these special stems are formed — sometimes
presents, as (^Xeye^w; sometimes imperfects, as €8ia>Kadou[ sometimes
second aorists, as taxtOov {ax-) and also subjunctives and opta-
tives, as (iKa6<a, eiKadoip^., dpvvddoiTo; imperatives, as apwddarf, dpv-
vddov; infinitives, as dpwddeiv. 8ia>Kdd€iv, (rxfOtriv, <rx^3fiu or o-xf^fti/;
and participles, as eUdBav, <rxfda>v or a-x^dav. As few of these steins
form a present indicative, many scholars consider (h<aKaSov, tfyyaBovj
\i
§ 119.] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS I\ il. l.'>3
&c., with the 8ubjimctive8,&c. second aorisLs, and accent the infini-
tives and participles 8ia>Ka$ttv, dfivvadtlv, tiKaOtiv, tiKadiitv, &c.,
although the traditional accent is on the penult.
See in the Lexicon aKKdBtiv, dfiwdBo), di<oKdd(o, tiKaBtiv, ipydBnv,
fftpfdofiai, tjytpfdofUu, fitraKiddu), <rx*0*>>y (fidivvdio, <p\(yfBu>.
12. (Suhjunciivc.) (<i) In Homer the suujunctive (especially in
the Ist aor. act. and mid.) often has the short coiniecting vowels f
and o (Attic i; and w), yet never in the singular ol the active voice
nor in the third person plural; as cpucro-o/Liri/, dXyiJaerc, fivfiqaofiai,
ci/^eat, 6i;Xi}(r(rat, a/xci^/^crat, tyiipofifu, Ifi^iptrai.
(I<) In both aor. pass, subjunctives Herodotus generally has the
uncontracted forms in ew, tafieu, taxn, but contracts ei; (or tr/) to rj
(or ji) ; as d(j)aipfdfu) (Att. -^w), tfyavttoiri (Att. -Smti), but (^avi).
(c) In the 2nd aor. pass. subj. of some vei'bs, Homer lengthens
CO), e/;p, (f), to cio), ct.ijf (or rjrjs), ct.i; (or nrj\ and has fiop.fv, tifTf, for
fctf/icf, e»/re; as da^dia (from fddfirfv, 2na aor. p. of fia/icdo), siilxlue),
bafitirfs or dafirfjfi^ daudj) or Saprjjj, da^etcrc ; Tpandofitv (from (Tdpnrjif
of TcpTTOj, amuae). This is more fully developed in the 2nd aor. act.
of the /it-form (§ 126, 7, 6).
(d) In the subj. active Homer often has (ofii, nada (or Tjada), i/at;
as f6f\wfiiy fd(\t]ada, (df^rjai.
13. (Opiatiii .) The Aeolic forms of the aor. opt. act., etas, fit,
(lav (given in the paradigms of Xia and ^aiva), are the common forms
in ull dialects; the Aeolic has also first persons in cm and «/itw.
Homer sometimes has ourda in the 2nd person for ois ; as jcXai-
oiaQa. For aro (for vto) see above, 3.
14. {Infinitive J) (a) Homer often has t-fitvai and f-fitp for ei-u
in the infinitive active ; as dfivvfutvai, dp.vv(ptv (Attic dyivvdv) ; eXtft-
Htvai, (Kdffifv (eXdf'iv) ; d^fptvat, d^(>x(v (a^fip). For the perfect ("nly
of the fit-form, § 125, 4) see § 126, 9: the inf. in tvai does not occur
in Homer. So Horn, ptvai, Dor. peu, in the aor. pass. ; as 6poi<a&fi-
peuai, 8af}-p,fvai (also da^fat), Horn. ; al(T\vuB^pfu, Find.
(/>) Homer often has the uncontracted 2nd aor. inf. act. in eetf;
as idt'fiv.
(c) The Doric has eu (§ 98, N. 5) and the Aeolic rjv for ctv
infin. ; Doric also ^v for eav or eti/; thus dflbtv and yapvtv (Do
in the
yapvfv (Dor.) for
dddeiv and yijpvfiv; (f)fpriu and f)(^r}v (Aeol.) for (ptptiu and exfti/; ftTr^v
(Dor.), fiTTTju (Aeol.), for tlnt'ip.
15. {Participle.) The Doric and Aeolic have otaa for outra, and
atr, ato-a for aa, ao-a, ill the participle ; as t^oiaa, Opt^^ais, Bpf^aitra.
^,
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
ii
1.0
1.1
^M2» 125
m "^^ mi
■^ lii 122
2.0
111
itt
u
I
1^ H >4 1 >4
♦-
6"
^
^
4^^
^m >
>
Sciences
Corporation
aa VVIST MAIN STRUT
WIISTM.N.Y. USM
(7l6)t72-4S03
\
t
^ '^
^x^
154
INFLECTION.
[§ 120.
Special Forms of Contract Verbs.
§ 120. The present and imperfect of verbs in aa>, ea>, and oo
have the following dialectic peculiarities : —
1. (Verbs in aw.) (a) In Homer verbs in aa> are often contracted
as in Attic. In a few cases they remain uncontracted ; sometimes
without change, as vauTaovai, vaifrdau, from vauTam, dioell ; some-
times with d, as in irfivda, hunger, bt^Om, thirst ; sometimes with (ov
for aov in the imperfect, as fievoiveov from nevoivato, long for.
(b) Commonly, when they are not contracted in Homer, the two
vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which elsewhere are contracted
are assimilated, so as to give a double A or a double O sound. The
second syllable, if it is short by nature or has a diphthong with a
short initial vowel, is generally prolonged; sometimes the former
syllable ; rarely both. We thus have aa (sometimes aa) for at or 07
(aa for aei or aij), and oa> (sometimes too or uto) for ao or a<o (oo)
for aoi) :
6pd^s for ipdcis
bpix^ ,, opdci or opd'Q
ipdairOc ,, 6pdc<r0c
6pda<r3ai ,, 6pdc<r0ai
|jtvda<r6ai ,, \LviUa-9ai
6pdav „ 6pdfiv (Dcr. opdcv)
bp6<a ,, 6pd«)
iptfwo'i ,, 6pdov(ri (i.e. bpaovtn)
ipdwo-a ,, opdovo-a (i.e. bpCMvr-va, § 117, 2, N. )
&p<{((>cv ,, 6pdouv
ipdoivrai ,, opdovrai
alTi(((po ,, alridoio
The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the word
could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in fj^aovrts for
fj^ovres, ^/3a>o(ft( for ^jS^otfit, fivAa<r6ai for fivctftrdai, fivaovro for
(^fivaovTo. In this case the second vowel or diphthong is not
lengthened (see the examples above) ; except in a final syllable, as
in fitvoiuaa (lor -aft) , or when axra or ©trt comes from ouraa or oj/o-t,
as in fifiaxoaa, dptooxrt, for fi^a-ovrua, bpa-ovm.
This assimilation never occurs unless the second vowel is long
either by nature or by position ; thus opdofiev, opatrt, opaerm cannot
become Spoafitv, opaart, Spaaro. It extends also to the so-called
Attic futures in aaat, da, «5 (§ 110, II. Note 1, 6); as eXdw, eXLoxrt,
Kptpoto, bafJLd«f, 8ap^(i><Ti, for fXdaa (eXao)), &C.
(<•) The Doric contracts at and oj; to »> ; this occurs in the dual of
a few imperfects in Homer, as irpotravBrjTriv (from npoaavBda), </)ot-
§ 120.]
SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS.
155
0(0
N.)
i\
taxri,
TfjTriv ((f)oiTd<o), avXfiTTju ((rvXa<u). So Horn, oprjai (or opijai) for
Spdtai (Attic 6pq) in the pres. ind. middle of opda. See 2 (rf).
(rf) Herodotus sometimes changes aa>, ao, and aou to ro), eo, and
«ov, especially in opdoa, ctpcardo), and 0otrda) ; as 6pca>, opcoin-ec, Speovai,
€ipaTeov, e(f)olT«uv. These forms are generally uncontracted ; but eo
and eov sometimes become €v (2, a), as ctporevv.
In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in am regularly.
(e) In Homer, cptvai (§ 119, 14, a) in the pres. infin. act. of
verbs in ao and eon becomes tjfitvai by contracting « with a or « of
the stem (1, c); as yoi]Hfvai (yodoj) for yo€-ep.€vaii 7reivrip.evai (neiuda).
See 2 (r/).
2. (Fer6.s in eo).) (a) Verbs in (cd generally remain uncontracted
in both Homer and Herodotus. But Homer sometimes contracts te
or ett to et, as rdp/Set (rdpiSee); and both Horner and Herodotus some-
times contract €o or eov to ev (Hdt. especially in dyvoeat, diavoeoftat,
fftfeofiai, voto), TTote'u)); as frof6t)(rt, dyweCvrcf, dtai/oeCyro. So in the
Attic futures in lata, taopai (§ 110, II. Note 1, c), as Konieifieda
(Hdt.). Hdt. has generally Set, must, but impf . efiee.
(b) Homer sometimes drops e in eat and eo (for eo-at, eo-o, § 11&,
2) after e, thus changing eeat and e'eo to eat and eo, as iivdeai for
fivdffat (from nvdeofuu), dnoaipfo (for dn-oatpe'eo) ; but he oftener con-
tracts e'ent and e'eo to eiat and *to, as pvBeiai, atSeto (for atde'eo). He-
rodotus sometimes drops the second e in e'eo ; as <^o^c'o (also 0o^eO),
otreo, e'^i/yc'o.
(c) In Homer, final e of the stem is often lengthened into et ; as
vetfceto), TTveto), for veiKeony irvim. So in cVeXet-ero from reXeo, reXetcu.
A similar change takes place in ea> of the 2nd aor. passive subjunc-
tive (§ 119, 12, c).
(ri) Homer has a present infinitive in rip.evai for e-efxei/at (1, «), as
^tX^fiei/at (<f>iKem) for ^tXe-e/Liei'at, KoXi^/itei/at (KoXe'co). So t^op^vat
((f>opt-eiv) from (^opc'o). Homer has Doric contraction in the auals
oftapTrirriv (ofiopre'u)) and OTreiXi^Ti;!' (djreiXe'ci)). See 1 (c).
3. (Verbs in oa>.) (a) Verbs in oca are always contracted in He-
rodotus, but he sometimes has eu (for ov) froin oo or oov, especially
in dtKotdo), think just ; as ebiKaievv, biKoievpros, bticauvai.
(b) They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few cases
in which forms in o<o or mo occur resembling those made by assimi-
lation in verbs in am (1, b); as dpdcao-t (from dpda>, plough)] dr}t6^ev
and (impf.) Brnomvro (from Stfiom):, iSpmovaa and tdpuovra (from
\bpnm).
156
INFLECTION.
[§ 121.
,'
B ,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
Remark. The peculiar inflection of verbs in fu affects only the
tenses formed from the present and second aorist stems, ana in a
few verbs those formed from the second perfect stem. Most of the
second aorists and perfects here included do not belong to presents
in fu, but are irregular forms of verbs in a>; as e/Si/v (/SaiW), eyvav
(yiyvaxTKa)), eTTTafitjV (TrtVo/iat), and Tedvufifv, Ttduairjv, Tfdvdvai («nd per-
fect of $vri<rK(o). See § 125, 3 and 4.
Tenses thus inflected are called /it-forms. In other tenses verbs
in ^t are inflected like verbs in a (§ 123, 3). No single verb exhibits
all the /Lit-forms.
§ 121. 1. In the present and imperfect of verbs in /ai,
and in all other tenses which have the /xi-form of inflection,
the endings (§ 112, 2) are added directly to the tense stem,
except in the subjunctive and optative. The tense stem
almost always ends in a vowel, which, if short, is lengthened
(Note 1) in the singular of the present and imperfect indica-
tive active, and generally in all forms of the second aorist
indicative, imperative, and infinitive active. Thus <fyq-fii,
<l>rf-(rif <f}a-fi€v^ tfta-Tt, from stem ^a- ; cf. Xv-o-fi€V, Ai;-6-T€, from
stem Aw-. See § 112, 4.
Note 1. Here a and e are lengthened to 17, o to a>, and ij to v.
But in the second aorist, a after p becomes a in e8pav, e becomes ei
in the infinitives Ouvai and tlvaif and o becomes ov in bovvai. (See
§ 126, 3, Notes 1 and 2.)
Note 2. The only verbs in pi with consonant present stems are
the irregular elpi, be, and rjpat, sit (§ 127). See also oi8a (§ 127,
vii.), and a few poetic second aorists and perfects (§ 125, 3 and 4).
2. The following peculiarities in the endings are to be
noticed in these forms : —
(a) I'he endings ^t and <ri (§ 112, 2, N.) are retained in the first
and third persons singular of the present indicative active ; as <t>rf-pi,
(h) Gt is retained in the second aorist imperative active (§ 116, 1)
after a long vowel, as in arridi, fifjdt\ but it is changed to s in ^fj,
86s, ey, and axis- Tt is rare in the present, as 4>odi Wi- The
present commonly omits 61, and lengthens the preceding vowel (a e,
o, or v) to n, f, ov, or v; as torn (for iora-^t), Ti0ei, didov, deUm
(See § 123.)
§ 122.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
157
((•) In the second person singular passive and middle, o-at ai.d ao
are retained (see, however, § 122, N. 3); except in the second aorist
middle and in the subjunctive and optative, which droj) a and are
contracted (§ 114, N. 2; § 115, 2, 3). In the present imperative
both forms in <ro and contracted forms in m or ov (for aao, tao, oao)
occur, vao being always retained.
(d) In the third person plural of the present indicative active, a
is prefixed to the ending wt, making ao-t (§ 16, 6), which is con-
tracted with a (but not with f , o, or v) of the stem ; as iaraat (for
tora-ovo-t), but ridf-aai, Bido-dai, d(iKi/v-aai. Contracted forms in eltri,
oval, and v<n, irora stems in e, o, and u, are regular in Ionic, but rare
in Attic. In the third person plural, the imperfect and second aorist
active have aav, and the optative active has irj-aav or u-v.
(e) The infinitive active adds vat to the tense stem ; as tord-vat,
Tide-vaiy 8ov-pai, Oti-pai.
(j) The participle active (with stem in avr, evr, ovt, or vvr) forms
the nominative in ar, ctr, ovsy or vs.
3. Some verbs in rjfjLL and w/ai reduplicate the stem in the
present and imperfect by prefixing its initial consonant with i ;
as Bi-Bdi-fiL (So-), give^ Ti-Orj-fjn {Be-), put, for Oi-Orj-fii (§ 17, 2).
From stem ara- we have i-o-n^/xi, set, for a-i-a-rri-fii ; and from
€- we have i-ri-fii (l-rj-iii). See § 125, 2.
§ 122. There are two classes of verbs which hfve this
inflection : —
1 . First, verbs in fii which have the simple stem or the re-
duplicated simple stem (§ 121, 3) in the present; and all the
second aorists and second perfects and pluperfects of the /ni-
form. This includes all verbs in r/fii and w/ai (from stems in
a, e, and o).
2. Secondly, verbs in wfii, which (with one exception) have
the fiL-form onl}' in the present and imperfect. These add vv
(after a vowel, wv) to the simple stem to form the present
stem ; as Scik-, 8«kvv-, SeiKVv-fxi, BeUvv":, SiiKvv-a-i, but BtUvvfiev,
BeUvvre (§ 121, 1).
They thus belong, by the formation of the present stem, to the
fifth class of verbs m at (§ 108, V. 4), and some of them (as 8(ikw-
fu) use the present in via (see Note 5).
Note 1. Some verbs in rffu and wfii have forms which follow the
inflection of verbs in a. Especially, in the impeiiect of Tidijfu and
158
INFLECTION.
r« 123.
d(db)/x(, eridtis ai)'^ cVt'^ft (as if from ti6(o»), and iHibovv, ifiiBovs, idi-
8ov (as ii trutii otfiow), are much more (Mtnimon than the regular
forms in iji/ and av. So in the second aorist, the forms [f$rju, ctfi/s,
tfdri'l and [<8a)i/, ffius, efiw] never occur; and in their place tne first
aorists in «ca, edrjKa andedwKu (§ 110, III 1, N. 1) are used in the .s-</)-
gular, while the second aorist forms iOtroi/, &c., fborov, &c., are gen-
erally used in the dual and plural. See also tnfu (§ 127), where ^kq
is used in the same way.
Further, in the optative miihllc, ridolfiTfu, ridoio, Ttdolro, &c. (also
accented ridoto, rtdoiTo, &c.) and (in composition) doinrfv, 6oio, doiro,
&c. (also accented (rvv-doiro, irpda-doiade, &c.) occur with the regular
Tidtiftriv dfinrju, &c. See also n-puotro, &c., imder ti/fit (§ 127).
Note 2. A few deponent verbs accent the subjunctive and opta-
tive as if there were no contraction. Such are Bvvafxat, (TriaTafiai, Kpi-
aftai, etrpidfitjv (§ 123) ; as bvvotum, iiupairo (not dvp&fjLoi, dvi/airo) ; and
sometimes other verbs in /xt. The infinitive irpiaadai is accented like
a first aorist.
NoTR 3. Avvauai and eVto-ra/xat generally have ibCva (or ffbiivu)
and ffrrtoTtaj for ehvvairo and ^Trtoraao, in the second person singular
of the imperfect.
Note 4. For the formation of the subjunctive and optative of
verbs in riyn and ca/it, see § 114, N. 2, and § 115, 2 and 3. But tlie
contracted subjunctive from stems in a has &>, ffs, fj, &c. (act.), and
a>fuu,jj, ^rm, &c. (mid.), as if from stems in e; which stems are
found in Ionic, as in o-rc-6>-/ici/, are-w-o-t (Attic arapev, orwo-i). See
§ 126, 7 (a).
NoTP. 5. Verbs in vvfii form the subjunctive and optative like
verbs in 6> ; as 8etKn>-o», dtiKuv-oi/jn, SeiKuv-otfiai, SeiKvvoifiTjp. In other
moods forms of verbs in pvu often occur; as BeiKvvovai, ofivvovai.
Note 6. Only one verb in wfii, a^ivvvyn (o-/3e-), tfueuchy has a
second aorist active; and this, fa^ijv, teas tjuenched, with infin. <r^?f-
vai and (Ion.) part, a-^ds, is formed from the simple stem in e
(§ 125, 3).
§ 123. 1. The following is a synopsis of la-TrffMi, aet^
(stem ard-^, riOrj/jLi, put (stem ^e-), BiBcofii, give (stem
Bo-), and SeUpv/M, show (stem Sclk-, present st<;m Bcikpv-^,
in the present and second aorist systems.
As larriiu wants the second aorist middle, firpiafirfv, Ihoiu/ht (from
a stem wpia- which has no piesent), is added. As 8(iKvvp,i wants the
second aorist (§ 122, N. 6), eSwi/, / entered (from 8va>, formed as if
from dv-/it), is added in the active voice. No second aorist middle
in vfirjp occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see Xvta, irvfct, atva,
and Yco)). "Ebvv has no aorist optative in Attic; but two forms of
an old optative hvjuv (for dv-tij-v) occur in Homer, viz. bvri and
r« 123.
vs, (dc
egular
le first
he sin-
•e gen-
ere r\Ka
!. (also
, 601T0,
eguhir
^ opta-
lat, Kpf-
1); and
ed like
iugular
tive of
iut the
.), and
ms are
^ See
re like
other
las a
iu e
stem
(from
ts the
as if
niddle
Ills of
and
$ 123.1
Pres.
Imp.
2 Aor.
Imp.
2 Aor.
Mid.
(CONJUGATION OP VERBS IN MI. 159
ACTIVE.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative, Imperative. Infinitive. Partieiple.
r t«mi|u
(^ ScCKVvp
'Xvrr\v
M9t\v
l8(8ovv
. 48«Cicvvv
ICTTTJV
(Jleriv)
(8vv
Ijttw
TiOtt
8180
l<rra£T|v t<mj
ti6c£t)v tCOci
8i8o(i)v 8C80V
8ciKvt{oi|&k ScCkvv
to-rdvoi
TiMvai
8i86v(u
8<iKviIvai
t<rrds
riO((s
8180^
8(iKvil«
e<5
8m
8va>
vrai't\v
0cCt|v
8o£t|v
<rTf|Bi
Ms
8<Ss
8fiei.
Ocivai
8ovvai
Siivcu
ordt
80VS
8vs
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
tflrroiJiai t<rTW|iat t(rTa(|ii)v fardtro torocrOai (oTd|Mvos
Pres. J t'9c|'><u nOwiJiai TiOc(|iT)v tCOco-o rtOccrOcu tiO^i^cvos
S£8o|iai 8i8w|iiai 8i8ot|ii)v 8{8o(ro 8l8oir0ai 8i8(S|mvos
^ 8<Ckvv|uu 8ciKVVtt|Mu 8ciKwo(|irv 8c(kvvo'o 8cCKvvfr6ai 8ckicvii|fccvos
l(rTd|iT|v
ItiM|<iT)V
I8i86|i.i|v
^ 48<lKVV|fc1|V
' <irpid|M)v irp(tt>|iai irpiaf|iiT)v
49^|fcT|v 6co|iai 9cl|i.T)v
<8<S|jiTfv Sttfiat 8oC|iT)v
wp£u
Gov
80C
irpCcurOai irpid|UVOt
O^crOak M|Mvos
8(S(r6ai 8<{|&cvos
2. The peculiar forms of these verbs, which ai"e in-
cluded in the synopsis, are thus inflected : —
;
'5
I
I
160
INFLECTION.
l§ 128.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present Indicative.
ing. -j 2.
(3.
lual 5 2-
i3.
lur. -j 2.
(a.
Ul T1|0 1
torarov
toTttTOV
tcrraiuv
(VTttTI
T(9T||il
TlOrit
T(9i)art
tC9«tov
rUkrov
t(8«|mv
rCOfTf
TiMcuri
8(8«»|u
ZCSm
8(8«Mn
8f8oTov
8t8oTov
8<8o|Mv
8f8oTi
8i86airi
8«{KVV|ftl
8c(Kvvt
8«{kv««%
8<fKVVT0V
8<£kwtov
8<(icvilf|uv
8<(Kwn
8<iicviiaffi
r.r,%
Sing. ) 2.
(3.
Dual 5 2-
(8.
Plur. < 2.
(s.
tim\9
MTTtl
torrarov
tffrdTtjv
tvTcurav
irl9i\t, krlBat {iSldut) i8(8ovt I8c(kvv«
M9n,M9ti (iSlSw) 48(8ov 48c{inrv
(§ 122, N. n (§ 1C2, N. 1)
IrCdrrov
h\Bhr\v
MOrrc
i8f8oTov
tti8^v
<8C8o|uv
l8(8oT<
48(8ooxiv
48c(icwrov
48<MCVtWT1)V
I8<{icvv)uv
i8c(icrurc
ttfClCWOVlV
Present Suljunctive.
5'-
Sing. •< 2.
(3.
loPT^s
lOTTQ
Dual P- I'^'^w
i 3. urrfjTov
Plur.
tVT«|UV
TlOfJTOV
Tl9f|T0V
Tl9«|MV
TiMan
8i8<3
818^
818$
8i8«5Tov
8i8wTov
8i8w|uv
8i8«ST<
8i8Mri
8ciicviiw
8ciKvii^
8<iKviiD
8«ICVl(l|T0V
8<lKVl(l|T0V
8<IICV^MI(UV
8<iKvil1|Tf
8«ucirtfiM%
l§ 128.
1 123.J
CONJUGATION OF VilRBS IN MI.
161
|(|CVV|U
llKVVt
i(kvvo%
iCkvutov
rflCWTOV
iCkvuti
Bcdcvvv
Bc(kvv«
Sc(kvv
iiicvvni)V
(Cicw|uv
((kwtc
fCicwoti*
ikWijtw
iKVlW)TOV
IKV4«(MV
kKVin|Tt
PreataU Optative.
■ 5'-
ing. ■< 2.
(3.
lual 5 2-
Plur.
Dud
t(rra(T|v
lorTa(l)|MV
UrraCiiTf
Ti9<CT|V
Tl0«(l)
Tl9c(l|T0V
rt,9*vi\Tt\v
Tl6<(l||MV
Tl6«ll|T<
UrrcUiiouv r\^h\vav
8i8oti|v
8v8o<i|t
8i8o£t|tov
8i8oiiJTT|v
8i8oCi||Mv
8i8oCt)tc
8v8o(T|(rav
1::
krratTOv
loTaCrriv
Or thus contracted : —
tiOcCtov 8i8otTov
Plur.
It
III
Sing.
2.
■3.
tOTTJ
tirrdTtt
Dual
{I
tOTotTOV
tirrdTwv
Plur.
{I
torarc
lordTttO'
Tl6c<TT)V
Tk9ct|uv2
TiOctrc
riOcIcv
8i8otTi)v
8i8ot|MV
SiSoStc
8180UV
Present Imperative.
t(6ctov
tiMtuv
8f8ou
8i8<STtt
8C80TOV
8i8<{t»v
5'-
Sing. -< 2.
(3.
Dual 1^'
Plur. •< 2.
<8.
tCOctc 8C8ot<
TiMroNrav 8i8(Sr«Mrav
or lordvTttv or TiMvTttv or 8i8<$vt«v
Present Infinitive.
ttrrdvcu ritf^vai 8i8({v<u
Present Participle.
lords TiScfs 8i8ovt
Second Aorist Indicative.
I<m|v (^^'?'')
<<rTti$ i^&V^)
(§ 122, N. 1)
X(rn)Tov lOcTov
itrHfn]v 49frT|v
l(mf||uv I6c|icv
fU'Tf|T4 fOCTf
l<m|crav lOttrav
11
8<ucvilo4Ui
8<iKVli0lt
ScucvvM
8<iKVl(loiT0V
8cilCW0CT1|V
8«iKVV0l|UV
8«lKVl{0lT<
SciKV^MV
(eduu)
'jSus)
{§ 122, N. 1)
I80TOV
l8dTT|V
l8o|uv
X8oTf
fSootiv
8<(icw
tHKVtrtt
8cCkvvtov
SciKVilTttV
8c£Kvvr«
8<iKVih-«»(ra»
or 8f iKvvvTMi
SciKVt&vak
8<ucviis
(8vv
I8v«
I8v
ISvTOV
I84tiiv
l8C|uv
l8iiTt
I8v«tiv
.-1 '
i
INFLECTIOfi.
iSIecoml ^om< Sui^unclive.
[1 128.
(^•
<rm M M
8ih»
^B Sing.
]^-
OT^ e^ 8<^
8v||Q
BI'!
(8.
»Tfi #1 8^
Md
HI'i -n.1.1
2.
: 8.
8ih|Tov
^^|K ' u X/Uftl
OVI|T0V
^Hl|ii I
r-
OT«|UV 0«S|MV 8«|MV
8ifw|uv
Uki Plur.
V'
ffT^Tt WT< ©•Tt
II
(3.
Second Aorist Optative.
h^tttn
H.i|
r-
OTa<i|V Oi<i|v 8oCi|v
^B'l ^^^^'
]'•
(rraCi|t 6<(i|t SoCut
H'l
(3.
imlr\ 6cCi| 8o(i|
9Bj 1 j^^^i
,8.
vnlrfTov 6cCi)Tov 8oCi|rov
HH>.
<rriuiJTi|v Oci^Tiiv 8oi^tt|v
Mto.!
\^'
erraCTiiMV 6«(i)|uv 8oCi||uv
^B 1 Plur.
V'
ffTcUl)T< Oc{l|TC 8o(l|Tf
Bit
(8.
ffTcUiio-av 6<Ci)ouv 8o(T|o-av
H
Or thus contracted : —
H
'2.
■ 3.
vratTOV Octroy Sotiw
InH UUfti
VTa<Ti|v 6<Iti|v SoCTt)v
IH
r-
VTat|MV 0ct|fc<v 8o!|Lsv
tWk Plur.
]2-
vratrc (ktrt Soirc
H
(3.
crratcv Octcv Sotcv
mS
jSlscond -<4om< Imperative.
1 t ^"*'
'2.
'3.
oTfiei ei« 8<$s
8oei
onfJTw 6It« Srfrw
8iiTI»
III* I"""
111.
2.
' 3.
orriJTOv 6<Tov Srfrov
80tov
8ilr«*v
2.
"8.
ffTf|Tl 9It« 8rfT«
80tc
SOrcMrav
' !
or crrAvTwv or Mvrttv or 8<Svtwv
or SvvTwv
1 ^ ;
/&cond -<4oris< Infinitive.
1 '^'1
rrtivtu Octvoi. SoOvcu
8<rvai
V^Kl
Second Aorist Participle.
hi rl
i ^^
rrds 0«(8 Sovs
•* <
I
SvVTMV
1 123. J
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
163
Present Indicative.
^^•
t9Ta|MU
Tf6(|UU>
8(8o|uii
8<CKVUfUU
Sing.
r-
ttrrovat
T{9i9>ai
8(8oo-ai
8<tKviHrai
(3.
(orarau
T(6tTai
8(8oTai
8c(KvvTai.
Dual
2.
■3.
W 1 iiiVWi'V
T<6«o-9ov
8{8o<r0ov
8c(Kvv«r6ov
Ivmvvov
tMco^ov
8C8oo>0ov
8<(KW<r6ov
^^*
toTd|u6a
TiM|u9a
8i8^|ftc6a
8<iKvii|M6a
Plur.
V'
uTTOcrvf
rie<iret
8<8o<re<
8<CKvtNr9«
(8.
toravTCU
rCOcvrai
7wiper/«5<rf.
8C80VTCU
8<CKvvvTai
1.
(o^d|M)V
4TlM|fcT)V
48i8d|iT|v
48HICVli)|LT|V
Sing.
2.
tmuro
4Tie«ro
l8ffioo-o
I8<(kvvo-o
8.
toraro
hlBrro
l8(8oTo
TIiiaI
2.
' 3.
ttrnurlSov
M9«r99V
I8(8ov0ov
i8f<icwveov 1
UiXnl
tn,9tovi\v
48i8tf(r9iiv
^^•
l<rTd|M9a
iTiMiMOa
48i8<{)i<ea
48<iKvv|u6a
Plur.
^•
tirravOt
iT(e«re«
l8C8o<rec
i8c(Kvvvef
(3.
irCefVTo
i8C8ovTo
i8c(KVWT0
Present Subjunctive.
f^-
tirTM|Ml
Tl9«*|UU
8i8M)iai
8<lKVlltt|UU
Sing.
]'•
IflTTJ
Tl*^
8i8<p
Snttvijn
13.
larf^rai
Ti94)Tai
8i8MTafc
8ciKVlh|T(U
Dual
2.
■ 3.
•nOijvOov
8i8<S<reov
8ciKVl{T|v60V
TiVi|(rvov
8i8««r6ov
8ciKvt(i|r6ov
r-
toT(&|u9a
Tie<&|uOa
8i8<&|Mea
8 '•Kwc&(i«6a 1
Plur.
]'•
i<j'i'i)(rv(
Ti6f)o4c
8i8«Mre<
8 Kvihf|(r6* 1
(3.
Ti9«vTai
StSMvmi
8<iKvv«»vTai.
Present C>pta/ive.
i
(^•
UrTa(|i.t)v
TlO((|M)V
8i8o{|ii)v
8ciKW0<|i1)V
Sing.
V-
Urrato
TiOcCO
SkSoto
8<iKvii!oio
(3.
UtTOiVTO
tiOcCto
8i8oCro
8ciKin(0lT0
Dual
2.
' 3.
tfrratcrdov
TtOcCorOov
8t8ot(r6ov
8<iicviIoi<r9ov
l<rT0iC<r9ijv
Ti6c(<r6i|v
8i8o<o^v
8ciKwoC<r9f)v
^^'
l<rraC|ic9a
TiOc(|»cOa
8i8o(|uea
8ctKvvo(|»(9a
Plur.
h
t(rTai<r6c
TiOcM^
8i8otor6<
8ciKVvoi(r0c
(3.
IvratvTO
Tt6<iVTO
8i8otvTO
SciKVVOkVTO
164
INFLECTION.
[I 123.
Present Imperative.
:!
<ii
p!
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
(3.
{I
tvr&vo
or lOTM
Urruovn
or t(6ov
8(800-0
or 8{8ov
818^0^
8«{kvvo-o
8<iicvilvfa»
Xvmr9w
t(6«o^v
8<8ov«ov
8<(Rwa4ov
lon^0MV
TiMvOwv
8i8^v«MV
8«iicviio^v
to~rav0c
Tte«r««
8(8o<r«<
UUyw^
UTTourvtMrciv
TiMv6«ivav
8i8^o^«MXiv
8<ucviNr0iMrav
ortordo^Mt
» or TiM78«v
or8i8tfv8Mv
or 8«iKVt(ivOMy
PrcsctU Infinitive.
toTwrOcu
T(e<o-eai
8aiove(u
8c{kwv6cu
Present Participle.
Urrd|Mvo« TiMfuvot 8t8<{|MVot
Second Aorist Middle Indicative,
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
1
1.
2.
3.
{I
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Iirpid|fci|v
iirpCw
{irpUiTO
Iirp(av0ov
lirpid|M9a
jirptav6c
JirpfavTO
I60V
f0CTO
lOco^v
<Mo-ei)v
4M|ifea
lOcVTO
I8d)ii|v
I80V
I80T0
l8or9ov
<8<{|icea
1800^
f80VT0
irpU»|ioi
irptn
irpli)Tai
Second Aorist Middle Suijunctive,
0{)tm
8iS|Mu
8<rrai
It
S
1.
2.
3.
irpCT|ar6ov
vpii|O'0ov
irpi^|i4a
Vpi1|0Ti
irp<«*VTai
0i)v6ov
6{)v6ov
Oi&|uOa
8<Mreov
8«o'6ov
8<&|ic6a
8<S<re«
SctVTOV
8MKv4|UV0t
I 128.
lev
ittauv
■0CU
MVOt
% 123,]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
Second Aoriat Middle Optative.
165
Sing. •< 2.
(3.
Dual \ ^•
}3.
^'•
Plur. ■< 2.
(3.
Dual 52-
(3.
Plur. -j 3.
irpiaU)iT|v
irpfaio
irp(«iTO
e<to
ettTo
III
irp{auv6ov
irpiaCv9T|v
9iUr9ov
9*Cv9r\v
8oto^ov
8olo^v
■^l|
9<(|uea
ectve«
OltVTO
8o{|M9a
8our«<
8otVTO
Second Aorist Middle Imperative.
irpCtt
irpiAo^M
9oO
800
86<re»
irpfovOov
irpido^v
Mireov
M(re»v
8^<reov
8^o>6ttv
irpCoo'Ot
irpidv9aMrav
or irpUUr9ttv
Mo^cMrav
or MrOwv
8<$o^
h6cr9wrav
or S^vOmv
Secand Aorist Middle Infinitive.
irp{aa9ai MvOai 84o-9av
Second AoHst Middle Participle.
irpid|MVo« M|Mvot 86|Mvot
3. The following is a full synopsis of the indicative of
laTrj/jLi, TiOriixi, BiBcofii, and heUvvfiit in all the voices : —
ACTIVE.
Pres. to*n||u,
9U
place
8(8tt|u, 8cCkw|ii,
give show
Imperf. t<mjv
ItCOtiv
48f8ovv I8<(kwv
Fut. VTt\(Ta
Oijvw
8<&VW &€((«>
(\. foTT|ox^ set
Aor. •J2. %n^f\v, stood
(\. l9T|Ka
■j 2. lOcTOV, &c.
( in dual and plur.
tin
ISttKa
l8oTov,&c. 1. I8<i|a
dual and plur.
I
166
INFLECTiJjN.
[§ 123.
Perf.
' 1. {0T1|Ka
2. {orraTov, &c.
in dual and plur.
stand
'1. WOciica 1. 8^8«Ka 1. 8^8<ixa
' 1. JOT^KCIV
or <l(rT^K(iv
Plupf. ^ 2. itrraroVfkc.
in dual and plur.
stood
^1. IrcOcfMiv 1. <8<8<&K(iv 1. tMtCxnv
Fut Perf. lirHj^o, shall stand
§ 110, IV. V :) N. 2.
MIDDLE.
Pres. Xtrra^M, stand T(e«|MU (trans.) 8f8o|iai 8c{kvv|uu (trans.)
Impf. lo-TdiiTiv lriM|M|v I8i8<(|fci|v 48ciicv^i|v
Fut. OT/i<ro|&(u 6^<ro)uu -8i&o'o)uii -8c£(ouai
1 Aor. {aTT|<rd|iT)v (trans. ) IOi]Kd|fci)v (not Attic) I8ci{d|ii|v
2 Aor. iei|fci|v •&6^r\v
Perf. firra|uu (as pass.) W6ci|uu 8^o|fc(u 8^8ciy)Uu
Plupf. (?) (?) I8<8tf|fci|v <8c8c£Y|ii)v
PASSIVE.
Piesent, Vu rrf^ect, Perfect, Pluperfect: as in Middle.
Fuv irraO^troiiai t(6^o«|mu SoO^crofiai 8ctx^<">|Mi^
Fut. Pf. lo-Wi(o|uu, shall stand. (8<8<(to|Mi, late)
i I
§124.] SECOND PERF. AND PLUPERF. OF MI- FORM. 167
Second Perfect and Pluperfect «f the Ml-form.
§ 124- 1- A few second perfects and pluperfects are in-
flected like the present and imperfect of verbs in fiu But they
are never used in the singular of the indicative, the forms
(coraa), {rtOvaa), (y€V<»<»)> ^^- ^®i"g imaginar}'. The partici-
ple is formed in ws, wo-a, 09, which is contracted with a preced-
ing a to ojs, wva, 05 (irregular for ais) .
2. The principal verbs which have these forms in Attic
prose are )8atVu),^o, 2 perf. infin. fie^dvai ; Ovqa-KiDy die, TtOvdvai ;
and limjiii, set, iardvai, with stems in a. All these have ordi-
nary perfects, ftefirjKa, riOvriKa, eoTrjKa, which are always used
in the singular of the indicative. The second perfect and plu-
perfect of lony/Ai (o-Ttt-) are thus inflected : —
SECOND PERFECT.
Indicative.
Sing.
Dual
Subjunctive.
itrr»
Optative.
l4rra(i)v
Imperative,
2.
3.
l<rTaCt)S
Xon'oOi
Xarrarov
Xtrrarov
lorfJTOv
l<rra(T|Tov or -atrov
lirrai^TTiv or -cUttiv
XoTttTOV
ivrimav
X(rra|fccv
ivrart
l«rri)Tf
ivrwn
loYa(T)|uv or -atfuv
ivratrfrt or -atw
{crraCT|oxiv or -atcv
or iirrAvTwv
Infinitive, lordvau Participle. (Horn, iorcu&t, lorcuMro, krrtutt),
Att. contr. UrrAt, 2oTt5<ra, i<rr69 (Ionic also -c(&s,-(«S<ra, -c^s ; Ep. -iii&v).
See § 110, IV. {(l), N. 3. For the inflection, see § 69, Note.
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
Dual. XoraTov, lirrdTiiv.
Plural. Xirraiuv, itrrwn, Xvrao-av.
Note. For an enumeration of these forms, see § 125, 4.
168
INFLECTION.
[§ 125.
' 'i
Bnumeration of the MI>forins.
§ 125. The forms which have this inflection are as fol-
lows : —
1. Verbs in /iiwith the simple stem in the present. These
are the irregular ei/i,i, Ac, ci/ii, go, ffirnxi, say, Ktifuu^ lie, and
ij/tai, sit, all of which are inflected in § 127 ; with ^fUySay, x/wy,
ought, and the deponents aya/xat, Svvafiai, cTriVra/tat, ipa/xai, Kpi-
ftafxai.
See these in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly
Homeric) forms under ai;/Lu, dca/xat, diV/xat, bi^ijfiai, eda, iXi;/lu, Ki)(dvc»,
Svofiai, pvoftai and tpvofuu, oreO/iat, <^cpo ; also ddpvtfpi, Kipvrjp*, Kprj-
ppfjiu, papvapLOi, iripvripiy iriXvapai, irirvtipiy aKidinjpi and Kibvrjpi.
2. Verbs in fii with reduplicated present stems (§ 121, 3).
These are larrjfjii, riO-qpn., and SiBtafiif inflected in § 123, ?»7/x,i,
inflected in § 127, BiSripn, rare for Scod, bind, Kixpi/fti {xf^a-) , lend,
ovivrjfii (om-), benefit, ■irifiTrXrffii (ttXm-), fill, irifiirprjp.i (Trpu-),
bum.
See also iinapai (late), and Horn. /StjSdf, striding, present partici-
ple of rare ^i^^fu.
Note 1. nlnirXrjpx and irip.nprjpi insert p. before jr; but the p
generally disappears after p (for i;) in ep-ninXripi and ip-rriirprjpi ; but
not after v itself, as in (v-cnipiiKaaav,
Note 2. *Oviin)pi is probably for 6p-ovri-pu by Attic reduplication
from stem oca-.
3. Second Aorists of the pa-Form. The onlj"^ second aorists
formed from verbs in pn. are those of 177^^,1 (§ 127), of la-Trjpi,
rie-qp.1, and StSw/w (§ 123), of a-l3ivwp.i (§ 122, N. 6) ; with
f.TFpiap.'qv (§ 123, 1), the iri'egular uivqpi.7p/ (rarely wm/uwyi/) , of
ovivrjpii, and iTr\rip.7}v (poetic) of irip.TrXrfp.i.
See the last two in the Catalogue, and also Homeric aorist mid-
dle forms of piyw;:t, Spwpi, and Tniywpi.
The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs in a are the
following: —
Baivo (/9a-), go: ffirjp, ^w, Palrjv, ^rjBt, firjvai, /3df.
Uiropai (irra-, irrt-)yfiy: act. (poetic) eimjv, (tttw, late), nraiijv,
(imjOi, m^vat, late), nrdr. Mid. enTaprjv, Trrdadat, irrdptvoS'
^
§ 125.]
ENUMERATION OF THE MI- FORMS.
169
fol-
[TXaw] (tXo-), endure : crXi^i^, tXw, rKair^v, rX^dt, rkr^vai, rka^.
^6ava> {(^6a-), anticipate : e^Ot^Vy <f)6o», cf)6airju, (jjd^pai, <}}$as
AtdpatTKu) {8pa-), run: thpav, ebpat, tdpa, ^c, dpoi, dpqs, dp^, &C.,
bpatriv, bpavai, 8pds. Only in composition. (See Note 1.)
KrctVo) (kto-, KTtv), kill: act. (poetic) eicrav, eKras, eicra, tsKTafitv
(3 pi. fKrav, subj. Kreofuv, inf. Kra/icrat, Kraptv, Horn.), ktos. Mid.
(Iiom.) «Krdfir)v. was killed, KTaadai, Krdfifvos.
'AXto-Ko/Dtat (dX-), ie /fden ; cdX<i>i/ or ^Xcoy, was /aAen, dXoJ, £Koir}p.
dXavai, dXovr. (See Note 2.)
Bi6a> (^10-), live : «^iu>u, /3«», /Stbii/f (not -oii/c), ^lavai, /Stovs (Horn,
imper. /3ta>ra)).
TiyvaMTico (yvo-), know : tyvoiv, yi/w, yvolriu, yvStBi, yvovai, yvovi,
Avo> (dv-), en/er; eSSe, entered, dv'o). (opt. § 123, 1,) 8vdi, dvvai, bif
(§ -23).
^vo {<f>v-), produce : fipvu, was produced, am, <f)va>, (ftvvah <^vf (like
S8vv).
Add to these the single forms, yripdvai (yrjpds, Hom.) of yTjpdaKa,
grow old ; dito-<TKKrivai, of diroaKfhXat, dry up : o-^f f > imperat. of e\a,
have : mdi, imperat. of viva, drink.
See also in the Catalogue Homeric ^t-forms of the following
verbs : diravpdta, aa, /SaXXo), /Si/Spoxnco), kXi/o>, kti^o), Xvo), ouraa>, TreXa^o),
ttXaW, irveoi, irniaaa, trtvoi, <f)diP(o, \i<o ; and of these (with consonant
stems), cfXXo/iai, apapivKVi, ycin'o (yfv-), hlxppai, Xeyo) (Xf;^-) (Kiynrjv,
iraXXo), irep6ci.
Note 1. Second aorists in tji; or a/ii;i/ from stems in a are in-
flected like €arrjv or eVptd/jii;i/ ; but cfipai* substitutes a (after p) for i;,
and ewai/ is irregular.
Note 2. The second aorists of Ti6r}pi, trjpi, and blbapi do not
lengthen r or o of the stem (§ 121, 1) in the indicative (dual and
plural) or imperative {«Itov, tlfitv, &c. being augmented): in the
infinitive they have 6(7vai, fivat, and 8ovvai (§ 126, 9), and in the
imperative Bfy, «, and 865 (§ 121, 2, b). The other stems in e have
ta^ijv (-1JS, -17) and tr^rjvai (§ 122, N. 6), and dnoaKKrjvai. The other
stems in o are inflected like eyvov, as follows : —
Indie, tyvav, eyvas, eyva>, fyvarov, fyvanrjv, eyvoip,ev, (yptoTf, (ypuxrav.
Subj. -yv© (like 8&). Opt. ypolrjp (like doti^i/). Imperat. yi/m^i, yruro),
yi/torof, yvoro)!', ypcire, ypatraxrap or •yi/dirrcai'. Inf. yfca^at. Part,
yi/ows (like fiovs). The optative ftu^rjp is irregular.
4. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the fii-Form. The
following verbs have these forms in Attic Greek, even in
prose : —
"loTiy/ii (ara-); see § 123, 2 (paradigm).
BaiVfo (0a-), go; 2 pf . /3f jSao-t (Hom. fie^dairi), subj. /3r/3(S(rt, inf.
^f/3avat (Horn, ^e^dfttv), part. /3f/3a>v (Hom. -aox); 2 plup. (Hom.
^Qacrav).
] I
■ i
170
INFLECTION.
[§ 126.
rlyvoftai (yfy-, ya-), become, 2 pf . yiyova, am : (Horn. 2 pf . ytyaatn,
inf. ytyafifVi, yeyaats), Att. ytyws (poetic).
Qif^<rK(i> ($au; Ova-), die ; 2 pf . rfdvarov, Ttdvafttv, Tedvarty TfQvaai,
opt. Tfdvatrjv, iinper. ridvaOi, TeOvarm, inf. reOvdvai (lloin. T«dvdfi€vai
or -vofifv), pai't. Ttdvfas (Mom. xfOvrim), 2 plup. iriOvavav.
Aeiba (fit-), Epic in pres., fear, Attic 2 pf. BiBia (Horn. 8«i8ta),
"^liin ifitfiixiu. hnf.h rponilar in inHio.. alsn 9 nf fiifimxtt fiiftirx 9 rtlim
1 1
J'
part. 8(i8im, plup. fdfiBifiev, «8ei8ia-av.)
[Eu(o] (tV-, ei*c-). 2 pf. ?ot<ca, .seem; also 2 pf. toiyntv, ei^do-t (for
(otKaai), part. ctKcor (Horn. 2 pf. etKrov, 2 plup. eiKTTjv), used with the
regular forms of ciutica, taKfiv (see Catalogue).
Ot8a (tS-), know: see § 127 (paradigm).
See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs
in the Catalogue: dvayoi, fiiPpcta-Ko, iyfipta, (p^ofiaij (Ka0-), Kpa(<a,
fiaiofiai, iTa(r)((o, irtidoi, 7r('7rTa>)[TXa(0], ^voi.
5. Verbs in wfii, with w (after a vowel, vw) added to the
verb stem in the present. These are all inflected like SeiKi/u/xi
(§ 123), and, with the exception of cr^Scwv/uti, quench (§ 122,
N. 6) , have no /lAi-forms except in the present and imperfect.
The following belong to this class : —
(Stems in a), icfpa-vvvfu, Kptfui-vvvfu, irerd-vvvpi, aKtbd-vvvpi ; (stemj
in e), €-pvvpi, Kopi-vvvfu, crpe-puvfu, aTope-viwpi ; (stems in a>), (it-wvpx,
put-vwpi, arpoi-vvvpi; (consonant stems), ay-vvpit ap-wpai, driK-in;^
(§ 123), eXpy-wpx, ^evy-wpi dno-KTiu-iwp* (o. icrctW), piy-pvp*, oXy-wpi,
SK-\vpi (§ 108, V. 4, N. 2), 8p-wpi, 6p6py-wfu, Sp-vvfu, nm-wiu (»ray-),
TTTap-vvpxu, pfiy-wpi (pay), arSp-wfii, <lipay-vvpt. See tnese in the
Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under
aiwpai, axwpai, ydwpai, baiwpi, Kaivvfuu, Kivvpai, opey-i/vfu, T&wpai {p.
Tfivo), Tiwpai {v. Tiva).
\ I
Dialectic Forms of Verbg In MI.
§ 126. 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some
doubtful) in which verbs in ripi (with stems in e) and apt have the
inflection of verbs in eo) and oo; as ndel, diBois, 8i8ol So in com-
pounds otirjp^, as duifts (or dpuis), peSifi (or -itl) in pres., and irpotcw,
npoifis, dvifi, in impf. Hom. has imperat. Kad-lara (Attic -i;). Herod,
has tora (for ton^o-i), {mep-triBea and irpo-tridte in impf., and npoa-
BeoiTo (for -delro), &c. in opt. For e8i8ovvj &c. and endeis, eridet (also
Attic), see § 122, 2, N. 1.
2. In the Aeolic dialect most verbs in aw, ew, and oa> take the
form hi fu ; as (ftiKripi (with <^iXet(rtfa, <^tXci), in Sappho, for 0(Xra>,
ftc. ; optjpi, KoKrjpi, atvtjpt.
:
§ 126.]
DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI.
171
Tpoa-
(also
3. A few verbs in Horn, and Hdt. drop o- in am and ao of the
second person after a vowel; as imperat. irapiarrao (for -aao) and
impf. €iMpvao (Horn.); f^ciria-Tfai (for -aaai) with change of a to «
(Hdt.). So dio, imperat. for Bftro (Att. 6ov). and (v6(o (Horn.).
4. The Doric has rt, vrt for at, vai. Homer sometimes has ada
for a- in 2 pers. sing., as biStoada {8i8oia6a or Bibo'iada), r/^/tr^u; u for
aap (with preceding vowel short) in 3 pers. plur., as earap (for eart)-
aav), Up (for leaap), irpondtp (for irpoeriOfaap); see § 119, 9. • He some-
timcis has 6i in the pres. imperat. act., as 8i8a>6i, oppvdi (§ 121, 2, b).
5. Herod, sometimes has arm, aro for vrai, pro m the present and
imperfect of verbs in /it, with a preceding a changed to e; as Trpon-
Bearai (for -fprai), edvptaro (for -apro). For the iterative endings aKov,
aKOfiijp, see § 119, 10; tliese are added directly to the stem of verbs
in /it, as tara-aKOP, do-aKop, ^appv-aKfro, t-aKOP («(/i(t ^^)'
6. Some verbs with consonant stems have a 2 aor. mid. of the ut-
form in Homer; as 2X-to, aX-/i6i«r, from aXXo/iat, leap; 2>p-To, with
imperat. opo-eo, opaev, opao, from oppvfu, rouse. So irtfypviu (ctti^kto).
See § 125, 3.
«
7. (a) Herodotus sometimes leaves ea> nncontracted in the sub-
junctive of verbs in rjfu ; as Becofup (Att. Ba/Aep), 8iade<opTat {-BapTat),
an-ifaai (Att. d<f}-iwai, from d^-ti;/it). He forms the subj. with cu
in the plural also from stems in a ; as dno-aTP-oiai (-ffTwat), cVtore-
ttvrat (for cVtora-ovrat, Att. tiriarapTai). Homer sometimes has
these forms with to ; as Bewixep, ariwfiep.
(6) Generally, when the 2 aor. subj. act. is nncontracted in
Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened, e (or a) to « or
i;, o to 6), while the connecting vowels i; and <o are shortened to e and
o in the dual and plural, except before o-t (for pai). Thus we find
in Homer: —
(Stems in a.)
pctw (Attic p» for pa-u)
"^TIj P^TI» P^TI» ♦'^TI
o^ofuv, <rTcCo|fccv, <rT^«D|icv
(rr^cMTi., OTcCtto-i, <|>MaMrt
(Stems in c.)
OcCo|icv
(Stems in o.)
TVt&n, 8t&t|, 8(&x|oav
^c&Axn, 8(*MMn
See also § 119, 12 (c).
(c) A few cases of the middle inflected as in (&) occur in Homer;
as ffK^-erai (v. j9aXXa>), cfX-crat (c(XXo/iat), an-o-de to/tat, xara-deto/iat ; SO
K«rtf-^at (Hesiod) for xara^c-i^at (Att. Kara^).
172
INFLECTION.
[§ 127.
^ 8. For Homeric optatives oldaiwfti, fivw, \va, and <^tftVa>, — dtavCro,
^vtf, and dv/ifv, XeXOro or \t\vpro, ipOiutfv (for (f)$i-ifAriv), — see those
verbs in the Catalogue, and g 118, 1, Note.
9. Homer has /lepat or fuv (the latter only after a short vowel)
for pai in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is rarely
lengthened in the present; as riffi-fttvat, rarely riffrjutvai. In the
2 aor. act. the vowel is regulaily long (§ 121, 1), as trrfufwii, ywo-
fitvai] but Ti%t and 8»'8o)/it (§ 125, 3, N. 2) have ei-fievai and 8(5-
fievat. For ri-fuvai in the aor. pass, infin. see § 119, 14. In the
perfect of the ^t-forra (§ 125, 4), we have iaT&fji€vai, i<rri-nfVy
TfBpafjLtvai, T(6vt^(v.
10. Homer rarely has ruitvoi for rucvor in the participle. For
peFf. part, in m (e«s, »;«t), see § 110, IV. (rf), N. 3.
Irregular Verbs of the MI-Form.
§ 127. The verbs ci/nt", &e, cT/utt, go^ irjfii, sendy tfi-qfii, say,
^/xai, stty Kct/mai, /«c, and the second perfect oTBa, know^ ar«»
thus inflected.
I. Ei/*i (stem cV, Latin c«-se), Je.
Sing
Dual
Plur.
PRESENT.
1
Indicative.
. •<2. cl
(3. itrrl
Svlfjunelive.
«S
Optah't'e.
ctT|V
•tt,
Imptrativt.
t<rOi
- 2.
' 3.
iirr6v
lvr6v
^iTov
^JTOV
ctiiTov, ctrov
cl^T1)V, €tTT|V
Itrrov
lOTWV
1'
(3.
III
«S|MV
ctT||MV, ct|MV
cCt|tc, «tT«
cti)<rav, (Uv
|0T€
{(TTttMrav,
jfffTtfV, 0VT0V
kfinitive. ttvau
•
Partic. u)v
ovca, ovj
gen. ovTfKj owcn/s, &c.
§ 127.]
VERBS IN MI.
173
IMPERFECT.
-fUV,
For
(3.
(3.
^lvor^i
IjoTov or Jirov
ii<rn|v or <iTTjv
IJt* or fljOTt
4i<rav
FUTURE INDIC.
l(ro|&ai
XlTQ, Irtb
Xtrroi
XtTKrOov
lirctrOov
X<rco^
((rovTOi
^M^. CJp<. iaoiiirfVi (uroio, erotTO, &C. regular.
i^M<. Infin. iarta-Oai, Fut. Partic. ia-ofievo^.
Verb. Adj. iariov {aw-forfov).
An imperfect middle ^firfv, was, rarely occurs.
Note 1. In compounds of «tfti (as in those of ci/it) the partici-
ple keeps the accent of the simple form ; as irapdtv, n-apovcra, napov,
avv6vT«s, avvovai, trvpovToiu. So in the subjunctive, where & is con-
tracted from Ionic eiu ; as irapS», irap^s, &c. So •napiarai (for jrape*
(Tcrat).
Note 2. Dialects. Pres. Indie. Aeolic e/ufit, the most primi-
tive form, nearest to tar-pj. (see foot-note on p. 143). Ionic etr,
Hom. eWi (for €t) ; Ionic tlpiv (for «(ruei/) ; Ionic eact, Doric ivri (for
eto-t).
Imperf. Hom. 7a, ea, eov (in 1 pers. sing.) ; ei;o-da (2 pers.) ; jJcp,
tr)v, rjriv (3*jpers.); i<Tav (for ^trav). Hdt. ea, ear, fare. Later ^r for
^a^a. Ionic (iterative) tvKov.
Future. Hom. f<raoiuu, &c., with eVo-eirai; Dor. eVtr^) eWovvrat;
Hom. co-rrat.
iS'u&/. Ionic eo), &c., cidvi; Hom. also eto.
0/)/. Ionic coif, cot.
Imper. Hom. eo-o-o (the regular form, § 116, 1).
Infin. Hom. eppevcu^ ipjtvai, e/xcv, Dor. 7/Acv or tlp.(v\ Lyric c/*-
p,tv.
y-\
n
Partic. Ionic coiv, coOaa, cov.
174
INFLECTION.
[8 127.
i(
II. Elfii (stem t-, Latin i-re}, go.
5'-
ing. j 2.
(3.
►ual P-
(3.
lur. j 2.
(3.
Jndieativt.
ft
cto%
trov
trov
C|fccv
tTi
(On
PRESENT.
Subjunctive.
Cm
<1I
ttJTOV
tT)TOV
K(*|MV
Cl)T<
Cmox
Infinitive, icVai.
Optative.
lo(t)V (foi/Llt)
Coit Ml
(OITOV
Coi|uv
toiTC
toicv
In^penUlv$.
trov
Ctmv
trttirav or Uvra
Partic. luiVy lovcra, tdv,
gen. (ovros, iov(n;S) &C.
1. fiB,v or f|a
2. ^t or iQiio'Oa
8. ffct or {civ
IMPERFECT.
Dual.
iJfciTOV or fJTOV
{i(Ti|v or tJttjv
PZurol.
^i|uv or {|uv
{«iTc or {t€
{«aav or {(rav
1 1
if.,
Verb. Adj. Irosy Irtou, InjTfou.
Future (ttrofuu and aorist tladfifiv (or iavaiu^v) are Homeric.
Note 1. In compounds the particif^e has the accent of the simple
form; as irapiwv, napiovira, irapidvroi, irapiovai. (See I. Note 1.)
Note 2. The present eifu generally has a future sense, shall go,
taking the place 01 a future of ep^ofuit, whose future fXtvaofuu is not
often used in Attic prose.
Note 3. Dialects. Pres. Intl. Hom. cto-fti for ct. Imperf.
Hom. fpa, fj^ov (in 1 pers. sing.); ^e, jft, Xe (in 3 pers.); Ixrfv (in
dual); ^ofuv, tftov, ^a-av Q<rav)^ laav (in plural). Udt. ^a, rfie,
rj^aav.
Subj. Hom. iji(r6a, irjai. Opt. Horn. Uiij (for tot). Injin. Hom.
i-fievai, or ?-/*«' (for t-emt), rarely t/iftcrat.
1 127.]
VERBS IN MI.
176
^<
III. "Irj^i, (stem €-), send,
(Fut. ^0), Aor. rjKa^ Perf. ctfca, Ferf. Pass, and Mid. cI/mu,
Aor. Pass. tWriv).
ACTIVE.
Present.
Indie, iriiiif inflected like TiOrjfii ; but 3 pers. plur. ia<n.
Subj. tw, igs, ifj^ &C. Opt. Un;i', len/f, 'uirj^ &c, (See
N. 1.)
Jmper, ict, icro), &c. Infin. iivax. Partic, Uis.
Imperfect.
iciv, ?«$, ici; leroi/, Urrpf] Ufitv, lerc, ico-ai/. Also Irp^ (in
^<^iV} § ^^^) ^i ^' ^)) ^^^ "7 (Horn.). See dffiirjfiu
Future.
^o-d), ^«S) ^o-ci, &c., regular.
iF'irsf Aorist.
^Ka, i^Ka«, ^Kc, &c., only in indicative.
Perfect {in compos.}.
c!ica, tlica^i cIkc, &C.
Second Aorist {generally in compos.).
Indie, No singular : Dual, elrov, ttrriv : Plur. ct/icv, ctrc,
crcrai/.
<SmJ/. cI), ^? ^ ; TTTOf, ^w ; £//.«', ^€, t5(re.
Opt. €o;v, cit;?, cti; ; tlrjTov^ ciijn;!' ; ilrjiify Ot flfitv, f n;rc Of
eiTC, €ir)(Tav or eici'.
Imper. €s» ctw ; Itoi/, ctcoi' ; It«, trwrav or cktcdv.
Injin, elvat. Partie. eis, clo'a, Iv. ^
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present.
Indie, lefiai. Subj. Idfiai. Opt. Uifirjv. Imper. Uco or tov,
Injin. uaOai. Partie. te/xcfos. (All regular like ri^cfiat, &c.)
176
INFLECTION.
[§ 127.
I
Imperfect.
Uixrjvy inflected regularly like iridtiJLijv.
Fut. Middle (in compos.). First Aorist Middle (in compos.)
^aofiaif &c. -qKafi-qv (only in Indie),
Perfect and Pluperfect (in compos.).
Per/, Ind, €lp.ai, Imperat. tlvBta. Inf. ilvBat. Partic. tifit-
vos.
Plup, tifirjVi th-Of tiro, &c.
Second Aorist Middle (generally in compos.).
Ind. tifirpfy elaroy cIto ; (ta-Oov^ ticrO-qv ; et/Ac^a, clo-tft, tlvro.
Suhj. tu/Aai) ^f ^ai ; ^Oov ; uip.t6a^ rf(r6i^ Sivrax.
Opt. tlfi-qv^ eto, ctro ; dtrdov^ €ia'$r)v ; ci/mc^a, €la-6€, tlvro.
(See N. 1.)
Imper, ov, co-^u ; ia-dovy urOtav ; co-^e, taOtoaav or iarOtav.
Infin. taSai. Partic. ifitvos.
Aorist Passive (in compos.).
Ind. €iOrjv (augmented). Subj. e^w. Part. iOtU.
Future Passive (in compos.). Verb. Adj.
iOrja-ofxai, &C. erdsj €T€os.
NoTK 1. The optatives athloiTe and a^toui', for d(bieir}Te and d^i-
tiev, and Trpootro, irp6oia6€. and Trpdoipro (also accented irpooiTo, &c.),
for Trpofiro, npoelardf, and Trpoeiin-o, sometimes occur. For similar
forms of Tidrifu, see § 122, N. 1.
Note 2. Dialects. Hom. aor. trjKa for ^ko; «/h«> for etww;
eaavy ifirfp, eWo, &c., by omission of augment, for ti<rau, flfirjp, tlvro,
&c., in indicative. In avirjut, Hom. fut. ai/co-o.
IV. ^17/a/ (stem ^a-), sat/.
Present.
Indie. <f>r)iJi.iy ^?, fftrfo-L', KJiarov, <f>aT6v\ tfiafxtv, tJMTe, ^oxtC,
Subj. <f)Wy 0^s, ^, &C. Opt. <f>air]Vj 0a6;s, <^a»;, &C.
Imper. <fid6i or <^a0i, Kfydrui ; ffaxTOV, <f>dTO)Vf &C.
idmi. Panic, (not Attic) <f»as. </>ttcra
Infin. ^c
(not Attic) <^as., ^ttcra, ^o
gen.
t^ff T<Ky <l>d(rr)s, &c. (§ 25, 3, N. 2).
c /
Cl/XC-
ilvTO,
gen.
§ 127.J
VERBS
IN MI.
177
Imperfect.
•
tffnjirOa
or
C<^TO|/,
i<fidTr)v ;
i<liafuv,
^^arc,
Future. Aorist.
(^i/o-o), <firj(r€iVy <f>rj<r<i)v. €<f>rj(Ta, </»i;(r(o, </>i}o-ai/yii, ^^aatjt^i^O'as.
Verbal Adj. </>aTds, <^arco;.
A perfect passive imperative iTt(f)d<rBto occurs, with participle
Note 1. Dialects. Pres. Ind. Doric (f>dni, (f)aTi, (f)avTi\ Horn.
<f}^(Tda for (^/y'y. /«/. poet, (fiafitu. /'"/>/• Hoiii. <^^v, <^^s or <f)fj<rBaj
d)^ r Doric c0a and (^a), c^ai/ and 0ai/ (for €<ftaaav and <f)d(rav). Aor.
Doric <^a(re for €(f>i]a(.
Note 2. Homer has some middle forms of <^i7/ii; /)re.s-. imperat.
^do, <f)d(rO<a, <l)da-6e; injin. (pdadai', partic. <f)dnfPos] imperfect i^diir\v
or <f}dfiTfu, €<j)aTo or <^dro, €(fiavro and ^dvro. Doric yu^ <l>d<rofuu.
These all have an active sense.
V. *Hfiat, (stem r)a-)<, sit.
(Chiefly poetic in simple form : in Attic prose KaO-rifiai is
generally used.)
Present (with form of Perfect).
Ind. ^fiai, ijo-at, ^orai ; rjaSov ; ^fic^a, ^(rOe, ^Krai. Imperat.
^iroy ^a-6u)y &c. Jnf. ^a-dai. Partic. ^/uci/os.
Imperfect (with form of Pluperfect).
KdOrjfiai is thus inflected : —
Present
/wrf. KdOrjfiai, KdOr)(rai, KaB-qrai (not KaO-rfOTai) ; Kd0r)(r6ov ;
KaSrjfieOaj Ka^i^o-^e, KdOrjvrat. SuJJ. KaOwfiaiy KuOfj, Kadrjrai) &C.
Op^ KaOoifirjVy KaOdioy Kadoiro, &c. Imperat. KaB-qa-o (in com-
edy, KdBov), KaB-qa-Bta, &C. Tn/*. Ka^^o-^ai. Partic. KaBrjfuvo^.
12
.■' ■!:
\ »
178
INFLECTION.
[f 127.
Imperfect.
iicu$ijfir)Vt iKaOrjvOf iKoBrfrOy &c., also KaOi^fjLtjVy Ka&^Of KaOffaro
and KaOiqrot &c.
Note. Dialfxts. Homer has Sarai anri ttarai (for ^vrat), taro
and (Taro (for j^ito). Hdt. has KaTrjvat, xar^o-ro, Kartarai, Kceriaro,
and iKoriaro.
VI. Kelfiai (stem /cet-, «€-), lie.
Present (with form of Perfect) . Indie. Kctfiai, Kcto-ai, Kctrai ;
Kcio'^ov ; KiifitSot KtlaOt, Ktivrai. Snhj. and Opt. These forms
occur : Kiifraxy Sia-Ktrja-Bty Kioiroj irpoa-Kioivro. Imper. Kctcro,
KtiaBtOf &C. Infin. KutrBax. Partic. Kct/xcvo^.
Imperf. iKtifir/Vf iMuroy ^Kciro ; tKturBovt iKtivBrjv ; iKtifitBa^
€K€UrBtt iK€ivro,
Future. KctVofiatj regular.
Note. Dialects. Homer has Ktarai, Ktiarai, and Ktovrah for
xcivrat; kcVkcto for exctro; kcoto and Ktiaro for (tccivro; subj. x^rm.
Hdt. has Kstrai, KttaBai^ and cxccro, for xetrat, &c.; and always Kiarai
and fKtaTo for KcIiTat and Ukuvto.
VII. OlSa (stem tS-), Awow.
(078a is a second perfect of the stem i8- : see c7Sov in Cata-
logue and § 12.5, 4).
SECOND PERFECT.
hidicative.
oI8a
olvOa
)t8c
5'-
Sing. •<2.
(s.
Infimtive. ciSci/ai.
Dual
Plnr.
{trrov
toTOV
tore
ta-9o\
Subjunctive.
t\ZA
kc.
regular.
Optative.
clScliiv
cl8<fT|
&c.
regular
Imperative.
Ur9i
CVTW
Cirrov
COTTMV
tVTf
Xtrrttauy
Participle, ci&o?, ctSvia, clSof,
gen. c(5oro9, ctSvias (§ 68).
[1 127.
1 127.]
V£RBS IN MI.
179
lOrfaro
sing.
1. ^8«iv or ]g8t)
2. ^8«M^ or ^o^
48«t or ^t
8. iU^(v) or ^8t|
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
Dual,
{8<iTov or ijloTov
^£ti|v or ffrrr\v
Plural.
f{8<i|Mv or i|i<nMV
fjSchTf or fi<rT<
^8<otiv or ficav
Future. curo/Aat, &c.) regular. Verbal Adj. Uttmv.
Note. The Ionic occasionally has the regular forms oljUas, oiia-
Hfv, otdao-i; and very often tdficv for ivfuv. Ionic fui. tldfjtrat (rare
in Attic).
Ionic §dta, jfitt, jjfitaTft Horn. fftiHris, fftiiij, icravt in pluperfect.
The Attic poets have^dr/i«v and fjitr* (like fjdtaav).
Horn, tuiofitv, &c. for tlbofxtv in subj. ; id/icvat and idfifv in infiu. ;
livia for tlivia in the participle.
Aeolic trrti for ?ot« in imperative.
Doric (iravrt for ttrcurc see itra/it. ^z
Cata-
i i.
UUMUBSM.
■■HI
nmm
PART III.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
'>\<n
':' I
i' r
§ 128* 1. (Simple and Compound Words.) A simple word
is formed from a single stem ; as Ao'yos (stem Acy-), speech,
ypd<lnii (ypa<^-), write. A compound word is formed by com-
bining two or more stems ; as A,oyo-ypa</>os (Aoyo-, ypa0-) ,
writer of speeches.
2. ( Verbals and Denominatives.) (a) When a noun or
adjective is formed directly from a root (§ 32, Note), or from
a stem which appears as the stem of a verb, it is called a ver-
bal or primitive ; as apx;^ (stem apxa-), beginning., formed from
"PX"' stem of ap;((o; ypa^eus (ypa<^£V-), writer, ypa^i's (ypa<fnS-),
style (for writing), ypapp-q (ypappa- for ypa<fi-pa), line, (3, N.
2), ypdppn (ypafxpaT-), written document, ypatfuKo^ (ypa</>tKo-),
ai/e ^o write, all from ypa<f>-, stem of ypatfuo, write; 7rotr/-Ti/s,
/?oe< (ma^er), Trooy-o-is, poesy, iroirj-pa, poem, iroirj-TiKoq, able to
make, from Trotc-, stem of Trou'to, make: so Siki; (SiKa-), justice,
from the root 8tK-, Ka/co?, 5a</, from KaK-. See § 128, 3.
(b) When a noun, adjective, or verb is formed from the
stem of a noun or adjective, it is called a denominative or
derivative; as /SacriXcia, kingdom, from /3am\€(v)' (§ 53, 3,
N. 1) ; apxaioq, ancient, from dpxa- (stem of apxq) ; BiKaio-
a-vvr}, justice, from SiKaio- ', npd-o), honor, from Tifia-, stem of
the noun rifirj.
§ 128.]
FORMATION OF WORDS.
181
)m the
live or
53, 3,
SlKttlO"
em of
No IK. The name verbal is applied to the primitive words in (ft) be-
cause f;encrany their root or stem actually occurs as a verb stem. This,
howevtr, does not show that the noun (or adjective) is derived from the
verb, but merely tlu"* both have the same root or stem.^ The name applies
even to nouns or adjectives derived from a verb stem which is itself derived
from a noun stem (2, &); as ouXip-^Jj, flute-player, from av\e-, the stem of
%i\iu, play the flute ; the latter, however, is formed from tlie stbm of
niJXA-s, flute {% 130, N. 2).
3. {Suffixes.) Roots or stems arc developed into new stems
by the addition of S3'nables (not themselves stems) called
suffixes. Thus in § 128, 2, final a- in dp;(a-, tv in ypa^ev-, ih-
in ypaff}tS-y jxa- in ypafifia-^ fiar- in ypafifxaT-, iko- in ypa<f>iKO-j
&c. are suffixes.
NoTK 1. Barely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical witb the
verb stem ; as in ^liXa^, a guard, from stem <pv\aK-, seen also in ^uXdo-ffw,
I guard {%10S, IV.).
Note 2. The final lonsonant of a stem is subject to the same euphonic
changes before a suffix as before an ending (§ 16); as in ypdfi-fm for ypatp-
IM (§ 16, 3), X^^ts for Xe7-(rts (§ 16, 2), St/caff-TiJj for SikoS-tt/s (§ 16, 1).
Note 3. A final vowel ot the stem may be contracted with a vowel of
the suffix; as in d/jxoios, ancient, from dpxa- and to-s (§ 129, 12). But
such a vowel u sometimes dropped, as in ovpdv-toi, heavenly, from ovpavo-
and to-s, /SactX tfcds, kingly, from /3a(rtXe(u)- and tfco-s. The vowel is some-
times changed : especially from o to e in denominative verbs (§130, N. 2),
as in ot/c^-w, dwelt (oI<co-s, house), — cf. oUi-Tits, house-servant, and olKfiot
(oiVe-tos, § 129, 12), domestic ; — sometimes from o to w, as in (7TpoT»ii-T7/s,
soldier {arpaTia-), "SiKeXub-rrjs, Sicilian (StKcXia-).
Note 4. Many vowel stems (especially verb stems) lengthen their final
vowel l)efore a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (§ 109, 1); as Troi-n-im,
TTofTj-ffts, irotTj-Ttfcos, Totij-Ti)?, fiom TTOtf-. Many add a before p. and of a
suffix, as in the perfect and aorist passive (§ 109, 2); as KeXev-a-r-ffi, com-
tnander, K4\ev-ff-pu, command, from /ceXeu- («Xci5w), KeK4\€v-<r-p.ai.
Note 5. Tn many verbal nouns and adjectives, especially those in os
and 7), the interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified,
as it is in the second perfect (§ 109, 3). A change of e to o is especially
common. Thus XiJ^tj, forgetfulness, from \S.e- (cf. XAi?^a); yovoi, offspring,
from 7ei'- (cf. 7^oi'o); Xot7r6s, remaining, from Xitt- (cf. XAoitto); ffropyr],
affection, from ffrtpy- (d. (ffropya); iropiri), sending, from irepir- (of. ni-
irop<f>a, § 109, 3, N. 2); rpdiroi, turn, from rpeir-; ^X6f, flame, gen. 0X07-
6s, fromV^e7-. So also in adverbs; see ctuX-XiJ/S-Stji', § 129, 18, {b).
1 The root
oped into a noun
Ypa<f>- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel-
_j an, adjective, or verb. By adding a it becomes 7 o0a-, the
stem of the noun 7pa0Tj, atvriting, which stem is modified by cacc-endiugs
to ypai>a-t, ypa<f>d-i, &c. (§ 45, 2, Note). By adding or e (the so-called
connecting vowel, § 112, 4) it is developed into ypa<po{e)-, the full form of
the present stem of the verb ypdtfxo, urite, which is modified by personal
endings to ypdfpo-pLfv, we write, ypd^e-rt, you write, &c.
182
FORMATION OF WORDS.
l§ 129.
FORMATION OB^ SIMPLE WORDS.
I. — NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND ADVERBS.
§ 129. The chief suffixes by which the stems of nouus,
atljeetives, and adverbs are formed are as follows : —
NOUNS.
1. The simplest and most common suffixes are o- (nom. os or ov)
and o- (nom. a or i;). Nouns thus formed have a great variety of
meanings; as Xoyo-s (Xoy-o-), speech, from Xcy- (stem of Xty«, § 128,
3, N. 5) ; fidx-Ti (fiax-a-)» ^«"'^' *^'^"^ ^OX" (^^^"^ ^^ /*axo/iat, Jiyht) ;
rponos, turn, from rpcn- (stem of Tpena, turn) ; aroXos, expedition.
a-To\fi, equipment, from orcX- (stem of o-reXXai, send).
2. (Agent.) The followhig suffixes denote the agent in verbals,
and the person concerned with anything m denominatives : —
(a) €v- (nom. evs) : ypa(l>-fv-s, writer, from ypa(fi- (ypd(f><a); yov-fv-s,
parent, from yfi*-; imr-ev-s, horseman, from 11:110- (mtttos); irop6fi-ev-s,
ferryman (iropOfios, ferry). See § 128, 3, Notes 3 and 5.
Note. A few nouns in eu$ have feminines in etS (with recessive accent,
§ 25, 1, N.); &s paalXeia, queen (cf. 3, N. 2).
(i) TT|p- (nom. T^p): aairrip, saviour, from o-w- (o-oxo, o-tb^w, sawe).
Top- (nom. Tap): pfirap, orator, from ^f- (ep«a>, ep<3, *'Aa// say).
ra- (nom. Ti;t): wotijr^f, /Joe< (wia^er), from iroif- (iroiia); opxrj-
oTTji, dancer, from opxe- (opxfopai, dance) ; liriroTTfs, horseman, from
iTTjr*- (tWTTOf, hon:e).
To these correspond the following feminine forms : —
TCipa- (nom. retpa) : o-wre tpa, fem. of cr<i>r^p.
rpia- (nom. rpta): iroif^Tpia, jwetess ; opxTjorpia, dancing-girl.
Tpi8- (nom. TpU): 6pxr)(TTpis, dancing-girl, gen. -I'fioy.
T18- (nom. Tis): irpo<f>fJTis, prophetess ; oiKerii, female servant.
Note. Verbals in rrfp and rpis are oxytone : those in riop, rpia, and
reipa have recessive accent (§ 25, 1, N.).
3. (ilcf/on). These suffixes denote action (in verbals only): —
Ti- (nom. Ttf, fem.): irla-ns, belief, from md- (irfidta, believe).
o-i- (nom. ais, fem.) : Xv-irtr, loosing, from Xw- (Xva>).
<ria- (nom. aia, fem.); dotcipa-aia, testing, (8oKipd(<a, test).
410- (nom. tuis, masc): anaa-pos, spasm (aird-at, draw, § 128, 3, N. 4).
and
S 129.]
FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
183
Note 1. The suffix fia- (uom. /jli), fern.) has the same force as simple
a- (§ 129, 1); as yvdbfiy], kmwlcdyc (yvo-), T6\firi, daring (roX/to-), 68/* jj,
odar (6j^u, 6d-).
NoTK 2. From stems iu ei; (ef) of verbs iu evw come nouns iu c^a de-
noting action ; as paffiXela, kingly power, kingdom, naideia, edtication (of.
2, a, Note).
4. (Result.) These suffixes denote the result of an action (in
verbals only) : —
jiaT- (noni. fia, neut.) : irpay-fia, thing, act, from irpdy (Trpdaaat;
do); pijfia, sayiny (tliiny said), from ^e- (fut. epa); TfiTJ-na, section,
gen. TfifjuaTos, from r/xe-, re/i- (ripvut, cut).
««r- (nom. as, neut.) : \dxos (XaxfO"-), lot, from Xa;(- (Xayxavo, gain
by lot)] e6os (Jdea-), custom, from id- (euoda, am accustomed); ytvos
(yevta-), race, from yei/- (yeyova, § 128, 3, N. 5).
Note. Denominatives in os (stem in ea-), denote quality (see 7).
5. (^Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by
rpo- (nom. rpov, Latin trum) : apo-rpov, plough, aratrum, from apo-
(apoa, plough) ; Xv-rpou, ransom, from Xu- (Xvco) ; Xov-rpoi', bath, from
\ov- (Xovo, wash).
NorE. The feminine in rpa sometimes denotes an instrument, as X''''P«»
earthen pot, from x"- (x^'»'» pour); ^i-ff-rpa, scraper, from ^u- (f«;w, scro/w) ;
sometimes other relations, e.g. place, as vaXal-ff-rpa, place for wrestling,
from iraXat- (iraKalw, wrestle, § 109, 2).
6. {Place.) This is denoted by these suffixes: —
Tf|pio- (uom. Tfjpiop, only verbals) : 8iKa(T-Trjpiov, court-house, from
diKad- (biKa^oi, Judge).
€10- (nom. €101', only denom.): Kovpeiov, barber\<t shop, from kov-
ptv-s, barber; so Xoy-flov (Xdyos), speaking-place, JAova-dov (MoOcra),
haunt of the Muses.
«v- (nom. av, masc, only denom.) : dvbpav, men's apartment, from
dv{]p, gen. avbp-6s, man ; dpireXatv, vineyard, from HfineXos, vine.
7. (Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjective
stems by these suffixes : —
TTjT- (nom. TTji, fem.): i/ed-n^s (yeorrjT-), youth, from vfo-s, young ;
lao-TTjs (t(roTt)T-), equality, from to-o-p, equal (cf. Latin Veritas, gen.
veri-tatis, virtus, gen. vir-tUtis).
rvva- (nom. avprj, fem.): 8iKaio-(rvur}, Justice, from dUaio-s, Just ;
aoi<f>pn-(rvini, continence, from aatPpotv (crox^pov-) , continent.
la- (nom. ta, fem.): ao(f>-ta, wisdom (<To(f)6s), KaKia, vice (tcaKor),
d^fjOeta, truth, from aXij^co-- (dXi;tf^9, true). See Note,
fnom.
OS,
4).
.): rax-or, sjoeet/ (raxys, sm/l), fidp-os,
weight i^pvs, heavy). See § 128, 3, N. 3; § 129, 4, Note.
184
FORMATION OF WORDS.
r§ 129.
Note. Adjective stems in e<r- drop a (§ 16, 4, N.), and those m oo
drop before the suHix la ; as in dX^^eta (above), and eiipoia, good-will, from
evvoo-s, edvovs.
8. (Diminutives). These are formed from noun stems by the fol-
iQwing suffixes : —
10- (nom. lop, neut.) : naid-iou, little chUd, from n-atfi- (naii, child);
*ci/7r-tov, little garden (k^ttos). Sometimes also i8io-, apio-, v8pio- wXXio-
(aJl with nom. in to..); oIk-18iop, little house (o?koO; irmb-dpiovjittle
child; fie\-v8piov, little song (/xcXos); in-vXKiov, little verse, versicle,
Latin versiculus (?7ros). Here final ta- of the stem is dropped.
MTKo- (nom. iaKov, mase.) and mtku- (nom. iaKT], fem.) : Tratfito-Kor,
young boy, TraidiaKt), young girl; so ueauia-Kos, vfaviaKtj.
Note. Diminutives sometimes express endearment, and sometimes mi-
tempt : as irarplSioP, papa {iraT7,p, father), -LuKparlSiov, Eipiirldiov.
9. (Patronymics.) These denote descent from a parent or ances-
tor (generally a father), and are formed from proper names by the
following suffixes : —
8a- (nom. 8tjs, masc. parox.) and 8- (nom. s for 8i, fem. oxy-
tone) ; after a consonant i8o- and i8- (nom. i8r}s and t*r).
(a) Stems of the first declension (in a) add 8a- and 8- directly;
as Bopea-ai;y; son of Boreas, and Bo/)€£i-r, gen. Bopfd-8os, daughter of
Boreas, from Boptas, Boreas.
(b) Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add i8a-
and i8-\ as Upuip-i8r)s, son of Priam, npiap-is, gen. npiapi8ot, daugh-
ter of Priam, from Upiapo-s. Except those in to-, which change o to
a, making nominatives in ta8j/f and tar; as eeortafijys and efortdr,
son and daughter of Thestius (eeVno-y).
(c) Stems of the third declension add i8a- and i8-, those in ev
dropping v before t ; as Kf Kpoir-idris, son (or descendant) of Cccrofts,
KfKporr-t'y, gen. i8oi, daughter of Cecrops, from KfKpoyjr, gen. KcKpon-
or; *ATpfi8r)s (Horn. *ATpft8?;s), son o/ ylfrews, from 'Arpfu-y, gen.
'Arpe'-wy; nf/Xctdt;^ (Hom. Ur/XftSi/p), .son o/ Peleus, from n?;XfiI-s,
gen. n};Xe-b>r, Hom. also Il^XntdSrjf, as if from a form TItiXtjios (/>).
Note. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix lov- or Cwv-
(nom. f«v); as Kpoviwv, gen. Kpoutwvos or Kpovfovoi (to suit the metre), son
of Kronos {Kpbvo-i).
10. (Gentiles.) These designate a person as belonging to some
country or toion, and are formed by the following suffixes: —
€v- (nom. (vi, masc.) : ^Eperpuvs, Eretrian ('Eperpta) ; Meyapevr,
Megarian (Meyapa, pi.) ; KoXavfvs, of Colonos (KoXavo-i).
ra- (nom. njs, masc. parox.): Teyea-rijs, of Teyea (Teyea), 'Httw-
pw-Ti/f, of Epirus (*H7rf tpop), StfcfXtai-n;;, Sicilian (StxrAia). See
§ 128, 3, N. 3.
,
r§ 129.
>se in 00
nil, from
the fol-
, child) ;
I-, vXXio*
lov, little
versicle,
id.
aibia-KoSf
imes con-
>r ances-
3 by the
m. oxy-
directly ;
ighter of
add tda-
, (laugh-
|nge o to
©fOTtaf,
se in f«
^ecrojtSj
I KfKpOTT-
\s, gen.
IrjXfv-s,
\os (/')•
or Cwv-
tre), so)t
some
iyapfvs,
'HTrei-
See
§ 129.]
FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
185
Note. Feminine stems in i8- (nom. /s, gen. ISos) correspond to mascu-
lines in «u-; as Meyap/j, Mcyarian woman; and feminines in ti8- (nom.
Tis, gen. TiSoj), to masculines in to-, as ^ikcXiu-tis, SicUian woman.
ADJliCTIVES.
11. The simplest suffixes by which adjectives (like nouns) are
formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom. masc. os; fem. i;, a,
or Off ; neut. ov) \ (ro(f>-6s, o-oc^ij, <ro(f>6u, loise ; kuk-os, bad ; 'Kom-os, re-
maining (XtTT-, XoiTT-, § 128, 3, N. 5).
12. Adjectives signifying helonghig or related in any way to a per-
son or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix lo- (nom. tot) :
ovpdv-ios, heavenly (ovpavo-i), oiKeios, domestic (see § 128, JJ, N. 3), 8i-
Kaios,just (8iKa-), 'Adrjvaios, Athenian (^^Adrjvai, stem 'Adr)m-).
13. (a) Verbals denoting ahility or ftneas are formed by iko-
(nom. tKo'f), sometimes tiko- (tikos)'. dpx-KOi, Jit to rule (apx(o),
ypa(f>iK6s, capable of writing ov painting (y/jd<^a>), /3oi;Xfv-Tt«cds, able to
ad rise (fiovXevm), vpaK-TtKos, Jit for action (practical), from irpny-
(7rpdo"<ro)) .
(b) Denominatives thus formed denote relation, like adjectives in
loi (12); TToXf/x-iKor, of war, warlike (noXtpos), /3aatX-t<cdp, kingly (/3a-
viKfvs), <^v(tik6s, natural ((fivais)'
14. Adjectives denoting material are formed by vo- (nom. ti/or,
proparox.), as \id-ivos, of stone (Xidos); — and co- (nom. fos, contr.
ovi), as )(ptnTfos, xpva-ovst golden (^pva-os).
Note. Adjectives in ip6i (oxytone) denote tivie, as lapiv6s, vernal {tap,
spring), PVKrepivdi, by night {v6^, niglit, v^Krepos, by night).
15. Those denoting ftdness (chiefly poetic) are formed by tvr-
(nom. eis, fo-o-a, f v) ; xapitu, graceful (^dpts), gen. ^^apifi/roj; vX^«f,
woody; Latin gratiosus, silvosus.
16. Inclination or tendency is expressed by jiov- (nom. potv, pov) ;
pvTjpoiv, mindful (pvTjprj, memory), rXTj-puv, enduring (rXtio), endure),
inCKriapav, forget ful {\ad-, \avBavu>).
17. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by va-
rious suffixes besides the simple o- (11), as vo-, Xo, po-, no-, or 0-1^0-,
all with nom. in op; co-- with nom. in j;f, fj. Some of these are dis-
tinguished by an active or a passive meaning; as 8fiXd? timid, 8ft-
vdff, terrible, (Set-, fear) ; sometimes the same adjective has both
senses ; as <f>o^€p6s, frightful and afraid.
Adjectives in r}s are generally compounds (§ 131, 6); a few are
simple, as ylrtv8-ris, false.
Note. For verbal adjective in tos and reoi, see § 117, 3.
186
FORMATION OF WORDS.
[§ 130.
!^
\ i'^
ADVEKUS.
18. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives, as is explained in
§§74,75.
Adverbs may bs formed also from the stems of nouns or verbs
by the followirig suffixes : —
(a) Stfv (or 8d), t|86v : ava-<^av-b6v, openly (ava-(t>aiu(i>, <j>av-)y poet,
also dva<f>avbd', Kwrfdov, like a dog {kixov, gen. kvv6s).
(Ji) Bijv or d8T|v : Kpv^-8t)v, secretly (Kpvmw, conceal) ; i/vXX^/3-di;i/,
collectively (avXXa/i/3avo>, Xa/3-, § 128, 3, N. 5) ; aTrop-dSrjv, scatteredly
{anflpa, soiv, scatter, stem arntp-) ; dve-^iyv, profusely (ai-irjpi, let out,
stem €-).
(c) tC : uvofuur-Ti, by name (ovofidCot, § 16, 1) ; ikXtjvia-Ti, in Greek
((X\r)vi((a).
See also the local endings di, dtv, be, &c., § 61.
II. DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
§ 130* A verb whose stem is derived fron^ the stem of a
noun or adjective is called a denominative (§ 128, 2, h). The
following are the principal teinninations of such verbs in the
present indicative active : —
1. Hm (stem in a-): rt/tido), honor, from noun ri/iij (ripa-), honor.
2. cttf (e-): dpidp.fa», count, from dptOpos, number (Note 2).
3. 0(1) (o-) : finrdooi, let for hire, from piado-s, pay.
4. (vw (ev) : ^aaiKevto, be king, from ffaaiXev-s, king.
5. outfit (a8-): 8iKdC<o, Judge, from SIkt} (Siko-), justice.
6. i|(« (tS-): fXmCci, hope, from iXnlt (eXirtS-), Ao/>e.
7. aivw (dv-): rrqfuiiva), signify, from ai}pa (aT)paT-), sign.
8. vvu (vv-) : i^St^i/o), sweeten, from ^8y-r, .swce^
For the relations of the present to the simple stem, see § 108.
Note 1. Desiderative verbs, expressing a desire to do anything, are
sometimes formed from other verbs and from nouns by the ending ffeiu (stem
in <r«-), sometimes aw or taw (a- or ta-); as 5pa-<refw, desire to do (S/od-w);
yeXa-ffelw, desire to laugh (7c\d-w); ^oc-dw, be blood-thirsty (<p6voi); kXou-
(T-tdw, desire to vxcp (K\afw, stem /cXou-), § 128, 3, N. 4.
Note 2. The final letter or syllable of the stem from which a denomina-
tive verb is formed is specially subject to modification (§ 128, 3, N. 3). Thus
many verbs in ew come from stems in o, as 0t\^-w, love (0/Xo-s). Some come
from stems in -ea (§ 62, 1), dropping ea ; as evrvxeu, be fortunate, from
euTvxvi {ei>Tvxi<T-), fortunate.
the
<» are
"JsteiM
Jd-w);
icXou-
liina-
come
Ifroiii
§ 131.]
COMPOUND WORDS.
187
Note 3. Verbs formed from the same noun stem with different <iid-
inj;s .sometimes liav(( <lilferent meanings ; as TroXc/xew and (poetic^ TroXc^iffw,
make war, iroXefiow, make hostile, both from TriXe/io-j, tear ; SovXow, en-
slave, SovXeuw, be a slave, from 8ov\o-s, slave.
COMPOUND WORDS.
§ 131. In a compound word we have to consider (a) the
first part of the compound, (6) the last part, and (c) the mean-
ing of the whole.
Remark. The modifications which are necessary when a compound con
sists of more than two parts will suggest themselves at once.
(A.) First Part of a Compound Word.
1. l^hen the first part of a compound is a noun or adjec-
tive, onl}' its stem appears in the compound.
Before a consonant, stems of the first declension generall}*
change final u to o ; those of the second declension retain o ;
and those of the third add o. Before a vowel, stems of the
first and second declensions drop a or o. E.g.
QaXatrao-KpaTOip {da\a(r<Ta-) , ru^"rofthe sea, xopo-dtScio-KaXos {xopo-)\
chorus-teacher, iraido-rpi^Tfs (TratS-), trainer of bof/s (in gymnastics),
KfffidK-a'Kyrfi (Kc^aXa-), causing headache, xop-rjyos (xopo-), (orig.)
chorus-director : so t\$vo-(lidyos (Jx^v-), Jish-eatcr, (fivaio-XAyos, enquir-
ing into nature.
Note. There are many exceptions. Sometimes t] takes the place of o ;
as x^V-^^po^ (xoVi libation), bringer of libatimis, 6Xa07;-)36Xos (^Xa^o-s),
deer-slayer. Stems in €<i (§ 52, 1) often change €<t to o ; as Tctxo-/itax^a
(retxeff-), wall-fighting. The stems of raus, ship, and /3oO$, ox, generally
appear without change (vav- and ^ov-); as rau-^uax^o, sea-fight, ^ov-KdXoi,
herdsman. Sometimes a noun appears in one of its cases, as if it were a
distinct word ; as vetiff-otKos, ship-house, vaval-ropos, traversed by ships.
2. Compounds of which the first part is a verb are chiefly
poetic.
(a.) Here the verb stem sometimes appears without change
before a vowel, and with c, i, or o added before a conso-
nant. E.g.
TltlOapxos, obedient to authority ; fifv-e-Trroktfios, steadfast in hat-
tie ; apx-i-TtKnav, master-builder ; \nr-6-yanos, )uurriage-leaoing (adul-
terous) .
f ;
188
FORMATION OF WORDS.
[§131.
(A) Sometimes a is added to the verb stem (generally <ti
before a consonant). JH.ff.
liXrf^-mnos (»rXi;y-), horse-lashing; \v(riiTovos, toil-relieulng ; arpt-
yjri-diKos la-rpe^f-), j'tti^ice-tivistiny ; rcp^i-foor {T€f»r-)t soul-delightiny.
3. A preposition or an adverb may be the first part of a
compound word ; as in irpo-fiuWu), throw before, dci-Xoyia, con-
U'nual talking, cv-yevij?, well-born. But no clianges in form occu r
in these, except wlicn a final vowel is elided (§ 12, 2), or when
irpo contracts o with a following « or o into ov, as in irpovx*^
{wpo, cx<^), h(dd before; Tr,-):)vpyov {irpi), tpyov), forward, <fipov8o<i
{irpo, 68ds), gone (cf. § 1 7, 2. Note). Kui)honie changes occur
here as usual ; as in cyxojpio? (eV and x*^V"» § 16, 5).
4. The following inseparable particles are used only as
prefixes : —
(a) av- (a- before a consonant), called nlpJia privative, with a
nej^ative force, like English ww-, Latin in-. It is prefixed to
noun, adjective, and verb stems, with which it generally forms
adjectives ; as diz-cXcutfcpos, unfree, dv-aiSrJs, shameless, av-6fioio^,
unlike^ a-7r«is, childless, a-ypa<fiO<:, unwritten, a-^cos, godless.
(6) hva; ill (opposed to cv, well), denoting difficulty or
trouble ; as hva-iropo^, hard to pass (opposed to €v-iropo<i) ; Bva-
rvx-q*;, unfortunate (opposed to €i)-Tvxq<i).
(c) vTf- (Latin we), a poetic negative prefix ; as v>y-7roii/o5,
unavenged; vrj-p-eprrj^, unerring.
(d) yjfiL- (Latin semi-) , half; as r]fii-0€o<i, demigod.
Note 1. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry, — dpi-, e/ot-, Sa-,
fa-, as ipl-yvuTOi, well-known ; Sa-(l>oiv6i, bloody.
Note 2. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting tcnion) ; as
in d-\oxos, bedfellow (from Xex^s).
(B.) Last Part op a Compound Word.
5. At the beginning of the last part of a compound noun
or adjective, a, e, or o (unless it is lengthened by position) is
generally lengthened to 17 or w. Kg.
2TpaT-r}y6s (orparfj-p, oyo)), general; im-^Koos (yiro, aKoCto), obe-
dient* KaT-Tipt<f>fis (^Kard, «p€<f}a>), covered ; iir-oivvpos (tirl, Svofm), nam-
ing or named for; KaT-r)yopoi (Kara, and stem of dyopA), accuser. (See
§ 12, 2.)
[§131.
illy <"
; oTpc
htintj.
t of a
a, con-
i occur
I- vvlicn
Trpov\(o
jipovbo^
i occur
>nly as
with a
ixed to
y forms
ulty or
; hv(T-
-TTOIVOS,
ept-, Sa-,
u'oJi); as
§ 132.]
COMPOUND WOKDS.
189
d noun
tion) is
1*0)), o6f-
la), nam-
r. (See
6. The last part of a compound noun or adjective may be
changed in form when a suffix is added (§ 129). This takes
place especially in compound adjectives, and when an abstract
noun forms the last part of a compound noun. E.g.
some
^Xd-T(/AOf {TipTi), honor-looiny ; iroXv-Trpdyfiav (n-poy/ia), ineddle-
le ; avT-apKffs (avros, apK(<a, sujfice), selj-sufficient ; av-ai,br]i (jalbio-
pai), shameless, KaKo-Tj6tjs (^Bos)y ill-disposed; — \ido-^o\ia (\idos,
(ioXfj), slone-lhrowiny , vav-paxia (yavs, M^X"?)' sea-Jiyht.
Compound adjectives in i;s are especially frequent (§ 129, 17).
Note. An ahstiact noun compounded with a prepo«ition may retain
its form ; as vpo-^ovX-n, forethought.
7. A compound verb can be formed directly only by prefix-
ing a preposition to a verb ; as 7rpoo--ayw, bring to. Indirect
compounds (denominatives) are formed from compound nouns
or adjectives, which themselves may be compounded in various
ways. £.g.
Aido^oXtio, throw stones, denom. from \i6o-^6\ost stone-thrower;
Kanjyop(<i>, accuse, from Kar-riyopoi, accuser (cf. 5). See § 105,
1, N. 2.
(C.) Meaning of Compounds.
§ 182. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three
classes, distinguished by the relation of the parts of the com-
pound to each other and to the whole.
1. Objective compounds are those composed of a noun and
a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the noun stands to
the other part in some relation (commonly that of object) which
could be expressed b}' an oblique case of the noun. E.g.
Aoyo-ypa(f)os, speech-writer (\6yovs ypdtfxav) ; ptc-dvdptoTrov, man-
hating (pi<rQ)v dvdpciiTovi) ; arpar-rjyos, qeneral (arinif-leadiny, aTparov
aya>v) ; d^id-Xoyoff, worth}! of mention (li^ioi \6yov) ; Apapr-i-voos, erriny
in mind (Apapriiiu uov) ; lao-dfos, godlil'e (twos otto) ; Tfpir-i-Kepavvosy de-
lighting in thunder (repnopevos Kepavv^) \ 8to-Tpc<f)f)s, reared by Zens
(cf. du-^trffs, fallen or sent from Zeus, and Au-rpe^^y, a proper name).
So with a preposition : (y-xotpiot, native (ei/ t^ X<^P?) > <<^-tWtoy, be-
longing on a horse (e^* itttto)).
Note. "When the last part of an objective compound is a transitive ver-
bal in OS formed by the suffix o- (§ 129, 1 ), it qjenprnlly accents the ponnlt
if this is short, otherwise the last syllable. But if the last part is iutrau-
190
FORMATION OF WORDS.
[§ 132.
1^
sitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. Thus \oyo'ypd<f>ot,
speech-writer; \t0o-p6\ot, thrower of stones, but \id6-po\ot, pelted with
stones ; firirpo'KTdvot, matricide, matncidal ; ffTpaT-riy6s, general ; \oyo-
iroi6t, story-maker.
2. Determinative compounds are nouns or adjectives in
which the first part, generally as adjective or adverb, quali-
fies (or determines) the second part. E.g.
'A*cpd-7roXtf, citadel (dxpa TrdXtr); ftf<r-T)fjifipia (fttari ^fitpa, § 14, 2,
N. 1), mid-day; y^tvio-fiavris^ false prophet ; 6fx6-fiov\os, fellotv-slarc
(ofiov BovKiiitov) ; 8va-nadT}s, learning with difficulty ; taKvirtTris, swift-
Jiying ; dfi(f>i-6«aTpov, amphitheatre (theatre extending all round);
ti-ypa(f>os, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like /zeXt-i/dijf (fjbvs),
honey-sweet, 'Aprfi-Boos, swift as Ares (Ares-swlfi).
Note. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative,
made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of the
two things or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like an
adjective or adverb. Such are larpd-fMuns, physician-pi'opliet (a prophet
who is also a. physician); ^i<f>o-fidxo-ipo., swwd-sabre ; iuSp6-iraii, man-child;
yXvKii-iriKpoi, sweetly bitter ; ded-ravpot (of Zeus changed to a bull).
3. Possessive or cUtributive compounds are adjectives in which
the first part qualifies the second (as in determinatives), and
the whole denotes a quality or attribute belonging to some
person or thing. E.g.
*Apyvp6-To^os, with silver how {dtpyvpovv t6^ov fxmp) ; KaKo-baipxov,
ill-fated (kokou 8aifiova «\civ)', iriKpo-yafios, wretchedly married (iriKpif
yaftov ex*"") i op.6-vop.oi, having the same laws; exaroy-«cc<^aXor, hundred-
headed; 8«Ka-«Tr}s, of ten years (duration); ayado-tarjs, having the
appearance (et8os) of good ; fv-6eoi, inspired (having God within) ;
oMW-novs, swijl-fooled (atK€ls noSas «\<ov), — but iro8-a>Ki)i (irodas mKvs),
foot-swifl, is a determinative.
Remark. In corripound verbs, the original verb remains the funda-
mental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition prefixed.
Other compounds than those here mentioned present no difficulties in re-
spect to meaning.
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
DEFINITIONS.
funda-
brefixeil.
in re-
§ 183. !• Every sentence must contain two parts, a
subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which
something is stated. The predicate is that which is
stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence Aap€Lo<i
^aa-iXevcL, Darius is king, Aapem is the subject and
^a<ri\€V€i is the predicate.
Note 1. When any part of dfti, be, connects the subject with a
following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i. e. means
of coupiuKj), and what follows is called the predicate; as Aaprldr
eWi /3a<rtX€ur, Darius is king, SoXcui/ «oTt a-o0df, Solon is wise, where
tari is the copula. (See § 136, Rem.)
Et/it, however, can form a complete predicate, as in tlal deal, Gods
exist
Note 2. The simple subject and predicate may each be modified
by additional words or clauses ; as Ktipos, aKovaas h ehev, el<r^\dfv
«ts rffv TToXiv, Ci/rus, on hearing what he said, went into the city, where
Kvpos, uKotxras & tinfv, is the modified subject, and the rest is the
modified predicate.
2. That upon which the action of a verb is exerted is
called the object. The object may be either direct or
indirect : thus, in cBcokc tA '^(^prjfiara tw avhpl, he gave the
money to the nun, xpijfjuiTa is the direct object and dvBpl
is the indirect (or remote') object.
»■ »r.tr ' •
lf)2
SYNTAX.
[§ 134.
Note. Some verbs, called iramilivc, generally need the addition
of an object to complete the sense. Others, called intransitive , admit
no such addition ; as dnfjXdoVf I departed.
;
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
SUBJECT.
§ 134. 1. The subject of a finite verb is in the nomi-
native ; as 6 dvTjp ^\dev, the 7nan came.
A verb in ajinite mood is called a finite verb (§ 89).
2. The subject of the infinitive mood is in the ac-
cusative ; as Xeyovtrc tou? dvhpa<i airekduv, they say that
the men went away.
3. But the subject of the infinitive is generally omitted
when it is the same as the subject or the object of the
leading verb ; as ^ovXerai direXdelu, he wishes to go away ;
<l>rj<Tl ypd<f)€ii', he says that he is writing ; irapaivovfiev
<TOL fieveiv, we advise you to remain.
So when it is the same with any important adjunct of the lead-
ing verb ; as KOKovpyov iarX Kpidfvr dnodavfiu, it is like a malefactor to
die by sentence of the law (§ 138, N. 8, i).
Note 1. The subject nominative of the first or second person is
omitted, except when special emphasis is required. (See foot-note,
page 143.)
The nominative of the third person is omitted : —
(a) When it is expressed or implied in the context ;
(b) When it is a general word for perse ns; as Xtyovai, they say,
it is said ;
(c) When it is indefinite; as in o>^e riv, it was late; KaXms (xti, it is
well ; hriKoi, it is evident (the case shows') : so in the impersonal con-
struction with the verbal in reov, as in Treiareov («*ot1) to vofuo, we
must obey the law (^ 281, 2).
(d) When the verb implies its own subject, as Krjpva-aei, the her-
ald (KTJpv^) proclaims, (aaXniy^f, the trumpeter sounded the trutnpet,
KcoiXvei, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like rrapea-Ktv-
aarai fioi, preparation has been made by me (7 am prepared), like ven-
tum est in Latin, the subject is really the idea of preparation^ &c.
contained in the verb. See § 198.
f 135.1
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
193
(c) With verbs like {/ft, it ram.i, dcrrpdnrct, it liyhtem, trtiu, there ia
an eurl/uiuc':c (it shakes), where, however, 8ome subject like Ztiit or
6t6s was originally HUpplied.
NoTK 2. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infini-
tive or a sentence as tlieir subject. These are called impersonal verbs.
Such are nptntt and n-poo-^xci, it is proper, ivtari and iitari, it is possi-
ble, boKti, it seems yoou, avufiaivti, it happens, and the like ; as f^fffriu
ifiiv TovTo iromv, it is in your power to do this (to do this is possible /or
l/ou). 8o also d(i and xp^^ i- <^ required, we ouaht; as del hpai aitiK-
0tiv, we must yo away (hero, however, the infinitive might be consid-
ered an object, and d*l and xp^ might be classed under Note 1 (c) ;
cf. § 17-J, N. 2).
'he name impersonal is applied with still greater propriety
(though less frequently) to the verbs included in (c) and (</) of
Note 1.
ey say,
[ei, it is
il con-
^fia, we
le her-
\umpet,
|ve oen-
\fn, &C>
Subject Nominative and Verb.
§ 135. !• A verb agrees with its subject nominative
in number and person ; as (€70)) Xcyo), / «a^, outo? \ey€i,
this man nays^ oi dvhpe<i Xeyovaiv, the men say.
2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regularly
takes a singular verb ; as ravra iyevero, these things hap-
pened^ ra olKrjpbara CTrea-ev, the buildings fell. So dBv-
paru €<TTi (or oZvvaTov €<tti), it is impossible.
But exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting
persons. Several are found in Xenopnon.
3. A singular collective noun may take a plural verb ;
as TO ifKrjdo^ iyfrr)<l>LaavTo TToXefieiv, the majority voted
for war.
Note 1. When several subjects are connected by and, they gen-
erally have a plural verb. But the verb often agrees with one of
the subjects (generally the nearest), and is understood with the
rest. 'The latter generally happens when they are connected by or
or nor. E.y.
Svfi(fia>vovfiev eya Ktii vfifii, I and you ayree : trocfto) tyto kqi ai) ^fi(v,
I ami you were wise ; koI av Ka\ ol abf\<f)o). itapriaTf, hnih you and your
brothers were present. 'E/me ovre Kaipos . . . our' AttIs oi/rc KJiojios
oijT 3.XK0 ov8(V eirfjpfu.
13
194
SYNTAX.
[§ 136.
if I
Note 2. ff the subiects are of different persons, the verb is in
the first person rather than the second, and in the second rather than
the third. (See examples under N. 1.)
Note 3. A verb in the dual may follow two subjects in the sin-
gular, or even a plural subject denoting two persons or things. But
even a subject in the dual may have a verb in the plural. (See II.
iv. 453; v. 10, 275; xvi. 218.)
Note 4. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nomina-
tive; as aj \oprfyiai Uauov evdainouias arffteiov ifrriv^ the payments
for choruses are a sufficient sign of prosperity.
Note 5. Rarely a singular verb has a masculine or feminine sub-
ject in the plural; as tort hi firra ordStot 4^ *A/3v8ou ti rrfv diravriov,
and there is a distance of^even stades from Abydos to the opposite coast.
In such cases the subject follows the verb, and its plural form seems
to have arisen from an afterthought.
See also the phrases eariu ot, &c. , § 152, N. 2.
PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE.
§ 136. With verbs signifying to he^ to become^ to ap-
pear^ to be named., chosen^ considered., and the like, a
noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same case as
the subject. E.g.
Otroi eoTt ^atTiKfvs, this man is king; 'AXe^avSpor Oeos avofid-
CfTo, Alexander was named a God ; ^pidtf a-TpaTrjyos, he luas chosen
general ; fj noXis (f)povpiov Karearrfy the city became a fortress; oStos
ftrrw fvBaipatv, this man is happy; ff nokis /icyoXi; fytvfTo, the city be-
came great ; tiS^rjTai ptyas, he has grown {to be) great.
Remark. The verbs which are here included with the copula
flpi (§ 133, 1, N. 1) are called, copulative verbs. The predicate
nominative with the passive verbs of this class represents the predi-
cate accusative of the active construction (§ 166).
Note 1. The predicate adject ice agrees with the subject in gen-
der and number as well as in case (§ 138, Remark).
Note 2. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusa-
tive expressed (§ 134, 2) is in the accusative; as 'SovXerai t6u viou
(Ivai <ro(f}6v, he wishes his son to be wise. So when the participle is
used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 280) ; as tjdfaav t6v
Kvpov fiaaiXfa yepofitpov, they knew that Cyrus had become king.
Note 3. (a) When the subject of dpai or of a copulative infini-
tive is omitted because it refers to the same person or thing as a
[§ 136.
b is in
sr than
he sin-
. But
See II.
omina-
lyments
lie sub-
te coast.
11 seems
to ap-
Like, a
jase as
(ovofia-
is chosen
\s ; oItos
city be-
copiila
redicate
|e predi-
in gen-
1 accusa-
\t6u viov
Iciple is
faau Tov
cing.
infini-
kig as a
§ 137.]
APPOSITION.
195
nominative, genitive, or dative connected with the leading verb
(§ 134, 3), a predicate noun or adjective which belongs to the omit-
ted suljject is generally assimilated in case to the precediiig nomina-
tive, genitive, or dative. But it may stand in the accusative instead
of being assimilated to a genitive or rlative ; especially a predicate
noun is very seldom assimilated to a genitive. E.g.
(Norn.) BoOXcrat tro^us (ivat, he wishes to be wise ; 6 *AXe^av8pos
(<f)aarK(v (ivai Atos vtos, Alexander asserted that he was a son of Zeus.
(^Gen.) Kvpov eSeoi/ro i)s TrpoBvfioTdrov ytvtadai, they asked
Cyrus to he as deoo'ed to them as possible ; but (with a noun) *A^-
paiiau «8trj6rj(rav axjiai ^otjdovs yevevdai, they asked the Athenians to
become their helpers.
(Dat.) vvu aoit^fOTiu dv8p\ yf Vf<r6ai, it is now in your power to
show yourself a man; irpiitfi aoi dvat jrpodvfia, it becomes you to lie
zealous; but also avn(f)(pti avrols (f>i\ovs eluai, it is for their interest
to befriends.
(b) So when a participle (in any case) represents the leading
verD,and its noun the leading subject; as ^\dop eiri riva rav 8okovu-
Ta)v (ipai iro(f)S>v, I went to one of those who seemed to be wise ttoXXoi
Toil' npofmoiijcrapfvtov etr:u <ro(f)i<rT(iiv^ many of those who professed to
be sophists. 8o rots 8oKoii(riv icivat ero^otv.
Note 4. The same principle (N. 3) applies to the predicate of
av or of the participle of a copulative verb; as rj8((rav ao<f)o\ om-a,
they knew that they were wise (but t)8(aav rovrovi ao0oi»s ovrai, they
knew that tisse men were wise). See Note 2.
Note 5. For the application of the same piiucipic to all adjective wort's
which refer to the omitted subject of an infinitive, sec § 15*8, N. 8.
APPOSITION.
§ 137. A noun annexed to another noun to describe
it, and denoting the same person or thing, igrees with it
in case. This is called apposition. E.g.
Aapf (or 6 /SacriXrur, Darius the king. 'Ad^vai, ptyakTj noKis, A thens^
a great city. 'Yfiat roiis <ro<l>ovs, you, the wise ones. 'iip.iau rutv ^Adrj-
vaiciv, of us, the Athenians. QtpiaroKKfjs fJKto (sc. «yw), / Themisto-
cles am come. ^CS.riaioi koi Amav oi 'A;^ato:, Philesius and Lycon, the
Achaeans.
Note 1. Possessive pronouns and adjectives may have a geni-
tive in apposition with a genitive which they imply; as 6 tpos tov
ToXatTrwpov (iioi, the life <>/' ine. miserable one ; ^AOrjPoioi &v, TroXctur rrjs
ptyifTTtft, being {a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city. So ra vp,€Ttpa
avrwy (for ra vftav avT&v), your own (§ 147, N. 4).
196
SYNTAX.
[§ 338.
Note 2. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive
(§ 168) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts,
especially when the latter include the lohole of the former; 3s oiKiai
ai fieu TToWai ncirrviKtaav, oKiyai 8e irfpi^a-au, most of the houses hud
fallen, hut a few remained (where we might have rSiv oIkiwv). So ov-
Toi aXKoi «XXo Xcyet. This is called partitive apposition.
Note 3. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence,
being in the nominative or accusative as it is more closely con-
nected in thought with the subject or with the object of the sen-
tence; as Keivrat netrovrfs, Trt'orTtr oii aynKpa TroXet, thetf lie prostrate, —
no small (cause of) con/idence to the city : 'EXeurju Kravtofiev. MfveXfo)
XviTTjv iriKpdv, let us kill Helen, {which ivill be) a bitter yricf to Menelaus.
NoTK 4. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the
object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as lirnoi tjyovro
Oiifiara to 'HX(^, horses were brouyht as oJferin</s to the Sun (in
active, iinrovs aytiv Bvnara, to bring horses as offerings); avpfiaxovs
e^fts Btovs, you will haoe Gods as allies. So rvxtip rivos <^tXou, to
(jain some one as a friend : )(p(i)fiai rovrto (f)i'\<o, I treat him us u friend.
So Ttvoy dtSao-KaXoi ^Kcre ; as teachers of what are you come / See ,
§ 166, Note 2. V
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
§ 138. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender,
number, and case. This applies also to the article and
to adjective pionouns and participles. E.g.
*0 (Tu(f>6s duT]p, the wise moii ; tov aocbov dvbpos, toJ a-o(f)oi uv8pi, top
a-o<f>bv avdpa, twi/ o"o0o)i/ dvbpoiv, &c. Ovtos 6 dvi]p, this man ; tovtov
TOV dv8p6i, TOVTtav Twv dvdpSiP. At npo tov (TTOfiaTos prjes vcivp.axovfrai,
the ships enyatjed in buttle before the mouth {of the harbor). It includes
predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case of which has
already been considered (§ 136) ; as ai apivTai doKoiaai tlvai (f)i(T(is,
the natures which seem to be best.
Rkmakk. The adjective maybe either attributice ov predicate.
An attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter-
vention of a verb (like all the adjectives above, except apiaTai). The
predicate adjective may be connected with its noun by the copula
(§ 133, 1, N. 1), or by a copulative verb (§ 136); as 6 dvrjp dyados
(<TTip, the man is yood : KoKflrai dyadof, he is called yood : or it may
stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of dpi;
as TTTTfpas 8ia)K(is Tas (KniSai, you are pursut.ty hopes which are winycd
(i.e. hopes being winged) ; dBdparop tj]v pPTjprjp KaToikfi'^ovaip, immortal is
the )nemory they will leave behind them (i.e. tt^v pvi)pr}p ovaav dOdparov);
noifi Tovs Mt'jiovs dardfpfls, he makes the Males {'o hi) weak (§ 166).
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with respect to
the articlp \ see § 142, 3, and the examples.
§ 138.]
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
19?
ov-
'/
Note 1. (a) An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns
generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, ami is
understood with the rest; as t6v ayaBitv av8pa koi yvvalKa, the f/ood
man and icoman ; iravri Ka\ Aoyw kuX firj^avrj, by ecery word and de-
vice.
(b) But such an adjective is occasionally plural if it belongs to
several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two; as (Ta>cf)p6v(ou tWi
Kai du8p6i Koi yvvaiKos oilro) Troieii/, it is the part of prudent (persons),
bi.th men and women, thus to do.
Note 2. (a) A. predicate adjective is regularly plura. if it be-
longs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to tw«. ]f the
nouns are of different genders, the adjective is connnonly masculine
if one of the nouns denotes a male person, and connnonly neuter if
all denote things. Thus, eiBt nartpa re koi p.r]Tfpa koi d8€\(f>ovs koi
Tf)V eavroO yvvaiKa ai\p.a\(i)Tovs ytytuqfifvovs, he saw that both his
father and his mother, his brothers, and his own wife had been made
captives : noXefios kqI ardais 6\fdpia rais noXfaiv (ariv, war and fac-
tion are destructive to states.
(b) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of
the nearest or most prominejit noun; as npoppi^os aiiros, f) yvufj, to.
naiSia, dnokoifirjv, may I perish root and branch, myself, my wife, my
children.
(c) A predicate adjective is sometimes neuter, being used like a
noun (§ 139), even when its noun is masculine or feminine; as
KaXov f) d\T)6(ia, a beautiful thiny is truth.
Note 3. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons
may take a plural 7)a?*//o//>/e ; as Tpot'ai/ iXovres 'ApyetW aroXos, the
Argices^ army hariny taken Troy.
Note 4. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the
grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person ; as qjiXt TfKvov, dear
child !
Note 5. The masculine form of the dual is very often used for
the feminine in adjective pronouns and the article; as roOrw tw rixva,
thes". two arts. Especially rare are the feminines tq, ravra.
Note 0. Avo, tico, is often used with a plural noun. "Oo-o-e, the
eyes, and Sovpe, two spears, in Homer, may have plm-al adjectives.
Note 7. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we should
great distinction between the adjective and the adverb; as npoirot
avrnos (i8ou, I was the first to see them : TrpwTouy avrovs (J8ov, they
were the first whom I saw: npStrov (adv.) avTot-y udov, first (of all
thp' " did) 7 saw them.
198
SYNTAX.
[§ 139.
Note 8. (a) Wlien the subject of an infiiiitive is omitted be-
cause it refers to the same jHirson or thing as a nominative, geni-
tive, or dative connected with the leading verb (if 134, 3), adjectives,
adjective pronouns, and participles which belong to the omitted sub-
ject are generally assimilated in case to the preceding nominative,
genitive, or dative; but they sometimes stand in the accusative
(agreeing with the omitted subject) instead of the genitive or da-
tive, rarely instead of the nominative. This occurs chiefly in the
predicate of tivai, or of a copulative verb; for the usage in such
cases and for examples, see § 136, Note 3.
(6) With the infinitives of other verbs, the assimilation of an ad-
jective to a subject nominative is regular and very rarely neglected ;
after a genitive, assimilation seldom (if ever) occurs, and the accusa-
tive is regular ; after a dative either the dative or the accusative may
be used. E.g.
(^Nom.) Ovx ofivkoyrffTUi aK\i]Tos TJKfiv, I shall not admit that I am
come unbidden ; uvk f(f)rj auros, d\X fKtlvov aTparqyeiv, he said that not
(he) himself, but he (Nicias) was general ; he said oiiK (tyw) avros
(uT liorrfya}) dXX' tKfivos orpuTi^yft, ofvros being adjective (§ 145, 1) and
cKflvos substantive.
(Dat.) edo^fu avToii avaKevaaanfuots a (i)(ov Koi e^oTrXicra/Lic-
vois npoUpai, they decided to pack up what the// had and arm themselves
completely, and to advance (A nab. ii. 1, 2); but eBo^tv avrols 7rpo<f)v-
\aKas Kama rrf a auras o-vyKoKflu roiis o'TpaTKaras, they decided to
station pickets and to assemble the soldiers (ib. iii. 2, 1) ; in i. 2, we
find two datives and an accusative.
(Accus. for Gen.) KOKOvpyov eari Kpi0 fur* dnoOavelv, vrparqyov
de fiaxofitvov toU iroXffxiois, it is like a malefactor to die by the sen-
tence of a court, but like a f/eneral (to die) fghting the enemy ; fifupai
ifiav fiefjLVTffifvovi riov flpTffifvtov ra bUaui ^r}(^i(Ta<T6ai, I beg of you
to remember what has been said, and to vote what is just.
Acljectlve used ag a Noun.
si i
§ 139* 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the
article, may be used as a noun ; as o hUaioq, the just man ;
6 ixOp6<i, the enemy ; <fiLKo<i, a friend : Kaicq^ a base woman ; to
piiTov or pio'ov^ the middle ; ol KaKoi^ the bad ; rots dya^ots, to the
good; rCtv KpuTovvnav, of those in power ; Ka^d, evils; ra Ovrp-d,
mortal things; ol ypu\f/dfi€voi X<i)KpdTr)v, the accusers of Socrates
(§276,2).
Note. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; as t^ vart-
pai^ (sc. vftepa), on the next day.
139.
§ 140.]
THE ARTICLE.
199
2. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is
often used as an abstract noun ; as to Kakov, beauty (= kolX-
Aos) » TO ^iKaiov, justice (= SiKaioa-vvrj) .
Note. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasion-
ally thus used for the infinitive, which is a verbal noun; as to dt-
8i6s,feai' (= to ScSuVai) ; eV tw /x^ /xeXcTuin-t, »?i the not practising
(= cVt^ nfi fitXtrav); both in Thucydides. So in Latin, opus est
maturato, there is need of haste.
THE ARTICLE.
sen-
VOTC
Homeric Use of the Article.
§ 140. In the oldest Greek (as in Homer) the arti-
cle appears generally as a demonstrative or personal pro-
noun, sometimes as a relative. U.g.
T^v 8* (yut ov Xvo-o), hut I will not free her; rov 8e xXve $o^^or 'AirdX-
\av, and Phoebus Apollo heard him ; 6 yap ^\6f Boas eVt v^as ^AxaiStv,
for he came, &c. As relative, nvpa ttoXXo to Kaiero, many fires which
were burning ; 8a>pa to ^8o>Kav, gijts which they gave.
Note 1. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as
nouns (§ 139, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek ; as oi yap apiaroi
f'u vrfv&iv KfOTM, for the bravest sit in the ships ; oi aXXot, the others ; to
T eovra to r eaopeva, both things that are and things that are to be.
Note 2. (a) When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it
is generally a piououn, with which the noun is in apposition; as
6 8' e^paxf xo^ffOf^Api/f, and he, brazen Ares, roared ; ^ 8' dUova
apa To'ia-i yvufi kUv, and she, the woman, went with them unwilling.
(h) Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these :
aiiTup 6 Toio-t yf'poiu 686u fjyfpoufvfv, but he, the old man, showed them
the way; rov o olov miTtp' flpov, and they found him, the father, alone.
(c) Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is
that found in examples like these : ore 8^ Tr}v p^a-ov a(f>iK€To, when
now he came to the island ; to t€ trdevos *Qpi<opos, and the might oj
Orion ; at dc yvpa'iKts laTapevai davpa(pv, and the ivomen stood and
wondered.
(d) It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an
article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual transi-
tion, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true definite
article.
200
SYNTAX.
141.
Note 3. The examples in Note 2 (c) are exceptional; and in such
cases the nouns usually stand without the article in llonjer, as in
Latin. Thus dcivfj 8e KXayyt) yevtr apyvptoto /Stolo would in Attic
Greek require 7 kKayy^ and tov /3toi) (§ 141).
Note 4. Herodotus generally vlpc- the forms of the article be-
ginning with T in the place of the ordinary relative, — of which he
uses only the forms oc, 17, ot, and m, except after prepositions. Thus
&pvis ipos, T^ oCuofia ^aiiui^, a sacred bird, whose name is Phoenix. In
other respects, he uses the article as it is used in Attic prose.
Note 5. The Lyric poets follow the Homeric usage with respect
to the article more closely than Herodotus ; and the Attic poets, espe-
cially in the lyric chorus, admit Homeric uses.
Attic Use of the Article.
!
li
§ 141. In Attic Greek the article generally cor-
responds to the English definite article the; as 6 dv^p,
the man; rcov TroXeayu, of the cities; TOL<i '' EWrjaiv, to the
Greeks.
Note 1. The Greek uses the article in certain cases in which the
English generally omits it. Such are the following: —
(a) Proper names may take the article ; as 6 SoiKpdn/r or ScoK^a-
Ti;ff, Socrates.
(b) Abstract nouns very often take the article ; as fi dperfi, virtue,
fi BiKaioavvTf, justice ; 17 tvXd^fia, caution. But ciperi;, &c. are also used
in the same sense.
(c) Nouns qualijlied by a demonstrative or possessive pronoun
regularly take the article ; as oItos 6 dvljp, this man ; 6 tpos irarrfp, my
father; irepi rrjs fifierepas iroXeas, about our state. (See § 142, 4.) So
with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a personal, demonstra-
tive, or reflexive pronoun depends; as 6 Trar^p pov, mi/ father; 6 ipav
TOV rrarfip, my own father (§ 142, 1, Note) ; 6 Tovr'av ttot^p, (heir
father.
(d) ToiovTos, ToaovTos, roidabf, roo-oo-Sf, and TrjXiKovros may take
the article ; as tov toiovtov ap8pa, such a man. It is always used with
dctra, such a one.
Note 2. The article is sometimes used, where we use a posses-
sive pronoun, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing
mentioned in the sentence ; as ep^eTai MauBdvri irpos t6i/ iranpat Man-
dane comes to her father (lit. to ''^e father).
Note 3. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar
expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an
I
§ 142.]
THE ARTICLE.
201
cor-
■h
attributive adjective; as ol t6t€ avdpairoi, the men of that time : rov
TfuKai KtiS/iov, of ancient Cudinuf ; oi iv Moret 'A^i^i/mot, the Athenians in
the city.
Here a noun denoting men or thinys is often omitted; as oI ev
ooTfi, those in the city ; rois rore, to those of that time ; oi dfiffn IlXa-
Toiva, those about Plato (generally Plato and his school, or simply
Plato).
Note 4. The nouns yrj, land, irpayfiara, things or affairs, vlos,
son, and sometimes other nouns which are readily suggested by the
context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjec-
tive or genitive is added; as €ts rqv eavrwu (sc. yrjv), to their oivn
land; fK Ttjs TrtpioiKiBos, from the neiyhboriny country : to rrjs TroKfas,
the affairs of the state ; liepiKKrjs oSavdiirTrov (sc. vlos), Pericles, the son
of Xanthippus ; ttju raxiorrjv (so. 686v), the (piickesl way. Expressions
like ra ttjs Toxrfs, to t^s opyrjt, with no definite nouns understood,
sometimes do not differ from Tvxt], Fortune, and opyfj, wrath.
Note 5. Instead of repeating a noun with new adjuncts in the
same sentence, it is sufficient to repeat its article; as ot t&v TroXiTotv
iraiBes Ka\ oi rStv aKKav, the children of the citizens and those of the
others.
.'■*
Note 6. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (§ 258), may take a
neuter article ; as to ddtvat, the knowing ; cro\ to fifj a-iyrjcrai "Koiiriiv ^v,
it remained for you not to be silent.
Note 7. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole
clause considered as a noun; as Toyviodi a-avrov vravraxov Vrt xpT
aifiov, the saying ^'■know thyself ^^ is everywhere useful.
Note 8. A predicate noun seldom has the article; as vv^ tj
^fitpa eyfU€To, the day became night ; oItoi dai KaKitTTot, dvdpdnrav, these
are the worst of men. But when the predicate refers definitely to
distinct individuals, it may have the article ; as f iVi fi* ovtoi oi el86-
res ToKrjdfs ; and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ?
Position of the Article.
§ 142, 1. An attributive adjective which qualifies a
noun with the article commonly stands between the arti-
cle and the noun ; as 6 a-o(f>o'i avrjp, the wise man ; twv
fieyaXcov iroXewv, of the great cities.
The position of such an adjective with reference to the article
(with the two modifications mentioned in 2) is called the attributive
position, as opposed to the predicate position (see 3).
I!
¥' :i
<
l\
V i
1)
I'
U I
1 *.
i
202
SYNTAX.
[§ 142.
Note. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions
which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre-
ceded by tlie article (§ 141, N. 3), and to dependent genitives (ex-
cept purtifices and the genitive of the personal pronoun) ; as 6 tfios
n-ar^p, nil/ father ; 17 a^ Mt^p, thy mother ; 6 efiavrov naTtjp, my own
father ; ol tv aarfi HvBpanroi, the men in the city ; oi8(\s rav totc 'EXXij-
i/cDi*, none of the (ireeka of that time ; to t^ ovti yj/ddoi, the real false-
hood ; fls T^v fKfivuv TTokiv, into their city; ol tchv Qrj^aifou aTparrjyoi,
the generals of the Thebans (2, N. 2). For participles, see 2, N. 5.
Two or even three articles may thus stand together; as rL t^j
T«v TToXXcoi/ V/wx^* Sppara, the eyes of the soul of the multitude.
2. The article together with any of these qualifying
expressions may follow the noun, in which case the noun
itself may have another article before it. £.ff.
'O dvfip 6 aoffios, or dv^p 6 ao<l)6s, the wise man (not, however, 6 dv^p
ao(j>6s, see § 142, 3 ; ai noXetr ai 8r)poKpaTovpfvai, the states which are
under democracies ; avdpamoi 01 tore, the men of that time; irpos ddiKiav
TTftf iiKpaTov, with regard to pure injustice.
Kfmakk. Of the three attributive positions, the first {e.g. 6 ao<l>bs dvi^p)
is the most con;:r.on and the most sim[>le and natural ; the second (6 dvrfp
6 aoipos) is t^e most formal ; the third (di'rjp 6 ao<p6i) is the least common,
esjwcially in the more careful prose writers.
Note 1. The article at the beginning of a clause may be sepa-
rated from its noun by piv, hi, ri, ye, yap, br), and sometimes by other
words.
Note 2. The partitive genitive (§ 168) rarely stands in either of
the positions here mentioned, but either precedes or follows the gov-
erning noun and its article, like a predicate; as ol kokoI tuv itoXitwv,
or tS>v TToXiTotv oi kokoi, the bad among the citizens (rarely oi tuv ttoXi-
Tav KOKoi). Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occu
yionally have this position, as tup iraXaiav ff <f>t\o(ro(f>ia, the phdosophy
of the ancients.
Note 3.
oi oKKoi, the others : as i; ,
Xii. another state); oi aXXot "EXXi^vfj, the other Greeks. Both 6 nXXos
and a\\os (rarely erepos) may have the meaning of besides; as €v8at-
poviCoptpos imo tS>v n-oXirmj/ tcai tuv aWiav $fv<ov, congratulated by the
citizens and the foreigners besides; ov yap rjv \opTbi ovhe aWo hiv-
8pov, for there was no grass nor any tree either (lit. any other tree).
(b) UoXvi with the article generally (though not always) means
the greater part, especially in oi ttoXXo/, the multitude, the majority,
and tA ttoXv, the greater part. So oi irKeiopts, the majority, to irXelop,
the greater part, oi n-Xficrrot and to irKflarop, the greatest number or
part.
(a) 'O tiWos generally means the rest, seldom the other:
thers : as f) oXXi; 7roX»f, the rest of the state (but 3XXi; tto-
§ 142.]
THE ARTICLE.
203
NoTK 4. When a noun has two or more (]ualifving words, each
of them may take an article and stand in either ot the above posi-
tions (1 or 2), or all may stand between one article and its noun ; as
fj 'ATTiKr) f) iraKata (fxapt), the ancient Attic speech: to T(i\ri ra iavrav
ra fMKpd, their own long walls ; tntititov ds rav aXXat 'ApKubiKas rroXtts,
they sent to the other Arcadian cities; t) vn 'Aper^t 'HpaKXtovs naidev-
ais, the instruction of Hercules by Virtue. Occasionally one stands
between the article and the noun, while another follows the noun
without an article ; as rj iv fid^^rj |vft/9oXi) ^aptta.
Note 5 When an attributive participle (§ 138) with dependent
words qualifies a noun with the article, either the participle or the
dependent words may follow the noun ; as t6u piovra irorapov 8ia t^9
TTuXfttv, the river which runs through the city ; ^ iv t« ^aBpa tnifiout)
yfvofifvri, the delay which occurred at the Isthmus, but such expres-
sions may also take either of the positions 1 or 2.
"T Note 6. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, tuv Ev-
<ltpdTTiv iTOTap.6vt &c., rather than the river Euphrates. So sometimes
with names of mountains (rarely with those of cities or islands).
3. When an adjective either precedes the article, or
follows the noun without taking an article, it forms a
predicate, and some part of eifxi., be, is implied (§ 138,
Remark). E.g-.
'O difffp ao(f)6s or (ro<j)us 6 dvfip (sc. iariv), the man in wise, or wise is
the man : ttoXXoi oi iravovpyoi, many are the evil-doers : ecprjpfpovs ye
Tas Tvxas KfKTrjpeOa, ice possess our fortunes for a day (sc. ovaas).
The predicate force of such adjectives can^ often be expressed by
a periphrasis ; as toIs \6yois Ppaxvrepois fxpriro, the words which he
used ivere shorter, lit. he used the words (being) .shorter; fiyovvro avrovo-
fiu)v rav ^vppaxiav, they presided over their allies (being) independent,
i.e. the allies over whom they presided loere independent. So -noaov ayti
fo arpdrtviia; how great is the army which he is bringing? § 138, Rem.
The position of such an adjective with reference to the article is
called the predicate position.
4. When a demonstrative pronoun qualifies a noun with
the article, it takes the position of a predicate adjective (3),
and either precedes the article or follows the noun. E.g.
OvTos 6 dvTjp, this man, or 6 dvtjp otros (never o ovtos dvrip). Ilfpi
TovTuiv Tuiu ■noKfoiv, about these cities.
Note 1. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added,
the demonstrative may stand between this arid its noun, contrary to
the rule ; as jj trrevii avrt} oboQ, this narrow road : t^ d<f>iKOfiev<f rovry
^cvcj>, to this stranger who has come. See Note 3 (b).
204
SYNTAX.
[§ 143.
IM
Note 2. "EKatrros, ittartpoi, tifKfia), and dfi(f)nT€pos have the predi-
cate position (3), like a dt'nion.strative; but with fKuaros the article
may oe omitted. TotoOror, TotroCror, ToiotrSt, roaoade. and ri^XiKovror,
when they take the article, have the attributive position (1).
Note 3. (a) A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun
(whether partitive or not) has the predicate position (3), while thiat of
other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the attributive position
(1) ; as fjftav fj TToXtf or ^ n6\is fjfiap, our city (not f) i^/xcov TroXir);
^ TovT(ou noXis, these men\'i city (not f) irSKn tovt(ov) ; fierfn-c^x/^aro
'AoTvdyTjs TTjv iavTov Ovyaripa Koi top nalSa avrfjs, Asly ayes sent for
his oivn daughter and her son.
(b) But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may
stand between this and the r.oun ; as 17 BoKoiJtTa f)fi(op nportpov
aa)<f)po(TvvTf, what previously seemed to he our modesty. See Note 1.
Note 4. The adjectives uKpoi, /ico-or, and (o-xaros, when they are
in the predicate position (3^, mean the top (or extremity), the middle,
the last., of the thing which their nouns denote ; as psat) i) dyopd,
the middle of the market (while fj pJat} dyopd would mean the middle
market) ; oKpa f} ;(« /p, the extremity of the hand.
The article here may be omitted entirely.
Note 5. Uds and avfinas, all, and oXor, whole, generally have the
predicate position ; as ndvrfs oi avdpfs or oi ap8pes Travrtr, all the m<n;
0X17 ff TToXtf or j; TToXts oXj;, all the city. But they can also be used like
attributive adjectives, pieceded by the article; as ij ivdaa StKfXta,
the luhole of Sicily, to oKop yipos, the entire race.
The distinction here was probably not greater than that between
all the city and the whole city in English. We find even 01 irdprts
TToXirai, the whole body of citizens.
Note G. Avtos as an intensive pronoun, i/?>", has the predicate
position ; as avros 6 dvrjp, the man himself. But o avrbs apm, the same
man (§ 79, 2).
Pronominal Article in Attic Greek.
§ 143. 1. In Attic prose the article retains its origi-
nal demonstrative force chiefly in the expression o fiiv
. . . 6 Be, the one . . . the other. E.g.
'O /X6i/ ovbkp, 6 8f TToXXa Kep8aipfi, one man gains nothing, another
gains much. Aft tovs fitp eivai dvirrvxf'is, tovs 8* tirvxeU, some juust be
unfortunate, and others fortunate, lav nokfap at p.(p rvpavpovprai, ai
8e 8r}p^KpaTovvTai, of states, some are governed by tyrants, others by
democracies.
§ 144.]
PRONOUNS.
205
Note 1. The neuter tA /icV ... to 5* may be used adverbially,
partly . . . partly. For toOto ^liu . . . tovto hi in this sense, see
§ 148, N. 4.
Note 2. 'O 8«, &c., sometimes means and he, hut he, &c., even
when no 6 fitu precedes : as ^Ivdpus 'A6r)vaiovs (nrjydytTo • oi di . . .
^\dov, Inarus called in Athenians ; and they came.
2. A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of
the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following : —
Top Koi top, this man and that ; to Ka\ to, this and that ; to Ka\ rd,
these and those ; as tbu yap t6 kqI to voi^aai, koi to fif) Trot^o-at, for
we oufjht to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the
other.
npo Tov (or TrpoToC), before this, formerly.
Kill TOV or Kai ttju, before an infinitive ; as koi tov KtXtvaai hovvai
(so. Xfyftai), and {it is said) he commanded him to yive it. Cyr.
i. 3, 9.
So occasionally Ty, therefore, which is common in Homer- .
PRONOUNS.
fiev
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 144. 1. The nominative of the personal pronouns
is seldom used, except for emphasis. (See § 134, N. 1.)
Note. The forms tpov, e/ioi, and tpe are more emphatic tlian
the enclitics pov, poi, pt. The latter seldom occur after prepositions,
except in np69 pt.
2. (fl) The pronouns of the third person, ou, ol, e,
<TJ>Siv, (T<j>L<TL., &c., when they are used in Attic prose, are
generally indirect reflexives., that is, in a dependent clause
(or joined with an infinitive or participle in the leadirg
clause) referring to the subject of the leading verb. E.g'.
^o^ovvrai pf) oi ^Adrfvaloi ai^laiv fTTfXdwaiv, they fear that the Athe-
nians may attack them ; (Btovro vpm> pt} (rd>as nepiopav <f)dfipopfvovs,
they begged yon not to see them destroyed. See § 79, 1, N. 1.
(/>) In Homer and Herodotus they are generally per-
sonal pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect)
reflexives. E.g'.
206
SYNTAX.
[§ H5.
*Ek yap at^ttov <t>ptvat ttXtro UaWas 'A^wj, for Pallas Athena herefl
them of their seniles (lloin.); avriM 6* ol tvdovrt tniaTti ovtipot, and
noon a dream came to him in his sleep (Ildt.).
§ 145. !• Avr6<i in all its cases may be an intensive
adjective pronoun, himself^ herse/f, itse/f, themse/veSy like
ipsi'. This is always its force in the nominative of all
numbers, except when it is preceded by the article and
means the same (§ 79, 2). E.g-.
Avrbg 6 aTparriy6s. the general himself; iit airots to'is uiytaXoIr,
on the very coasts ; tiruTrrffiri aiirfi, knowledge ilsttj. (See § 142, 4,
N. 6.)
Note. A pronoun with which avror agrees is often omitted; as
ravra tnoitiTt avroi (sc. vptis), you did this yourselves; ttXcvotcov cit
ravras avro'is tfi^aviv (sc. vpiv), you must sail, embarking on these
yourselves (in person). So avT6s il(f)r) (ipse dixit), himself (the master)
said it.
2. The oblique eases of auTo^i are the ordinary personal
pronouns of the third person. E.g\
Irparriyhv avrhv ambn^t, he designated him as general. See four
other examples in Xen. Anah. i. 1, 2 and 3.
For iMiv, piv, and (T<f)(, see § 79, 1, Notes 3 and 4.
Note. The oblique cases of avros are often used where the
indirect reflexives (§ 144, 2) might stand, and sometimes even where
the direct reflexives (§ 146) would be allowed; as &ir\w rfiv iavrov
yvatfirjv ant(^aivfTo ^aKpaTrfs irpos roiis ofiiKovvras ain^, Socrates used to
declare his own opinion plainly to those who conversed with him, where
01 might have been used (Xen. Mem. iv. 7, 1); but in i. 2, 3, we
have €\m((iv (iroiti roiis avvbuvrpi^ovrai iavr^. The union of an
intensive and a personal pronoun in aiiros explains this freedom of
usage.
I
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 146. The reflexive pronouns refer to the subject of
the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a de-
pendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading
verb, — i.e. they are indirect reflexives. E.^.
Tvui6i aavTov, know thyself : tnfa<f)a^€v iavrov, he slew himself ;
ra apuTTa fiovkevtaSe vplv avrois, take the best counsel for yourselves.
§147.]
PRONOfTys.
207
I
'O Tvnappot vofii(ti tovs noXirat imriptTtlv 'avrp, the tyrant think'n that
the cilizcns are fiis own servants. (See § i45, 2, Note.)
NoTK 1. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word
which is not the subject; as dv^ aavrov iyu> at dtdn^cD, / will teach
you from your own case {from yonrsalf). li; fact, these ])ronoiin.s
correspond almost exactly in their use to tlio English reflexives,
my self, thyself, himself, &c.
NoTK 2. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for
the first or second; as del fjfias ttfr/xVdai iavruvst we must ask our-
selves.
NoTK JJ. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal
(§81); bia\ty6fu6a fin'iv avTols, we discourse ivilh one (mother (i.e.
amony ourselves).
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 147. The possessive pronouns are generally equiva-
lent to the possessive genitive of the personal pronouns.
Thus 6 rjfiirepo^i Trarijp, ^ o Trarr^p r/fiwv, ovr father.
The possessive is regularly preceded by the ai iicle.
See § 107, 1; § 141, N. 1 (t); and below, N. 4.
NoTK 1. The possessive is occasionally equivalent to the objective
genitive of the personal pronoun ; as ^ cV") fvvoia, which commonly
means my good-will {towards others), rarely means good-will (shoiun)
to me.
NoTK 2. In Attic prose, a<^kTfpo9t their, is always (directly or
indirectly) reflexive, and oy, his, her, its, is not used at all. (See
§ 144, 2.)
NoTK 3. By the j^ssessivs pronouns and the possessive genitive
(§ 167, 1) the 'voius my father can he expressed in Greek in five
forms: 6 iyios irarfip, 6 irarfip 6 e/nos, irarrfp 6 ifjos (§ 142, 1, 2), 6 narrjp
ftov, and (after another word) fiov 6 iraTrjp (as rt^i; fiov 6 irarfip). So
o aos irarrjp, &c.
Note 4. Our own, your own (when your refers to more than one),
and their own are generally expressed by ^/icrrpov, vpirtpos, and
<T(f)fTfpos, with avTotv in apposition with fffiau, vfiav, or (r0a>i/ implied
in the possessive (§ 137, N. 1); as rov ffpertpou avTwu "naripa, our own
father; rtj vfitrtpa avroiv fujTpi, to your own mother; roiis <r(f)«Tfpovs
avTwv iralhas, their own children. In the third person (avrmv can be
used; as tovs iavratv rraidar (also o-0a>i/ avrav iraihus, without the
article) ; but very seldom ^/i<ui/ (or vp.Qtv) avrutv.
In the singular, expressions like rou ffx6v avTov irartpa for toi»
ifiavTov iraripa, &c. are poetic.
208
SYNTAX.
[§ 148.
1^
lit
DEMONSTRATIVE PliONOUNS.
§ 148, OuTo<i and oBe. this, generally refer to what
is near in place, time, or thought ; €Keivo<i, lliat, refers to
what is more remote.
Note 1. The distinction between oCros and o8e, both of which
correspond to our this, must be learned by practice. In the histo-
rians, ovTos (with roiovTos, roaovros, and ovToji) frequently refers to
a speech just made, while ode (with rotdo-de, roaotrdf, and S}8e) refers
to one about to be made; as rd^e ehrev, he spoke as follows, but ravra
flrrev, thus he spoke (said after the speech).
Note 2. Ovtos is sometimes an exclamation; as ovtos, tI nouls ;
You there! ichal are you doing?
Note 3. The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the
unemphatic demonstrative which is often used in English as the
antecedent of a relative, as 1 saw those ivho were present. Here a
participle with the aicicle is generally used ; as ei8ov tovs napovras ;
if a. demortstrative is used (^eldop tovtovs ol irap^trav, I saw these men
who were present), it has special emphasis (§ 152, N. 3). A relative
with omitted antece.icnt sometimes expresses the sense required; as
€i8o»' ovs fXaQev, I SMV (those) whom he look (§ 152).
Note 4. ToOtc- ;j.iu . . . tovto be, Jirst . . . secondly, partly . . .
partly, is used nearly in the sense of to fie'v . . . to 8« (§ 14ii, 1, N. 1),
especially by Herodotus.
For ouToo't, 6bL eKfivoai, oiiTtoal, a)6t, Uc, see § 83, N. 2.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
§ 149. 1. The interrogative 7 k ; who ? what ? may
be either substantive or adjective ; as Tiva<i elhou ; whom
did I see ? or rtVa? avhpa^ elhov ; what i.i€n did I see ?
2. Tl<: may be used both in direct and in indirect
questions; as tl ^ovXerai ; what does he want? epwTa W
^ovXecrde, he asks what you want (§ 241, 1).
In indirect questions, however, the relative ofrrtr is more common ;
as fpara o ri ^ovXtade.
Note, The same principles apply to the pronominal adjectives
^ noaoSi ■troios, &c. (§ 87. 1.)
§ 161.]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
209
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
§ lEO. The indefinite tU generally means somey any^
and may be either substantive or adjective ; as toOto
\e7et Tt9, some one says this ; avdpcoiro^ ti<;, some man.
It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a or an;
us elBov avOpwirov Tcva, I saw a certain man, or / saw a
man.
Note. Occasionally tIs means every one, 1'ke way tip; as d fitv
Ttf So/jv drj^daOoit let every one sharpen well his spear. Horn.
KELATIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 151. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender
and number ; but its case depends on the construction of
the clause in which it st inds. £(/.
E180U Toiis ii^8pas ot varepou ^\dov, I saiv the :nen who came after-
wards; o( avbpei ovi elbfi airrikdov, the men whom yon saw went away.
Note 1. The relative follows the person of the antecedent; as
i/L»<If ot toCto t. otetTf, you who do this ; eyw 6y tovto eiroirjaaf J who
did this.
Note 2. («) A relative referring to several antecedents follows
the rule given for predicate adjectives (§ 138, N. 2). It may be
plural if it refers to a collective noun (§ 138, N. 3) ; as to n-X^tfor
ointp diKaaovaiv, the multitude who will judge.
(h) On the other hand, oau?, whoever, may have a plural ante-
cedent ; as irdvra 5 rt (iovAovrai, everything, whatsoever they want.
Note 3. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes used
as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (^ 140); as koi ts ficvTOToy
^Xd(, and he came second; o yap ye pas earl Gavovrav, for thic is the
right of the dead.
A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the
Platonic ^ 8' 05, said he (where 7 is imperfect of fini, sayV So Ka\
or, and he, Ka\ ot, and they, and (in Herod.) 6s Ka\ or, this man and
that. ^Compare t6u koi t6u, § 143, 2.) So also hs fiiv . . . tn 8«, in
the oblique cases, may be used for 6 nh . . . 6 be.
Note 4. In tl.vi Epic and Lyric poets the enclitic tc is often
appended to relative words without affecting their meaning; as ovk
"^^
210
SYNTAX.
[§ 162.
dttis a re (ftrjai ; dost thou not perceive what he sm/s ? Sometimes it
seems t'^ make the relative more indefinite, like tis in oaris, whoever,
qtdcunujue.
But olos re in Attic Greek means aide, capable, like Swaros, being
originally elliptical for toiovtos olos, such as, and re having no
apparent force.
Omlgslon nf the Antecedent.
§ 152. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted
when it can easily be supplied from the context, especially
if it is indefinite (§ 229). Kg,
*EXa/3ei/ & €^oi\€To, he took what he wanted ; tiraOev orroaovs ebivaro,
he persuaded as many as he could ; A fi^ oi8a oiSe oMfxai flSevai, ivhat
I do not know I do not even think I know; ey© koI hp eyo) Kparat fievov-
fjLfv irapa vol, I and those whom I command will remain with you.
In such cases it is a mistake to .say that raOra, tKflvoi, &c. are
understood: see N. 3. The relative clause here really becomes a
substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself.
Note 1. Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antecedent;
as ^\3ev ore tovto tiBev, he carrn when he saw this (for then, when).
Note 2. The following expret^sions belong here: — corti/ ot,
some (§ 135, N. 5), more common than the regular ela-ip oi, sunt
qui, there are {those) who; evioi (from evi, = €v«m or fveiai, and ot),
some; eviore (evt and orf), sometimes: eariv o5, somewhere:
eariv jj, in some way ; ea-riv oiras,
somehow.
Note 3. When a clause containing a relative with omitted ante-
cedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a
demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted ante-
cedent ; as a (0ov\eTo ravra TKa^tv, what he wanted, that he took,
entirely different from ravra & tlSovXero tXa^fu. he took these (definite)
things, which he wanted: & notelv ai<T)(p6v, '.aiJra vofii^t fir)8e \fyfiv
tivai Ka\6u, what it is base to do, this believe Ihat it is not good even to say
(here ravra is not the antecedent of a, which is indefinite and is not
expressed). See § 148, N. 3.
Asslmtlatlon and Attraction.
§ 153. When a relative would naturally be in the
accusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimi-
lated to the case of its antecedent if i,his is a genitive or
dative. JE.g,
§ 154.]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
211
'Ek t&u Tr6\(a>v Syv ex«t, from the citiea tvkich he holds (for &s c^ft) ;
ToUdyaBois ols exo/ifi/, with the f/ood things which we have (lor a f^o-
fifv). This is often called attraction.
Note 1. When an antecedent is omitted which (if it could liave
been expressed) would liave been a genitive or dative, the assimila-
tion still takes place; and a preposition which would have belonged
to the antecedent passes over to the relative ; as €8i7Xo)(Te tovto ols
eirpoTTf, he showed this by what he did (like tVf tWs ci) ; avu ofs f\(o
ra oKpa KaraXrj^oiiat, 1 tcill seize the hei(/hts with the men whom J hare
(as if it weie avv rots dv^paaiv oty ^x^) '■< ov8(u S>v (iov\fcr6f Trpd^fTf,
yoH will do none of the things ichich you ivish (like fKflvuiv a). 8ee
§ 148, N. 3.
Note 2. A relative is very seldom assimilated fnwi any other
construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case
than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as S)u fjmaTci
TToX^ovf, many of those whom he distrusted (like fKfivmv ols)- Even Hie
nominative may be assimilated; a.fi ^XdnTfadm d<f> mv ffpluirapfOKfia-
arm, to he injured by what has been prepared hy us (like dn tKeivoiu d).
Thuc.
Note 3. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs ; as
dificofii^ovTo (v6vs o6(v vTTf^tOfVToTTaidas KoiyvvaiKas, they immedialcly
brouffht over their children and women from the places in which they ha*/
placed them for safety (where odev, from which, stands for (kuBcp of,
from the places whither). Thuc.
Note 4. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the case
of the relative, when this immediately follows ; as (\(yov on navTiou
SiP diovrai irfirpayoTfs erti/, they said that they had done all thinys which
they needed (vvheie iravTcnv l>v for navra S}v is very irregular).
This mjrr/e^/ r/.s'.s'/w^//«/<V>« takes place in ovdtis oans ov, ex'ery-
body, in which ovSds follows the case of the relative; as ovdtvi oTta
oiiK dnoKpiperat (for ovdfis tanv otcj), he replies to everybody.
Note 5. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions
with oios; as xopiCf<rBai oto) <rot dp8pi, to please a man like you (for
roiovT(p oios iTv).
§ 154. The antecedent is often attracted into the rela-
tive clause, and agrees with the relative. U.g.
M17 aKJifKricrdf vfioiv avTa>p ^p KtKTtfirdf 86^ap koKtjp, do not take
from yoiii'sclirs the yood reputation which you hare yained (for ttju
Ka\f)p 86^ap fjp K(KTT)adf): here notice the omission of Ihe article.
Even the subject of a verb may be attracted ; as oixerai (btvyap 6v
^yjf pdpTvpa, the witness whom you brought (for 6 fidprvs op ^y€f) has
run away.
Note. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (§ 153);
as diiadtaraTo'i (<tt€ hv eyw oi8a 'E\\r)vu)p you are 'he most ignorant of
212
SYNTAX.
[§ 165.
the Grrela wlwvi T know ; f| Jjs to rrpurov ta-xf yvvaiK6s, from the wife
which he took first ; avv jj d^f 8vpdfiti, with the force which he had
(for aiip TTj hvvdfiti Tjv (t^fv).
Relative In ExdamatlonS) Ste.
§ 155* Olo<i, 6ao<i, and o)? are used in exclamations ;
as 6 a a irpdy/xaTa e;^et<?, how much trouble you have!
<U9 a <r T e t o ?, how witty !
For the relative in indirect questions see § 149, 2.
Relative not repeated^
§ 156. A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in
the same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pro-
noun commonly takes its place. E.g.
'EKCivot rolvvv, ois ovk ixapi^ovff ol Xcyoirfff ou6* f(f)i\ovu avrovs
&anep vpas olroi uvv, those men, then, whom the orators did not try to
yratify, and whom they did not love as these now love you (lit. nor did
they love them as, &c.). Deni. Here avrolis is used to avoid repeating
the relative in a new case, ovs-
Note. Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is under-
stood in the latter part of a sentence ; as 'Apiaiot 8f, bv ^ptle fjdfXoptv
fiaaiKea Kadiardvai, Koi f8uKapfv kuI fXdjiopev TTtord, and Ariaeus,
whom we wished to make kiny, and Qo whom) we gave and (frojn
whom) we received pledges, &c. Xen.
THE CASES.
Remark. The Greek is descended from a language which had
3if/ht cases, — an ablative, a locative, and an instrumental, besides the
five found in Greek. The functions of the ablative were chiefly
absorbed by the genitive; those of the instrumental and locative
chiefly by the dative.
I. NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
§ 157. 1. The nominative is used chiefly as the sub-
ject of a finite verb (§ 134, 1), or in the predicate after
verbs signifying to be^ &c. (§ 136).
[§ 155.
§ 159.]
ACCUSATIVE.
213
2. The vocative, with or without w, is used in address-
ing a person or thing ; as & dvBpe<; ^Adrjvaloi, O men of
Athens ! aKovei^, Ala-x^vrf ; dost thou hear, Aeschines ?
Note. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations, and
even in other expressions, where the vocative is more common ; as
<»fiot eyo) bfCKos, O wretched me! So ij UpoKvr) fK^aiPf, Procne, come
out!
II. ACCUSATIVE.
Remark. The primary purjjose of the accusative is to denote the
nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or indirect
object denoted by the dative. It thus bears the same relation to a verb
which the genitive generally bears to a noun. The object denoted by the
accusative may be the external object of the action of a transitive verb, or
the internal (cognate) object which is often implied in the meaning of even
an intransitive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions,
as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other single
category.
Accusative of Direct CExternal> Object.
§ 158. The direct object of the action of a transitive
verb is put in the accusative ; as touto aco^ei ij/x-a?, this
preserves us; ravra iroiovfiev, we do these thing's.
Note 1. Many verbs which are transitive in English, and
govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in Greek.
(See § 171, § 184, 2, and § 188, 1, N. 2.)
Note 2. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransi-
tive in English ; as o/xoO/xat rovs deovs, I will swear hy the Gods ;
Train-as TKaQfv, he escaped the notice of all.
Note 3. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally
take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive
(§ 167, 3; § 180); as cVtori^/ioi/ef rjaav to 7rpo(ri7»coi/Ta, they were
act/uainted with what was proper. Xen. So to ^f rem pa <f)povTi(TTris,
one who ponders on the things above (like (f>povTi(o}v). Plat.
Cognate Accusative (Internal Object).
§ 159. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take
an accusative of kindred signification. Tliis accusative
repeats the idea alreadt/ contained in the verb, and may
follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. E-g",
R
!il
,!1
i
214
SYNTAX.
[§ 159.
"HbofiaiTas n(yi<TTas ffdouds, I enjoy the greates* pleasures. Evtv-
YoOo-t toCto to tvTV)(^riiia., they enjoy this good fortune. So iriirrdv
TTearjua, to fall a Jail ; voaov poaeiv or voo'ov aadevelv or vovoif Kafiv€iu,
to suffer under a disease ; a^aprrffia AfiapTaveiv, to commit an error (to
sin a sin) ; 8ov\fiav 8ov\fveiv, to be subject to slavery ; aycoua ayoavi-
^fa6ai, to undergo a contest: ypa</>^i/ ypd(f)ea-6ai, to bring an indict-
ment ; ypa(})fju 8i<i>Kfiu, to prosecute an indictment ; htKr)v u^Xeti/, to lose
a lawsuit ; viKtjv vimu, to gain a victory; pdxrfv vikuv, to gain a battle ;
TToptrffv nefiireiu, to form or conduct a procession ; TrXijyrjv Tiinreiv, to
strike a blow.
Remark. It will be seen that this construction is far more ex-
tensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusatives
of kindred formation and meaning, as vIktju pikop, to gain a victory ;
but also those of merely kindred meaning, as pdxrjp pikcip, to gain a
battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the verb to
one of many applications ; as 'OXvfiTrta pikop, to gain an Olympic vic-
tory ; ydpovs i(TTiap, to give a wedding feast ; y^ri<^i.apa pikop, to carry a
decree {to gain a victory with a decree) ; to. Ilapa6ripai,a ■n(p.„eip, to cele-
brate the Panathenaea by a procession.
For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive
verb, see § 198.
Note 1. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or even
nouns; as kqkos naa-ap KOKiav, bad wih all badness; dyaOns naaap
dpfTTfP, good with all goodness: 8oi>\os ras peyioras SovXeiav, a slave
to the direst slavery.
Note 2. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate
*iccusative, its noun being implied in the verb; as pfyd\a dpaprd-
p(ip,(sc. dpapTT)paTa) to commit great faults ; Tavrd ^vnovpai Koi Tavrd.
Xaipot), 1 have thr same griefs and the same joys. Ho ri xpr^aopai
Tourw ; (= Ti'i/a ;^pet'ai/ xpT]iTopai. ;) what use shall I marc of this f and
ox/bev xpriaopai touto), / shall make no use of this (§ 188, 1, N. 2).
!So xpi^oi^os ovbip, good for nothing (N. 1). See § 160, 2, Note.
Note 3. Here belongs the accusative of efect^ which expresses
a result beyond the action of the verb, which is eifected by that
action; as Trpfc^fvouo-i t^i/ (lpr}vrjp, they negotiate the peace {as am-
bassadors, TrpcV^ftf), but TTpfcr^evfip npfor^fiap, to go on an embassy.
Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a .^tivk.
So after verbs of looking (in poetry); as "Ap?; fiffiopKtVat, to look
war (Ares); fj /3ovX^ f^Xf^/^6 vanv, the Senate looked mustard.
Note 4. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative and
another object at the same time; as •ypa</)ftr^ai rtva rr)v ypa(f>f]p
ravrriv, to bring this indictment against any one : T]FiiKT](Top(v tovtov
oirfifV. we did this man no wrong : nwra 8i8aaKf pe, Iforh me this
(§ 164); ToaovTOP ex^oi fx^aifxa tre. so great haired do I feel for thee ;
'rf]v pdxrjp Toxis ^apfidpovi piKTjaas, having defeated the barbarians in the
battle.
§ 160.]
ACCUSATIVE.
215
Note 5. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which
follows verbs of motion expressing the ground over which the motion
passes; as 6b6v Uvai (e\6flv, nopfCfcrBm, &c.), to fjo (ocer) a road :
nXdv BdXaaaav, to sail the sea ; opos Karafiaiutiv, to tiescend a mountain :
&c. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning. See § 170, li.
Aceusatlve of Specification. — Adverbial Accusative.
2).
esses
that
aui-
assfj.
ilk:
look
and
WTOV
this
hce :
like
§ 160. 1. The accusative of specification may be
jOined with a verb, adjective, noun, or e^en a Vvhole
sentence, to denote that in respect lo which the expression
is used. E.ij;-.
Tv<f>K6s el TO ofi/jLara, you are Mind in your eyes; KciKbi to eidor,
beautiful in for, n; ancipoi to TfKrjdos, infinite in number; dUaios rov
rponov, Just in /< is character ; bfivol iidxr)", mixfhtij in battle ; Kauva tt)i»
Ke<l)aKTjv, I haoe a pain in my head , ras (f)pfvas vyiaiveiu, to be sound in
their minds; 3ia(f)(pei rffv (^uo-ti/, he differs in nature; iroTafMos, Kvdvos
ouop.a, €vpis hvo TrXfdpwv, a river, Cydnus by name, of the breadth
of two plethra ; "EWrjves flat to ytvos, they are Greeks by race ; Kai to.
niKpa 7r(tp&>/xai otto dfmv opuaaoai, even in small matters I try to bey in
with the Gods.
Note. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche,
or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part ; but
often a character or quality, or any circumstance to which the
meaning of the expression is restricted.
2. An accusative in certain expressions has the force
of an adverb. E.g:
ToijTou Tov TpuTTov, iu thls wtty, thus ; t^u TavioTrji/ (sc. 686v), in the
quickest way ; ttjv apx^fv, at first (with negative, not at all) ; TeXoy,
finally ; irpoUa, as a yift, gratis ; xdpiu, for the sake of; 8iKrfv, in the
)i,(inner of; to irpoiTou or irpioTov, at frst; to Xoinov, for the rest;
T<iXXa, in other respects ; ov8ev, in nothing, not at all ; ti ; in what,
why ? Tt, in any respect, at all ; ravra, in respect to this, therefore. So
TcOtO p.fV . . . TOVTO 8c (§ 148, N. 4).
Note. Several of these are to be explained by § 160, 1, as
raXXa, ri ; why ? ravTa, tovto (with ptu and 8f), and sometimes ov8fv
and Ti. Some are to be explained as cognate accusatives (see § 159,
Notes 1 and '^), and some are of doubtful origin.
216
SYNTAX.
[§ 161.
■ 'I
AccusatlTe of Extent.
§ 161. The accusative may denote extent of time or
space. E-g".
At trKop8ai fviavTou fvovrai, the truce is to he for a year ; ffitive
rptU fj fit pas, he remained three flays ; an-tx** S' n liXdrata rwu e^/Swv
arablovs f^8op.rjKovTa, and Plataea is seventy studes distant from
Thebes.
Note. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes how
long since; Tpirrju rjht] fififpav €7Ti8(8r}pr)Kfv, this is the third day
that he has been in 'oivn.
A peculiar idioiii is found in expressions like rpirov ctof tovti
(this the third year), i.e. two years ago; as dnrjyyfXdrj ^ikmnos rpirov ff
Tsraprov eros rovri 'Hpalop Tel\os noKiopKcov, two or three years ago
Philip was reported to be besieging Heraion Teichos.
Terminal Accusative CPoetlc).
§ 162. In poetry, the accusative without a preposition
may denote the place or object towards which motion is
directed.
E.g.
fAvr^ar^pas d(f)iKero, she came to the snitors. Odyss. V i/f'/Si;
ftiyav nvpavou 0\i\vp.ir6v rt. II. To koXKqv "Apyos /3as (f)vydst
going as an exile to the hollow Argos. Soph.
In prose a preposition would be used.
Accusative after NVj and Md.
§ 163. The accusative follows Lhe adverbs of swear-
ing v^ and fid by.
An oath introduced by vxf is affirmative ; one introduced l\v
p.d. is negative ; as vt) tov Aia, yes, by Zeus ; fia tov Aluj no, by
Zens.
NoTK 1. When pd is preceded by vat, yes, the oath is affirmative;
as pal. pa Aia, yes, by Zeus.
Note 2. Ma is souietimes omitted when a uegatii^e precedesj
as oi, T6vb"'0\vpnQV, no, by this Olympus.
yvyds,
§ 165.]
}
ACCUSATIVE.
Two AccuiatlveB ivlth one Verb.
217
§ 164* Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to teach
to remind, to clothe or vnclolhe, to conceal, to deprive,
and to divide, may take two object accusatives. E.g.
'Eoi/ m (T( ravTa (^(Ta^rj, if any one shall aak ynu these questions;
fifWfTf Tovs 6(ovi alrflv dya$d, you are about to ask blessings of the
(rods; Tuiis naldas t/jv fiov(nKt)u 8t8d(TK(i, he teaches the boys jnusic ;
Trfv ^vfifia)(iav dvafMifivtjiTKovTfs tuvs ^AdrjvaiovSy reminding the Athenians
of the alliance; €k8vh tfie ttjv eadfira, he strips me of my dress ; fif) fi*.
Kpvyj/Tjs roCro, do not conceal this from me; rfju 6tov roiis (rT((f)dvovs
atavXrjKaaiv, they hare robbed the Goddess of her crowns ; to orpdrcv^a
KaTtvfifif 8a)8fKa fitpr), he divided the army into twelve parts (he made
twelce divisions of the army').
In many cases, as in ilie third and last examples, one of the
accusatives is cognate; see § 159, N. 4.
Note 1. In poetry some other verbs have this construction ;
thus xP^°^ v'l^fTo aXfirju, he washed the dried spray from his skin; so
TiiMwpfiadai 7iva ai/io, to punish one for blood {shed).
Note 2. Many verbs of this class sometimes have other con-
structions. Thus verbs of depriving may take the genitive of a
person witl an accusative of a thing, nvor rt; sometimes the reverse,
iivd Tivos (neut.). For verbs of reminding, see § 171, 2, N. 3.
Note 3. The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs is
really a cognate accusative; see § 159, N. 4.
§ 165. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say
anything of a person or thing take two accusatives.
E.g.
TavTt fie irmoiKTiP, they do these things to me; ti /i' (Ipydcrut ; what
didst thou do to me ? TrXflora Ktim Tr)v rroAtf itoiovmv. they do the most
eri/s to the state. Tavri <tv ToXpas fjpdi Xeyfti/; dost thou dare to say
these thinns of us J Ov (fjpovTKTTtov o Tt epoiaiv ot ttoXXoI 17/ias, we must
not consider what the multitude will say of us.
Note 1. These verbs often take tv or jcaXms, tcell, or kok&s, ill,
instead of the accusative of a thing; tovtovs «v ttokI. he does them
good ; vpds kokcop ttoicI, he does you harm ; icaKm fjpds Xcyft, he speaks
ill of w.
The passive form of these expressions is not tv (or kukcos) iroift-
adai, (V (or KUKWi) XtyfaBai, to be done tcell by, to be spoken well of^
&c. ; but fv (or kokws) irdaxf^v, to experience good {or evil), and c^
(or KUKus) dKovciv, bene (male) audire, to hear one^s self called.
hi
218
SYNTAX.
[§ 166.
J;
p-
0^
M*
Note 2. llpdaaa, do^ very seldom takes two accusatives in this
construction, n-oicu being generally used. Ei wpdaaat and kokus
irpd<T(Ta> are intransitive, meaning to be well oJ/\ to be badly off.
NoTK 3. Verbs signifying to do may take the dative of a iierson;
as aya^di/ Tt TTotoOcrt Tfl TToXet, they do some yood to the state.
§ 166. Verbs signifying to name^ to choose or appoint,
to make, to consider, and the like, may take a predicate
accusative besides the object accusative. E.g".
Tt rffu noXiu npoaayopfveis ; what do you call the state ? — so koXoixti
TovTo TO ovofia, they call me by this name : arparijyov airov dirfBti^f,
he appointed him yenend ; fvfpyfTrjuTou^iXinTrovfjyovvro, (hey thouyht
Philip a benefactor; Travrav deiriroTTjv eavrou 7rfnoir}Ktv, he has made
himself master of all.
Note 1. This is the active construction of which the passive
appears in the predicate nominative with passive verbs (§ 136).
Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; as Toir (rvp.-
fidxovs irpodvfiovs noida-dai, to make the allies eayer ; ras A^priat
fieydXas fjyeu, he considered the faults great.
Note 2. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusa-
tive in apposition with the object accusative ; as eXa/Se tovto batpou,
he took this as a yift ; imrovs ayeiu dvfiara ra ijXt'i^, to briny horses as
offerings to the Sun. Es])ecially an interrogative pronoun may be so
used; as rLvas tovtovs 6pS); who are these whom I see ? (§ 142, 3.)
Note 3. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the
action of the verb upon its direct object; ?is iratdtvetv rtva aocfiov (or
KaKov), to train one {to be) wise (or bad) ; tovs vitis 'nrnoTas f8i8a^cu, he
taught his sons to be horsemen. See § 159, N. 3.
Note 4. In the passive, when the object accusative becomes the
subject nominative (§ 197, 1), the predicate accusative (of every
kind) becomes a. predicate nominative. See § 136, Rem. ; and
§ 137, N. 4.
III. GENITIVE.
Remark. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of
a verb, so the chief uise of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun.
When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it, seems to depend on
the nominal idea which belongs to the verb; thus iiridv/xC) involves iiriOv-
(xiav (as we can say itnOvfiCi) iindvfilav, § 159) ; and in eiridv/jLu toijtov, I have
a desire for this, the nominal idea preponderates over the vorbal. The
Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow either to pre-
ponderate in the construction, and after some verbs it allows both the
accusative and the genitive. In the same general sense the genitive follows
verbal adjectives. It has also uses which originally belonged to the abla-
tive ; for example, with verbs of separation and to express source. (See
Rem. before § 157.)
[§ 166.
in thi.s
KaKWS
)ei'tiou ;
dicato
KoKovaL
Ihuuy/tt
s made
passive
\ 136).
accuaa-
> 8<opou,
orses as
y be so
,3.)
of the
f)6v (or
$ev, he
les the
every
and
-r
ning of
noun.
end on
einBv-
Ihave
The
to pre-
th the
follows
abla-
(See
e
§ 167.] GENITIVE. 219
OonlilTe after Nouns CAdnotnlnal 0«nltlT«).
§ 167. A noun in the genitive may limit the mean-
ing of another noun, to express various relations, most of
which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in
English. The genitive thus depending on a noun is
called ad nominal .
Tlic most iin[)ortaiit of these relations are the following: —
1. Possession: as 17 toD Trarpos oiKia, the father's home;
•^fjLU)v rj Trarpi's, our country. So rj tov Aios, the daughter of
Zeus; Tot tCjv Otwv^ the things of the Gods (§ 141, Note 4).
The Possessive Oenitive.
2. The Subject of an action or feeling : as 17x01) Srjfiov
cwota, the good-will of the people (i.e. which the people feel).
The Subjective Oenitive.
3. The Object of an action or feeUng: as 8ta to Ilauo-a-
viov fila-o^, owing to the hatred of (i.e. felt against) Pausanias ;
at TOV x€ifjiC}vo^ KapT€pT^(T€is, the endurance of the winter. So
Twv $€(i)v opKoty oaths (sworn) in the name of the Gods (as we
say Oeov^ ofxvvvuL, § 158, N. 2). The Objective Oenitive.
4. Material, including that of which anything consists :
as fioCiv ayiXr), a herd of cattle; aXfro? rjixepuiv SeVSpcoi',
a grove of cultivated trees ; Kp^vr) t/8cos I'SaTos, a spring of fresh
water; 6vo ;^oiWcs dA</>iTa)v, two quarts of meal. Oenitive
of Material.
5. Measure, of space, time, or value: as rpiwv rjfieptov
086^, a journey of three days; 6ktu> o-TaSiwi/ Ttixo<i<i a wall of
eight stades (in length) ; TpidKovTa raXavriov ovrria^ an estate
of thirty talents; StVai iroWiuv TaX.dvT(ov, lawsuits of (i.e.
involving) many talents. Oenitive of Measure.
6. The Whole, after nouns denoting a part: as TroXAot
rSiv prjToptov, many of the orators j dvr]p riov cAev^epwi'i
220
SYNTAX. [§ 168.
a man (i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive.
(Sec also § 168.)
These six cksses are not exhaustive ; but they will give a general idea
of these relations, many of which it is difHcult to classify.
NoTK. Examples like *A$r)vtau wdXtr, the city of Athene, Tpolrft
nroXUBpov, the ritif of Tioy^ in which the genitive is used instead of
apposition, are poetic.
§ 168. The partitive genitive (§ 167, 6) may follow
all nouns, pronouns, adjectives (especially superlatives),
participles with the article, and adverbs, which denote a
part. E.f^.
Oi ayaBoi ruiv dvdpa>na>v, the (jand mnong the Dim; o rjfiKxvK rov
dpt^/xoO, the half of the number; apdpa oida tov ^ffpov, i know a
man of the people : rois dpavirais ratv povt&p, to the upper benches of
the xailors; oi/fit\s twi' Traibav, no one of the children; itavriav rov
prfTopoiv bfivoraros, the most eloquent of all the orntorH ; n ffovAnptPos
Twi/ *A.$T)paio)v, any on e who p leases of the A then iav " ', b'la yvpaiKitp,
dirine amonf/ women (Hoin.); ttov rijs yijs ; ubi tcirarumy where on
the earth? ris twi/ noXirap; who of the citizens? bU T^f f)fi€pas-
twice n day; tls tovto di/otar, to this pitch of folly ; tp rovrtft napa-
trictvfji. in this state of preparation ; A pip 8ia>K€i rov ^i;<^io-f(aroc
tout' eo-Ttv, these are the parts of the decree which he prosecutes (lit.
what parts of the decree he prosecutes, &c.) So opBorara ap$pa>ir<op
Xc'yctr, thou speakest as the most correct of men (most correctly of men);
0T€ StiPOTOTos (ravrov ravra ^tr$a, when you were at the height of your
power in these matters. See § 142, 2, N. 2.
Note 1. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender
with a dependent partitive genitive. But sometimes, especially
when it is singular, it is neuter, agreeing with pipes, part, under-
stood; as Tiioi/ noXepiwv to iroXv (for oi ttoXXoi), the yreater part of the
enemy.
Note 2. A partitive genitive sometimes depends on rir or pipoi
understood; SiS (<f)aaap tjripiypvvat (r<f>oip re irpos (Kfipovs koi iKtiptap
Ttpim iavTovs, they said that some of their own men had mixed with them,
and some of them with their own men {ripas being understood with
a<^a>p and (Ktipap). Compare § 169, 2; § 170, 2.
NoTK 3. Similar to such phrases as ttov yrjs ; ds tovto apoias, &c.,
is the use of ()((o and an adverb with the genitive; as nm c^ftf
Bo^rjs; in what stale of opinion are yoti f ovTto rponov (X^is, this is
your character (lit. in this state of character) \ ios ctx* ravowy, as fast
as he could (lit. in the condition of speed in tvhich he was)\ so i>s etx*
fro deal'; eZ ^X'^tv <^p(PvtPy to be right in his mind.
1 170.]
GENITIVE.
221
Genitive nffer Verbii.
§ 169. 1. Verbs signifying lu bf\ to become^ or to
beloiru^ take a genitive wliich is equivalent to the pos-
sessive or the partitive genitive. E.ii'.
'O vufAos ovTos ^puKovTot fOTiu, ihis iiiiv /."» Drftco'x. Ilmav
(ftt'puv ov iravTos, akX* dvdp6s <ru<l>ov, to hear piu'erly is not in t/ie
power of everji one, hut in that of a wise man. Aaptiov yiyvovrai 6vo
iraidts, two sons are horn {belonijiny) to Darius. Tovriav ytvov fioi,
become (one) of these for me,
2. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to
make, to consider, and the like, which generally take
two accusatives (§ 166), may take a partitive genitive in
place of the predicate accusative. E.^.
*Efii 6(t Tuv irtiTtia-fifvav, put vie down as (one) of those who are
persuaded. Tovto t^s ^fUTtpas a/xeXrtar au riv Btiri diicaius, anyone
might Justly consider this to helony lo our neylevl.
NoTK. When these verbs become passive, they still retain the
genitive ; as 2dXa>i/ tu>v iitra trof^nxTtav €K\r)6ri, Solon was vailed
(one) of (he Seven Sayes.
3. The genitive after verbs sonietimos expresses other
relations of the adnoniinal genitive. E.g.
To T€i\os (rTadiov ^v oicro), the wall was (one) of eiyht stades (in
lenyth); tntidav irStv fj rtv TpiaKovra, when one is thirty years old ; —
Genitive of Measure. 01 aTf<f)avoi p6b<i>v qaav. the crowns were
(made) of roses ; to rtlxos ireiroirjTai Xidov, the wall is built of stone .
— Genitive of Material. Ov tu>u icaKovpywv oiktos (sc. tariv), there
is no pity felt for the evil-doers; — Objective Genitive.
§ 170. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action
affects the object only in part. E.<^.
ITc/xTrrt twv \vbSiv, he sends some of the Lydians (but nefiirti rovi
AuSous, he sends the Lydians). Illvei tov otvov, he drinks of the wine.
Tijs yfjs fT( fiov, they ravayed (some) of the land.
2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying
to share (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. E.g.
MfT«t;(oi' T^ff Xrtar, they shared in the booty; so oiiexi fitTattciii-
(rdai rivot, to claim a share of anything (cf. § 171, 1); drroXavontv tu>v
222
SYNTAX.
l§ 171.
1
1
1 ^
lijllii
1
m
i
1
^:
8 '
||
bI '
P
m
f '
1
m
ii
ayafiS)p, toe enjoy the blessings (i.e. our share of them'); ovrats Svato
TovTdv, thus viayest thou enjoy these, iio ov jrpoat'jKfi fioi t^s dpx^s,
/ have no concern in the (jovernmenl ; fifTfo-rl /xoi tovtov, I have a share
in this (§ 184, 2, N. 1).
Note. Many of these verbs also take an accusative. M(Tfx<^
and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like fitpos, part :
as laov fxirf\ei fKaaros tov itXovtov fit pas, each has an equal share
of the wealth (where fxtpovs would mean that each has only a part of
(I share). This use of /nfpov shows the nature of the genitive after
these verbs.
§ 171, 1. The genitive follows verbs signifying (o fake
hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, tr
miss, to make trial of, to beg-in. E.g-.
'EXa^fTO Trfs xeinos aiiTov, he took his hand; ovre nvpov ovrt
«p(OTos cKo)!/ aTTTOfiai, I icillinfjly touch neither f re nor love; r^r
$vvf(r(u)s pfTaTToiovvTai, they lay claim to s<'qacily , aro)(d(eardai rav
dv0pu>7r(i>u, to aim at the men: rfji dpfrrjs f(f)iKiadai, to attain to
virtue; erv^f rijs diKTji, he met with justice : aipaWfrai rfji fXiridos,
he fa Us of (attaininy) his hope ; ntipdaBai tuv Tfi\ovs, to make an
attempt on the wall; oi ttoXc/xou apxofxfv, we do not heyin war.
Note. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative, with
a genitive of the part taken hoH of; as ska^ou r^s (uurji rov^Opovrav,
they seized Orontas by hk girdle.
2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to taste, to
smell, to hear, to perceive, to understand, to remember,
to forget, to desire^ to care for, to spare, to neglect, to
admire, to despise. E.g.
'E\tv6epij)s yivadfxevoi, having tasted of freedom (Hdt.^; Kpop.'
fivcov ua(f)paivoiJLai, I smell onions; (fxav^s aKovfiv, to hear a voice;
aiaddvfadai, fiffiurifrOai, or f-'uXapdavfirdai Tovrav, !o perceive, remem-
ber, OY forget these things; avvievui d XX 17X0)1/, to understand one
another; rutv p.a6rfp.dT<av fnidvfici, J long for learning ; xprffiaTtiv
ifteibeadai, to he sparing of money ; 86^t)s i'ffXfli/, to neglect opinion ;
uyafiai rijs dperns, I admire virtue; Korai^poveiv rov Kivbvvov, to
despise danger (ci. § 173, 2, Note).
NoTK 1. Verbs of hearing, learning, &c. may take an accusative
of the thing he? I'd, &c., and a genitive of the person heard from; as
Tovruiv Toiovrnvi aKovta \6yovs, I hear such sayings from these men ;
nvOf'trdai touto vfiau, to learn this from you. The genitive here belongs
under § 176, 1. A sentence may take the place of the accusative;
as TovToyp uKovt Tt Xfyovaiv, hear from these tvhat they say. See also
dTrod(;(o/ia(, accept (a statement) from, in the Lexicon.
§ 172.]
GENITIVE.
223
lative
i; as
men ;
longs
itive;
also
NoTF. 2. The impersonals /if'Xft and ^fTo/xeXf I take the geni-
tive of a thing- with ti>e dative oi a peison (>^ 181, 2, N. 1); as
ficXft fim Tovrov, I rare for lliis ; ^(Timi\ei. trot tovtov, thou rcpentc.st of
this. llpoaijKd., it roiicerns, has the same constrnction, but the geni-
tive belongs under § 170, 2.
Note 3. Causative verbs of this class take tlie accusative of a
person and the genitive of a thing; as fir] fi avafivfians kokwv, do not
remind vie of ecils (i.e. cause me to reinemher them); tovs TraiBas y(v-
art'ou alfiaTOi, we must make the children taste blood.
But verbs of remind imf also take two accusatives (§ 164).
Remark. Most of the verbs of § 171 may take also the accusa-
tive. See the Lexicon. "OCat, emit smell (smell of), maj' take two
genitives ; as rrji «cr;0aX^r ofo) fivpov, I emit a smell of perfume (§ 170, 1)
from my head.
3. The genitive follows verbs signifying lo rule or
to command. E.g".
"Ep'jf Twi/ 6(oiv ^aaiKtvei, Love is ling of the Gods; HoKvKparjfs
2d/biov ervpdvuei, Pulycrates was tyrant of Samos ; ottXitwi/ koI
tTTTTfci)!/ f(TTpaTf)y€iy ?ie tvas general of infantry and cavalry; fj-ydrai
wavTOi Koi epyov .".at }^6yov, he directs everything that is dotie and
said.
This construction is sometimes connected with that of § 175, 2.
But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or ruler implied
in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of comparison (see
Remark before § 167).
NoTK. For other cases after many of these verbs, as the dative
after fiyfopm and ai/do-o-w, see the Lexicon.
§ 172. 1. Verbs signifying /w/wess and want take the
genitive of material (§ 167, 4). E.g".
XprjfidrtiP (viTopfl, he has abundance of money ; ol rvpavvoi eVa*-
vov oiSirore omapiCeTe, you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise.
2. Verbs signifying lo fill take the accusative of the
thing filled and the genitive of material. E.g.
"Y Soros T171/ KvKiKa irXrjpovp, to fill the cup with water.
Note 1, Afo^ai, T want, besides the ordinary construction (as
TouTO)!/ cdroiTo, they were in want of these), may take a genitive of the
person with a cognate accusative of the thing; as Sfijaopai vputp
IKTpiap bftjvip, I will make of you a moderate request. See § 159, N. 4.
Note 2. (a) Ael may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an
accusative) of the parson besides the genitive; as 8fl fxoi v;»vtou.
I
224
SYNTAX
[§ 173.
^!ti
1,1
/ need this; ov ttoXXoO rrovov /if 8ei, / have no need of much labor
(cf. oil 8(1 fit eXdfiu).
(b) Besides the common phrases ttoXXov Sei, it is far from it,
uXtyou 8«i, it wants little of it, Vie have in Demosthenes oithf ttoX-
Xov Set (like iravTos 8(1), it wants everything of it (lit. it does not even
leant much). For dXiyov and fnKpov, almost, see the Lexicon.
Causal Genitive.
§ 173. 1. The genitive often denotes a cavse^ especially
after verbs expressing emotions, as admiration^ wonder^
pity^ anger ^ envy^ or revenue. E.g.
Toi'/Touff Tr)i ToXfiTis davfid^du, to admire these for their courage ;
(i8aifiovi(<o <r( rov rpoirov, I congratulate you on your character;
TovTovi oiKTdpti) Trjs votrov, I pity these for their disease ; rau a8iKrf-
fiaTciP 6jjyi(«TBM avTois, to be angry with them for their offences;
Crj\ovvT(s Tt)v noXiv Trjs Mapadavi pax^^i envying the city for the battle
at Marathon; tovtov o-ot ov <pdovf}a(o, I shall not grudge you this;
TouTows T^f dpirayrjs TtpaprjtTaadai, to take vengeance on these for the
robbery. Most ot these verbs may take also an object accusative.
Note 1. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive
(where ewxa is generally expressed) ; as rfjs tcSi» 'EWrjvtiv (\(v6(pias,
for the liberty of the Greeks (Dem. Cor. § 100). See § 262, 2.
Note 2. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive; as avrnroKl-
aOat TO) /Sao-tXrl Trjs dpx^s, to diynite with the king aboui his dominion ;
EvpoKnos fip(f}i(r^r]Trfa(v 'Eof^^" '"^^ ir6\(ats, Eumolpus disputed icith
Erechtheus about the city (i.e. disputed its possession with him).
2. Verbs signifying to accvse, to pro.se cute, to convict,
lo acquit, and to condemn take a causal genitive denoting
the crime. E.g.
AiTiapai aiiTov toC (^oi/ou, T accuse him of the murder; (ypd^aTo
avTov Trapau6u(ou, he indicted him for an illegal proposition ; 8id>K(t
p( 8oipo)v, he prosecutes me for bribery (for gifts); KXiava 8oipa>v
(\6vT(s Ka\ K\oTrfjs, Jiaving convicted Cleon of bribery and theft ;
(<f)(vye ■npo8o(rias, he was brought to trial for treachery, but J -f<f)vy(
Trpo8oaias, he was acquitted of treachery: noW&v oi 7raTep(s f^patv
pri8iapov BdvaTov KaT(yv<aaav, our fathers condemned many to death
for favoring the Persians (for ttoXXcui' and ddvarou see Note).
Note. Compounds of kotq of this class commonly take a
genitive of the person, which depends on the Kara. They may
§ 175.]
GENITIVE.
225
take also an object accusative denoting the crime or punishment.
Ovhtis auTos avTov Karty^oprjvt 7ra>7rore, no man ever himself accused
himself; Kara^dbovTai fiov fieyaXa, they tell great falsehoods against
me: <^oi(iov ddiKiau KaTTj-yoptiv, to charge injustice upon Phoebus;
(vlatv iTTtiaav vfias aKpirav ddvarov Kara^ffilaaaOai, they persuaded
yvu to pass {sentence of) death upon some without a trial.
Verbs of condemning may take three cases, as in the last example
under § 173, 2.
3. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, to
give the cause of the astonishment. E.g:
*Q n6(T(t8ov, TTJs Tfxvqs ! O Poseidon, what a trade! *Q Ztv
^a(rtXel), t^s Xctttoti^tos ra-v (f)p(vS>v ! King Zeus! what subtlety
of mind !
Genitive of Separation^ of Contparlson, of Source.
§ 174. The genitive may denote that from which any-
thing is separated or distinguished.
On this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting
to remove^ to restrain^ to release, to abandon, to deprive,
and the like. E.g.
'H vrivos oil ttoXu 8tf;^€t ttjs ^ireipov, the island is not far distant
from the main-land ; ivi(TTi]p.ri xu>pt.(op.tvri aper^r, knowledge separated
from virtue; \v<r6v p.t 8e<rficiv, release me from chains ; tmaxovTrjs
T€ixv<ff<oSt they ceased from building the wall : Troaav direareprjorde ;
of how much have you been deprived? firava-av alrov rfjs (rrpaTrfyiai,
they deposed him from his command; ov iravfaOe t^s ixox^rjpias, you
do not cease from your rascality. So tinov (avr^) toG KffpvKos fi^
XftTTco-^ai, they told him not to be left behind the herald (i.e. to follow
close upon him); f) eVtoroX^, r^v otros eypa^tv ditoKaf^Bei'S nuiiv, the
letter which this 7nan ivrote without our knowledge (lit. separated
from us).
For the accusative after verbs of depriving, see § 164.
§ 175. 1. The comparative degree takes the genitive
when rj, than, is omitted. E.g.
KpeirTtov eort Tovrav, he is better than these; viois to aiyau Kpfirrov
lari Tov XaXfiv, for youth silence is better than prating; irovtjpia
ddrrov davurov rptxth wickedness runs faster than death.
Note 1. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison
may take a genitive : as cVfpot tovt<ov, others than these ; vartpoi t^s
i<
]*
1
1
1.
1
i . i
1
i ■
1
i
i i
1 .
226
SYNTAX.
[§ 176.
:■!!
!T
ndxfjs, too late for (later than) the battle; tjj va-Tepaici t^s i^xriii on the
day after the battle. So rpntkaaiov ffficav, thrice as much as we.
Note 2. After ttXcoi/ (irXfiv), more, or TKaaaov, less, rj is occasion-
ally omitted without affecting the case; as nffi^at opvis eV airov,
rrXfiP e^aKoaiovi top dpidfiov, I will send birds against him, more
than six hundred in number (§ 160). Aristoph.
2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to surpass, to
be inferior, and all others which imply comparison. E.g:
"Apdpoiiros ^vviaei virepfxti rav aWtou, man swpasses the others in
sagacity; tov rrXifdovi ntpiyiyvfadai, to be superior to the multitude;
vcrT€pi(fiu rav Koipav, to be too late for the opportunities. So rav
fxOpwv viKaadai (or ^aaaadai), to be overcome by oneh enemies; but
these two verbs take also the genitive with vTrd, and the dative.
So Ttiiv fxdpwv KpaTfiv, to prevail over one^s enemies, and t^s BaKcurarji
Kpartiv, to be master of the sea. Compare the examples under
§ 171, 3.
§ 176. 1 . The genitive sometimes denotes the source. E.g.
ToOto fTvxov trov, I obtained this from you ; tovto epaOfv ifxap, he
learned this from you. Add the examples under § 171, 2, N. 1.
2. In poetry the genitive occasionally denotes the agent
after passive verbs, or is used like the instrumental dative
(§ 188). E.g.
*Ei/ "AtSa fi^ Kclcrai, trai oKoxov a^ayfis Aiyiadov t€, thou liest
now in Hades, slain by thy loife and Aegisthus. Eur.
Ilpriaai nvpbs 8r)ioio Bvperpa, to burn the gates with destructive
^re. II.
These constructions would not be allowed in prose.
C(enitlve after Compound Verbs.
§ 177, The genitive often depends on a preposition
included in a compound verb. E.g.
UpoKfiTOk, liji 'Attiktis opr) peydXa, high mountains lie before
Attica; ratv vperf ptap diKulatp TrpotfTraadai, to stand in defence of
your rights ; tmep«f)dpr}aav tov "Koiftov, they appeared above the hill;
ovTcjs vpap vTTfpaKya, I grieve so for you ; cVt/Savrcr tov Tfixovs,
having mounted the wall; dirorpfrrfi pt tovtov, it turns me from this.
For the genitive after certain compounds of Kara, see § 173, 2,
Note. See also § 193.
§ 180.]
GENITIVE.
227
to
GenitlTe of Price or Value.
178. The genitive may denote the price or value of a
thing. E.^.
A6$a xprfyidT<av ovk {avrirfj (sc, fariv), glory is not to be bought
icith money ; ir6<rov bibdaKft; for what price does he teach f fiitrdov
vofiovs (iaf^fptij he proposes laws for a bribe; 6 bovKoi irivre fjLvav
Tifiarai, the slave is valued at five minas. So rt/xarat 8' ovv not 6 dvfjp
Oavarov, so the man estimates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes
death as my punishment). Plat. So also 2(/)o8piai/ vTr^yoi' Oavarov,
they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (ci. § 173, 2).
Note. The genitive depending on a^ior, worthy worthy^ and its
compounds, or on d|toa>, think ivorthy, is the genitive of price or
value ; as a^ios ('an Oavarov, he is worthy of death : QepiuTOKXea rav
fieyianav ff^iwaav, they thought Themistocles worthy of the highest
honors. So sometimes arifios and dTifui(<a take the genitive. (See
§180,1.)
Genitive of Time and Place.
§ 179. 1. The genitive may denote the time within
which anything takes place. E.s^.
Ufpaai oix rj^ovm beKa (Tav, the Persians toill not come within
ten years. Tfjs vvktos eyevero, it happened within the night (but t^i»
vvKTa means during the whole night). So 8paxpf}v fXdp^avt rrjs ^pepat,
he received a drachma a day (each day).
2. A similar genitive of the place within which is found in
poetry. E.g.
*H OVK "Apyeos ^ev *Ax.aiiKov; icas he not in Achaean Argosf
Odyss. So in the Homeric n-eSioio Offiv, to run on the plain (i.e.
within its limits), and similar expressions. So dpifrreprii xtipot,
on the left hand, even in Hdt.
Genitive ^vlth Adjectives.
§ 180. The objective genitive follows many verbal
adjectives.
1. These adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning or
derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g-.
i:
228
SYNTAX.
[§ 181.
MtToxos (To(f)ias, partaking of wisdom (§ 170, 2). 'En fj^oKos imarri-
fiTfi, hnouKj alUiincd to knowltdye ; c/iTrct/jor naKtav, experienced in evils ;
ToO apioTov (TToxatTTiKoif aiming at the best (§ 171, 1). KarrfKoos tuv
yoveuv, obedient (lit. hearkening) to his parents : fnuTTfifxav twv 8iKaia>u,
understanding his rights ; eVt/LieX^s dyaBap, dfieXfj^ kokuv, caring for the
good, neglectful of the bad ; <jiei8(a\o\ ^pwdrav, sparing of money
(§ 171, 2). ^EyKpaTTjs iavTov, being master of himself ; dpxiKos dvbpcov,
)it to rule men (§ 171, 3). Mtaros kokw, full of trUs ; cpr/poi <Tvppd
X<»>Vj destitute of allies : fj yjrvxf} yvpvrf rov aapaTost the soul stript of the
body ; Kudapos (^ovoi , free from the stain of murder (§ 172, 1). "Evoxos
deikias, chargeable with cowardice (§ 173, 2). ^id(f)opos roiu uX\u>v,
dii,tinguistied from the othera (§ 174). "A^ioy ttoXXwi/, worth much
(§ 178, Note).
Note 1. Especially, adjectives of this class compounded with
alpha privative (§ 131, 4, a) take the genitive; as aytvaros KaKwv,
without a taste of evils ; dpvfjp<av Ttov Ktvbvpcav, forgetful of the
dangers; drraOfjs kukcjv, without suffering ills; dKpar^s yXcoo-o-ijs,
without power over his tongue.
Note 2. Sometimes these compounds take a genitive of kindred
meaning, which depends on the idea of separation implied in them ;
as airais dpptvau iraidav, childless (in respect) of male children;
uTipos ndarji! riprjs, destitute of all honor ; ddupoTaros xpr^parutv.,
most free from taking bribes.
2. Some are kindred to verbs which take the accusa-
tive. E.^.
Il6\ta>i dvarptnTiKos, subversive of the state ; irpoKTiKoi ratv Ka\(av,
capable of doing noble deeds; <f)i\opadris Trdaiji akrjdeias, fond of
learning all truth.
§ 181. The possessive genitive sometimes follows
adjectives denoting possession or the opposite. E.g".
OiKfia Tcov ^aai\f ><^vT(i)v, belonging to the kings; Upos 6 x^P°^ T^f
*ApT€pi8os, the place is sacred to Artemis ; koivov anavraiv, common to
all ; dTjpoKpaTias dWorpui, things not belonging to democracy.
For the dative after such adjectives, which with some of them is
more common than the genitive, see § 185.
Note. Some adjectives of place, like evain-ios, opposite, may take
the genitive ii»stead of the regular dative (?! 185), but chiefly in
g>etry; as eVamut farav 'A;(a(6)i/, they stood opposite the Achaeans.
om.
§ 183.]
GENITIVE.
229
G«nltlTe with Adverbs.
§ 182. 1- The genitive follows adverbs derived from
adjectives which take the genitive. E.g.
Ot (finetpai avrov (\ovT(i, those who are acquainted with him;
dpa^ias T^9 TToXewy, in a manner unworthy of the state; ffid)(ovTo
d^las Xoyou, they /ought in a manner worthy of mention.
2. The genitive follows many adverbs of yj/rtrp. E.g.
Eicro) ToO tpviiaros, within the fortress ; e^w toC t€1)(ovs, outside of
the wall ; ejcroc rmv opav, witfiout the boundaries ; x(<»p'(f tov amfiaTOi,
apart from the body ; fifva^v ao(f>iai koi dftaBlas, between wisdom and
if/norance; ntpav rov noTafiuv, beyond the river; irpotrBfu tov trrpa-
Toiredov, in front of the camp : dfKJiOTfpaidfv Trjs 68ov, on both sides
of the road: «vBv t^s *ao-iJXt8or, straight to PhasHl'is.
Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly fWo's, within ;
hl\a, apart from ; eyyvs, uyx'-i TreXa?, and irKriainv, near ; Tropptt)
{npoaon), far from ; oniadtv and Karomv, behind; and a few others of
similar meaning. The genitive after most of thera can be explained
as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separation ; that after dBu
resembles that after verbs of aiming at (§ 171, 1).
Add pa and Kpv<f>a, without the knowledge of, sometimes take the
genitive.
Note. n\f}u, except, ax pi and fie x pi, until, avev and artp,
without, €V€Ka (ovvtKa), on account of , and p.(Ta^^'), between, take
the genitive like prepositions. For these and ordinary preposition*
with the genitive, see § 191.
f 1
Genitive Abaolute.
§ 183. A noun and a participle not connected with
the main construction of the sentence, may stand bji
themselves in the genitive. This is called the g-enitive
absolute. E.g.
TavT (TrpdxBr) Kouavus aTparrjyovvTos, this was done when
Conon was general. OuSfV raji/ htavratv irotovvTrnv vp.a>v KaKas ra
npayiMara tx^i, affairs are in a bad stale while you do nothing which you
ought to do. Qeatv diBovroiP ovk &v fK(\>vyni KOKd, if the Gods should
grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils. "Ovroi ^evdovs ftrrip
dndrr}, when there is falsehood , there is decei*.
For the various relations denoted by ihe genitive absolute, se«
§§ 277, 27ti.
230
SYNTAX.
[§ 184.
IV. DATIVE.
Remark. The primary use of the dative case is to denote that
to or for which anything is or is done : this includes the dative of
the remote or indirect object, and the dative of interest. It also
denotes that hy which or with which, and the time (sometimes the
place) in which, anything takes place, — i.e. it is not merely », dative,
nut also an instrumental and a locative case. (See Remark before
i^ 157.) The object of motion after to is not regularly exon ssed by
tl)e Greek dative, but bv the accusative with i nreposii on (See
;) 162.)
Dative expressing T o or F w r.
§ 184. The dative is used to denote that to or for
which anything is or is done. This includes, —
1. The dative of the indirect object after transitive verbs,
which is generally introduced in English by to. E.g.
Ai8(i)(Ti fiiadou TO) a-TparevfiaTi, he f/ives pay to the army; vm-
o'xvftTai (TO I b(Ka raKavra, he promises ten talents to you (or he promises
yoH ten talents) ; fforjdfiav nffi^ofieu rois <rvfifia)(ots, we will send aid
to our allies; fXtyov t^ j3ao-t\cI to ycyevrjiifva, they told the king
ichat had happened.
2. The dative after certain intransitive verbs, many of
which in English take a direct object without to. E.g".
ExJxt^fiat rois deals, I pray (to) the Gods; BtKaioavvt} \v<nT(\(i to
<^XovTi, justice is advantageous to (or profits) the one havinrj it; tois
,v 6 1X0 IS neiBerai, he is obedient to the laws (he obeys the laivs)', ^orjdei
TtHs cf)i\o IS, he assists his /ri''nds ; dptaKfi rots noXiTais, it is pleas-
ing to (or it pleases) the citizens; uKt dudyKjj, yield to necessity:
ov TTUTTtvei rdls <f)iXois, he does not trust his friends ; rots Stj/Satoty
ovfibiCovaiv, they reproach the Thehans : n tyKaKeis r)nlv; what have
you to blame us for f firrjptd^ova-iv dWfjXois, they revile one another :
6fyyi(((T6f Tois ddiKova-iv, you are angry ivith the offenders. So
npinti, poi \tytiv, it is becoming me to speak; TrpoafjKti pot, it belongs
to me; hoKei pot, it seems to me; 8oKci pot, methinks.
The vfc^'bs of this class which are not translated with to in
English a e chiefly those signifying to benefit, serve ^ obey,
defend, assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, or an}' of
their opposites ; also those expressing friendliness, hostility,
abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats.
1)
§ 184.]
DATIVE.
231
in
fii
Note 1. (a) The impersonals 8(2, fitTean, ^-eXft, fUTaniXti,
and npo(TriK«i take the dative of a person with the genitive of a thing;
as Set fioi TovTov, I have need of this : /lerfOTt (jloi toutov, / have a share
in this ; /icXei /not tqv% "f, / am interested in this : ■nyocrrjKfi fxoi tovtov,
I am concerned in thi . (For the g^n. oce § 170, 2, § 172, N. 2.)
(h) Aft and xpn t^^" ^^'^ accusative v^v^ery rarely the dat've) when
an infinitive follows. For 8« (ir poetry) with the accu.itive and
the genitive, see § Vt ', N. 2.
XoTE 2. Some vei ' >a of this class may take the accusative. Others,
whose ir.«ai.ing would place them 1 -^rc ( vS /ito-cw, hate), take only the
accusative. AotSopcw, revile, has the accusative, but XotSopfo/tni (mid-
dle) the dative. KfXtvoi in Attic Greek has only the accusative
(commonly with the infinitive) ; iu Homer generally the dative.
3. The dative of interest (or of advantage or dis-
advantage^^ which is generally introduced in English by
for. E.g.
riac avrjp avr^ Troi/fl, every man labors for himself : 26\a>u *A6r)-
vaiois vopovs cdi^Kt, Solon made laws for the Athenians; ol Koipol
irpotivrai rfi ttoXci, lit. the opportunities have been sacrificed for the
state (for its disad^'antage)\ iKiriha f\ei aarrfpias rp 7rd\«t, he has
hope of safety for the state.
Note 1. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements of
time ; as tw ^87 8vo ytveal ((pdiaTo, two generations had already passed
away for him (i.e. he had seen them pass away). Horn. 'Hptpai ^<rau
TTJ MvTiXrj-'Ti iaKaKvia ittra, for Mitylene captured (i.e. since its cap-
ture) there had been seven days. 'Hptpa ^v irep.imi tnnrKeovtri rots
*A3r)ualoi5, it was the ffth day for the Athenians sailing on (i.e.
it was the ffth day of their voyage).
Note 2. Here belong such Homeric expressions as roiaiv avearrf,
he rose up for them (i.e. to address them) ; roto-t fivdau ^pxcu, he began
to speak before them.
Note 3. In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an accusa-
tive of the thing and a dative of the person; as Aayaoton \oty6v
nnvvov, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danai).
Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Aaraolo-t apvveiv means
to defend the Danai. For other constructions of anvva see the
Lexicon.
Aexop.at, receive, takes a dative in Homer by a similar idiom;
as Seward ol (TKrfnrpov, he took his sceptre from him (lit. for him).
Note 4. Sometimes this dative has nearly the same force as a
possessive genitive; as ol Innoi avTo7s Scfiewat, their horses are *'"(/
(lit. the horses are tied for them)\ htit to fOTrapdai aiira to orpdrevpa,
because his army has been scattered (for him ) ; ^p\ov tov vuvtikov rots
1 I
,h4
f
232
SYNTAX.
[§ 185.
*f J:
5i
i:
IvpaKoaioitj they commanded the navy f.^r ,he Syraciimns (i.e. the
Syracusana* navy).
Note 5. The participles fiovXofttpos, fib6fitvos, irpotrbt-
vSntvos, ax^^ft-fvoi, and a few others, may .agree with a dative,
the phrase being equivalent to the verb of the participle ; as avr^
/SovXo/ici/^ ecTt'i', it is to him wiahinf) it (i.e. he wishes it).
Note 6. Here belong the so-called ethical dative, in which the
personal pronouns have the force oi for my sake, &c., and sometimes
cannot easily be translated; as Tt o-ot na6i]ao}im; what am I to learn
for youf TTws fjfilv cxctr ; how are you (we wish to know)?
4. The dative of possession^ after elfMi, yiyvofiai,
and similar verbs. E.,i^.
lloXXot fioi (j)i\oi flaiv, I have many friends ; rtavra o-ot ytptiatTat,
all things will belonrj to you; e&rtv dvBpa)n<o \oyia-fins, man has
reason ; 'liriri^ fioua rStv d8(\(j)atv naibts eytvovro, to Hippias alone of
the brothers there were children born.
6. The dative denoting that with respect to which a
statement is made, — often belonging to the whole sen-
tence rather than to any special word. E.^.
"hiravra ru (f>o^ovfifP<p '^o0f j, everythinrj sounds to one who is
afraid ; a<f)Mu fiev evroXfi Atos ?xfi rtXos, as regards you two, the order
of Zeus is fully executed.
So in such expressions as these: cV 5f|m (anXtovTi, on the right
as you .sail in (with respect to one sailing in); o-vi/eXdi/rt, or ws
trvufXovTi (ine'iu, concisely, or to speak concisely (lit. for one having
made the matter concise). So as ifioi, in my opinion.
§ 185. The dative follows many adjectives and ad-
verbs of kindred meaning with the verbs included in
§ 184, and some verbal nouns. E.g.
Avtrfifvffi Tois (f)i\ois, hostile to his friends ; vnoxo r rots vopois,
subject to the laws; fniKivhwov rfj mXft, dangerous to the stale;
fi\a^€p6u T(^ (TcifiaTi, hurtful to the body; fvvovs cuvroJ, kind to
himself; (vavrios airra, opposed to him. (For the genitive after
fvavTios, see § 181, Note.) 2vp.<j)ep6vTa>s avrw, pro/it ably to him-
self; ffiTToboiP fpoi, in my way So KaradovT^aais rav'EWrjvwv roit
*Adijvaiois, subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians.
S 187.]
DATIVE.
233
Dative of ReMemblance and Union.
§ 186. The dative is used with all words implying
resemblance, union^ or approach. This includes verbs,
adjectives, a^s verbs, and nouns. E.g.
Sxtatr ioiK6Tts, like shndowH ; nfiiXov(Ti roU KnKotr, they nuaofinU
with the hat/; tovs <f>tvyovTas avroit ^vvrfWa^tu, he rccimciled the
eri/es with them ; ofioKoynvmv aWrjXois, Ihei/ nr/ree with one another;
BiaXfyovrai tovto is, they converse with these; roiis tnTTovs ^o<^o(t
n\T)(Tid(nv, to brinfj the horses near to noises. "Ofioioi toU Tv(ji'Koli,
like the blind; Kvfiara u/f '"'ntca-iu, waves like mountains (Horn.);
Totff avToty Kvpa> onXon anXiafifvoi, armed with the same arms as
(U/rus. 'Eyyi/s ofioi, near a road (also the genitive, § 182, 2);
Sfia TJj fj/xtp^, as soon as (it was) day ; oftov t^ tti^X^, together with
the mud ; ra tovtois ((f)t^TJs, what comes next to these.
Note 1. To this class belong not merely such verbs as 8ia-
"KtyofMi, discourse with, but also ;xa;^o/xat, TroXe/ic'o), and others
signifying contend with, quarrel with; as fidxtvdai rols B^/Sai'otr,
to Jiffht with the Thebans ; 7ro\ffiov<nv fffiiv, they are at war with as;
tpi(ov<nv dWriXois, they contend with each other; buK^fptaBai ro'is
novtjpois, to be at variance with the base. So «s xftpar (\6e7v rtvi, or
f r \6yovs eX^fiv rivi, to come to a conjlict (or words) with any one.
NoTK 2. After adjectives of likeness, an abridged form of
expression may be used; as Ko^ai Xapirfaa-iu ofioiiai, hair like
(that of) the Graces (Horn.); ras laas irXiryas c/*ot, the same number
of blows with me.
m
Dative after Compound Verbs.
§ 187. The dative follows many verbs compounded
with eV, avv, or eVt ; and some compounded with irpo^,
Trapd, irepi, and vtto. E.g:
Tots v6p,ois (p.p,(va>u, abiding by the laics; ai f)8ova\ firi<TTriprj»
ovbefAiav ^vxii ip-noiovaiv, pleasures produce no knowledge in the
soul; (vfKdVTo r^ IltpiKXtl, they pressed hard on Pericles ; fpavr^
avvjibtiv ovbfv iTnarafifva, I was conscious to myself that I knew
nothing (lit. with myself); rjbrj nore trot (nrfXdfv ; did it ever occur to
you ? Upoa^dKXfiv tw Tdxio-p-ari, to attack the fortification : d8(\-
<l)os dvbpi Trapdr), let a brother .ftand by a man (i.e. let a man\>t
brother stand by him); rois kokoIs irr pininTovaiu, they are involved in
trils : vnoKfirai To-ntdinv rw if pa, the plain lies below the temple.
This dative sometimes depends on the jjreposition (§ 19:»), and
sometimes on the idea contained in the compound as a whole.
J
234
SYNTAX.
[§ 1<J8.
Cauial and Inttrumcntal DatlT*.
§ 188. 1- The dative is used to denote the cause,
manner^ mcans^ or instrument. B.g:
Causk : 'Ano6vfj(TKfi v6tr<p, he dies of disease ; noWaKts dyvoitf
Afiaprdvofifp, we open err through if/norance. Mannkk : Apdfttf
^TTfiyovTOj they pressed forward on n mil 'y noKKff Kpavyji iirtKBtiv, tn
advance with a loud shout ; rfj dXij^ct^, in truth ; ry owi, in reality ;
^iq, forcibly ; ravrrj, in this manner, thus. Mkans or Instiument :
'Opatfuif ToU o<f}6a\p.ots, we see with our eyes; iyvvivBrifTav rfj (TKfvfi
T<jju inXiov, Ihey were recognized by the fashion of their arms; KitKois
ia(T$at KOKo, to cure evils by evils; ovdtU tnaivov f)8ovals (KTrjaaro,
no one gains praise by pleasures (§ 205, 2).
Note 1. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of manner;
Rddvparbs ry (rw/iart, strong in his body ; n6\is, Qd^oKos ovofiart,
a city, Thapsacus by name (cf. § 160, 1).
Note 2. Xpao/biat, to use (to serve one\<t self by), takes the
instrumental dative ; as \p<ovTai dpyvpitp, they use money. A
neuter pronoun (e.g. ri, ri, on, or toOto) may be added as a cognate
accusative (§ 159, N. 2); as rt tovtoiv \pfjaonat; what shall I do with
these ? (lit. what use shall I make of these?). Nofit^o) has sometimes
the same meaning and construction as xpdopai.
2. The dative of manner is used with comparatives to
denote the d('g;rec of difference. E.v;.
IIoXX^ KpuTTov ianv, it is much better (better by much) ; rfj
KtiftaX^ fifi^tov (or eKdrroiv), a head taller (or shorter); to(tovt<^
tjbiov (a>, I live so much the more happily ; t(\vt} avdyKrit dadtPfartpa
fiaKpm, art is weaker than necessity by far.
So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other expressions
which imply comparison ; as poKpa KaXXiord t« koi iipia-ra, by far the
most beautiful and the best ; 8fKa cTttrt itpo ttjs «V IdXapipi vavfiaxias,
ten years before the battle of Salamis.
3. The dative sometimes denotes the ag-ent with passive
verbs, especially with the perfect and pluperfect. E-g:
TovTo tjbr) (TO I TTfTTpaKrai, this has now been done by you; cVetd^
7rapf(TKeva(TTo toIs Knpiv$tois, when preparation had been made by the
Corinthians (when the Corinthians had their preparation made).
Here there seems to be a reference to the agent's interest in the
result of the completed action expressed by the perfect and plu-
perfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly expressed by
vno, &c. and the genitive (§ 197, 1) ; rarely by the dative, except in
j)oetry.
§ 189.)
DATIVL.
235
4. With the verbal adjective in -t€o<?, in its personal
(passive) construction, the agent is expressed by the
dative ; in its impersonal (active) construction, by the
dative or the accusative. See § 281.
5. The dative is used to denote that by wliich any
person or thing is accompanied. E.g".
^HXdov ol Xlepo-at 7ra/i7rX»;^ft ffToXy, the Persians came icilh an
annij in full J'orve ; fjntls koi intron rols bvvar<oTdTnis Ka\ avbpdai
7ro/)f t;a>/A(da, let us marc/i both with the strongest horses and with men ;
o( \aKe8atfi6vtoi r^ re Kara yfjv arparcp npoaf^aWov r^ Tfi^iafiari koi
rats vavalv, the Lacedaemonians attached the wall both with their land
army and with their ships.
This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces, and is
originally connected with the dative of means or instrument. The
last example might be placed equally well under § 188, 1.
Note. This dative sometimes takes the dative of avrdr for
emphasis; as fiiav (vavv) avro'n dvbpdaiu tlKov., they took- one
(ship) men and all (see § 145, 1). Here the instrumental force
disappears, and the dative may refer to any class of persons or
things : thus bfvbpta avrfjaiv /J»0/«^t> '''c^*' W'*'^ i^i^ir very roots. Horn.
'
Dative of Time.
§ 189. The dative without a preposition often denotes
time when. This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting
day., night., nianth, or year., and to names oi festivals. E.g.
Trj avTjj ^fifpqi dnfdavev, he died on the same day; 'Eppit fii^ vvkti
ol nXftaroi ntpitKOTTTjaav, the most of the Hertnae were mutilated in one
niffht ; ol 2dptoi i^«no\iopKr)6r}iTav ivdrtj^ fiTjvi, the Samians were
taken by sieye in the ninth month; rtrdpra trei ^vvi^rftrav, they came
to terms in the fourth year; atantpd &ecrfio(f>opiois vr)<mvopktv, we
fast as if it were on the Thesmophoria. So rfj varfpaioi (sc. fjfifpa),
on the following day, and bevrepa, rpirrj, nn the second, third, &c., iu
giving the day of the month (§ 139, 1, Ni,t/e).
Note 1. Even the words mentioned, except names of festivals,
generally take tv when no adjective word is joined with them.
Thus ev wKTiy at night (rarely, in poetry, vvkti), but fiia vvkti, in one
night.
Note 2. A few expressions occur like iarfpa xp6v<o. in afer
time ; )((ip.Sivoi &pa, in the winter season ; vovfir)via {new-7Hoon day), on
thejirst of the month; and others in poetry.
236
SYNTAX.
[§ 190.
\W\
'Dative of Place (Poetic).
§ 190. In poetry, the dative without a preposition
often denotes the place ivhere. E.g.
'EXXaSt vaiav, dwelling in Hellas; aid i pi vaitou, dwelling in
heaven; oSpftri, on the mountains; ro^ afioicriu fx^"* having the
hoio on his shoulders; /xt>m dyp^, he remains in the country. Horn.
'HaBai 86p.ois, to sit at home. Aesch. Nvp dypolai rvyxdvei, now
he happens to be in the country. Soph.
Note 1. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the
names of Attic denies; as fj MapaOwvi ftdxni fhe battle at Marathon;
hwt iv "AOfivais. Still some exceptions occur.
Note 2. Some adverbs of place are really local datives ; as
TouTj;, T^8e, here ; oUoi, at home ; kvkKco, in a circle, all around. See
§ 61, N'. 2.
PREPOSITIONS.
§ 191. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and it is
chiefly as such that they appear in composition with verbs.
They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns
(or words used as nouns) with other parts of the sentence.
Besides the prepositions properly* so called, there are certain
adverbs used in the same wa}^ which cannot be compounded
with verbs : these are called improper prepositions, and are
av€Vf aTcp, a;(pi, p-^XPh /'*€'''«^''> €i/€Ka, ttXt/i/, wr. All of these
take the genitive, except ws, which takes the accusative.
I. Four prepositions take the genitive only : dvri, dTro,
cK (c^) , Trpd, — with the improper prepositions ai/eu, arep, dxph
p-^XP^i f^^Tf.$v, ei/cca, ttAj^j/.
1 . dvTf, instead of, for. Original meaning, over against, against.
In COM p. : against, in ojiposition, in return, instead.
2. dw<J (Lat. ab, a, Eng. off), from, off from, away from; originally (as
opposed to (f/c) separated from.
(a) of PLACE : d0' tiTTTov fidx^^^^O'h to fi^ht on horseback (from a
horse).
(b) of TIME : &vb to6tov tov xpbvov, from this time.
(c) of cause: dirh ariiffeuiv hirlirreii/, to be driven out by factions.
In COMP. ; from, away, off, in rdurn,^^^ iaii*j>»^
§ 191.]
PREPOSITIONS.
237
now
See
aTTO,
3. JK cr 1$ (§ 13, 2; T^at. e, ex), /ro7n, out of; originally (as opposed to
dw6)fi'0in within.
(a) of PLACE : iK Sn-dpTT/j ipe&yei, he is banished from Sparta,
{b) of TIME : e/f iraXaioTdrov, from the most ancient time.
(c) of ORIGIN : 6vap (k At6s eVrti', the dream comes from Zetis. So
also with passive verbs (instead of vir6 with gen.): rtfiaadai
iK Tivoi, to be honored by some one (the agent viewed as the
source).
In comp. : out, from, away, off.
4. irp<S (Lat. pro), before:
(a) of PLACE : vpd dvpdv, before the door.
(i) of TIME : irpb t^s p-dxth before the battle.
(c) of PREFERENCE : vpb To&ruv, in preference to this.
(d) of PROTECTION : TT/ai iraidwv fidxeffdai, to fight for one's children.
In COMP. : before, forward, forth.
5. So dfeu, 6.T€p, withoti' fixP*> t^XPh until; puera^i, between; HvtKa,
on account of; vXi^v, except.
IT. Two take the dative only : cV and crvv.
1. 4v, in, ec^uivalent to Lat. in with the ablative :
(a) of PLACE : fv Sird/»Tu, in Sparta ; — with a word implying
number, among: eV SiJ^y X^etJ', to speak (waxou^ before tlu
people.
{b) of TIME : kv TO^T(p TV 'ret, in this year.
In COMP. : in, on, at.
2. o-vv or {4v (Lat. oum), with, i.e. in company with or by aid of.
In COMP. : with, together.
III. Oiie takes the accusative only : eis or c?, — with the
improper preposition o>s.
1 . (Is or k, Kdo, to ; originally (as opposed to in) to ivithhi (Lat. in with
the accusative or inter):
(a) of PLACE : ftpvyov ets Miyapa, tJiey fled into Megara.
(b) of TIME : ets viiKra, (to) till night; els rbv (Lvaina XP<5*'0*'» for all
time. "
(c) of NUMBER and MEASURE : eh SiaKocrlovi, {amounting) to two
hundred ; ctj 86vap.iv, up to mie's power.
(d) of PURPOSE or REFERENCE ; xP'^t^^'^"- dvaXiaKekv ets rbv v6\(pov,
to spend money on the war ; xpMi^po^ eJ's ti, useful for any-
thing.
In COMP. : into, in, to.
2. tt>s, to, only with persons : etVteVat tiis nva, to go in to (visit) any one.
'(|;
Vi
(J p^ cxv IV.C ^\ - 'vA^ ^jlK: K)jV' > ^' '-^^''^ I^A^^^iX. <v<v .
238
SYNTAX.
[§ 191.
IV. Three take the genitive and accusative : 8ia, Kara, wrcp.
1 . Sid, through (Lat. di-, dis-).
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : di AffvlBos ^XOev, it went through a shield.
(b) of TIME : 5tA vvkt6s, through the night.
(c) of MEANS : Si' ipfjLTjp^wi Xiyeiv, to speak through an i.uerpreter.
{d) in various phrases like di otKTov ^x^iv, to pity ; dia <pi\lus Uvaxy
to be in friendship {with one).
(2) with the accusative, on account of, by reason of: 5t' 'Adiivriv, by
fielp of Athena; 5ia rovro, on this account.
In COMP. : through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-).
2. Kard (cf. adverb Kdrw, below), originally down (opposed to dvd).
(1) with the genitive:
(a) down from: dWeadai kotA ttjs irirpas, to leap doimi from the
rock.
(b) down upon : Kard. rrjs Ke<f>d\^s Karaxeiv, to pour dotvn upon the
head ; also against, under, concerning.
(2) with the accusative, doivn along ; of motion over, through, among,
into, agaiiist ; also according to, concerning.
(a) of PLACE : /card povv, down stream ; Karh. yrjv /cat ddXaaaav,
by land and by sea.
(b) of TIME : Kara Tij/ wdXefiov, during (at the time of) the war.
(c) DISTRIBUTIVELY : Kara rpeh, by threes, three by three ; Kad\
Tjixipavj day by day, daily.
In COMP. : down, against.
3. im{pf over (Lat. super).
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : ivkp t^s ifc^aX^j, over (his) head; ivip t^s $a\daai)i,
above {away from) the sea.
(b) for, in behalf of (opposed to Kard) : ndxfffOai vir^pripoi, to fight
for 07ie (originally over hiin) ; vvip acv d^SoiKa, I fear for
you ; iirip twos xfyeiv, to speak in place of one ; in the orators
sometimes concerning (like irepl).
(2) with the accusative, over, beyond, of place and measure.
In COMP.' over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of.
V. One takes the dative and accusative (very rarely the
genitive) : am.
dvd (cf. adverb dv«, above), originally up (opposed to uard).
(1) with the dative (only Epic and Lyric), up on : dvA aKi^rptp, oni a
sceptre.
§ 191.]
PREPOSITIONS.
239
(2) with the accusative, up along ; and of motion over, throtigh,
among (cf. KarA.).
(a) of PLACE : avb. ftovv, up stream ; olpol arparbv, through the army
(Horn.).
(&) of TIME ; avbi Tracrav tt^v vfiipav, all through tlie day.
(c) In DISTRIBUTIVE expressions : avbi. rirrapai, by fours.
In COMP. : up, back, again.
(3) with the genitive, only in the Homeric expression, dvA vtjbi fialveiv,
to go on board sMp.
y the
, on a
VI. Seven take the genitive, dative^ and accusative : dficfii,
CTTt', fl€Td^ TTUpd, TTtpi^ Trp6<i., VTTO.
1. &|Ji^£ (Lat. amb-), connected with d)u^, both; originally on both
sides of; hence about.
(1) with the genitive (rare in prose), about, concerning.
(2) with the dative (only Ionic and poetic), about; \\qxicq concerning,
on account of
(8) with the acclsative, about, near, of place, time, number, etc, :
d/i0' fiXa, by the sea ; afopl delXrfv, near evening ; a.p.<t>l rd e^-qKOvra,
about sixty (circiter sexaginta); so d/i0i rt ^X"''* ^^ be {busy) about
a thing.
In COMP. : about, on both sides. '
2. iirCf (wt, upon.
(1) with the genitive :
(a) of PLACE : iirl iripryov, on a tower ; sometimes towards : ivl
^dfiov irXeiv, to sail {upo7i) towards Samos.
(6) of time : iip' rj/uwj/, in our time.
(2) with the dative :
(a) of place: iid rrj daXdffaxi oUeiv, to live upon {by) tJie sea.
(b) of time: iirl Ti^ar^^dip, upon the signal; inl Toiyrois, thereupon.
(c) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, on account of, in the power
of; and in many other relations : see the Lexicon.
(3) with the accusative, originally up to ; then to, toicards, against :
dva^alveiv i<p' 'iirirov, to mount a horse ; iiri Se^id, to the right.
In comp. : tcpon, over, after, toward, to, for, at, against, besides.
3. (iird (akin to (i^o'os, Lat. medius), amid, among.
(1) with the GENITIVE, with, on the side of: /xerd twv <TVfindx<>'v Tots
iroXejilois fjLdx^ff^oLi, with {the help of ) tJie allies to fight with
{against) the enemy (§ 186, N. 1).
(2) with the dative (poetic, chiefly Epic), among.
'■ i\
i I
ill'
240
SYNTAX.
[§ 191.
h
(3) with the accusative :
(a) into (the midst of), after {in quest of), for (poetic).
(6) generally a/j!cr, next to: /u,ctoi_t6>^ 7r6Xe/ui*;, ifter the war; /*^7t-
(TTOj )wctA rbv "IffTpov, ilielargcst {river) next to tlie Ister.
In COMP. : with (of sharing), among, after {in quest of) : it also denotes
cJuxnge, as in ujeravoju, c/umge one's mind, repent.
4 . irapd, by, near, alongside of (see Note 1).
(1) with the GENITIVE, from beside, from.
(2) with the dative, near: irapk Kiptfi 6vt€%, being near Cyrus.
(3) with the accusative, to {a place) near, to; also by the side of, beyond
or beside, except, along loith, because of.
(a) of PLACE : d^twctrat irapb. Kvpov, he comes to Cyrus.
{b) of TIME : fl-opd jrdvra rbv xP^^'^^t throughout the whole time.
(o) of CAUSE : irapa ttjv ijfieT^pav d/iiXeiav, on account of our neglect.
{d) with idea of beyond or beside, and except: oCik Hart, iraph. raxha
dXXo, tliere are no othars besides tJicse ; irapcL rbv vbixov, con-
trary to the law (properly beyond it).
In coMP. : beside, along by, hitherward, wrongly (beside tlie mark), over
(as in overstep).
5. ir«p(, around (on all sides).
(1) with the GENITIVE, about, concerning (Lat. de): vepl varpbi ip'tadai,
to inquire about his fatlier ; also (poetic) above; Kparepbs vepl
vavTuv, migfity above all.
(2) with the dative, about, around, coticerning, seldom in \ttic prose.
(3) with the accusative, nearly the same as a.p.<pl.
In COMP. : around, about, exceedingly.
6. Trpds, at or by (in front oO, akin to irp<5.
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) in front of, looking towards : irpbi G/jpKijj KeJadai, to be situated
over against Thrace ; — in swearing : vph^ deuv, before {by)
the Oods. Sometimes pertaining to (as cnaracter): ^ Kapra
irpbi yvpaiKbi earip, surely it is very like a wonnan.
(b) from (properly fc^m before) : Ti/xrjv npbs Zrjvbi ^x'W'^f *"' having
honor from Leur ,• s^r,l^^in) -s with passive verbs (like U7r6).
Trpf)% Tipoi ipiXeiadeii, '.o l^- loved i y some one.
(2) with the dative :
(a) at: 6 Ku/sos ^v rpi- Ba h'lvvn., Ciirus xiis at L^>J ylon,
{b) in addition to : irf - r(,i,Tn^, Imdds this, furthr, -more.
191.]
PREPOSITIONS.
^41
§191.
lenotes
beyond
me.
neglect.
4 TaOra
,Qv, cmi-
•k), over
ipkffOai,
i6s trepl
prose.
ituafed
\)re (btj)
1^ KCLpra
having
Le 11^6).
(3) with the accusative:
(a) to: Uvai irp6s''0\vfivov, to go to Olywpiis.
{b) toioards: irpbi Boppav, towards the North; so of persons: iriaTWi
BiaKeiffdai irpbs riva^ to be faithfully disjwsed towards one ;
irpbi dWiJXous ijavxiav dxov, they kept the peace towards one
another.
(c) with a view to, in reference to : irpbi rl fie ravr epuTq.^, (to what
end) for what do you ask me this? npbs ttji* di/va/iiv, according
to one's power.
In COMP. : to, towards, against, besides.
7. {m6, under (Lat. sub), by.
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE ^67^5, tinder the earth ; sometimes from under.
{b) to denote the agent with passive verbs: Tifiaadai iwb rwv iroKi-
Twv, to be honored by the citizens.
(c) of cause: {iirb S4ovi, through fear ; ixfi' i}dovr)i,through pleasure.
(2) with the dative (especially poetic): Oayeiv vv' 'l\l<fi, to perish under
{Uie walls of) Ilium.
(3) with the accusative :
(a) of place, under, properly to {a place) under.
(J) of TIME, towards {entering into) : yv b viKra, just before night
(Lat. subnoctem): sometimes during.
In COMP.: under, secretly, slightly, gradually.
Note 1. Further details of the meaning and use of the prepo-
sitions must be learned by practice and from the Lexicon. In
general, the accusative is the case used with prepositions to denote
that towards which, over which, along which, or upon which motion
takes place; the genitive, to denote that fi-om v/hich anything pro-
ceeds; the dative, to denote that in which anything takes place.
It will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case often
modifies the expression by which we translate a given preposition :
thus napa means near, alongside of; and we have i rapa tov ^aai-
Xftos, from the neighborhood of the king: napa ra §a a iXfl, in the
neigJihorhood of the king; irapa tou ^aaiXla., into the neighborhood
of the king.
Note 2. The original adverbial use of the prepositions some-
times appears when they are used without a noun; this occurs
especially in the older (ireek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus irepi,
roundabout or exceedingly, in Homer ; npos fie or koi npos, and beside.s,
in Herodotus.
Note 3. The preposition of a compound verb may also stand
separately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears ; as cVi
KP((f)as JjXde (KVf^as rV^X^f), darknesa came on; fjplv dvo Xoiyov
dfJLvvai (dnapvvai), to ward off destruction from us.
This is called tmesis, and is found chiefly in Homer.
16
li
\l
tit »!
i
242
SYNTAX.
[§ 192.
Jiii
f'
Note 4. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to
which it belongs ; as v(a>v Stto, iraidos mpi ; oXfcras ano (for dnoXe-
aas). For the accent see § 23, 2.
Note 5. A few prepositions are used adverbially with a verb
understood; as irdpa for ndpeari, en-t and /leVa (in Homer) for
eirtari and fifT«m. So evi for eveari, and ava, up ! for dvaara {avd-
oTTidi). For the accent see § 23, 2.
Note 6. Sometimes ds with the accusative or «« or diro with the
genitive is used in expressions which themselves imply no motion,
with reference to some motion implied or expressed in' the context;
as at ^vvohot fs TO lepov eyiypovro, the synods were held in the temple
(lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the temple to
hold the synods) ; toIs (k livKov \T)(f>6(i(ri (eoiKores), like those cap-
tured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylos, i.e. the captives
from Pylos; Birjpnaaro Koi aira to. duo rmv oiKitov ^v\a, even the
very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been stolen. So
fv with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion, referring
to rest which follows the motion ; as tv tm iroTop^ ftreaov, they fell
(into and remained) m the river; so iv yoivaai niTTTfiv, to fall on
one^s knees. These are instances of what is called the constructio
praeynans.
§ 192. (^Recapitulation.) 1. The following prepositions
take the genitive: d,fi(}>L, d-vri, otto, Bid, iK (e^), ctti, kutu, ficrd,
vapd, Trcp,', Trpo, Trpos, vir^p, vtto, — i.e. all except «is, iv, avv, dvd.
Also the improper prepositions dv€v, arcp, a^pi, p-^xPh H-^Ta$Vf
€V€Ka, ttXt^v.
2. The following take the dative : dfi^i, dm, eV, eVi, /xcra,
TTapa, TTCpt, TTpds, (XVV, VTTO.
3. The following take the accusative: dfi<fii, dvd, Sid, eis (cs),
CTTt, Ka-rd fitrdy irapd, irtpi, Trpos, virep, vrro, — i.e. all except
dvTi, a.ir6, €K, cV, irpo, avv. So also ws (with words denoting
persons) .
§ 193. A preposition is often followed by its own case
when it is part of a compound verb. U.ff.
IlapeKOfilCovTo Ti)v 'iraXiai/, they sailed along the coast of Italy ;
fafjXdf /if, it occurred to me; f] prjrrjp (rvvfTrparrfu avra> t^ vra, his
mother assisted him in this (i.e. fnpaTT€ crvv avrio). For examples of
the genitive, see § 177; for those of the dative, see § 187.
[§ 192.
'erb to
aTToXe-
a verb
Bi) tor
(» »
ava-
ith the
notion,
ontext ;
; temple
[uple to
)se cap-
captives
even the
en. So
jferring
'hey fell
fall on
natructio
>sitions
d, /uLcra,
vVf dva.
lACTtt^V,
except
enoting
vn case
/ Italy;
V yra, his
oiples of
§ 196.]
ADVERBS.
advp:rbs.
243
§ 194. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs. E.g:
OuTwy «in€v, thus he spoke; ins dvvafiai, as I am able; npSiTOP
dn^\6e, he first went awaif . to d'Krfduts kqkov, that which is truly evil :
fiaWov irpeirovTui fjfi(f).ic(Tfi€vr), more becominyly dressed.
For adjectives used as adverbs, see § 1 38, N. 7. For a«lverbs preceded
by the article, aud nuaht'yiug a noun like adjectives, sue § 141, N. 3.
For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see §§ 168 (with N. 3); 182, 2;
185 ; 186. For adverbs as prepositions, see § 191. For negative adverbs,
see § 283.
thp: verb.
VOICES.
Active.
§ 195. In the active voice the subject is represented
as acting ; as r/oeTrw rov^ 6(f)6a\ijLov^, I turn my eyes ; o
irarrjp ^iXel rov iraiha, the father tones the child; 6 'iinTo^
Tpex^i^ the horse runs.
Notp: 1. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive
verbs; as rpt^to, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle
or passive voice includes many deponent verbs which are active and
transitive in meaning; as ^ovXofxai tovto, I waul this. Some transi-
tive verbs have certain intransitive tenses; as HarrfKa, I stand, earrju,
I stood, from torj/ftt, place. Such tenses are said to have a middle,
or sometimes even a passive, meaning.
Note 2. The same verb may be both transitive and intransi-
tive; SLH f\avv(t>, drive (trans, or intrans.) or march. Tlie intransi-
tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object; as
fXavpeiv (iTTTTOi/ or apua), re\fVTai> (jov ^iov), to end (life) or to die.
Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, &c.
Passive.
§ 196. In the passive voice the subject is represented
as acted upon ; as 6 irah viro rov Trarpo^ ^tXetrat, the
child is loved by the father.
'!>
Iti
244
SYNTAX.
[§ 1^7.
In I
4
f! I
I !
§ 197, 1 . T1i(^ objn'l of the active bocomos tho subject
ot" the passive. I'tie subject of the active, the a^eiit, is
j^enerally expressed by viro and tlv^ genitive in the pas-
sive eonstruetion. (See § 190 and the example.)
Kven a genitive or dative used as a direct object can become the
"^subject of the passive ; as Karu0/;oi«((rai vr' tfioi, he is iletipisnl hi/ tite
(cf. KaTa<ppov(o airov, § 171, 2); nKTTfVfTcu ini) Ttov dpxofifvoiv, lie />"
Iriisled III/ his suhjects (cf. nurrfvovaip avra, § 184, 2); so df}\6fji(vos,
ruled over, is passive of «px**'» '''^^^ (§ ^"1' '^)-
NoTK 1. Other prepositions than iirro with the genitive of the
agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic pros*?. Sucli
are napd, irpot, €k, and otto.
NoTK 2. When the active is followed by two accusatives, or l)y
an accusative of a thijig and a dative of a per.son, the case denoting
a /)erson is generally made the subject of the passive, and tlie other
(an accusative) remains unchanged. £".//.
Oi8fv «?.•:- ^idda-Ktrai dpSptonos, the man is taught nothing else (in
t^' ctiV ^ ovuic <iXXo SiddcTKOvat tI)v livdpumov). "AXXo ti fiei^ov
e7riTa\6r]afa6(, you tvill ''""e some other gj'f^iier covunand imposed on
you (active, «XXo n /iftfoi/ vfuv iirird^ovtriv, they iinll impose some other
greater command on you). Ot i7nTeTpafLp.evoi ti)v (f)v%aKr)v, those to
whom the guard has been intrusted (active, f-nvrptTifiv rrjv (fivKaKfju tov-
Tots). Ai<t)Bfpav finipp-fvosi clad in a Uathern jerkin (active, tpdnrnv
Ti Tin, to ,it a thing on one). So eKKmrTfo-Bai top 6<f)6a\fi6v, to hare
his eye cut out, and dirortfjiVfaOai tijv k- .nA^r/. to hare his ftead cut ojf',
&c., from possible active constructions f/aeonTfiu ri rivi, and dnort-
fivfiv Ti Ttvi (§ 184, 3, N. 4). This construction has nothing to do
with that ot S 160.
The first t^o examples are cases of the cognate accusative of the
thing retained with the passive, while the accusative or dative of
the person is made the subject (§ 159, Notes 2 and 4).
2. The perfect and pluperfect passive generally take the
dative of the agent (§ 188, 3).
The perisonal verbal in -reof; takes the dative, the imper-
sonal ill -Tioi' the dative or accusative, of the agent (§ 188, 4).
§ 198. The subject of the passive may be a neuter
adjective which represents a cognate accusative of the
active construction ; or the passive may be used imper-
sonally, the subject being implied in the idea of the verb
itself. U.g.
I
§11)0,1
THE VERll- VOICES.
245
*A<r*3«tTai ov^tv, no oct of impiety is cnmrniUrd (act. aac/Stli/ ouSfV,
§ 159, N. 2). So Tra/)f£rKfua(TT(u, jin'pnrntion has been viade (it is
prepared) ; AfiapTavtrai, error is conuiutltd (it is erred) : cf . ventuin
est. This occurs chiefly in such inuticipial expressions as ra fjae-
^rjfifua, the impious nvis which hiira hcen committetl ; ra Kiudvpiv-
Bfvra., the risks which ivare noi : ra r)p,af)TT}fxtva, the errors which
hare been made, &c. ( 5ee § \M, N. 1, (/). Even an intransitive
verb may tlius have a passive voice.
Mlfldle.
§ 199. In the middlo voice the subject is represented
as acting upon hiniself,*or in some manner which concerns
himselt".
1. As acting on himself: irpdirovTo 7rpo<i Xtjareiav,
the// turned themse/res to piraeif. This, though the most
natural, is the least common use of the middle.
2. As acting fur himself or vnth referenee to himself:
6 hr)fio^ riOerai v6fiov<i, the people make laivs for them-
se/t^es, whereas TiOrjat vopiov^ would properly be said of a
lawgiver; tovtov /jLeTaTrifjL'rrofiai^ I send for him Qo come
to me} ; uTreTrefiTrero avTov<i^ he dismissed them.
3. As acting on an object which belongs to himself:
^Xde \va6/x€vo<i Ovyarpa, he eame to ransom his (jown)
davg'hter. Hom.
Rkmark. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in
the last example.
NoTK 1. Often the middle expresses no more than is implied in
the active; thus rponamv la-raa-Oai, to raise a trophif for themselves,
generally adds nothing but the expression to what is implied in
rp&Ttaiov iaravai, to raise a trophy ; and either form can be used.
The middle sometimes appears not to differ at all from the active
in meaning; as the poetic tSeV^t, to see, and Ihiiv.
XoTK 2. The middle sometimes has a causative meaning ; as
fbiba^dfifjv (Tf, f had you taught.
This gives rise to some special uses of the middle; as in 8auei(u),
lend, 8auei(ofiai, borrow (cause somebody Ut len*' to on€\s self). iSo
piaOu). let, fuadovfiai., hire (cause to be let to out's self) ; / let iiiysilj
for pay is ffiavrou ixicrBi}.
Note 3. The middle of certain verbs is peculiar in its meaning.
Thus, arro6i6a)/btt, give back, dnodidonatj -sell ; ypdcfw, wrUe ox propose
!t
I
'
) I.
246
SYNTAX.
(§ 200.
n ml*", ypd(f>onai, inflict; rifioipo) nut, I nvenf/f. n person, rifKapovfial
Tiva, I ui'eutje mijuelj on n person or / punish a person : ai,Ta>, JaslcHy
anrouai, cling to {fasten mijsel f to) \ 80 €xoitat, hold to.
The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both
active and middle; thus ypa<f>TJi/ai can mean either to he written or
/(, he im/icted.
NoTK 4. Tlie future middle of some verbs has a passive sense;
as dSiKU), wrong, dbiKrjanpai, I shall he wronged.
TENSES.
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
§ 200. The tenses of the indicative express action as
follows : —
Present, continued or repeated present action : ypa.<f>w,
lam writing or I ivrile (habitually).
Imperfect, continued or repeated past action : €ypaff>ov,
I was writing or / used to write.
Perfect, action finished in present time : ytypa<f>a^ I have
written.
Pluperfect, action finished in past time : iyeypd<f}€iv, I had
written.
Aorist, simple past action (N. 5) : (.ypa\\ia, f wrote.
Future, future action : ypai/^w, / shall write or / shall be
writing.
Future Perfect, action to be finished in future time :
yeypai/rcTtti, it will have been tvritten.
Note 1. In narration, the present is sometimes used vividly for
the aorist; as iroptvtTai irpot ^aai\fa ^ fbvvaro rdxifTra, lie goes
(went) to the king as fast as he could.
For the present expressing a general truth, see § 205, 1-
Note 2. The present and especially the imperfect often express
an attempted notion; as nt iBova tv vpas, theg ere trt/ing to persuade
yon: 'AXovvrjaov tbiHov, he offered {tried, to gire) Halonnesus ; A
iirpdrratTo ovk (ytvero, what was attempted did not happen.
Notk 3. (.'A The presents r\Ka>, I am co^ne, a,n(\ oi\opai, I am
(tone, have the torce of perfects ; the imperfects having the force of
pluperfects, (('f. N. 6.)
§ 200.]
TENSES.
247
(h^ The present tifu, I am fining, has a future sense, and is used
as a tuture of ?p;^o/iat, iXeixrofxai not being ordinarily used in Attic
prose.
NoTK 4. The present with naXni or any other expression of
past time has the force of a present and perfect combined ; as
rraXat (rot tovto Xcyo), I have long been lelLing you this {^ichich I now
tell).
NoTK r>. (n) The aorist takes its name (adptoror, utt/imilrfl^
unqualified) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none
of the limitations {opoi) as to completion, continuance, repetition, &c.
which belong to tlie otlier past tenses. It corresponds exactly to
the so-called imperfect iu Knglish, whereas the Greek imperfect
corresponds to the forms J was doing, &c. Thus, tiroiei toCto is
he icas doing this or he did this habitual I n ; -irtiroirfKf tovto is he has
alreadji done this : fntiroirjKfi tovto is he had already (at some past
time) done this; but f'noiijae tovto is simply he did this, without
qualification of any kind.
(h) The aorist of verbs which denote a stale or condition generally
expresses the entrance into that state or condition; as ttXoutw, / am
rich ; iirkovTow, 1 was rich ; fn\ovTT}a-a, I became rich. So c/SacriXfuo'r,
he became Icing ; ^p^e, he obtained ojfice.
(c) The distinction between the imperfect and aorist was some-
times neglected, especially in the earlier Greek. See ^aivou and ^rj
in //. i. 437 and 439; ^a>\(To and ^oKcto in //. ii. 43 and 45;
tkintv and Xfln-f , //. ii. 106 and 107.
Note 6. Some perfects have a present meaning; as dvrjaKtiv,
to die, T(Bvr]K€uai, to be dead; yiyptadai, to become, ytyovivai,
to be; p,ifjLvr}aKttu, to remind, fif ixvfjadai, to remember; KaXeiv, to call,
KfK'Kfiadat, to be called. So ol8a, I know, novi. This is usually
explained by the meaning of the verb.
In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as
fidtiv, I knew (§ 127). (Cf. N. 3, a.)
Note 7. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future;
as ft ftf ala-6T)(r(Tat o\<o'Ka, if he shall perceive me, I am ruined
(peril). So sometimes the present; as oTroXXv/im, I perish! (for
1 shall perish).
Note 8. The second person of the future may express a per-
mission, or even a command ; as irpd^fis olov &v OfXtji, you may act
as you please; navTms 8e tovto 8 p din- is, and by all means do thi.'^
(you shall do this). So in imprecations; as dnoXuaOe, to destruction
icith you! (lit. yon shall perish). See ^ 257, where the future with
ov /U17 is explained in this way.
Note 9. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic
future, denoting that a future act will be immediate or decirire ; as
?i !
..^...
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
1.1
■^ Itt 12.2
2? itt "^
us
140
L25 III 1.4
■ 2.0
6"
7
y]
Fhotc)graphic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WIST MAIN STRUT
WIBSTU.N.Y. UStO
(716) t72-4503
4^
?
**
248
SYNTAX.
l§ 201.
4>pd(f Koi fTcn-pa^crai, speaks and it shall be (no sooner said than)
done. Compare the similar use of the perfect infinitive, § 202, 2, N. 2.
§ 201. The division of the tenses of the indicative
into primary and secondary (or historical) is explained
in § 90, 2.
In dependent clauses, when the construction allows
both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and
optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly follows
primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses.
E.sr.
TlpaTTovfTiv & hv ^ovXwvTai, they do whatever they please;
tirpaTTov A /SovXotvro, they did whatever they pleased. \iyov<ri
oT» TovTo PovXovrai, they say that they wish for this; eXe^av oi
~ a 'N jI -.. --.'J jI_j il.-.. ...-.•..!. -J ^.... JI..V.
p
OTl
rovro /SovXotvro, they said that they wished for this.
These constructions will be explained hereafter (§§ 233, 243).
Remark. The gnomic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to
present time (§ 205, 2) ; and the historic present is secondary, as it
refers to past time (§ 200, N. 1).
Note 1. The only exception to this principle occurs in indirect
discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always be re-
tained, even after secondary tenses. See § 242, § 248, Note, § 216, 2.
Note 2. The distinction into primary and secondary tenses
extends to the dependent moods only where the tenses keep the
same distinction of time which they have in the indicative, as in the
optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (§ 203).
An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent
conditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might
otherwise be in the subjunctive : thus we should generally have
irparrouv hv & /SovXott^o, they would do whatever they (might please)
pleased (see the first example under § 201^. See § 235, 1. Such an
optative seldom assimilates the subjunctive or indicative of a final
or object clause (§ 215) in prose; but oftener in poetiy. It very
rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse, although it
may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (§ 244, N. 1).
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
A. Not In Indirect Discourse.
§ 202* In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in the
optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect discourse
(§ 203), the tenses chiefly used are the present and aoiist.
202.]
TENSES.
249
lal
1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the present
denotes a continued or repecUed action, while the aorist denotes
a simple occurrence of the action, the time of both being pre-
cisely the same. £.g.
*Eav iroifj rovrot if he shall do this (hahituolly), iav Trot^o-jy tovto,
(simply) if he shall do this; el ttoioi?; toito, if he should do this
(habitually), el noiffo-ete tovto, (simply) if he should do this; irniei
TOVTO, do this (habitually), noirjaov tovto, (simply) do this. Ovtu
viKtiaaifii T cyo) kqI uofiiCoiiiyjv ao<f>6s, on this condition may I
gain the victory (aor.) and be considered (pies.) wise. BouXcTm toCto
iToielv, he wishes to do this (habitually); /SovXeTot tovto Trot^aai,
(simply) he wishes to do this.
Tnis is a distinction entirely miknown to the Latin, which has
(for example) onl^ one form, .si faciat, corresponding to ft n-otot^
and (( ironjaeieu. Even the Greek does not always regard it; and
in many cases it is indifferent which tense is used.
2. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions,
represents an action &b finished at the time at which the pres-
ent would represent it as going on. JS.g,
AeioiKa fx^ X^diju neiroirjKri, I fear lest it may prove to hare caused
forget fulness (fiti noifj would mean lest it may cause). Mijdfi/i /3o>;-
$eiv ht n^ np6Tepos 0e^oT)drfKi}i v/iiv ^, to help no one who shall not
previously have helped you (6s &v fifi .... 3017^0 would mean who
shall not previously help you). Ovk &v dia tovto y eiev ovk ev6vs dedu-
KOTes, they would not (on enquiry) prove to have failed to pay imme-
diately on this account (with 8 180 lev this would mean they would not
fail to pay). Ov /3ovXev«o-dat ert &pa, oKKa /Se/SovXcCcr^at, it
is no longer time to be deliberating, but (it is time) to have fnished
deliberating.
Note 1. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command
that something shall be decisive and permanent ,* as toOto elprftrBo,
let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this
(which follows) be said once for all ; nexpi Tovhe mpivBa vfi&v ij j8pa-
dvT^s, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed. Tnis
is confined to the third person singular passive; the rare second
person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active is used
only when the perfect has a present meaning (§ 200, N. 6).
Note 2. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or
permanence (like the imperative, N. 1), and sometimes it is merely
more emphatic than the present; as elnov Ti\v dvpav KtK\e'i<r6ai, they
ordered the gate io be shut (and kept so) ; ^Xavvev tir\ tovs Mevatvos,
CtOT eKelvovs eKnenXfjxOai koi Tpex.eiv enX to oiiKa, so that they were
(once fur all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arm. The regular
mmgtmmm
250
SYNTAX.
[§203.
meaning of this tense, when it is not in indirect discourse, is that
given in § 202, 2. See § 95, 1, Note.
3. (a) The future infinitive is regularly used only to
represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (§ 203) .
(b) It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in place
of the regular present or aorist, to make more emphatic
a future idea which the infinitive receives from the con-
text. Kg.
'E8€r)dT)aav tS)V Mtyapiatv vavai (r(l)as ^vftirpoirefi^eip, they asked
the Megarians to escort them with ships: ovk diroKw'Kva-dP dvrarol
oPTts, not being able to prevent. So rarely after wore, and to express
a purpose. In all these constructions the future is strictly excep-
tional, the only regular forms of the infinitive out of indirect dis-
course being the present and aorist, except in the few cases in which
the perfect is used (§ 202, 2) and in the case mentioned in the
following Note. See also § 203, N. 2.
Note. One regular exception to the principle just stated is
found in the periphrastic future (§ 118, 6), where the present and
future infinitives with fieXXa are equally common, but the aorist
seldom occurs.
4. The future optative is used only in indirect discourse
and constructions which involve this (§ 203, N. 3).
B. In Indirect Dlscoarge.
Remark. The term indirect discourse includes all clauses de-
pending on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts
or words of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the
general structure of the sentence. It includes of course all indirect
quotations and questions.
§ 203* Wheii the optative and infinitive stand in indirect
discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of the
same verb in direct discourse. Kg.
' "EAryei' ori ypd(f)oi, he said that he was icriting (he said yp&^at, T
am icriting); fXtytv on ypdyltoi, he said that he would write (ne said
■y^d\^a>, / will W7Hte)', eKeytv on ypa^fiep, he said that he had
written (he said eypa>/^a); eXt-yfi/ on ysypad)o>s «trj, he said that
he had already written (he said yfypa<f)a). Hpero ei ns tfiov ein
ao<l>aT(pos, he asked whether any one was wiser than I (he asked
(an ns ;).
§ 203.]
TENSES.
251
t>a>, /
said
had
that
sked
♦70-1 ypa(f)fiv, he sat/s that he in n'ritinff (he say^ ypdc^w) ; (^ijrri
ypdylreiv, he says that he wilt write (ypd'^w) ; ifyrfoi ypdyj^ai, he satjs
that he wrote (eypayj/a); (fujtri ytypa^tvat, he says that he has loritten
{yiy pa(^a).
EiTr*!/ on avbpa ay 01 ov (ip$at fitot, he said that he was bringing a
man whom it was necessary to confine (he said nudpa ayat hu eip^at
8fi). 'EXoyi^ovTo cor, « nfj fidxaivTo^ anoaTrjaotuTo al TrdXftr,
t/iey considered that, if they should not fght, the cities would revolt
(they thought eau pfj naxv>fifOa, anoarrfffovTai, if we do notjight,
they will re roll).
These constructions will be explained in § 243, § 246, and § 247.
1 lere they merely show the different force of the tenses in indirect
discourse and in other constructions. Compare especially the
difference between <f)r]ai ypd(f>eip and Ariai ypd^ai under § 203
with that between jiovXerai 7roi«tv and /SovXfrat noifiaat under
§<202. Notice also the same distinction m respect to the present
and aorist optative.
Note 1 . The present infinitive may represent the imperfect as
well as the present indicative; as rivas evxas vitoKap-^veT (vxeeQai
Tov ^iKmitov oT e<m(v8«v; what prayers do you suppose Philip made
when he was pouring libations? (i.e. rt'i/ar rjiixtro;). The perfect
infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluperfect. In such
cases the time of the infinitive must always be shown by the
context (as above by or etnrfvSfu).
So rarely the present optative represents the imperfect indicative
(§ 243, Note 1). See § 204, Note 1.
Note 2. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c. form an in-
termediate class between verbs which take the infinitive in indirect
discourse and those which do not (see Rem. before § 203); and they
allow either the future infinitive (as in § 203) or the present and
aorist (as in § 202). E.g.
"HXniCov fidxr)v fataSat, they expected that there would be a battle
(Thuc); but h oiktoTe rfXirurtu naOeiv, what he never expected to
suffer (Eur.). 'Yirfaxerd fioi finv\«vaaa0ai, and inrtaxfTO prfxainip
iraot^tiv (both in Xen.).
The construction of indirect discourse (the future) is the more
common here. In English we can say / hope {expect or promise)
to do this J like Troteli' or iroi^aat] or / hope I shall do this, like
iroti^<r«tv.
Note 3. The future optative is never used except as the repre-
sentative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse (as
in the examples under § 203), or in the construction of § 217 (which
is governed oy the principles of indirect discourse) . Even here the
future indicative is generally retained. See § 217, and § 248,
Note. _/-
ii
252 SYNTAX.
III. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPIE.
[§20i
§ 204* The tenses of the participle generally express the
same time as those of the indicative ; but they are present,
past, or future relatively to the time of the verb with which
they are connected. E.g.
'Afiapravti rovro noi&Vf he errs in doing thui ; rjfidpravt rovro
noitov, he erred in doing (hix ; AfiaprijafTat rovro itoiau, he wUl err in
doing this. (Here iromv is hrst present, then past, then future, abso-
luteiy; but always present to the verb of the sentence.) Tavra
flirovTfs an^\$ov, having said this, they departed. Ov noWo\ (ftai-
poPToi ^vvt\d6vT€S, not many appear to have Joined the expedition.
'Eir^vfaav tovs tlpTfKdras, they praised those who had (already)
spoken. Tovro iroi^<r<ov €p\(Tai, he is coming to do this, tovto irotjj-
(ratp ^\d«v, he came to do this. "Ant^de ravra Xa/3a>i/, take this and f)e
oJf^Xa^wv being past to SneXde, but absolutely future).
Note 1. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as
oi8a KaKfivo <r<i><j)povovPTf, tare ScoKparet avvijarrjv, J know that they
both were continent, as long as they associated with Socrates (i.e.
f<r<o(l>pov(iTt)v). See § 203, Note 1.
Note 2. The aorist participle in certain constructions does not
denote time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses a
simple occurrence without regard to time (like the aorist infinitive in
§ 202). This is so in the following examples: —
*Etux*i' «\Bav he happened to come; i\a6(v f\Outv, he came
secretly; (<j)6rj (\6a>v, he came frst. (See § 279, 4.) nepubtiur^v
yrju Tfitidtia-av, to allow the land to be ravaged (to see it ravaged).
(See § 279, 3.) So sometimes when the participle denotes that in
which the action of the verb consists (§ 277) ; as «u y ciroiijo-as
(ivapvijtras fie, you did well in reminding me.
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
§ 205* 1. The present is the tense commonly used in
Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an
habitual action ; as TrXotoi; et? ArjXov *A0r]vaioi ire/nTrovo'iv,
the Athenians send a ship to Delos {annualUj).
2. In animated language the aorist is used in this
sense. This is called the gnomic aorist^ and is generally
translated by the English present. £.g.
§ 207.]
THE PABTICLE "AN.
253
Hv Tis TovToiu rt irapaPatvjj, (tjulau cvrois iiriBttrav^ i.e. (he;i
impose n peuofftf on nit who trannffrcss. Mi" rifttpa rov ft«u KoBtiXtp
vyjfodtp, Toi' 8' rjp ava, one day {often) brings down one man from a
height and raises another high.
Note 1. Here one distinct case in past time is vividly used to
represent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as
noXKditis, often, rjbr}, already, oihra, never yet, illustrate the construc-
tion; as dBvfiovvTfs avbpei oSrroi Tponatov sartjaav, disheartened men
never yet raised a trophy, i.e. never raise a trophy.
Note 2. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric
similes; as ^pme 8' m ore ris dpvs {jpiirtv, and he fell, as when same
oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell).
Note 3. The gnomic aorist sometimes occurs in indirect dis-
course in the infinitive and participle, and even in the optative.
3. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. E.g.
Tu hi fi^ ffiirobav dvavrayoiulaT^ tvvoiqi rert'/ii^rat, but those who are
not before men's eyes are honored with a good will which has no
rivalry.
The gnomic perfect may be used in the infinitive.
§ 206. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used
with the adverb au to denote a cvstomary action. E.g:.
Alt} par a V &v avrovs ri Xfyotev, J used to ask them (/ would of en
ask them) what they said. TIoWaKK riKovaafieu &v vftat, we used
often to hear you.
Remark. This construction must be carefully distinguished
from the ordinary apodosis with av (§ 222). It is equivalent to our
phrase he would often do this for he used to do this, and was probably
developed from the past potential construction (§ 226, 2, N. 2).
Note. The Ionic has iterative forms in -aKov and -aKopLtfv
in both imperfect and aorist. (See § 119, 10.) Herodotus uses
these also with av, as above.
THE PARTICLE "AN.
§ 207. The adverb av (Epic kg) has two distinct
uses.
1. It is joined to all the secondary tenses of the indica-
tive (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the
optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote that the action
254
SYNTAX.
[9 208.
of the verb is dependent on some condition, expressed or
implied. Here it belongs to the verb.
2. It is joined re^larly to ct, if, and to all relative
and temporal words (and occasionally to the *inal particles
&>?, OTTG)?, and 6<t>pa^, when these are followed by the
subjunctive. Here it belongs entirely to the particle or
relative, with which it often forms one word, as in idv,
oral/, iireiBdv.
There is no English word which can translate uu. In its first
use it is expressed in the would or should of the veib (/^ovAotro «»»,
he would wish ; iXoifjLrjv Av, 1 should choose). In its second use it has
no force which can be made apparent in English.
Remark. The ab ve statement (§ 207) includes all ivgulur uses of dv
except the Epic constructieu explained in § 255, and the iterative con-
struction of § 206.
The following sections (§§ 208-211) enumerate the various uses of dy :
when these are explained more fully elsewhere, reference is made to the
proper sections.
§ 208* 1 . The present and perfect indicative never take uv.
2. The future indicative often takes av (or kc) in the early
poets, especially Homer ; very rarely in Attic Greek. U.g.
Kai Kf ri( 2>d' «p«€i, and perhaps some one will thus speak; SKKot,
oi Kf fie Tifiriaovat, others who will honor me {if occasion offers). The
future with av seems to have been an intermediate form between
the simple future, will honor, and the optative with av, would honor.
One of the few examples found in Attic prose is in Plat. Apol.
p. 29 C.
3. The most common use of av with the indicative is when
it forms an apodosis with the secondary tenses. It here
denotes that the condition upon which the action or the verb
depends is not or was not fuWllod. See § 222.
For the past potential construction with dv, see § 226, 2, N. 2 ; for the
iterative construction with dv, see § 206.
§ 209. 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with av
only in the constructions mentioned in § 207, 2, where dv
belongs to the introductory word. See § 223, § 225, § 232, 3,
§ 233; also§ 216, 1, N. 2.
§ 211.1
THE PARTICLE 'AN.
255
2. In Epic poetry, where the subjunctive is often used
nearly or quite in the sense of- the foture indicative (§ 255),
it may, like the future (§ 208, 2), taice dv or kc. E.ff.
El bf Kt n^ Sdjjffiy, iyu> 8f Ktv aircv cXoi/iiat, and if he does nut
give her up, I will take her myself.
§ 210* The optative with dv forms an apodosis, with
which a condition must be eitiier expressed or implied. It
denotes what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled
(§ 224).
Note. The future optative is never used with dv. See § 203,
N. 3.
erb
the
av
dv
3,
§ 211* The present and aorist (rarely the perfect) infini-
tive and participle are used with du to form an apodosis.
Each tense is liere equivalent to tlie corresponding tense of the
indicative or optative with dv, — tlie present representing also
the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect.
Thus the present infinitive or participle with dv may repre-
sent either an imperfect indicative or a present optative with dv ;
the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an aorist optative with
dv ; the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect opta-
tive with dv. E.g.
(Pres.) ^fTiv avTovs iXevdfpovs &v eivai, d tovto eirpa^av, he
says that they would (now) be free (^aav dv), if they had done this ;
<l>riaiv avToi/s fKfvdfoovs &v eivai, ti tovto Trpd^eiav, he says that they
would (hereafter) he free (eUv dv), if they should do this. Otfia airoi/i
(XtvBepovs &v ovras, « tovto eirpa^av, I know that they would (now)
be free (rjaav dv). if they hid done this; oi8a avrovs iXevOepovs &v
5vTas, tl ravra Trpa^ctav, / know that they would (hereafter) be free
(elev dv), if they should do this,
(A or.) ^aa\v airitv €\dtiv &v (or olba aMv i\66vTa dv), et tovto
eytvtTo, they say (or / know) that he would hare come (ffSBevdv),
ij this had happened ; <^aa\v airbv eXdelv dv (or oi8a avTov eXdovra
dv), ft TOVTO yevoiro, they say (or / know) that he would come
(t\$oi dv), if this should happen.
(Perf.) Et fiti Tas dpfTas fKtivas irapf<r)(0VT0, ndvra ravff vno tuv
0ap$dp<ov dv €a\taK€vat ((firjcreifv dv Tts), Jiad they not exhibited those
exploits of valor, we might say that all this would have been captured
by the barbarians (iaXaKtu dv); ovk dv ^ovfiat avrovs Hktiv d$iav
dedoKfvat, CI avrmv KaTay^<f)iaaiad€, I do not think they would (then,
256
SYNTAX.
P
m
1
|§ 212.
in the future) have suffered proper punishment (deda>K($r«r hvthv),
ij' ifOH shouhl condemn them.
The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva-
lent of the indicative or of the optative with av. In the examples
given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question.
NoTK. As the early poets who i.se the future indicative with Sv
(§ 208, 2) do not use this construction, the future infiuiti'e and
participle with uv are very rarely found.
§ 212. 1. When dv is us d with the subjunctive (as in
§ 207, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory
word only by monosyllabic particles like /iacV, 8c, tc, ydp, &c.
2. In a long apodosis dv raay be used twice or even three
times with the same verb ; as ovk &v riytia-O* auroi/ kuv iiriBpa-
IJL€iv ; do you not think that he would even have rushed thither 'i
In Thuc. ii. 41, av is used three times with irapix'^aBai.
3. "kv may be used elliptically with a verb understood ; as
oi oiKtrai piyKowLV aAA* cvk uv irpo rov (sc. cppcyKov), the slaves
are snoring; but in old times they wouldn't have done so. So in
<l»o^ovfi€voi axmep av <t Trais, fearing like a child {Sxrtrtp av
if^ofiiiro ci Trats ^v) .
4. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate verbs,
dv generally stands only with the first ; as ovhlv av 6id<ftopov
Tov kripov iroiolf oAA' eVi ravrov dfitfiOTtpoi loiev, he would do
nothing different from the other, but both would aim at the same
object {dv belongs also to louv).
Note. The adverb ruxa, quickly, soon, readily, is often prefixed
to dv, in which case rax dv is nearly equivalent to laas, perhaps.
The dv here always forms an apodosis, as usual, with the verb of
the sentence ; as rax* dv tXdoi, perhaps he would come.
THE MOODS.
§ 213. 1. The indicative is used in simple, absolute
assertions ; as ypd<f>ei^ he toriles ; eypayjrev^ he wrote ;
ypdyjrei, he will write ; y€ypa<l)€v, he has written.
It has a tense to express every variety of time which is
recognized by the Greek verb, and it can thus slate a sui)-
I 213.]
THE MOODS.
257
{position as well as make an assertion in the past, present,
or future. It also expresses certain other relations which in
other languages (as in Latin) are generally expressed by a
different mood. The following examples will illustrate these
uses : —
Et TovTo aXridis tvri, x°*'P<^> if '^'•' '•'' '^"*» ^ rejoice (§ 221); ct
typay^tv, ^\$ov au, if he had written^ I should have come (§ 222);
tt ypd^ti, ypoiorofuu, if he shall write (or if he writes), I shall know
(§ 223, N. 1). 'Em/icXeirat ottok tovto yci/i)<rcrat, he takes care that
thvi shall happen (§ 217). Acyct ou tovto noiti, he says that he is
doirtff this; sometimes, fintu ort tovto noui, he said that he was doing
this (he said Trotw). Ei^e fir fxTtivas, a>s nrjrroTt tovto tiroitfo'a,
that thou hadst killed me, that 1 might never have done this! (§ 251,
2; § 216, 3). Et^c tovto dXij^cs ^v, that this were true! (§ 251, 2).
Remark. These constructions are explained in the sections re-
ferred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of giving any
precise single definition, which will be of practical value, including
all the u^es even of the indicative. With the subjunctive and
optative it is equally impossible.
do
ced
kite
fe ;
is
iip-
2. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown by
the following examples : —
"Epxtrai lua tovto i8fi, he is coming that he may sec this (§ 216);
(JMfittTai (ifi TOVTO yivtfTai, he fears lest this may happen (§ 218).
*Eap tlXOrj, toCto TTot^o^o), if he shall come (or if he comes), 1 shall do
this (§ 223); «du tis «\Bii, tovto nom, if any one (ever) comes, I
(always) do this (§ 225). "Orav «\djj, tovto iroirjira, when he shall
come (or when he comes), I shall do this (§ 232, 3); orav ris tXBjj,
TOVTO TTotw, when any one cores, I (always) do this (§ 233).
"laHfv, let us go (§ 253) M^ davp.a(rriT«, donot wonder (§254).
Tt ei»ra>; what shall I say i (§ 256). Ov p.ri tovto ytvijTai, this
(surely) will not happen (§ 257). "idofMi, I shall see (Horn., § 255).
These constructions are explained in the sections referred to.
Remark. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most
primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative;
this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, tdcD/iat, / shall
see; ttirtftri xir, one will say. Then, in exhortations and prohibi-
tions it is still future; as tafitv, let us go; p^ iroif)arjT€ tovto, do
not do this. In final and object clauses; it expresses a future pur-
pose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional
relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in
general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly present)
m its time.
17
268
SYNTAX.
[I 218.
8. The various uses of the optative are shown by the
following examples : —
*H\6«if Iva Toxiro idoi, he came that he might nee this (§ 216); «0o-
/3««To /i^ rovTo ytvoiTo, he feared lest this should happen (§ 218).
El i\$ot, TovT hv notriantfth if he should come, J should do this
(§ 224) ; «t Tif « X 0oif TOVT inoiovv, if any one (ever) came, I (always)
did this (§ 225). *0t« f\Boi, tovt itv nointratfti, whenever he should
come (at any time when he should come), I should do this (§ 282, 4);
oTf Tis fX0oi, tovt iitoiovv, whenever any one came, 1 (always) did this
(§ 233). *Eirtftt\t'iTo virus tovto ycvijo'oiro, he took care that this
should happen (§ 217). Ernff (or i\tytv) on tovto notoitf (noiriaoi
or iroi^atit), he said that he teas doing (would do or had done) this
a 243).
"EXffot avy he might go (if he shouUl wish to) (§ 226, 2). eW# /i^
atroXoiyro, that they may not perish! M7 yc'votro, may it not
happen (§ 251, 1).
These constructions are explained in the sections referred to.
Remark. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and less
distinct form of expression than tfie subjunctive, in constructions
of the same general character. This appears especially in its inde-
pendent uses; as in the Homeric 'EXci/171' ayoiTo, he may take Helen
away (cf . dytaBo, let him take) ; loifxtv, may we go (cf. tu>ntv, let us
go) ; fifi yiimiTo, may it not happen (cf. fifi ycvi;rat, let it not hapnen) ;
cXotro av (Horn, sometimes cXotro alone), he would take (cf. llom.
cXijrai sometimes with k<, he will take). So in future conditions;
as ci ycvotro, if it should happen (cf. tav ytvrjToi, if it shall happen).
In other dependent clauses it is generally a correlative of the sud-
junctive, sometimes of the Indicative; it expresses the changed
relation of a dependent subjunctive or indicative in these con-
structions when the verb on which it depends is changed from
present or future to past time. The same change in relation is
expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, is,
&c. to should, would, might, did, was, &c. To illustrate these
last relations, compare tpxtrai tva td^, 0o/3«trat fi^ yci^rnt, tav
TK fl^Bji TOVTO TTOiSi, (7r(/iifX«ira( onas tovto ycvntrcrat, and Xcyrt
ort TOVTO iroit7, with the corresponding forms after past leading
verbs given in § 213, 3.
4. The imperative is used to express commands and
prohibitions; as tovto Tro/et, do this; fit) ^ei/yere, do
not Jiy,
5. The infinitive is a verbal noun, which expresses the
simple idea of a verb without restriction of person or
number.
v;
-■"-t»H»M»5!7.>v
215.]
THE MOODS.
259
§ 214. The following sections (§§ 215-257) treat of all
constructions which require any other f<r>rni of the finite verh
than the indicative in simple assertions (§ 213, 1). The
infinitive and participle are included here only so far as they
are used in indirect discourse or in protasis and apodosis.
These constructions are divided as follows : —
I. Final and Object clauses after ivo, o)s, ottwv, and fi^.
II. Conditional sentences. III. Relative and Temporal sen-
tences. IV. Indirect Discourse. V. Causal sentences.
VI. Wishes. VII. Commands, Exhoilations, and Prohibi-
tions. VIII. Homeric Subjunctive (like Future Indicative).
— Interrogative Subjunctive. — Oi' ftiy with Subjunctive or
Future Indicative.
;on-
rom
is
Mr
lese
tav
\ty(i
md
do
bhe
or
I. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER Tm, <Ls, ottws, /ty.
§ 215. The clauses which depend on the so-called Jinal
particles iva, w?, ottco?, that., in order that, and fii], that not,
lest, may be divided into three classes : —
A. Final clauses, expressing the purpose or motive ; as.
{ epx^Tui ha rovro tBrj, he is eonnng" that he may see this. \
Here all the final particles may be used.
B. Object clauses with ottw? after verbs signifying to
( strive for, to care for^ to effect; as <tk6tt€i oirtafi tovto
\y€vi]<T€Tat, see to it that this is done.
C . Object clauses with firj after verbs oifear or caution ;
as <f>o^€iTai firj TOVTO yivrjTai, he fears that (or lest^ this
may happen.
Remark. The first two classes (sometimes classed together as
final) are to be distinguished with special care. The object clauses
in B are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand in
apposition to an object accusative like tovto; as aKonfi. rovro, on-wr
Ikii <re oy^trat, see to this, namely, that he does not see you. But a final
clause could stand in apposition only to toutou evfKa, for the sake of
this, or d(o toOto, to this end ; as tpxerai rovrov evtKa. Xva fifxas tfij/,
he is cominy for this purpose, namely, that he may see us.
K
)
V) I
260
SYNTAX.
[§ 216.
(
Note 1. The negative adverb in all these clauses is /*^; except
after ftff, lest, where ov is used.
Note 2. "O^pa, that, is used as a final particle in Epic and Lyric
poetry.
)
A. Final Clauseg. \ V fie
io
9
i^n
§ 216, 1. Final clauses take the subjunctive after \
primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. /
Atavortrot T^v yf (f)vpav 'Kvtrai, tai fif) biaffrJTe, he thinks of hreakhif/
up the f>rul(/e, that you may not pass over. Auo-trcXft f'aaai tu ra
napovTi, nfj Koi tovtov jroXffiiov irpotrdoineda, it ts expedient to allow
it for a time, lest ice may add him to the number of our enemies. Ilapa-
KciKtis larpovs, oirios fifj Jwo^ai/)/, you call in physicians, that he may
not die. *tXos (^ovKtro eivai tois niyurra bvvafitvois, Iva adiKotv fxri
8ibolr} BiKrjv, he wished to he a friend to the most powerful, that he
might do tvronfj and not he punished. Tovtov tvtKa (f)iXa}v w«ro 8(i(rdai,
its avvtpyovs «x°*» '**-' thought he needed friends for this purpose,
namely, that he might have helpers.
Note 1. The future indicative very rarely takes the place of
the subjunctive in final clauses after oiraa, 6<f)pu, and fiff. This is
almost entirely confined to poetry. See Odyss. i. 56, iv. 163; 11.
XX. 301.
Note 2. The adverb au (kc) is sometimes joined with m, ontas,
and o0pa before the subjunctive in final clauses; as in hv p.d6Tjs,
dpTaKova-ou, hear the other side, that you may learn. It adds nothing
to the sense that can be made perceptible in English. In Homer
and Herodotus it occasionally occurs even before an optative.
2. As final clauses express the purpose or motive of some
person, they admit the double construction of indirect dis-
course (§ 242). Hence, instead of the optative after secon-
dary tenses, we can have the mood and tense which would be
used when a person conceived the purpose in his own mind ;
that is, we can say either ^XCev ti/a i8oi, he came that he
might see (§ 216, 1), or rjXOev ii/o iSj/, because the person
himself would have said ip^op-at Iva i8<d, I come that I may see.
(See § 248, Note.)
On this principle the subjunctive in final clauses after
secondary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular
optative. E.g.
onoj
)
a,fter
:)
§ 217.]
THE MOODS.
261
/ Ta TrXota KartKavaev, iva fitj Kvpos d(a/3^, Jie burned the vesselsy
\ that Cyrus mUjht not pass over.
3. The secondary tenses of the indicative are used in final
clauses with im, sometimes with ws or ottws, to denote that
the end or object is dependent on some unfulfilled condition
or some unaccomplished wish^ and therefore is not or was not
attained. E.g.
Tt /x* ov Xa/3a)i/ eiertivai fvOvi, i)s Kbei^a firjirore; &C., lohy did you
not take me and kill me at once, that I ndyht never have shown ? &c.
$cv, (f>€v, t6 /iij ra irpdyfiaT dudpunois €\fiv (fi(oPTjv, iv ^(rav firjdtv ol
dfivoi Xdyot, Alas ! alas ! that the facts have no voice for men, so that
words of eloquence might be as nothing.
)
B. Oliject Clauses with Hrrwi after Terbs of StrlTing, Ac.
5 217. Object clauses depending on verbs signifying
to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the
future indicative after both primary and secondary tenses.
The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as
the correlative of the future indicative, but commonly the
indicative is retained on the principle explained in § 216, 2.
(See § 202, 4.) E.g.
4»poi/Ttf' OTTOS fir]8fv dvd^tov Ttjs Tift^s ravnjs Trpa^fts, take heed \
that you do nothing unworthy of this honor. *Efir}xaPu>nfda orrois
fjirjdfls TovTo yuanroiTo, we were planning that nobody should know
this (here yi/oxrcrai would be more common). "Errpaaarov on-ms Tty j
^fj6fia n^fi, they were trying to effect (//iw), that some assistance J
should come. •
Note 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive or optative
is used after these verbs, as in final clauses. In this case as also
nriay be used. "Oiras &v or la av may be used before the subjunc-
tive, never before the regular future indicative. Mij is sometimes
used for otto)? p.{), generally with the subjunctive.
Note 2. The future indicative with ottwp sometimes follows
verbs of exhorting, entreating, command iny, and forbidding, which
commonly take an infinitive of the object; as diaKeXfvovrai oiras
TifKoprjafTai irdwas tovs toiovtovs, (hey exhort him to take vengeance
on all such.
Note 3. The construction of § 217 is not found in Homer; but
such verbs as are mentioned in Note 2, and verbs signifying to con*
li
262
SYNTAX.
[§ 218.
sider, to try, an<l the like, take oTrwy or its with tlie subjunctive and
optative, as in final clauses. E.g.
AtWfo-^at fie fiiv avTos oiras UTjfifpTfa (trrji, and implore him thyself
to speak the truth : Xitraero 5' ale] "'Hiftaitrrov K\vTotfyy6p onas \v<rtiev
"Aprja, he implored him to liberate Are.f. So (f>pdaa€Tai &s Kf ve^rai]
^ovXevov orras 8x o-piara ytvoiTo.
Note 4. Both oirm and oirais p^ are often used with the future
indicative in exhortations or prohibitions, some imperative like QKovei
or o-Kon-etre, take care, being understood. E.y.
'Ottcws oZv Haea-de &$ioi t^s tKevOfpia^, {see that you) prove yovr-
seloes worthy of freedom. "Oiras pot pij ept-ls on eari ra bu>h«Ka b\i t^,
see that you do not tell me that twelve is twice six. For a similar ellipsis
of a verb oi fearing, see § 218, N. 2.
C. Oljject Clauses vtrlth |>-^ after Verbs of Fenrlngt &c>
§ 218. After verbs denoting /<?«/*, cautiofi, or danger,
firf, that or lest^ takes the subjunctive after primary tenses,
and the optative after secondary tenses.
The subjunctive may also follow secondarj^ tenses, to letain
the mood in which the fear originally' occurred to the mind.
E.g.
^o^ovpai pff TovTo yfvrjTai (vereor ne accidat), I fear that this
may happen: <f>o^ovpai pfj oii tovto y^vrjrai (vereor ut accidat),
I fear that this may not hapjien (§ 215, N. 1). <^povTi(<a p^ KpauaTov
§ pot aiyav, 1 am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent. Ot>Kcrt
enfTi6tvTo, bfSiores pfj dnoTprjOf itjaav, they no longer made attacks,
fearing lest they should be cut off. 'E<f)o(iovvTo pfj ri vdOji, they feared
lest he should suffer anything (§ 21G, 2).
Note 1. The future indicative is very rarely used after pij in
this construction. But onan pfj is sometimes used here, as in the
object clauses of § 217, with both future indicative and sub-
junctive.
Note 2. M^ with the subjunctive, or owtos pfj with the future
indicative, may be used elliptically, a verb of fear or caution being
understood. E.g.
Mfj dypoiKOTfpov ij TO akrjdii flrrflv, (I fear that) the truth may be too
rude a thing to say. 'AXXa pfj ov tovt fj vaXcn-di', but (f fear that) this
may not be a difficult thing. See § 217, N. 4.
Note 3. Verbs of fearing may lefer to objects of fear which \
are present or past. Here pfj takes the present and past tenses of
the mdicative. E.g.
§ 220.]
THE MOODS.
263
AcdotKa fifi 7rXi;yui/ Sect, I fear that you need blows. ^^oviitBa fiq
djjLfjxiTfpav afia 'fjfiapTTjKafiev, ice fear that we have missed both at
once. AeiSa (ifi 8^ jrdvra dea vrnifprea flirev^ I fear that all which the
Goddess said was true. Hoin. "Opa fifi iraiCav e\tyev, beware lest he
was speaking in jest.
II. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
§ 219. 1. In conditional sentences the clause con-
taining the condition is called the protasis, and that
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The
protasis is introduced by el, if.
The Doric at for ct is sometimes used in Homer.
2. The adverb dv (Epic /ce) is regularly joined to el in
the protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive ; el with
dv forming idv, av (a), or ^i/. (See § 207, 2.) The
simple el is used with the indicative and optative.
The same adverb dv is used in the apodosis with the
optative, and with the secondary tenses of the indicative
in the construction of § 222.
3. The negative adverb of the protasis is regularly /a»J,
that of the apodosis is ov.
Note. When ov stands in a protasis, it always belongs to some
particular word (as in ov ttoXXoi, few, ov (t>ripi, I deny), and not to
the protasis as a whole ; as idv rt av koI "Apvtos ov <f>i}Te edv re <^^rr,
both if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it.
Classificatiox of Coxditional Sentences.
§ 220. Conditional sentences in Greek have six forms.
The classification is based chiefly on the time to which the
supposition refers, parti}' on what is implied with regard to
the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction
between particular and general suppositions explained in II.
I
■J r
264 SYNTAX. • [§220.
I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditions.
The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of
C«) present or past and {h) fviure.
4,
I
»!
Present and Past Conditions.
(a) In present or past conditions, tlie question of fulfil-
ment has already been decided (in point of fact), but we may
or may not wish to imply by our form of statement how this
has been decided. In Greek (as in English or Latin) we
may, therefore, state such a condition in one of two ways : —
1. "We may simply state a present or past condition, imply-
ing nothing as to its fulfilment ; as if he is {now) doing this^
ct Tovro 7rpa<ro-€i; — if he was doing ity ti en-pao-o-c ; — if fie did it,
el errpait ; — if he has (already) done it, el ireirpaxe. The apodosis
here expresses simply what is (was or will be) the result of
the fulfilment of the condition. Thus we may say : —
Et irpdacfi tovto, KaXcor fxei, if he is doing this, it is welt;
el Trpdaa-ei tovto, fipdprqKev, if he is doing this, he has erred; el
irpdaaei tovto, KoKas e^ei, if he is doing this, it will be well. El
eirpa^e tovto, KoKas exei {flxev, e^xev, or e^ei), if he did this, it ia
(was or will be) well. So with the other tenses of the indicative.
(See § 221.)
So in Latin: Si hocfacit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene erit.
2. We may state a present or past condition so as to imply
that it is not or was not fulfilled ; as if he were (now) doing
this, el TOVTO eTrpaaa-e', — if he had done this, el tovto eirpa^e
(both implying the opposite) . The apodosis here expresses
what would be (or would have been) the result if the condition
were (or had been) fulfilled. The adverb av in the apodosis
distinguishes these forms from otherwise similar forms under
(a) 1. Thus we may saj' : —
Ei en pa a (re ' ovro, KoKas &v eixev, if lie were (now) doing this, it
would be well; el eirpa^e tovto, KaXm &v eaxev, if he had done thi^^
it would have been well. (See § 222.)
In Latin: Si hoc faceret, bene esset ; Si hoc fecisset, bene fuisset.
h
h
i
J
§220.]
THE MOODS.
265
The Greek has no fonii implying that a condition is or was falfilled,
and it is hardly conceivable that any language should find such a form
necessary or useful.
Future Conditions.
{h) We ma}' state a future condition in Greek (as in
English and Latin) in either of two ways.
1. We may say if he shall do this ^ lav Trpda-a-ri (or 'Trpd^rj)
TovTo (or, still more vividly, d 7rpd$€L tovto), making a dis-
tinct supposition of a future case. The apodosis expresses
what will be the result if the condition shall be fulfilled.
Thus we may say : —
facial
i
2. We may also say if he should do this, el Trpda-a-oi (or
Trpa^eie) tcOto, still supposing a case in the future, but less
distinctly and vividly than before. The apodosis corresponds
to this in form (with the addition of dv) , and expresses what
would he the result if the condition should be fulfilled. Thus
we can say : —
Et irpdaaoi (or Trpa^cie) toCto, KaXcor &v €;(ot, {/ he shouhl
do this^ it would be well. (See § 224.) hi Latin: Si hoc facial,
bene sit.
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
The supposition contained in a protasis may be either
particular or general. A particular supposition refers to a
definite act or a definite series of acts ; as if he (now) has this,
he will give it ; if he had it, he gave it ; if he had had the power,
he would have helped me / if he shall receive it (or if he receivett
it) , he will give it ; if he should receive it, he would give it.
A general supposition refers to ang one of a class of acts,
which may occur (or may have occurred) on any one of a
series of possible occasions ; as if ever he receives anything,
■
266
SYNTAX.
1,^ "
H
[§ 220.
I"
he (always) gives it ; if ever he received anything^ he {always)
gave it; if he had {on each occasion) had the power, he would
{always) have helped me ; if ever any one shall (or shoidd) wish
to goy he will (or would) always he permitted.
Although this distinction is seen in all classes of con-
ditions (as the examples show) , it is only in the present and
past conditions which do not imply non-fulfilment, i.e. in
those of (a) 1, that the Greek distinguishes general from
particular suppositions in construction. Here, however, we
have two classes of conditions which contain only general
suppositions.
(a) When the apodosis has a verb of present time express-
ing a customary or repeated action (§ 205), the protasis may
refer (in a general way) to an}' one of a class of acts which
can be supposed to occur within the period represented in
English as present. Thus we may say : —
*Edv Tii KXtiTTfi, KoXdCerai, if {ever) any one steals, he is {in all
such cases) punished ; edv rtt irpdtra-ji (or rrpd^ij) roiovToit ri, xaXc'
naivonev avra, if {ever) anff one does such a thing, we are {always)
angry with hun. (See § 225.)
{b) When the apodosis has a verb of past time expressing
a customar}' or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a
general way) to any one of a class of acts which can be sup-
posed to have occurred in the past. Thus we may say : —
Et Tis KXerrroi, cKoXa^cro, if {ever) any one stole, he was {in all
such cases) punished : et tis rrpdaaoi (or trpd^fie) toiovtov ti,
ex(0\.f7taivopev avT^, if {ever) any one did such a thing, ice were {always)
angry with him. (See § 225.)
Remark 1. Although the Latin sometimes agrees with the Greek
in distinguishing general conditions from ordinary present and past
conditions, using si facial and sifaceret like iav irpdacru and et rrpda-
(Tot above, it yet commonly agrees with the English in not recogniz-
ing the distinction, and uses the indicative alike in both classes.
Even the Greek sometimes (especially in poetry) neglects the distinc-
tion, and uses the Indicative in these general conditions (§ 225, N. 1).
Remauk 2. In external form the present general condition coin-
cides with the more vivid future condition, {h) 1, both being ex-
pressed by edp and the subjunctive, and the form of the apodosis
alone distinguishing them. But in sense there is a much closer
connection between the general present condition and the ordinary
§ 222.]
THE MOODS.
267
present condition expressed by et and the present indicative, (a) 1 ,
with which in most languages (and sonietinies even in Greek) ii
coincides also in form (see Remark 1). On the other hand, tdv
with the subjunctive in a future condition generally agrees in sense
with ct and the future indicative (§ 223, N. 1), and is never inter-
changeable with (I and the present indicative.
1. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences.
A. Present and Past Conditions.
1. Simple Particular Suppositions.
§ 221. When the protasis simply states a present or
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the
fulfilment of the condition, it takes the indicative with
el. Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis.
Et rj(rv)(iav ^iXnnro<i ayet, ovKtri 8a Xiyuv, if Philip is keeping
peace (with us), toe need talk no longer. Ei cy<i) ^aiBpov ay voCt^ koL
epavTov €7ri\e\Tj(rpai ' dWa yap ov8fTfpd tan ToiiTau, if I do not know
Phaedrus, I have forfjotten myself; hut neither of these is so. El Oeov
^Vj ovK ^v ataxpoKep8rjs, if he was the son of a God, he was not ava-
ricious. *AXX' ft 8oK€t aoi, rrKtwpev, but if it pleases you, let us sail.
KoKia-T dno\otpT)v, Saudiav flfi^ (^tXco, may I die most urretchedly, if
f do not love Xanthias.
Note. Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of
thi8 class if it expresses merely a present intention or necessity that
something shall be done; as aipe irX^Krpov, el fiaxei, raise your
spur, if you are goinff to fight. Aristoph. Here ft ftfXXftr pA\t<T6ai
would be the more common expression in prose. It is important to
notice that a future of this kind could not be changed to the sub-
junctive, like the ordinary future in protasis. (For the latter see
§223, N. 1.)
2. With Supposition contrary to Fact.
§ 222. When the protasis states a present or past
supposition, implying that the condition is not or vms not
fulJiUed^ the secondary tenses of the indicative are used
in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis takes the
adverb av.
The imperfect here refers to present time or t6 a
268
SYNTAX.
[8 222.
' I
eVi!
continued or repeated action in past time, the aorist to
an action simply occurring in past time, and the (rare)
pluperfect to an action finished in past or present time.
E.g.
Tavra ovk ^v ibvvavro Trotclc, «l fi^ duxirri (itTpiq tvpuvTO, they
would not be able (as they are) to do this, if they did not lead an
abstemious life. Ei ^aav uvbpa dyado\, i>s <rv 0j7r, ovk Up ttot*
ravra tiraaxov, if they had been good men, as you say, they would
never have suffered these things (referring to several eases). Kal tatos
&p direBapov, ci fiff ^ dpx^ KarfXtidtj, and perhaps I should have
perished, if the government had not been put down. Et dittKpiva,
Ikopus tip ijhr) €p«p,adTiKTf (§ 113, 2, N. 4), if you had answered, I
should already have learned enough (which now I have not done).
El fi^ vptis rj\6*T€, f7ropfv6p,e0a &p cVl top ^atriXta, if you
had not come (aor.), we should now be on our way (impf.) to the
King.
Note 1. Sometimes ap is omitted in the apodosis, as in English
we may say it had been for it would have been, or in Latin aequius
fuerat for aequius fu tset ; as el fi^ Wf^^i <t^^op -naptaxtp, if we had
not known, this had (would have) caused us fear. So kqXop ^v
avT^ fl OVK (yeppTjdr) 6 avOpomos (Ktipos, it had been good for that man
if he had not been born. N. T.
Note 2. The imperfects cfiet, XPV" ^^ 'XP^"' 'lO"' and others
denoting necessity, propriety, obligation, possibility, ana the like, are
often used with the infinitive to form an apodosis implying the non-
fulfilment of a condition, "^p is not used here, as these phrases
simply express in other words what is usually expressed by the
indicative with av. Thus, tbfi ae tovtop (f>t\fly, you ought to love
him (but do not), or you ought to have loved him (but did not), is
equivalent to you would love him, or would have loved him (c0(X(ts
liv tovtop), if you did your duty (to dcovra). So c^^i' aoi tovto
TToi^crai, you might have done this ; elK6s rjp ae tovto Trot^crat, you
would properly have done this. The real apodosis is here always in
the infinitive. "QifieXov with the infinitive in wishes is used in the
same way; see § 251, 2, N, 1, and the examples.
When the present infinitive is used, the construction refers io
the present or to continued or repeated action in the past ; when the
aorist is used, it refers to the past.
Note 3. In Homer the imperfect indicative in this class of
sentences (§ 222) always refers to the past. We occasionally find a
present optative in Homer in the sense in which Attic writers use
the imperfect indicative; and in a few passages even the aorist
optative with xe in the place of the aorist indicativ« (see //. v. 311
and 388).
f 224.]
THE MOODS.
269
Iju
lers
are
non-
ases
tlie
loce
I, is
TOVTO
you
lys in
ss of
nd a
use
lorist
311
B Future Conditions.
1. Subjunctive in Protasis with Future Apodosis.
§ 223* When a supposed future case is stated dis-
linctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if Igo)^
the protasis takes the subjunctive with idv (Epic et xe).
The apodosis takes the future indicative or some other
form expressing future time. E.g.
E2 fitv Ktv MfUfKaov *AXc^ai/dpor icaTane(})»]ji avroi tntiff 'E\tut}u
tX«Tto Koi KTrinara ndvra, if Alexander shall slay Menelaus, then let
him have Helen and all the goods himself. Horn. "Av ris dvOKrrfj-
rai, ir(t,pa(r6fuBa xftpova-dai, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we
shall try to overcome him. *Eav o5u ijjs vvv, rrtJre ecci oikoi; if there-
fore you go now, lohen will you be at home?
Remark. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go
express the force of the Greek subjunctive; but the ordinary
modern English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly
future.
Note 1. The future indicative with et is very often used for the
subjunctive in conditions of this class, as a still more vivid form
of expression; as « n^ KaOe^tis yKSxnrau, Hffrai trot KOKa, if you
do not (shall not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble. This
common use of the future, in which it is merely a more vivid form
than the subjunctive, must not be confounded with that of § 221,
Note.
Note 2. In Homer et (without ap or te) is often used with the
subjunctive, apparently in the same sense as ei Kt or ^i/; as tl 8e vrf
iB(\ri oXeVat, but if he shall wish to destroy our ship. The same use of
et for edv is found occasionally even in Attic poetry. See § 239, N. 1.
For the Homeric subjunctive with m in apodosis, see § 255,
Note.
2. Optative in Protasis and Apodosis.
§ 224. When a supposed future case is stated in a
less distinct and vivid form (as in English, if I should go)^
the protasis takes the optative with et, and the apodosis
takes the optative with aV. E.g.
Eti/ff (^opi/Toy ovK Af, ft TTpdtrfTois koK&s, yon would not be en-
durable, if you should be in prosperity. Ov ttoXX^ &v dXoyta eii/, «t
270
SYNTAX.
[§ 225.
thofioiTo rbv Bavarov 6 toiovtos; would it not be a great absurdity^
if such a man should /ear death? oIkos d* avros, tl ^BoyyTju Xd/3ot,
aa(f>i<rraT &v \*^«i*v, but the house itselj\ if it should Jind a I'oice,
would speak most plninltf.
The future optative cannot be used in protasis or apodosis, except
in indirect discourse representing the future indicative (see the
third example under § 247).
Note 1. "Av is very rarely omitted in an apodosis of this class.
Most examples occur in Homer; as 6 ou 8vo y Avbpt d>ipoitv, which
two men could not carry (if they should try). Hut ai> is sometimes
omitted in the Attic poets after such expressions as ovk tltrO* oirms
and OVK tariv oaris (see Aesch. Prom. 2U2, Eur. Ate. 52).
Note 2. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of the
indicative in conditions, see § 222, N. 3.
r'
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
§ 225« In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses
a cuatornary or repeated action or a general truth ^ and the
protasis refers in a general way to any one of a class of
acts. Here the protasis has tlie subjunctive with iuu
after present tenses, and the optative with el after
past tenses. The apodosis has the present or imperfect
indicative, or some other form which implies repetilion.
*Hu fyyvs eXdrj ddparos, ov8tis fiovXtrai dpfjaKetu, if death comes
near^ no one is (ever) icilling to die. "Anas ^oyos, &v dirfj rh irpdyfiara,
ndrtudu Tt<f)aiv€Tai Koi Ktvov, all speech, if deeds are wanting, appears
(I rain and empty thing. Ei rti/av Oopv^ovfievovs aiadoiro, Kara-
a^iivvvvM Ttiv Tapa\i]v eirfipoTo, if he saw any falling into disorder
(or whenever he saw, &c.), he (always) tried to ipiiet the confusion.
Et Tty dvTtiiroi, evOvs TtdvfjKft, if any one refused, he was iiinne-
dialety put to death.
Remark. The gnomic aorist f§ 205, 2), which is a primary
tense (§ 201), can always be used here in the apodosis with the
subjunctive depending on it; as ^u ns rrapa^aivrj, (rffiiau avruis
*ir(6t<rav, if any one transgresses, they impose a penalty on him.
Note 1. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the
subjunctive cr optative in general suppositions; that is, these sen-
tences may follow the construction of ordinary present and past
suppositious (§ 221), as in Latin and English; as ei ns dvo q xai
I 226.]
THE MOODS.
271
trXcot;> 'ir ^n*pas \oyi(tTai, 1*07016$ ivnv^ if any one counts on two
0/ even more aays^ he is a fool. See § 233, N. 1.
NoTK 2. Here, as mi ordinary protasis (§ 223, N. 2), ti is some-
limes used with the subjunctive in poetry for tdv or u m .
kary
Ithe
rois
Ithe
len-
[)ast
KOI
Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentknces.
£llip«ls and Substitution In Protasli or ApododU.
ryy"^
§ 226. 1 • Tlic protasis sometimes is not expressed in its
fegular fbrni witli ct or liv, but is contained in a participle,
or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence.
When a participle represents the protasis, its tense is always
that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indica-
tive, subjunctive, or optative. The present (as usual) includes
the imperfect. E.g.
n&)f biKrjs oSarjs 6 Ztits ovk an-oXcoXcv; how is it that Zeus has not
been <lestroi/e<r,~tf'Justice exists? (*t fi/zci; taTiv). Si/ fi« «cXi/a>i/ fiaet
tai
to
rndure if you shouM dwelt amomf women (i.e. c{ <rvvvatois). 'H»ri-
arrjatv tip ris oKovaas, any one tcould have disheliered such a thiny ij
he had heard it (i.e. §1 ^Kovaev). Mamxav 8' itu alT^aavros (sc. a-ov)
ffKou <roi 0fp^i' &p aprou, and if you (ever) cried for food (« alrfjattas,
§ 225), / used to come to you with bread (§ 206).
Ata yt vfAat vrovs iraXai ftv dn-oXwXciTc, if it had depended on
ynur.sefves, you would lony ago have been ruined. Ovrw yap ovKtri
rov \omov rrdaxoipev hu kokos, for in that case we should no longer
sufier harm (the protasis being in oiJt<b). Oi8* hv 8iKai<ot «\ kqkop
\jrf (Totpi Tt, nor should J justly (i.e. if 1 had Justice) fall into any
rouble.
2. The protasis is often altogether omitted, leaving the
optative or indicative with av alone as an apodosis.
(a) Here there is sometimes a definite protasis suggested
by the context or by the circumstances. E.g.
Ovk eaOiovai n-Xcto) fj divavrai <f>fp(tv' SiappaytUu yap aVy they do not
enf more than they can carry; for (f they did) they would hurst.
"HytTf rrfv eipfivrjp o/iCi>r • ov yap ^p o ti &p fVoieiTf , you still kept the
peace : for there was nothing which you could hare done (Jf you had
not).
\\<
§^
\
f^
\
272
SYNTAX
[|22«.
(b) Sometimes, however, the implied protasis is too indeft*
nitc to be expressed (in Grceic or in English), as often when
it is merely if he pleased^ if he eould^ if he should try^ if there
should be an opportunity^ if we should consider^ if what is
natural (or likely) should happen, &c. Sometimes it is even
too vague to be really present in the mind. Thus arises the
potential optative and indicative (with a.v)<, corresponding to
the English forms with may, can, must, might, could, would,
and should. E.g.
/ "itras av Tit cVtrt/ir/trrtr rolr tlpijuivou, perhaps some one might (or
\m<iii) find fault with what has been midT) Hbias fi' hv lytay t'poifirfu
\finritnfp, and 1 should be glad to ask Leptines. ToCro oSt &v ovtos
txoi Xtytip oUff vfifU irtKrBfirjTf, neither could (can) he so;/ Mw, nor
would you believe it (if he should). Ovk hv fit^tifirfv tov 6p6vov, 1
tronU give up the throne (I would nU on any condition). (' Iloi oiv rpa-
not fit 6^ &v; whither then can we turn f )
QoTTov rj Tif hv ^tro, quicker than one would have thought. Krvnov
nas Ttt fja-dtr' hv <ra(f>o}s, every one must have heard the sound. So
riyff<r(o av, you would have thought; «i8ts &v, you might have seen;
CI. Latin crederes, diceres, videres, &c.
So ^ovKoinTjv av (velim), I should wish (\a some future case);
«0ov\6nTiv tiv (veliem), I should (now) wish, J should prefer (on some
condition not fulfilled).
Note 1. The potential optative sometimes expresses a mild
command, and sometimes is hardly more than a future, or a softer
expression for a mere assertion ; as x<apoii h¥ cto-o). you may go in ;
\tyois hv, yon may speak (for speak); kXvois hv rfdrj, ^oi^t, hear me
now, Phoebus. Ovk hv oiv ttow ye Tt o'lrovbaiov tirj ^ diKaio(rvvTi,
./ustice will not then turn out to be anything very excellent: see also the
fourth and fifth examples under (b). Ovk hv apvoifMrfv tovto, I
will not (would not) denu it.
In these cases and m most of those under (h), the form of an
apodosis was unconsciously used with no reference to any definite
condition.
Note 2. The potential indicative sometimes expresses what
would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have happened (and
perhaps did happen), with no reference to any unfulfilled condition ;
as ^ yap piv (oiov yt Kixw^^^y V **" Opforrfs Krtlvev viro<f>6ap(voi, for
either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed
him before you (Od. iv. 546); 6 $€a<rdp(vos nat Hv tip avtjp fipda-drj
dd'ios (ivai, every man who saw this (the ' Seven against Thebes ') would
have longed to be a warrior (Aristoph.). See § 206, Rem.
3. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or
participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its
\
tn;
ar me
<trvvr\.
the
.. /
what
(and
ition ;
5, for
killed
d<rBri
would
§ 227.]
THE MOODS.
273
own tenses of the indicative or optative (§ 203, with Note 1).
If the finite verb in the apodosis woiild have talcen av, this
particle is used with tlie infinitive or participle. JC.ff,
'HyoC/xm, tt tovto Trotftrf, ndvra icaXuis llx.nv^ I believe Ihat^ i/ffou
are doing thin, all is well; ijyovfiai, iitu tovto noiffTt, ndvra koXus
c^f 11/, / believe thai, if yon shall do this, all will be well; oi8a vfids ihv
ravra yivrfTat ti nod^ouTas, I know that ifoit will pros/icr if this is
(shall be) done. For examples of the infinitive and participle with
4i/, see §211.
4. The apodosis may be expressed in an in^nitive not in
indirect disccurse (§ 260, 1), especially one depending on a
verb of wishing^ commanding^ advising^ &c., from which the
infinitive receives a future meaning. E.g.
BovXcrat iXBtlv iav tovto ytvtjTai, he wishes to go if this shall be
done; Kt\tv<o i/xar *av 8vvri(T$« Airf\6tiv, I command you to depart 1
if you can (§ 'J23). For the principle of indirect discourse which /
appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see § 248, 1.
Note 1, Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in the con-
text, and in such cases tl or tdu is often to be translated supposing
that or in case that; as oKovaou Kal ffiov, tdv <Tot TavTa 8oKfj, hear me
also, in case the same shall please yon (i.e. that then you may assent to
it); oi 8' ^KTtipov, « AXaxroivro, and others pitied them, in case they
should be captured (i.e. thinking what they would suffer if they should
be captured). See § 248, 2. So irpbs rfjv n6X.tv, tl tntfiorfOoltv,
ix^povv, they marched towards the city, in case they {the citizens) should
rush out (i.e. to meet them if they should rush out). On this principle
we must explain at Ktv nas /SovXctqi, //. i. 60 ; at k t6«\n<r$a,
Od. iii. 92; and similar passages.
Note 2. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for
effect; as ei fiiv buxrovai ytpas, if they (shall) give me a prize, — very
well (II. i. 135; cf. i. 580).
Mixed Congtructlona. — A^ In Apodosis.
§ 227. 1 . The protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to
diflferent forms. This happens especially when an indicative
with €1 in the protasis is followed by an optative with av in the
apodosis, the latter sometimes having another protasis implied,
and sometimes being a potential optative (§ 226, 2). U.g.
"Eivvvyt 8v<rTvxov peu, »> if Taj/avTt" ii/7rpdTToin"es ou <ro>fot/ietf'
&v i if we are now unfortunate, how could we help being saved if we
18
'X
\
274
SYNTAX.
[§ 228.
should do the opposite? El oln-ot opd&s dnearrjaav, vfiels hv ov
Xpfoiv apxoire, if these had a right to secede^ you cannot (could not)
possibly hold your power rightfully.
Note. Sometimes a protasis contains the adverb av, belonging
not to et, but to the verb. Here the verb is also an apodosis at
the same time; as et fi^ iroirjiraiT* hv toOto, if {it is true that) you
would not do this (i.e. if it should he necessary), which differs entirely
from (I fi^ TToifia-aiTf tovto, if you should not do this; d tovto
iffxvpov rfv hv avT^ rcK/ii^ptoi/, if this would have been a strong proof for
him (if he had had it).
2. The apodosis is sometiiaes introduced by the conjunc-
tion Se, which cannot be translated in English. £.ff.
Et 8e Ke fiff 8waaiv, cyo) Se k«v avros eXa/iat, but if they do not give
her up, then I will take her myself.
I)
El after Terbs of Wondering, Ac.
§ 228* Some verbs expressing wonder^ contentment, dis-
appointment, indignation, &c. take a protasis with ci where a
causal sentence would seem more natural. So miror si in
Latin. H.g.
QavfM^oi 8' eyayyf el firibf\s vfxoiv fi^T evOvfiflrai firjT ofyyi^tTai, and I
wonder that no one of you is eitler concerned or angry (lit. if no one
of you is, &c., 1 wonder). See also § 248, 2, for the principle of
indirect discourse applied to these sentences.
Note. Such verbs are especially dav^a^&>, ala-xivofuu, dyairaa,
and ayavaKTeoi. They sometimes take ort, becaust, and a causal
sentence (§ 250).
ITT. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Kemark. The principles of construction of relative clauses include all
temporal clauses. Those introduced by ?ws, vplv, and other particles mean-
ing until, have special peculiarities, and are theref'^re treated separately
(§§ 239, 240).
§ 229. The antecedent of a relative is either definite
or indefinite. It is definite when tlie relative refers to a
definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place,
or manner ; it is indefinite when no such definite person,
thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite
§ 232.]
THE MOODS.
275
and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or
understood. E.g".
(^Definite.) Tavra A fx<". °P9s, you see these things which I have ;
or & e;^© opas' "Ort f^ovXtro ^XOtv, (once) when he wished, he came.
(Indefinite.) Yldvra a &v ^ovKavTat fi^ovtrtu, the}/ wilt have evert/-
Ihing which they may want ; or <4 hv /SovXuin-at t^ovcriv, they will hare
whatever they may want. "Orav tXOrj, tovto irpd^u), when he shall come
(or when he comes), I will do this. "Ore /SouXotro, tovto eTrpaaaeu,
whenever he wished, he (always) did this. 'Qs av ('inco, iroiSyfXfv, as I
shall direct, let us act.
Deflnlte Antecedent.
§ 230. A relative as such has no effect on the mood
of the following verb. A relative with a definite ante-
cedent therefore may take the indicative (with ou for its
negative) or any other construction which could occur in
an independent sentence. E.g".
TiV ftrff 6 x^P°s 8fjr' iv ^ ^e^r}Kap.(v ; i.e. the place in which, &C.
*Eo)f coTt Kaipbs, dvTiXd^faat tSjv npaypLaruiv, (now) while there is an
opportunity, &c. ToOto ovk firoirjafv, ivca tov 8fjftov erinrjafv av, he did
not do this, in which he would have honored the people. So 6 firi
ycVotro, may this not happen.
IndeAnlte Antecedent. — Conditional Relative. W V^
§ 231. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent
has a conditional force, and is often called a protasis,
the antecedent clause being called the apodosis. Such
a relative is called a conditional relative. The negative
particle is fi^.
Note. Relative words (like d, if) take av before the subjunc-
tive. (See §207, 2.) With orf, ^Trdrf, eVft, and fVetS.7, ^v forms
oTav, oTTorni/, ei;dv or enrjv (Ionic tntdv), and (irfiBdv. "A with av may
form av. In Homer we generally find oTt m, &c. (like d Kt, § 219, 2),
or oTf, &c. alone (§ 234).
§ 232. The conditionil relative sentence has foitr
forms (two of present and past, and two of fitture con-
ditions) which correspond to the four forms of ordinary
protasis (§§ 221-224).
i:
(j T(L\^ '-- <5 ri CLV
I . i
!' !
276
SYNTAX.
[§ 233.
1. Present or past condition simply stated (§ 221). E.g.
"O Ti fiovXfTai doxro), / will gwe him whatever he (now) ivishes
(like ft Ti jSouXfTot, doxro), if he (now) winhes ant/thing^ I will give it).
*A fiT) oi8a, ov8e oiofiai (tdci/m, what I do not know, I do not even think
I know (like ei nva firi otfia, if there are any things which I do not
know). ^
2. Present or past condition stated so as to imply that
the condition is not. or was not fulfilled (^supposition con-
trary to fact, § 222) . E.g.
^Afifi f/3ovXfTo dovvai, oiiK &v f8<oKev, he wunld noi have g'"'Cit what
he had not wished to give (like «i riva fif) f/3ouXfTo 8oi)vai, ovk hu fScsntv,
if he had not ickhed to give certain things, he would not have given
them). Ovk &v entxtipovfifu irpdrreiu A fifj fjniaTdfifda, we should
not (then) be undertaking to do (as we now are) things which we uui
not understand (like d rtva fiff fjjrurTafieda, if there were any things
which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a supposition
not realized). So oi; -y^pav eTer/ifi/, Od. i. 217.
This case occurs much less frequently than the ottiers.
3. Future condition in the more vivid form (§ 223).
E.g.
"O Ti &v fiovXrjTai, daxro), I will give him whatever he may wish
(like idv ti ^ovXijTai, doxro), if he shall wish anything, I will give it).
"Orau fiff adfvo), irendvaofiai, when I (shall) hare no more strength,
1 shall cease. 'AXd;^ouf Koi vrjiria TtKva a^ofitj/fv vrjfaaiv, eirifv nroXie-
6pov eXwfifv, we will carry them as soon as we shall have taken the
city. Horn.
Note. The future indicative cannot generally be substituted for
the subjunctive here, as it can in common protasis (§ 223, N. 1).
4. Future condition in the fess vivid form (§ 224). E.g.
"O Tt /SouXotTo, 8oiriv av, I should give him whatever he might
wish (like d ti 0ov\oito, Soirfv av, if he should ivish anything, I shoidd
give it). Iltivoav <f)dyoi &v onoTe /SovXotro, if he were hungry, he
would eat whenever he might ivish (like « noT€ ^oiiXoiro, if he should
ever wish).
§ 233. The conditional relative sentence has the same
forms as other conditional sentences (§ 225) in present
and past general supp(mtions, taking the subjunctive after
present tenses, and the optative after past tenses. E.g.
"O Tt &v /SovXf/rat 8i8(Ofit, I (always) give him whatever he wants
(like (dv rt /SovXi/rat, // fie ever wants anything). "O t* /SovXoiro
^
^'-*
Si-KJuX-
§233.
§285.]
THE MOODS.
277
wishes
ve it).
■ think
io not
that
I con-
11 what
', given
should
ve am
things
jsition
223). \
ly wish \
ive it). I
rength,
TTToiXie'
ken the
3ed for
1).
E.g'.
might
should
F!h ^^
should
same \
•esent |
! after I
E.ff. J
2 wants
iXotTO
1
f8i8ovp, I (always) gave him lohatever he wanted (like ft Tt /SouXotro).
^vfinaxt'iv TOVTOK (Bikovaiv &TravT€S, oxfs av opuxri TrapfcrKfvaa-ixivovs,
all wish to be allies of those whom they see prepared. HvIk* &v oikoi
yevauTai, 8pS)a-iv oiiK dvatrxera, when they get home, they do things
unbearable. Oiit niv i8oi (vrdierois lovras, rivfs re €i«v rjpaTa, Koi
cVet rrvdoiTo eir^vei, he (always) asked those whom he sato (at any
time) marching in good order, who they were ; and when he learned, he
praised them. 'E7r«t8^ M avoi\6flr}, fltrjitifitvitapa t6u ^(OKpart], and
(each morning) when the prison was opened, we went in to Socrates.
Note 1. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the sub-
junctive or optative here, as in the general suppositions of common
protasis (see § 225, N. 1). This occurs especially in poetry after
the indefinite relative Sorts, which itself expresses the same idea
of indefiniteness which os with the subjunctive or optative usually
expresses; as oaris fiff rav apiar<au aTTTerai fiovXevfidraiv, KaKiaros
(ivM SoKFt, whoever does not cling to the best counsels seems to be most
base. Soph. Antig. 178. (Here os au fxfj anrriTat would be the com-
mon prose expression.) Such examples belong under § 282, 1.
Note 2. Homeric similes sometimes have is, &s rt. ws ore, is os
(seldom &s kc, &c.), with the subjunctive, where we should expect
the present indicative, which is sometimes used; as is ywi} «Xat-
170- 1, .... is *Obv<revs, &c., as a wife weeps, so did Ulysses, &c.
Odyss. viii. 523. See Odyss. v. 328; //. x. 5; xi. 67.
§ 234. Conditional relative sentences have most of the
peculiarities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the
protasis and apodosis may have different forms (§ 227, 1);
the simple relative is sometimes found in poetry with the sub-
junctive (like ii for idv or e? kc, § 223, N. 2) ; the relative
clause may depend on an infinitive, participle, or other con-
struction (§ 226, 3 and 4) ; and the conjunction 8c may
connect the relative clause to a following antecedent clause
(§227,2).
Assimilation In Conditional Relative Clauses.
§ 235. 1. When a condition^ relative clause referring to
the future depends on a subjunctive or optative referring to
the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same moDd
with its leading verb. E.g.
•
'Eqi/ Tivti oX hv bvviavrai rovro Trotio't, KoXis e^ct, if any who may
be able shall do this, it will be well; et rti/cs ot bvvaivro tovto Trototc v,
KoXis &u e;(ot, if any who should be (or were) able should do this, it
\: vjiu/i"-
278
SYNTAX.
[§ 236.
t
\
would he tpell. Etdf navres ot 8vvaivTo tovto noio'ifv, O that all who
may he (or icere) able would do this, (Here the optative ttoiouv,
§ 251, 1, makes oi bvvaivro preferable to ot hv Siivtourm, which would
express the same idea). TeBvairiP ore fwi fiT}K(Ti ravra fitXoi, may
I die whenever I shall no lonr/er care for these {orau /xeXj; would express
the same idea). So in Latin: Injurias quas I'erre nequeus defugi-
endo relinquas.
2. Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence depends
on a secondary tense of the indicative implying the non-ful-
filment of a condition, it takes by assimilation a similar
form. E.g.
Et Tivfff ot ibvvavTo tovto enpa^av, Ka\ci)s av ttx^v, if any who had
been able had done this, it woidd have been tcell. Et ev eKfiinj tjj (fxavfj
Tf Kat T^ Tponcp eXeyov cv ols eTedpdpfirjP, if I were speaking to you
in the dialect and in the manner in which I had been brought up (all
introduced by et ^cVos irvyxavov wv, if I happened to be a foreigner).
So in Latin : Si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset,
neminem tu quidem eorum qui civerent exciperes.
Note. All clauses which come under this principle of assiiuilation are
really protases, and belong equally under § 232, 2, 3, or 4. This princi-
ple often decides which fomi shall be used in future conditions.
I h
1 1 1'
Is I:
Relative Clauses expressing Purpose, Result, or Cause.
§ 236. The relative is used v.iih the future indicative
to express a purpose. E.g.
Ylpea^nav irtpweiv fJTis tqvt ipel Koi irapea-Tai toIs Trpdypaaip, to
send an embassy to' say this, and to be present at the transactions. Ov
yap eo-Tt ^ot xP^H^"''"! oitoQev eKTiaat, for I have no money to pay the
fine ivith.
The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite; but the nega-
tive particle is always /^ti), as in final clauses.
Note 1. In Homer, the subjunctive (with Kf joined to the rela-
tive) is commonly found in this construction after primary tenses,
and the optative (without Kt) after secondary tenses. The optative
is sometimes found even in Attie prose, usually depending on
another optative.
NoTK 2. 'Ed)' w or f(f)* a>Tf, on condition that, which commonly
takes the infinitive (§ 267), sometimes takes the future indicative;
I as cVt TouTtB viTf^i<TTapai,(ecf)^ aT€ vn ovbfpos vpiav 5p^op,ai, I with-
\ draw on this condition, that I shall be ruled by none of you. Hdt.
Note 3. In this construction the future indicative is very
rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses-
^
239.]
THE MOODS.
279
\
§ 237, "Slare (sometimes w?), so that,, which general! y
takes the infinitive (§ 2H6, 1), is sometimes followed by
the indicative to express a result. The negative is ov.
OvTOii dyvtofjiovcjs fX""*' wort fXiri^ere avra xprjara yttrqafadai; are
you so sensf'less that you exjiecl them to become good?
Remark. When SxTTt takes the infinitive (with negative fii/), the
action of the verb is stated more distinctly as a result depending on
the action of the leading verb ; the indicative emphasizes the action
r.ither as an independent fact. Thus, in the preceding example, we
might have had eXTriCfiv, when the more natural translation would
have been are you so senseless as to expect. Sometimes it is indiffer-
ent whether the indicative or the infinitive is used with ©ore.
Note. A simple relative sentence with os or Sans sometimes
denotes a result^ where wore would be expected ; as ris ovroas fv^drfs
eariv, oaris dyvoet; who is so simple as not to know?
'■K> r-^«, .. • . ' ^
§ 238. The relative is sometimes equivalent to on, 6c-
cause^ and a personal or demonstrative. The verb is in the
indicative, as in ordinary causal sentences (§ 250). E.g.
QavfjLaarov noids, os fjfiiv ovSeu 8iba>s, you do a strange thing in
(jiving us nothing (like on ait ov8ev d(da>r). Ao^as dfiaBqs ctrat, or ... .
(KfXevft having seemed unlearned, because he commanded, &c.
Compare causal relative sentences in Latin.
^
Temporal Particles glgnifyliiK Until and Before that.
''■\
t
X.
\
§ 239* 1. When ew?, eo-re, axP*' I^^XP''' ^^^ o(f)pat
vntif^ refer to a definite point of past time, they take the
indicative. U.g.
N^X**" iToiKiv, emy €nrj\$ov fls iroTafiov, I swam on again, until 1
came into a river. Hom. TaOra iiroiovv, fitxpi (tkotos iyevtro, this
they did until darkness came on.
2. These particles follow the construction of conditional
relatives in the last three forms which correspond to or-
dinary protasis, and in general suppositions. U.g.
'*EvTto"xfy, fffT Ai/ <cal Ta Xoma npoirnddTjs, wait until you (shall)
learn the rest besides (§ 232, 3). Etn-ot/i* &p . . . . tos irapaTfivaifii
TovTov, I would tell him, &c., until I put him to the torture (§ 232, 4;
§ 235, 1). 'Hdca>r &p TovTta en biiK^yopriv, ton avrif .... dfrcduKa,
*,*.•■'
^'
S\
lU'
r
280
SYNTAX.
[§ 240.
•: ^} '
I I
/ should (in that ca.^e) gladly have continued to talk with him until I
had ffiven him hack, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2). *A 8' hv atrvvraKra .^,
ai/ayKi; ravra del Trpdyfiara Trafif'xfiv, ews av xdtpav Xd^jj, whatever things
are in disorder, these mu,st almii/s make truuhlc. until they are put in
order (§ 233). ntpiffitvofitv (KuaroTe, tag dvui\deiri to 8f(Tfia>Ti^piou.
we waited each day until the prison was opened (§ 233), or until the
prison should he opened (Note 2) .
Note 1. The omission of av after these particles and TrpjV, wlien
the verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after d or
ordinary relatives (§ 223, N. 2), occurring sometimes in Attic
prose; as iiixpt, TrXoOy yevfjrait Thuc. i. 137.
Note 2. Clauses introduced by eias, &c. and by irplv frequently
imply a purpose ; see the examples under 2. When these clauses
depend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of
indirect discourse (§ 248, 3), like final clauses (§ 216, 2). See
examples under § 248, 3.
§ 240. 1. When tt/oiV, before^ until, is not followed by
the infinitive (see below, 2), it takes the indicative, sub-
junctive, or optative, following the principles already
stated for ew? (§ 239). E.g.
OvK rjv akf^rjp! ovdep, irplv y iyat a(f>iaiv tbei^a, %c., tJiere was no
relief, until I showed them, &c. (§ 239, 1). Ou xP'l i^^ fvBfvdt dneXBtlv,
trpXv hv ha hUrfv, I must not leave this place until he is punished
(§ 232, 3). OvK &u elSfiTjs irp\p tr(ipT)deiT)s, you would not know until
you had (should have) tested it (§ 232, 4 ; § 235, 1). ^Expfjv pi) Tr/jore-
pov avp^ovXfvfiv, irplv fjpds fbida^av, &c., they our/hi not to have
given advice until they had instructed us, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2).
'Opaai Tovi irpfcr^tyrtpovs ov irpoaBfv dniovrai, irplv hv d(f>S>a-iv oi
SpXavres, they see that the elders never go away until the authorities
dismiss them. (§ 233). Ov8ap66fv d(f>ifa-av, irplv napaOdtv aiiToii
apiarov, they dismissed them from no place before they had set a meal
hef ore them (§233). *AirT)y6pfV€ prjbfva /SdXAfti/, nplv Kvpos tpirXtf-
adtirj drjpav, he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus should be sated
with the hunt (§ 239, 2, N. 2; § 248, 3).
For irpiv without ilv with the subjunctive, see § 239, N. 1.
2. In constructions in which irpiv (following the principle
of Iws, § 239) might take the subjunctive or optative, these
moods are generally used only when the leading verb is nega-
tive or interrogative with an implied negative. It takes the
indicative (when that would be allowed by the construction)
after both negative and affirmative sentences, but chiefl}' after
negatives.
§ 242.)
THE MOODS.
281
When TrpiV does not take the indicative, subjunctive, or
optative, it is followed by the infinitive (§ 274). In Homer,
the infinitive is the form regularly used after 7i-piV, without
regard to the leading sentence.
Note. Tlpiu is by ellipsis for irpiv fj (priusquam), and is prob-
ably for irpo-iov (irpo-iu), a comparative oi irp6, before. Ilpiv if,
irporepov if, and npoadfp 7 may be used iii the same construc-
tions as TTpiv itself.
ms no
sl^e(^
until
npoTc
hace
'A
IV oi
orities
avToli
vieal
Tr'Krj-
saleil
iciple
these
nega-
the
3tion)
after
IV. INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
General Principles.
§ 241. 1. A direct quotation or question gives the exact
words of the original speaker or writer. In an indirect
quotation or question the original words conform to the
construction of the sentence in which they are quoted.
Thus the words ravra ^ov\op.ai may be quoted either directly,
Xcyct Tts "raura ^ovXopai,'* OY indirectly, Xtyti ris on ravra ^ov-
Xerat or 0jjo"t Tts ravra ^ovKeadai, some one says that he wishes for this.
So ipardi " rt /SovXfi ;" he asks, " what do you want ? " But epara ri
^oiiXtrai, he asks him what he wants.
2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by on or a»?,
that, or by the infinitive (as in the example given above) ;
sometimes also by the participle.
Note. "Ort, tJiat, occasionally introduces even a direct quota-
tion; as in Anab. i. 6, 8.
3. Indirect questions follow the sam.e rule as indirect
quotations in regard to their moods and tenses.
Note. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even
single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indirectly
express the words or thought of any person, even past thoughts of
the speaker himself (§ 248).
§ 242. 1. Indirect quotations after 6ti and co? and
indirect questions follow these general rules : —
(r) After primary tenses, each verb retains both the
mood and the tense of the direct discourse.
n * <
M
282
SYNTAX.
[9 243.
(ft) After secondary tenses, each indicative or sub-
junctive of the direct discourse nuiy be either changed to
the same tense of the optative or retained in its original
7iiood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the indica-
tive implying non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 222) and
all optatives are retained unchanged.
Note. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the
optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sentences.
The aorist indicative likewise remains unchanged when it belongs
to a dependent clause of the direct discourse (§ 247) ; but when it
belongs to the leading clause, it is changed to the optative like the
primary tenses (§ 243).
2. When the quotation depends on a verb which takes
the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed to
the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle
{av being retained when there is one), and its dependent
verbs follow the preceding rule.
3. "Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative
in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form ;
but av belonging to a relative word or particle in the
direct form (§ 207, 2) is regularly dropped when the sub-
junctive is changed to the optative in indirect discourse.
Note. "Ai/ is never added in the indirect discourse when it was
not used in the direct form.
4. The negative particle of the direct discourse is
regularly retained in the indirect form. But the infini-
tive and participle occasionally have fnfj where ov would
be used in direct discourse (§ 283, 3).
Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse.
Indicative nnd Optative after 8ti and c&s, and In Indirect
Questions.
§ 243. When the direct form is an indicative (with-
out ai/), the principle of § 242, 1, gives the following rule
243.]
THE MOODS.
283
rect
for indirect quotations after 8tl or a>s" and for indirect
questions : —
After primary tenses the verb retains both its mood
and its tense. After secondary tenses it is either
changed to the same tense of the optative or retained
in the original mood and tense. E.g".
At'yft oTi ypa(j>€i, he says tfiat lie is writhif/ ; Xcyft on typat^xv,
he says that he was writing . \iy(i on eypa^rf, he says that he wrote ;
Xe^fi on yiypa(l>fp, he will say that he has written. 'Epuru n ^ov-
Xoi/rat, he asks what they want; dyvoSt n iroifjaova-ip, I do not
know what they will do.
Einev on ypd^ot or on ypa(f)fi, he said that he was writing (he
said ypa<f)a)). Elrrtv on ypdyj^oi ov on ypd'^d, he .mid that he
would write (he said ypd^o)). Ewrf i* ort ypdyjrfiev or on typayj/fv,
he said that he had written (he said fypa^a, I wrote). EfTTfv on
yfypa(fiui5 ftrj or on yeypa^ey, he said that he had tvritten (he said
ytypa(f>a^ I hare written).
(Opt.) ^Eirttpa>fir)p airr^ beiKVVvai, on o^oito pkv tivai o-o0or, fti;
6' ov, I tried to show him that he believed himself to he wise, but was not
so (i.e. oierai ftfv . . . tori 8 oC). 'Yirfiiratv art airos TOKft npd^ot,
axfro, hinting that he wotdd himself attend to things there, he departed
(he said avrbs raKtl irpd^a). "EXt^av 8n -ntpy^fif (r<f)di 6 'ivBav
0atriKfvs, Kt'Kevoiv fputrdv t^ otov 6 noXtpos fii;, they said that the
king of the Indians had sent them, coinniaiuling them to ask on what
account there was the war (tliey said (Ttfp^fv ffpus, and the question
was (K Tivos ianu 6 noXtpos ;)• "Hptro d nt (p,ov cti/ ao(f)d>Tepos,
tie asked whether there icas any one wiser than I (i.e. eort ns aoiftu-
Tf pos ;) •
(Indic.) "EXcyoi* on eXiri^ovat at Ka\ ttjv iroXip e^fiv poi xdpiv,
they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to me.
*HKe 8^ dyyfXXav ns cas 'HXareta icaTftXijTrrat, some one was come
with a report that Elatea had been taken (here the perfect optative
might have been used). *A7roKpivafifvoi on irefi^ovai npta^eis,
evdiis dntjXXa^au, having replied that they would send amha.s.mdors, they
dismis.sed them at once. 'Htropovv n irore Xe'yct, 1 was uncertain what
he meant (rt irort Xfyf*»)' ^E^ovXeiovro nv avrov KaraXfi^ovaiv,
they were considering (the question) whom they should leace here.
Note 1. The imperfect and pluperfect regularly remain un-
changed in this construction after secondary tenses (§ 242, 1, N.).
But occasionally the present optative represents the imperfect here ;
as dittKpivavTo on oiibth iidprvs Trapeir], they replied that there had been
no witness present (ov8eis irapriv), where the context makes it clear
that irapfii] does not stand for irdpean. See § 203, N. 1.
Note 2. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative
to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in this construction,
284
SYNTAX.
[§ 244.
' M
' i:
instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as «V anopiqi
^aav, ivvoovfuvoi ort cVt rmr (iaaiXiats Ovpan ^aav^ npovStdrnKtirav
8i avTovs ol ^ap(iapoi, thei/ were in despair, cotisideriny tlial they were
at the Kiiufs yaten, and that the barbarians had betrayed them. (See
the whole passage, Anab. iii. 1, 2.) This is also the English
usage.
Subjunctive or Optative representluK the IiiterroKHtlve
Sul^unctlve.
§ 244. In indirect questions, after a primary tense, an
interrogative subjunctive (§ 256) retains its mood and
tense ; after a secondary tense, it may be either changed
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub-
Kg.
junctive.
BovXf vopai oTTwff ae diroSpio, I am tryiny to think how I shall
escape you {nunae diro8pw;). Ovk otS' c* Xpvvdvra rnvrtf 8a, I do not
knoio whether J shall yice them to Chrysantas here. Ovk tx<a ri rtn-u,
/ do not know what I shall say (ji finu;) Non liabeo quid dicani.
'EirffpoPTo «i irapaboiev rrjv noXiv, they asked whether, they should give
up the city {irapttb&p.tv tt]U noKiv; shall we yire up the city?). ^Hirnpti
o Tt ;(p^(ratro t^ irpdyfiart, he was at a loss how to deal With the
matter (rt XPW'^H^''')- 'EfiovXtvovro eire KaTaKavatoaiv «trr ri
«XXo xP^<''<i>>'^<i*> '^'^y "^'*'''^ deliberating whether they should burn
them or dispose of them in some other way.
Note 1. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the
optative when the leading verb is in the optative, contrary to the
general usage in indirect discourse (§ 201, N. 2); as ovk fii/ ?xois
o rt finoii, you would not know what to say.
NoTK 2. In these cases d (not tdv) is used for whether, before
the subjunctive as well as the optative : see the second example.
Indicative or Optative with ftv.
§ 245. An indicative or optative with av retains its mood
and tense (with av) unchanged in indirect discourse after on
or (1)5 and in indirect questions. E.g.
Afyf I (ov fKey ep) oTi TovTo &v eyt'i/fTo, he says (or said) that this
would hace happened ; eXeyev on ovtos 8iKaia>s &v diroddvoi, he .^aid
that this man would justly die. 'Hparav d 8oUp &v to n-tora, they asked
whether they tcoxdd give the pledges (jboiriTf av;).
247.]
THE MOODS.
286
fire Ti
InflnttlTe and Participle In Indirect Quotation*
§ 246. When the infinitive or participle is used in
indirect discourse, its tense represents the tense of the
finite verb in the direct form to which it corresponds, the
present and perfect inchiding tl>e imperfect and phi per-
fect. Each tense with di> can represent the correspond-
ing' tenses of either indicative or optative with dv. E.ff.
*\pp<ii(TT(\v nf)o(paaiCtTat, he pretends that he is ill, f^wfiotrtv
appoxTTtlv TovTuvl, he took an oath that this man was ill. Kara-
o-x't" <l>rj(ii ToiiTovi, he sai/s that he detained them. "Ef^?; xpfjfta6'
iaxrr^ Tovi Qr)^aio\)i iiti.KfKTipvx'vai, he said that the Thehuns had
offered a reicurd for him. 'ETrayyeXAfTOi to. dUaia Tfotrfaeiv,
he protnises to do what is right. See examples under § 203,
and N. 1.
"HyytiXt TovTovi i p)(op.(vovs, he announced that these were coming
(oZtoi ip\ovTai)\ ayyiWa Tovrovi fXddvras, he announces that these
came: ayytWti tovto yturfaofifvov, he announces that this wdl he
done: fjyyti\( tovto yturjaofievov, he announced that this would he
done: ^yyftXf T«ji5To yfyeurjfi(vov,he announced that this had been
done (tovto y(ytur)Tai).
See examples of av with infinitive and participle under § 211.
Note. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse and its
tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends on
a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when also
the thought, as originally conceired, would have been expressed bv
some tense of the indicative (with or without au) or optative (witn
oi/), and can therefore be transferred without change of tense to the
infinitive. Thus in /SovXfrai f\dflv, he wishes to go, e\deiv repre-
sents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is
not in indirect discourse. But in <f)r}(Tiu «\6flv, he says that he went^
eX^el)* represents ^\Bov of the direct discourse.
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences.
§ 247. When a compound sentence is indirectly
quoted, its leadinpi; verb follows the rule for simple sen-
tences (§§ 243-246).
After primary tenses the dependent verbs of the quo-
tation retain the same mood and tense. After secondary
censes, all primary tenses of the indicative and all sub-
l\\ I
<•!•
, i, .
286
SYNTAX.
[8 247.
junctives may eitlier be changed to the same tense of the
optative or retain the mood and tense of the direct
form. But dependent secondary tenses of the indicative
are kept unchanged. E.f^.
*Av iifitU XtyrfTt, iroiTf(rtiv ((f)ij<riv) t fifjT ala\vpr}v /iijt' nAo^iai/
air^ (f)€fKt, if f/oH (shu/l) saf/ so, he naifs he nnU ilo whatever iloes not
hrhuf shame or t/iscretiit to him. Here no change is made, except in
•noii)iTttv (§ 246).
*\iTtKpivarooTi ^lavBavoitv h om tirivraivTo, he rfpliftl, fhatlheif
were learniufj what theij did not understand (lie said yiavBiivovniv h
ovK firiaravrait which niiglit have been retained). Ei riva (jitvyovTa
Xi^^otro, irpot)y6p(vtv on ws iroXtfiiKp ^vpi^cotTO, he annnunccd that
if he should catch anif one rnnniny awaif, he should treat him as an
enemy (he said ci riva "K^^opat, xPW"f*(^h § ---^ N. 1). *E»6fu(tv,
oaa rfjs noXtus 7rpo\d^oi, navra raiiTa /^r/3a(<us t^tiu, he hcliercd
that he should hola all those jdaces securehj which he should take from
the city beforehand {oa &v 7rpoXa/9a), «$<»). 'EdoKrt poi ravrj} wfipatrdai
awBfivai, tvBvpiovfifVt^ on, tav fiiv Xadoa, aadi^aopai, it seemed hest
to me to try to gain safety in this way, thinking that, if I should
escape notice, I should be saved (here we might have had d \d6oifii,
<r<odrf(roifiTiv). ''E<^aaav tovs ap8pas dnoKTtvfiv odr txovai ^uivras,
they said that they shoubl kill the men whom they had lioiny (dnonTt-
vovfifv oi)s fxonfv, which might liave been changed to diroKTtvt'iv
o6r (Xoi(v). IIp68rj\ou ^v (toCto) (<r6fifvov, u pff KcoXvacrr, it
was plain that this would he so unless you should prevent (toOto
itrrai, d prj KutkvatTt, which might have become <t pfj KuiXvamrt).
"HXiti^ov tovs 2tK«Xoi/r ravrji, ovi pitrcnfp.^avro, ditavn/iattrBai, they
hoped the Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them here (X. 2).
Note 1. One verb may be changed to the optative while another
is retained; as di^Xoxrar on crot/iot tlai /xcl, Oahuns f$€pxoiTo,
hai'iny shown that they icere ready to fight if any one should come
forth ieToipoi(l<nv,idv ns f^f PXITai). This sometimes causes a great
variety of constructions in the same sentence.
Note 2. The aorist indicative is not changed to the aorist opta-
tive in dependent clauses, because the latter tense is commonly
used to represent the aorist subjunctive. In dependent clauses in
which confusion would be impossible (as in causal sentences, which
never have a subjunctive), even an aorist indicative may become
optative.
For the imperfect and pluperfect see § 242, 1 (/>), Note.
Note 3. A dei^ndent optative of the direct form naturally
remains unchanged in all indirect discourse.
Note 4. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indicative
IS changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as iu the leading clause
(§ 243, N. 2).
I 248.]
THE MOODS.
287
§ 248. The principles of § 247 apply also to nnif
dependent clause (in a sentence of any kind) which
expresses indirectly the past thoughts of any person, even
of the speaker himself.
This applies cai)ccliilly to the following constructions : —
1. Clauses dci)endinjj; on an iuHnitivc after verbs of wish-
ing^ commanding^ advising^ &c., which imply thought^ although
the infinitive after them is not in indirect discourse (§ 24G,
Note).
2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied
in the context (§ 226, 4, N. 1), or with the apodosis expressed
in a verb like davfidCin (§ 228).
3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention or purpose,
especially those introduced by cws or irpCv after past tenses.
4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regularly
take the indicative.
This affects the construction of course only after past
tenses. E.g.
(1) 'E/3oyXoi/To fX^fji/, ft TovTo yei/oiTo, they wished to go if thin
should happen. (Here t^ovXovro iXdtlu, tav tovto yfUTjrai might be
used, expressing the form, if thin shall happen, in which the wish
would be conceived. Here (Xdttv is not in indirect discourse.
(§ 226, 4; § 246, N.) 'EkcXcvctci/ 6 ti Svuaivro Xo^oWar /icradia»c«tf,
he commanded them to take what they could and pursue (he said o n
hv hvvr^aBt, what you can, and therefore we mij^ht have had o rt hv
hvvtavrai). Upotiirov avrois fiff pavfia)((iv Kopivdiois, fjv firf cVl KepKvpnv
n-XcQxrt Koi peWaxriu arro^aivdv, they instructed them not to engage
in a sea fight with Corinthians, unless these should be sailing against
Corcyra and should be on the point of landing. (Here the direct
forms are retained, for which €i pfj irXeoitv koi piWoiev might
have been used.)
(2) "fliKTf tpoi/, ft AXuxroivTo, they pitied them, in case they should
he captured (the thought being d iXato-ovrai, which might have
been retamed). ^vXokqs avpnfpnfi, onats (^vXarrotfi' airou, Koi d t6>i»
dypioiv Tt (^avfit) Orjpiciv, he sends (sent) guards, to guard him and (io
he ready) in case any of the sarnge beasts should appear (the thought
being (dv ti (ftavy). TaXXa, fju (Ti vavpaxdv oi 'AOrfvaioi roX/x^o'aio-t,
naptaKfvd^ovTo, they made the other preparations, (to be ready) in case
the Athenians should still venture a naval battle. "Exuipov dyanwu ci
7"ty (daoi, I rejoiced, being content if Qny one would let it pass (the
51 '
288
SYNTAX.
[§ 249.
r 11
thought was dyanio €i rtt eaa-ei). *Edavfia(tv el ris apyvpiov irpdr-
T0I.TO-, he wondered that any one demanded money (Aen. Mem.
i. 2, 7); but in the same book (i. 1, 13) we find eOavfia^e 8' a /*))
(f)avep6v avToie ecrrii/, he wondered that it was not plain.
(3) ^novbas fnonjaavro eiwy dirayyeXdfiij ra "Kfxdfpra els AaKf-
8aifxoua, they made a truce, (to continue) tmtil ichal had been said should
he reported at Sparta (then* thought was ews &u dnayytXdfj, which
might have been retained). Ov yap 8»; a(f)fas dnifi 6 6(6s r^i diroi-
Kirjs, 7rp\u 8fi diriKwvTai is avrffv At^vrju, i.e. until they should come,
&c. (where dniKoivTo might have been used). Hdt. Mfvovres
earaaau oimoTf nvpyos Tponou 6pp,ij<reif, they stood waiting until (for
the time when) a column should rush upon the Trojans. Hom.
(4) Kal 17x66 afjpa Ideadai, o m pa oi yap^poio irdpa UpoiToto
(ftepoiTo, he asked to see the token, lohich he was bringing (as he
said) from Froetus. KaTr)y6pfou tcou AlyivrjTfOiv to. TreiroiijKoiev
irpoMvTfs TTju 'EXXdSa, they accused the Aeginetans for what (as they
sai(l) they had done in betraying Greece.
For the same principle in causal sentences, see § 250, Note.
NoTK. On this principle, final and object clauses with iva, oiras,
0)5, pi], &c. admit the double construction of indirect discourse, and
allow either the subjunctive or future indicative (as the case may
be) to stand unchanged after secondary tenses. (See § 216, 2.)
The same principle extends to all conditional and all conditional
relative and temporal sentences depending on final or object clauses,
as these too belong to the indire?t discourse.
"Oirws AND Homeric "O in Indirect Quotations.
§ 249. 1 . In a few cases ottws is used for ws or on in
indirect quotations, chiefly in poetr3\ E.g.
TovTo pri pot <f)pd(\ oTras ovK fiKUKos, do not tell me this^ that you
are not base. Soph.
2. Homer rarely uses o (neuter of os) for on. E.g.
Afvaatre yap to ye ndvTes, o poi yepas epxerai aKXij, for you all see
this, that my prize goes another way. TiyvoiOKUiv o oi ai/ros imeipexe
Xeipas 'AttoXXcbv, knowing that Apollo himself held over him his hands.
V. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
§ 250. Causal sentences express a cause or reason^ and
are introduced by on, w?, because^ eVei, iireiS^, ore, ottotc,
since^ and by other particles of similar meaning. They
[§ 249.
u TrpaT-
. Mem.
Hs AaKf-
Id should
), which
ri)s dnoi-
id come,
uitil (for
IIpOlTOtO
g (as he
ir]Kotep
I (as they
ote.
va, oTras,
irse, and
3ase may
216, 2.)
iiditioiuil
) clauses,
*.
)r oTL in
that you
OH all see
tmeiptxf
hands.
^0% and
;, oTTore,
They
§ 251.]
THE MOODS.
289
take the indicative after both primary and secondary-
tenses. The negative particle is ov. E.g.
Krj8eTo yap Aapaiov, on pa dufjaKovras nparo, for he pitied the
Danai, because he saw them dying. "Ore roiff ovras c^^*' irpoarjKfi,
&c., since this is so, it is becoming, &c.
Note. On the principle of indirect discourse (§ 248), the optative
may be used in a causal sentence after a past tense, to imply that
the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person than Lhe
speaker; as t6u UfpiKkta eKOKi^op, on aTparqyos i>u ovk eire^dyot,
they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general he did not
lead them out. Thuc. (This assigns the Athenians^ reason for abus-
ing him, and does not show the historian's opinion.)
VI. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
§ 251. 1. When a wish refers to the future, it is ex-
pressed by the optativv., either with or without eWe or el
yap (Horn, at^e, at yap)-, O that, O if. The negative is
/A»i, which can stand alone with the optative. E.g'.
At yap €po\ Toaarjvde (9fol bvvap.iv rrapaBtlev, that t\e Gods would
clothe me loith so much strength. Horn. To pev vvv ravra Trprjaaois
rdnep ev xfpa\v exfis, for the present may you continue to do these
things which you have now in han.l. Hdt. Eide <f>i\os fjpiv yivoio,
that you may become our friend. MrjKeTi C^V ^y*^' '"^^ ^ "^ longer
live. Tedvairjv, ^rc poi, priKtri ravra ptXoi, may 1 die when I shall
no longer care for these things (§ 235, 1).
For the distinction between the present and aorist see § 202, 1.
Note 1. In poetry ft alone is somet.mes used with the optative
in wishes; as et pot yevoiro (\)66yyos iv ^pax^oa-iv, that 1 might
find a voice in my arms. Eur.
Note 2. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes prefix ins (not
translatable) to the optative in wishes ; as is dnoXoiro koI aXkos ort?
rotavrd ye ptCfih likewise may any other perish who may do the like.
Note 3. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone
sometimes expresses a concession or permission, sometimes a command
or exhortation ; as avris^Apyeirju 'E\€VT)v Meve'Xaos ayoiro, Menelaus
may take back Argice Helen. 'Veftvuirfs, S) Hlpoir'^^ KOKrave BtWepo-
(f)6vrriv, either die, or kill Belierophonten. Here, and in the optative
aloue in wishes, we probiibly have au original independent use of
the optative; while all the forms of wishes introduced hy fWf, tl
ydp, or et are elliptical protases, as i' seen by the use of et, and by
the force of the tenses, which is the same as it is in protasis.
19
1"
■■ ill ;
4:
I
290
SYNTAX.
[§ 252.
2. When a wish refers to the present or the past, and
it is implied that its object is not or was not attained, it
is expressed by a serondary tense of the indicative witli
eWe or el yap, which here cannot be omitted. The imper-
fect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis
(§222). jE.-.
EiOe TovTo e fro let, that he iiHive doing thin, or O that he had done
this. Etde TOVTO eiroir)<T€v, O that fie had done this; et yap fifj
fy€V€To TOVTO, O that this had not happened.
"Elff «ix*r fiekriovs (jypivas, that thou hadst a better under standing.
Et yap Too-avTTfp bvvafuv ei^ov, that I had so great power. Ei^e aot
TOTc (TvveyfvofjLrjv, that I had then met with you.
Note 1. The aorist a(f>e\ov of 6<j)fi\(o, debeo, and in Homer some-
times the imperfect a(f>e\\ov, are used with the infinitive in wishes,
with the same meaning as the secondary tenses of the indicative ; as
w<f)(\f TOVTO noietp, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought to he
doing this), or icould that he had done this (habitualltj) ; a>(f}€\e tovto
Troifjfrai, would that he had done this. For the distinction made by
the different tenses of the infinitive, see § 222, N. 2.
XoTE 2. "fi^eXov is negatived by firj (not ov), and it may even
be preceded by eide, et yap, or coy; as /uij ttot cd^eXof Xtiretv t^i»
2Kvpov, that I had never left Scyros; et yap w^eXoi/ oiot re etvat,
that they were able, &c. ; so la (o(f>t\€s oXiadai. As this is really an
apodosis, like edfi, &c., with the infinitive (§ 222, N. 2), the use of
tide and ct yap with it is an anomaly: firj should perhaps be con-
structed with the infinitive.
'! I
"\ i
4f
VII. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS,
EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS.
§ 252. The imperative expresses a command, exhorta-
tion, or entreaty ; as Xeye, .speak thou ; (fyevye, begone !
i\6era>, let him come ; x^ipovroiv, let them rejoice.
Note. A combination of a command and a question is found in
such phrases asoto-^' 6 hpatrov; do — dost thou know what?
§ 253. The first person of the subjunctive (generally
plural^ is used in exhortations. Its negative is /m^. E.g.
"lot lit V, let us go ; idufAfv, let us see; fi^ tovto Tro^w/iti', let m
not do this.
§ 256.]
THE MOODS.
291
Note. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by
ay€ (ayert), (fyept, or tdi, come I These words are used without
regard to the number or person of the verb which follows; as aye
uifivfTe ndvres-
§ 254. In prohibitions, in the second and third per-
sons, the present imperaHve or the aorisl subjunctive is
used with fit} and its compounds. E.g'.
Mt] TTotet TovTo, do not do this (Jiahitnally) , or do not go on doinr/
f/iis : fiff noi^trijs tovto, (simply) do not do this. Mtf koto, tovs
vofiovs 8iKd(rrjTf nfj ^orfdrjariTe ra nenovdoTi Bfiva- fif) (i/opKeiTf,
do not judge according '.> the laws : do not help him who has suffered
outrages ; do not abide by your oaths.
The two forms have merely the usual distinction between the
present and aorist (§ 202, 1).
NoTK. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes
occurs in prohibitions ; the second person very rarely.
E.ff.
VIII. SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE
(IN HOMER). — INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. —
SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH
ov iirj.
§ 255, In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen-
tences sometimes has the force of a future indicative . E.^.
Oi) yap TTfi) Toiovi Xhov dvipas, ovSe iBcufjiai, for I never yet saw nor
shall I ever see such men. Kai nore Ttj eiTrija-iv, and one will (or
wiay) some time say.
Note. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take
nv or Ke to form an apodosis. See § 209, 2, with the example.
§ 256. The tiisb person of the subjunctive, and some-
times the third, may be used in questions of doubt, where
a person asks himself or another ivhat he is to do. It i?
negatived by firj. It is often introduced by /SovXei or
fiovXecrOe (in poetry 0eXeL^ or ^eXere). E.g.
EtTTft) Tavra; shall I say this? or /3oi3Xc( fiTrw ravra; do you wish
that I should say this? Tlol rpdiranai; noi tt opt v6(o; whither shall
I turn? tvhither shall I go? Tlov 8f) (iovKti KaBi^ufitvoi dvayvconfv;
where now icilt thou that we sit down and read? Tt Ttr tlvai tovto (f)fi;
what shall any one (i.e. /) say this is?
So in Tt nddio; what will become of me? what harm will it do me?
(lit. what shall I undergo ?)
ii
j ■ . ■' !
1^
I !.
292
SYNTAX.
[§ 257.
§ 257. The subjunctive and future indicative are
used with the double negative ou fit] in the sense of the
future indicative with ou, but with more emphasis. E.g.
Ou fit) TriBrfTai, he ivill not obey. OiIt€ yap ytyi/frm, oCre yiyovfv,
ov8e ovu fiq yevrjrai, for there is not, nor has there been, nor will
there ever be, &c. Ov nor e^ tfiov yt fif) iradrjs rode, you never shall
suffer this at my hands. OH toi nfjTTOTf af . . . aKovra tis a^et, no one
shall ever take you ayainsl your will, &c.
The double negative here seems to have merely the force of
emphasis, and the subjunctive is a relic of the old usage (§ 255).
The anrist subjunctive is generally used in these expressions.
Note. This construction in the second person sometimes ex-
presses a strong prohibition ; as ov n^ Kara^fjafi, do not come down
(lit. you shall not come down) ; ov fxi) o-»ca»/^i/s, do not mock.^ The
future indicative and the aorist subjunctive are both allowed in this
sense. The imperative force is to be explained as in the future
used imperatively (§ 200, N. 8).
THE INFINITIVE.
§ 258. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal
noun, and may take the neuter article in all its cases. It
may at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or ob-
ject ; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives.
§ 259. The infinitive as nominative may be the sub-
ject of a finite verb, especially of an impersonal verb
(§ 134, N. 2) or of cVti; or it may be a predicate
(§ 136). As accusative it may be the subject of another
infinitive. E.g.
^vve^Tj avra eXdelv, it happened to him to go; t^fjv fitveiu, it was
possible to remain; ^8v ttoWovs f'xdpovs txfi-v; is it pleasant to have
many enemies? (f)rj(riv e^tlvai tovtois fifvtiv, he says it is possible for
these to remain (^eWti/ being subject of t^flvui). To yvwvai itnoTr)-
firfu XafStlu eoTiu, to learn is to acquire knowicdf/e. Tovto iari to ahi-
K(iv, this is to commit injustice. To yap ddvarov SeStci/at ov8fv uXXo
€OTii/ ^ 8oK«iv ao(f)6u elvai pf] ovra, for to fear death (the fear of
death) is nothing else than to seem to be wise without being so.
Note. These infinitives usually stand without the article; but
whenever it is desired to make the infinitive more prominent as a
noun (see the last examples), the article can be added. See § 260,
1, N. 2.
260.]
THE INFINITIVE.
293
ivas
have
hi for
ridTij-
o ahi-
iiKKo
ir of
but
as a
260,
§ 260. The infinitive without the article may be the
object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object
accusative, sometimes that of a cognate accusative, and
sometimes that of an object genitive.
1. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse may follow-
any verb whose action naturall}- implies another action as its
object. Such verbs are in general the same in Greek as in
English, and others must be learned by practice. U.g.
BovXfrat f\0elv, he wishes to go: 0oi\fTai roiis TroXtras noXefiiKovs
ftvai, he wishes the citizetis to he warlike ; napaivovfifu (toi fifpciv,
we advise you to remain : TrpotiXtro iroXefi^aai, he preferred to make
war; KfXevct at fifj anf\6tip, he commands you not to depart ; d^tov-
aiv (ipxfiv, they claim the right to rule ; a^iovrai davflv, he is thought
to deserve to die ; btofiai v/xtoi/ avyyvwfirjv pot f\fiVy I ask you to have
consideration for me. So KioKvfi at (iahi^tiv, he prevents you from
marching ; ovirf<l>vKe dovXfveiv, he is not horn to he a slave: dra/SaX-
XeraiTovTO Trotrti/, he postpones doing this ; Kivdvveiifi daveiVy he is
in danger of death.
Note 1. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and aorist,
and these do not differ in their time (§ 202, 1, 2, and 3). In this
construction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any
other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of tlie verb gene-
rally gives it a reference to the future ; as in d^iovrai davdv (above)
Bavfiu expresses time only so far as davdrov would do so in its place.
Its negative is fii] (§ 283, 3).
Note 2. When the infinitive is the object of a verb which does not com-
monly take this construction, it generally has the article ; as t6 TeKevrrjaai
irdvTuv i) TTfTrpwuivrj Kar^Kpivev, Fate adjudged death to all. Occasionally
even the ordinary verbs included in § 260, 1 (as verbs of wishing) take the
infinitive with t6 as an object accusative, chieHy in poetry ; as t6 8pdv ovk
r)dk\r)(jav, t/tey were not willing to act.
2. The object infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 203) fDllows
a verb imi)lying thought or the expression of thought., ov some
equivalent phrase. Here each tense of the infinitive corre-
sponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See
§ 246, with the examples and Note.
Note 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, —
(a) <f}rini regularly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse;
(6) (iTTou takes on or a>y with the indicative or optative ;
(c) Xcyo) allows either construction, but in the active voice it gen-
erally takes on or itt.
,' I
rp
294
SYNTAX.
[§ 261.
Note 2. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indirect
discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation ; ;is eVctS^
8f yfPf<rdai eVi rfj otKia, {ef^rf) dveayiievrjv KarcXafijidpfiv rfjv dvpav,
uivl when I hey came to the house, then found the door open (Jie said).
Herodotus allows this even after ft, if, and fitdrt, became.
§ 261. !• The infinitive without the article limits the
meaning of many adjectives and nouns. U.g.
Avvaros iroitlv tovto, able to do this' 8eivos Xcyftv, skilled in
speakiny ; a^ios tovto T^a^elv, worthy to receive this: irpodvfios X«-
yt IV, eager to speak ; fia\aKo\ KupTtpdv, (too) effeminate to endure :
(nnTTT)p.Q)v Xeyeti' re Ka\ aiydv, knowiny how both to speak and to be
silent.
^AvdyKrf cWt irdinas dneXdelv, there is a necessity that all shoxdd
withdraw; Kivdwos ^v aiira ira6e7v ti, he was in danger of sufferiny
somethiny ; dpa djrievai, it is time to go away; eXiriSas €\(i tovto
TTot^o-ai, he has hopes of doiny this.
Note 1. Adjectives of this class are especially those denoting
ability, fitness, desert, readiness, and their opposites ; and, in general,
those corresponding in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive
(§ 260, 1). Nouns of this class are such as form with a verb (gen-
erally elpi) an expression equivalent to a verb which takes the
object infinitive. Most nouns take the infinitive with the article as
an adnominal genitive (§ 262, 2).
Note 2. The article is sometimes prefixed to the infinitive here,
as after verbs (§ 260, 1, N. 2). This shows more clearly its char-
acter as an object accusative ; as to /3ia TroXtTwv 8pdv f(f>vp dpfjxavoi,
I am incapable of actiny in defiance of the citizens.
2. Any adjective or adverb may take the infinitive
without the article as an accusative of specification
(§160,1). E.g.
Qeapa alaxpov opdv, a siyht disyraceful to behold ; \oyoi vpivxprj-
aiputTOToi dKovtrai, words most useful for you to hear ; tu ;(aXf7ra>TaTa
fvpelv, the thinys hardest to find ; rroXiTtia xaKtnf) avCr}", a yovern-
inent hard to Hoe under. KoXXtora (adv.) ibflv, in a manner most
deliyhtful to behold.
Remark. This infinitive is generally active rather than passive;
as TTpdypa xaXfTToi' woieiv, a thiny hard to do, rather than xa^^^^'J"
TTOKto-^ai, hard to be done.
Note. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive on this
principle; as 6avpa i84aBai, a wonder to behold. '/.purTtveaKf fxd-
X*<r6ai, he was the first injiyhtiny (like fidxriv). Horn.
§ 263.]
THE INFINITIVE.
295
§ 262* 1. Tlie infinitive may depend on a preposition,
in which case the article toi), tw, or to must be pre-
fixed. U.g.
Tlpo rov Toi»f opKovs aTro8ovuai, before taking the oaths ; irpbs t^
fir}bfv (K TTJs irpeafifiai Xa^f ii^, hesidett recehnnf/ nothing by the embassy,
bia TO ^ivos ( Iva i ovk &v out d8iKr)drivai ; do you think you would not
be tvronffi'd on account of your being a stranger?
2. The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with the
article, can stand in most of the constructions belonging
to those cases ; as in that of the adnominal genitive, the
genitive after a comparative or after verbs and adjectives,
the dative of manner, means, &c., the dative after verbs
and adjectives, and sometimes in that of the genitive of
cause or purpose (§ 173, 1). U.cf.
Tov iriflv tmdvfiia, a desire to drink; Kptirrov Tov\a\eiv, better
than prating ; iviaxoptv tov 8aKpv€iv, we ceased our weeping (§263);
drjddi TOV KaraKovfiv TiviU ctVti/, they are unused to obeying any one.
T<^ (f)avfpos fivai ToioiJTos &v, by having it evident that he ivas such a
man ; t& Koaplas C^ " iricTevfiv, to trust in an orderly life : laov roi
irpo<rT€vfiu, eijual to lamenting beforehand. Mivas to Xt/Otikov Kadrj-
pfi, ToC Tus Trpoa-odovs p.aK\ov levai avr^, Minos put down piracy, that
his revenues might come in more abundantly. Thuc.
§ 263* 1. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or
freedom from anjthing allow either the infinitive with rov
(§ 262, 2) or the simple infinitive (§ 260, 1). As the infin-
itive after such verbs can take the negative fiy without affect-
ing the sense (§ 283, 6), we have a third and fourth form,
still with the same meaning. (See Note, and § 263, 2.) E.g.
Eipy« ae tovto itokiv, (ipyti ac tov tovto iroielu, fipyfi (re fi^
TovTo noielv, eXpyei ae toO pfi tovto noielv, all meaning he prevents
you from doing this. Tov ^iXiiTTrov irapfKOuv ovk ibvvavTo KcoXvo-at,
they could not hinder Philip from passing through. Tov bpaneTfv-
tiv dirdpyoviri, they restrain them from running away. "Oirep f(r\( fi^
TTju n(\on6vpt)aov iropdetv, which prevented (him') from ravaging
Peloponnesus. "E^et avTovs tow pi^ KaTabvvaiy it will keep them
from sinking.
Note. When the leading verb is negatived (or interrogative im-
plying a negative), the double negative ftri ov is generally used
rather than the simple prj with the infinitive (§ 283, 7) so that we
29j6
SYNTAX.
[§ 264.
I ■
I 'I
I'll
m
! '^ :
can say oIk tXpyd erf fifj ov tovto iroietv, he doe.^ not prevent you from
doing this. ToO fifj ov noidv is rarely (if ever) used.
2. The inflnitive with to fxi} (sometimes with to alone) may
be used after expressions denoting hindrance, and also after
all which even imply prevention, omission, or denial. This
infinitive with to is less closely connected with the leading
verb than are the forms just mentioned (1), and it may often
be considered an accusative of specification (§ 160, 1), and
sometimes (as after verbs of denial) an object accusative.
Sometimes it expresses merely a result. E.g.
Thv ofii\ov (Ipyov to fi^ to iyybs rrjs voXeciK KOKovpyriv, they pre-
vented the crowd from injuring the neighboring parts of the city. Ka>Xv-
<rei (TtTo 8pau, he will prevent yon from acting (§ 260, 1, N. 2). Kifiat-
va napa Tpds difxlaav ^rj(^ovf to p.Tj davdrct (rjp,i&a-ai, they allowed
Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of death (they let him off
from the punishment of death), ^o^os dv6' vnvov irapaararu, to fi.fi
^\€(f>apa <Tvp.^a\tiv, fear stands by me instead of sleep, preventing me
from closing my eyelids.
Thus we have a>ffh and a sixth form, tipyfi trt to p.^ tovto irot-
tlv and eipy« o-e to tovto iroiflv, added to those given in § 263, 1,
as equivalents of the English he prevents you from doing this.
Note. Here, as above (1, Note) p.^ ov is used when the leading
verb is negatived ; as oibfv yap avTO) toUt eirapKea ft to fii) ov ire-
<reiv,for this will not at all suffice to prevent hi7n from falling.
§ 264* The infinitive with its subject, object, or other
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent clauses) may be
preceded by the article, the whole standing as a single noun
in any ordinary construction. E.g.
To fie p.fiT€ TToXat tovto ntirovOfvai , Trf<f>r)V(vai t/ tipo fipiv <rvp'
pxfj^iav TOVTO)!/ dvTippoTTov, &v ^ov\iip.f6a xprjc^ah ttjs Trap* (Keivatv fvvoiai
(vfpyfTrjpL &u eyo)ye deiiju, but the fact that we have not suffered this
long ago, and that an alliance has appeared to us to balance these, if
we shall tvish to use it, — this I should ascribe as a benefaction to their
good-will. Dem. (Here the whole sentence to ... . xpfjirdai is the
object of Oeirfv.)
§ 265« The infinitive without the article may express
a purpose. E.g.
Ot ap\ovT(i, ovs flKtadf tipxft-v fiov, the rulers, whom you chose to
rule me. T^u ir6\iv (fyvXaTTtiv avrols irapiboKav, they delivered the
§ 267.]
THE INFINITIVE.
297
■vvotai
'd thin
se, if
[> their
is the
)ress
jose to
ied the
city to them to ffvard. Ai yvi/uiKcr nie^v <f>(pov(rai, the women bringing
them (something) to drink.
Note. In Homer, where wo-rf is seldom used in its sense of so m
(§ 266, N. 3), tiie simple infinitive may express a result ; as ris acjxof
i^vvfr)K€ fidxf<rdai; who brought them into conflict no as (o contend f
§ 266* 1. The infinitive after wo-re, so that, so as, ex-
presses a result. E.g.
Hv rreirai8fviJLtvos ovrcas, &<rT€ Trdw pctSiur <X'*'' uptcovvra, he had
been so educated as very easily to hare enough. 2v8( ax^^'^C^'-** wore
6avfidC€iv (fif, and you delay, so that I wonder.
2. The infinitive after &crT€ sometimes expresses a
condition, like that after e^' w or e<^' eSre (§ 207) ; and
sometimes a purpose, like a final clause. U.g.
'E^oi/ avTois Twv Xotfreof apxftv 'EWrjpav, &a'r* avroiis vnoKoiciv
(iaat\fi, it being in their power to rule the rest of the Greeks, on condi-
tion that they should themselves obey the King. Ilav irotovaiv Sxrre
biKTjv fifj bt86vat, they do everything so that they may not suffer punish-
ment (Iva fi^ diBSxTi might have been used).
Note 1. 'fis sometimes takes the infinitive like ware, generally
to express a result, seldom to express a purpose.
Note 2. "Qim may also take the indicative to express a result
(§ 237). For the distinction see § 237, Rem.
Note 3. "Qa-re in Homer usually means as, like &(rn(p. (See
§ 265, Note.)
Note 4. (a) The infinitive with wore or as sometimes follows a
comparative wiiih 1} ; as eXarro) fxoji/ bvvapiv ^ wore tovs <t>i\ovs &)0f-
Xfii/, having too little power to aid his friends.
(b) Sometimes wore is omitted ; as voarjpa p.(i(p^ ij (fttpeiv, a dis-
ease too great to bear (§ 261, 2, with Rem.).
Note 5. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which commonly take the
simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with toare or ws ; as
ylfT](f)t(rdf.i€voi &aT€ dp,vv€iv, hainng voted to defend them; TrtiOova-iu Sxrrt
(nixdpfjaai, they persuade them to male an attempt; <f>povipa>Tfpoi Atrre
fiadftv, winter in learning : oktyoi its eyKpaTtU fivai, too fete to have the
power; dvayKij Stare Kivtivvevtiv,a necessity of incurring risk (§261, 1).
§ 267* The infinitive follows e^' e5 or e^' wre, on con-
dition that, sometimes /or the purpose of. E.g.
I
298
SYNTAX.
l§ 268.
Iff
'fit ■
*A<f)itfifv at, €ir\ rovrta fitvroi, f(j> «j»Tf firiKtri <f>i\o<ra(f>«'iu, we rti'
lease »/ou, hut on l/iis <init)ition, that ifon shall no lonytr he a fihiloso'
(ilier. AlptBivTts t<f>' ^rt ^vyypa^at vonovs, chosen for the purpose
of comp'diuf) laws.
For the future indicative after these w«rds, see § 236, N. 2.
§ 268. The infinitive may stand absolutely in paren-
thetical phrases, generally with w? or oaov. E.g.
Th AfXra etrrl vfuxrrl, i)S Xuy<^ dnfiv, dvaTr«(f)t)v6s, the Delta has
recently, so to speak', inutlc its appearance. So its tnos tlirtiv, so to
speak; a>r arvvrofuag (or <rvvf\6vTi, § 1S4, 5) ilnuv, to speak' concisely ;
t6 ^vfiirav ftVeti', ow the whole : its dntiKuaai, to jwlye (i.e. as far
as we canjudf/e) ; oaov yt fi tldtvai, as far as I know ; its ifioi 8o-
KCiv, or ffiol doKf tv, as it seems to me : oi noW^ XcSyw elirdv, not to
make a lonrf story, in short. So oXtyou 8«tv, to want little, i.e. almost ;
in which Bt'iv can be omitted.
Note. Tn certain cases €ivm seems to be superfluous; especially
in iKtitv tipat, williny or wilUmjly, which generally .stands in a ne<j-
utire sentence. So ri vvv «tvai,at present ; to TTjfitpov etvai. to-day :
TO tiT tKfivois fivat, as far as depends on them : ttjv TtputTtjv tivai, at
frst (Hdt.); if n-aXata elvai, considering their aye (Thuc.) ; and
some other phrases.
§ 269. The infinitive is sometimes used like the im-
perative, especially in Homer. E.g.
M17 rrore kcu av yvvaiKi irtp rj-nioi flvat, he thou never indulgent to
thy wife.
Note. The subject is here in the nominative; but in the three
following onstructions it is in the accusative.
§ 270* The infinitive sometimes expresses* a wish, like
the optative. This occurs chiefly in poetry. E.g.
Zev Trarep, tj Atavra Xaxeiv fj Tvdeos vioVf Father Zeus, may the lot
fall either on Ajax or on the son of Tydcus (Hom.).
Note. This construction depends in thought on some word like
fSxofiai, I pray, or 86s, grant, which is often expi'essed; as fioj riaa-
adai.
§ 271. In laws, treaties, and proclamations the infinitive
often depends on t8o$e or SeSoKrat, be it enacted, orKcAcvc-
Tttt, it is commanded ; which may be expressed in a previous
sentence or understood. E.g.
§275.)
THE PARTICIPLE.
299
^iKd(tiu fi« TTjv tv 'Apfi^ Trriyo) (/xivou, Ike, autt (he it enacied) thai
the Senate on the AvcDimyiis s/ntll liuve jiiriiidiction in ciuies 0/ murder,
&c. "Eti; 8e (Ivai rar aTTovSar vfvrrjKovia, and that the treaty shall
continue ji/ty years.
§ 272. The infinitive, with or without to, may be used to
express surprise or indignation. JH.g.
TrjsfJLaplas' to A/a vofjLi(fiv, oirrarrjXiKovrovi, what Jolly ! to belieoe
in Zeus when you are so biy ! So in Latin: Aleue incepto desisterc
victani !
§ 273. In narration, the infinitive often seems to
stand for the indicative, when it depends on some word
like Xeyerat, it is saidj in a preceding sentence. E.g.
* AniKOftfvovs fie ev to "Apyos, biaridecrOai rbv (jtoprop, and cominy
to Argos, thty were (it is saitl) setting out their cargo for sale (Start-
dtadai is an imperfect infinitive, § '206, N. 1). Hdt. i. 1. See Ildt.
}. 24, and Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 5.
§ 274. npiv, before, before that, until, besides taking
the indicative, subjunctive, and optative (§ 240), also
takes the infinitive. This happens in Attic Greek chiefly
after affirmative sentences, but in Homer without regard
to the leading verb. U.g.
^Anoirffinovaw airuv 7Tp\p uKovaai, they aend him away before hear-
ing him. MfcafivrfV fiXoixtv npiu Iltpaas Xa^fiv rfju (iaaiXeiav, we took
Messene before the Persians obtained their kingdom.
For irpiv with the finite niood», see § 240.
1^ »TK. IIpli' ij, irpoTfpov TJ, TTp6a0€v Ij, before that, sooner than,
and even vartpov ij, later than, may take the infinitive like irpiv
alone. See § 240, Note.
THE PARTICIPLE.
§ 275. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three
uses. First, it may express a simple attribute, like an ordi-
nary adjective ; secondly, it may define the circumstances
under which an action takes i)lace ; thirdly, it may form part
of the predicate with certain verbs, often having a force
resemblino: that of the infinitive.
I
5 IP
r •
l)i
! I
If
i !■
■IP
800
SYNTAX.
|§ 276.
§ 278. 1. The participle, like any other adjective,
may qualify a nonn. Here it must often be translated
by a relative and a linite verb, especially when it is pre-
ceded by the article. £.</.
'O napatu xp^vof' ffi<-' present lime; dtoi aliv iovrts, immortal Go(h
(Iloia.); fTuXir icaXXrt 8ia((>ipovaa, a citi/ cxccllinff in heantff : dvf)i)
KaXiiis iTcrtaibtvpivoi, a man ir/io hnx Itcfn wcl/ ('(hiratctl (or u well-
eilucatcU man); ol npta-iifis ol vno ^iKinnov 7r(p({)6*vTfs, the umbas-
sadors who were sent hy Philip; uvbpts oi tovto noifiaoures, men who
are to do this,
2. The participle preceded by the article may be used
substantively, like any other adjective. It is then equiva-
lent to he who or those who with a finite verb. E.g.
ol ntir€i(rp,tpoi, those who have been convinced • napa toIs apinrnit
doKovo-ic f'l/at, nmonff those who seem to he best . n rfju yvuipr]v ravrrfv
€iir<av, the one who gave this opinion: rah 'ApKaSiav (TcfytTfpois ovai
^vppdxoii Trpo(7nov, they proclaimed to those who were their allies amony
the Arcadians.
§ 277. The participle may define the circumstances of
an action. It expresses the following relations ; —
1. Time ; the tenses denoting various points of time, which
is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (§ 204). Jil.ff.
I firpam (rTparrjy&u, he did this while he was general : ravra
'Tparnywu, he will do this while he is general; rvpavpevaas
Taitra
npd^ei a-rpaTrjywu, lie wilt do ifiis w/tiie fie is general; rvpt
fie (TTi Tpia '\irrrias exotpfi « St'yftoi/, and when he had been tyrant three
years, Hipp'as withdrew to Sigeum.
2. Causey manner, means, and similar relations, including
manner of employment. E.g.
Atyto fit TovTov evfKa, ^ovXopfvos fiu^at aoi oirep tpoi, and I speak
for this reason, because J wish that to seem good to you which, &c.
IlpoctXfro pdWou TOii vopois eppevatv airoQaveiv ^ napavopdv (rjv,
he preferred to die abiding by the laws rather than to live transgi-essing
them; tovto eVot'ijcrc \adu>v, he did this secretly ; dnfBripd Tpirfpap^iav,
he was absent on duty as trierarch. ArfiCopevoi (aaiv, they live by
plunder.
3. Purpose or intention; generally expressed b}' the future
participle. E.g.
•277.)
THK TARTICIPLE.
301
I §276.
H'tive,
slated
is pre-
il Go(h
jl : dvt]f)
■ ft H't'lt-
■ ambas-
nen who
e used
»quiva-
dpinroti
V TaVTTfV
HS ova I
's (nnonij
nces of
which
Kff.
: ravra
Vivaai
ant three
chiding
/ speak
'lich, &c.
yresshuj
<y live by
! future
*l'^.dt \v(rnntuoK fivyarpa, hfi came (n rnnsnm hix fimifjhtcr. Horn.
ritfintiv np*<T^tis Taiira tpovvras «cat \v<raulipou aiTrjaourat, to send
amIiassadorH to say this and to ask/or Lysawlcr.
4. Condition ; the tenses of the participle representing the
corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or opta-
tive, in all classes of protasis.
See § 228, 1, where examples will be found.
5. Opposition or limitation ; where the i)articiplc is generally
to be translated by althoufjli and a verb. E.g.
'OXi'ya hwdiifvoi npoopav iroWa iin\tipovp.(v irpdrTfiv, alth6Uf)h
we are able to foresee /aw things, ice try to do many thinys.
6. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being merely
descriptive. E.rf.
"Epxtrai Tou vlou (xovtra, she comes brinyiny her son : irapa\a-
^ovTts Touf MoKOToiis io-rpdrtvaav tm ^dpaaXov, takiny the Boeotians
with them, they march rd ayainst Pharsalus.
NoTK 1. (a) Tht! adverbs a /x a, fitra^v, tvOvs, aiiTUa, and
e^ai<f>vTfs are often connected (in position and in sense) with the
temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify the verb of
the sentence; as dfta KaraXa^ovrts irpofrfKiaro a<f)i, as soon as
they overtook them, they pressed hard upon them : NtKus fitra^v
6pv<T<Tu>u enavaaTO, Necho slopped while diyyiny (jhe canal). Hdt.
(li) The participle denoting opposition is often strengthened by
Kaintp or «cai, even (poetic also Kai . . . irtp), in negative sen-
tences oiSe or /i;;8«, with or without ntp; or by koi ravra, and that
too : as firoiKrtipo} vtv, Kaiirtp ovra 8v(Tp,(v^, f pll'f '"'"i even though
he is an enemy. Ovk hv irpo8oir)v, oidt nep Ttpdaaav KaKut^, I would not
be faithless, even thouyh I am in a wretched stale.
Note 2. (a) The participles denoting cause, or purpose are often
preceded by <ar. This shows that they exjiress the idea of the sub-
ject of the leading verb or that of some other person prominent in
the sentence, without implying that it is also the idea oi the speaker
or writer ; as rov n^ttrXca tv atria tixov ws irt Itravra <T(t>ds iroXt-
Ufiu, they found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had per-
tiuaded them to the war; dyavaKrovaiu cop fieyaXoiv riviav ditfartptj-
(Mfpoi, they are indignant, because (as they say) they have been de-
prived of some great blessings.
(b) The participle denoting cause is often emphasized by or*,
olov, or Ota, as, inasinuch as: but these particles have no such
force as its (above); as are irais av, Tjbtro, inasmuch as he was a
child f he was pleased.
302
SYNTAX.
[§ 278.
iil
Note 3. 'Oo-Trcp, as, like, with the participle often expresses a
comparison; as utawip rj8n <ra<^tos ei Sores, ovk iOiker* aKoxkiv,
you are unwilling to hear, like men already knowing it well. 'vVe
generally translate it as if you knew, for convenience in Enjrlish ;
but the participle is not conditional, and it is negatived by ov, not
fiT] (§ 283, 4), as in (oo-Trep ovk iirl <toI ov o n av ^ovXtj Xiyeiv, as if
it tvere not in your power to say what you please (Xen. Mem. ii. 6, 36).
"SlaTrep, as, can introduce a protasis with ci ; as oJcrTrcp ei Aeyots,
as if you should say. For wairtp av ei, see § 212, 3.
§ 273. 1. When a participle denoting any of the
relations included in § 277 belongs to a noun which is
not connected with the main construction of the sentence,
they stand together in the genitive absolute.
See § 183, and the examples there given. All the particles men-
tioned in the notes to § 277 can be used here.
Note. Sometimes a participle stands alone in the f^ .nitive abso-
lute, when a subject can easily be supplied from ♦^'le context, or
when some general subject, like audpa>7ra>u or irpaypATtav, is under-
stood ; as oi noXtpioi, irpoaiouToav, reox ptu rja-vxa^ov, but the enemy, as
they (men before mentioned) came on, kept </uietfor a time : ovtw 5'
exovTfov, fiKot ((TTiv, K. T. X., and this being the case (s3. npaypdroiv), it
it likely, S^^c. So with .'erbs like iJet, &c. (§ 134, N. 1, e); as
vovTos TToXXo), when it loas raining heavily (where originally Aio's was
understood).
2. The participles of impersonal verbs stand in the accmu-
Uve absolute., in the neuter singular, when others would be in
the genitive absolute. So with passive participles and 6v
when they are used impersonally. E.g.
Ot 8' ov fiorjdri(rauT(s, 8«'oi', vyitis an^XOov; and did those who
brought no aid when it icas needed escape safe and sound ? So
e?< fie TTcpaa-xou, and when a good opportunity offered; ov irpoafj-
/iov, imj'operly (it being not becoming)', tvxov, by chance (it having
happened)', irpoarax^^v poi, when I had been commanded: €iprj-
p'vov, when it has been said : dbvvarov ou, it being impossible; diroppt}-
rov TToXre (sc. ov), when it is forbidden by the state.
Note. The participles of personal verbs sometimes stand with
theif nouns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom unless they
are preceded by wj or ijanep (§ 277, Notes 2 and 3).
§ 279. The participle may be used to limit the mean-
ing of certain verbs, in a sense which often resembles
that of the iuHnitive (§ 260, 1),
[§278.
§ 279.]
THE PARTICIPLE.
303
resses a
OLKOWLV,
I. We
iujTlish ;
OX), not
■IV, as if
i. 6, 36).
I Ac'yois,
of tlie
hich is
ntence,
iles men-
,ive abso-
ntext, or
s iinder-
meini/, as
n' ^>
. OVTW
I, e); as
Aidy was
i accma-
Id be in
and ov
those iclio
nd ? So
npoari'
(it havipfi
d : eiprf-
'.; anoppr)-
,and with
iless they
e mean-
jsemblea
ra
- 1 . In this sense the participle is used with the subject of
verbs signifying to begin ^ to continue ^ to endure^ to persevere, to
cease^ to repent^ to be weary o/*, to be pleased^ displeased^ or
ashamed ; and with the object of verbs signifying to cause to
cease. E.g.
"Ap^ofiai Xc'yo)!', / will begin to speak ; oi/K dve^Gp.ni C&v, T shall
not endure to live, tovto txau diarrXcI, he continues to hai'e thi^i
(4, Note); aitciprjKarptxoiv, I am fired of running ; rots ipatTotai
\aip(ii dnoKpivofievos, 1 delight to anstjer questioners; fXeyxo-
Hfvoi IJxBouTo, they were displeased a! being tested ; ala-xvveTai tovto
Xeyoii/, he is ashamed to say thin {which he says)', Tr^v <f)i\oao(f)iav
itniiaov raOra Kiyovtrav, make Philosophy <itop talking in this style.
NoTK 1. Some of these verbs also take the infinitive, but gene-
Uy with some difference of meaning, thna, alaxvveTai tovto Xe-
yetj', he is ashamed to say this (and does vi)t say it), — see above;
airoKdpv€i tovto Trot el V, he ceases to do this, through weariness (hixi
tovto noiav, he is weary of doing this). But see the last example
under 3.
Mote 2. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with fx(o
may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry; as davjid-
tras <xo) To6f, / hare wondered at this. In prose, f;^a> with a partici-
ple generally has its common force ; as ttjv irpoiKa e^f * Xa/3a)v, he has
received and hus the dowry (not simply he has taken it).
2. The participle ma}' be used with the object of verbs
signifying to perceive (in an}' (^a}'), to Jind, or to represent,
denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived,
found, or represented. £.g.
'Opo) <re KpvjTTovTa, I see you hiding; ^Kovtrd aov \eyov: os, I
heard you speak: tlpe Kpovi8r)v oTtp fjfifvou SKkatv, he found the son
of Cronos sitting apart from the others (Horn.); n^noirjKf rovi cVAiSoi-
Ttfta>povp€vovs, he has represetlted those in Hades as suffering
punishment.
Note. This must not be confounded with indirect discourse,
in which 6poi> ae KpvvToma would mean / see that you are hiding ; \
aKova ae Xcyovra, / hear that you say (dKova> taking the accusative).
See § 280.
3. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the sense of
allow, — irepio pdoi and iffiopdai, with TrcpiciSoi/ and firelSov,
sometimes f78ov, — the participle is used in the sense of the
object infinitive (§ 260, I), the present and aorist participle.^
304
SYNTAX.
l§ 280.
!'
4
differing merely as tlie present and aorist infinitives would
differ in similar constructions (§ 202, 1). E.g.
Mi) 7repu8a>n€u vlipiaOelfrav rffv Aaicedatfioi/a Koi KaTa<f>povrf-
delaav, let us not ■ allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised. MjJ
^' Ihflv Bavovd* in' aor©!/, not to see me killed by citizens (Eur.).
Ufpubtiv TTiv yriv Tprjdeia-au, to allotu the land to be ravaged (Thuc. ii.
18). (But in ii. 20, we find irfpubtlv Tfivy?,vTfir]dfjvai, referring
to the same thing.) See § 204, N. 2.
4. With the following verbs the participle contains the lead-
ing idea of the expression: KavOdvwy escape the notice of;
Tvyxdv(t), happen ; <l>6dv(o, anticipate. The aorist participle
here does not denote past time in itself, but coincides in
time with tho verb (§ 204, N. 2). Kg.
\ri<rcTf fiia(t}dapfVT€s, you will be corrupted be/ore you know it.
''Etvxou Kadrjpfpos evravda, I happened to be sitting there; erv^f Kara
rovTo Tov Katpov i\6a>v, he happened to come (not to haoe come) Just at
that time. ''Erf)OT)aav roiis Heptras dtrtKopLevoi, they came before the
Persians (Hdt.). Ou8' apa KipKtfu «\d6vT€i iXfidofifv, nor did we
come without Circe''s knowing it (Horn.). See examples under
§ 204, N. 2.
The perfect participle here has its ordinary force.
Note. The participle with StareXfw, continue (§ 279, 1),
oixop.ai,be gone (§ 277, 2), dapi(<a, be wont or be frequent, and
some others, expresses the leading idea; but the aorist partici-
ple with these has no peculiar force; as ot\€Tai <f>€vy(av, he has
taken /light (§ 200, N. 3); ov dafiiCeis Kara^aivav eiy tou Uupaia,
you don't come down to the Peiraeus very often.
§ 280. With many verbs the participle stands in
indirect discourse, each tense representing the corre-
sponding tense of the indicative or optative.
Such verb? are chiefly those signifying to see., to know, to hear
or learn, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove,
to acknowledge, and dyyeA.A.0), to announce. E.g.
'OpS) 8e p fpyov 8fiv6u f ^( ipyaa- pevrjv. hut I see that I have done
a dreadful deed : IJKoviTf Kvpov (v KikiKia ovra. he heard that Cyrus
was in Cilicia (el. § 279, 2, with N.);'oTav kXi'.v rj^our' 'Opeon^j/,
when she hears that Orestes tvill come: olba ovfifv fniarupfvos, I
know that I understand nothing; ovk f/Staav airov rtOvr) koto, they
did not know that he was dead; (ireiSav ypwaiv diriarovpfvoi,
ajXer theyjind out that they are distrusted; pffivTjpai eXdnv, J re-
l§ 280.
would
:f>povrf-
ed. M^
(Eur.),
rhuc. ii.
eferring
he Icad-
}tice of;
articiple
[jides in
know it.
TV\€ KOTO,
le) just at
be/ore the
>r did we
es under
279, 1),
uent, and
partici-
i», he haa
ntipaia,
§ 281.]
VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
305
meinher that I went ; fiifivrffiai avrov eXtfoira, / remember that he
went; 8fi^(o tovtov e^Bpov ovra, I shall shoto that this man is an
enemy (pass. oUtos deixd^o-erai exOpos av)', abr^ Kvpou arpartv-
ovra rrpwTos ^yyetXo, 1 Jirst announced to him that Cyrus was on his
march.
See § 246 and examples ; and § 211 for examples of the participle
with 3v representing botli indicative and optative with av.
Note 1. Arj\6s el pi and <f>auep6s el pi take the participle in
indirect discourse, where we use an impersonal construction; as
SijXos ^v olopevos, &c., it was evident that he thought y &c. (like bij-
Xov ^v oTi oioiTo).
Note 2. With a-vvoiSa or a- vyy lyvoi a- K<a and a dative of
the reflexive, a participle may be in either the nominative or dative ;
as <Tvvoi8a epavra ffSiKrjpfUi^ (or rjdiKtjpeuos^j I am conscious to
myself that I have been wronycd.
Note 3. Most of the verbs included in § 280 may take a clause
with oTt in indirect discoui'se. Most of them are found also with
the infinitive, olba takes the infinitive regularly when it means /
know how; as olba tovto padeiv, I know how to learn this (but oiba
TovTo p.a6a>v, I know that I learned this).
Note 4. 'Qs may be used before this participle in the sense ex-
plained in § 277, N. 2. The genitive absolute with m is sometimes
found where we should expect the participle to agree with the object
of the verb; as a>s noXepov ovtos nap* vpStv anayyiKd ; shall I
announce from you that there is war? (lit. assuming that there is war,
shall I announce it from you ?) where we might have Troktpov Svra
with less emphasis, and in closer connection with the verb.
\
lands in
corre-
\v, to hear
\to prove ^
Viave done
\hat Cyrus
*Opiarr}U,
IpfUOS, I
loTo, they
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -tc'o? AND -riov.
§ 281* The verbal in -reo<t lias both a personal and'
an impersonal construction.
1. In the personal construction it is passive in sense^
and expresses necessity^ like the Latin participle in -dus,
E.y,
'flc^fXi/Teti doi ff TToXts eariv, the city must be benefited by you.
"AXXat ptTairfpTrrias flvai (?(/»;), he said that other {nhips) must
be sent for. *0 Xeyw prfTtov eori'i', what I say must be spoken.
The noun denoting the agent is hers in the dative (§ 188, 4)
See 2.
306
SYNTAX.
l§ 282.
(I
2. In the impersonal construction the verbal h in the
neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes plural),
with i(TTL expressed or understood It is active in sense,
and is equivalent to Bel with the infinitive.
The agent is generally expressed by the dative, some-
times by the accusative. These verbals may have an
object like their verbs. U.g.
Tavra fjfilv (or ^fias) iroirjTeou fariu, we must do this (equivalent \
to Tavra ^fuii 8(1 iroitjaai, § 184, 2, N. 1). Olareov rdSf, ice must ]
bear these things (sc. ^fuv). Tt &v avr^ ttoii/tcov etrj ; what loould
he he obliged to do? 'E^i^c^to-awo TroXe/iijrsa elvai, they voted that they
must go to war (= fieti/ TroXe/Lieti/) . Tovs ^vfifidxovs ov jrapaborea
Tols ^Adrjvaiots, we must not abandon our allies to the A thenians-
The Latin has this construction (but seldom with verbs which
take an object accusative) ; diS, Eundum est tibi (Iriov tari trot), —
Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello utendum est nobis (t« 7roXe/x6>
XptfOTeov eariv fjfxiu), we must go to war. (See Madvig's Latin Gram-
ma:-, § 421.)
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
ii j
§ 282. 1 . All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjec-
tives, and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect
questions. The relative oo-rts and most other relative words
may be used in indirect questions. (See § 149.)
2. The principal direct interrogative particles are rj and apa.
These imply nothing as to the answer expected ; but apa ov
implies that an affirmative, apa (jltj that a negative, answer is
expected. Ov and /u.iy alone are oftcii used with the same
force as with 3.pa. So fjidv (for fir) ovv). E.g.
*H (TxrXj) e<rrai; will there he leisure? 'Ap' etVt Tives a^ioi; are
there any deserving ones? *Ap' ov SovXeade iXdfiv; or ov ^ovKeaBe
fXdelv; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you 7wt)? *Apa p^
}iov\f<rde e\Be'iv; or p^ (or fimv) jSovXfo-^f fX^fii'; do you wish to go
(you don't wish to go, doyouyi This distinction between ov and pi;
does not apply to the interrogative subjunctive (§ 256), which
allows onlv un.
l§ 282.
in the
luval),
sense,
some-
ive an
aivalent \
loe must
it tcould
that they
taborea
DS which
o-ot), —
in Gram-
§283.]
NEGATIVES.
807
il adjec-
indirect
re words
and upa.
apa OX)
nswer is
he same
S^toi; are
'Apa p^
vhh to go
)v and fit]
), which
3. "AAAo Ti ^,' is it anything else than ? or simply a\Xo ti;
is it not ? is sometimes used as a direct interrogative. £J.g.
" AWo ti fj ddiKovfifu ; are we not (is it anything else than that
we are) in the wrong? — HWo ti ofioXoyovfifv ; do we not agree?
4. Indirect questions may be introduced by ei, tvhether ;
and in Homer by 17 or qL E.g.
'HpaTTfaa et ^ovXoito (\6fiu, I asked whether he wished to go.
"QtxfTo TTfvaofievos rf ttov €T (ir/s, he was gone to inquire whether pos-
sibly you were still living (Horn.). Ov*c oi8a ct tovto 8(5, / do not
know whether I shall give this (here et is used even with the sub-
junctive : see § 244).
5. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect) may be
introduced by iroTepov (Trorepa) ... 17, whether . . .or. Indirect
alternative questions can also be introduced by ci . . . ^, €?tc . . .
€iT€, €iT£ . . . ^, whether ...or; and in Homer by ^ (17c) . . .
IloTfpou fas iipxfiv TI aK\ov KadiaTrfs , do you allow him to rule, of
do you appoint another ? 'E^ovKevtro el mpnotev Ttvas >} iravTes Xoiev, h«
was deliberating whether they should send some or should all go.
NEGATIVES.
§ 283. The Greek has two negative adverbs, ov and fi^.
"What is said of each of these applies generally to its com-
pounds, — ovSiiq^ ovSi, ovT€j &C., and /jI»;8cis, /MiySc, firJTC^ &C. .
1 . Ou is used with the indicative and optative in all iiide-
pendent sentences (except wishes^ which are generally elliptical
protases, § 251, 1, N. 3) ; also in indirect discourse after oti
and a)s, and in causal sentences.
Note. In indirect questions, introduced by «, tvhether, fifj can be
used as well as ov ; as ^ovXofiai epiaOai el paBatv tis ti km pepvijpivoi
pfj oidev, I want to ask whether one who has learnt n tiling and remem-
bers it does not know it? Also, in the second pi»rt of an indirect
alternative question (§ 282, 5), both ov and pfj are allowed; as o-ko-
iriapev « irpeirei ^ oi, let us look and see whether it is becoming or not;
el 8e d\Ti6fs^pfi, nfipaaopai padeiv, but I will try to learn whether
it is true or not.
308
SYNTAX.
[§283
i.iJ '.
2. My is used with the subjunctive and imperative in all
constructions (except the Homeric subjunctive, § 255, which
has the force of a future indicative). M^ is used in all Jinal
and ob/ect clauses after iva, otto)?, &c. ; except after /ni;, lest^
which takes ov. It is used in all conditional sentences, in
relative sentences with an indefinite antecedent (§ 231) and
the corresponding temporal sentences after cws, TrptV, &c.
(§§ 239, 240), in relative sentences expressing a purpose
(§ 236), and in all expressions of a ivish with both indicative
and optative (§251).
3. M»y is used with the infinitive in all constructions, both
with and without Ihe article, except that of indirect discourse.
The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has ou, to retain
the negative of the direct discourse ; but some exceptions
occur.
4. When a participle expresses a condition (§ 277, 4) it
takes /AT/ ; so when it is equivalent to a relative clause with
an indefinite antecedent^ as ol fxrj fiovXo/xevoi, any who do not
wish. (See, however, § 277, N. 3.) Otherwise it takes ov.
In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes
fiij irregularly (3).
5. Adjectives follow the same principle with participles,
taking ^iri onlj' when they do not refer to definite persons or
things (i. e. when the}'^ can be expressed by a relative clause
with an indefinite antecedent) ; as o' ^^ ayaOoX TroXirai, {any)
citizens who are not good, but ol ovk ayaOoi iroAiTat means
special citizens who are not good.
6. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as those of
hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and distrusting) are
followed by the infinitive, the negative fiy can be added to
the infinitive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative
cannot be translated in English, and can always be omitted
in Greek. For examples see § 263.
[§283
[§ 288.
NEGATIVES.
309
in all
svUich
[Jinal
^, lest^
es, in
) and
/, &c.
\urpose
icative
3, both
xourse.
^ retain
eptions
7, 4) it
se with
do not
ikes ov.
takes
iiciples,
sons or
clause
{any)
means
those of
ing) are
dded to
legative
omitted
7. When an infinitive would regularly be negaiivcd by
fi-q, — either in the ordinary way (3) or to strengthen a pre^
ceding negation (6) , — if the verb on which it depends has a
negative, it generally takes the double negative firj ov. Thus
SiKaiov i(TTi fi-q tovtov a<f}€ivat, it is just not to acquit him^
becomes, if we negative the leading verb, ov hUaiov ia-ri fir]
ov TOVTOV a<fi€uai, it is not just not to acquit him. So As ovv
0(Ti6v croi ov firj ov ^orjOeiv SiKaiocrvvy^ since (as you said) it
was a failure in piety for you not to assist justice. Again,
cipyei <r€ fir/ tovto iroulv (§ 263, 1), he prevents you from doing
this, becomes, with ctpyet negatived, ovk cipyei o-e/x^ ov tovto
TTOLtiVy he does not prevent you from doing this.
Note. M^ ov is used also when the leading verb is interroga-
tive implying a negative; as W efi7ro8a)v fir) oixi vQpiConepovs
dnoBavflv; what is there to prevent (m.<) fro7n beiug insulted and
perishing f
It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to express
an exception to a negative statement ; as n-dXeif ;(aXc7ra( Xaficiv, fifj ov
TToXtopKta, cities hard to capture, except by siege.
8. When a negative is followed by a simple negative (ov
or /Ai^) in the same clause, each retains its own force. If
the}' belong to the same word or expression, they make an
affirmative; as ovBk tov 4>op/xio)i/a ov;( opa, nor does he not see
Phormio (i. e. he sees Phormio well enough). But if they
belong to different words, each is independent of the other ;
as ov 8t' a-rrecpiav ye ov <f>rjo-ei<s fX"'' ^ ''"'^ *'^'''7y5> *' ** ^<^^ surely
through inexperience that you will deny that you have anything
to say; ov povov ov TreiOovTai, they not only do not obey; el prj
Upo^evov ovx vTTcSc^avTo, if they had not refused to receive
Proxenus {had not not received him).
Note. An interrogative ov (§ 282, 2), belonging to the whole
sentence, is not counted as a negative in these cases; as ovk em
TOV 8rip,ov . . . OVK T)de\T)aav avoTparevfiv ; were they not unwill-
ing, &c.y
9. But when a negative is followed by a compound negative
(or by several compound negatives) in the same clause, the
310
SYNTAX.
[§ 283.
negation is strengthened; as avev tovtov ovBeU th ovhkv
ovSci/os av vfiuiv ovSeVoTc yivovro a^ios, if it were not for
this, no one of you would ever come to he of any value for any*
*-hing.
For the double negative ov fi^, see § 257.
ml
■-■•:?'
PART V.
VERSIFICATION.
ICTUS. — RHYTHM AND METRE.
S 284. 1. Every verse is composed of portions called
feet. Thus we have four feet in each of tliese verses : —
^r\ao\^v irpoi | Toiis <TTpa\Triyovs. \
Far from | mortal | ciires re | treating. |
2. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls a
special stress of voice called ictus {stroke)^ and another part
on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot on
which the ictus falls is called the arsis^ and the rest of the
foot is called the thesis.^ The regular alternation of arsis
and thesis in successive feet produces the rhythm {harmonious
movement) of the verse.
3. In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the
rhythm depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words,
with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, however,
the ictus is entirely independent of the word-accent; and
the feet (with the ictus marked) are <}>r](ro, — fiev irpoq, — tovs
o-rpa, — TT/yous. In Greek poetry a foot consists of a regular
combination of syllables of a certain length ; and the place
of the ictus here depends on the quantity (i. e. the length or
shortness) of the syllables which compose the foot, the ictus
naturally falling upon a long s^dlable (§ 285, 3). The regu-
^ The term A/oo-is {raising) and ^eVis {placing), as they were used by
nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and putting
clown of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that dtlais de-
noted the \Mxrt of the foot on which the ictus fell, and Apais the lighter part.
Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use, and referred arsis
to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering of the voice in reading.
The prevailing modern use of these terms unfortunately foUowa the Roman
writers.
c
M
i
312
VERSIFICATION.
[§ 285.
lar alternation of long and short syllables in successive feet
makes the verse metrical, i.e. measured in its time. The
rhythm of a Greek verse thus depends closely on its metre,
i.e. on the measure or quantity of its syllables.
Note. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most
modern poetry is simnly this, that in modern poetry the verse con-
sists of a regular comoination of accented and unaccented syllables,
while in ancient poetrv it consists of a regular combination of long
and short syllables. I'lie rhythm is the one essential requisite in the
external form of all poetry, ancient and modern; but in ancient
poetry, rhythm depends on metre and not at all on accent ; in mod-
ern poetry it depnds on accent, and the quantity of the syllables
Ci.e. the metre) is generally no more regarded than it is in prose.
Both are equally rhythmical; but the ancient is 'a\»o metrical, and its
metre is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English
poetry is strictly only rhytlnn.^
It is to a great extent uncertain how the Greeks distinguished or
reconciled the stress of voice which constituted the ictus and the
raising of tone which constituted the word-accent. Any combina-
tion of the two is now very difficult, and for most persons impos-
sible. In reading Greek poetry we usually mark the Greek ictus
by our accent, which is its modern representative, and neglect the
word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care should al-
ways be taken in reading to distinguish the word^^ not the/ce/.
FEET.
§ 285. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the
short syllable (^), which has the value of ^ or an | note in
music. This is called a time or mora. The long syllable ( — )
hab ' wice the length of a short one, and has the value of a ^
note or J in music.
* The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best be seen in
modem Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient lan-
guage are retained, the rhythm is generally acoentual and the metre is no
more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses
in a translation of the Odyssey : —
^dXXc T^v I &vSpa, 0«|4, rhv iro|XvTpoirov, | 8«ms to|o-oi5to«s
Toirovs 8i|{jX6c, irop|6i^(ras ttjs | Tpotas t^v | {v8o|ov | irdXiv.
The original verses are : —
"AvSpa |iot I Ivvcirc, | Movcra, irojXvrpoirov, | os (idXa | iroXX^
nXd-yx^* llircl TpoC|T|s Ulpbv irro\t|c9pov {jircp<rcv.
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through force of
acquired habit ; for these verses have much more of tlie nature of modem
poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm is precisely what we
are accustomed to in English.
t 285.
feet
The
letvc,
most
le con-
lables,
)f lung
in the
mcient
1 luod-
Uables
prose,
and its
English
shed or
md the
»mbina-
inipos-
;k ictus
lect the
^uld al-
'eet.
§ 286.]
FEET.
313
is the
note in
>le (-)
e of a i
)e seen in
lent ian-
■tre is no
wo verses
JUS
pi force of
)f modem
what we
2. Feet are distinguished according to the number of times
which they contain. The most common feet arc the follow-
ing : —
(a) 0/ Three Timen (in | lime).
Trochee
Iambus
Tribrach
yj
<t>axv€
AeycTC
(h) Of Four Times {in ^ time).
Dactyl _ w w (^aiVcTc
Anapaest w w _. (rifiofiai
Spondee ehrtov
(c) Of Five Times (in | time).
w —
\j Kj \^
Cretic
Paeon primus
Paeon quartus
Bacchius
Antibacchius
w
^ KJ KJ
\J \J \J
W
W
(d) Of Six Times (in J time).
Ionic a majore v^ v^
Ionic a minore
Choriambus
Molossus (rare)
Ditrochee
KJ ^
KJ \J
KJ KJ
Diiambus w _.. w —
For the dochmius, w .
J/
/J
J //
J J
J ^J
J /J^J^
^J J
J J/
J J J^/
//J J
J .^ / J
J J J
fjLOva-ofiavTi^ J # J ^
d7raXAay>J m J S J
- I w _, see § 302.
<fiaiV€Tta
iKTpiirtrt
KaTaXiyut
d^ryy»;s
ffyuvrire
CKXctTrere
TrpoaiSia-OaL
CKTpCTTOyLtai
■Mi:
314
VERSIFICATION.
L§ 286.
NoTK. The feet in f time (a), in which the arsis m twice as
long as the thesis, form imilnuhle class (yi vus itnXdaiou) , as opposed
to those in j time (/>), in which the arsis and thesis are ot equal
length, and which toini the erjuat class {yivos taov). The more
complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of Ave and hix
(iwes are not considered here.
3. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The first
syllabic of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last syllable of
tiie iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form the arsis, the
remainder of the foot being the thesis ; as jl n^, -i. w wi
\j ^ —'
NoTK 1. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two
short syllables (§ 286, 1), the ictus properly belongs on the two
taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first.
Thus a tribrach used for a trochee (_i_ w) w vl/ v^ m? one used for
an iambus (^ _/.) is vj ^ w So a spondee used for a dactyl is
J ; one used for an anapaest is '_- Likewise a dactyl used
for an anapaest (_^^ for for ^ v^ _) is _ vl> v^. The only
use of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are to repre-
sent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a long
syllable.
Note 2. Although the principal ictus (which alone has been
considered) falls on the arsis, there is generally also a subordinate
ictus on the thesis or on some syllable of the thesis. (See § 299.)
4. A verse is sometimes introduced by an incomplete foot,
consisting of one or two syllables equivalent in time to the
thesis of the fundamental foot of the verse. This is called an
miacrusis {avdKpova-L<i, upward beat) . (See § 289, 3, N.) The
mark of anacrusis is a following (:).
For the hasis, introducing a logaoedic verse, see § 299, 2.
RESOLUTION AND
CONTRACTION. — IRRATIONAL TiME. —
SYLLABA ANCEPS.
§ 286. 1. A long syllable, being the metrical equivalent
of two shoi't ones (§ 285, 1), is often resolved into these ; as
when a tribrach ,^ >^ ^ stands for a trochee _ ^ or an iamlius
^ —. On the other hand, two short syllables are often con-
tracted into one long sylHble ; as when a spondee stands
§ 287.]
RHYTHMICAL SERIES.
315
for a dactyl _ y^ ,^ or nii anapaest
w w
Tlic mark for a
long resolved into two short is "^s^ ; tlmt for two short con-
tracted into one long is oo.
2. A long syllable in the arsis may be prolonged so as to
have the measure of three or even four short syllables. A
single syllable may thus represent a whole foot, including
both arsis and thesis : this is called syncope. A syllable
which includes three times is marked t_ ( Jj ; one which
includes four times is marked l_i ( I ).
3. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain cases
be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable in
verse. Such a syllabic is called irrational^ and is marked >.
The foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (ttoi;?
aAoyos). Thus, in uAA' air i^Ofrnv {j_ ^ j_ >), the apparent
spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called
an irrational trochee; in hovvai SiKr/v (> j.. ^ jl) that which
takes the place of the first iambus is called an irrational
iambus.
4. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic dac-
tyl (marked -v^ w) and cyclic anapaest (marked ^ v^_), which
have the time of only three short syllables instead of four.
The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee _ ^^, especially
in logaoedic verses (§ 300). The cjclic anapaest takes the
place of an iambus ^ _, and is found especially in the iam-
bic trimeter of comedy (§ 293, 4).
5. The last syllable of every verse is common, and may be
considered long or short to suit the metre, without regard to
its usual quantity. It is called syllaha anceps. But the con-
tinuous systems described in § 298 allow this only at the end
of the last verse.
RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. — CATALEXIS. — PAUSE.
§ 287. 1 . A rhythmical series is a continuous succession
of feet of the same measure. A verse ma}' consist of one
buch series, or of several such united. Thus the verse
TToXAa Ttt Sfiva, KovBiv ui/||6^/9u)7rov Suvortpov irikti
•'i>:
I'* ■ '
h '
I ^■
I. f
^1 '
316
VERSIFICATION.
[§ 288.
consists of a First Glyconic (§ 300, 4), -o* w I _ w I _ w 1 1_
(at the end of a verse, -y^Kj\ —\j\ — <<j |_A), followed by
a Second Glyoonic, _o|— v^v^l_wl_ A. Each part forms
a series, the former ending with the first syllable of avOpdy/rov
(see above) ; and either serlos might have formed a distinct
verse. A rhj'thmical series generallj'^ ends after the arsis of
the third foot in the dact^^lic hexameter (§ 295, 4). See
§ 288.
2. The verse must close in such a way as to be distinctly
marked off from what foU'^ws.
(a.) It must end with the end of a word.
(J>.) It allows the last syllable {syllaha anceps) to be either
long or short (§ 286, 5).
(c.y It allows hiatus (§8) before a vowel beginning the
next verse.
3. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close is
called catahctic (KaTaAr/i^TtKos, stopped short), A complete
verse is called acatalectic.
4. The time of the omitted syllable or syllables in a cata-
lectic verse is filled by a pause. A pause of one time^ equiva-
lent to a short syllable (^) , is marked A (for A, the initial of
Xct/m/iia); a pause of two times (_) is marked A.
CAESURA AND DIAERESIS.
§ 288i 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs when-
ever a word ends before a foot is finished ; as in three cases
in the following verse : —
TToAAas I 8* l<li6i\^ov^ \ln}\yaM "Al'lSi 7rpoi[aj/r«i/.
riiis becomes important only when it coincides with the
caesura of the verse (as after i<t>OLfxov^) . This caesura is a
pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more melo-
dious or to aid in its recital, regularly occurring at the end of
a rhythmical series which does not end the verse (§ 287, 1).
in some verses its place is fixed : see § 293, 4 ; § 295, 4.
2. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot,
tlie double division is called diaeresis (Siaipeo-t?, division);
as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis be-
[§ 288.
_ w I I—
)wed by
,rt forms
avOpiayrov
, distinct
arsis of
i). See
iistinctly
be either
ining the
> close is
complete
in a cata-
e, equiva-
j initial of
§ 289.]
VERSES.
317
urs whcn-
iree cases
iV.
with the
Bsura is a
aore melo-
the end of
§287,1).
95, 4.
I of a foot,
division);
aeresis be-
comes important only when it coincides with a natural pause
in the verse produced by the ending of a rliythniic series ; as
in the trochaic tetrameter (§ 291, 2) and the dactylic pen-
tameter (§ 295, 5).
Notp:. Tlie follownig verse of Aristophanes (Clouds, 519), in
trochaic (8) rhytlnn, shows the irrational long (§ 286, 3) in the
first, second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (§ 280, i) in the
third; syncope (§ 280, 2) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis
and pause (§ 287, 6 and 4) with syllaba anceps (§ 280, 5): —
ToKfjldrj vfj I Tou Ai6\vi\\aov rov \ (Kdpe \^avTa \ pe.
_. >|_>|-^v^|l_II_^ |_>|_vy|_A
A rhythmical series (§ 287, 1) ends with the penult of tiioveaov.
This is a loyaoedic verse, called Eupolidean (§ 300, 7)
VERSES.
§ 289. 1. Verses are called Trochaic^ Iambic, Dactylic^
&c., from their fundamental foot.
2. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one
foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter,
or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in tro-
chaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by
dipodies (i. e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one di-
pody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of six
feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet. In most kinds of verse,
there are catatectic as well as acatalectic forms (§ 287, 3).
3. Rhythms arc divided into rising and falling rhythms.
In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iam-
bus and anapaest ; in falling rhythms the tliesis follows the
arsis, as in the trochee and the dactyl.
Note. It will be seen that prefixing an anacrusis (§ 285, 4)
of the same time as the thesis to a falling rhythm will change
it to a rising rhythm ; as _ w | _ w with w prefixed becomes
w _ I w — \\y'i and _ w v^ I _ V-' «^ I _ with w kj prefixed becomes
WW — Iv/w |ww_. Many modern writers treat all iambic
and anapaestic verses as trochaic and dactylic with anacrusis;
as w : _ w I _ w |_ w for w _ | w _ | w _ I w A ;
and ww:_ww ( _ww|_ww|_A
tor \^\^ — Iww Iww Iww •
1*1
Km
i ■
=^*
318
VERSIFICATION.
r§ 291.
4. In Greek poetrj', the same kincl of verse raaj- be repeated
without interriipLion, us in the lieroic I'exameter (§ 295, 4) and
the iambic trimeter of the drama (§ 293, 4). Secondly, simi-
lar verses may be combined into distichs (§ 295, 'i) or into
snnpk ^u stems (§ 298). Thirdly, in lyric poetry, verses may
be combined into strophes of complex rhythmical and metrical
structure, with antistrophes corresponding to them in form.
In the following sections, the principal rhythms found in
Greek poetry are described.
iWl
5.
*■
i ■
'
i
w''
1
HHI
1
; 'i '; '
1 I ' \
1 ;! 1! •
i
1
/
' i
t
1,
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS.
§ 290, Trochaic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289,
2). The irrational trochee ^ > (§ 286, 3) in the form of a
spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic dipody ;
so that the dipody has the form, _»_ ^^ j_ xj' In trochaic verse,
therefore, the tribrach j, ^ ^ can stand in any place for tlie
trochee j_ ^ ; and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all
the even places, that is, in the second part of ever}' dipody.
An apparent anapaest (^ ^ > for _i. >) is sometimes used
as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic dac-
tyl -\> w (§ 286, 4) sometimes stands for the trochee in
proper names in both parts of the dipody.
§ 291. The following are the most common trochaic
verses : —
1. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) : —
<f)f](TOfi(v npos I Tovs crrpaTTjyovi. v^ >
KJ
Ky
A
2. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and
a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There
is a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipod}',
where the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See
§ 293, 3.
& (Toc^curalrot dtdrai, \\ Bfiipo top vovv \ Trpoaxtre.
\^ \J \ W >"ll Vy > I KJ A
[§ 291.
repeated
., 4) and
ily, simi-
I or into
I'ses may
metrical
form,
found in
§ 293.]
IAMBIC RHYTHMS.
319
In English poetry each series is generally' made a separate
verse ; as
Tell iiie not in niouniful numbers,
Life j« but Jin empty dream.
3. The Ithypballic, which is a trochaic tripody^ not allow-
ing irrational feet, —
fiTjiroT €KTaKeirj. \j \ \^ \
For trochaic syateins see § 298, Note.
w
es (§ 289,
form of a
Ic dipody ;
liaic verse,
ce for the
and in all
ry dipody.
imes used
yclic dac-
trochee in
)n trochaic
w — w
w_ A
ill feet and
led. There
.nd dipody,
, 1). See
IAMBIC RHYTHMS.
§ 292. Iambic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289, 2).
The irrational iambus > _ (§ 286, 3) in the form of a spon-
dee can stand in theirs/ place of each iambic dipody, so that
the dipod}' has the form ^ j_ <^ _l. In iambic verse, there-
fore, the tribrach ^ ^ ,^ can stand in any place for the iam-
bus ^ j_ and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all the odd
places, that is, in ihejii'st part of every dipody. An apparent
dactyl (> v^ w lor > j_) is sometimes used as tlie equivalent
of the irrational iambus ; and the cyclic anapaest ^ ^—
(§ 286, 4) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody,
especially by the Attic comedians (§ 293, 4).
§ 293. The following are the most common iambic
verses : —
1. The monomcter, —
TrpOS TTjV 6f6v. > v^
2. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), —
(rfKci (re ttjs \ fi/SouXiaj. > \y ]> w
Koi TOV \6yOV I TOP fJTT(0. > \^ \ \J KJ A
3. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is
a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipody, where
the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See § 291, 2.
finfp TOV iiubp I inrtp^akel, || koi /x^ -yeXaT . | d(f)\fia(ii.
i
N
if 1
¥■' ■ I
';. ' f ,
if
^ 'J
a^
I
"'!ll I
in "[;
pi ■ ■■
ill ! I
320
VERSIFICATION.
[§ 293.
In English poetiy each series is generally made a separate
verse ; as
A captain bold | of Halifax
Who lived in conn | try quarters.
4. The TRIMETER ACATALECTic, the iMOst common of all
iambic verses, in which most of the dialogue of the Attic
drama is composed. It never allows any substitution in the
last foot. With this exception it may have the tribrach in
any place. The irrational iambus > _ in the form of a spon-
dee can stand in the first place of ever}' dipody. The traye-
dians allow the (apparent) dactyl > 6 v^ only in the first and
third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place ;
but in proper names they allow the anapaest in every place
except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl > vi/ x^ in all
the odd places, and the cyclic anapaest in every place except
the last (§ 292). The most common caesura is that after the
thesis of the third foot.
The following scheme shows the tragic and the comic iam-
bic trimeter compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being
enclosed in [ ].
>_-
^
KJ \J \J \J •^1 \J
\J \J~
>_
>_
\J \J \J \y \J \J \J^KJ
"> \J KJ [> \J \J]
[w w— ] [v^ \j — ] [sj \.r- ]
In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables,
even where they are allowed. The following are examples
of both the tragic and the comic fonii : —
(Tragic) -j^Oovos fifu «is \ TrjXovpbv ^|«cofi6i/ TreSoi',
iKtdiju e'ff ot\fiou, affarou fls \ ipjjfiiav,
"H^atoTf, aoi \ 8e ^PV M*^**" I fVtoroXdy.
(Comic) 2> Z(v ^acriXtv • | to xPW** '"**'' I vvKrau otrov
antpavTov ov\bi'!To6^ W^P" I y*»^0"<Tat;
aTToXoio d^r\ I & iroXffie, 7roX|X(ii>i/ ovvtKa.
The Iambic Tiimeter appears in English as the Alexan-
drine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza • —
And hope to mdr|it Heaven by niak|ing Earth a Hell.
For iambic si/stems, see § 298.
[§ 293.
epaiate
^ of all
le Attic
n in the
braeh in
' a spon-
lie trage-
first and
it place ;
iry place
w in all
e except
after the
aniic iam-
2dy being
§ 295.]
•
DACTYLIC
DACTYLIC
RHYTHMS.
RHYTHMS.
321
§ 294. The only regular substitute for the dactyl
spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short
bles of the dactyl (_L — from jl w v) •
is the
sylla-
syllables,
examples
ic Alexan-
stanzs —
11.
§ 295. The following are the most common dactylic
verses : —
1. The dimeter, —
/LlVOToSolKOS hoyMS
fio'ipa dt|o)/c»
2. The trimeter (acatalecLic and catalectic), —
ddv/xejX^ K(\a\drj(roi' wwl ww|
Tiapdevoi I 6fi^po^6\pot _. wwl wwl A
3. The tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic), —
\^ \j \ WW
— w w I
ovpavi\ouTf 6f\oig d<0\pfjfiaTa.
eX^er' t\7Toylt6fif\vai 8vva\p.iv.
wwl — ww| I WW
wwl wv.*! wwl A
4. The Heroic Hexameter, the Homeric verse. It always
has a spondee in the last place, often in the first four places,
seldom in the fifth (the verse being then called spondaic).
There is commonly a caesura in the third foot, either after
the arsis or (rather more frequently) dividing the thesis.
There is sometimes a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot,
and rarely one in the thesis. The caesura after the arsis is
called masculine^ that in the thesis feminine or trochaic, A
diaeresis after the fourth foot, common in bucolic poetry, is
called bucolic. For examples see the Iliad and Odyssey.
5. The Elegiac Distich consists of an heroic hexameter
followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This last verse
consists really of two dactjlic trimeters with syncope (§ 286, 2)
in the last measure ; as, —
llaXAuf ^h\6r]val\r) || xflpas v\ir(pB(v c|x^*'
w w I |l_jII ww| wwli_j
At the end of the pentameter verse we can place _ ^
(§ 287, 4) in i)lace of i_'. The verse probably arose from u
im
k
322
VERSIFICATION.
[§ 297.
repetition of the first penthemim {Tr€v6-rjfit-fi€p€^, Jive half feet)
of tlie hexameter. But syllaha anceps (§ 286, 5) and hiatus
(§8) are not allowed after the first trimeter, but onl}' at the
end of the verse (§ 287, 2). The last two complete feet arc
always dactyls. A diaeresis (§ 288, 2) divides the two parts
of the verse.
The following is an Elegiac Distich : —
Ti'y fie /3t|or, rt 8e | TtfmvbVf a\vtv xpv(re\ris * A(f}po\8iTrjs ;
Tf 6vai\rjv ore | poi \\ firjKtri | ravra fif\\oi.
V^V^I ^^^w'l WV-*! — W^^l \^ KJ \
I WwIl-jII KJ KJ \ N^\>>'|l_J
Note. In the Homeric verse and in Lyric poetry, a long vowel or
a diphthong is often shortened at the end of a word when the next
word begins with a vowel. E.y.
S> TTOTTOt, I ^ fioKa I Bf) iifTt\fiov\(v\<Tav d(0( I nXXcuf.
Xpvaftfi a[ua <TKTj\nTp<f, koi f\\iaa(TO \ irdirras ^Al^aiovs (§ 10).
This sometimes occurs in the middle of a word. Sometimes a
short final vowel occurs in Homer where a long one is required by
the verse. This can often be explained by supposing a following
semi-vowel to have been doubled m pronunciation. Many anom-
alies in Homeric quantity are explained by the omission of Vau
or Digamma (§ 1, Note 2) ; as to16v ol ( ) for roiov Fot.
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS.
§ 296. Anapaestic verses are measured by dipodics
(§ 289, 2). The spondee and the dactyl (_ _l and - ^ yj)
may stand for the anapaest.
Note. The long syllable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two
short, making yy^j \^ kj (or kj kj j_.
§ 297. The following are the most common anapaestic
versos : —
1. The monometer, —
Tprmov a(|yv7ri<i3i'. kj \j f <^ w
Koi Bffiis I alv«7p. w w I
OVp<f)to\v05 OfiOV I v^ V
[§ 297.
§ 299.]
LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS.
323
alf feet)
\ hiatus
[y at the
feet arc
vo parts
g vowel or
u the next
0).
ometimes a
required by
a following
any anom-
ion of Van
Foi,
dipodics
Ul — yi, yj)
red into two
anapaestic
2. The dimeter acatalectie, —
niyav fK | dvftov \ *cXdfo»/|T«s''Apij. <^ y^ | | \ \j \^ ^
diT* eKlnaTiois \ oKyttri \ Tvaidoa: |ww I v^v^l
And the 6 1 live of peace j sends its branch |es abroad.
3. The dimeter catalectic, or paroemiac^ —
^pav I <TTpaTi6a\Tiv dp<o\yav. |v^v^ |w^^ |w
our© I 7r\ovrr}\<reTe ndulres- | \ kj \^ I v^
The Lord | is ad vane ling. Prepare |ye! i_| kj kj j_ |v^w_i.
'u
4. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is
a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. See § 291, 2.
irp6a-\fT€ Tou vovv \ rois ddauarois \\ r\p-lv, toIs at|«v eoOo-t,
Tois aWepioit, | Toiai/ dyfjptos, \\ TOig acfiOiTa prjlBofifvotcnv.
§ 298. An anapaestic system consists of a series of anapaes-
tic dimeters acatalectie, with occasionally a monometer, ending
alwa3's with the paroemiac (or dimeter catalectic). These are
very frequentl}- employed in both tragedy and comedy. E.g.
8eKaTov pfv eros t68' eVet Ilpidpov
peyas amStKOf ,
MtueXaoi ii/a^ fjb^ 'Ayapepvav,
8idp6voxf Aiodeu KOI diarKfjiTTpov
Tt/inc r,)(yp6v C^vyos *ATpfi8du,
>TTi\ov *Apyti(ou x'-XiovavTiiu
T^<r8' dro xapa?
^paVf arpcTiaiTiv dpaydv.
Note. Iambic and trochaic systems are sometimes formed on the
same principle, consisting of iambic or trochaic dimeters acatalec-
tie, with occasionally a monometer, ending always with a dimeter
catalectic.
LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS.
§ 299. 1. Logaoedic rhythm is a rhythm in | time, having
the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom of
construction. Bf sides the trochee — v^ , it admits the irrational
trochee — >, the tribrach w ^ ^ , the cyclic dactyl -v w, and
the syncopated trochee l_.
''■ i.
■ I
II
inliimii HJK
\$ ' .;
illl!!
:. Ill
fllj
324
VERSIFICATION.
[§ 300.
2. The first foot of a logaoedic verse often allows special
freedom, and it is then called a basis. The basis may be a
trochee or an irrational trochee — . >, and sometimes a
tribrach w *^ w. An apparent iambus (probably with
ictus w — ) sometimes occurs (see § 300, 7) ; and rarely
even two short syllables, ^^ w, stand for a basis in lyric
poetry. Great license is permitted in using different^ forms
of basir', even h\ vorses which otherwise correspond pucisuly
(§ 289, i), ., >ix ^ ^00, 7 Abtsis is marked x.
Wheo a vi i^e has more than one rhytlnnical series
(§ 28/, 1), ' ich .s*^'-'es may begin with a basis (see § 300, 7).
Sometimes an aiv?; j.usis (§ 285, 4) precedes a logaoedic
vorse, either with or without a following basis.
§ 300. The following are some of the most inii)orlant
logaoedic verses : —
1. Adonic: (rvnfia\oi ttrao. —\jkj\ v./ This is the final
verse of the Sapphic stanza (6.)
2. First Pherecralic : firranxiKoKn Qfj^ais.
Catal. "^evSeiri noKiXoiS'
3. Second Pherecratic : irai^os hxxr^opov arav
Catal. f\6i(TT<av dvefuav.
4. Glyconic : (Three forms) : —
(rt) nff Kara tov peaviav. —^ ^ \ ^ \ v^ I A
(h) Gfj^ci Twv irpoT(p<av <^aos. _^ > | — vy «^ | \j \ A
(c) 0ura fiavra iravaayia. — \j \ kj \ -y^ w | — A
5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza: —
(a) d(rvv(Trffii Ta>u duefuou OTOunP'
•u : ,^\y I _^ I — \y w I — w I _ A
(a) TO fieu yap fvdev KVfia KvKlubrrat
w:_\vl->|-w^l_w|_A
(b) TO 8* fvdtv afififs B* dv t6 fitatrov
w: wl w| wl w
(c) vai <f)opf)fi(da avv fifXaiva.
— W KJ I — W V-/ I V^ I '^
Compare iu Horace, —
Vides ut alta atet nice candidum, &c.
W I
w|_A
ji J
[§ 300.
special
ly be a
imes a
ly with
I rarely
in lyric
t forms
iijcisuiy
I series
300, 7).
jgaoedic
II po riant
the final
301.]
FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
825
6. Sapphic: iromilXddpov \d6dvaT \*A(ppo\8iTa.
_. \j
>
v>
Three Sapphics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza.
/. Eupoiidean: 2) '< |a)/if |vot, itare
— >
w *^ vy
.>
pa> II 7rp6sv\fids c|X«vde|po>r.
— >
w —
>
v^
_ A
See § 288, Note.
Note. Nearly all the verses here described as logaoedic liave
been called choriambic (§ 301, 1). If we consider the dactyl here
as _v^v^ and not as -\j\j, it forms _ww with the follow-
ing long syllable ; and thus, by the division hi' m.. common, the
Pherecratics become (1) — \jkj — | v^ v^ f^ud ^w | v^ ,
(2) o I v-/ w I *^ and ^ | v . _; the Glycouics
become (1) _ v v^ _ I »^ _ ^-' — » (2) . / j . v^ w _ K^ _,
(3) w I w i .._ \^ w ; and the " apphic becomes
_,^|_>^|_vw'^_iv^_w, with the Ar. -^nic _ »^ w | w •
w I _^
^wl_A
\j
\j
_A
1-A
1-A
RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
§ 901. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of
five or six times (§ 285, 2, c, c?) are the following : —
1. Choriambic rhythms, with the ehoriambus _ ^ ^ _ as the
fundamental foot : —
itaiha p.fv avjrar Trdatv ai/|ra Briiiva.
\J KJ I \J \J I V/W
Note. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most so-c I'-^d
choriambic verses are here explained as logaoedic (§ 300, Nott^
2. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore w w as
the fundamental foot, admitting also the equivalent w v^ uj
(§286,2): —
ireirepaKtv | fi€V o ir€po-c|7rToXis ^817
/Sao-iAcio^ I arparo's eU dv\TL7ropov -yeiJTOva ^w/jav
*A$afxavTi8(K "EXAas.
\j \j —
\j \y —
.|>-'V-»
If
1:1
■tti
320 VERSIFICATION. [§ 302.
A ditrochee _ v^ _ w often takes the place of two long syl-
lables and the two following shorts. This is called anaddsis
(tti^uKAao-is, breaking np) : —
Tts o Kpaiirv^ j TToSi Trr}8rf\fiaTo^ cuttcItoCs avdaa-tov;
^ ^ I \j Kj I \j \j w I \y
3. Cretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolution of
long syllables (_ '^ w w or w ^ ^ _ for _ v^ _) : —
oi/K dva\<TXT)(TOfiai • \ nijUi Xcyc | fioi av \6yov.
KaraTtfiu} \ rotaiu iir\ir€v<ri Karlrr/iiara.
\j I Kj I \j \^ KJ \ \^ <<^ ^
WWV^ I W I \J I ^
4. Bacchic rhythms, with the hacchius \j as the funda-
mental foot : —
Tit a\u), I Tif ofi/za I npoafTTTO | /i d^oryi}*;
vy Ivy |v^ |v/
DOCHMIACS.
lUiff
§ 302. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in
tragedy to express great excitement, are based upon a foot
compounded of the bacchius and the iambus, \j 1 v^ — ,
called the dochmius. This peculiar foot appears in nineteen
different forms, by resolving the long syllables and admitting
irrational longs in place of the two shorts. Its most common
forms are ^ I w — and ^ ^ ^ _ 1 ^ _. As examples
may be given
bvaaXyti rvxa.
irTfpo(^6pov dffias.
fUfrodtov fiev ovv-
fityaXa fxtydXa Kal>
(fxpoifiav ^oaKuv,
irpompylras axrj, \ riva 6poels "Koyov; \j \j I v^w^ — w— .
w I v>» —
^^ vy W — \ KJ
> vy v./ _ \\^— (for > I w _)
\y v^ v^' vy vy I v^ (for \^ I v^ )
w I > _ (for \y I w _)
[§ 302.
naddaia
iition of
e funda-
APPENDIX.
hiefl}' ill
n a foot
nineteen
idmitting
common
examples
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
-)
-)
)
^'A^
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF VEXIBS.
Note. — This catalogue professes to contain only those verbs in ordinary
use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present diffi-
culties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some
Ibrni before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not found in writ-
ers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the present
indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a
form which is given for completeness and marked as Inter. Tenses which
are not used by Attic writers, in either prose or poetry, or which occur
only in lyrical parts of the drama, are enclosed in [ ], except occasionally
tlu' present indicative of a verb which is Attic in other tenses.
The simple stem of each verb, when this does not appear in the present,
i.e. unless the verb is of the first class (§ 108, I,), is given in ( ) directly
after the present indicative. The class of each verb (§ 108) is given in ( )
at the end, unless it belongs to the first class, when it is left without a
number. Verbs in /xt of the second class (in vixi, § 108, v. 4) are marked
(II.) ; other verbs in m are marked (I.). A few Epic irregularities are not
noticed in the classification.
The modification of the stem made by adding « in certain tenses (§ 109,
8) is marked by prefixing (i-) to the first form in which this occurs. A
hyphen prefixed to a form (as - jfw/ca) indicates that it occurs only in com-
position. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in
later Greek ; and it is not always inserted when the occurrence of cognate
forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in
good use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every
tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority
within a fixed period.
The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present or
perfect \ given.
A.
[(Aa-), injure, infatiiate, stem, with aor. dacro, dffa; a. p. ddffdriv ; pr mid.
darat, aor. dxtadfirfv, erred. Epic]
"Aya^kai, admire, [Ep. fut. aydaofiai, rare,] r)ydadr)v, ■qyaadi^ri^. (I.)
^'Ayy^XXw (d77eX-), announce, d77e\w [d77cX^w], ifyyeiXa, iiyy€\Ka, iiyye\-
fiai, iiyyeXdifv, fut. p. d77e\^^(70/tai ; a. m. -^yeiXd/iriv. 8e<.;ond aorista
with X are rare or doubtful. (4.)
^m
liiUii
330
APPENDIX.
f'i .(
'AytCfm (ayep-), collect, a. Ifyeipa ; [Ep. plpf. p. Ayify^paTO ; i'. p. -ifyipO-nv,
a. in. {yyeipdfirii') (Tw-ayeiparo, 2 a. m. dy ephfiriv with part, dy pofievoi.] (4.)
"A7VVH1 (Fay-), in comp. also dyviju, break, d^u), fa^a, [rarely Epic ^|a],
2 IX -fdya [Ion. ^i?7aj, 2 a. p. e(i77>i/ [Ep. dyrjv], (II.)
"•^'A-yw, /mrf, fi^w, ^^o (rare), ^x" (in comp.), ^fMi, -fix^Vt dxOt^ffonai ; 2 a.
ifyayov, ■^ayd/j.rjv ; fut. m. d^ofiai (as pass.), [a. m. dfd/uijj', (Ion.).]
[(d8e-), 6e aa^erf, stem with aor. opt. dS-qaeuv, pf. part. dSjjKtis. Epic]
[(ac-), rest, stem with aor. dccra, S,aa. Epic]
'Ac(8tt>, sing, delau and dtlaofxai, ijeiaa. In Attic prose, ^Sm, qaofiai (9<ru,
rare), ^(ro, jjad/jv.
'Ailpia (dep-), take up, f. dpu), a. '^etpa, -^ipdrfv, [ijep/xai late, Horn. pip. p.
dtapro for ^epro ; a. m. deipdfiriv.] Ionic and poetic. In Attic prose
always atpu (dp-) dpu>, ^pa, fjpKa, fjpimi, ■^p0T]v ; dpoOfiai, ^pd/njv. Poetic
2 a. m. dpdfjirjv. (4. )
['Aijiii (de-)> blow, inf. d^vat, d^/xerat, part, dets ; imp. di^v. £Iid. dtjfiai,
imp. dijjitr;!'. Poetic, chiefly Epic] (I.)
AlS^ofiat, poet, atdofiai, respect, alSeffo/Mi, rjSeff/iai, ri8ia0it)v, ifScffdix'qv.
[Horn. imi>erat. atSeio]. § 109, 2.
AlWu, praise, aiviaia [otV^ffw], gwcra [b''''?<''ci]i -17''ffo» -WVl^^^t W^^l^*
§ 109, 1, N. 2.
[A(vv|u&i, /a^e, imp. atviixtiv. Epic] (II.)
^ Aip^w (eX-), ^a^e, aip-qffw, VprjKa, rjprffiai [Hdt. dpalpriKU, dpalprjfiai], 'gp^drfv,
a'lpedi^aofMi ; fut. pf. -gpTfiaofMi (rare); 2 a. erXop, ^\w, &c.; ei\6fjLr)v, ?\w-
/uat, &c. (8.)
Atpci), Attic i)rose form of delpu. See de/pw.
Al<rOdvo|iai (alad-), perceive, (c-) aladi^ffonai, xiaBruMi, ijffObp.'qv. Pres.
ataOofiiii (rare). (5.)
Alo-xvvu (atVxti'i'-), disgrace, attxxvi'w, ji<Txvva, [p. ]). part, rjnxviinivo'i Ep.,]
XiffX'^vdiiv, felt ashamed, al<Txvv0T^<ToiJ.ai ; fut. m. ato-xi^wOjuot. (4,)
'Atw, Acar, imp. fiibi/, [aor. -^ib-a.] Ionic and poetic.
['At«, breatlie out, only imp. dibi'. Epic. See fi7;/ti.]
['AKax^t*** afflict, redupl. pres., with &\ia and &xcv«>, be grievei (only in
pr. part, dx^wv, dxeiJwi'), and &xo|Jiai, be grieved ; fut. dKax'^cio, aor.
dKdxf^tra ; p. p. dKdxw^i- (dKrfx^SaTai), dKdxV'^Oo-i, dKax^/Mfos oi" df?'
X^fifvos ; 2 aor. ifKaxov, dicax^P-V- See dxwfjLai and i!(xoMa(- Epic]
f'AKaxi<ivos, sharpened. Epic perf. part, -vith no present in use.]
*AkIo|uii, heal, aor. 'nKead/j.vv.
'Akt;8^«», neglect, [aor. dxi^Seffo Ep.]. Poetic.
^*Akov« (dKov- for d/cof-), A'-ir, d/coiJo-o/tat, iJKovffa [Dor. pf. d/couKa], 2 ]jf.
OKiJiroo (for dx-riKoFa, § 102), 2 plpf. -^KrjKdeiv or dKrindeiv ; ijKoiadriv,
dK0V(i6i)<J0fiai.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
33)
p. -fiy^pOvff
<ijLl6l/0S.](*.)
' Epic ^5a]»
■ffffofiai ; 2 a.
(Ion.).]
Epic]
lorn, pip- P-
X Attic prose
ifiifv. Poetic
Mid. di)M«'>
Jtji', ijScffd/ii?!'.
^ff06jtir)»'. Pves.
(tyymtivo'i Ep.,]
liai. (4.)
griewi (only in
t. dKox^<?w> *°*'-
XT/juci/os or oLkt)-
l^at. Epic]
in use.]
jf. dKOUKo], 2 pf.
'A\do)jiai, wander, [pf. dXdXij/xot (as pres.), w. inf. dXdXTjo-^at, pt. dXoX'^-
fxfvos], a. dX-qdriv. Chiefly poetic.
'AX8a£vii> (dXSai'-), nourish, [Ep. 2 aor. ^XSai'OJ'.] Pres. also dXS^ffKw.
Poetic. (4.)
'AXc^ffMo (ttXt^-), anoint, dXel^w, ^Xct^o, -aX^Xt^a (or -ei^a), dXT7\i/iyuo(,
ijl\d<p(}r)v, -d\ei^0-qffonai (rare), 2 a. p. -■^\l<f>r]v (rare). Mid. f. dXti^o-
/xat, a. "^Xeixf/dfirfv, (2.)
'A\^$<>> (dXe/c-), ward off, fut. [Ep. dXt^ijo-w] dXe^Tjcrojuat or dX^^ofxai ; aor.
iJXf^T/ffL. (-^Xe^a, rare), riXe^dfiTiv ; [Ep. 2 a. dXaX/coi' for dX-oXtTc-oi'.] (8.)
['AX^ofiai, avoid. Epic ; aor. ^Xed/ATjj'.]
'AXcvw, avert, d\e6<rw, ifXevira, -qXevdfiTjv.
'AX^M, grind, d\4<T0) (dXw), ifXeffa, dX-^Xeafiai or dXrjXe/jLai. § 102.
"AXOoiiai, &« healed, (c-) dXd^cronai,
v'AX£(rKO)iai (dX-, dXo-), fee captured, dXwffo/xat, tJXwko or edXa^fca, 2 aor.
^Xwi* or edXwv, dXQ [Epic dXww], dXoirfv, dXwvai, dXoijs ; all passive in
meaning. § 109, 8, N. No active dXlcTKw, but see dv-aX£<rKa>. (6.)
'AXiTa£vo|Lai (dXtr-, dXirau-), [with Ep. pres. act. dXiTpafvca], sin ; 2 aor.
17X1x01', [dXXThfxr)v, pf. part. dXtTTj/nevos, sinning, Ep.]. Poetic, chiefly
Epic (4. 5.)
^'AXXdo-o-w (dXXd7-), change, dXXd^u, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. ijKXd'yy^v. (4.)
"AXXofJiai (dX-), leaiK aXoO/xat, ijXdnriP ; 2 a. rjXdfitjv (rare). [Epic 2 a,
iXao, iXro, dX/xfi-oi, by syncope. (4.)
['AXvKrd^o) aiid oXvkt^w, lie excited, imp. dXiJKTa^ov Hdt., pf. dXaXiKTrj/xai
Horn. Ionic]
'AXvcTKW (dX"/c-), «t'oi(i, dXi'^w [and aXt'^o/tai], ^Xu^a (rarely -afir)p). Poetic.
'AXiffKO) is for dXvK-ffKOJ (§108, vi. x. 3). (6.)
'AX«^dv6> (dX0-), ^)irf, acquire, [Ejuc 2 aor. vJX^oi/.] (5.)
^ 'Aiiaprdvtt (d/xapT-), err, (€-) a/xapr-^aofiai, TjfidprrjKa, Tindprritiai, i)fxapTT^-
d-qv ; 2 aor. ifnapTov [Ep. irf^/3/30Toi/]. (5.)
'A^pX£<rKu (dfi^X-), dpLpXdw in comp., miscarry, [dfi^Xuaw, late,] ifn^Xuaa,
-iJlx^XuKa, -ifix^Xwfiai. ■fjufiXwdTji'. (6.)
'AficCpw (aVe^-) and dticpSw, deprive, iifxepcra, -np-ipditv. Poetic. (1. 4.)
^A|fc'rr•^a> and e4iir-(<rx« (aV0^ and fx.ui), ivrap about, clothe, a'/x^^fw, 2 a.
^/UTtfJ-xoi' ; [Epic impf. d/x7rexo»'.] Mid. dpLirixofmi, dfxiriaxop-ah d/xwi-
axvionai; imp. iifixeixopiV'' \ *"• dfx<f>^^oaai ] 2 a. riixiri<yx^fiw and iJ^Te-
cX^fiW, § 105, 1, N. 3. See ?x*» '^"d I'trxu.
'A)iirXaKl<rKia (d/iTrXcT/.-). err, miss, Tj^tTrXdjcrjuoi ; 2 a. i}/xTXaKQv, part. a>-
irXaK(i)i' or airXoKwi'. Poetic. (6.)
["Aiiirvwe, dixwivd-qv, dfAVvvro, all Epic : see dyairp^u.']
\*A|KJv« (d/ui't'-), i^^ard ojf ; fut. dniivu, dfivvoOfiai ; aor. •^M'i'»'«> ■fifivvd/J-V'
(4-)
1
.:
.1
M
w
-i'
if .
in
332
APPENDIX.
*A^i-yvoi<a, doubt, "^fit^iyvdeov and "^fitpfyvdeov, ijfitpeyvSijaa ; aor. pass,
part, d/xipiyporjeeli. § 105, 1, N. 3.
^ 'A|m|>i-€vvv|xi (see euvvfju), clothe, int. [Ep. a/x^i^ffw] Att. -a/i0iw ; v/u^/cffo,
■flixtpieafxai ; dfulHeaofjuii, afK^ieffd/iriv (poet.). § 105, 1, N. 3. (II.)
'Afu^i<rPT]TH», dispute, augmented iffufna- and ij/i^etr- (§ 105, 1, N. 3);
otherwise regular.
'Avatvoffcoi (dvdv-), refuse, imp. r/vaivdfJLrjv, aor. ■^VT]vdfir]v. (4.)
X'AvaXliTKM and avaX6u, expend, dvaXdiaui, dvaXwaa, and ai'^Xwffa (acot-
7;i'd\fa;(ra), aVdXuKa and aciyXu/ica, dvdXwfxai and ai'7)\a;juai (KaT-i}cdXfa)^ca(),
dvdXJidriP and dvrfKi^d-qv, dvakudr^aoixai.. See aXCtTKOiiai.
'Avaw^w, <«fe breath, conip. of dvd and ttv^w (ttj'i?-): see irviu). [Epic 2
aov. iniperat. dfiirpve, a. p. dfiirviJvOrjp, 2 a. ni. dfxirpvTo (tor -uero).]
'AvSdvw (Fa5-, d5-), please, (t-) [dS^o-w, Hdt. ; 2 pf. ^'dSo, Epic ;| 2 aor.
fiSoi' [Ion. ^ddov, Epic cudSo;' for ffaSoi'.] Ionic and poetic. (5.)
^ 'Av€X», hold up ; see Kx**» ^"'1 § 1^5, 1, Note 3.
['Aviivo0€, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung. Epic] See tp-qpode.
^'Av-oiyvv[i.i and avoiyw (see ot"7vu/Ltt), open. imp. dj'^v7oi' ()5»'oi7oj', rare)
[Epic ai'^701'] ; dpoi^w, dpiip^a (ijpoi^a, rare) [Hdt. dvoi^a], dv^ifixo; aV^oj-
yfiai, dpei^drjp (subj. dpoix'^^y &c. ); fut. ))f- dfe(^o/xai ; 2 pt. dy^<^7a
(rare). (II.)
'Av-op6<$a), set upright, aug. di/wp- and ifpwp-. § 105. 1, N. 3.
'Avvu, Att. also dvvTw, accomplish ; fut. dvvaw, ipiao/xai ; aor. ifpvaa,
■^pvadfirjv ; pf. ijpVKa, ijvvafxat. ( Always v. )
^*Avw^ci», order, exhort, imp. ijpuyop ; di/w^w, ^<'wfa ; 2 p. ai'W7o (as pres. ),
with imperat. dpux^h dpuxff<^> dpwxOe, 2 plpf. i7J'ui7eo. Ionic and poetic.
('Air-avpdtii), takeaway, not found in present; imp. dvpiipup (as aor.);
a. m. dirr}vpdfxi]p (?); aor. part. dvo6pas, dwovpdfJLepoi. Poetic.
'Aira4>((rK<i> (otTra^-), deceive, 2 a. rjiraipop [2 a. m. opt. aTro^oi'/tTji']. Po-
etic. (6.)
*Air(x8d/o(uu (fX^")» ^^ hated, («-) oirex-^'^co/iot, aT?jx^'?M<»* ; 2 a. dTrrix&6-
A"?". (5.)
['Airdcpcre, si^Jcp^ off, subj. dtroipar), opt. -<retp. Only in 3 pers. Epic]
'AiroKT£wv(ii and -v«, forms of diroKreiPu. See ktcCvu.
'AirdxpTji ^'< suffices, impersonal. See XP''!-
"AwTw (d^-), touch, fut. c£i/'w, d\f/onai ; aor. ^^a, r)\f/dp.rip ; pf. ■^/u/xot ; a. p.
ij(p0r]p. (3.)
"^ 'Apdofiai, iway, dpdffoixai, ■^pdadp.rip, ifpafiai. [Ep. act. inf. dpvuepai, to
pray.]
.JApapCtTKia {dp-), fit, ^p(Ta, i}p6r)P ; 2 p. &pdpa, [Ion. aprjpa, plpf. dp-qpav and
T)pripeiv ;] 2 a. ifpSpop ; 2 a. m. part, dp/xepoi (as adj.), fitting. Att.
redupl. in pres. (§ 108, vi. N. 1). (6.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
333
aov. pass.
(II.)
5, 1, N. 3);
)
rjXwffa (KttT-
T-Tji'dXw/xai)*
iw. [Epic 2
-uero).]
Epic ;1 2 aor.
■ (5)
[^wiTo", Tare)
2 pi'- d!'^V7*
; aor. ijpvffa,
)ya (as pres.),
(lie aiul poetic.
'ipwv (as aor.);
ktic.
■atpoiixriv]. Po-
; 2 a. dvvx^(>'
lers. Epic]
'Ap^OTKu (ope-), please, apiau), ijpeaa, -qpiaBiiv ; dpitrofiai, ^petrdfirju. § 109,
1, N. 2. (6.)
['Api)|Uvos, oppressed, pf. pass. part. Epic]
'ApK^, assist, dpKiffu, ifpKeaa. § 109, 1, N. 2.
'Ap|mJtt» [Ion. ap|i.(i(r(r«], poet. ap|,.o£ii> (dp/xoS-), ./?<, apfidtrw, Hpnova {trvp-
dpfxo^a Pind.), ^pjxoKa, i}pfji.o<r/xai, {jpfioadrfv, fut. p. apixoad-qtrofiat ; a. m.
iipfioffoifirfv. (4.)
"Apvv|iai (dp-), win, secure, pres. and impf. ; chiefly poetic. Same stem as
aipu) (v. deipu), (II.)
' Apou, plouf/h, rfpoffa, [p. p. Ion. api7poMa(,] rjpddrjv. § 109, 1, N. 2.
** 'Apwdj^w (apirad-, apway-), seize, apwdc't and apirdao/xai [Ep, dpTrd^w], ijfp-
Trdffa [^pTTO^a], rjpiraKa, -^piraap-ai, rjpirdffdrjv [Hdt. ^pTrdx^'?"], apiraad-q-
aofxai, (4.)
'Api;a> and o^vrta, draw tcatcr, aor. ifpvaa, -^pvadfirfv, ripvOrjv [-^pvffOrfv, Ion.].
^ "Apx», ftej/i?i, nt/e, dp^w, ^p^a, ^pxa, ^py/iai (mid.), iipx^Wi apx^-nffofiai ;
dp^Ofiai, rjp^dp.i]v.
['AtitoXXw (aVirdX-), tend; aor. driTrjXa. Epic and Lyric] (4.)
Avalvoi {avoLP-) or avalvw ; fiit. avdvd ; aor. r}{j7)pa, rjvdpdrjp or audi'^ryj',
avapdrjaofxai ; fut. ni. ai^afoOMOi (as pass.). Augment tju- or av- (§ 103,
Note). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.)
Ai^dvtD or aiS|<i> (av^), increase, (€-| av^riffw, au^r/cro/xat, rj&^rfcra, ryfl^TjKo,
rjC^rffiai, v^^V^Vt av^v^ri<Top.ai. [Also Ion. pres. ct^^w, impf. ae^of.] (5.)
['A<)>d<r(rA> (d«/>d5-), /ccZ, handle, aor. i^^ttcra ; used by Hdt. for a0dw or
d0dw.] (4.)
*A<)>-£t)|jli, ^c^ (JO, impf. a'^iTji' or t^^iiji/ (§105, 1, N. 3); fut. atpriau, &c.
See iwi, § 127.
['A^vwrn {dtpvy-), draiv, pour, d<f>v^u}. Epic] See a0i)w. (4.)
['A()>v<i>, draw, d<f)V(Tu) (late), ij<f>v(Ta, ri<pvadixyfp. Poetic, chiefly Epic]
"AxOofiai, he displeased, {t-) axOdao/xai, rfx^^o^OVt axOfffdi^aofiai. § 109, 2.
["Axvviiai (dx-)> ^f' troubled, impf. dxi'i^M'?''- Poetic. (II.) Also Epic
pres. &xo|Jiai.] See dKaxtJ^w*
f"Aa>, satiate, dau, daa ; 2 aor. suhj. ^wfxep (or edp-ep), inf. dfiepai, to sati-
ate one's self. Mid. (dofxai) darac as fut. ; f. dcrofiai, a. dadpLifP. Epic]
)f. ^/AjLittt ; a. p.
Inf. dprtixepai, to
Llpf. dpi7pei»' and
I, yiWrnj^. Att.
E
Bdj;<i) (/3a7-), spcrtA-, w/^er, -jSd^w, [p. p. Ep. /S^jSaxTot]. Poetic. (4.)
fia£vu (/Sdf-, /Sdc-), go, /S^ffo/xai (poet, except in comp.), p^^rjKa, -/3^/3d>at,
-6^d^T;.' (rare); 2 a. ?/37j.; (§ 125, 3); 2 p. (/3«'/9aa) /9e/3tD, &c. (125, 4); [a.
m. Ep. e/3-i/(Tdp.7ji' (rare) and e/STjcro/urji']. In active sense, cause to go, poet.
(i^aw, i^-qaa. See § 108, v. N. 1. (5. 4.)
, '^'^
r
T!' i
T^-^
Til ■
i:
334
APPENDIX.
VBdXXw (/3a\-, p\a-), throw, f. [jSaX^w] /3oXw, rarely (c-) ^aWi^aw, p^pXtjKU,
P^pXTinai [Ep. /3c/S6Xi;Ma»]> ^P^^V^V, /3Xr?5^<ro/Ltot ; 2 a. ^/3aXoj', ipaXofirfv ;
fut. m. pdXoOfiai ; f. p. /Sc/SX'^o'o^ai ; [Epic, 2 a. dual ^vh-PXt^ttju ; 2 a.
m. ipx-^firiv, with subj. /SX^erat, opt. /3X^o or /SXero, inf. pXrjffeai, pt.
pXrifiivoi ; fut. ^u/x-/3X^<Teat]. (4.)
BdiTTM (/3o0-), c?i>, /3d^w, #/3a^a, pipan/xai, fpd<prjv and (poet.) i^itpenv ;
fut. m. /Sd^o/uat. (3.)
Bdo'KM (/3a-), poetic form of fialvw, go. (6.)
Bao-Td^ii) (/3offTo5-), carry, /SaffToaw, ipdaraaa. Poetic. (4.)
B^o-o-ot (/Sijx-). Att. /3^Tw, coi((//i, jS^fw, ^/Sij^a. (4)
[Blpniii (/3a-), go, pr. part. /3t/3ds. Epic] (I.)
BiPpuo-KO) (/8po-), m/, p. piPpuKa, pi^pwixai, [ippwdrfv ; 2 a. fppwv ; fut. pf.
Peppib<Toixai] ; 2 p. part. (/SejSpws) pi. /3e/3/5WTcs (§ 125, 4). [Honi. pres.
pfppu)0w.] (6.)
Bi<$(i>, Znr, Piwaonat, ipiwaa (rare), pefiluKa, (/3e/3/w/xai) pfpiurai ; 2 a.
f/Siw./ (§ 125, 3).
Bi.<tf<rKO|fcai (/3to-), revive, f/Stwffd/iiji', restored to life. (6.)
^BXdirrca (/3Xa/3-), tn/itrc, fiXd\f/w, ipXa\pa, /3^/3Xa0a, pipXanfiai, (^\d<t>driv ;
2 a. p. c/3Xd/37ji', 2 f. pXap-fiffofiai ; fut. ni. ^Xdrpofxai ; [fut. pf. /SfjSXdt^o-
Mttt Ici 1 (3.)
BXao-rdvu (/SXaerr-), sprout, («.) /3Xo<rT^ffw, k^Xdartfaa, fifpXd(TTr]Ka (and
e/3X-); 2 a. fpXaarop. (5.)
"^ BX^irw, s^-e, pXiil/ofiai [Hdt. -/3X^i/'w], #/3Xe^o.
BX£tt« or pX£(r(riii (/icXtr-, /SXtr-, § 14, N. 1), <aA-c honey, aor. ffiXXaa. (4.)
\BX<tfirK<i> (jixoX-, /uXo-, /3Xo-, § 14, N. 1), ^o, f. /xoXoCjuati P- /liuPXwKa, 2 a.
(fj.oXop. Poetic. (6.)
^BoA«, *7<oi«<, Poriaofiai, e/36?j(ra. [Ion. (stem /3o-), -/3w(ro/iat, ^/Swera, iputrd-
firjv, (p^pwfiai) pt^wfi^vos, cpdffdrjv. § 108, vii. N.]
BdcKWj/ece?, (e-) PoffK-fivw.
^>BovXo)iai, wiVZ, ww/j, (augm. epovX- or iJ/SouX-); (c-) /SouXTjffo/tat, /3f/3oi;Xr;-
/ttot, ipov\-fie-i)v ; [2 p. wpo-pipovXa, jyrefer.] § 100, N. 2.
f(Bpax-), stem, with only 2 aor. f^paxe and Ppdxe, resounded. Epic]
BptOM, &c heavy, Ppiffw, lppl<ra, pi^pWa. Rare in Attic prose.
[(BpoX"), stem, stvaUow, aor. f^po^a, 2 aor. p. aVa-/3^oxfts ; 2 pf. (?) ova-
Peppoxev ( Horn . ). Epic ]
A^vxAo|iai (/3/)i7x-)» »'0«^'. P- P^PP^X<^'> ePpvxwdfiV" ', pp^xv^^i^- § 108,
vii. N. (7.)
hvvlw or ^vcii if-)-), stop up, piaw, ?/3ucra, pi^mfxai. Chiefly poetic. (5.1
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
335
ti)Tr}v ; 2 a.
Krjffdai, pt.
50)1/ ; fat. pf.
[Horn. pves.
MwTtti; 2 a.
pf. p€p\d^po^
\a
a<TTT;Ka
(flUll
. ^/SXiffo. (4.)
(fip\ma, 2 a.
ofJLai, /Sc/3o«JXr?-
rf. Epic]
2 pf. (?) a"*-
r,0cis. § 108.
poetic (5.'
r.
ra|W«* {ya/i-), marry (said of a man), f.ya/xw [yafi^u)], a. iytjfM, p. y^yd-
firiKa, p. p. yeydfiTtfiai. Mid. marry (said o^ a woman), f. yafiov/Mi
[Epic yaniaffofiat (?), tvill provide a ^vifc\ a. iyTifidfirjv. (7.)
rdvviuu (7*-)* rejoice, [fut. (Epic) yav^affo/xai, pf. 7c7d«'u/ioi (later).] Po-
etic. (II.)
FryuWtt) (7WI'-), shout, yeyuuifjatu, (iyeydbptjaa) yeyuv^aat ; 2 p. y4y<t.va,
subj. 7f7<i«'w, im])er. 7^7wi'e, [inf. yeyuv^fiev, part. 7e7wj'(is.] § 109, 7
(c). (7.) Pres. also yey wviaKU,. (6.)
rc£vo|ii(u (7ei'-), be bom; a. iyewdfir,p, begat. (4.)
\ FcXdw, laugh, ye\d<Tonai, iytXdaa, iy€\aff0r}v. § 109, 1, N. 2.
[F^VTo, seized, Epic 2 aor. ; once in Horn.]
Frfiia {yvO-), rejoice, [yrjO'^aw, ^yri0r)ffa ;] 2 p. y^yr)0a (as pres.). (7.)
FtipdiTKo) and yripda), groio old, yrjpdao) and yripdaofiai, tyripaaa, yeyifipaKOt
{am old); 2 a. {iy^pav, § 1;?5, 3) I'yvpa Horn.], inf. ytfpdvai, pt. ynpds.
(6.)
^" Fi'yvo|iat and ^Cvofici (yev-, yn-), becom.\ yev^ofxai, yey^vrjfmi, [iyeviidrjv
Dor. and Ion.]; 2 a. ^7ei'6/ii77i' [Ep. y^vT^. for iy^vero]; 2 p. yiyova, am,
poet. (7^700) and 2 plpf. (iyi^dnv), see § 125, 4. (8.)
"^ FiYV(&(rKci) (7i'o-), nosco, know, yviSxronai, [Ion. aV-^7vw(ro, ] iyvuiKZ, iyvw-
ff/xat, iyv(I)(T0riv ; 2 a. fyvuv, jyerceived. § 125, 3. (6 )
FvoiMTT** (yvafiv-), betid, yvdfi^u), [lyvafiypa, •iyi' ifA«l>0r]v.] Poetic, chiefly
Epic] (3.)
[To6m, bewail, 2 aor. (70-), 7601'; only Epic in active.] Mid. yodofiai,
poetic, impf. 700x0 ; [yoi^ofiai (Epic), as active]. § 108, vii. N. (7.)
' Fpd(^, write, ypd\f/oi, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. iypdtpriv {iypd<p0T]v is not class-
ic); 2 f . ypatp-j/iaoiMi ; fut. pf. yeypdif/onai.
4.
(8a-), st'^m, teach, leant, no pres., [(t-) Sai^ffofmi, 5f ^ ' va, SeSdrffiai ; 2 a.
ni. (?) inf. 5eSdaff0ai ; 2 p. (5^5aa) § 125, 4 ; 2 a. ouov or fSaov,] 2 a.
p. iSdrjv. Poetic, chiefly Epic.
[Aat^w (5ai7-)» rend, Sat^w, iSd'i^a, deSniyixai, ioatx v^ Epic and Lyric]
(4.)
AaLviifii (SaL-), entertain, Salffw, edaiaa, {iSala0riv) Sai-rBeh. [Epic Salvv,
impf. and pr, imperat.] Mid. Saipv/mi, feast, daiaofiai, iSai<rduL7)v ;
[Ep. pr. opt. daivvTo for Saivvi-ro, iaiviar for baivvi vm. § 118, 1, N.] (II.)
Aalo|Jiai (^a.-), divide, [Ep. f. Soicro/zai,] ibaadp.y\v, pf. p. S^Saff/noi [Ep. S^Sat-
Moi]. § 108, iv. 3, Note. (4.) Pres. also Ba-nf^.'.;*, (Sar-), rfiwrfc, to
which idvofMi, iSaffdfirjv, and S^daff/xai can be referi U. (7.)
ll
4
APPENDIX.
B f'4
AaCtt (5a-), kindle, [Ep. 2 p. SiSrja, 2 plpf. Sedi^eiv ; 2 a. {idadfirjv) swbj.
SdTjToi.] Poetic. § 108, iv. 3, N. (4.)
AdKVO) (da,K-, SrjK-), bite, Bri^ofMi, SiSrjyfmi, iST^x^W} Srix&wonai ; 2 a.
(daKov. (2. 5.)
Aaftvdci) and 8dfLvi])Jii {5a fi-, 8fj.a-), also pr. 8a|id(o> (Sufiad-), tmne, subdue,
[Ej). f. da/ici) (w. dafidq,, Sa/xduiai) for Sa/idcrw, eSdfMaa, [didnrjfiai,^ ida-
fJtd<r0T]v (§ 16, 1) and idfi-^drjv ; 2 a. p. iddfii^v ; [fut. pf. 8c5M'7ffo/«it ;
fut. m. 5afjLd(T<ToiJLai,] a. m. i5afiaffd/j.riv. See § 108, v. N. 2. (4. 5).
AopOdvw (5ap^-), sleep, 2 a. tSapdov, jioet. eSpaOov ; (c-) p Kara-deSapOri-
Kc6s ; KaT-€8a/a^T;i' (later). (5.)
AaWo|iai : see SaCofJiai.
[A^ajLai, appear, only in impf. S^oro. Horn.]
A^ia,/<!ar; see stem (5.-, Set-).
[A«£8», /ear ; see (5i-, 8ei-),]
\AcCKVV|ii (Setff-), .sAo7t', Sel^w, tdei^a, d^deixa, d4Seiyfiai, iSflx^rfv, Sei-
x6ri<T0fua.i ; dei^ofiai, ^dei^dfii^v. See § 123. (II.) [Ion. (StK-), -Si^u,
-?Se^a, -S^dcyfiai (Ep. SelSey/xai), -ed^x^Vt iSe^dfirjv.]
A{\ua (Sffi; 5fi€-), build, ^5eifia, [diSfirifMi], ideifidfiriv. Chiefly Ionic.
A^pKOfJiai, see, iS^px^V t 2 a. (8paK0v, (iSpdKrjv) SpaKeis ; 2 p. d^SopKa,
§ 109, 3, 7 (a), and 4, N. 1.
Aipw, Jlay, Sepd, iSeipa, didapfxai ; 2 a. i8dpr)v. § 109, 4.
[Acvo|Jiai, Epic for S^o/xat.] See Siia, want.
\ A^xofioi, receive, Si^ofiai, d^dey/Mii [Horn. bix<^To-<- for ^cbixo-rai, § 106, 1,
N.J, iS^x^Vt iSe^dfiriv ; [2 a. m. chiefly Epic {i54y fjLrjv) S^kto, imj^er.
S^^o, inf. S^x^ai, part. S^y/ievoi (sometimes as pres. ).]
\ A^«, bind, Si^ffw, (drjaa, SideKa (rarely SidTjKa), didefxai, ibiOij/v, SedT^optai ;
fut. pf. SedT^ao/iai,
\ a^w, want, need, (e-) df-nau, ihir^ffa [Ep. ^St/o-o,] SeS^rjKa, ded^rifiai, iSe-^drju.
Mid. Siofiai, ask, df^aofiai. From Epic stem Sev- {(-) come \iSeiTjaa
(once in Hom.), and Sedofiai, SevT/i<70fiai]. Impersonal Sci, debet, tJiere is
need, (one) oicght, dericrei, iS^rjae.
[ATjptAw, act. rare (Sr)pi-), contend, fut. Iripiffw (late), aor. iS-ripTcra (Theoc.^,
aor. p. Srtplv0i}v as middle (Hom.). Mid. dripido/Mi and SrjpioiJLai, as act.,
Sripiffofiai (Theoc), ib-qplffdnriv (Hom.).] § 108, vii. Note. (7).
[A'^cD, Epic jiros. \rith futui-e meaning, shall find."] See (8a-).
|Ai-, 8«t-), stem, /mr. [Epic pres. 8c<8o>, fut. Maotxai,] aor. ^5eto-a, pf.
3f5otra, § 109, 3, N. 2 FEp. 5e^5otKo, § 101, 1, N.]. Fiom stem 8i-, [Ej).
impf. Sio;/,] 2 pf. Moia, 2 plpf. ^SeS/etj/ [Ep. odSia, &c.]. St^e § 125, 4.
[Mill. Uo}f.aK, frighten, pursue, Uufiai, Siolfxriu, SlecTdai, di/jfxevoi; also
8i«f4ai, /mr, Jtee; impf. act. iv-bUaav, chased aioa.y : poetic, chiefly Epic]
t;; *
CATALOGUE OP VERBS.
387
jnoi ; 2 a.
inc, subdiie,
(4. 5).
fly Ionic.
2 p. S^SopKtt,
iTOi, § 106, 1,
5^KT0, imper.
come f^5£i5i?«To
debet, tliere is
T^plo-a (Theoc.\,
7pioiuoi, as act.,
(7).
).
nor. ^5ei(ra, pf.
stem Si-, l^^'-
See § 125, 4.
Si/)Hevos\ also
, chiefly Epie-l
AiairdcD, arbitrate, w. double augment in perf. and plpf. and in compounds ;
StoiTiJffw, fiiyT-qffa (dir-cStpxTjffa), 8e5t]|T7;KO, 5e5tpT7;/xai, Si-gri^riv (e^-cStij-
tt}^?;!'); diaiTT^aofMt, KaT-eSij]Tr}ffAfii)v. § 105, 1, N. 2.
AkOKOv^tt), minister, i8idK6vovr ; iiSKoviiaw (aor. inf. StaKoi^^trcu), SfSidK^i')}-
/uit, ^dtaKOfi^d;;!'. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment
5(7;- or 8c5ti7-. See § 105, 1, N. 2.
At8i||ii, hind, chiefly poetic form for bi(a. (I.)
\ AtSdo-KU (5(dax-)> for dtaax-cTKCtf (§ 108, vi. N. 3), teach, diSd^u, iSlSa^a
[ididdffKijffa], Sedldaxa, Sedlday/Jiai, ididdx9r)v ; Sidd^ofmi, idida^d/iiiv. (6 )
\ AiSpdo-Ku (Spa-), only in comp., run away, -SpdaofMi, -didpdKa; 2 a. -ISpdv
[Ion. -ISp-nv], -dpQ, -dpal-nv, -dpavai, -dpdi (§ 125, 3). (6.)
\ A(8u|ii {So-), give, ddffw, iSuKa, diSuKu, &c. ; see inflection and synopsis in
§ 123. [Ep. ddfuvai or dbfiev for Sovvai, fut. Sidiiffu) for Sibata.} (I.)
[A£|^i||uii, seek, with 17 for c ; dt^Vojuat. Ionic and poetic] (I.)
Ait|fda», thirst, Siyj/'^au, idl\f/riffa. § 98, N. 2.
^ AoK^w (So/c-), seewi, <AmAr, 56fw, #80^0, 8^So7/xat, iSdx&V (I'are). Poetic
8oKi}o-<», iSdKTjaa, deSdKrjKu, Sed6K7]fMi, kboKiiB-qv. Impersonal, 80KC1, it
seeins, &c. (7.)
Aovir^o (Sovir-), sound heavily, iSoiiriijaa [Er. ^ydoiirriaa ; 2 pf. di5ovva,
dfdoviriii, fallen.] Chiefly poetic, (7.)
\Apda), do, dpdffw, idpdea, SiSpdKa, S^dpdfxai, (rarely Sidpaafiat), {iSpdadrjv)
dpaadeli. § 109, 2.
\Aiiva|uu, be able, augm. idw- and -^Svi/- (§ 100, N. 2) ; pr. ind. 2 p. sing,
poetic SOvqi (Att. & Dor.) or Siiyjn (Ion.); Svv^aonai, Sed^ivrffiai, idvvi^driv
(rarely ^Suvdfftfrjj'), [Ep. iSvPTjcdfirjy.] (I.)
^ AvM, enter or cattse ^0 enter, and 8(iv«* (8u-), enter ; diuau {v), (SiJaa, d^SvKa,
BeSvfiai, iUdriv (c) ; 2 a. ^SOv, inflected § 123, see also § 125, 3 ; f. m.
Svaofiai, a. m. iivadfiriv [Ep. iSv<r6fir)v, inflected as 2 aor.]. (5.)
S *EA» [Ep. eldw], permit, idffw, etdffa [Ep. faaa], cfoKO, erd/uot, e/d^rji' ;
idffofxai (as pass.). ( 104.
'E^Tvdtt, proffer, betroth, augm. 1777U- or ^^71;- (^77€7i/-).
\'E'YcCp» {iyep-), raise, rou^, eyepQ, ifyeipa, iy^ep/mi, iiyipBijv; 2 p. iypi^-
70/30, am awake [Horn, iyprffbpdaai (for -bpacn), imper. iypift/opde (for
-bpare), inf. iypifyopdai or -6/3^at] ; 2 a. m. iiyp6p.7)v [Ep. ^7^6/i»?>'.] (4.)
."E8w, m<, see ^o-etw.
, 'E|;o|iai, (^8- for fftS- ; cf. sed-eo), 5j7, [fut. inf. itft-iffffeffdai (Horn.):] aor.
iffffdfjLTjv and hffa-, dadfi-qv. [Act. aor. e2<ra and ?ff(ra (Horn.).] (4.) See
t{« and KcMj^ofiai.
' EMXm and MXm, i^rwA, imp. IjeiXov ; (i-) idekfyria, IfiiXt^va, ■ftd^XijKU.
■ I
«!1
*'"'■!
til i I
in
tdii
APPENl)\X.
it 'iji
'EOCj^w {^6iS-)t aeeuahm, iBlaw, ttOXcra, fWiKa, (Wicr^ai, tteiadr^v. § 104.
(4)
"EOm, lie (iccHstovicd, [only E]k jmrt. iHioi>.\ 'J p. (ti^- for fw#-) ffwi^a |l(iii.
ew^l, as present , 2 plpt'. riiieeiv. § 104 ; § 109, 3, N. 1. (8.)
\ EISov {IS-, FiS-), vi(l-i, saw, 2 aov., no j)res«nt ; t8u, iSoifxi, We or iS^, iddv,
iSuv. Mid. (chietty poet.), iCSoiicu, seem, [Ep etVd/i"?"' and ^et<r- ; ] 2 a.
€iS6nr)v (in prose rare and only in cointi.. ), saw, — dSov. 0I8a (2 pf. as
pres. ), know, pip. v^eiv, knew, f. ciVoMot ; see § 125, 4 ; § 127. (8.)
ElKdj^w (ftVaS-)> "»«*« ^i't<^> tiKttaiii, ttKdaa or fl/cdffo, elVcacr/iat or yKaa/mi,
eiKdadrjVf fiKaaihfffonai, (4.)
(EtKw) not used in pres. (*«-), rcsemW<', apjnar, imp. rifcoi/, f. ef^w (rare), 2
p. loiKa [Ion. oZ/ca] (»ith foiyfj-ev, [tiKTov,] ft^affi, eiK^uai, eUuii, chiefly
poetic); 2 pip. itpxeiv jwith ftVnr]. Ilpoo-Tji'^at, ar^ like |and Ep. ^i/cro
or eiVcTo], sometimes referred to tiVfcw. Impersonal )Ioikc, ii scews, &c.
For toiKa (Ik-), see § 109, 3 ; § 104. (2).
(ElX^w (A-, eJX-), ;)res.9, roll, aor. e\«ro, pf. p. eeXnat, 2 aor. p. ^dXryv or
&\r}vv,\ inf. aXi^fievai. Pres. pass. fiXopia'- Epic. Hdt. has (in con4».)
-«t\7j<ra, -etXrinai, 'eiX-fiBrfv. Pind. has ^)lpf. ^6\et,l The Attic has et\^-
/juu, and efWw or eiXXw. See CX\«>. (4 7.)
£%£, 6c, and F^j:.*, gro. See § 127, I. and II.
vJIftrov 1^- for Feir-, feir-), said, [Ep. eeiirov,] 2 aor., no preseiit ; efn-w, ef-
7ro„.t, ctV^ [Ep. imp. fffireTf], eivfiv, dir<l)v; 1 aor. flTro (opt. (tiraifxi,
imper. elirov or elwdv, inf. elTrat, pt. etirai), [Hdt. dTr-ctird/itTji'.] Other
tenses are supplied by Horn, etpu (ip-), and a stem pe- : f. ipiu, ipQ ; p.
eiiprfKa, etprifMt ; a. p. ipp-^dijv, rarely ippiOfiv [Ion. elpiOifv] ; fut. pass, ^t;^^-
o-o/uii ; fut. pf. elpifi(TOfMi. § 101, 1, N. See {v^irw. (8.)
EtpYVV|M and cipYvivu, also etpyu (dpy-), shut in; ftp^u, ftpfo, etpyp^t,
etpx^W' Also 2pYw, e/J^w, c/ofa, [(e/)7/*at) 3 pi. ipxarai w. plpf. tpxaro j
ipX^V) Epic], (II.)
Etp^M (fZ/)7-), s^w< ow<, cf/j^w, erp^o, etpypiai, etpx^W ', dp^ofiai. Also [XpY«>,
-e/jfo, -fpy/Mi, Ionic]; tp^o/xai (Soph.). [Epic also ^^/37w.]
[Etpo|fcai (Ion.), ask, elp-/i<TOfmi. See )[po)Mii.]
EtpM {ip-), say, Epic in present. See ctirov.
ECp» (ip-), sero, join, a. -etpa (Ion. -?/Kra], p. -elpKa, elpfxai [Ep. fV^/wat]. (4.)
['Eto-Kw, liken, compare; poetic, chiefly Epic: pres. also fo-Kw.] See
cCku. (7.)
*^ 'EKKXt)(rtd(«>, call an assembly (iKKX-qaia) ; augm. t^/cjcXt;- and i^eKXtj-
§ 105, 1, N. 2.
'EXaiivw, for f\a-vv-<a (§ 108, v. 4, N. 2), poet. tXdw («Xa-), drive, inarch, f.
(eXdcro;) Aw [Epic Adffffw and i\6w ;] -tjXaaa, Ai^Xa^ca, ♦'XTjXo/iMit [Ion. and
late -aapiai, Horn. plup. iXriX^daTo], ■fiXddrjv [-Ti\dff6j)i> f lon.l; r)\aadfiriif.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
339
,. I 104.
;8.)
na- ,] 2 II.
a (2 pf. as
(. (8.)
or ^(caff/wit,
f^w (rare), 2
Ktij, chietly
id Ep. ^i«TO
i seems, &•«•
, p. iii\r)v or
3 {in coiuii.)
tic lias eiUo-
ei.t ; cfirw, cf-
(opt, ftiraifxi,
i/xT,!/.] Other
ut. pass. ^17^1^"
flp^a, erp7M«'.
pVpl". ?PX*T» >
at. Al9o[«p7«»
1
so r<rK«.l See
and ii€K\v
drive, tnarch, f.
^Xoiaai lion, and
011.1; ■fj\aadfirfi<.
'E\i'yX«. f-on/i'^e, Ae'7{a., ^Ae7fa, i\'f)\(ynai (§97,4), ii\4yxer)v, i\tyxH-
(TOfiai.
'EXUr«rw and dXlo-o-w (eAt^-), roll, iXl^w, eUtJo, e'l^iynat, fiXlxdriv; [Epic
e\f{o/uaJ, i\i^dfir)v'} (4.)
"EXkw (late Akuw), pull, ?\{w (rarely AkiJo-w), eV\«u<ro, fUnvKa, ftXKvanat,
(l\Kiaer}y. § 104.
CEXtrta, cause <o Ao/>e, 2 p, ^oAiro, hope; 2 plpf. idhirftv. § 109, 3. Mid.
K\iroij.ai, hope. Epic]
'E\k^ia, vomit, fut. i/xu (rare), iixov/mai; aor. fifitaa. § 109, 1, N. 2.
'E|fciroXau, traffic, i/xvoXitau, &c. regular. Augm. ^/utt- or ivfn.it-. § 106,
1, N. 3.
'EvaCpM (iv&p-), kill, [Ep, a. m. ivnp(inr)v,'] 2 a. ^Ji/fipoi.. Poetic. (4.)
'Ev^irtt {iv and stem <r67r-) or ivvittw, say, tell, [Ep. f . ivi-iTiri\ffw and (viy^u ;]
2 a. Hvt-ffvov, w. imper. Uptaire [Ep. ^i/fo-Tres], inf. ^i/jcireii/ [Ep. -f/t**'']
Poetic. See dvoy. (8.)
['EvT)Vo9(, defect. 2 pf., s<Y, //e on, (also past). Epic] See iivfivoef.
'Evtirrw (^mw-). chide, [Ep. also ivlovu, 2 a. ivevlvou and ^fliraTrov, § 100,
N.4.] (3.)
"Evvviiii (€- for Fta-), ves-tio, clothe, pres. act. only in comp. [f. eVaw, a.
Hacra, p. eV/uoi] or eT/ia»; [l(r<re(jUT;i' or lecrir-.] In comp. -c(ra>, -cVa,
'iadfxriv. Chiefly Epic : afi<pi-fvvvfu is the common form in prose. (II.)
'EvoxXc'm, harass, yr. double augment; iiv^x^''"''> ^i'oxM<^<^< ^i'<>>x^^<''a>
TJvc^xAiJMa'- § 106, 1, N. 3.
'Eopro^u (iopToS-), Ion. ipT<{fa», keep festival ; impf. WpToCoi'. § 104,
Note 1. (4.)
'Eiravp/«i> and ^iravpUrKca (aup-), both rare, enjoy, [f. ^iravp^a-o/xat,] a.
iirrivpdfiriv, 2 a. innvpSfirfv, [Dor. and Ep. ^iroCpoj'.] Chiefly poetic
(6. 7.)
'EirC(rra|iai, understand, imp. iiiriard/x-nv, f. iirurT'fiffOfx<ii, a. ^rt(rT/jff?;r ;
pres. ind. 2 p. poetic Marcf [Ion. ^ir/ffxeat.] (Not to be confounded
with forms of 4<pLan"niJLi.) (I.)
"Eirw ((Tifir-), be after or 6usy wj^A, imp. eJirov, f. -ei^w, 2 a. -tffirov (for
*-o€ir-oi»), [a. p. it*pi-f«pd-nv Hdt.,] — all chiefly in comp. Mid. i'lrofiai
[and cViro/tat], foilow, imp. eiirSfiriv and e(i-($juT;f ; eif/o/iai; 2 a. kair6fa)v
and -iair6firiv, airufiai, &c., w. imp. [(rirero (for <rir6o),] avov.
"Epofuu, /o(^e, (dep.) poetic for ipdu ; r\pdaBi^v, ipaad'fiffOfiai, [^ifpa<rdfi7}v
Epic] (I.)
'Ep^otoiMU, work, do, augm. flp- (§ 104), ipydtrofiai, ftpyaafiai, etpydaOrfv,
'EpSo and ^pS** (FcpT-), 2t;orl-, do, tp^w, ep^a, [Ion. 2 p. ^opya, 2 plpf.
^P7eii/]. liiMMK and poetic. See ^lo. (8.)
i
340
APPENDIX.
!
I'^i
'EpcCSw, prop, iptlffu (later), iiptiffa, \-1fpfiKa', epT^prtffnai and ^pijp- with
ip-qpibarai and -oro, ) ^pelffdriv ; epdaofiai, ripdadfxijv.
'EptiKu {epiK-), tear, burst, rfpu^a, fp-^piyfxai, 2 a. iipiKou. Poetic. (2.)
'EpdiTM {epiir-), throw down, fp€i\f/u, i}p€i\l/a, [ipi^piira, have fallen, ip-^pm-
fiai], rjpeiipdrjv ; (2 a. 'ipnrov, -qplwqv ; a. m. •■^p€t\f>apLrjv.\ (2.)
'Epivtro (fper-), strike, row, [Ep. aor. rfpeja.] § 108, iv. 1, Note. (4.)
I 'EpiSaCvM, contend, for /p/fw ; aor. m. inf. epiSififfaadai, Epic. |
'EpCtw {ipiS'), contend, -^piaa, \-npi(Tdp.iiv Epic.) (4.)
VEpoiuii (rare or ?) (ion. (Cpo|iai, Ep. ipiu or <p<o|iai], for epurdw, ask,
fut. (p-fioopMi [Ion. elpi)ffop.ai\, 2 a. ripbp.t]v. See i)ipo)Mii.
"EpifM, creep, imp. elpvov ; fut. f/)^w. Poetic. § 104, N. 2.
y "Eppu, go to destruction, (t-) tppiiau, -oppv^a, ■ijpp'nKa.
'Epvyy&vn (fpvy-), eruct, 2 a -npvyov. (5.) jlon. <VfiWo/zoj, fpfiJ^o/iat. (2.)]
'EpwKw, hold hack, |Ep. f. f/)«;^«,] ^pu^a, fEp. 2 a. ^/)i;/ca/^ov. ]
[*EpiJw and clpvw, draw, fut. i>Jfw, aor. dpvaa and ?/)u(ra, i)f. p. ttpvfxai and
er/juff/uot. Mid. {pi>o|iai, and clpvo)iai, take under one's protection, ipiao-
tuu and tip-, epvadfirfv and fipvadpLttv ; witli Horn, forms of pres. and inipf.
flpdaru (u), fpvffo, tpOro and etpOro, rlpwro, tpmOai and (tpvadai, which
are sometimes called perf. and plpf. Epic] See ^vo|iai.
S "EpxoF^ci^ {iXid-, eXevd-), go, come, f iXevaofxai (Ion. and poet.), 2 p. fXi}-
\v0a fEp. €\i^\ov0a and ffX^Xoi/^a], 2 a. i}Xdo»' (poet. ^Xu^ok). In Attic
^rose, cl/it ia used for (XeOaofiai (§ 200, Note 3). (8.)
*E(r9(ii>, also (orOw and (8w (0a7-), edo, eat, fut. IdofAai, p. idi^Soxa, iS^St-
fffiai [Ep. e5iJ8o/iot], ij84ff6r^v ; 2 a. ttftayov ; [Epic pres. inf. f S/tewt ; 2
perf. part, ebrjdws ] (8. )
'EimAw, /cas<, augment fJcrt- (§ 104).
EvSw, s^ccp, impf. eSSou or ijSSoi' (§ 103, N.) ; (c-) eyS^Wj [-eiiSTiaa]. Com-
monly in Ka9-<v8w. § 109, 8.
Einpyerio, do good, (itpyeTT^ffw, &c. regular : sometimes augmented eir/py.
(§ 105, 2).
V EdpCcKW (fwp-), ^»<?, («-) (ip-^ffu, tCpTjKa, etip-qp.ai, evpiOvjv, evpedriaopai ;
2 a. e&poi', (ip6nriv. Sometiir^js augmented rii/p- (§ 103, Note). § 109,
1, N. 2 (b.) (6.)
Ei(|>paCv(i> (eiKf>pav-), cheer, f. fixppapQ ; a. eCtftpdva (or r]6<pp-), [Ion. also
€v<f)pT]va ;] a. p. eixftpdvdrfv (or T)S<f>p-), f. p. ev<f>pav0:^(TOfiai ; f. m. i'u<ppa-
vcvixai. § 103, Note. (4.)
**^Tix» (fffX*)* ^vc, imp. eTxo»' ; ^^w or (rxi}o"w, eaxv^o-t f<''X'7M"*> f^X^^'Z''
(chiefly Ion.); 2 a. eax°^ (for ^"'''":"X"°*')» <''X'^» (Txoir^v (-(txoi/xOj <''X^5»
(rXf"', <rx<i»' ; ix»et. fffx^Oov, &c. ; [Honi. pf. part, (rw-oxo/ciis, plpf. eV-
(iXft''"o> ^^'■^ «^M<.] Mid. fx*>l'^''> <'*^*«fl' io, l^ofiai and axT^iffOfmi, eirx^'
HW (8.)
'Et|rw, cooA;, (<-) ei^riffci and i^-^Ofiai, ijyl/rjaa- [■tjyf/riij.ai, r)\l/ij0rjy.]
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
341
flPVP-
with
c.
(2.)
len,
ip'flfiiUi-
)
ote.
(4)
1
^ Z6m, live, w. fn»f fPi &C' (§ 98, N. 2); impf. Ifwi' and ffTji' ; j^i/jeu, .f^o-
' /UK, ff»^ro, il^riKa. Ion. fww.
^ ZfVYW|fci (ifiv- «f- jug-utn), 2/oA:c, fciy^w, ^feufa, ei^tvyfuti, e^tx'ixBriv ; 2. a.
p. fi>577,i.. (2. II. )
Z4w, 6oi/, poet. |((C(i», fV(rw ; ^fftra, [-effff/iaj Ion, J.
Zuvw|ii (fw), jfiVrf, efuKra, efwrr/xat, i^wffdixriv. (II.)
pwrio), ask,
i5$o/xftt. (2.)1
>. (tpiifMi and
cc<('o?i, epiJff fl-
ea, and impf
>y<r^ot, which
t.), 2 p. «M-
,m). In Attic
HdoKa, c3i^S€-
if, IS/acwt ; 2
tJSijffa]. Com-
tnented eiripy.
ei/ptdriaopai ;
ote). § 109,
.), [Ion. also
; f. m. evippa-
Kiis, plpf- «"■-
xiiffOfMi, co'X^'
^ "HSojMu, Ac /)/eascrf, 1766/Liiji'; riffdrju, 7\<idr)aopxLi, [aor. m. ij'oraro EpicJ. Tho
act. <j8«, w. impf. ^Soj/, aor. ^aa, occurs rarely.
^'Hfiai, siY ; see § 1 27.
*H|fci, say, chiefly in imperf. fjv 8' iydi, mid I, and fj 3' 6%, said he (§ 1.51,
Note 3). [Epic ^ (alone), he said.'] 'H/it, T say, collofjuial. See
tt>VpX.
*H|ft^, bow, sink, aor. ijuvva, [pf. vw-e/wt^-fivKe (for -ffi-rifivKe, § 102) Horn.].
Poetic, chiefly Epic.
1
OdXXtt (^o\-), bloom, [2 perf. riOriKa (as present), plpf. TeOrfKciv.'] (4.)
[8do|Uii, j)r«2C «<, admire, Doric for dedoAiai, Ion. dr\iop.at ; ddo-o/iat, eddffd-
firiv (Hum. opt. ^T/ffa/or').]
[Odo|uii, mi7i*, inf. driadai., aor. idTtffdfir}v. Epic]
(0air- or to*^, for Oa<f»-), astonish, stem with [2 perf. riOifira, am aston-
ished, Epic plpf. eredriirea; 2 a. tTa<f>ov, also intransitive.] § 17, 2, Note.
\ @dirrc» {Ta<i»- for ^a0-), ftMr;/, i^d^w, ida.\pa, ridap-ixai, [Ion. iddtpdriv,
rare ;] 2 a. p. irdtpriv ; 2 fut. ra^^ffojiiat ; fut. pf. rc^d^o/itai. § 17, 2,
Note. (3.)
0(£vt» (^cv-), s?u/^c, BevQ, (deipa ; 2 a. (deuov. (4.)
\ 0^tt, t«is^, (€-) OeXriffta, idiXrjaa (not in indie.) ; see i9(K(ii.
0{po|fcak, warm one's self, [fut. dipaofiai, 2 a. p. (^d^/)7}c) subj. depiw
Chiefly Epic]
^^ 0(tt {dv-), rM?i,«fut. eciaojiai. § 108, II. 2. (2.)
©ifydvw (^17-), touch, Ol^ofmi or Te0i^o/xai (?), 2 a. W1701'. (5.)
[OXoM, bruise, dXiaw, fdXaaa, T^OXaafULi, id\d<T0r)v. ionic and poetic]
eXfptt (dXtiS-), squeeze, OM^I/w, #^Xt^o, jr^^Xi^a late,] Tf'^Xt/*juat, c^Xt^^Tji/;
ieup-nv ; [fut m. eUypopai, , Horn.]. (2.)
'(!
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
1.1
|so "^"i il^H
>u Ui2 12.2
li£
'•2^r-^ii^
<
6"
^
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STRUT
wnSTIR.N.Y. MSM
(716) •72-4903
M
<>#:
V
^
4^
;\
7^
^IMflrr ■ '^
342
APPENDIX.
;!.<{ ' !
^Svijo-Kw (^dfi'-, 6vdC-)y die, davovixat, ridvriKa ; fut. pf. TiBvii^ta^ § 110, iv. (c),
N. 2, or TedvT^io/jiai; 2 a. idavov ; 2 p. (Wdma) § 125, 4, part, redvttbi
[Horn. Tfdvrn!)i\. In Attic prose always airo-dapovfiai and a,ir-ida»ov. (6.)
6pd<r<r(i> and Opdrru (rpdfx-> ^P^X-)> disturb, aor. fdpaia, i6pdx0ri» (rare);
[p. rirprixa, be disturbed, plpf. Terpjfxfw, Horn.] See rap&aaa. (4.)
OpavM, bruise, dpaiau, idpavaa, TiOpavafiai and HOpavfiai, idpaiffBrjv.
§ 109, 2. Chiefly poetic.
Opvirrctf {Tpij<f>- for ^/)u0-)f ctmsA, (Opvipa, TiBpvfjL/Mi, idpvtpdrjp [Ep. 2 a. p.
-iTpij<l>riv\, epij\f/oiJMt. § 17, 2, Note. (3.)
0pwc!-K«» (dop-, 6po-), leap, fut. Oopov/xai, 2 a. iOopov. Chiefly jtoetic. (6.)
* 0v« (v), sacrifice, imp. iOvov ; diJ<rw (iJ), ^^fca, ridiSKa, ridSfMi, irijdijp
(u), dtiooiuu, €dvadp.r}». § 17, 2, Note.
Ovw or 6vvc» (i*), rage, rush. Poetic: classic only in present and imperfect.
I.
'IdXVtt (^a\-), send, fut. -iaXw, [Ep. aor. trjj\a.\ Poetic. (4.)
l*Idx«*i shout, t&xop ', 2 pf. {taxa) dfupuixvia. Poetic, chiefly Epic]
'I8ptf«a, place, ISpoaw, iSpiiffa, tdpvKa, tSpvfuu, ISpifdriv, [or idpOvOrju, chiefly
Epic]; iSpriaofMi, ISpvadfir^v.
'Itc* (IS-), seat or sit, mid. tt^^H^W ^^> used chiefly in KaO-L^w, which see.
See also ^(wi. (4.)
"Iijlii (c-), send; see § 127. (I.)
V'IkWo|Uu (Ik-), poet. Uut, coine, t^ofiai, ly/iat ; 2 a. Uofiifv. In prose usu-
ally d<f>-iKv4ofMt, From iku, [Ep. imp. Ikov, 2 a. l^ov, § 119, 8. J (5.)
\'IXairKO|&ai [Ep. IXdoftai] (IXa-), propitiate, IXdao/Mi, IXdfrdriv, IXavd-
firiv. (6.)
["IXtiIU, be propitious, pres. only imper. tXridi or tXadi ; pf. subj. and opt.
IXi^Kw, IXriKoim (Hom.). Poetic, chiefly Epic] (I.)
1XX<i> and tXXo|iai, roll, for elXXw. See cIX^m.
'Iiuivo-w (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), lash, aor. tfiaaa. (4.) ^
Iirrafiat (tto-), ^%, impf. Iwrdfiriv ; 2 a. m. itrTdntiv. Active 2 a. Iirrijv
w. pt. irrds. csee ir{TO|/iai. (I.)
["Iirdifci, Doric for olSa, know.^
["ImcM : for synopsis and inflection see itvKU).]
"IoTTi|ii (ffTo-), set, place: see, for synopsis and inflection, ^ 123. (I.)
'I<r\vaCvtt» (laxvaiv-), make lean or dry, fut. iaxvavCi, aor. taxvava [tl^x"'?*^
Ion.], a. p. Iffxvdvdrjv ; fut. m. l<rxvavoCnai. (4.)
"Io-x«* (for <rt-<rexw, {<rxw), Aavc, AoW, redupl. for ^x" (<'^*X"<^)« See lx«».
I. I
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
343
iv. (c),
reOvedit
'ov. (6')
V (rare);
(4.)
pavffdriv.
». 2 a. p.
tic. (6.)
u, iTiidiiv
imperfect.
pic]
9nv, chiefly
which see.
prose ustt-
8.1 (5.)
Jiji>, IXaffd-
Lj. and opt.
2 a. llTTTJI'
23. (I.)
I. See lx«'
Ka6a(p«» (xa^a/}-)* puri/y, KaBapw, iKddripa and ixdddpa, KeitiBapfuUt
iKaftdpdrjv ; xa^apoD/MK, iKadiipd/iriv. (4.)
Ka6-^0)iai (ed-)> ^^'^ t^oum, imp. iKadeibiaiv^ f. xadeSovAiat. See f|;o|MU.
Ka6cv8», sleep, imp. ^Kddevdoi' and xadi^CSov [Epic Kadevhov], § 103, Note ;
fut. (c-) Ka.e€v8-fi<T(a (§ 109, 8). See ciiSw.
Ka9Cl», set, sU, f. Ka^tw (for Kadlau), Kadii'T^aofMt ; a. iKddXaa or Kft^ira,
fKadurdftrfv. See t^w. For KdOrifiai, see '?||uu.
Kalvv|iai for Ka8-vvfmi {Ka8-), excel, p. KiKavfiai [Dor. KexaS-fi^vosJ. (11.)
Ka(vw (xdv-), A:iW, f. xai'w, 2 a. tKOvov, 2 p. KiKOva. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
Ka£u (xau-), or xdw, ftMni; /cojJaw ; iKavaa, poet. Ixca [Epic e/cTja] ; -Ki-
KavKa, K^Kavfun, iKa60r}v, Kavdi, ofxai, [2 a. iKdify ;] fut. mid. KadffOfMi
(rare). (4.) •
KaX^o (KoXe-, k\€-), call, f. koKu (rarely KoK^aw) ; iKdXeaa, K^KXriKa, Ki-
KKrifJMi (opt. Kekkyo, KCKXifieda), iKkiidriv, KXridriao/iai ; fut. m. KoKov/Mt,
a. exaX60-d/x7;i' ; fut. pf. k€k\t^(toiuu. § 109, 1, N. 2; § 118, 1, N.
KoXvirrc* (icaXv/3-), cover, xaXtifw, indXvxf^a, KCKdXvufiai, iKaXi<f>Orjiv, KaXv-
4»di^ofmi ; aor. m. iKoXvyf/afiriv. In prose chiefly in compounds. (3.)
Kd|iVA> (Ka/t-), labor, KafMvfmi, KiK/xriKa [Ep. part, kck/xtjc^s] ; 2 a. iK&fiov,
[Ep. ^Ka/u6/u);i'.] (5.)
Kd|fcirT«* (xajuTr-), band, Kdn\J/u, €Ka|l\|/a^ KiKanfAai (§ 16, 3, N.; § 97, N. 3),
iKdfi<j>6i)p. (3.)
KaTi)Y>p^t accuse, regular except in emission of the augment, Kartryb-
povv, &c. See § 105, 1, N. 2.
[(Kcuj)-), paiU, stem with Horn. perf. part. MKaifnidi ; cf. Tedyridts.]
[K<8dwv|U, Ep. for ffKeddwvfii, scatter, iKiSaaaa, iKeddffdriv.] (II.)
Kci|iai, lie, Ketaopxti; see § 127.
KcCpo (<cep-)> shear, f. Kepw, a. IlKeipa [poet, ^ife/woj, KiKap/uu, [(iKipdriv)
Kepdeii ; 2 a. p. iKdptiv ;] f. m. xepoO/uu, a. m. iKeipdtirjv [w. poet. part.
K€p<rdiJLevoi.] (4.)
[K^KoSov, deprived of, caused to leave, K€Kaibp.riv, retired, KCKudi^w, sJutll de-
prive, reduplicated Horn, forms of x'^t<>>-] § 100, N. 3. See x&Xiu.
KcXcvM, command, KeXeiffw, iKiXevaa, K€KiXevKa, K€K4X€v<rpai, iKcXeOirdriif,
§ 109, 2. Mid. chiefly in compounds.
K^XXm (kcX-), land, K^Xcrw, CKcXaa. Poetic. See jk^XXm. (4.) .
K^O|uu, order, [Ep. (c-) KfXi^aonai, iK€Xr]<rdfji.r)v ; 2 a. m. KeK\6p.iiv or
iKCKXdfivy (§ 100, N. 3).] See § 110, v. N. 2. Chiefly Epic.
KcvWm, prick, xcvnjffw, iKivT-qaa, {KiKimrniat. Ion., iKcvrifi-qv later, <nry-
KcvTt)6iiaopjan Hdt.J. [Horn. aor. inf. Kivaai, from stem Ktvr-. (7.)]
K<pdvvv|u (xe/oa-, x/xi-), 7»ia;, hipdaa [Ion. hpriva], KiKpapai [Ion. •i/MatJ,
■I
,!'
11
{! '
I
If
lit,
1/
P
I:''
344
APPENDIX.
i !
li; 'ti
iiepdBriu [Ion. -i^riv] and iKtpivBifv ; f. pass. KpaBi/jvofuu ; a. m. ixtpaad'
firiv. (II.)
Kip8a(vtt {KepSdv-), gain, f. KcpSavw [Ion. KepSavdu and KepST^o/uat], ^K^p>
Sdra [Ion. -i^ra or rjaa], -KexipdriKa {Kepdi-, § 109, 6). (4.)
KcilO« IkvS-), hide, Ke6<ru, [hevaa ;] 2 p. Kixevda (as pres.) ; [£p. 2 a.
Ki$0oy, subj. KeKi$(7w.] (2.)
Kt(8« (ivdfd-)* v«a;> («•) [Ktidi^aw, -iK-ffirfffa ; 2 p. K^xi^Sa]. Mid. xi^doAiaf,
sorrow, iKtiSeadfiriv, [£p. fut. pf. iceicadi^ofiat.] (2.)
Ki|pilatrM (ici^pvK-)* proclaim, Kfipi^w, iKi^pv^a, KCKi/ipvxa', KCKi^pvy/Mu, iKif
p^Oifv, KtipvxSi^otuu ; Kiipi^ofMt, eKnipv^dnfiv. (4.)
[K(8yi||u, spread. Ion. and poetic for aKcSdwviu.] (L)
[Kfvv|iai, mov0, pres. and imp. ; as mid. of KiWw. Epic] (II.)
K{pvi)|u and m^vdn: see K^dwv|u.
. Ktxdvc* (kix-), find, (i-) wxijo-o/toi, [Ep. iKtxV(^if-w] i 2 a. ^jctxoi' [and inl-
XV like eo-Tiji/]. Poetic. (5.)
K'XPIF (X/>*-)» lend, [xp'^<>> Hdt.l HxPV^'^i KixPVf^a* i ^xpWm'?''. (I.)
KXdt« («c\o77-, k\Sy-), clang, K\dy^<a, ikXay^a ; 2 p. K^KXayya [Ep. *c^-
xXiryo, part. iceifXt^yoiTes;] 2 a. ikXayov; fut. pf. «r6icXd7{oAuu. (4.)
KXoCm and tcXdw (kXou-), u;eep, KKaiaofuu (rarely KXawoO/Mi, sometimes
K\ai-^w or KXaiJMTu), IxXavtra and ^icXavo'd/ii}i>, KiKXavfuu; fut. pf. (im-
pers.) K€K\a6ffeTai. (4.) .
KX^, dreo^, ikX&aa, K4k\a<rtuu, iKKdadrpt; [2 a. pt. trXds.] § 109, 2.
ElXcUt, shut, KKtlau, iKXeura, KikXeifMi or k4k\€i<tp,cu, iKXelaOriv, k\€ut6i^o-
fuu; fut. pf. K€K\elaofi,at; a. m. iKXeurd/iijv. [Ion. pres. KXi]{«», ^KXi}t<ra,
irejvXi^'uat, ikXrilffdriv or ^kXi;^^)}^.] Older Attic KX|j<», kX^w, fxXgo'a,
-K^»cX]j/co, K^icXjj/btai, -iKKjiadriv.
KX^irro {kKcw-'), steal, kX^^w (rarely K\4\l/oiiat), HkXerl/a, KixXo^a, k^-
ifXe/i/xat, (iK\iif>eriv) <fXe0tfcfs; 2 a. p. ^/cXdinji*. § 109, 3, N. 2. (3.)
KXivM (KXrv-), Jcnrf, incline, kXivu, iK\i»a, [x^icXtico, later,] k^kXiucu, ^kXI-
Bifv [Ep. ^*cX(i'di7i'], KKXe-fyroiuu ; 2 a. p. iKKlvijv, f. *cXii'iJ<ro/tot ; fut. m. (cXt-
vovpum, a. €K\ivdfirf». § 109, 6. (4.)
KXiMv, Aear, imp. t^cXvoi' (as aor.) ; 2 a. imper. kKOBi, k\St€ [Ep. xiKXvdi,
KiKXvre], Poetic.
KvcUtt, «(Tape (in compos.), -Kvaliru, -hvavTa, -KiKvaiKa, -K^Kvaurnat, -iKval-
C01IV, -Kvaurd-fyroiMi. Also Kvdc», with oe, 017 contracted to 17, and oet,
auto];(§98, N. 2).
K6im» (*coir-), cm/, «t6^w, tKoyf/a, -K^Koipa [2 p. iceKoirc^s Epic], K^KOfifMi ;
2 aor. p. eKoirriy, 2 fut. p. Kowi^ofuu ; fut. pf. 'KtKb^ofuu ; aor. m. «(co-
^dimv. (3.)
Kof>Mrii|ii (Kop6-)> satiate, [f. Kopiou Hdt., irop^w Horn.,] iKhpeva, kckI^
ptff/jMi [Ion. -i^MaO' eKopiffdriv'f [Ep. 2 p. pt. KeKopi}(6s, a. m. hopeffd'
f^W'] (n.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
345
Ep. 2 a.
KI^OfMUf
fiuu, ixri*
)
V [and ^»c(-
,ijv. (1)
» [Ep. Ki-
(4.)
sometimes
It. pf. (im-
109, 2.
Cm, ^icXiiiffo,
rw, IkXb<to,
^(cXo^a, K^
2. (3.)
cXiM<u> ^fXf-
'ut. m. »cXt-
Ep. it^fcXSfft,
(T/tOt, -^»CVO(-
i;, and aef»
], KiKOfjifMi ;
aor. m. tM-
m. itcopeffi-
Kopilovtt (xopi/^-), arm, [aor. Kbpwat and Kopvffffdnevos (Horn.), pf. p. kc-
Kopv^/u^cos.] Poetic, chiefly Epic. (4.)
[KoT^o, be angry, aor. eKbreaa, iKoreadfiijv, 2 pf. pt. KeKorrnis, angry,
Epic]
Kpdt«» (K/)a7-)> cry ou<, fut. pf. KeKpd^o/mi (rare), 2 pf. K^Kpdya (imper. k4-
KpaxOt), 2 a. -iKpayov. (4.)
KpaCvtt (Kpav-), accomplish, xpavu, fKpdva [Ion. ^xpi^ra], inpdvBriv, KpavBi)-
aopxu ; f. m. Kpavov/iai ; p. p. 3 sing. K^Kpavrai (cf. iritpavrai, § 97,
Note 3, (2). Ionic and poetic. [Epic KpaiaCvctf, aor. iKpi^ifva, pf. and pip.
KCKpdam-ai and KtKpdavro ; iKpddvdtfv (Theoc.).] (4.)
Kp{|ia|uu, hang, (in trans.), Kpep-iiaotiu. (I.)
Kpf)idvvv|u (Kpeua-), hang, (trans.), Kpep-d (for KpepAaw), iKpipuava, iKpcp.d-
adrfv ; [e'icpe/ioffo/iiji'.] (II.)
Kpij|iVT||ii, stispend, mid. Kpiipv&p.ai ; only in pres. and impf. Poetic. (I. )
Kp£(«> (fptv-), creak, squeak, [2 a. {(KpiKou) 5> sing, /fpficc;] 2 p. {K^Kplya)
KeKptyhra, sqiieaking. (4.)
KpCvM {xpXv-), judge, f. icpti'w, iKplva, KixpiKa, KiKpXp.ai, iKptdrju [Ep. ^Kpfi*-
Ctiv], Kpi6i^o/JMi ; fut. m. KpXvoviMi, a. m. [Ep. ^/cpti'd/ii^v.] § 109, 6.
(4.)
KpovM, beat, Kpoitrta, (Kpovaa, K^Kpovxa, -KiKpovpuai and -KiKpovffpxu, iKpoi-
adriv ; -Kpoiffo/uu, iKpovadpLifv.
KptSnrw, (KpSP; Kpv<p-), conceal, Kpii\f/(a, &c. regular; 2 a. p. ixpiiiprjv (rare),
2 f. Kpv<P'fyronai or Kpvp-^<Top,ai. (3.)
KrdoiMU, acquire, ktt^opmi, iKTrjadpifv, KiKrrjpxu or iKrrinat, possess (sulj.
KfKT&iMt, opt. KeKTTi/irjv or »te*cT^r;»'), iKT-^Orp' (as pass.); KCKT-ffaopat
(rarely ^kt-;, shall possess. § 118, 1, Note.
KtcCvo* (ifrev-), KW, f. icro'w [Ion. icreviu), Ep. also Kray^w], a. ficrttva,
(p. #«fro7KO, rare), 2 p. ficrova ; [Ep. iicrddrjv ;] 2 a. (ktSvop ((ktSp poet.
§ 125, 3); 2 a. m. poet. iKrdfiriv (as pass.) ; [Ep. fut. m. -KTaveopui.]
§ 109, 3, 4 (w. N. 1), 5. In Attic prose diroKTelvw is generally used. (4.)
Kt((oi (ktiS-), found, icrtau, (KTitra, (KTtapxu, iKTlaOriv ; [aor. m. iKritrd-
ftr,» (rare)]. (4.)
KtCwviii and KTivmfw, in compos., only pres. and impf. See ktcCva). (II.)
Ktvit^m (/cruT-), sound, cause to sound, iKT&irifaa, [2 a. (Krifirop.] (7.)
KvXftti, more frequently icvXCvSw or KvXivS^M, roll, MXiffa, KeKHiXurpxii,
iKvXlffdtfv, •KvKiaO'^aopxu.
Kw^M (far-)* kiss, (injaa. (5.) npo<r-KvWM is generally regular.
Kvhtm (kv^-), stoop, Ki\p<a and Kiiyj/op-ai, aor. CKV^a, pf. k^kv^. f^^
KiSpcA, )>tce^, c^nc«, Kipata, tKvp<ra. Kvp^w is regular.
I
346
APPENDIX.
1 lii
till
ii *i
' If
Anyx&vo (Xcfx-)> obtain bij lot, Xi)fo/«it [Ion. Xd^o/iai], eCKrixa, [Ion. and
poet. X^Xo7xa,] (jetXjjyfMi) el\'))yfji^vos, iXiix^W > 2 a. iX&xov [Ep.
XeX-]. (5.)
AafiPdvo (Xdf/9-), ^aA:e, \i^\f/o/Mi, efXij^a, etXijfifMi (poet. XAi^ju/Mtt), eXi}-
^077v, \ri<pdT^(TOfmi ; 2 a. eXapov, eXapdfirjv [Ep. inf. XcXa/S^trdat.] [Ion.
Xdfirf/ofMi, XeXd^riKa, XiXa/i/Mi, iXdfi<pdr]v ; Dor. fut. Xd^oC/utt.] (5.)
Ad|iirM, shine, Xd/t^o;, iXaju^a^ 2 pf. XAa/xira ; fut. m. -Xd/u^o/tat Hdt.].
AavOdvw (Xad-),poet. XiJ^w, lie hid, escape the notice of (some one), X7j<rw,
[l\7j<roJ, 2 p. X^X»j6'o [Dor. XAd^o,] 2 a. IXotfoi/ [Ep. XAofloi'.] Mid.
forget, X'^ao/Mt, XiXijfffiai [Horn, -afffmi], fut. pf. XeXi^tro/xat, 2 a. iXa$6-
Uriv [Ep. XeXa^6/ATji'.] (5.)
AdcTKM for XaK-cTKW (Xcik-), speak, (c-) XaKi}(rojuat, eXdKijtra, 2 p. X^Xdjca
[Ep. XA)7Ka w. fern. part. XeXoCKVia :] 2 a. ^XoCkqv [XeXaKdfitjv]. Poetic.
§ 108, vi. N. 3. (6.)
[Ad«0, XQ, wish, X^j, X^, &c.; Infin. X^i*. § 98, N. 2. Doric]
Aiya, say, Xi^u, eXe^a, X^Xe7/«ii {Si-elXeyfiat), iX^x^V i fut. Xex^tJco/mh,
Xi^ofjMi, XeXi^oiJMi, all passive. For pf. act. etpriKa is used (see ctirov).
Afyw, gatJier, arrange, count (Attic only in conip.), Xi^u, (Xe^a, ftXoxa,
etXeyuMi or X^Xeyfuii, iXdx^rjv (rare) ; 2 a. p. iXiynv, f. Xeyi^aofiat. |ti a.
m. iXiyfijjp (X^KTo, imper. X^^o, inf. X^x^ai, pt. X^/icvos)]. [The Horn.
fonns X^^o/iat, eXe^dfiriv, IXe^a, and eXiyfiriy, in the sense ^m< /o rcii, rest,
are generally referred to stem Xex-, whence X^xos> ^c-j
AcCiTM (XtTT-), ^cavc, Xef/'w, X^XeififMi, €XeL<pdr)v ; 2 p. XAotiro ; 2 a. ^XtTOP,
iXivSfivv. See § 95 and § 96. (2.)
[AcXCif)|iai, part. XeXnuxivos, eager (Horn.). J
Acvo, stone, generally Kara-XeOu ; -XeOau, -eXevffa, eXe6<Tdriv, -Xevadi^aoiMi,
§ 109, 2.
Aijdw, poetic : see Xav6dv».
Ai)t|;a> (Xiji'S-), plunder, act. rare, only impf. eXi^'foi'. Mid. Xi|t{o|uu (as
act.), [fut. Xrftffofiai, aor. eXi^iitrd/u.i;!', Ion.]. Eurip. has iX-gffdiiijv, and
pf. p. XAjjcr/xot. (4.)
AUroropiai or (rare) XCtoimh (Xit-), supplicate, [iXiffdnijv, 2 a. eXtri/iiji'].
[Ao^o, Epic for Xo«Ja> ; XoiaaofMi., iXdeaaa, eXoeaad/JLTjP.]
Aowa or \6(ii wash, regular. In Attic writers and Herod, the pres. and
inj])erf. genei-ally have contracted forms of X6w, as eXov, eXovfuv, XoO-
juecos.
AtSM, loose, see § 95 and § 96 ; [Epic 2 a. m. Ai^jutjc (as pass.), Xi^o and
\0to ; pf. opt. XeXvTo or XeXOi^o, § 118, 1, Note.]
CATALO'GUE OF VERBS.
347
[Ion. and
■^ov [Ep.
xoi), cM-
,1.] [Ion.
1 (5)
xt Hdt.].
ne), XV«.
01/.] Mid.
2 a. iKo,db-
p. X^XoKa
»]. Poetic.
]
XfX^VoM*"*
(see ctirov).
e{a, €l!\oxo,
[The Horn.
to rent, rest,
; 2 a. ^Xtiroi',
Xcu(rdii<ro/wii.
Xi)tlo|iai (as
Xuffd/tT?!', and
€Xit6/atji'].
the pres. and
eXoviuv, XoiJ-
ss.). X«Jto and
M.
MaCvw (Mac-)* THacMen, a. l/ii}ra, 2 pf. /jJfiriva, am mad, 2 a. p. tfidprip.
Mid. |iaCvo|ias be mad, [fiavovfMi, efirivdfiriv.] (4.)
McUo)iai (/udf-), S0e^, fjuivofMi, e/Mtrdfirfv. Chiefly Epic. See § 108, iv. 3,
Note, and fiao/mi. (4.)
MavOdvM inX6-), learn, («-) nadi^aonai, fienddriKa ; 2 a. (fiadov. (5.)
M4o|MU, only in contract form [/lufuu (imper. fi^o or nQao, inf. nQadai,]
pt. nd>ixevos), desire eagerly ; 2 p. {ftinaa) § 125, 4 [part. fie/Muis (-wros
or -6ro$).] A second p. isAfiova (jiev-) supplies the singular of (jiifMo).
Mdpva|i.ai, fight (subj. ndpuwfiat, imp. fidprno); a. efiapvdadriy. Poetic.
(I.)
Mdpirru (/uapTr-), seize, ndp\j/(i>, ^ftap^a [2 pf. yAitapva Epic]. Poetic. (3.)
Mdo-CM (imy-), knead, nd^w, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. ifudyriv. (4.)
Mdxo|Uu [Ion. nax^ofuu], fight, f. /AaxoOfMi [Hdt. iiaxi<rop.ai, Horn, jmc
Xionai or /Mixi)<ro/Mi(], p. /lejudxir/tutt, a. €fiaxe<rdiJ.riv [Ep. also ifiax'Vd'
firfv ; Ep. pres. part. juaxet^Mcos or /uaxeot^/uevos].
[M48o)iai, </itn^ o/*, /j^an, («-) fuSi^ofmi (rare). Epic]
Mc6-£i||u, send away; see Sfij/iu (§ 127). [Hdt. pf. pt. /Mjuert/x^fos.]
McOvoTKAi (fiedi/-), make drunk, kfuidvaa, kpxdiedtiv. See (uOuu. (6.)
Mc6d«>, 6e drunk, only pres. and impf.
Mc(po)fc(u (jiep-), obtain, [Ep. 2 pf. 3 sing, en/iope ;] impers. el/taprat, t^ is
fated, tltMpiUyi) (as subst.), Fate. (4.)
MJXXw, intend, augm. eju- or 17/1A-; (c-) /ueXXi^o-w, efiiWrfffa.
Mikn, concern, care for, (e-) /xcXiJo-w [Ep. /ueXi}(ro/ia(, 2 p. /u^/m^Xa]; juepi^-
XT^/iat [Ep. fjJfipXerai, ju^ju/SXero, for fiefiiXrirai, fie/JLiXriTo]; (^ifieXiidriv)
neXifdfli. f/UKn, it concerns, impers. ; fieXi/iaei, tfiiXriae, fxe/ii\riKe.
Mtl|Lova ifMv-), deiir 2 perf. with no present. § 109, 8. Ionic and poetic.
See ttdofiiai.
Mlm't remain, f. /uei>w [Ion. n^viia], ipxwa, (<-) yxiUmiKa.
M^Rp'l** (§ 108, iv. b, N. 1), ponder, [iMep/xripl^w, e/*cp/tti)ptio] (Attic
■ifxepfti^ptaa). Poetic. (4.)
Mij8o)fcai, devise, fii^ofiai, ifi7i<rdfirip. Poetic.
MT|Kdo|iai (hSk; iitiK-), bleat, [2 a. part. nSKiav ; 2 p. part. ixentiKtbi, ne-
fMKvta ; 2 pip. ifiifiTiKov.] Chiefly Epic. § 1 08, vii. Note. (2. 7.)
Mi|TtdM (Epic -6w), plan. Mid. |ii)Tldo)Jiai and |ii|Tto|iai (Pind.), /irrri'
ffofiai, efi7iTl<Tdnr)», Epic and Lyric] § 108, vii. Note. (7.)
MiaCvdi (fiidv-), stain, pnavd, e/jddm [Ion. eixlrjva], fiefilaa/iai, kfudvdijv.
I
!!
ii
f: It 1
,:i i i
1
, I,
348
APPENDIX.
M<YVV|u (Mi7-) and ffcCtryw, mix, /i/(w, ^Au^a, ftifuynai, ifdx(^w, fux^rjco-
fuii ; 2 a. p. ef^yvvt [^P* fut. /i yi^opuu ; 2 a. m. (fUKTo and /uxro ; fut.
pf. fUfU^oftai.] (II.)
Mi|ivij(rKM (fim-), remind; mid. remember; luHiata, iiuniaa, fUfuiri(uu,
remember f i/jw-fyrdrfv (as mid.) ; /junfffdT^onaif nrfyroiuu, luiurfyroiuu ; e/uvi;-
o'd/iiii}!' (poet.). M^|Mn()|iau (memini) has subj. fu/ufufMi, opt. .ie/tf^i/r
or fufu^fiiiv, imp. yuiiivifffo [Hdt. /u^/uyeo], inf. fJiciJuni<r0ai, pt. uttufqiiivot.
§ 118, 1, Note. (6.)
[From £p. fufdio/uu come kiwuwro, fivudfuvoSf kc] § 120, 1 (5).
MCoryw, mix, pres. and impf. See |ilYW|u.
Mv(«», suck, [Ion. /uv^t^w, aor. -e/ii/j'i^d-a (Hom.)J.
MiS(«» (mvy-)> grumbUt mvUer, aor. f/iv^a. Poetic. (4.)
MvKdofuu (Mi^'<-)i bellow, [{)p. 2 pf. fi4fivKa ; 2 a. /ui/koi' ;] invxvffdiJLrjv.
Chiefly poetic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.)
MvM, sAu< (^ 2ijM or «^e5), t»or. eftifaa, pf. fiifivKu.
N.
Naftt (va-), (2u«Z2, [twffffo, eraero'dAn?",] €vd<rdr}v. Poetic. § 108, iv. 3,
Note. (4.)
Ndmrtt (yaS-, vay-), «J%^, [ewifa,] vivaaimi or vivayfuu. (4.)
[NcucIm and vcikcU*, cAufe, vtiKivu, ivelKcaa. Ionic, chiefly Epic]
N^|UD, distribute, f. ye/tw, &e(/ua, («-) vepifjLTjKO, uev^firjiMt, heidfiyiv ; ve/toC-
/uit, cpeifidfiriv.
Nfo)uu, 90, come, or (as future) i/n'Z^ 90. Chiefly poetic.
1. N^ (1^), swim, 'Ivevffa, -vivevKO, ; f. m. part. vevaoOfuvoi. (2.)
2. Nla>, Aeop i(p, ^vi^ra, f^i^/tat or Wn^cr/uu, [^i^o-0i)i'.] [Ion.vf|^o, i/^tro,
vrfrjffai, kc]
3. Nto and v^Ow, spin, i'i70-(i), ^i'i7(ra, itnjdrfp ; [Ep. a. m. i^aain-o.]
N£{«i later yfurw (w/S-), wash, vlrf/u, ipi\f/a, vivift/xai, [•eV/^diji' ;] vl^oiiai,
evixl/dfirip. § 108, iv. (6), N. 2. (4.)
Nt(nro|uu (ctr), (jro, fut. tiaofiai (sometimes ultraofiai). Poetic. (4.)
No4m, think, perceive, vo-^w, &c., regular in Attic. [Ion. hunra, -vipuKa,
P^WfMl.] (7.)
No|itl« (po/uS-), believe, fut. po/uu [poiiiaa late], aor. epSfiiffa, pf. »ep6-
fdxa, vepbfuffiuut aor. p. epofUffBr/p, fut. p. pofwrd'^ofmi, (4.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
349
iKTo ; fut.
itat; e/Jfii-
nvxi^iiivy'
108, iv. 3,
ic]
(2.)
TO.]
ic. (4.)
rfaNTa, -vivtiKa,
ir(ra, pf. «'«^'
S<««, «Ta//c, [aor. ?fc<ro and f^(r«ro, chiefly Epic], t^eff/Mi. $ 109, 2.
StipcUvM ihpav), dry, ^vp^vw, e^ripdm [Ion. -ijw], c^i)po<rMoi and «fjj-
oan/Mi, f^tfpdvBriv. (4.)
'; ' , polish, i^vaa, l^wrfuu, i^iaOiiv ; aor. ni. e^vadnvv. § 109, 2.
O.
'OSovoi^w, wo*e a way, regular ; but pf. ^oirewofij/co (u>8oireirotij/i/i'ij).
So sometimes iiioiiropiia,travel.
('08v-), he angry, stem with only [Horn. CiBvadniiv, <53(i5i/<rAioi].
'Ol» (W-), smell, («-) (Sfjjffw (Ion. 6iV<rw], lifijao [Ion. difeo-o], 2 p. Mw8a
(late), [pip. d8c6deti/ Hom.J (4.)
Ot-yvviii and olyw, opcJi, ot^u, i^a [Ep. also fitfa], -ttfiyfiai, a. p. part.
o^X^e/s ; fut. pf. av-e^erai. See &v-oC'yw|fci. (H.)
OlS^M and olSdvu, sioell, [olSrjau (Ion.),] (jiSi^cra, ifidrjKa.
Olvoxo^M, ;)our ii7me, otVoxoT/o-w, oivox^ffa (Epic and Lyric). Impf. 3 p.
olvoxo^h V^ox6e(, c^fox^et.
Oto|iai, think, in prose generally ol/tat and ^i)v in 1 per. s. ; (t-)ol-fitroftai,
(fiflOriv. [Ep. act. otw (only 1 sing.)* often 6tu ; dtofMt, divdnriVf utaOriP.]
OCxo|iai, be gone, (<-) olxv<fOfiai, otxtima or <{^(i)Ka (with irreg. w for i;),
§ 109, 8, Note ; [Ion. otxviM^i or (^i7Mat, doubtful in Attic].
'Ok^XXm {6k€7\-), run ashore, aor. &Kei\a. Prose form of K^Wta. (4.)
'OXurOdvM, raraly ^Xter^affw (dXiad-), slip, [Ion. CSKlaOriaa, uiKLadnKay, 2 a.
OKiaBov. (5.)
"OXXviii (probably for iX-vu-^O rarely dWtfw (6\-), destroy, lose, f. 6\<3
[<}X^(r(i;, A^wJ, (&Xe(ra, -dXt^Xefca ; 2 p. tfXwXa, perish, 2 plpf. dXt&Xeto
(§ 102, Note 2). Mid. iWvfmi, perish, 6\ovfiai, 2 a. u>\6nrjv. In prose
generally &ir-6\\vfu. § 108, v. 4, Note 2. (11.)
"Ofiviiifct and ijivv» (6/u-, ^/lo-), swear, f. d/uoC/iat, d/xoaa, dfidifioKa, 6/xd)fiO'
fffiai (with d/ti6/iOTa(), ufiddrfv and ufidadv ; 6fio<rdrjffOfmi, a. m. -t^yuo-
ffdMi?!'. § 102, N. 2. (n.)
'0|fc5pYVV|i.i (6/io/yy-), w>«i«> ^f^op^u, 6/i6p^ofMi, &fJLop^a, wnop^dnijv; dir-
o/jLopxOeU. Chiefly poetic. (11.)
*Ov<Vi||fci (^"o-), benefit, dvriffu, Syvtiaa, thviiB-nv ', dvnffofMt ; 2 a. m. updfirjv
or (rare) (bvrnxrjv. [Horn, imper. 6vr}(ro, pt. ii/^/iews]. § 125, 2, N. 2. (I.)
["Ovoiioi, insult, (inflected like SlSofiai); 6v6aofmi, d)voadnr)i> (Ex*\c also
uvd/JLifv), 'ihydadriv. Ionic and poetic] (I.)
'Oiivo (d^vv-), sharpen, -d^vvio, &^vva, -^^vnnat, -Cf^ivOriv, [6^wdi/i<rofiai].
In prose only in compos. (4.)
•OirvUt (6irw-). marry, fut. irdau. § 108, iv. 3, N. Pres. <Jir«}w (doubt-
fill). (4.)
M
L-i
350
APPENDIX.
'Opdw (opa; oV-), see, imperf. iittpwv [Ion. &puy or &ptw ;] 6ypotuu, iiipaxa or
idpaxa, iJtpdfmi or Sffifiai, w<f>driv, 6(f>di)aoyiai ; 2 p. tirwira (loii. and poet.).
For 2 a. cldoi', &c., see <t8ov. [Horn. prc8. mid. 2 sing. 6pi^i.'\ (8.)
'OpYcUvtti ((J^eTi'-). ^ angry, aor. Htpiydva, enraged. Only in Tragedy. (4.^
*Op#y«», re«cA, (^p^^w* ^p^^o-, [Ion. &peyiuu, Horn. p. p. 3 plur. opupixarat,
pip. ^/)wp^x<*'''<>>] f^p^X^V i ip^^ofULi, ihpe^ikixifv.
"Opvviu (d/9-)* raise, r(m«e, fl/xrw, S)pca, 2 p. tfpwpa (as mid.) ; [£p. 2 a.
Upopov.] Mid. rise, rusA, [f. 6poviMu, p. ^, i^pe/uat,] 2 a. uipbur^v [with
(&/>ro, imper. 6pao, 6paeo, 6p<rev, inf. Stpdat, part, dp/ievotj. Poetic. (II.)
'Opvoro-M or 6ptliTT«» {6pvy-), dig, dpii^ta, &pv^a, -dptipvxa (rare), dpiJbpvyfxat
(rarely &pvyfjiai), upiix^V i f» P* •dpvx^T^ofuii, 2 f. opvx'fl'rofMu ; [«pw-
^dfiriv, caiised to dig, Hdt.] (4.)
'0(ri^cUvo|iat (6a<pp-), amell, (<-) daippi^ao/Mi, uxrippdvdrfv (mre), 2 a. m.
unrtpphfi-nv. § 108, V. N. 1. (5. 4.)
[Oirri\», wmtiid, oirrdata, oihaaa, oUrafffiai. Chiefly £pic.] (4.)
[Oir6M, wound, oCrriaa, oiT-ffiifv ; 2 a. 3 sing, olna, inf. oiVrd/uerat and oiVrd-
p.ev ; 2 a. mid. ourdjucfot as pass. Epic]
'0<^a<i» (<J0c\-), § 108, iv. 2, N. 1 [Ep. reg. 6<pi\\u)\ owe, ougJU, («-)
606(\i}(rw, CxttelXiiaa, {iSxpelXriKa ?) a. p. pt. diptiXridfls ; 2 a. ixpeXoy, used
in unshes (§ 251, 2, Note 1), that/ (4.)
'O^^XXm (6^e\-), increase, [aor. opt. 60^\\ete Horn.] Poetic, especially
Epic. (4.)
'O^Xtff'KdvM (6<f>\; d<f>\t<rK-), be guilty, incur (a penalty), (c-) 6<ft\-^<i),
&^\7iffa (rare), &<f>\rjKa, &<f>\ripLai ; 2 a. &^\o» (inf. and pt. sometimes
6<t>\€iy, dipXwv). (6. 5.)
n.
i.
IIcUtM (raid; Traiy-), sport, vai^ovfMi, (irataa, TiiraiKu (iriraixa later),
Hwaiff/Mi. § 108, iv. (b), N. 1. (4.)
TlaUa, strike, vaiau, poet. (•-) vanfiau), fvaiaa, irivaiKa, iiralffB-qv.
HaKtUn, wrestle, iraXalau, iirdXaiaa, iiraXal(fOi)v. § 109, 2.
ndXXw (iro\-), brandish, (vijXa, wiirdXfiai ; [Horn. 2 a. dfirevdXdfP, as if
from iriwaXov ; 2 a. m. firaXTo and TrdXro. ] (4.)
nopavofUw, transgress law, augm. vupriv- or rapep-, vapavev: § 105, 1,
Note 2.
IlapoiWM, t7Mt^2^ (as a drunken tnan), imp. ivap^ovv ; irapoti'i^w, ivaptp-
vi^ra, weirapi^ijKa, ivaptpvffiiiv.
ndiroiuu, fut., sAaZ; acquire (no pres.), pf. rfirdfiai, irdadfiriv. Poetic.
Not to be confounded with viaofMi, iirdadiniv, &c. , of rar^o/tat.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
351
^iStpdKa or
d poet.)-
(8.)
!cly. (4.)
[Ep. 2 a.
*nnv [with
ic. (H.)
iptipvytiai
ioi; [wpw-
s), 2 a. m.
.)
It and oyrd-
ougJU, («■)
>0cXoi', used
3, especially
sometimeif
ratx« later),
tOtjv.
€va\(i)v, as if
§ 105, 1,
unv. Poetic.
ndirrw or irdrru (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), sprinkle, ndffu, tiraffa, ivd-
ffdrfv. (4.)
Ild^x** (irviB-firevO-), suffer, wdaofMi (for irtvd-crofiai, § 16, 6, N. 1); 2 p.
viirov0a[Hom. iriitoaOe and ireir&dvia] ; 2 n. (wadov. (8.)
naWo|iai (irar-), «a^, irdcro/xat (d), iiraadnrjv ; [Ep. pip. ir6ird(r/t77v.] louit
and poetic. See irdo'0|fcai. (7.)
n<C9M (irr^-)f persuade, vdau, iirtiira, viveiKa, v^iruanai, iwelffdrfv (§ 16),
waaO'i^oiMt ; fut. m. irelao/Mi ; 2 p. iriwoida, trust, [Ep. iirividfify, pip.
for irtroldeifjieif ;] poet. 2 a. (iridov and ^irt^6/ui;i'[Ep. iriiridov and ireir(&6-
^iji*. [Epic (€-) ir(ffi)ffw, ireirt^jjffw, 7rt^iJ<raj.] (2.)
Ilrivdta, hunger, regular except in having ij for a in contract forms, inf.
ir€i»j}v [Epic veivi^fuvai], &c. See § 98, N. 2.
n<{p« (irep-), pierce, irepw (?), (ireipa, iriirapfiai, [-iirdpriv]. Ionic and
poetic (4.)
n<KW«a (ireK-, irexT-), comft, Epic prea. iref»fw ; [Dor. fut. ire^u,] aor. fTe^a,
iirt^dfirfv, iirix^yiv. Poetic. (3. 7.)
IlcXdltt (irc\a8-) and poet. veXdu (ireXo-, irXa-), in'vtfl' near, approach,
pres. also ireXrf^w, a|)proacA ; f. ireXw (for iriKdau), (ir^Xaaa, ir^irXrifji.ai,
iireXdffdrfv and iirXdOifv ; e'lreXaadfArjv; [2 a. m. iirXT^nriv, approached.] (4.)
lUKu and ir^o|uii, be, imp. ^TeXov, ^ireX^Aiiji' [syncop. firXc, iirXeo {firXev),
iirXero, for tireXe, &c. ; so iiri-irX6/x€voi and Tre/jt-TrXA/tci/os]. Poetic.
n^|iir», send, irifixf/ut, iircfiypa, vivofufta, wiirefifiai (§ 97, N. 3, a), ivifi-
it>driv, v€iJL<l>di)ffOfuu ; v^nxf/o/Mi, ivefiyj/dnrju. See pf. i of ir^iroro).
IlriraCvtt (irerav-), make soft, iirirSva, iireirdv9r}v, veiravdi^ofMi. (4.)
n{p8o|Mii, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) •irapd'^ofMt, 2 p. wiwopSa, 2 a. -iwapdov.
n^9a», destroy, sack, wipato [ti kpaofiat (as pass.) Horn.], iirepaa, [Ep. 2 a.
(w. Tpa^- for irepd-) firpadov, iirpadbyniv (as pass.) with inf. Tripdai."]
§ 109, 7 (a). Poetic.
II^pvi)|ii, mid. vipvafMt : poetic for irivpdaKu. (I.)
IU<ra«> or itIttw (Trefl--), cooA-, ir^xf/u, tT(\pa, HirefifMt (§ 97, N. 3, a ;
cf. iriftiru)), iir4<f>eT)v. § 108, iv. 1, N. (4.)
IIcTdwvi&i (ircTo-), expand, irtrdau (irerQ), iiriraaa, iriirrafMi {ireir4-
rafffMi late), iireraffdriy. (H.)
n^ro|Jicu. (iTfT-, ITT-), fly, (e-) vr-f^aofuii (poet. 7rcTi}<roMaO ; 2 »^. m. ^tttA-
Mi?". To tirraiMU (rare) belong 2 a. Iitttji' (poet.) and €VTdp,-np. The
forms Tfir&nifmi and inoT-^drii/ (Dor. -d/uat, -aOriv) belong to Trordo/xat.
nrS6o)MU (irv9-) : see irvv0civo|tat. (2.)
n^l7vv|iii (to7-)> fix, freeze, fl"i)fw, IjTTjfa, iriix^W (rare and poet.) ; 2 a. p.
ivdyri», 2 f. p. vayfyrop-ai ; 2 p. vhrr/ya, he fixed ; [Ep. 2 a. m. kot-
^injKTo;] viiyvvTO (doubtful) pr. opt. for iryftviotro (Plat.) ; [vTiiioiuu,
iiT'qiiip.iilv.'] (U.)
it
352
APPENDIX.
si
(i
?i(
[IlCKvi^it approach, urea, and im\i(. Epic] (I.)
nt|&irXT|)u (tXo-), Jill, irXi^u>, iw\rf<ra, -irrfir\TjAa, ir4ir\ri<rtMi, iw\T^0riv,
irXriodi^aonai ; a. m, iir\r}<rikfjLri¥ (trans.); [Ep. 2 a. m. iwXi^firiv.] § 125,
2. (I.)
nf|fcirpi)p (rpi-), bum, irp-fyru, trprjaa, ir4wprinai and riirpifafuu, ivpi^Brfv ;
[Ion. f. wpi^ofMi, fut. pf. wf rpifjaofmi.] § 125, 2. Cf. irp-ffiu, blow. (I)
IIivvvKw («-tvii-), make wise, [Houi. aor. iirlvwaa ;] uhiefly Epic. See
itWm. (6.)
IKvM (irf-, TO-), cZn'nA:, fut. vlonai (irtoGjuat rare) ; irivwKa, iriwonai, iw6'
di)v, woB-^ofiai ', 2 a. iiriov. (8.)
niirCvKM (rt-), ^tV0 to dn'n^, ir^<ria, Hirlaa. Ionic and poetic. See
irfvw. (6.)
ntirpdvKW (irtpi't ^/m-), w//, [Ep. wepdaw, ivipaffa,] irivpdKU, irivpanat
[Horn. w€ir€pr)iiiifoi], iwpddriv [Ion. •17/xat, -i;^iji'] ; fut. pf. xtwpdffOfMi.
The Attic uses dvo8il»TOfiai and dirtS6nriy in fut. and aor. (6.)
IlfirTM (irer-, wto-) for ti-tct-w, /aW, f. reffoOfULi [Ion. ircff/o/tat]; p. Wirrw«ra,
part. xeiTTiit [Ep. ireirTT/iAf or -et&jj; 2 a. (wtaov [Dor. lireTOJ/]. (8.)
[nCTVT||u, spread, pres. and inipf. act. and mid. Epic and Lyric. See
ir(Tdvw(ii.] (I.)
nXd^M {ir\ayy-), cause to wander, tirXay^a. Pass, and mid. irXdlo|ui^
wander, nXdy^ofiai, will wander, irXdyxSiju, wandered. Ionic and
poetic. (4.)
nXdccru (irXoT-?), form, [xXdffu Ion.], ^wXaaa, ir4ir\a<rfmi, €ir\d<r$i)v ;
(wXaffdnipf. § 108, iv. 1, N. (4)
liktiut, plait, knit, rX4^u, ixXe^, [iriirXexa, or ir^irXoxa Ion. (rare)], iri-
irXfyfULt, eirX^Biji', rXexO'^ofjun ; 2 a. p. -^vXdKtiv ; a. m. ivXe^dfAJiy.
TIKiu (irXv-), sail, TXeiiao/iiai or TXevffovnai, iirXevaa, wiirXevKa, ir4irXev-
a/JMi, iwXeiiadiiv (later). [Ion. and ix)et. itXi&m, irXuxrofmi, IwXuira, iti-
vXuKa, Ep. 2 aor. iirXuv.'] (2.)
nXijo-iTM or irXi^Trw (irX777-), strike, irXiJfw, lirXijfo, ir^irXi77/wit, ^irXi)x^'?*'
(rare) ; 2 p. ir^irXi^yo (rare) ; 2 a. p. tvXijytjiV (in comp. •eirXdyi}ii>) ; 2 f.
pass. wXrjfyTtfao/Juu and -TXa7i}<ro/iat ; fut. pf. ireirX'fi^ofMi ; [Ep. 2 a. ir^-
irXi/Yoi/ (or eWirX-), wcTXrfydixTfv ; Ion. a. m. eirXri^dfiriv.] § 110, vii. N. 2.
(2. 4.)
nXiivM (irXw-), wash, TXvyQ, KirXvva, irArXu/itot, ivXiOriv ', [fut. m. (as pass.)
tXvvoviuu, a. lirXi7i>(£/i>;i'.] § 109, 6. (4.)
nWtt (irvv-), itotc, breathe, irve^aofMi and TvevaoO/iat, ^irfcinra, •ir^iri'evKa,
[Ep. irhrvvfiai, be wise, pt. veirvvfjiivoi, wise, plpf. ir^irviJo-o.] [Ep. 2 aor.
dfi-rvve, &P.-TVVTO, a. p. dp.-vvivdiiv ;] see &|iirwc. See irivv<rK«>. (2.)
Ili^a) {irvXy-), choke, -tvI^u [later -irf^^o/Mit, Dor. rvi^ov/Mi], tirv^a, ir4-
irviyiMi, itrvtyifv, vyXyrjirotMi. (2.)
IIoOIm, desire, troO-fyru, xodijaopjai, err60r}<ra ; and iroOiaonat, iir6d«ra. § 109,
1, N. 2 (6).
I H
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
353
(IIop-, irpo-), give, allot, stem whence 2 ft. (tropov (poet.), p. p. v^wpunai,
chieHy iiniHirs., witrpurai, it i.i/iitcd (with irtirpwp,ivif. Fate). Huu |m^o-
|UU.
npdo'O'w or irpdrrw {irpdy-'), do, wpd^u, tvpa^a, viwpdxa, iriirpayp.ai,
(wpdxOVt Tpax^'^ffo/iot ; fut. pf. veirpd^o/utt ; 2 j*. niirpdya, have fared
{well or ill) ; mid. f. irpd^onat, a. (irpa^dp.i\v. (4.)
[Ilp^Wtt (irpijY-), do, trpii^iii, firpri^a, v^irprjxa, ir^wprf/nai, iirpi^x^V^i ""'•
rpr/ya ; rpri^ofMt, iwpri^afiriv.] Ionic for irpdirtrM. (4.)
(irptcl-)* ^^V' Btem, with only 2 aor. fwpidfirjv, inflected throughout in
§123.
Ilpt*), saw, iirpTffa, iriirpifffxai, ivplaOrfv. § 109, 2.
nT^vv|icu (vrSp-), siieeze ; [f. vrapd ;J 2 aor. iwT&pov, [^iirTapbp.7\v\ {evrd-
ptiv) wTapflt. (II.)
nnjo'O'M (irrdK', vttik-), cower, fwrrj^a, ivrrixa. From stem ittok-, jwet.
2 a. {-liTTaKOp) KarairriCKiiv. [From stem ttcT-, Ep. 2 a. KOToirrT^iji',
dual; 2 pf. pt. reirrTyi^t.] (4. 2.)
ILrlvvu (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), pound, [(irriaa, <TTtJ/ua».] (4.)
JlrvrcTM (irTu7-), /oW| irriJfw, 'irrv^a, txrvyfian, •ivrix'^W J irri/^o/uoi,
^irrv{a/ii;i'. (4.)
nw9dvo|fcai, poetic ireidoiiai {irv0-), hear, enquire, fut. 7rei5<ro/xat [Dor.
ireviroD/xai], pf. r^rvafiai ; 2 a. iirv06pLr)v. (5. 2.)
I
fvS
P.
Patvtt (^X; {»£¥•), sprinkle, ftSvQ, (ppdv, ippaanai, (eppdvOriv) (tavOeli.
[From stem ^i- (of. palvu), Ep. aor. ipavaa, pf. p. (ppaSarai, plpf. eppa-
Saro, § 119, 3.] See § 108, v. N. 1. Ionic and luetic. (5. 4.)
['Pa(«*, strike, (talaut, ippaiaa,] kppaladtjiv ; [fut. m. (as pass.) -(ialiropai.}
Poetic, chiefly Epic.
'PdifTw (^0-)* stitch, fiaypu), ippa\j/a, ippapLpum; 2 a. p. €ppa<f>rfv ; a. ra. eppa-
'^ifiriv. (3.)
'Pd(r(r» or ^drTt* {pay-), throw down, pd^u, fppa^a, -ippaxBy^v. (4.)
•P<1« (^C7-). <'o>" ^pSw, rfo, ltii,w, Ifpe^a (rarely e/)pe$o) ; [Ion. a. p. f>fx^elrj,
i,exe€ls.] (4.)
'Pin {pv-),flow, (xiaop-ai, ippevaa, (f-) ippiriKa; 2 a. p. fpp6-qv ; fiVT^o-
iMi. § 108, ii., Note. (2.)
('P€-), stem of cfpijKO, etpTiputi, ipp-fiOiiv (Ippidrfv), prjOriffofmi, tlprjaopMu See
(Iirov.)
•PiiYvv|Jii (^of7-. At/-), poet. ^i7<r(rw, 6rm^; ^^$w, ^/opijfa, [-e/sp^ryMa* rare,
epprix^w rare ;] 2 a. p. f'ppayrjv ; ftSyrfffopLai ; 2 p. eppurya, be broken
(§ 109, 3, N. 1); [prifoAtat,] ippy,^dii7iv. (2. n.)
I
I!!
I.^'
mi
"%
■ I
t >
354
APPENDIX.
'Pi-yto (^47-), shudder, [^L-ynffu,] kpply-qaa, [2 p. /ppiYa (as pres.)] Poetic,
chiefly Epic. -{7.}
'Pt^dw, shiver, piyiixru, (pplyuaa ; inf. pt7wi' or piyow, § 98, Note 3.
'PtiTTW (pt0-)» throw, pi^u, fppi\f/a (poet, epi^a), ippltpa, (ppififAai [poet.
j}ippifipMi, Horn. pip. fp^pinTo], (pplcpdriv, pitpOT^aofiat ; 2 a. p. ippi*
<l>T^v. Pres. also ^iirr^o). (3.)
'Pvo|icu. (tf), defend, piaofiai, eppvadnriv, [Epic, inf. pvjOai for />tj€ffdat ;
impf. 3 pers. eppvro and pi. pcforo. § 119, 3.] Poetic. See cpvw.
'Pwirdw; befoul, [Epic i^vir({«i; Ion. pf. pt. ftepvirunivos].
'Pwvvv|fct (pw-), strengthen, tppuaa, eppw/Mi (iniper. tppuao, farewell), eppiii'
crdriv. (II.)
z.
SaCpM (crXp-), sweep, aor. pt. ai]pa^] 2 p. aia-qpa, grin, esp. in part, ccffij-
pc6s [Dor. <Te<ra/)u)s.] (4.)
SoXirCj^u ((ra\7rt77-), sound a lrum2)et, aor. e<7(i\7rt7$a. (4.)
[ScuSm, 5avc, 0-a(^<ra;, iadutra, iaaidrjv, aauaofiai ; imperf. 3 sing, adu (for
«<rdw) as if from Aeol. adufii ; iniperat. ffdu (for crdou). Epic]
2P^vvv|ii (ffjSc-), extinguish, a^iau), t<r/3ecra, -{ff^rjKa, ea^tanat, ia^iadrfv;
2 a. t<r/3j;i' ; -a^ijaopjan. (H.)
2^P», revere, [imp. Iffefiov late], aor. p. eaiipdajv, w. part. aetpdeU, awe-
struck.
ScCtt, sJiake, <rel(T<t>, faeiaa, aianKa, <ri(T€ia/iai, eadad-qv ; a. in. eaeiffdfirjv ;
[Ep. imp. effo-cfofTo].
Scvu) (<ru-), »nM'c, wr^re, [a. laffeva, e(Taevdfxr)v ;] iaavfiai, eaaidrjv or effv6r)v ;
2 a. m. i(Taip.T)v (with eavro, airo, aijuevos). Poetic. (2.)
^r|}ia{vtt ((TT/judfj'-), sAoiw, aifnavQ), effrffirfva (sometimes effrifidva), aea-qfm-
fffMi, iaifjxdpdrjv, ffr}fiavdr)(ToiMi ; mid. arifiavovfiai, (arj/j.T^vdfjLtji'. (4.)
SijiTM (<ra«--), ro/, cnj^w, 2 p. aiffnyrra (as })res.) ; aia-qix(mi ; 2 a. p. eVd-
wijv, f. a&irrf(Tonai. (2.)
SKdiTTtt (<rKa0-_), digr, ffKdxj/u), eaKUxpa, eaKatpa, ^<TKanp.ai, 2 aor. j). eff/cd-
^i?"- (3-)
SKc8dwv|u ((T/ceScT-), scatter, f. ffKcSQ [aKeddffw,] iffK^BSaa, {((TK^Saafmi)
iffKihaaiiivos, fffKeddffOrjv ; iffKeSa<Tdix'r)v. (II.)
Sk^XXu ((TxeX-, (TKXf-), rfry w;?, [Ep. a. t'<r/cr;\a,] iffKXrjKa ; 2 a.
iffKXriv {airo-aKKT}vai). (4.)
SK^irroiiai ((Tkctt-), wcw, (TK^^j/OfMi, eaKeypdfi-qv, faKffifxai, fut. pf. laKiyj/oixai,
[hKiip$r)¥, Ion.]. For pres. and impf. the better Attic writers use
ffttowii, ffKOirovfiai, kc. (see <rKOtr^<i>). (3.)
i<TK7\^dfl1)V. (3.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
355
idTjv or iffvBriv :
?ffK\7tKa ; 2 a.
pOffv; ffK-fi^pofiai,
2Kt8vT)|Lt, mid. ffKlSvSfiai, scatter, chiefly poetic for irKc8dvw|ii. (I.)
Skoit^w, view, in better Attic writers only pres. and inipf. act. and mid.
J'or the other tenses (TKi\j/onat., e(TKe\j/A.tt.-qv, and taKfUfiai of aKivTOfxai. are
used. See (rKcirroiiau
Skwhtw {ffKwir-), jeer, aKib^oimt, faKW\pa, iffKw<p0r}v. (3.)
2|jid<i>, sinear, with ri for o in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), o-/x}j for a/u?, &o.
[Ion. oijAw and o-yuiyxw], aor. p. Sia-fffirjxOeii (Aristoph.).
Sirda», draw, airaffu) (a), laTuffa, tJiruKa, (airafffiai, lair&cOrfv, (riraffdifffo-
fiai ; avdaofiai, (ffvaadfirjv. § 109, 1, N. 2 ; § 109, 2.
SircCpo {(Tirep-), sow, ffwepu, ^airupa, fanapfiai ; 2 a. p, tairapriv. (4.)
2ir^v8(i>, pour a libation, aireiaw, ^aireiffa, taveifffiai ; a-jrelaofjLai, eairtiad-
H-nv. § 16, 2 and 6.
2t«<P«> (o-rt/S-), <rcfl(Z, -e<TTei\f/a, (€-) iarl^r^fxai (§ 108, ii. Note). Poetic. (2.)
2tc£x<' ("■'■'X")* 9^t [-^ffrei^o, 2 a. eo-rrxoj'.] Poetic and Ion. (2.)
StAXm (ffxeX-), send, o-TeXw [ffTfX^w], 'o-TftXo, iaraXKa, (ffraXixai ; 2 a. p.
eaT6.\r)v ; -ffTaX-qffo/JLat ; a. m. laniKdn-qv. § 109, 4. (4.)
2iT(vd|^<i> (anvay-), ijroan, ffrevd^w, kariva^a. (4.)
SWp'YCD, Zoi?e, arip^u, tarep^a ; 2 p. ecrropya. § 109, 3.
Srcp^M, deprive, also <rrcp£(rKw ; arepT^aw, (ffripijaa [Epic ccrT/pe<ra], fcrr^-
pTjfca, iariprffiai, iffTfp-fiQriv, <TTepr)0-fiffofJLai ; 2 aor. p. iar^prjv, 2 fut. (pass.
or mid.) artpT^aofiai.
[SrcOfUu, ^j/c^c oic's se//"/ 3 pers. pres. (rreOrai, impf. <tt(vto. Poetic,
chiefly Epic ]
^Zrttfii {(TTiy-), jirick, ffH^u, tari^a, effny/xai. (4.)
2Top^vvv|ii or <rT<Jpvi»|i.i (ffrope-), aropG) (for OTopiau), iarbpiffa, [icrropi-
adr)v], effTopeffdfiriv. (II. )
2iTp{<^, turn, (TTp^^w, ^ffrp(\pa, iffrpa/xfrni, earp^fpdrjv (rare in prose) [Ion.
i(rTpd<pd7)v] ; 2 pf. earpotpa (rare) ; 2 a. j). i<TTpd(f>r)P, f. aTpa<f>-qffOfiai ; mill.
<TTp4\pOIMl, €<TTpf\l/dfir]V. § 109, 4, N. 1.
STpd^vvvfik (ffrpw-), same as <rTOp^vvv)U ; arpdiow, tarpuaa, ecTTpufmi, iarpd)-
e-riv. (II.)
Sivy^w (0-7^7-), dread, hate, iffHynffa [tarv^a], [eariy-qKa,'] iCTvy-fidrfv ;
2 f. p. <TTvyfi<Top.ai ; [Ep. 2 a. fcrruvoj'.] Ionic and poetic. (7.)
[Stv^CI^w (aTV<t>e\iy-), dash, aor. iaTV<fii\i^a. Epic] (4.)
SOpw (ffu/)-), rfraw, [fut. ffup(2 late,] aor. (aiipa, iavpdpntiv, (4.)
2({>A|(D (atjtay-), slay, Att. prose gen. <r<j>dTT« ; crcpd^u), tV^a^a, eaipay/jiai,
[^fffftdxOv (rare)] ; 2 aor. p. katpdy-qv, fut. atftS.yliffop.ai. ; aor. mid. -eV^a-
^d/iTji/. (4.)
24^XX«> ((r0oX-), <rip, deceive, atpdXib, lo-07;Xo, €j<pa\fiai; 2 a. p. (iT<pd\riv,
f. r^oXi^cro/uat ; fut. m. c^aXoD/xat. (4.)
2)(tf^(i> (ffuS-), save, [also Ep. ffciw, w. subj. ffdr/s, (r6|;, &c.]; c-t&ffw, Iffwffo,
(r^or(i>Ka, aiffuxr/Mi (or -UMat), (<T(l>drfv, ffufir)aopai; ffuxrofiai, iauffdnr)v. (4.)
r
!
M^'
(Ill
ill'
356
APPENDIX.
T.
(Ttt-), take, stem with Hoin. iini)erat. Trj,
[(TO"y-), seize, stem with Hom. 2 a. pt. reraydy.] Cf. Lat. tango.
[Tav^w, stretch, rav^au, erdvuffa, TerdvvfffMi, (Taviff0T]v ; aor. m. eTavvaad
lirfv. § 109, 2. Epic form of tc<v».]
Tapdo>(ru (rapax-)* disturb, rapd^u, erdpa^a, rerdfMyfMi, hapdxOriv, ra-
pax&T^ofiai ; rapd^ofmt ; [Ep. pf. (rirprfxa) TeTpr)x*^i, disturbed; pip.
tct/)tJx«.] (4.)
Tdo-co (Ta7-), arrange, rd^u, fra^a, Tiraxa, TiTay/Mi, irdx^riv, rax^V-
ffOfJMi ; Td^Ofiai, iTa^dfirjv ; 2 a. p. irdy-qv ; fut. pf. Terdfo/iat. (4.)
TctvM (rev-), stretch, revd, ^reiva, t^to/co, rhiiixai, irddriv, rSOT^ofmi ; re-
voOfiat, iTeivdfvqv. § 109, 6. (4.)
TtKin, finish, (re\^<rw) tcXw, ir^Xeaa, reriXeKa, reriXefffMi, ireXiaOriv; fut.
m. [reXfofiai] reXoOfmi, a. m. ireXcadnriv. § 109, 2.
TIXXu (reX- ), cai^se to rise, rise, aor. ^TctXo ; [plpf. p. ^t^toXto.] In compos.
-TiTaXfiai, -e'TeiXdfniv. § 109, 4. (4.)
[(Tc|t-), find, stem with only Hom. redupl. 2 a. r^Tfiov or ^Ter/toi'.]
T^)LVtt (re/i-, T/*e-) [Ion. rdpvu, Hom. once t^/xw]. cm<, f« Te//w, rirpLriKa, ri'
Tfirj/juu, irpL-ffiriv, TurjOijaonat ; 2 a. frefiov, irffidfiriv (or irSp.-) ; fut. m.
-TC/ttou/*ot ; fut. pf. TCT/iiyffo/iat. See T|fciJY». (5.)
Tifnro, amuse, ripyp^, ^repyf/a, €T4p<t>d-qv [Ep. iTdp<l»diiv, 2 a. p. irdpirriv
(with subj. Tpairelbj), 2 a. ni. (T)erap7r6/iiji'] ; fut. m. ripypoiiai (poet.),
[a. iTepyj/dpi-nv Epic] § 109, 4, N. 1.
[T^(ro|uu, 6cco7ne dry, 2 a. p. iripariv. Chiefly Epic. Fut. act. ripvu) in
Theoc.]
[Tct£t||mu, Hom. peif. ; generally in part, renrip^vos, with TCTtTjtis, both
passive, dejected, troubled.]
[T^|iov or {rcTfiov (Hom.), found, for re-rep-ov.] See (Tcp.-).
Tcrpa£v(tf {rerpav-), bore, late pres. rirpalvw and rtrpdw ; [fut. -rerpaviu
Ion., aor. irirpriva,] -tWerpripdprjv. From siem (rpa ), aor. ^rpr/ffa,
pf. p. Tirpripai. § 108, v. N. 1 ; § 109, 7 (c). (5. 4.)
Tcvxw (tvx-), prepare, make, rei^u, frev^a, [Ep. Hrevxa as pas3.,]T^Tu-
7Mat [Fo. Tirevypai, frixOvf (Ion. eTeix^ijv) ; fut. pf. Terei^fo/iat ;] f. m.
Tfi^opAi, [a. ereufd/iiji'.] [Epic 2 a. (tiTk-) TCTUKcti', Teru/fi/iTjj/. ] Po-
etic. (2. )
TliKca (tok-), ?>i«Z/, [Dor. rrf^w), Ti)fw, ^rryfo, irrixBriv (rare) ; 2 a. p. ^rd-
KTjj' ; 2 p. rirriKa {cs mid.). (2.)
T(Oi||iv {6e-), put ; for inflection and synopsis, see § 123. (I. )
TfKTw {tck-), beget, bring forth, ri^opai (poet, also t^^w, rarely TeKoDpxti),
Hre^a (rare), Mx'^riv (rare) ; 2 p. t^toko ; 2 a. *rejcoi', ireKbp-qv. See § 108,
iii. (end). (3.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
357
go.
,n. eTavvaad-
turbed; pU).
xBri"* rax^V-
at. (4.)
di^ofJMi ; re-
■iUadriv ; fut.
] In compos.
TfJLOV.]
I, Wr/iiijifa, t4'
Sfi-) ; fut. m.
a. p. iripirriv
fo/*ot (poet.),
act. ripau in
TCTtTjiis, both
Tut. -rerpaviu
aor. ^rpTjffo,
13 pass.,! T^TU-
eiJf Ojuai ;] f. m.
UK6/tTji'.] Po-
; 2 a. p. ^rd-
,rely reicoO/iOi),
*»,i'. See §108,
T(v« (ti-), witli t, pay, fttTO), irtaa, ririKa, -Tirurfiai, -iTlaOriv. (5.)
[TCraCvM {rirav-), stretch, aor. (eTiTJjva) ririji/as. Epic for tc^i'w.] (4.)
[TiTpdtt, hore, late present. | See Tcrpatvca.
TiTpi&<rKw (rpo-), wound, Tpdxru, (rptaaa, Tirpuiuu, irpitjOriy, rpud^ofMii
[fut. m. Tpwao/Jiai Horn.] (6.)
TXdu, bear, dare, syncop. for (raXa-w), pres. not classic ; f. rXriffonai, [Ep.
a. irdXaaffa,'] p. t^tXijko [with Epic /u-forms (§ 125, 4) HrXafiev, re-
rXalriVt rirXadi, rcrXdfievai and T6T\d/*e»', TCT\ij(i$| ; 2 a. ItXiji* [Dor.
?T\dv.] Poetic.
[T|ii)Ytt> (T/i*a7-), cut, poet, for t^m"" J rftri^o) (rare), (rurt^a, 2 a. iriuiyov,
irfidytfv (jfiAyeu for erfidyriffav ).] ( 2. )
ToplcD (jop-), pi&rce, pres. o'^ily in |Ep. di'rt-To/)eOi'To| ; f. [rop^w,] rarely
Tcrop-^ti), [a. irdprfaa, 2 a. ^ropoi'.] (7.)
Tp^ifM [Ion. TpdTTw], <ttni, rpirpu), frp€\j/a, Hrpoipa or rirpaipa, rdrpaixfuat,
iTpi<t>Bnv [Ion. ^rpd^^rji'l ; f. m. rpi^l/ofiai, a. m. irpey^dfi-nv ; 2 a. [^rpd-
iroi' Ep. and Lyr.], irpdvuv, irpavonriv. § 109, 3, N. 2, ami 4 with Note 1.
This verb has all the six aorists.
Tp^o {rpetp- for 0p€<f>', § 17, 2, Note), nourish, 0p4\pw, i0pe\pa, rirpotpa
(late T^rpatpa), riOpaiiimi (inf. reSpd^Oai), idpktpB-qv (rare) ; 2 a. p. irpd'
<t>iiv ; [Ep. 2 a. iTp&<j)ov as pass.] ; f. ni. Opkyl/ofMi, a. m. iOpe^l/diMiiv. § 109,
3, N. 2 ; and 4 with N. 1.
Tp^ct (rpex- for OpeX't § 17, 2, Note ; Spafi-), run, f. SpapLov/xat {-Bpe^ofiai
only in comedy), ^^pe^a (rare), -dtdpdfirjKa, -dfSpdnrffmi ; 2 p. -SeSpona
(ftoet.), 2 Si. fSpafiov. (8.)
Tp^w (tremble), aor. frpeea. Chiefly poetic.
Tpfp«» (rptjS-), r?f6, rpl^pta, ^rpiyf/a, rtrpX^^, Terpifxnai, erpliftdw ; 2 a. p.
erpiprip, fut. p. rpt/Sr/ffOjuai ; fut. pf. rerpl^oimi ; f. m. Tplyf/opuni, a. m.
€rpi\l/durip. (2.)
TpCtw (Tpt7-), sjifcrt^, 2 p. rerpTya as pre-sent. Ionic and poetic. (4.)
Tpvixfit, exhaust, fut. [Ep. rpjJfw] rpvxu<ro (rpuxo-, § 109, 8, N.), a. erpiJ-
X(i»ra, p. part. reTpvx(»>fiivoi, [a. p. irpvxttiBriv Ion.].
Tp«»YM (rpeiv-), grTiaw, rpib^oiMi, [-^rpw^o,] 'Terpwyfuu ; 2 a. ^rpdyov. § 108,
ii. (end). (2.)
Tvyx^v*** (^"X-» '■e»'X-)» '«^ hairpen, rei^ofiai, [Ep. ^TiJxifo,] TCTi/xijica or
rereuxa ; 2 a. KtVxo" (5- 2. )
TviTTW (rVw-), strike, (€■) tuitt^o-w, ^ru^a [eTi57rTT;(ro later], [reTU/ii/Mit Ion.
and poet.] ; 2 a. trvirov (rare), criinjv (poet.) ; TuwTi^ffo/xat (as pass.);
a. m. eTv\l/dfiriv. (3.)
Tt^ {Tv(ft- for ^u0-, § 17, 2, Note), rawc smoke, smoke, rtOvfifMi, 2 a. p.
•eTi<ftri», 2 f. p. -Tif0i)<rojaot. (2. )
f:\
i
f'
'A
:.
358
APPENDIX.
Y.
'Yirio^Wo|uu Ion. and poet. iirt<rxo|fcai (strengthened from inrixonai),
promise, vvoaxMoiMt, inrkax'nit-a.i, {vwetrxfOrfv) once in ifiroffxeOyjTi
(Plat.); 2 a. JH. uTTccrxoAti/f. See t«rx« and <x«. (5.)
'Y<t>aCvtt {ytpav-), weave, ixpOivQ, if^jjm, Cipaafxai (109,6, N.), ixpdvdriv ;
aor. ni. v<f>rivdfir)i/, (4.)
'Y«, ram, (law, Offa, bafjuii, {iaOiju. [Hdt. VaofMi as i)ass.]
$a(vtt> (^ai*-), sAow, f. ^i/w [tpavebt], a. ^^tjw, iretpayKa, 7re>a(r/uoi (§109,
6, N.), t'^dvBriv ; 2 a. p. ^ipdvriv, 2 f. (pavqaoiiaL ; 2 p. Tre'^i/i/a ; f. ni.
<l>avovnai, a. m. €i>rfvd/ir)v (rare and poet.), showed, but air-e<f)r)vdfi7iv, de-
clared; [Ep. iter. 2 aor. tpdvevKe, appeared.] For Epic ire^ijo-o/tot, see
«|>d«>. See§ 95; § 96; § 97, 4. ^4.)
#d(rKM (0a-), say, only pres. and impf. See ^v^. (6.)
$A«, «^«ic (pres. late), | Honi. impcrf. ^cte, fut. i)f. 7rc0^<reTat.]
^ct8o|fcat (0t5-), s;>arc, <pel<Toixat. [Horn. ire0t8^(j-o/xat], i<f>€i.ffdiiiiv, [Horn. 2 a.
7re0(d6Mi7C> ] (2.)
(<|kv-, «|)a-), A;z7Z, stems whence [Hom. irc^a/xat, ffc07j<ro/tot ; 2 a. redupl.
Trk<f>vov or ^ire<pvov, with part. Tre^i'wi'].
^^pw (ot-, ^WK-, ^veyK- for iv-(V(K-), bear, f. ofo-w, a. ijveyKa, p. ev^roxa,
ivifveynai, a. p. -^uexBriu ; f. p. ^vexOvtrofmi and otV^T^ffo/nat ; 2 a. ijveyKov ;
f. m. offfofuii (sometimes as pass. ) ; a. m. -^vfyKdnrjv, 2 a. m. -^veyKdnriv
(very rare). [Ion. ifveiKa and -a/iiji', ^vti/coj', ^vi^veiyfiai, rfvclxO-qv ; Hdt.
dc-oto-at or di'-^at, inf. from aor. ^a (late) ; Horn. aor. imper. or<re for
0(0-01', pres. imper. ^epre for 0epcT6.] (8.)
#«V7« {<pvy-) flee, <f>(6^ofiai. and (pev^ovfxat (§ 110, ii. N. 2), 2 p. ir^ipevya
(§109, 3); 2 a. i<f)vyov; fHom. p. part, veipvyfi^poi and 7rc0i;f6Tcj.] (2.)
^i)|iC (0a-), say, <p7i<T<i), €<j>ri<fa ; p. p. imper. Trc<t>6.ad<j), part. vf<pa(rix4voi.
Mid. [Dor. f. 0rf(ro/iot]. For other forms and inflection, see § 127. (I.)
$Odvw {<pda-), anticipate, tpOacro) and <f>0-^(TOfxai, i<pdd(ra, [e<f>6aKa late ;] 2 a.
act. l<f}Or}v (like tffTTji'), [Ep. 2 a. m. ^^aVewj.] (5.)
#9c£p«a (0^e/j-), corrupt, f. <p0fpu [Ion. -(pdepiw, Ep. 0^^p<rw], a. f0(?etpo,
p. e(f>0apKa, l<l>dapfiai ; 2 a. p. f<f>$dpriv, 2 f. p. (pOcCprfffOfxai ; 2 p. 8t-
i<j>9opa ; f. tn. ipdepovfiai [Hdt. 0^a/o^o/iai]. (4. )
#dCva> [Ep. also 05t'w], wos^c, rfccay, tftdltrw, t<f>Bi<ia, (ipdifiat, {€<p0tdr}v ; fut.
m. 0^(roiuat;] 2 a. m i<f>0ifir}P [subj. <p0i(a^ai, opt. <t>0inriv for (f>0i-t-nriv,
imper. 3 sing. <t>0iff0cj, inf. 0di<r^at], part. i>0iixevoi. Attic t. Epic t ; but
always t in t<f>0tnai, i<l>0f0riv, i<l>Btp.riv (except in contr. opt. ^flf^Ltv).
Epic 0Ww has generally r. Chiefly poetic. The present is generally
intransitive ; the future and aorist active are transitive. (5 )
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
359
inrdx^Hai),
biroffX^OriTi
Tfiai (§ 109,
brjva ; f. n\.
pi]vdfniv, de-
]
', [Horn. 2 a.
2 a. redupl.
#OUw (^rX-), love, ^tXiJo-w, &c. regular. [Ep. a. m. €<pi\dfi-tiv ; inf. pres.
(jtCKiiftjevat, from Aeolic ^iXij/ut.] (7.)
<>Xdw, bruise, [fut. 0Xoffa> (Dor. ^XacraiD), aor. f^Xoo-a, ^^Xaff/uu, e«^Xo-
o-di}!'.] See 6\do>.
^pd-yvi)|u (0pa7-), /cnce, mid. ^pd<yvvp' > ; only in pres. and impt See
4>pdo'«rA». (H. )
#pdlc» {4>pa8-), tell, <ppd<r(a, HtppXaa, vi<t>p&Ka, iri<f)pa<Ttia.i [Ep. pt. ire<ppa-
Sfjuivoi,] e4>pd(rd7}v (as mid.); [(ppaao/Mai Ep.], €<ppa(Tafii]v (chiefly Epic).
[Ep. 2 a, iritftpaSov or cW^paSoj/.] (4.)
4>pd(r(ra) (.4>pdy-), fence, <f>pd^(a, iippa^a, iritppay/mi, i<t>pdx9w » i<t>pa^diir]v.
See (^pd'yw|u. (4.)
^p£(r<rM or (^Ctta> i<f>pTK-), shvdder, <ppl^<a (late), i<f>pi^a, H(f>pTKa. (4.)
^pi^w (<f>pvy-), roast, ^ptJ^w, e^pu^a, ir4(f>pvyfia , [c^pi^T'?'''] (2.)
^vXdir(rc» (^uXd^K-), guard, ipvXd^o), ^^jJXa^o, 7rc0i;\axo» 7rc0Aa7)Uot, e0u-
X(tx^'?»' ; <pv\d^ofJt,ai, i<f>v\a^dfir)v. (4.)
^iip», mitt;, [^^upcra,] ir4<pvpij,ai, €<f>6pd7]v ; [fut. pf. veip^pffofiat Find.].
$vpd», mia?, is regular, tpvpdffw, &c.
^v«, (u), produce, ipdcrw, i<f>v<Ta, vi<f>vKa, be (by nature), with 2 p. (tt^^vo)
§ 125, 4 [Ep. ire4>idai, efi-ire^O-g, vetpvtbs:]', 2 a. e<pvv, be, be born, (subj.
<f>6(a); 2 a. p. e^i/i}!' (subj. (pvw)', fut. m. <pi}<ro/Mi.
p. fl'TJI'OXO,
2 a. ffi'tTKO" ;
m. TiveyKb/Jiriv
J^$r)v ', Hdt.
per. olcre for
p. ir4<f)(vya
,uf6TCJ.l (2.)
§127. (I.)
Ko late ;1 2 a.
], a. €<ftBcipa,
tai ; 2 p. 8i-
for <f>0i-i-p.riv,
I, Epic I; but
opt. i>6tnriv).
t is generally
5)
Xdjca (x^8-), yield, retire (pres. only in dva-xd^w), [Ep. f. x'^'^ofJ'^^^ ^^
-f'x^tTffa (Find.), a. m. exao-d/t?;!' (Epic, once in Xen. dia-xd(ra(T0ai); 2 a.
m. KeKaSdfiriv ; fut. KCKadiqeta, will deprive (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2 , 2 a. ic^ko-
dov, deprived.] (4.)
Xa(p«> (xop-)j rejoice, (e-) xatp^^w, *cex(ip»?fo, Kex<^Pi1tMU and ff^x^PA"**' 2 a.
p. (xdprfv, [Ep. a. m. x''7/'<*''0> 2 a. m. Kexo,pifJi'V>' '. 2 p. pt. kcxo-PV*^^ »
fut. pf. KexapT/lffu, KcxopTjffo/MJti (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2).] (4.)
XaX^, loosen, [xa\dff<a Ion.,] ex"^o<''<* [-o^o Find.], exoXdcr^Tji'. § 109, 2.
XavSdvM ix^S-), hold, 2 a. Ix^^o"- From stem (xcS-), [Epic fut. x*^*'^"-
MOi {§ 16, 6, N. 1), 2 pf. K^xa^So.] (5.)
XdcKM, later xaCvca (xo"-)? fl"*/'c> f- xo^ov/wit, 2 p. KixW"- (as pres,), 2 a.
ex^vov. Ionic and poetic. (4. )
X^S** (Xf5-)» fut. xf<''<'OA'«t (rarely -x^ffo/tat), t'xf'aj 2 p. -k^x"^** > 2 a. ex^"
(TOf ; a. m. (x^adfirfv ; p. part. Kexefffiivos, (4.)
X^o> (x"-)! /'owr, f. x^w [Ep. Xf»^'«'l> f'- f Xf» [Ep. fX^va], -k^x^*^"* f^Xi'MO'.
ex^^Vt X^^V'^^I^"-'' ; a. m. exedfirjv, 'Z a. m. kx^ixriv. § 108, ii. 2, N •
§ 110, iii. 1, N. 2. (2.)
[(XXa8-) stem of 2 pf. part. Kfx^*^'^*» swelling, (Find.).]
i
360
APPENDIX.
X^Wf heap up, X'^<^> Hx^^"^* -K^xuKa, Kixux^/Mi, ix'^^Wt X<^<''^^o/xat.
§ 109, 2.
XpaurfUtt (xpat'^M-)* avert, help, late in present ; [Horn. xpa(CMi}<'<^» ^XP"^'
fffifjaa ; 2 a. ex/'<*'<''MO'']- (7.)
Xpdo|uu, Mse, (perhaps mid. of xP^^)i X/"^<'Me«. ^X/"?'''''/*'?''* f^XPWat.
exp'^OWi [fut. pf. »cexpi}<ro/«it Theoc.]. For x/>^«* [Hdt. x/>«'"otJ. &c.
see § 98, Note 2.
Xp&«>, flfive wacles, XP^<^t ^XPV<f<t, k^XPVko-, xixpV'^IMi {-riiuu ?), exP^^V*'-
Mid. consuZ^ an oracle, [xpri<TOfMi, ixPV<^o.nriP,] § 98, Not« 2. For
X^jj and XPV = XpU^^^ and xfiV^^h see XP19t«'
Xp^ (impers.), irreg. pres. for xPV-<ri, there is need, {one) ought, must, subj.
XPVy opt. xP^l-n, inf. xPWo-h (poet. XP^"); imperf. xp^" or ^XPW- *Air«5-
XP»I» t< suffices, inf. diroxp'ov, imperf. AirdxpVt [Ion. diroxP9, diroxpoi',
dWxpa ;] &rroxpM^h dir4xPV<^^' (I.)
XpTil» (XPT?^-)» Ion. XP^^*0| W'*^^ «**. X/'?i<'"« [Ion. XP'?*'""]. *'XPB<'"«» [Ion.
expi}('<''a]> Xp^s and x/>V (as if from xP^w), occasionally have the meaning
of XpUea, XPU^t, (4.)
Xp^M, anoint, sting, xP^ffu, lxf*<''«» f^XP*M<»t (or -tcr^ai), ixf^<iBi)».
Xp<&wv|fci (xP^-)t color, also XP<^1('> KixP<^<^f^h exP'^^V''* (II>)
^da>, ntJ, with 71 for d in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), ^^, ^^i*, l^ij, &c. ;
gen. in compos., -^:J(rw, -I^Tjffo, -}f/i^ao/mi, -eij/ijffdfiriv.
^ti&ra, deceive, \l/etj<ru, e^evva, i\j/€v<Tfiai, e^eiadrjv, ypevad'fyTOfMi ; ypciaonat,
€\l/ev<rdfiriv. § 16, 1, 2, 3.
^lJx» (^i^X-)» (^ool, rj/i^o}, i^v^a, f\l/vy/mi, e\J/6xOv'', [yj/vx^T^ffonai Ion.]; 2 a.
p. e^i^xw or (generally later) i\f/vyif)v (stem ^/vy-). (2.)
'SlOio («&<?-), /wmA, impf. gen. iwOovv (§ 104); <5(rw [poet. u0i/i<rw], (waa [Ion.
t^o■o], eufffmi [Ion. -wtr^uat], ewadtiv ; waBiiaoixai. ; f. m. Sxtoimi, a. m.
euffdfiTjv [Ion. (itra/ur;!']. (7,)
'nWo|i(u, ftwy, imp. ewvoiJ/iT;!' (§ 104) or Cvoitiifv ; <m>T^ofmi, J<t>vri/Mi, euvif-
6yfv. Classic writers use eirpa/iriv (§123) for later uvtivdfi.riv (or euvjjffd-
imp.)
jd-fyrofuu.
k4xpv/mi,
1 2. For
xistf subj.
/. 'Airrf-
diroxpav,
^(xa, [Ion.
) meaning
I^Tj, &c. ;
[on.]; 2 a.
fwtra [Ion.
ia(, a. m.
INDEXES.
yr iuvijffd-
N. B. In these Indexes the principal references are made to
the pages of the Grammar. But a more precise reference to some
part of the page, or to a section, sub-section, or note, is added
in a parenthesis whenever it seemed necessary. For forms of
verbs, see the Catalogue of Verbs. For forms of irregular nouns,
see pp. 50-52.
..-.!?
GEEEK IFDEX.
5 made to
ce to some
, is added
• forms of
lar nouns,
A 5 ; open vowel 6 ; in contraction
9 (3, 4); becomes t) in temp, aug-
ment 119 (end); a changed to rf
at end of vowel verb stems 131
(1), in vbs. in fxi 156 (N. 1);
changed to rj in 2d perf. 132 (3);
e changed to a in liquid stems 133
(4); Doric d for ij 25 (1); d as con-
nect, vowel 144, 147 (1); as suffix
182 (1), 185 (11).
o- or av- privative 188 (a); copula-
tive 188 (N. 2).
^ improi)er diphth. 6; by contrac-
tion 9 (en<l).
d'ya0<JS com])a.-ed 65.
dYW^**! pf- ^11^ plpf^' n)i<i- 11^ {<')'>
w. partic. 304 (end).
&Y€ and iLytrt w. imperat. 291 (top).
A-ycvrroSi &c. w. gen. 228 (N. 1).
A^ilpAts declined 54.
d*YV(is, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4).
A-yX* w. gen. 229 (2).
dv«, augm. of ^0701* 120 (N. 4).
d8cX<^<Ss, voc. AdeXipe 33 (top).
• d8T)v, adv. ending 186 (b).
dSitvard loriv, &c. 193 (2).
-dto, denom. vbs. in 186.
dnW, decl. of 47 (N. 2).
deprfos, decl. of 53 (2).
"AOcJS, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
01, diphthong 6 ; augmented 122 ;
sometimes elided in poetry 12
(top); short in accentuation 19
(§22, N. 1).
al, Doric for cf 263 (1).
al8c&«,decl. of 47 (N. 1).
aWe or ot -ydp (for eWc, &c.) 289 (1).
aCvia, denom. vbs. in 186.
ai:p«, 128 (top) 137 (2, N. 2); pf.
and plpf. mid. 114 (e).
-ais, -aia-a, in aor. partic. (Aeol.)
153 (15).
al<rxp<$s compared 64 (1).
dKOvw, 2 perf. 122 (N. 2), 139 {d
N. "^ ; ci5 or ko/cws AkoOw 217
(end).
dxpodofiai, future 132 (N. 1).
&Kpos w. article 204 (N. 4).
dXi|«), augment of AXoXkov 120 (N.
4).
dXtjO^s declined 56.
d\£<rKO|uu 135 (N.)
dWdfrvw, pf. and plpf. mid. inflect-
ed 112, 113, 114 (top).
dXX^Xwv declined 74.
dXXos, deci; of 76 ; w. art. 202
(N. 3).
dXXo Ti ij ; or iXXo ti ; 307 (3).
dXikrKO), formation 130 (N. 3).
dXs declined 41.
&ua w. dat. 233 ; w. partic. 301
(N. 1).
diMs, dui, &c., Dor. for iiiieU, &c.
^ 73 (N. 7).
diuSs and duuSs for yjn^Tepoi (or i/i6i)
74 (N. 1).
dp.irurxv^o|iiai 129 (3).
dpiVvu 128 (top); w. ace. and dat.
(Horn.) 231 (N. 3); dfiwddu 152
(11).
d|ii<{>l AV. gen., dat., and accus. 239,
242.
d|i<i>Uvw|ii, augment 124 (N. 3).
d|ioi(rPt)T^u, augment 124 (N. 8).
du^w and dp4«ircpos 70 ; w. ail. 204
(N. 2).
dv (Epic k4), adv. 253-256 : see
Contents, p. xxiii. Two uses : in
apodosis 253, in protasis and final
cl. 254. In apodosis, w. second-
ary tenses of indic. 254 (3), 268
(2), 264 (2), 267 (2), 272 (6), 276
(2); w. optative 255 (§ 210), 263
(2), 265 (2), 269 (2), 272 (ft), 276
(4); w. Tut. indic. (Horn.) 254
(§ 208, 2); w. subj. used as fut.
3G4
GREEK INDEX.
(Horn.) 255 (2), 291; w. infin.
and partic. in apoil. 255, 285, 273
(top). In protasis w. subj. 254
(end), 263 (2), 265 (1), 261) (1),
270 ; dropped when subj. becomes
opt. 282 (3). In final clauses w.
<i)s, 6irws, and 6ippa 260 (N. 2).
Omitted in protasis (in poetry) 269
(N. 2), 271 (N. 2), 277; in apodo-
sis 268 (N. 1), 270 (N. 1); not
used w. (8ft, XPV^f ^^' 1^
apod.
268 (N. 2) ; repealed in long apod.
256 (2) ; ellipsis of vb. 256 (3) ;
used only w. first of several vbs.
256 (4). See idv, if\v, &v{&), and
Av (a) for idu (el &v) 263 (2).
dv for di/d (Horn.) 12 (N. 3).
av- privative : see a- privative.
&v (a &v) by crasis 11, 275 (N.).
-av for -dwv in gen. pi. 31 (4).
&vd w. dat. and ace. 238, 239, 242 ;
w. gen. 239 (3).
&va,np/ 242 (N. 5).
dvdYKT) w. infin. 294 (1).
dvoXtirKw and dvaXdt* augment 120
(N. 1).
dvd|iosw. gen. 227 (N.).
dvww. gen. 237, 229 (N.).
dWxw, augment 124 (N. 3); w. par-
tic. 303 (1).
dv^p declined 48 ; ctc^p 11.
dvoC-ytt>, augment 123 (§ 104, N. 1).
dvrl w. gen. 236.
A^ios declined 53. A^ioi and d^iou
w. gen. 227 (N.).
dirais, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4);
w. gen. 228 (N. 2).
Aircipos w. gen. 228 (N. 1).
diriirr^w w. dat. 230 (end).
dirXdos, dirXoCs declined 65, 56.
dir<J w. gen. 236 ; for iv w. dat. 242
(N. 6).
diro8C8«>)Li and diro8£8o|iiak 245 (N.
3).
dir^XXvpii, augm. of plpf 122 (N. 2).
*Air<iXX»v, accus. 37 (N. 1); voc. 21
(1, N.), 38 (N.).
diroXo^o|fcai, augment 124 (top).
dirro) and ftirroiuii 246 (top).
dp (Horn, for &pa 12 (N. 3).
dpa, dpa oi, and dpa |fcVj, interrog.
306 (end). ^
dpopCo-KM, Att. rednpl. 122, 129
(end), 134 (c).
dpY^lpcot, dpYvpo{)t» declined 55 ; ac-
cent 34 (N. 2).
dpi- intensive prefix 188 (N. 1).
-apiov, diniin. in 184 (8).
Aprt\v or dppi|V 59 (N. 3).
do-o-a or drra 76 (2).
do-o-oordrra 77 (N. 1).
dirryjp, docl. 48 (N. 1).
dfrrpdirrcb without subj. 193 (c).
d(rrv, declined 44.
•arai, -oto (for -vTai, -vto) in 3 pers.
plur. 151 (end).
dT« w. partic. 301 (end).
dr<p w. gen. 237, 229.
dr<pos 11 (N. 2).
-aro (for -vto): sec -aroi.
drra and drra : see do-o-a and dro-a.
avalvw, augment 122 (end).
a^dpKiif, aiW-apKcs, accent 21 (1,
K).
a^Cxa w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
a.ir69 i>ersonal pron. 71 (1), 206 (2) ;
intensive adj. pron. 72 (N. 1), 206
(1); w. subst. pron. omitted 206
(1, IX.)', position w. article 204
(N. 6); for reflexive 206 (2 N.);
compared 66 (end). 6 aCrrds 73 (2);
tojJtoO, &c. 73 (N.).
atlroC, &c. for iavrov 73.
d(^lT))M, augment 124 (N. 3); opt.
forms 176 (N. 1).
dx9o|Uv<|> riv< Imv 232 (N. 5).
dxpt as prepos. w. gen. 237, 229
(N.); as conj. 279.
-do, denom. vbs. in 186; contract
forms infl. 115-118 ; dial, forma
154, 155.
B, middle mute, labial, and sonant
8 ; euph. changes before a lingual
14 (1), bef. a 14 (2), bef. m 14 (3);
inserted between fi and \ or /o 13
(N. 1); changed to <f> in pf. act.
138 {b).
ialvo, formation 129 (4, N. 1).
JdKXOS {KX) 13.
Sao-CXcia 30, 182 (a, N.): fia<n\ela
30, 183 (N. 2).
Bao-iXcvs declined 45 ; comparad 66
(3).
GREEK INDEX.
365
122, 129
5d 55 ; ac-
^.1).
193 (c).
) in 3 pers.
I and ajrva.
nd).
jent 21 (1,
L 1).
(1),206(2);
! (N. 1), 206
omitted 206
article 204
206 (2 N.);
oiJt6s 73 (2);
[N. 3); opt.
. (N. 5).
m. 237, 229
86; contract
dial, forma
, and sonant
fore a lingual
bef. 11 U (3);
md \ or p 13
<^ in pf. act.
4, N. 1).
compawi 66
pturiKtint, denom. 186 ; w. gen. 223
(3); Hur. of 247 (N. 6).
8X(tt«» {fxeXiT-) hy Hynconc 13 (N. 1).
Bop^at, Bopp&f, liUcliiHid 31 (N. 1).
PoiuXo)i(u, uugincnt 120 (N. 2); (iov-
\et in indie, (not (iodXji) 140 (N.
2); povTiolfiriv dv and ifiovXdfntv dy
272 (ft); /3oiJ\et or (iov\«T0€ w. in-
terrog. subj. 291 (end); (iov\onivt{)
Tivl iariv, &c. 232 (N. 6).
Pofis declined 45, 46 ; stem in com-
pos. 187 (N.).
PpoTitt ifiop-), by syncope 13 (N. 1).
pvv^tt {fiv !«-) 129 (3).
r, middle mute, palatal, and sonant
8 ; w. sound of v before k, y, x, or
{ 8 (top); euph. changes before lin-
gual 14 (1), bef. (T 14 (2); ch. to x
in pf. act. 138 {b).
ywrrf^ft, decl. of 48.
■y^Yova as pres. 247 (N. 6).
ytKaa%Ui, desider. vb. 186 (N. 1).
vcwdSas, adj. of one ending 57
(N. 4).
■y^pat declined 47.
■ycvM w. ace. and gen. 223 (N. 3):
yeioiMi w. gen. 222 (2).
yn omitted after article 201 (N. 4).
^C^as declined 40.
■y^YVOiuu 130, 134 (c); copul. vb.
194 (Rem.); w. gen. 221 ; w. pos
dat. 232 (41.
^i^<&<rKt», redupl. in pres. 129 (end);
w for 130 (top).
^XvKits declined 57, 58.
■ypaOa declined 45, 46.
Ypd^ and ypiAo^uu 245 (N. 3);
fypA.<t>riv 246 (top); ypd<pop,ai w.
cogn. accus. 214, w. gen. 224 (2).
A, middle mute, lingual, and sonant
8 ; euph. changes before lingual
14 (1), bef. n 14 (3), dropped bef.
<r 14 (2); inserted in &v8p6s {dvfip)
13 (N. 2), 48, before -arat and
-aro (in Horn.) 151 (end).
8a-, intens. prefix 188 (N. 1).
8a{(a(Sa.) 128(3, N.).
Sa|fcvdci» {dafi-) 129 (4, N. 2).
8av(C£o> and 8avc(to|uu 245 (N. 2).
Sdlt, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
8/, in & )Uv ... & 84 204, 205 (N. 1
end 2); in iipodosis 274 (2).
-8«, local ending' .'i2 ; cnclit. 23.
8<t, impers.; seu 8^w, iviiiU,
8<(8oiKaand8«£8ia(lloni.) 121 (to})).
8<(KW|fci, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; in-
Hection of /ut-forms 159-165 ; \v.
partic. 305 (top); partic. SeiKuds
declined 60.
8<iva, pron., declined 77.
84o|Mt w. gen. or w. gen. and ace.
223 (N. 1).
8^pKoiiai, 133 (4, N. 1).
8«rj«is (-<r-) 181 (N. 5) hetcrog. 50
8co-irdTT|s, voc. of 30 (N. 2).
8^XaTai (Hom.) as perf. 124.
Siu, bind, contraction 118 (N. 1).
8^u, want, contraction 118 (N. 1),
in Hdt. 165 (2, a). Impers. 8ci 193
(N. 2) ; w. geu. and dat. (rarely
ace.) 223 & 224, 231 (N. 1); oKlyou
for dXlyov deiv, almost, 298 ; biov
(ace. abs.) 302; ^1*6$, &c. w. diovrei
70 (N. 2, b) ; Wet in apod, without
dv 268 (N. 2). See 8^o|Jiai.
ir\Kol withont subj. 192 (c).
8fjX<Js (Ifib w. partic. 305 (N. 1). *
8t)XdA), inflect, of contract forms 115-
118; infin. 10 (N. 2), 118 (N. 5);
pres. partic. SijXwi/ declined 62.
AtiiLViTTip declined 48 (3); accent of
voc. 21.
-8tjv or -^v, adv. in 186 (18).
-8ij«, patronym. in 184 (9).
8ia w. gen. and ace. 238, 242.
8iaiT(ia>, augm. 124 (top).
8iaKov{(i>, augm. 124.
8vaX<70|iai, pf. 121 (top); w. dat.
233 (N. 1).
8iaTcM«i w. partic. 303 (1), 304 (N.).
8i8d<rKa>, formation 130 (N. 3); w.
two ace. 217 ; causative in mid.
245 (N. 2).
8l8u|ii, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; infl.
of /ut-forms 159-165; redupl. 157
(3), 168 (2); impf. 158 (top), cona-
tive 246 (N. 2); .tor. in ko 137 (1,
N. 1).
8£kt)v, adverbial accus. 215 (2).
8iopv(r(r«ii, augm. of plpf. 122 (N. 2).
SioTi. 288 ; w. inf. (Hdt.) 294 (top).
i
dC6
GREEK INDEX.
¥■'
m
•r 1:1):
SiirXdinoff, &c. (as coinpar. ) w. sen.
2^6 (N. 1).
Si^dw, coiitnutioii 118 (N. 2).
SiftiKdOw l&'J (11).
8)fc«««, acuunt ;V2 (3, N. 1).
8oul, 8oto< (Hum.) 6*J (N. 1).
-Wv (-W) or -ti86v, atlv. in 186 (18).
8oK^w (SoK-) 130; inipers. SoKti 11)3
(N. 2); Mof« or 8^8o»cTa» in decroi's,
&c. 298 (end) ; (u)i) ^Moi SoKtiy
298.
8pao-«{<ii, dcsiilcr. vb. 186 (N. 1).
8pdw 131 ; 2 II. tSpdu 169 (N. 1).
8vva|iai 168 (1); accent of subj. anil
opt. 158 (N. 2); id^vw 158 (N. 3).
8i{o declined 69 ; w. pi. nonn 197
(N. 6).
hva--, inseparable prefix 1 88 (fc) ; augni.
.A vba. compounded with 124.
E, open short vowel 6 ; in contrac-
tion 9 (3, 4); as syll. angm. Hit,
120, 121, before a vowel 123; be-
comes 1] in temp. augm. 119 (end),
rarely et 123 ; length, to r) at end ot
vowel verb stems 131 (1), in vba. in
fu 156 (N. 1); length, to ct when
cons, are dropped bef. a 15 (6), in
aor. of liq. stems 137 (2), in deTvai
and elvai 156 (N. 1), in 2 a. p.
subj. (Horn.) 163 (12, c) in 2 a.
act. subj. of /it-forms (Honi.) 171
(ft), eu to elu in pres. (Hom.) 155
(c); changed to o in liq. stems 133
(4); ch. to in 2 pf. 132 (3), rarely
in 1 pf. 133 (3, N. 2), in nouns
181 (N. 5); fut. liquid stems in e
136 ; e added to stem in pres. 130,
in other tenses 134 ; inserted for <r
in fut. 136 (c); dropped by syncope
13, 47, 48; dropped in ceo (Hdt.)
and dropped or contracted in tot
and eo (Horn.) 155 (2, h); as con-
necting vowel 144, 145, 152 (10,
f, pron. 71, 72 ; use in Attic 205.
-6a in plpf. act. (Ion.) 152 (4); contr.
to 77 in Att. 146 (N. 4).
-eoi, for etrat in verbal endings, contr.
to y or « 10 (N. 1), 145 (N. 1), 161
(2) : see -co.
idv, for €l &v 254, 263, 269, 270.
-«ai, in ace. id. of 3 dec!., contr. to
<«f 9 (3, N.), 42, 43, 44; seldom
contr. in nouns in (vt 45 (3, N. 2).
JavToO, declined 73 ; synt. 206.
iyyvt, adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
iytCpw I'JM (top); pf. and plpf. mid.
114 (r); Att. rcdupl. 122 (N. 1).
*"VX«^^. dt^^i^l- of 44 (\'nd).
iyii, declined 71, 72; gencruUy omit-
ted 192 (N. 1), 143 (foot-n;)t.).
<8vv (of 8x'co) 1.18 (end), 169 (3);
Nyjiopsis l.')9 ; inflected 161, 162.
W, for ^, lloin. proii. 72 (N. 2).
iie«v, for o5 72 (N. 2).
Wlr«, jif. and i)lpf. mid. infl. 114
(c).
«i, length, from e : see e ; from i 12A
(II.), 127 ((/); as augm. (for te)
123, for redupl. in pf. 121 (top).
«l, if, 26.3, 267, 269, 270 ; wJwthcr,
307 ; ei, eWe, and d yap in wishes
289, 290.
«I8ov w. i)arti(!. 303 (3).
ilKdOw, (lKdeoi)ii, &c. 152 (11).
«lK«iv, decl. of 47 (N. 2).
cVjiopTai, augm. 121 (top).
clfiC, conjug. 172, 173; as copula and
as subst. vb. 191 (N. 1); w. pred.
nom. 194; w. iwss. or part. gen.
221 ; w. poss. dat. 2S2 (4) ; (ffuv
ot, (ffTip ol), IffTiv ji or hirus 210
(N. 2) ; iKu)v etvai, t6 vOv etvat,
*caTd TovTo fhaiy &c. 298 ; accent
(enclitic) 23, 24 ; accent of &v,
dm-oi 22 (3, N. 2).
clfii, conjug. 174; pres. as fut. 247
(top).
do for oS, 72 (N. 2).
clirov w. 6ti or Jjj 293 (end) ; <is
(fwos) eiveip 298.
ftpya, &c. w. gen. 225; w. infin. or
infin. w. Tov and /xt/j (6 forms), 295,
296.
cCptjKa, augm. 121 (top).
-«is, -co-o-a, -€v, adj. in, decl. 57, 58,
16 (N. 2); formation 185 (15).
els w. accus. 237 ; for h w, dat. 242
(N. 6).
tU, ifcta, Kv, declined 69 ; compounds
of 70.
cC<rci>, adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
€«T« . . . Art (fi) 307 (5).
ilccOo, 2 pf. 123, 130, 133 (3, N. 1).
P^.
GREEK INDEX.
3C7
, coniv* to
i4 ; Heldoiii
.(3, N. 2).
. 206.
i)-
i)h)f. mid.
>'2 (N. 1).
eruUy omit-
iot-m)t«').
I), 169 {'A);
I 161, 162.
;N. 2).
a. iuH. 114
; from 1 12^
{?!». (for €e)
121 (top).
70 ; wlu'thcr,
^ap in wishes
52 (11).
).
»\t)'
US copula and
. 1) ; w. pred.
or part. gen.
^S2 (4); l<rrw
or fiirws 210
t6 vvv elvai,
298; accent
[accent of &v,
8. as fut. 247
)3 (end); «s
w. infin. or
\fi forms), 295,
,decl. 57, 58,
185 (15).
h w. dat. 242
i; compoxinds
(2).
[33 (3, N. 1).
4k or 4{| form 12 (2); k uiichnnged in
comp. 14 (N. 1; 3, N.); e lon^'
before liquid 18 (top); accent 24
(end); w. gen. 237, for iv \v. dat.
242 (N. 6).
iKcurrot, 4KdT«pof, &c. w. article 204
(N. 2).
4k<!vo« 76, 208: iKeivoal 75 (X. 2).
JkcC and Utl9*v 79.
<K«t<r« 52, 70, 186.
Ur6t, adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
UCtv «tvai 298.
iK&ra-uv 66 (5), 15 {a).
tKaivfa, form of pres. 129 (N. 2);
flit. 136 (/>); stiiise 243 (N, 2).
4\dx<ia (Horn.), i\dxt<TToi 66 (5).
i\6M for iXdffu 136 {h) : see fk6«t.
OUyXut, pf. and plpf. infl. 112, 113,
114 (top).
IXXaxov, &c., (Horn.) for (\axov,
120 (N. 5).
i\6ia, Horn. fut. of i\atiyu, &c. 154
(end of i).
4Xir<(ft>, &c. w. fut. infin.
and aor. 251 (N. 2).
or pres.
4Xir£t, declinc<l40; accus. sing. 37(2).
4|iavroO declined 73; synt. 206.
<|Ue<v, 4|Mto, 4|Uo, {(Mfi 72 (X. 2).
lluwvroO (Hdt.) 74 (top).
i^iv (Dor. for ifiol) 73 (N. 7).
l)i|Mv or l|fc|Mvai, l|Mv or l|Mvai, for
elwi 173, 172 (9).
i^6t 74, 207.
j)iirCirXi)|ii and 4|MrfirpT||ii 168 (N. 1).
((Jiirpoo-Ocv w. gen. 229 (2).
-«v for -rjaav (aor. p.) 152 (9).
iv, w. dat. 237; m comp. 233; in
expr. of time 235 (N. 1); cuph.
ch. bef. liquid 15 (6), but not
before ff, i*, or /» 15 (N. 3).
ivavrCoi w. gen. 228 (end); w. dat.
232 (end).
SIvcKa w. gen. 237, 229 (N.).
<V€«m impers. 193 (N. 2).
IvOo, fvOcv 79.
Kvi for (ve<TTi 242 (N. 5).
fvioi and lvk6ri 210 (N. 2).
Ivoxos w. gen. 228 (top).
ivT6i w. gen. 229 (2).
ii: see .4k.
I|at()»vns w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
Ilccm impei-8. 193 (N. 2); i^ij
apod, without &v 268 (N. 2).
i)v in
ii6v, ace. abs. 302 (2).
«(«»w. ^'eii. 22*.) ('.').
«o and tov i-Diiti. to ov 9, 10, to tr
(Ion.) 25 (3).
-tofor -f<rol45 (N. 1.), 151 (2).
«oforo5 72(N. 2).
4oi for ol 72 (N. 2).
(oiKa (Ik-) 123, 132 (3).
k6t for as (po.s8.) 74 (N. 1).
«ov : see co.
4irdv and 4ir<dv (<?ire2 dp), 275 (N.).
4ir({ and 4ir«i8yj 275, 288; w. inhn.
in or. ohl. 294 (top).
4ir<i8dv 254, 27.''>, 276.
4ir^v 254, 275, 276.
M w. gen., dat., and accus. 239; in
comp. 233.
Iiri for iTTcffTt 242 (N. 5).
4mev|UM w. gen. 222 (2), 218
(Rem.).
MoTOfMii 168(1); ^ir/(rTwl58(N.3);
accent of subj. and opt. 158 (N. 2);
w. partic. 304.
4irpid|iT)v (irpia-) 158 (end); synop-
sis 159; inflected 164, 165.
Ip4(r<rw, stem eptr- 127 (a, N.).
4pi-, intens. prefix 188 (N. 1.).
4pi8aCv(i> 129 (4, N. 1).
4pflA>w. dat. 233 (N. 1).
Ipi«, accus. of 37 (2).
'bpiUat, 'Ep)ii)s, declined 30.
4ptt>TdM w. two accus. 217.
«s, stems of 3 decl. in 42.
4s w. accus. 237 : sco <l«.
-c(r<ri in dat. pi. (Hom. ) 49.
4o-o-£ (Hom.) 173 (N. 2), 142 (N).
ia-crwv 65.
Jfo-rt, until 279.
•4(rTcpos, -ia-raroi 64 (N. 4).
4«rT£,w. ending Ti 142 (N.); accented
((TTi 24 (3, N. 1).
KoTiv oi (o5, 17, fiTTws) 210^ (N. 2).
ivr^ (for iarawi), 4(rT(5cra, ivr6%
(Ion. tVretis) 62 (N.), 139 (N. 3),
167.
liTxaTos w. article 204 (N. 4).
?«r» w. gen. 229 (2) : see rfo-w.
4T4etiv for ededw 16 (2, N.).
ilTepos w. gen. 225 (N. 1).
4Tiietjv for edvdm 16 f2, N.).
cu contr. from r> or eov (Ion.) 25 (3).
€« to e (through tF) 45 (N. I't, 126
(2).
I ft
' ,1
! (
368
GREEK INDEX.
m:
M ''}
■I i
«u, aiigin. of vbs. compounded w.
124 ('2); w. TToUw, Trdcrxw, d/coiiw,
&c. 217 (end); w. irpdvau) 218
(top).
efi, pron. for o^ 72 (N. 2).
cv8a£|iMv declined 56, 57; accent 21
(1, N.).
cllcXms, 57 (N. 3), accus. 37 (2).
cicp-ycriw, augm. 124 (2).
ctuOii w. gen. 229 (2).
evOis w. partic, 301 (N. 1).
c^kX^tis, 43 (N. 4).
citvoost c^vovs, compared 64 (N. 3).
c^ipCcrKt.) w. partic. 303 (2).
cSpos, accus. of specif. 215 (1).
cdpvs, wide, Horn. ace. of 59 (N. 1).
-CDS, nouns in 45, 182 (2).
-viwf denom. vbs. in 186.
|d>opd(i» w. partic. 303 (3).
^«j>' <^ or €()> ^€ w. intin. 297 (end) ;
w. fut. ind. 278 (N. 2).
^XP^v or XP'^I^ i^ apod, without dv
268 (N. 2).
Ix» w. partic. for perf. 303 (N. 2).
exoMai 246 (top); w. gen. 222 (1).
4xOp<is compared 64 (1).
-iia for -ctw in vbs. (Hdt.) 155 (1, d).
-€« in fut. of liquid stems 136 (2).
-€« and -««v, Ion. gen. of 1st decl. 31.
-ctts, -cwv, Att. 2d decl. in 33.
i(«S, dawn 33 (N. 1).
lf<i)S, conj. 274 (Rem.); while 276 (3);
mUil 279, 280, expr. purpose 280
(N. 2), inindir. disc. 287 (3).
cwvTov, for iavTov (Hdt.) 74 (top).
Z, double cons. 7; origin 7 (§ 5, 2);
makes position 17; verb stems in
127 (i); syll. augment before 121
(2).
ta-, intens. prefix 188 (N. 1).
t4«, contr. form of 118 (N. 2).
-te, adv. in 52, 186.
-f«, verbs in 127, 186; fut. of 136.
H, open long vowel 6; in Ion. for
Dor. d 25; o and e length, to ?;
lie, 131, d to i; 132, 156 (N. 1
ard i); conn, vowel in subj. 146;
-ri for -ea in plpf. act. 146 (N. 4),
162 (4).
-Xj for eo-at or Tjtrot in 2 pers. sing.
10 (N. 1), 145, 146, 151 (2).
^, w/uit/ier (Honi.), or, interrog. 307,
than, omitted 226 (N. 2).
TJY^o|iai w. gen. (or dat.) 223 (3).
T|8o|MV<(> troiioTw, &c. 232 (No. 5).
^8iis compared 64 (1) ; rjSluv de-
clined 65.
^j^, 1\(, interrog. (Horn.) 307.
i^c£8t)s, &c. (olSa) 179.
fjtiv (el/it) 174.
{JKurra superl.) 65.
<JK«, as i)erf. 246 (N. 3).
^XIkos 78.
ij|ioi, conjug. 177.
if||jids or i\\ux9 72 ( N. 5).
ihiUrcpos 74, 207 ; w. airwv 207
(N. 4).
V|(ii-, insepar. particle 188 (rf).
i\^Cv, ^|iiv 72 (N. 5).
i/^v for edv (d dv) 263 (2).
Av^Ka, rel. adv. 79.
mrap declined 41.
•HpaKWijS 43 (N. 3).
Ijpcas declined 47 (N. 1).
-IIS, comp. adj. in 185 (17); 189 (6).
-{)s> in nom. pi. of nouns in -ei% 45
(3, N. 2).
wi 0"* y\%, in dat. pi. 1 decl. (Ion.) 31.
f^Q-a-uiv (comp.) 65.
T)v, diphthong 6; augm. of ev 122
(end).
^X<& decl. 46.
V|«s (Ion.) decl. 47 (N. 1).
0, rough mute, lingual, and sui J 8 ;
euph. changes before lingual 14
(1), bef. /A 14 (3), dropped bef. a
14 (2).
OdXao-o-a decl. 29.
^o.^lXfa w. partic. 304 (N.).
edirrw (ra^-) 16 (2, N.).
Odpo-os and Opdo-os 1 3 (to]i).
eA<ro-«vl6 (2, N.), 64 (1).
edT«povll (N. 2).
Oavfidtw w. gen. 222 (2), 224 (1) ;
dau/idfw €l 274.
6^cis or O^CTc w. interrog. subj. 291
(end).
-Ofv, -Oc, local end. '2, 186.
6c<$s, vocative 83 (top).
e<po)M&i, fut. of 137 (N. 4).
GREEK INDEX.
369
1 2 pers. sing.
, 151 (2).
•, iuteiTOg. 307,
(N. 2).
at.) 223 (3).
c. 232 (No. 5).
(1) ; vSluy de-
ll. ) 307.
.8).
5).
w. ai>Twv 207
ie 188 (d).
I.
J (2).
).
:. 1).
85 (17); 189 (6).
nouns in -ci)s 45
1 decl. (Ion.) 31.
augm. of €v 122
(N. 1).
glial, and suid 8 ;
)efore lingual 14
), dropped bef. a
.04 (N.).
I, N.).
! 13 (top).
,64(1).
222 (2), 224 (1) ;
interrog. subj. 291
",2, 186.
tup).
(N. 4).
O^p declined 41.
6^s declined 41.
-Oi, local end. 52, 186. -^tin 1st fior.
pass, iniper. becomes ti after 0r,-
16 (3), 149 (3).
Ov^o-KM {(fav-), metath. 134 (a); t;
for draSO (N. 2); fut. perf. act.
139 (c, N. 2); perf. as pres. 247
(N. 6).
OoluidTiov (by crasis) 11.
epl|, rpixiJs 16 (2, N.).
9vy6kTr\p declined 48.
I, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil, vowel
10, 44 (N. 3); length. tot 119 (end),
125 (11.), 128, 131,to«125 (II.);
t added to demonstr. 75 (N. 2);
modal sign in opt. 146 (end); iu
redupl. of pres. stem 129 (end),
157 (3), 168(2); representing > of
ja 15 (7), 16.
i:afor/ifo(Hom.)69(N. 1).
ldo|iat 131 (end).
-ihifi, patronym. in 184 (9).
-{8iov, diminutives in 184 (8).
KSpis declined 57 (N. 2).
i8p6w, contraction 118 (N. 3).
IBpwetjv (ISpOw) 140 (VI. N. 2).
ic or ii] as modal sign in opt. 146
(end), 147 (3).
-llju, denominative verbs in 186.
ti)|iii conjug. 175, 176; aor. in xa 137
(1, N. 1).
lKv{o|fcai 129 (3).
-iKos, adj. in 185 (13).
tXuv? adj. declined 54.
-IV in ace. sing. 37 (2).
tv, Dodc for ol' 73 (N. 7).
I'vtt final conj. 259, 260, 261.
-lov, diminutives in 184 (8).
-los, adj. in 185 (12).
linriJTtt, nom. (Hom. ) 31 (2).
'I<re|io£52 (N. 2).
-Co-Kos, -IcKT), dimin. in 184 (8).
Ktro9 w. dat. 233.
V(rrT)p.i, synopsis 159, 166, 167; in-
flect, of /u'-forms 159-165; redupl.
of pres. 157 (3), 168 (2); fut. perf.
act. 139 (r, N. 2); partic. Icrrdi
declined 59.
tvOils declined 44.
'U, accus. 'loGv (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3).
-£«v, patronym. in 184 (9, N.).
-i«v, -KTTos, comp. and superl. in 64.
K, smooth mute, palatal, surd 8 ;
puph. ch. before lingual 14 (1),
bef. M 14 (3), w. ff forms | 14 (2);
ch. to X in pf. act. stem 138 (b).
K in oiiK 12 (2).
-Ka in aor. of three vbs. 137 (1,
N. 1).
KdpBaXc (/coT^jSaXe) 12 (N. 3).
Kawtouaiand Ka6cv8o>, augment 124
(if. 3).
Kd9T)|iiai conjug. 177.
KoAClu, augment 124 (N. 3).
Ka6CirTT||ii as copul. vb. 194 (Rem.).
Kal T^v w. infin. 205.
Ka£ir^ w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
KaCw 128 (3).
KaK<is compared 65.
Kdicravc (KaW/crave) 12 (N. 3).
KoX^w, fut. in -iw, w 136 (a); perf.
opt. (poet.) 150 (1); perf. as pres.
247 (N. 6).
KoXds compared 65.
KoXvPi) and KaXihrro) 126 (III.).
Kd|iirT», pf. mid. 14 (3, N. ), 114
KdT (Hom.) for /cord 12 (N. 3).
Kard, prep. w. gen. and accus. 238,
242; in comp. 224 (end).
K^ra {Kal etra) 11.
KaniYop^w, ugment 124 (top).
KaTW&vctv (KaTadaveiv) 12 (N. 3).
k4 or K^v 12 (1, N. 1), 253.
Kci|uu conjug. 178.
Kcivos (for tKetvoi) 75 (end).
KcXcvu w. accus. and inf. 231 (2,
N. 2).
K^pas declined 47.
KcpSaCvM 129 (4, N. 1), 133 (6).
K^ftis, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
KT)piio'(rci without subj. 192 {d).
kCxp^IF 168 (2).
K\aC«> 128 (3).
icXavo-idw, desidor. vb. 186 (N. 1).
-kX^tIS, proper louns in, decl. 43.
kX^ttttjs, compared 66 (end).
kXCvw, drops u 133 (6); 114 (rf).
KXi<r(Tj«|>i 52 (N. 3).
Kvdw, contraction 118 (N. 2).
Kpc£(r(r(i>v, KpdTurros 65 (1).
24
111 a
370
GREEK INDEX.
r>l
il
i *>
Kp^)ia|iai 168 (1); accent of subj.
and opt. 158 (N. 2).
Kplva, drops »» 133 (6).
Kpv<t>a w. gen. 229 (2).
Krdofiai, augm. of perf. 121 (N. 2);
perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1).
KT€£v» 128 (top), 133 (4, N. 1), 134
(top).
Kv8p6$ compared 64 (end).
kvkX<p 236 (N. 2).
Kvv^u (kv-) 129 (3).
Kvwv, KvvTcpos, KvvraTos 66 (3).
KttXvw, accent of certain forms 110
(N. 3).
Kws, accus. of, 33 (N. 1).
A, liquid 7, sonant 8 ; X\ after syll.
augm. (Hom.) 120 (N. 5).
XaYxdvw and \a|iPdvw, augm. of
perf. 121 (top).
Xafiirds declined 40.
XavOdvw (\a0-) 129 (top); w. partic.
304 (I).
Xdo-Ku (XuK-), formation 130 (N. 3).
\{yta, collect, augm. of perf. 121 (top).
Xiyw, say, constr. of 293 (end); \^-
yovffi 192 (N. 1, 6) ; X^7eTai
omitted 299 (§ 273).
Xclirw (XtTT-), synopsis 88, 89; mean-
ing of tenses 92; 2d perf. plpf.,
and aor. inllected 104-106.
XcW declined 39.
XoiSop^o) w. ace. and Xoi8op^o|iai w.
dat. 231 (2, N. 2).
Xiiw> synopsis 86, 87; meaning of
tenses 92 ; conjug. 94-103 ; Xi/wj/
and XcXuKtis declined 59, 60; quan-
tity ot;^u 132 (N. 1).
XtpcDv, X^VTos 65 (1).
M, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ;
/i^X and fk^p for /iX and fip \Z
(N. 1).
-|io, neut. no'ins in 183 (4).
(id, in oaths, w. ace. 216.
|ialop.ai (/uo) 128 (3, N.).
(laKp^s, decl. of 53; fiaKpip \v. conip.
234 (2).
)tdXa compared {fxaWov, fiaXiffra) 67
(end).
Mopadwvi.. &c., dat. of place 236 '
. (N. 11. ■ \
p.dxo)/iai w. dat. 233 (N. 1).
lUya.9 declined 62, 63; compared. 65.
\Uliuv for fielj^uv 65, 15 (end).
-|iic6ov in 1st pers. dual 146 (N. 3).
|Jbc£{(i>v 65, 15 (end).
|u£po|iai, augm. of perf. 121 (top).
[ktliiiv, |icto-Tos 66 (5).
|UXas declined 58, 59.
|UXci w. dat. and gen. 223 (top), 231
(top).
|icXXw augment 120 (N. 2); w. inKn.
as periph. fut. 151 (6), 250 (N).
|i^|iVT)|Jiai, perf. subj. and opt. 150
(1); as pres. 247 (N. 6); w. partic.
304 (end).
(ji^v, inofi^v . . . 664 204, 205.
-|i€vai,-jA€v,ininlin. 158(14), 172(9).
Mcv^cA>s and McWXAos, accent 33
(N. 2).
|JicvTdv (by crasis), 11.
|ic<rti|App(a 13 (N. 1).
piiros, compar. 64 (N. 2); w. art.
204 (N. 4).
(jicrd, prep. w. gen., dat., and ace.
239, 240, 242; fiira (Hom.) for
P.4t€<tti 242 (N. 5).
|iCTa|i4X€i. w. gen. and dat. 223 (top);
231 (top).
|iCTa$v w. gen. 237, 229 (N.); w.
partic. 301 (N. 1).
p.CTairoi^o|Jiai w. «jen. 221 (end).
{i^Tcart w. gen. a^ i *^t. 222 (top),
231 (top).
(icWxw w. gen. 221 (end).
p^Toxos w. gen. 228 (top).
p.€w72 (N. 2).
\Uxpi, as ])rep. w. gen. 229 (N.) 237,
as conj. 279, with subj. without
d:^280 (N. 1).
(i^, adv., not, 3(^7-309; \v. tpa, 8wm,
&c. in final and object clauses 260
(N. 1); in protasis 263 (3); in rel.
cond. sent. 275; in wishes 289 (1);
w. imperat. and subj. in prohibi-
tions 290, 291 ; w. dubitative subj.
291; w. inlin. 308 (3); 282 (4);
w. inlin. and iocrre 279 (Rem.),
297 ; w. infill, after negative verb
295, 296. Sec oi |i^ and (if| o4.
|iTj8^, |jifJT€, &c. 307, 309; tirjMi and
fiTfSi eli 70 (top).
p.TlK^Tl, 12 (2).
ji^TTip, decl. of 48 (N. 1),
^,
GREEK INDEX.
371
0-
upared 65.
1(1).
6 (N. 3).
21 (top).
; (top), 231
J); w. in tin.
250 (N).
id opt. 150
I; w. partic.
[, 205.
,14), 172(9).
s, accent 33
2)-, w. art.
it., and ace.
I (Horn.) for
it. 223 (top);
29 (N.); w.
n (end),
t. 222 (top),
I).
229 (N.) 237,
iubj. without
w. tva, 8irws,
t clauses 260
33 (3);inre\.
ishes 289(1);
j. in prohibi-
ibitative subj.
3); 282 (4);
279 (Ri'ui.),
Incgativo verb
I and ffc^i o4.
i9; /iij8ei5 and
i
1).
fiVJTis (poet.) 76; accent 24 (N. 3).
H^ o4 309 (7), 295, 296; one syllable
in poetry, 11 (N. 3); fir] ... ov in
final cl. 260 (top).
-lit in Istpers. sing. 85 (3, N.), 142,
147(1), 156.
(JitKptSs compared 66.
)ii)ivVj<rK<a, augment of perf. 121
(N. 2); r, for a 130 (N. 2). See
|i^|ivt)|iai.
KCv and vCv 72 (N. 4).
Ifvws, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
(iio-^w w. accus. 231 (2, N. 2).
\i.i<r96u, middle of 245 (N. 2).
\i.vaak, (fcva, declined 30.
|io\- in pf. of /3\u)(7Kw 13 (N. 1).
|iop- in ^/3ot6s 13 (N. 1).
-|AOS, nouns in 182 (3); adj. iu 185
(17).
(iovvos {/i6vos) 25 (3).
|ivpioi and uvpCoi 70 (2, N. 3).
|ivpCos, H.vp(a 70 (2, N. 3).
)iwv {fir) oOv), interrog. 306 (end).
N, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ;
euph. ch. before labial and palatal
15 (5), before liquid and cr 15 (6);
in ^f and aOp 15 (N. 3); dropped
in some vbs. in vw 133 (6), or
changed to er bef. fiai 15 (N. 4) ;
inserted in aor. pass. 140 (VI.
N. 2) ; in 5th class of verbs 128,
129.
V, case-ending 35 (2, N.).
-vai, infin. in 149 (1), 153 (14),
172 (9): see -|&cvai.
vaCx*^ accent 23 (4).
va£»(w-) 128 (3, N.).
vwis, VTjds, and vci&s 33 (N. 2)
vavs, declined 46; compounds of
(vavfMLX^o-t vavaliropoi, j'euxroihos,
&c.) 187 (1, N.); pav(pi 52 (N.
3).
v^» {pv.) 126 (2).
vc(&s declined 33.
,% in oaths, w. accus. 216.
VT)-, iusep. neg. prefix 188 (c).
VT^o-os declined 32.
vtjOs (for voOs) 46 (N.).
vCt«(i/r/3-) 127 (N. 2).
vlv and |iCv 72 (N. 4).
vC^a(acuus.) 50 (3).
vo^Clia w. infin. 285, 293 (2) ; w.
dat. like xpo-ofiai 234 (N. 2).
v<!os, vovs, declined 34.
-vos, adject, in 185 (14).
vov^i\v(f(. 235 (N. 2).
-vcri and -vti in 3d pers. plur. 15
(6), 142, 144, 145, 146, 157 (rf).
-VT«v in 3d );ers. pi. imper. 148.
wkt£ and iv vukt( 235 (N. 1).
v»Jv or vv ( Ep. ) 12 ( 1, N. 1 ) ; enclit ■
23 (4).
v«i, vwiv 72 (N. 2).
vwtTcpos 74 (N. 1).
g, double consonant 7 ; surd 8 ; sy
augm. before 121 (2).
|€ivos (Ion.) for jj^vos 25 (2).
\vv for «n}v, w. dat. 237.
0, open short vowel, 6 ; in contrfic
tion 9(2), 10 (N. 2), 31 ; length, to a,
119 (end), 132 (3); to ov l.'i (6),
in Ion. 25 (2); fore in 2 pf. 132
(3), rarely in 1 pf. 133 (3, N, 2),
in nouns 181 (N. 5); as coiiii.
vowel 144, 145, 147 ; as suffix 182
(1), 185 (11); at end of fir.st pait
of compounds 187 (1).
-o, (-ase-ending in gen. sing. 35 (2,
N.); for -ao iu 2nd |>ers. sing. 14
(end), 145 (N. 1).
6, f|, T<{, article, decl. of 71 ; syntax
199-205 ; in Honi. 199, 200, in
Attic 200, 201 ; 6 M^" ... 6 5^ 204,
205 ; proclitic forms 24, when
accented 25 (N. 2). See Article.
8, rel. (neut. of 6s), for 6rt (Horn.)
288 (2).
ivSuKovra (Ion.) 69 {^.).
8o«, •fjBf, T<J8€, demo'.istr. pronoun,
de,l. 74, 75 ; .synLax 208 ; w, arti-
cle 200 (c), 203 (4); bU 75 (N. 2).
^Sotis, 68<{vTos 37 (top).
0€ and oo contracted to ov 9 (2).
o«i contr. to ov 9 (4), to 01 (in vbs.
in ow) 10 (N. 2).
fit*» w. two gen. 223 (Rem.).
otj contr. to « 9 (2), to ?? 9 (2, N.).
oil and oci contr. to oi (in vbs. in 6a;)
10 (N. 2).
(SOtv 79 ; by assimilation 211 .(N. 3).
#
372
GREEK INDEX.
^1
U'':
01, diphth. 6; in 2 pf. for t 132 (3);
augmented to v 122 ; rarely elided
12 (top); short in accent. 19 (2,
N. 1 ); ot in voc. sinfj. 46, 47 (N. 2).
ol, pron. 71, 72 ; use in Attic 205.
ol, adv. {whither) 79.
ola w. partio. 301 (end).
olSa, conjug. 178, 179 ; w. partic.
304, 305 ; olad' 6 dpaaov 290 (N.).
OlSCirovs 49 ((()•
-oiT)v, &c. in opt. act. of contract vbs.
147 (4); in 2 perf. opt. 148 (N. 1).
-oiiv ( Ep. ) for -oiv in dual 34, 49.
ol'KaSc, oVkoOcv, oKkoi, otKovSc 52 ;
oiKoi 236 (N. 2).
-010 in gen. sing. 34.
oCo|fcai, ol'ci in 2d pers. sing, indie.
146 (N. 2).
otos 78 ; ot<fi o-oi 211 (N. 5); oKs re,
able, in Attic 210 (top).
-oio-a ibr -ovffa in partic. 153 (15).
-oio-i in dat. plur. 34.
otxo)ikai, ])erf. 135 (N.); in pros, as
perf. 246 (end): w. partic. 304
(N.).
6X1^0$ compared 66 ; 6\lyov {8eip)
298 (§268).
6XXv|ii (6X-), form of pres. 129 (N.
2), future 136 {a).
&|JkiX^a> w. dat. 233.
6|tvv|fci (6/i-, ofw-) 135 (N.); w. ac-
cus. 213 (N. 2).
8|ioios w. dat. 233.
6vap 50 (3).
dvlvT)|u {dm-) 168 (N. 2).
fivofia {by name) 215 (1).
dvo^dj^tt w. two aceus. 218 ; in pass.
w. pred. noun 194.
igtivo), pf. and plpf. pass. 114 (d).
00 contracted to ow 9 (2).
-oos and -oov, nouns in 33, 34 ; ad-
ject, in 54-56.
8ov for oi5 78 (top).
i>ir)], oirqvCxo, oirdOcv, 6iroi 79.
fiirtoreev w. gen. 229 (2).
oiroioSi oirtfo'os 78.
oiroT* rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; bvb-
Tav 254, 275.
oiroTcpos 78.
8irow 79.
httvlu {6irv-) 128 (3, N.).
8irws, rel. adv. 79 ; as indir. inter-
rog. w. subj. or opt. 284 ; as final
particle 259, 260, 261, sometimes
w. 6.V 260 (1, N. 2); in obj. cl. w.
fut. ind. 2t)l, rarely w. &v 261 (N.
1); 67ra>s fir) w. Int. after vbs. of
fcariwj 262 (N. 1), w. ellipsis of
"leading vb. 262 (N. 2). &irm for
(is in ind. <piot. 288.
opdw, augni. of 123 (N. 1); w. par-
tic. 303 (2), in ind. discourse 304
(end).
<pvis declined 40 ; accus. sing. 37
(2); voc. sing. 38 (c).
JJs rel. pron. 77 : see llclalivc.
8s, his, poss. (poet.) 74.
8s as demonstr. 209 (N. 3).
«o-o-€ w. 1.1. adj. (Horn.) 197 (N. 6).
io'Wov, ioTovv, declined 33, 34.
tfo-Tis declined 77 ; Horn, forms 78 ;
as indir. interrog. 306 (1); w. plur.
an tec. 209 (N. 2).
hv^poivo^ox, formation 129 (4, N.
1); w. gen. 222 (2).
8t' for fire' (not «Tt) 12 (N. 2).
8tc, rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; brav
254, 275.
8tcv or 8ttcv, 8tc<(>, otcwv, iWoio'i 78
(N. 2).
oTi, tMt, in ind. quot. 281, 282, 283 ;
in direct quot. 281 (2, N.); because,
causal 288, 289 ; not elided 12
<^-2).
Stis, Sriva, Srtvas, orrco, orri 78
(top).
ov length, from o 15 (6); for o in
Ion. 25 (2).
-ov in gen. sing. 28, 31, 32, 35 (2,
N.); for -fao in 2d pers. mid. 145.
o4, o4k, o4x 12 (2); accent 24 (end);
use 263 (3), 260 (top), 307-310 ;
ovK iad' birws, &c. w. opt. (without
&v) 270 (N. 1). See oi |*^ and
|i^ oi.
oi5, ol, K, &c, 71, 72 ; synt. 205.
oS rel. adv. 79.
oiU 307 ; oidi eU and oiSeii 70 (top).
o48' ws 24 (end); oiSi woWoO Sel
224 (top).
oiWs 70 (top), 307; oiid^pet kc. 70
(top); ovdeU 8<rTii oi) 211 (N. 4).
OVK : see ov.
oiKiTi 12 (2).
odK (6 ck) 11.
oi (iVj w. fut. ind. or subj. 292.
I
GREEK INDEX.
373
oiSels 70 (top).
iSi roXXoO Set
-o€v in ace. sing. (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3).
oiivcKa for ^i/eKa 229 (N.).
oimC (oiirl) 11.
o^av60i 52.
o^S, car, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
o«T« 307.
o«Tis(poet.) 76 (N. 1).
o5to$ declined 74, 75 ; use of 208 ;
disting. from iKeivoi and 6Be 208
(see N. 1); raCra (dual) rare 197
(N. 5); w. article 200 (c), position
w. art. 203 (4); in exclam. 208
(N. 2); ref. to preceding rel. 210
(N. 3); w. nii> and 5^ 208 (N. 4);
TttOro and toOto as adv. accus. 215
(2); o{>Toan5 (N. 2).
ovTots and oiiru 12 (3).
ovx : see ov.
6^Cka (<50cX-), owe, 128 (N. 1);
&<t>€\ov ill wishes 290 (N. 1, 2),
268 (N. 2).
ddi^XXw, increase 128 (N. 1).
6(HXX», owe (Horn. = dtptiXu), 128
(N. 1); impf. CbtpeWov in wishes
290 (N. 1).
jtbcXos 50 (3).
Il<)>pa, as final part. 260 ; until 279.
-o« denoni. verbs in 186 ; infl. of
contr. forms 115-118.
-ou, &c. Horn, form of vbs. in au 154
{b); Horn. fut. in 6u (for d<Tw, du,
w) 154 (end of 6).
n, smooth mute, labial, surd 8 ; eu-
Ehonic oh. before lingual 14 (1),
ef. n 14 (3); with a becomes ^14
(2); ch. to <f> in perf. act. 138 (b).
•n-aCttt, double stem 127 (N. 1).
irais, accent 22 (3, N. 1); voc. sing.
38 (c).
irdXou. w. pres. (incl. perf.) 247 (N.
4).
wdp for vapd (Horn.) 12 (N. 3).
iropd, w. gen., dat., and accus. 240,
242 ; in comp. 233.
irdpa for vdpeari 242 (N. 5).
-iraf>avo|i^<i), au^m. 124 (top).
TTopavKCvdl^tt, impers. irapeffKeiaarai
192 id), 245 (top).
iras declined 58 ; w. art. 204 (N. 5).
iraryip declined 48.
iraiM* and iravo|iai w. partic. 303 (1 ).
ir«C6«», pf. and plpf. mid. infl. Ill,
112, 113 (N. 2),
ircieo|fcai w. dat. 230 (2).
ircivdui contraction 118 (N. 2).
Ilcipaicvs decl. 45 (N. 3).
ircCpta, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (e).
ir^Xos w. gen. 229 (2).
ir^|iiira), pf. pass. 14 (3, N.), 114 (a);
irifiireiv irofiiriiv 214 (top).
ir^vtjs coinpar. 66 (7).
ir^irra*, pf. pass. (ef. iripLiru) 114 (a).
ir^irwv declined 56, 57.
ir^p, enclit. 23 (4); w. pai-tic. 301
(N. 1).
ir^pav w. gen. 229 (2).
ir^pas declined 41.
ir€p(, w. gen., dat., and ace. 240,
242 ; in comp. 233 ; not elided in
Attic 12 (N. 2); iripi 20 (§ 23,
ncpiKX^T)s, ncpiKXfjs, declined 43.
ircpiopdw w. pai-tic. 303 (3).
ircpKrn-i&pcvov 10 (§21, 2).
iria-a-ui (irerr-) 127 (N.).
irn; 79.
w^, indef. 23 (2).
UnXetSTis (Honi. e«7?s) 184 (c).
in)XCKos; 78.
tn\viKa, ; 79.
irfjXws declined 43, 44.
ir£)i.irXT)|ib and ir£pirpT)pi, redupl. 168
(N. 1).
irXaK6ci.s^ irXttKOvs, declined 59 (N.
2).
itkilv (for Tr\iov) 226 (N. 2).
irXcfwv or irX^oiv, irXciirros 66.
irX^Kw, pf. and plpf. mid infl. Ill,
112 113 (N. 2).
itkita \ir\v-) 126 (2); contr. 118 (N.
1); ir\etv ddXaaaav 215 (N. 5).
irX^v w. gen. 237, 229 (N.).
irXrjo-fov w. gen. 229 (2).
ttM^trvQi (7rX7j7-), itrXdyriv (in comp.)
141 (N. 2).
irXvvu 133 (6).
irv^w (ttw) 126 (2).
iroOcv ; iroWv 79.
iroeC, enclitic 23 (2).
irot; 79.
iro£, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
iroUw w. two accus. 217 ; w. partic.
303 (2); ci5 and rafcws iroiu 217
(end).
374
GREEK INDEX.
mM\
V
If lyi- ' |. .
1' ffl * '
Hi Mt ! '
r :
1 ■:
It
I
It
iroios ; iroi^ 78.
iroX<|U«>, iroXc|it|;a> w. dat. 233 (N.
1); disting. Irom 7ro\e/t6w 187
(N. 3).
iro'Xis, declined 43, 44 ; Ion. forms
44 (N. 3).
iroXX6«, Ion. = voUs 63 (N. 1).
iroXtfs, declined 62, 63 ; Ion. forms
63 (N. 1); compared 66 ; w. art.
202 (end); ol iroWol and t6 vo\0
202 (end) 220 (N. 1); ttoXi) and
TToWd as adv. 67 (2); iroWta w.
comp. 234 (2) ; woWod Set and
om woWov del 224 (top).
iro|iirf|v ir4p.irciv 214 (top).
iroppM or 7rp6<rii> w. gen. 229 (2).
IloiruSdttv, IIoo'CbSMv, accus. 37 (2,
N. 1); accent of voc. 21 (1, N.).
'ir6tro% ; irotrds 78.
ir<jT€; 79.
iro-H, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
ir<STcpos ; ir6Tcpof> (or -pds) 78.
irdrcpov or irdrcpo, interrog. 307 (.^).
irow; 79; w. part. gen. 220 (N. 3).
iroi? indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
irou8,nom. sing. 37 (top); ace. 37 (2).
irpaos, declined 63 ; two stems of 63
(N. 2).
irpdo-o-u (7rpd7-), perf. 138 (6); 2nd
perf. 133 (3, N. 1), 139 (rf, N. 2);
seldom w. two accus. 218 (top);
c8 and kokcDs irpdaffu 218 (top).
irp^irci impers. 193 (N. 2).
irp«rPcur/js, irpccrpirrris, irp^o-pvs 51
(26).
irpco-pcvw, denom. verb 186.
irpfv, formation 281 (IstN.); w.finite
moods 280; w. infin. 281, 299;
irpt.'^281 (1st N.).
irpo, w. gen. 237 ; not elided 12 (N.
2); contracted w. augment 123 (N.
1), or w. foil, e or o 188 (3); irp6
Tov or vpoTov 205 (2).
irpotKa, gratis, as adv. 215 (2).
irp6s, w. gen., dat., and ace. 240, 241,
242 ; in compos. 233 ; irp6s, besides,
as adv. 241 (N. 2).
irpo(r8cxo|Uvi(> \kol i<rrw 232 (N. 5).
irpo(r/JKCi impers. 193 (N. 2); w. gen.
and dat. 222 (lop), 231 (top);
vpoffTJKov (ace. abs.) 302 (2).
irprftrOcv w. gen. 229 (2); irpdffdev ij
(like wplp ij) 281 (top), 299 (N.).
irpoo-raxO«v (aco. abs.) 302 (2).
irpdo-w w. gen. 229 (2).
irptircpos 66 (2); irporcpov 1} (lik<!
irplvi}) 281 (top), 299 (N.).
irpo^p^ov and irpoi\«> 188 (3).
irptoTioTOS 66 (2).
irpwTOS 66 (2); r6 irpOnov or irpCnoi',
at first 215 (2).
irvv6dvo|MU w. gen. 222 (2); w. par-
tic. 304 (end).
irci, indef., enclitic 23 (2).
irtis; 79.
ir«s, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
P, liquid 7 ; sonant 8 ; ^ at begin-
ning of word 7 ; pp after syll.
augm. and in comp. after vowel
18 (§ 15, 2), 119; M/3p for/*/) 13
(N. 1).
^d, enclitic 23 (4).
^ffSios compared 66.
ilalv«129 (4, N. 1).
^OMV, ^ao~ros 66 (9).
{tio i^v-) 126 (2).
^i^Yvvfii (pay-), 2 pf. (ppuya 133 (3,
N. 1).
&T|{8ios, j^i)lrcpos, 66 (9).
pt.y6w, infin. fiiywv 118 (N. 3).
^(s, nose, declined 41.
-poos, adject, in, decl. of 63 (2).
-pos, adject, in 185 (17).
S, two forms 6 (top); sibilant, semi-
vowel, and surd 7, 8 ; after mutes,
only in ^ and ^14 (2); v before cr
15 (6); Unguals changed to <r be-
fore a lingual 14 (1), before fi 14
(3); dropped between two ('on.so-
nants 14 (4); dropped in stems in
eff 42, in aai and ao 145 (N. 1),
151 (2), 14 (end), 10 (N. 1); add-
ed to some vowel stems 132 (2);
double, after syll. augm. 120 (N.
5), in fut. and aor. (Hom. ) 152
(7); movable in oCtws and i^ 12 ;
dropped in ^x" and tax" 131.
s as ending of nom. sing. 35 (2,
N.), 28, 32; of ace. pi. 35.
-coi and -co in 2d pers. sing. 142,
145; drop ff 145 (N. 1), 14 (end).
ordXiriYg declined 39.
T
GREEK INDEX.
375
(2).
i.)
(3).
aV TT/JWTOl',
1); w. par-
3(2).
f> at begin -
after syll.
after vowel
Jp for /ip 13
p(i)7a 133 (3,
N. 3).
f 53 (2).
ibilant, senu-
I after invites,
I); V before <r
»ged to (T be-
beforo /u, 14
n two couso-
d in stems in
145 (N.l),
(N.i); a<id-
;enis 132 (2);
igm. 120 (N.
(Horn.) 152
•s and i^ 12 *,
ttffxw 131.
sing. 35 (2,
pi. 35.
srs. sing. 142,
1), 14 (end).
-cttv, 3d pers. plur. 142, 146, 147
(3).
o-ovToO 73, 206, 207.
«rB»vvvni, 2d nor. ^afirjv 158 (N. 6).
0-^71.
(Tcavrofi 73.
crcUi withmit subj. 193 (e).
«r€io, viiw 72 (N. 2).
■(rc(a>, deaideratives in 186 (N. 1).
o-(|iiv6s, com])ared 64.
vio, o-cO 72 (N. 2).
o-cvtt ((Ti;) 126 (2).
o-CMVTOv (Hdt). 74 (top).
-<r0a (Horn.) in 2 pers. sing. subj.
act. 153 (rf), in ind. of vbs. in fii
171 (4).
-(tOov and -(r6i]V in 2 and 3 p. dual
142; -adov for -o-^tji' in 3 pers. 146
(N. 6).
-«ri in 2 p. sing, (in taffl) 142 (N.)
-o-i in dat. pi. 35; Ion. t<rt 31, 34,
35 (2, N.)
-m as locative ending 52 (N. 2).
-«ri»(for -iTt, -wt) in 3 p. pi. 142,
145, 146, 157 (d).
-a-t.\M9, adject, in 185 (17).
(TITOS and «riTa 50 (2).
(rKc8dvvv|J.t, fut. of 136 {b).
-o-KOV, -(TKoni.v, Ion. iterative end-
ings 152 (10); synt. 253 (N.).
CKOir^oi w. Sirwi and fut. iud. 261;
w. <7<f67r€t or OKoireiTe omitted 262
(N. 4).
o-Kdros, decl. of 49 (a).
tr\iAu, t!on traction 118 (N. 2).
-0-0 in 2 pers. sing. 142, 145, 14
(end): see -trax.
<r6s, poss. pron. 74, 207.
o-oc|i($s declined 53.
a-Trcv8c0, <rtrtla-ia, euph. ch. 15 (N. 1);
pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (e).
o-T€Cp», pf. mid. 126 (N.).
(TT^XXw, pf. mid. inflected 111, 112,
113 (N. 2), 114(c).
oTox<iSo|iai w. gen. 222 (1).
frrpaniyiia w. gen. 223 (3).
trv declined 71, 72; generally om. 192
(N. 1).
o-uYyi-yvtio-Kw w. partic. (nom. or
dat.) 305 (N. 2).
on)|&paCvci inipers. 193 (N. 2).
avv or igyv w. dat. 237; in compos.
233.
OTivcXdvTi (or lis <TVve'K6vTi) ctirciv
232 (5).
-o-vvT], nouns in 183 (7).
o-vvoiSa w. partic. (nou). or dat.) 305
(N. 2).
a-^ 72 (N. 1, 2, 3); a<p^a 72 (top);
ff^iai, ff0etas, a<biuv, adtdusv 72
(N. 2).
o-dKrcpos 74.
o-<j)£v or o-^f 72 (N. 2); <T(t>iv (notcr^f)
inTrag. 72 (N. 1).
o-^<$s for ajftirtpoi 74 (N. 1).
(N. 2).
o-d>(i>tTcpos 74 (N. 1).
0-9WV aircov, &c. 74 (N.).
OTColijv (of /xw) 148 (N. 1).
SwKpdTTis, decl. of 43 (N. 1); ace.
^49 (6); voc. 21 (1, N.).
o-wua declined 41; nom. formed 36
(1); dat. pi. 14 (2), 39.
a-A)T'^p, o-uTcp 21 (1, N.).
a-(d(t>p(i>v compared 64 (N. 4).
T, smooth mute, lingual, surd 8 ;
dropped before a 14 (2); dropped
or ch. to <r in nom. of 3 decl. 36
(1) ; VT dropped before a 15 (N.
1, 2), 37 (top).
-Tci (Hom.) for -tijs in nom. of Igt
decl. 31.
rd and toiv (dual of 6), rare 71
(N. 2), 197 (N. 5).
-TOi in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145.
rdXas adj., decl. of 57 (1).
TdXXo (rA aWa) 11, 20 (§ 24, 2).
raird, ravnJ, ra^trdv, TairoO 73
(N.).
Tovrn adv. 79.
Teu|»- for ea<p- (0dirTu) 16 (2, N.).
Tdxtt w. dv {rdx dv) 256 (§ 212, N.).
Taxvs compared 64 (1), 16 (2, N.);
rqv raxI'O'Trjv 215 (2).
Td»v (= Twi/) 71 (N. 2).
ri, enclitic 23 (4); w. relatives 209
(N. 4); w. oTos 210 (top).
Tcev€«s62 (N.), 139 (N. 3).
T«£v (Ion. = aoL) 72 (N. 2).
TcCvA), chops V 133 (6).
-rcipo, fem. nouns ii 182 {b).
TcXco), future in w, oO/xat 136 {a); pf.
and plpf. mid. infl. 112, 113
(N. 2).
376
GREEV^ INDEX.
il'
i k
iv
rtkot, finally, adv. ace. 215 (2).
•No, T«0, T«Os, T€oO (= (Tov) 73 ( N. 7 ).
Wo, T«0 (= ToO for TiJ'oj or tivos),
riif, T<»v, Woio-t 7t) (N. 2).
-Wov, verbal adj. in 150 (3); iiinuMs.,
with subj. in dat. or arc. '606 ;
sometimes plural 306 (top).
-Tios, verbal adj. in 150 (3); passive
305 (1).
T€<Js Doric (= (76$) 74 (N. 1).
Wpriv decl. of 59 (N. 3).
-T«pos, comparative in 64.
T^irw, 2 aor. w. stem to/ott- 133 (4,
N. 1).
Wo-o-opcs (or TCTT-), Ion. riiraepes,
&c., declined 69.
TcrpaCvM 129 (4, N. 1).
Wrpouri (dat.) 69 (end).
TcO, T€fis, W«j», riwv 76 (N. 2): see
Wo.
Titoi, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
T^, rxfit 79.
n|\CKOS, TT)XlKOVTOS &c. 78.
-Tijv in 3 pers. dual 142; for -tov in
2 pers. 146 (N. 5): see -orOov and
-ewjv.
rT|v£Ka, rT|viKavra, &c. 79.
'Tf\Pf masc. nouns in 182 (6); syncop.
47, 48.
-Wipiov, nouns of place in 183 (6).
-Tijs, masc. nouns in 182 (b).
Tnari and tqs (= rats) 7\il (N. 2).
wf for ee 13.
-Ti, adv. in 186 (18).
-ri, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric)
142; in^fl-Ti 142 (N.).
tCOtiijii, synopsis 159, 165, 166; in-
flection of /it-forms 159-165 ; re-
dupl. 157 (3), 168 (2); aor. in ku
and Kd/ifiv 137 (1, N. 1.); partic.
Tideli declined 60.
tIkt© {t(k-) 126 (end of III.).
ri|jid(a, denom. verb 186 (1) ; stem
and root of 26 (N.) ; inflec. of
contr. forms 115-118 ; w. gen. of
value 227 ; partic ti/mwp, rifiup,
declined 61.
Tiffc^cis, Tip.^s, decl. of 59 (N. 2).
ri|M>p^ and nfiuap^oiiiai 245 (N. 3).
Wv, Doric (=<ToL) 73 (N. 7).
Ws interrog., declined 76; accent 22
(3, N. 2); subst. or adj. 208 (1);
in direct and ind. questions 208 (2).
rlt indef., declined 76; subst. or a^j*
209; like ttoj rtj 209 (N.).
rlu, stem and root of 26 (N.).
-TO in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145.
TiJOcv 79.
To(, enclitic 23 (4).
Tol, Tttf, art. = oi, al 71 (N. 2).
To(, I©n. (=aQi) 72 (N. 2).
roios. Toi<io-8c, ToiovTos 78, 200 {d).
TOto'oco'O'i or TOicSco'i (= ToiaSe) 75
(N. 3).
TbvKolWv, &c. 205 (2).
-TOV, in 2 and 3 i). dual 142; for
-TTjv in 3 pers. (Horn.) 146 (N. 5):
see -TT|v.
-Tos, verb. adj. in 150 (3).
T<$o-os, Too-«Jo"8€, TO<rovro« 78 ; to-
o-ovT<{> w. compar. 234 (2).
t<Jt« 79; w. art. 201 (top).
TOV for rlvoi, and tow for riv6i 76.
ToivavWov (by crasis) 11.
-Tpd, fern, nouns in 183 (5, N.).
Tpcis, Tp(a, declined ti9.
Tp^irw, ch. e to o 133 (4, N. l),'six
aorists of 141 (N. 3).
Tp{<|Hi>, Tp^x», &c. 16 (2, N.).
-Tpia, fern, noiins in 182 (b). •
rpifiw, iierf. act. 126 (N.); pf. and
plpf. mid. infl. Ill, 112, 113
(N. 2).
TpiijpTis, declined 42, 43; accent ^0
(if.l).
TpiirXdo-ios \v. gen. 226 (top).
-Tp£$, fern, nouns in 182 (b).
Tpi\-6s, gen. of ftpl^ 16 (2, N.).
-Tpov, neut. nouns in 183 (5).
Tp6irov, adv. accus. 215 (2).
Tpvx«, Tpvxw<r<i> 135 (N.).
TpwY«> {Tpdy-) 126 (top), 133 (top).
Tp«S, accent 22 (3, N. 1 ).
TV, Dor. (= av) 73 (N. 7).
TwyxAvcD {tvx-) 129 (top); w. gen. 222
(1); w. partic. 304 (4) ; tvxop
(r'c. abs.) 302 (2).
Tiv.j.lon. (=0-15) 72 (N. 2).
TtJTTTw w. cogn. accus. 214 (top).
Tw for tIpi, and T«p for tivL 76.
Tu», therefore, Horn. 205 (2).
-T(i>p, masc. nouns in 182 (h).
Ttis 79.
Y, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil,
vowel 10 (5), 44; length, to v 119
GREEK INDEX.
37r
ibat. or adi*
N.).
(N.).
145.
(N. 2).
. 2).
78, 200 ('0-
= ToicrSe) 75
Uuvl 142; for
.)146 (N. 5)-.
(3).
,vro« 78 ; to-
34 (2).
op).
for rt»'6s 76.
B3 (5, N.).
59.
i (4,N. l)fs«
5)-
(2, N.).
182 (fc).. ,
J (N.); pf. and
111, 112, Hi
5, 43; accent ^^
226 (top).
[182 {h).
16(2, N.).
ii 183 (5).
[215 (2).
top), 133 (top).
In. 1).
Lop); w. gen. 222
304 (4) ; Tuxo"
'2(N. 2).
ps. 214 (top),
for Tivl 76.
, 205 (2).
[in 182 (b).
,, contr. w. foil.
; length, to V 119
(end); 125 (II.) 128, 131, to ev
125(11.)
-vSptov, diniiiiiilives in 181 (8).
vSwpdncl. of 52 (2'J).
in, impels. 193 (top); Ooj'toj (gun.
ab.s.) 302 (1, N.).
VI diphthong 6 (3).
-wia in pf. mrt. fern. 69-61, 149
(end).
vlds decl. 52 (30); oni. after art. 201
(N. 4).
(»|U, {.|Us(Dor.)73(N. 7).
ifUrcpos 74, 207 ; v/i^rc/joi airuv,
&c. 207 (N. 4).
iviv, vpiiv, <S|i)fcc$, ti|i)ii, ii|ji|ic, &c. 72.
-VVM, denoni. verbs in 18C, 128 (top).
inrip, w. gen. and aecus. 238, 242.
<nri<rxv^O|iai. 129 (3).
into, w. gen., dat., and aocus. 241,
242 ; in comp. 233.
iiirairrcvw, augment 124 (top).
viroxos vv. dative 232 (end).
iio^ipov ij w. infin. 299 (N.).
lio^cpos w. gen. 225 (N. 1); i/aripip
Xpbvip 235 (N. 2).
{KfiaCvo), pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (d).
*, rough mute, labial, and surd 8 ;
not doubled 13 ; euph. changes
before lingual 14 (1), bef. <r 14 (2),
bef. /A 14 (3); v before 15 (5).
(t>a(vta, synopsis of 90, 91 ; meaning
of tenses 93 ; fut. and aor. inflect-
ed 106-110 ; pf. mid. 112, 113,
(N. 2), 114 {d), 15 (N. 4); forma-
tion of pres. 127 {d), of fut. 136
(2), of aor. 137 (2), of perf. act.
134 (N.), of aor. pass. 140 (vi. N.
2); .synt., w. partic. 304, 305.
dKivcpds cl|ii w. partic. 305 (N. 1).
<)>c£So)iai w. gen. 222 (2).
(b^pr^os, t^praros, <t>^pi<rTOS 65.
<Mpa) 131 ; aor. in a 137 (1, N. 2).
9T)|i£, conjug. 176, 177 ; w. infin. in
indir. disc. 293 (end).
(bOdvu w. partic. 304 (4).
(jtiX^A), <|>iXm, inflect, of contract forms
115-118 : pnrtic. <jii.\iuvy <pi\uv,
declined 62.
<^(\os couipai'cd 66.
4>\^«|r declined 39.
<t>Xc7<ew 152 (11).
(ttovdw, desid. verb 186 (N. 1).
opdj^w, pf. and nipt', mid. 114 (c).
9pifjv, gt'udor 49 (1); accent of c»>»n-
pounds 21 (1, N.).
^powlXfa vv. 6irwi and fut. ind. 261 ;
w. nil and subj. or opt. 262.
ipovTio-T'/is w. accus. 213 (N. 3).
f>ov8o« {irp6, 68ov) 188 (3).
ivXo| declined 39.
'«v^«is, not contracted 59 (N. 2).
IMS (0«i«O, %''^ accent 22 (3, N. 1).
X, rough mute, ])alatal, and »urd 8 ;
not doubled 13 ; euph. ch. before
a lingual 14 (1), bef. a- (0 14 (2),
bef. /* 14 (3); p before x 15 (5).
Xal (xal al) and x,ol (Kal oi) 11.
XOfUis declined 58 ; compared 64
(N. 5);. IT dropped in dat. plur. 15
(N. 2).
\6jpiv as adv. accus. 215 (2).
Xcip declined 52.
X<4>wv (x^pelwv), \(tlpivro9 65.
\<« iX^-), pres. 126 (2); fut. 136 (N.
3); aor. 137 (1, N. 2).
Xol (Kal ol) and xal (^at ai) 11.
Xpdoiiai w. dat. 234 (N. 2); w. dat.
and cogn. ace. 214 (N. 2).
Xpdci), contraction 118 (N. 2).
Xpif| 168 (1); w. infin. 193 (N. 2).
XPV" or ixPWt contraction 118 (N.
4); in apod, (without &i>) 268 (N.
2).
X<^a declined 29 ; gon. sing. 29 (2).
X«»pfs w. gen. 229 (2).
^, double consonant 7 ; surd 8 ; syll.
augm. before 121 (2).
J/do), contracted 118 (N. 2).
\(f^<{>kar^r viKdv 214 (Rem. ).
fl, open long vow(4 6 ; length, from
119 (end), 132(^): for o in stem
of Att. 2d decl. 33 (2); nouns in
w of 3d decl. 46, 47, voc. sing. 38
(3).
ip, diphthong 6 ; by augment for oi
122.
(S, interjection, w. voc. 213 (2).
»8«79, 208 (N. 1).
I
378
GREEK INDEX.
;";
ii^
f
-<i>v, nmsc. (lenom. in 183 (6).
•«v ill gen. plur. 35 ('2, N. ), 32 ; -dv
(tur -duv) ill lal dccl. "M, 21 (2).
wv, iHirtic. of flfxi, 172 ; accent 22 (3,
N. 2).
(lip^ w. gen., as dat. of time 235 (N.
'J).
-US, noiin» in (Attic decl. ) 33 (2);
udj. in ut, uu 54 ; (>f. paitic. in ws
;»t»-t)l ; adverbs t57 (1).
un, R'l. adv. 79 ; in rt'l. sent. 275 ;
w. paitic. 301 (N. 2), 305 {N. 4);
in wishes w. opt. 2S9 (N. 2); in
iudir. quot. 281-283 ; cuusal 288,
289 ; as final particle 260, 261 (N.
1 and 3); like uircre w. inHn. 2U7
(N. 1); w. iibsol. inUn. 298.
ott, l»repos. w. accus. 237, 242 (3).
«»s, thus 79 ; accent 24 (end).
(SoVcp, w. participle in comparisons
302 (N. 3) ; w. accus. absolute 302
(2, N.) ; Siffwfp hy (i 25(J (3) ; accent
24 (N. 3).
MOTc, w. inlin. 297 ; w. indie. 271* ;
ind. disting. from inf. 279 (Ht'iii. );
accent 24 (N. 3).
(tfv, Ion. diphtlioii;^ 6.
«i^6s, cadTos, Twt&To (Ion.) 72 (N. 6).
ENGLISH INDEX.
[N. B. See Note on p. 362. J
Abandon, rbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Ability or fitness, verbal adj. denot.
186 (18).
Ablative, functions of in Greek 212
(Rem.)
Absolute case: gen. 229, 302 (1);
accus. 302 (2).
Abstract nouns, in compos. 189 (6) ;
w. art. 200 (b) ; neut. adj. w. ait.
for 199 (2).
Abuse, vba. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Acatalectic verses 316 (3).
Accent, general principles of 18-20 ;
of nouns and adj. 21, 22; in gen.
and dat., of oxytones 21 (2), of
Attic 2d decl. 21 (end), of 3d ded.
22 (3) ; of verbs 22, 23 ; of parti-
ciples 22 (N. 2) ; of opt. in at and
01 23 (N. 4), 19 (§ 22, N. 1) ; of c(m-
tiacted syllables (incl. crasis and
elision) 20, 21 ; enclitics 23, 24 ;
proclitics 24. Accent and ictus in
verse 312 (N.).
Acc'ouipaniment, dat. of 235 (r»); w.
airoU 235 (5, N.). _
Accusative case 27 ; sing, of 3d decl.
37 ; contract, ace. and nom. ]>1.
alike in 3(1 decl. 42, 45 (N. 1) ;
subj. of inlin. 192 (2), 298 (§269,
N.) 299 ; after prepos. 237-242, in
compos. 242 (end) ; ace. ab.sol. 302
(2), rare'y w. partic. of personal
verb 302 (2, N.) ; in appos. w. .sen-
tence 196 (N. 3) ; in fin. as accu.s.
292, 293, 294 (2), 296 (2) ; re-
tained w. passive 244 (n. 2). Other
syntax of accus. 213-218 : see Con-
tents, p. XX.
Accusing, vbs, of, w. gen. 224 (2).
Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w. par-
tic. 304.
Action, suffixes denot. 182 (3).
Active voice 79 (1), meaning of tenses
92, 93 ; person, endings 142 ; use
of 243 ; form of, incl. most iii-
trans. vbs. 243 (N. 1) ; object of,
as subj. of pass. 244.
Acute ac(!ent 18 ; of oxytone changed
to grave 20.
Addressing, voc. in 213 (2) ; nom. in
213 (N.l.
Adjectives, formation 185 ; inflection
53-63: see Contents, p. xvi. ; com-
parison 64-66 ; agreement w. nouns
196, 197 ; attributive and pred,
196 (Rem.) ; pred. adj. w. copula-
tive vb. 194 ; referring to omitted
subj. of infin. of copul. verb 194
(N.3), 195, of other verbs 198
(N.8); used as noun 198, 199;
verbal, w. gen. 227, 228, w. accus,
213 (N. 3) ; verbal in tos 150 (3),
in T(?o$ and riov 150 (3), 305, 306,
235 (4).
Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2).
Adonic verse 324 (1).
Advantage or disadv., dat. of 231 (3).
Adverbial accus. 215 (2).
Adverbs, how formed from adj. 67,
186 ; from partic. 67 (N.) ; eom-
pari.son 67 ; rel. 79 ; lo(ial, iVom
nouns or pron. 52 ; numeral 08,
69 ; syntax 243 ; w. gen. 220, 229
(2) ; w. dat. 232 (end), 233 (top) ;
assim. of rel. adv. to antec. 211
(n. 3) ; w. article for adj. 200 (end),
201 (top).
Advising, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2).
Aeolic dialect 2 ; forms of aor. opt.
in Attic 153 (13) ; form of infin.
and partic. 153 (14, 15) ; forms iu
m 170 (2).
Age, prouom. adj. denot. 78.
880
ENGLISH INDEX.
i
K H
Agent, iiounH denoting 182 (2) ; expr.
at'tur pass. ))y gen. w. \m'\t. 24 ( ( 1 ),
by (lilt. (t'sp. jiftfiiir. jMiss. ) SM (.{),
241 (2); w. vi'iImiIh in t/os it;, ilat.,
w. vurl)ul ill r^ov Ity tint, or uucujs.
2:ir> (4), 244 (2), yu5, 306.
AgriH-iiifnt, of vt>rl» w. uultj. tioiii.
1U3 (1) ; of tulj. iic. w. noun lUG ;
of adj. w. nouns of ditf. gcnd. or
numb. 11)7 (X. 1-3).
Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(1).
Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 324 (5).
Alexandrian |K'i'iod 2.
Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 320 (end).
Alpha : see a ; privative 1H8 (u) ;
copulative 188 (N. 2).
Alphabet 5 ; obsolete letters 6 (N. 2).
Anaclusis in Ion. verse 326 (2).
Anacrusis 314 (4).
Anapaest 313; cyclic 315 (4); in
trochaic verse 318 ; in iambic verse
319, 320.
Anapaestic rhythms 322, 323 ; sys-
tems 323.
Anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2).
Anceps, syllaba 315 (5).
Anger, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1) ;
w. dat. 230 (2).
Antecedent of rel. 209-211 ; agree-
ment w. 209 ; omitted 210 ; as-
simil. of rel. to 210, of antec. to
rel. 211 (N. 4) ; attraction 211, w.
assimil. 211 (end). Definite and
indef. antec. 274, 275.
Antepenult 17 (top).
Aiitibucchius 313.
Antistrophe 318 (4).
Aoiist (first) 80 ; secondary tense 80 ;
tense stem 83 (IIL), 137 (III.),
141 ; aor. in Ka in three vbs. 137
(1, N. 1) ; person, endings 142 (2) ;
conn, vowel 144 (1), 145, w. end-
ings 146; augment 84 (c), 119;
iterat. end. aKov and aKdfirjv (Horn. )
152 (10) ; Hom. c and o (for rj, w)
in subj. 153 (12) ; accent of iiifiii.
act. 22 (1). Second Aorist 80
(N. 1); tense stem 83 (V.), 140
(V.), 141 ; secondary 80; peis.
endings 142 (2) ; cojin. vow, 144
(1), 145, w. endings 145 ; augm.
84 (c), 119; reduiH. (Hom.) 120 1
(N. 3) ; Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1) j
iter, endings (Ion.) 152 (10) ;
llniii. ill (7 152 (iS) ; l(»n. forms in
subj. act. of M'-f"'"!'* 171 (7) ; ac-
cent of iiiliii an<l ]>artir. 22 and 23
(§ 2(1, N. 3). Aorist Passive (lirst
and m>i-i)iid), w. act. endings 143
(3) ; t.nse stems 83 (VI., VII.),
140aiidl41(VI., VII), 141; conn,
vowel : none in indie. M.'l (:j), in
subj. and opt. 140 (N. 1), MJ {■.),
none in impfiat. 149 (3) and intin.
149(1) ; accent of inlin. ami partic.
22 and 23 (N. 3). Syntax of Aoiist:
indi(^ 240, disting. from inipf. 217
(N. 5), gnomic 252 (2), iterative
253; in (hipndent moods 248-251;
when not in indir. disc, how dis-
ting. from pies. 248 (end), 249(1),
opt. and inlin. in indir. disc. 250,
251 ; inlin. w. vbs. of hoping, &c.
251 (N. 2) ; in partic. 252, aor. n(*t
past in certain ca.ses 252 (N. 2),
304 (4). Indie, in apod. w. df
254 (3), 2«7, 268, iterative w. dt-
253 ; in protasis 204, 265, 267,
268 ; in rel. cond. .sent. 276 (2) ;
in wishes 290 (2) ; in linal cl. 261
(3). Opt. w. dv 255, 269 (2), 276
(4). Intin. or partic. w. An 255.
Aphaeresis 11 (N. 4).
Apodosis 263 (1) ; negative of (ou)
263 (3) ; in jtast tenses of indie,
w. dv 253 (end), 254 (3), 263 (2),
264 (2), 26 "?) ; various forms
in cond. s» iit. 264-266, 267-270 ;
w. protasis omitted 271 (2); repres.
byinfin. or partic. 272(3), 273(4);
implied in context 273 (N. 1) ;
supiire.Hscd for effect 273 (N. 2) ;
introd. by Si 274 (2).
Apostrophe (in eli.sion) 11 (1).
Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
304.
Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
218; w. ace. and part. gen. 221 (2).
Apposition 195 ; gen. in. app. w.
posse.s.sive 195 (N. 1) ; nom. or ace.
in app. w. sentence 196 (N. 3) ;
partitive appos. 196 (N. 2).
Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat. 233.
Arsis and thesis, used in sense opp.
to the Greek 311 (foot-note).
Mlk^MrtiM
ENGLISH INDEX.
38 1
122 (N. 1) ;
162 (lo);
Ion. forniH in
(171 (7); ^^■
tic. 22 iiail '-^^
l'ttN»ive (tivHt
t'luling** l-l'*
I (VI., VU.),
I), 141; it>i'"-
ic. 14:i (:5). >"
N. 1). 147('),
) (3) luul inliii.
I'm. wml purtii:.
rutiixolAomtj
IVom iiiii)!'. 217
5 (2), iterutivi!
nooda 248-251;
ilisc, how de-
fend), 24y(l),
udir. disc. 250,
of hoping, &»'•
ic. 252, aor. iu>t
ses 252 (N. 2),
in apod. w. A"
itemtive w. Af
'204, 2(55, 207,
sent. 270 ('2) ;
in iinul cl. 201
•55, 209 (2), 270
tie. w. dv 255.
negative of (.oy)
tenses of indie.
254 (3), 263 (2),
• various lovniH
4-206, 267-270 ;
A 271(2); repres.
, 272 (3), 273 (4);
,xt 273 (N. 1);
lect 273 (N. 2);
(2).
on) 11 (!)• ,.
f. to, w. partic.
f to, w. two a(!c.
,avt. p.u. 221 (2).
reii. in. app. w.
1) ; nom. or ace.
.'nee 196 (N. 3) ;
196 (N. 2).
(lyiiifr, vr. dat. id<J.
iHt'd in sense opp.
(foot note,).
Article, deflnite, declined 71 ; tw and
Toiv M fern. 71 (N. 2) ; Tof and ral
(Epic and Doric) 71 (N. 2) ; pro-
clitic in Fomo forms 24 ; in era.sis
11 (N. 1); A avT6% 73 (2). Ilonierit;
art. as pronoun 199, w. ail,j. and
partic. 199 (N. 1). Art. in IIitoiI.
200 (N. 4) ; in i.yrie and Atti.-
poets 200 (N. 5) ; Attic proM^ use
200, 201 ; position w. nttrib. adj.
201 (en I), 202 (2), w. pird. adj.
203 (3), w. denionstr. 203 (4) ; as
nronoun in Attic, 204 (1), 205
Ashamed, vbs. signil'. to be, w. pur-
tie. 303 (1).
A.sking, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217.
Aspirate, w. vowels 6 (end) ; w.
mutes 8 (2), 10 (1); nvoided in
redupl. 16 (2) ; transferred in
rpiif'w, epiypw, &e. 10 (2, N.)
A.ssinulation of rel. to ca.se of antec.
210 (end), w. antee. omitted 211
(N. 1) ; in rel. adv. 211 (N. 3) ;
antec. rarely assim. to rel. 211
(N. 4). Se(! Attraction. Assim.
of cond. rel. cl. to mood of antec.
clause 277, 278. Assim. (Horn.)
in vbs. in dw 154 (/>).
Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(1).
Attic dialect 2 ; why basis of Gram-
mar 2. Attic 2d decl. 33 (2);
redupl. 122, 120 (N. 4); future
136 (N. 1).
Attraction in rel. sent. 211; joined
w. assim. 211 (end), 212 (top).
Attributive adjective (opp. to predi-
cate) 196 (Hem.) ; position of ar-
ticle w. 201-203. Attrib. com-
pounds 190 (3).
Augment 84 (c), 119-124 : see Con-
tents, p. xviii.
B.icchius 313 ; Bacchic rhythms 326.
Barytones 19.
I?asis in logaoedic verse 324.
15c or belong, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
221 (top).
Become, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(top).
Begin, vbg. signif. lo, w. gen. 222
(1) ; w. partic. 303(1).
Belong, vbs. si;;nif. to w. gen. 221
(top).
Be.iefit, vbs. hignif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Bocotia, Ac<»li;ms in 1.
Brcatliings 0, 7 ; form 7 (N. 2).
Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam.
321 (4).
Caesura 316 (1).
<'all : see Name.
Cardinal nund)er.s 68-70 ; decl. of 69.
Caie for, vbs. signif. io, w. gen. 222
('-').
Cases 27 (3) ; meaning 27 (3, N. 1) ;
oblique 27 (end) : endings 35 ;
syntax of 212 242: see Contents,
pp. xx.-xxii.
Catalexisandcatalectic ver.ses316 (3).
Cau.sal sentences, w. conj. and indie.
288, 289 ; w. opt. (Iiid. disc.) 289
(N.), 288 (4) ; w. rclat. 279.
Cau.se, expr. by gen. 224 ; by dat.
234; by partic. 300, 301 (N. 2).
Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. n-f)
262.
Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif.
to, w. partic. 303 (1).
Choosing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 218;
w. aec. and part. gen. 221 (2).
Choriambus 313 ; choriambie rhythms
325(1).
Circumflex accent 18 ; origin 18
(Rem.); on contr. syll. 20.
Circumstances, partic. denot. 300,
301.
Claim, vlis. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(end), 222(1).
Classes of verbs : eight of vbs. in
w 125-131, two of vbs. in /ut 157.
Close vowels 6 (N.), 10 (5); stems
ending in 35 (top).
Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217.
Cognate mutes 8 (2, N.). Cognate
accus. 213-215.
Collective noun, w. plur. verb 193
(3); w. pi. p.irtie. 197 (N. 3) ;
loll, by pi. relat. 209 (IS. 2)
Collision of vowels, how avoided 8
(§8).
382
ENGLISH INDEX.
III. ■■; ^
■f-
I ■!
Coininand or exhortation '290, 289
(N. 3), 262 (N. 4), 272 (N. 1), 247
(N. 8); verbs of commanding w.
gen. 223 (3).
Common Dialect 2.
Comparative degree 64-67 ; w. gen.
225 (1) ; w. dat. 234 (2).
Comparison of adjectives 64, irreg.
65, 66 ; of adverbs 67 ; of some
nouns and pronouns 06 (3).
Comparison, verbs denot. w. gen.
226 (2).
Composition of words: see Formation.
Compound words 180, 187-190 ; first
part of 187, second part 188 ;
meaning of (three classes) 189,
190. Compound verbs 189 ; aug-
ment 123, 124 ; accent 22 (§ 26
N. 1) ; w. gen., dat., or ace. 242
(end), 226, 233. Compound nega-
tives, 307 ; repetition of 309, 310.
Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus.
217 ; w. infiu. and /t^ 308 (6),
295 296.
Concession 272 (6), 289 (N. 3).
Conclusion : see Apodosis and Condi-
tion.
Condition and conclusion 263 (1) ;
conditional sentences 263-274 ; see
Contents, pp. xxiii. and xxiv. ;
classification of cond. sent. 263-
267 ; general and particular cond.
(listing. 265, 266 ; comparison of
Latin gen. cond. 266 (Rem. 1) ;
cond. cxpr. by partic. 301 (4), 271
(1). Skc Protasis. Relative cond.
sent. 275-278 : see Relative.
Conjugation 84 ; of verbs in w 85-
155 ; of verbs in m 156-179.
Connecting vowel 143 (4), 144 (foot-
note), 82 (foot-note) ; of indie.
144, 145; of subj. 146; of opt.
147 ; of imperat. 148 ; of infin. and
partic. 149 ; in iterative forms 152
(10) ; in forms in du 152 (11) ;
omitted in perf. mid., aor. pass., and
/ut-forms 143.
Consider, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
218 ; w. ace. and gen. 221 ; in
pass. w. gen. 221 (N.).
Consonants, divisions of 7, 8 ; eu-
l)honic changes in 13-16 ; double
7 (2) ; movable 12 ; consonant
stems 82 (3), 35. Consonant de-
clension (Third) 35.
Constructio praeguans 242 (N. 6).
Continue, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Continued action, tenses of 246.
Contraction 8 ; rules of, 8-10 ; quan-
tity of contr. syll. 18 (§ 20, 1);
accent 20 ; of nouns : 1st decl. 30,
2d decl. 33, 3d decl. 42-47 ; of
adject. 54-58 ; of i)artic. 61, 62 ;
of verbs in aw, ew, and ow 115-
118 ; in gen. pi. of 1st decl. 2 J
(N.), of 2d decl. 32 (top); in redupl.
(ee to €i) 123 (top) ; in forma-
tion of words 181 (N. 3), 188 (3).
See Crasis and Synizesis.
Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2).
Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 8 (2,
N.).
Copula 191 (N. 1).
Copulative verbs 194 (Rem.); case of
pred. adj. or noun with infin. of
194 (N. 3), 195 (N. 4, 5).
Coronis 10 (1).
Correlative pronominal adj. 78 ; adv.
79.
Crasis iO, 11 ; examples 11 ; quanti-
ty 18 (§ 20, 1) ; accent 20 (2).
Cretic 313 ; rhythms 326.
Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 315 (4).
Dactyl 313; cyclic 315 ; in anapaes-
tic verse 322, 314 (N. 1) ; in iam-
bic verse (apparent) 319, 320; in
trochaic verse (cyclic) 318 ; in loga-
oedic verse (cyclic) 323, 324.
Dactylic rhythms 321, 322.
Danger, vbs. of, w. /x-^ 262.
Dative case 27 (3) ; endings of 35,
28, 32 ; in 3d decl. 39 ; syntax of
230-236 : see Contents, p. xxi.
Prepositions w. dative 242 (2)
Declension 28 ; of Nouns 28-52 :
first 28-31, second 31-34, third
34-49, of irreg. nouns 49-52; of
Adjectives 53-6.3, fust and second
de(!l. 53-56; third 56, 57, first and
third 57-59; of partic. 59-62 ; of
irreg. adj. 62, 63 ; of the Article 71 ;
of Pronouns 71-78. See Contents,
pp. xvi., xvii.
ENGLISH INDEX.
383
sonant de*
I (N. 6). _
\v, partic.
of 246.
j_10 ; quan-
i (§ 20, l);
1st decl. 30,
42-47 ; of
tic. 61, 62 -,
\nd 00) 11^-
1st decl. 2 J
p); inrediilil-
• in forina-
.'3), 188 (3).
>sis.
gen. 224 (2).
te mutes 8 (2,
Rem.); case of
with infin. ot
4,5).
1 adj. 78 ; adv.
les 11 ; quanti-
;ent 20 (2).
326.
iactyls 315 (4).
5 ; in anapaes-
gN. 1); iniam-
•) 319, 320 ■, m
c) 318 ; in loga-
323, 324.
322.
ii 262.
endings of 35,
. 39 ; syntax ot
itents, p. ^ 3Lxi.
Ave 242 (2)
Nouns 28-52:
.1 31-34, tlurd
'ouns 49-52; of
iirst and second
56, 57, tivst and
avtic. 59 62; of
,f the Article 71 ;
See Contents,
Defend, Vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Degi'ee of difference, dat. of 234 (2).
Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217.
Demes, names of Attic, in dat. 236
(N. 1).
Demonstrative pronouns 74, 75 ;
synt. tZ08 : w. article 200 (c), posi-
tion 203 (4) ; aiticle as denionstr.
(Hom.) 199, (Att.) 204, 205 ; rel.
as dem. 209 (N. 3).
Denominatives 180
verbs 186.
(6) ; denoni.
Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and fiifi
308 (6), 295, 296.
Dependent clauses, moods in 248.
Dependent moods 80 (§ 89, N.) ;
tenses of 248-251.
Deponent verbs 80 (top) ; principal
parts of 84 (6) ; pass, and mid.
depon. 80 (2, N.).
Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225 ;
w. two ace. 217.
Derivatives 180 (b).
Desiderative verbs 186 (N. 1).
Desire, vbs. expr. w. gen. 222 (2).
Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2).
Determinative compounds 190 (2).
Diaeresis in verse 316, 317, 319 (end),
321 (4), 322 (top), 323 (4).
Dialects 2 ; dialectic changes 25 ;
dial, forms of nouns and adj. 31,
34, 43 (N. 4), 44 (N. 3), 45 (N. 4),
46 (N.), 47 (N. 3) ; of numerals 69 ;
of the article 71 (N. 2) ; of pro-
nouns 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78 ;
of verbs in w 151-153, of contract
vbs. 154, 155, of vbs. in fit 170-
172, 173, 174, 176, 177, 178, 179.
Oigamma6 (N. 2), 45 (N. 1), 46 (N.),
123 (N. 2), 126 (2), 139 (d, N. 1) ;
seen in metre 322 (1st note).
IHiambus 313.
Dimeter 317 (2) ; anapaestic 323,
dartylic 321 (1), iambic 319 (2),
trochaic 318 (1).
!>i!iiinutives, suffixes of 184 (8).
I 'iphthongs 6 ; iinproper 6 (3 and N. ) ;
in contraction 9 (1, 4) ; in crasis
10 (a), 11 (6) ; elision of (poet.) 12
(top) ; augment 122*
Dipody 317 (2),
Direct object 191 (2), 213 (Rem.) ;
of act. verb 213, 244. Direct dis-
course, question, and quotations
281.
Disadvantage, dat. of 231 (3).
Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. par-
tic. 303 (1).
Dispraise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224(1);
Disputing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (N. 2).
Distich 318 (4) ; elegiac 321 (5).
Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2) ;
w. infin. and fMrj 308 (6), 295, 296.
Ditrochee 313; in Ionic rhythms 325
.(2)-
Divide, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
217.
Dochmius 313 ; dochmiac verses 326.
Doing, ■■ 'js. of, w. two ace. 217.
Doric dialect 2 ; future 152 (6), in
Attic 136 (N. 2).
Double consonants 7, 14 (2), 17 (§ 19,
2).
Double negatives 309, 310, 292, 295,
296. See /irj o6 and ov /jlt^.
Doubtful vowels 6.
Dual 26 (end).
JfTect, accus. of 214 (N. 3.).
Elegiac pentameter and distich 321
(5).
Elision 11, 12; ofdiphthongsl2(top);
irepl, irp6, 6ti, and dat. in t not
elided 12 ; accent of elided word 20
(3).
Ellipsis of verb w. &u 256 (3) ; of (TKonei.
w. 6ir(os and fut. ind. 262 (N. 4) ;
of vb. of fearing w. ui) and subj.
262 (N. 2) ; of i»rotasis 271 (2); of
apodosis 273 (N. 2).
Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1).
Enclitics 23, 24 ; w. accent if em-
phatic 24 (3, N. 1); at end of
compounds 24 (N. 3) : successive
end. 24 (N. 2).
Endings 26 (2) ; case-endings of
nouns, 28, 32, 35 ; local 52 ; per-
sonal endings of erbs 142-160 ;
see Contents, p. xviii.
i
384
ENGLISH INDEX.
!•
II, |i
Endure, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(end).
Envy, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1) ;
w. dat. 230 (2).
Epic dialect 2.
Epicene nouns 27 (2, N. 2).
Ethical dative 232 (N. 6).
Euphony of vowels 8-12 ; of conso-
nants 13-16.
Eupolideanverse317(lstN.),325(7).
Exclamations, noni. in 213 (N.), voc.
213 (2), gen. 225 (3); relat. in
212 ; mark of 25.
Exhorting, vbs, of, w. dat. 230 (2).
Exhortations : see Connnands.
Expecting, kc, vbs. of, w. fut. pies.
or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2).
Extent, accus. of 216 ; adnom. gen.
denoting 219 (5).
Falling rhythms, 317 (3).
Fearing, verbs of, w. /*?) and subj. or
opt. 259, 262, sometimes w. fut.
ind. 262 (N. 1), w. pres. or past
tense of indie. 262 (N. 3) ; ellipsis
of 262 (N. 2).
Feet (in verse) 311, 312, 313 ; ictus
of, 311 ; arsis and thesis, 311.
Fpininine nouns 27 (N. 3) ; form in
participles 149 (end), in 2 pf. par-
tic. (Horn.) 139 (N. 4). Feminine
caesura 321 (4).
Festivals, names of, in dat. of time
235.
Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and gen.
223 (2).
Final clauses 259-261, w. subj. and
opt. 260 (l), w. subj, after past
tenses 260 (2), rarely w. fut. ind.
260 (1, N. 1) ; w. ««' or /ce 260 (1,
N. 2) ; w. past tenses of indie.
261 (3) ; neg. fi-^ 260 (top). Final
disting. from object* clauses 259.
Find, ybs. signif. to, w. partic. 303
(2).
Finite moods, 80 (N.).
First aorist stem, 83, 137.
First passive stem, 83, 140.
Fitness, &c., verbal adj. denot., for-
mation of, 185 (13).
Forbidding, vbs. of, w. /x^ and infin.
308 (6), 295, 296.
Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (2) ;
w. partic. 304 (end).
Formation of words 180-190 ; see
Contents, p. xix.
Friendliness, vbs. ex'or. : w. dat. 230
(2).
Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w.
gen. 223 ; adject. 228 (top). Ful-
ness, formation of 'adj. expr. 185
(15).
Future 80, 82 ; tense stem formetl
82, 135 (II.) ; of liquid verbs ISO
(2) ; Attic fut. in w and -ovfiai 136
(N. 1) ; Doric fut. 152 (6), in Attic
136 (N. 2); second fut. pass. 141;
fut. mid. as pass. 246 (N. 4). Fut.
indie, expressing permission or
command 247 (N. 8) ; rarely in
final clauses 260 (N. 1) ; logularly
in object clauses with 6irm 261 ;
rarely with /xt) after verbs of fear-
ing 262 (N. 1) ; in protasis 265,
269 (N. 1), 267 (N.) ; in rel.
clauses expressing purpose 278 ;
with i<t> V or ^0' i^rre 278 (N. 2) ;
with ov 1X7} 292 ; with 6.v (Hom.)
254 ; periphrastic fut. with fiiWw
151 (6), 250 (N.) ; optative 250
(4), 251 (N. 3), 261 (§ 217), never
w. &v 255 (N.); infin. 250 (3 and
N.), 251 (N. 2), 285 ; partic. 252,
285, 300 (3).
Future peri'ect 80, 83 ; tense stem
formed 83, 139 (c) ; active form
in 2 vbs. 139 (c, N. 2), gen. peri-
phrastic 151 (3) ; meaning of 246,
as emph. fut. 247 (N. 9).
Gender, natural and grammatical 27
(2, N. 1) ; grammat. design, by
article 27 (2, N. 1) ; common and
epicenii 27 (2, N. 2) ; general rules
27 (N. 3) ; gen. of 1st decl. 28, of
2d 31, of 3d 49; gen. of adjv\"tives
197.
General disting. from particular sup-
po.sitions 265, 266 ; foi-ms of 270,
276 ; w. indie. 270 (N. 2), 277
(N. 1) ; in Latin 266 (Rem. 1).
Genitive case 27 (3) ; accent 21, 22 •
of 1st decl. 28-31 ; of 2d decl. 32-
34; of 3d decl. 35, 4f (i, iN.), 44
ENGLISH INDEX.
385
and infin.
.. 222 (2) ;
-190 ; see
w. dat. 230
. expr., w-
top). Fui;
j. expr. 10^
item fovnuH^
id verbs Ui(>
[id -ovfiai 136
2 (6), in Attic
it. pass. 111".
(N.4). Fut-
permission or
8) ; rarely m
1) -, logniarly
ith 6tw$ 261 ;
verbs of fear-
1 protasis 265,
(K.); inrel.
purpose 27 » ,
rr\ 278 (N. 2) ;
nth &v (Horn.)
ut. with /A^X^w
. optative 250
1 (8 217), never
fill. 250 (3 aiKl
i5 ; partic. 252,
63 ; tense steiu
I) ; active form
I.' 2), gen. peri-
,nieaiung of 246,
iN. 9).
<nammatical 2(
Jnmt. design, by
I) ; common ami
\\ . ceneral rules
1 1st decl. 28, ot
^en. of adjectives
1 particular sup-
. foi-ms of 270,
270 (N. 2), 2i7
[266 <^em. 1).
• accent 21, jf >
. of 2d decl. 02-
Mf (i.i^.). **
(\. 2) ; syntax 218 (Rem.), 219-
229 : see Contents p. xx., xxi. ;
gen. absol. 229, 302 ; gen. of inliu.
w. ToO 295 ; juod. gen. w. inliii.
194 (end) 195, 198 (N. 8).
Gentile nouns, suHixes of 184 (10),
185 (top).
Glyconic verse 324 (4).
Gnomic tenses 252, 253 ; present 252
(l);aori8t252(2),253,248(Keni.),
in infin., opt., and partic. 253
(N. 3) ; perfect 253 (3).
Grave accent 18, 19 ; for acute in
oxytones 20 (top).
Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2) ;
w. partic. 304.
Hellenes 1.
Hellenistic Greek 2 (end).
Herodotus, dialect of 2.
Heroic hexameter 321 (4).
Heteroclites 49 (end).
Heterogeneous nouns 50 (2).
Hexameter 317 (2) ; Heroic 321 (4).
Hiatus, how avoided 8 (§ 8) ; allowed
at end of vei-se 316 (c).
Hindrance, vbs. of, w. jn^ and infin.
308 (6), 295, 296.
Hii)pocrates, dialect of 2.
Historic present 246 (N. 1), 248
(Rem.).
Historical (or secondary) tenses : see
Secondary.
Hit, vbs. signif. to, av. gen. 222 (1).
H«)ld, vbs. signif. to take hold of, w.
gen. 222(1).
Homer, dialect of 2 ; verse of 321
(4) ; Hellenes of 1 (end).
Hoping, &c,, vbs. of, w. fut., pres.,
or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2).
Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Hypothetical: see Conditional.
Iambus 313. Iambic rhythms 319,
320; tragic and comic iambic trim-
eter 320 ; iambic systems 323
(N.).
l!iiperativo 80 ; pers. endings and
conn, vowels 148, 149 ; of verbs
in fu 156 (end) ; syntax 258 ; in
commands 290 ; in prohib. w. fi-^
(pres.) 291 ; w. Aye, (f>4pe, Wi, 2n
(top); after olad' 6 290 (N.); per-
fect 249 (N. 1), 85 (end).
Imperfect tense 80 ; secondary 80 ;
from present stem 82 (I.), 135 (I.) ;
augment 84 (c), 119 ; person, end-
ings 142 (2) ; conn, vowel 144
(1), 145, w. endings 145 ; /ii-
fonns 156, 157 (end) ; iterat. end-
ings (TKov and (tkoultjv (Ion.) 152
(10), 253 (N.). Syntax 246 ; how
disting. from aor. 247 (N. 5) ; de-
no^Mig attempted action 246 (N.
2); how expr. in infin. and partic.
251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1), 285, in
opt. (rarely) 283 (N. 1); w. av
254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. &v
253 ; in conditions 264, 267, in
Homer 268 (N. 3) ; in rel. eond.
sentences 276 (2) ; in wishes 290
(2); in final clauses 261 (3).
Impersonal verbs 192 (c, d), 193
(N. 2) ; partic. of, in accus. abs.
302 (2) ; impers. verbal in -Hw
306 (top).
Improper diphthongs 6.
Inceptive class of verbs (VI.) 129,
130 (N. 4).
Inclination, formation of adj. denot-
ing 185 (16).
Indeclinable nouns 50 (4),
Indefinite pronouns 76, 209 ; pro-
nominal adj. 78, adveibs 79.
Indicative 80 ; personal endings and
formation 142-145; connect, vow-
els 144, 145 ; tenses of 246, 247,
primary and secondary (or histori-
cal) 248. General use of 256, 257 ;
in final clauses : rarely fut. 2C0
(N. 1), second, tenses 261 (3) ; in
object cl. w. ciTrws (fut.) 261 ; after
verbs of fearing w. jUi) : rarely
fut. 262 (N. 1), pres. and past
tenses 262 (end) ; in protasis :
pres. and past tenses 264 (1), 267
(1), in gen. suppos. for subj. 270
(end) ; future 265 (1), 269 (N. 1),
267 (N.) ; second, tenses in supp.
contr. to fact 264 (2), 267 ; in
cond. rel. and temp, clauses 276,
277, by assimilation 278 (2) ;
in apodosis 267, 269, second,
tenses w. dv 254 (3), 264 (2), 267,
386
ENGLISH INDEX.
■■
■ :
1
mi
mi
■■• ■
)
2t)8 ; potential indie, w. &v 272 ;
in wishes (second, tenses) 290 ; in
causal sent. 288 ; in rel. sent, of
purpose (tut.) 278 ; fut. w. i<p' ^
01- i<p' ^T( 278 (N. 2) ; w. ^wj, &c.
279 ; w. TpLv 280 ; in indirect (juo-
tations and questions 281-283 ;
future w. oil ni) 292. See Present,
Future, Aorist, &c.
indirect compounds (verbs) 18© (7),
124. Indir. object of verb 191
(end), 213 (Rem.), 230. Indirect
Discourse 250 (Rem.), 281-288 :
see Contents, p. xxv. Indir. quo-
tations and questions 281, 306,
307. Indir. reflexives 205, 206.
Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 226
(2).
Infinitive 80; endnigs 149; /it-forms
157 (e); syntax 292-299: see Con-
tents, p. xxvi. Tenses of, not in
indir. disc. 248, 249, in indir. disc.
250, 251, distinction of the two
uses 285 (N.) ; impf. and plpf.
suppl. by pres. and pf. 251 ( N . 1 ) ;
w. 6.V 255 ; gnomic aor. in 253
(N. 3), perf. 253 (3); w. mA\w
151 (6), 250 (N.); w. <&0eXo./ in
wishes (poet.) 290 (N. 1, 2); nega-
tive of 308 (3), /iij oil with 309
(7), 295 (N.), 296 (N.). Rel. w.
infin. 294 (top).
Inflection 26.
Instrument, dat. of 234; suffixes de-
noting 183 (5).
Intensive pronoun 72 (N. 1), 206
(1); w. dat. of accompaniment 235
(5, N.).
Intention, partic. expr. 300.
Interchange of quantity 33 (N. 2),
45 (N. 1).
Interest, dative of 231, 232.
Interrogative pronoun 76, 208; pron.
adj. 78 ; adverbs 79 ; sentences
306, 307; subjunctive 291, 284.
Intransitive verbs 192 (top); cognate
object of 213 ; verbs both trans,
and intrans. 243 (Notes).
Inverted assimilation of relatives 211
(N. 4).
Ionic race and dialect 1, 2. Ionic
feet 313, rhythms 325.
lotr, class of verbs (IV. ) 126-128.
Iota subscript 6 (§ 3, N. ).
Irregular nouns 49-52 ; adjectives
62, 63, comparison 65, 66; vi'ilis
130, 131 (Rem.).
Italy, Dorians of 1. '
Iterative iniperf. and aorist w. &v
253 ; origin of 253 (Rem.). Itera-
tive forms in okov, aKbyiifif (Ion.)
152(10); w. Siv2b'i (N.)
Ithyphallic verse 319 (top).
Know, vbs. signif. to, w. jmrtic. 304.
Koppa, as numeral 6, 68.
Labials 7 ; labial mutes 8 ; euphonic
changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; euph. ch.
of V before 15 (5) ; labial verb
stems 82 (3); 126 (111.;, 127, in
perf. act. 138 (A).
Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304.
Letters 5 ; used fir numbei-s 70 (N. 4).
Likeness, dat. of 233 ; abridged
expr. w. adject, of 233 (N. 2).
Linguals 7 ; lingual mutes 8 ; cn-
phon. changes of 14 (1, 2, 3), i* w.
ling, dropped bef. ff 15 (N. 1); ling.
vei-b stems 82 (3), 127 (ft).
Liquids 7, 8 ; i* before 15 (6) ; w. t
in stems 16 (top) ; vowel bef.
mute and liquid 17 (3) ; liijuid
verb stems 82 (3), 127 (2), 128,
future of 136 (2), aorist of 137 (2),
133 (5), change of e to a in mono-
syll. 133 (4).
Local endings 52.
Locative case 52 (N. 2), 212 (Rem.),
230 (Rem).
Logaoedic rhythms 323-325.
Long vowels, 17, 18 ; how augmented
120 (N. 1).
Make, vbs. olgnif. to, w. two ace. 218 r
w. ace. and gen. 221 ; in pass. w.
gen. 221 (N.)
Manner, dative of 234 (1), w. com'»
par. 234 (2) ; partic. of 300.
Masculine nouns 27 (N. 3) : see Gen-
der.
Material, adj. denoting 185 (14) j
gen. of 219 (4).
ENGLISH INDEX.
387
Means, dative of 234; partic. of
300 ; suHixes denoting 183 (5).
Meiwuio, gen. of 219 (5).
Metathesis 13, 134 (a), 138 (5).
Metre 312 (top) ; related to rlivthnj
312 (N.)
Mt-fornis 156 (Rem.) ; enumeration
of 168-170. See Contents, p.
xviii.
Middle mutes 8 (2), 17 (end).
Middle voice 79 (end) endings 142 ;
conn, vowels 144, w. endings 145 ;
three uses 245 ; in causative sense
245 (N. 2) ; peculiar meaning of
245 (N. 3) ; fut. in pass, sense 246
(N. 4).
Miss, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1).
Mixed class of verbs (V 111.) 130, 131;
mixed forms of conditional sen-
tence 273.
Modern Greek 3.
Molossus 313.
Monometer 317.
Moods 80 ; finite 80 (N.) ; depend-
ent 80 (N.) ; general uses of 256-
258 ; constructions of (i.-viii. )
259-292 ; see Contents, pp. xxiii.-
xxvi.
Movable consonants 12.
Mutes 8 ; co-ordinate and cognate 8
(2) ; euphonic changes of 14, 15 ;
vowel before mute and li»niid 17
(3) ; mute verb stems 82 (o\, 125
(II.), 126, 127, fut. of 135 (1), aor.
of 137 (1), perf. act. of 138 (b).
Name or cal^ vbs. signif. to, w. two
ace. 218 ; w. ace. and gen. 221;
in pass. w. gen. 221 (N.).
Nasals 7, 8 (top).
Nature, vowel long or short by 17.
Negatives 307-310 : see Ov and Mi}.
Neglect, vbs. signif., w. gen. 222 (2).
Neuter gender 27 (2) : see Gender.
Neuter plur. w. sing, verb 193 (2) ;
neut. pred. adj. 197 (N. 2, c) ;
neut. smg. of adj. w. art. 199 (2) ;
neut. adj. as cognate accus. 214
(N. 2), 244 (end); neut. accus. of
adj. as adverb 67 ; neut. partic. of
impers. vbs. in accus. absol. 302
(2); verbal in Woi' 306.
Nominative case 26 ; singular of 3tl
dec), formed 36, 37 ; subj. noui.
193, 212 ; pred. noin. 194, w. in-
lin. 194 (end), 195 (N. 4), 198
(N. 8) ; in exclam. like voc, 213
(N. ); in a])pos. w. sentence 196
(N. 3) ; infin. as nom. 293, 193
(N. 2). Plur. nom., gener. neut.,
w. .sing, verb 193 (2), rarely masc.
or fem. 194 (N. 5), 210 (N. 2).
Sing. nom. w. plur. verb: of ool-
le(;t. noun 193 (3), of relative 209
(N. 2).
Nouns 28-52 : see Contents, p. xvi.
Number 26; of adject., peculiarities
in agreement 197.
Numerals 68-70.
Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2).
Object, defined 191 (eud) ; direct and
indirect 191, 213 (Rem.) ; direct
obj. (accus.) 213, as subj. of pass.
244 ; indirect obj. (dat. ) 230-
232 ; gen. as object of verb 218,
of noun 219 (3), of adject. 227,
228 ; double obj. ace. 217. Ob-
ject of motion, by accus. w. pre-
pos. 230 (Rem.), 241 (N. 1), by
accus, alone (poetic) 216.
Objective genitive 219 (3). Objec-
tive comix)unds 189 (1).
Oblique cases 27 (end).
Omission of augment 124 ; of subj
nom. 192 (N. 1) ; of subj. of infin
192 (3), 194 (end), 198 (N. 8) •
of antecedent of rel. 210 ; of fid in
oaths 216 (end) ; of &v in a])ou.
w. 7ndic. 268 (N. 1), w. opt. 27C
(N. 1) : of protasis 271 (2) ; of
apodosis 273 (N. 2). See Ellipsis.
()l»en vowels 6 (§ 2, N.) ; in contrac-
tion 9 (top).
Optative 80 ; pers. endings and for-
mation 146-148 ; Aeolic forms in
aor. act. (Attic) 153 (13) ; Ionic
-aro for -vto 151 (end) ; peculiar
^t-forms 158 (top) ; in verbs in
vvfii 158 (N. 5) ; periphr. forms of
perf. 150 (1, 2), 85 (end). Tenses:
not in indir. discourse, pres. and
aor. 248 (end), 249 (1), perf. 249
(2), never fut. 250 (4) ; in indir.
588
ENGLISH INDEX.
t>
<•
■■*♦
i>
M
1*
;l
t
t
"^
jl
■ ■ii
i
II
1
I
f-t
disc. 250, 251, future 251 (N. 3),
2H1 ; how fill- (listing, aa primary
and secondary 'MS (N. 2). (leneral
uses of o»'t 258 (3) ; in final
clauses 2G0 (1); in obj. cl. w.
6vws (sometimes fut.) 261 ; w. fi-q
after vbs. of fearing 262 ; in prot-
asis 265 (2), 269 (2), in gen.
suppos. 266 (fc), 27ij ; in apod. w.
Af 255, 269 (2), rarely without dv
270 (N. 1), w. dv without protasis
expressed 271 (2), potential opt.
272 (b) ; in cond. rel. sent, (as in
protasis) 276 (4), in gen. suppos.
276 (end), by assimilation 277 (1);
w. ?ws, &c., until 279, w. irpiv 280 ;
indirect discourse : w. 8ti or ws
282, 283, w. dv (retained) 284
(end); in dependent clauses of 285,
286; in any dependent clause expr.
past thought 287 ; in causal sen-
tences 289 (N. ); in wishes, alone
or w. eWe or et ydp 289 (1), w. ei
alone 289 (N. 1), w. ws (poetic)
289 (N. 2), expr. concession, &c.
(Hom.) 289 (N. 3). Future only
in indir. discourse 251 (N. 3), or
in obj. cl. w. Sttws (involving ind.
disc.) 261, rare in rel. cl. of
purpose 278 (N. 3) ; never w. dv
255 (N.).
Oratio obliqua : see Indirect Dis-
course.
Ordinal numerals 68.
Overlook, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (3).
Oxy tones 19.
Paeons 313 (c) ; in Cretic rhythms
326 (3).
Palatals 7 ; as mutes 8 (2) ; euphonic
changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; v before
15 (5) : pal. verb stems 82 (3),
126 (a), 127 (N. 1), in perf. act.
138 (b).
Paroemiac verse 323 (3).
Paroxytone 19.
Par*^*:^iple 80 ; formation 149 ; de-
clension 53 (end), 59-62; Doric
and Aeol. forms 153 (15) ; of
Mt-form 157 (/), 167 (1), 172 (10),
2 perf. in au>s orciis 62 (N.), 139
■-^1
(N. 2, 3); accent 22 (end), 23
(top). Tenses 252; prt'S. as ini-
perf. 252 (N. 1) ; aor. \s. \avOdvw,
Tvyxavu, fpOdpii), not past 304 (4),
252 (N. 2) ; partic. w. dfxa,n€Ta^v,
ciWj, &c. 301 (N. 1, a), w. Kaivep
or Kal 301 (N, 1, 6), w. tij 301 (N. 2,
«), 305 (N. 4), w. dT€, oto, ola, 301
( N. 2, b), w. (SffTre/) 302 ( N. 3) ; fut.
of purpose 300 (3) ; conditional
301 (4), 271 (1); as apodosis 272
(3), w. dv 273 (top), 255, 256 ;
perf. w. ^x*** forming periphr.
perf. 303 (N. 2), w. dyil forming
periphr. perf. subj. and opt. 150
(1, 2) or indie. 151 (4) ; in gen.
absol. 229, 302 (1), accus. abs. 302
(2) ; partic. alone in gen. abs. 302
(1, N.) j plur. w. sing, collective
noun 197 (N. 3). Three uses of
partic. 299 ; for details of these,
in pp. 300-305, see Contents, p.
xxvii.
Particular and general supjwsitious
distinguished 265, 266.
Partitive genitive 219 (6), 220, 221,
222. Partitive apposition 196
(N. 2.)
Passive voice 79 (1) ; personal end-
ings 142 ; conn, vowels 144, w.
endings 145 ; aor. pass, formed
like active 142 (1) ; use of 243-
245 ; subject of 244 ; retains one
object from active constr. 244 ( N.
2) ; impersonal pass, constr. 244
(end), 245 (top), 192 (end).
Patronymics, suffixes of 184 (9).
Pause in verse : caesura 316 (1),
diaeresis 316 (end), 317.
Pentameter, elegiac 321 (end), 322.
Penthemim (2^ feet) 322 (top).
Penult 17 (top).
Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2); w, partic. 303 (2andN.), 304
(end).
Perfect tense 80 ; primary 80 (2) ;
tense stem 83, 137-139 ; persoiuil
ending 142 ; connect, vowel 144,
145, w. endings 145 (2) ; changes
in vowel of stem 131-134 ; augment
120, 121 ; Att. reduplic. 122 ; sec-
ond perf. 80 (N. 1), 83, 1^2 (3),
139 (d), of the /«-form 167, 169,
~ '"-' - ••- -
ENGLISH INDEX.
389
(end), 23
s. as im-
\avf>avu),
t 304 (i),
w. KaiiTfp
301 (N. 2,
oy, ola, 301
N.3)-, fut.
joixUtional
lodosis 272
255, 256 ;
y i)eviphr.
IfiL foviuing
x\ oi>t. 150
t) ; in gen.
lis. abs. 302
en. abs. 302
|f. collective
'hvee uses of
Us of these,
Contents, p.
suppositions
6), 220, 221,
ositiou 196
hersonal end-
tels 144, w.
pass, formed
\ use of 243-
• retains one
nstr. 244 (N.
'. oonstr. 244
(end).
184(9).
ma 316 (1),
117.
(end), 322.
12 (top).
, w. gen. 222
t'and!^.), 304
Inary 80 (2);
Il39 ; personal
:. vowel 144,
(2) ; changes
ll34 ; augment
llic. 122 ; sec-
l 83, 1.2(3),
[rm 167, 169,
170 ; perf. mid. w. <r inserted 132
(2); perf. in Homer 139 (top).
Perf. indie. 246; as pres. 247 (N.
6) ; w. fut. meaning 247 (N. 7) ;
never w. &v 254 (1) ; gnomic 253
(3), rarely in infin. 253 (3); 3
pars. pi. mid. in arai (for i/roi) 151
(end) ; compound form 151 (4, 5),
111 (2). In dependent moods:
not in indir. disc. 249 (2), imperat.
249 (N. 1), infin. 249 (N. 2) ; opt.,
infin., and pavtic. in indirect disc.
250, 251, 281 ; infin. includes plpf.
251 (N. 1), w. &v 255 (end) ; com-
pound form of pf. subj. and opt.
150 (1, 2), 85 (end).
Perfect active stem 83, 138 (ft).
Perfect middle stem 83, 137 (end),
138.
Periphrastic forms, of perf. 150 (1,
2), 151 (4, 5) ; of fut. vv. fieXXu
151 (6), 250 (N.) ; of fut. perf. 151
(3).
Perispomena 19.
Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Person of verb 81 (top) ; agreement
w. subj. in 193 (1) ; subj. of first
or second pers. omitted 192 (N. 1),
third person 192 (N. 1) ; p. of rel.
pron. 209 (N. 1). See Personal
Endings. Personal endings of
verb 142-151 : see Contents, p.
xviii.
Personal pronoun 71-73, 205, 206 ;
omitted 192 (N. 1) ; of third pers.
in Attic 205 (a), in Hom. and Hdt.
205 (b) ; substituted for rel. 212
(§ 156).
Pherecratic verses 324.
Pity, vbs. expr. vv. gen. 224 (1).
Place, suffixes denoting 183 (6) ; ad-
verbs of 7r, 52, w. gen. 229 (2) ;
accus. of (whither?) 216; gen. of
(within which) 227 (2) ; dat. of
(where?) 236.
Please, vbs. .signif. to, w. dat. 230(2).
Pleased, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic.
303 (1).
Pluperf^t 80 ; formation from perf.
stem 83 (IV.), 137-139: see Per-
fect ; endings 142 ; conn, vowel
145 (top), w. endings 145 (2) ; in -rj
for -eiv 146 (N. 4) ; Ion. form in -eo
152 (4); augment 121 (4); Att-
redupl. 122 (N. 2) ; .second plpf. 80
(N. 1), 83, 132(3), 139 (d), of the
/Lit-form 167, 169, 170 ; secondary
tens3 80 (§ 90, 2), 248 ; as impf. 247
(N. 6), in protasis 256, 257 (top),
267 (1), w. suppos. contr. to fact
267 (2), how disting. from impf.
and aor. 268 (top) ; w. dtc 254 (3),
267 (2) ; expr. in infin. by jierf.
251 (N. 1), inf. w. dv 255 (end);
comi)ound form w. ei/d 151 (4).
Plural 26 (end) ; neut. w. sing, verb
193 (2) ; verb w. sing, collect, noun
193 (3) ; adj. or relat. w. several
sing, nouns 197, 209 (N. 2, a) ;
plur. autec. of SffTis 209 (N. 2, b).
Position, vowels long by 17.
Possession, gen. of 219 (1), 221 (top) ;
dat. of 232 (4).
Possessive pronouns 74, 207 ; w. ar-
ticle 200 (c), 202 (top). Possessive
compounds 190 (3). Our own,
your own, &c. 207 (N. 4).
Potential opt. and iudic. w. &v 272
(6).
Praise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1).
Predicate 191 (1); pred. noun and
adj. w. verbs 194, 195, 198 (N. 8) ;
noun without article 201 (N. 8) ;
pred. adject. 196 (Rem.), 197 (N.2,
7), 198 (N. 8), position of w. art.
203 (3) ; pred. accus. w. obj. ace.
218 ; infin. as pred. 292.
Prepositions, w. gen., dat., and accus.
236-242 ; accent when elided 20
(end); anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2),
242 ; tmesis 241 (N. 3) ; augment
of comp. verbs 123, 124 ; prep, as
adv. 236, 241 (N. 2), 242 (N. 5) ;
in comp. w. gen., dat., or ace. 242
(end), 226, 233 ; w. rel. by as-
simil. 211 (N. 1) ; w. infin. 295
(top).
Present stem 82 (I.), 85, 156, 1.57;
formation 125-131.
Present tense 80 (1) ; primary, 80,
248 ; formation 125-131 ; endings
142; connect, vowel 144 (1), w.
endings 145 (2) ; of /it-form 156,
157. Pres. indie. 246 ; historic
(for aor.) 246 (N. 1), 248 (Rei».^;
390
ENGLISH INDEX.
.^■'
gnomic 252 (1); expr. attempt
246 (N. 2) ; of fJKW and otxofMi as
perf. 246 (end) ; of elfu as fut. 247
(top); w. TrdXat, &c. 247 (N. 4) ;
never w. Av 254. Pics, in depend-
ent moods : not in indirect disc.
how disting. from aor. 249 (1),
from perf. 249 (2) ; in indir. disc,
opt. and intin. 250 (end), prcs. for
impf. in opt., infin., and partic.
283 (N. 1), 251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1),
285.
Price, genitive of 227.
Primary or principal tenses 80 (2),
248 ; how far recogn. in dependent
mooda 248 (N. 2).
Primitive word 180 (2).
Principal parts of verbs 83 (5), of
deponents 84 (6).
Proclitics 24.
Prohibitions w. iu.ij 291 ; w. ov /iiq 292
(N.).
Promising, verbs of, w. fut., pres., or
aor. inttn. 251 (N. 2).
Pronominal adj. and adv. 78, 79.
Pronouns 71-79, 205-212 : see Con-
tents, pp. xvii., xix. ; some encli-
tic 23 (1, 2), accent retained after
accented prepos. 24 (N. 1). See
Personal, Relative, &c.
Pronunciation: see Preface, pp. x.-.\ii.
Proparoxy tones 19.
Prosecute, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
224 (2).
Protasis 263 ; forms of 263-267 ;
expr. in partic, adv., &c. 271 (1) ;
omitted 271 (2). In cond. rel. and
tempor. sentences 275 ; forms 275-
277.
Prove, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304
(end).
Punctuation marks 25.
Pure syllables 17 (§18, 2) ; verbs
82 (N.).
Purpose : expr. by final clause 259 ;
by rel. cl. w. fut. indie. 278, in
Hom. by subj. 278 (N. 1); im-
plied in cl. w. ?ws, Tplv, &c. 280
(N. 2); by infin. 296 (end); by
i<f) 4>or ^<p' ^re w. infm. 297 (end);
by fut. partic. 300 (3) ; sometimes
by gen. 224 (N. 1), by gen. of '"ntin.
. 296(2).
Quality, nouns denot. 183 (7).
Quantity of syllables 17 ; relation to
rhythm 312 (N.).
Questions, direct and indirect disting.
281 ; direct 306, 307, of doubt, w.
subj. 291 ; indirect, w. indie, or
opt. 281, 282, 283, w. subj. or opt.
284.
Recessive accent 19 (3).
Reciprocal pronoun 74 ; reflexive used
for 207 (N. 3).
Reduplication, of perf. stem 84 (c),
119 (c), 120, 121 ; of 2 aor. 120
(N. 3), 134 (c) ; of present 1S4 (c),
129 (end), in verbs in tii 157 (3),
168 (2) ; in plpf. 121 (4). Attic
redupl. in perf. 122, in 2 aor. 120
(N. 4), in pres. (of dpaplaKw) 129
(end).
Reflexive pronouns 73, 206 ; used for
reciprocal 207 (N. 3) ; 3d pers. for
1st or 2nd 207 (N. 2). Indirect
reflexives 205 (a), 206 (end).
Relation, adject, denoting 185 (12).
Relative pronouns 77, Homer, forms
78 (top) ; pronom. adj. 78, ad-
verbs 79 ; relation to antecedent
209 ; antec. om. 210 ; assimilation
of rel. to case of antec. 210, 211,
of antec. to case of rel. 211 (N. 4);
assim. in rel. adv. 211 (N. 3) ;
attraction of antec. 211, joined w.
assim. 211 (N.) ; rel. not repeated
212 ; rel. asdemonstr. 209 (N. 3) ;
in exclam. 212. Relative and tem-
poral sentences 274-281 : see Con-
tents, pp. xxiv., XXV.
Release, vbs. signif. to w. gen. 225.
Remember, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2) ; w. partic. 304.
Reminding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217;
w. ace. and gen. 223 (N. 3).
Remove, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Repent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303
Represent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (2).
Reproach, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Resemblance, vbs. implying, w. dat.
233.
Respect, dative of 232 (5).
ENGLISH INDEX.
391
Eition
to
t disting.
Lovibt, w.
indie, ov
j. or opt.
exive
used
!C
sm 84 (c),
5 aor. 120
!nt 134(c),
iu 157 (3),
(4). Attic
2 aor. 120
xpLffKw) 129
6 ; used for
3d pevs. for
). Indirect
(end).
1 185 (12).
lomer. forma
ij. 78, ad-
antecedent
assimilation
210, 211,
211 (N. 4);
fell (N. 3) ;
1, joined w.
not repeated
209 (N. 3) ;
ive and tem-
1 : see Con-
f. gen. 225.
to, w. gen.
Itwo ace. 217 ;
1(N. 3).
I vr. gen. 225.
Iw. partic. 303
Ito, w. partic.
,. dat. 230 (2).
llyiug, w. ^at*
1b).
Restrain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Result, nouns denot. 183 (4); expr.
by iiKTTe w. infiu. 297 (1), w indie.
279.
Revenge, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1).
Rhythm and metre, how related 311,
312 ; rising and falling rhythms 31 7
(3). See Anapaestic, Dactylic,
Iambic, &c.
Rhythmical series 315 (1), 316.
Rising rhythms 317 (3).
Romaic language 3.
Root and stem defined 26 (2).
Rough breathing 6.
Rough mutes 8.
Rule, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 223 (3).
San 6 (N. 2) ; as numeral 69.
Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Saying, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217 ;
constr. in indirect discourse 293
(end).
Second aorist, perfect, &c. 80 (N. 1).
Second aorist stem 83, 140.
Second passive stem 83, 141.
Second perfect stem 83, 139.
Secondary (or historical) tenses 80
(2), 248; how far recogn. in de-
pend, moods 248 (N. 2).
See, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304,
303 (2, andN.).
Semivowels 7 (end).
Sentence 191 (1); as subject 193
(N. 2).
Separation, gen. of 225, 228 (N. 2).
Septuagint 3.
Serving, vbs. of, w. dat, 230 (2).
Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen. 221 (end).
Short vowels 17 ; syllables, time of
312(1).
Show, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 804.
Sibilant (<r) 7 (end).
Sicily, Dorians in 1.
Similes (Homeric), aor. in 253 (N. 2).
Simple stem of verb 81 (2) ; forma-
tion of present from 125-131.
Singular number 26; sing. vb. w.
neut. pi. subj. 193 (2), rarely w.
masc. or fern. pi. sub]. 194 (N. 5),
fJlO (N. 2) ; several sing, nouns
w. pi. adj. 197 (N. 1),
Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2); «f«223 (Rem.).
Smooth breathing 6. Smooth mutes
8.
Sonants and surds 8 (2, N.).
Source, gen. of 226 (1).
Space, ace. of extent of, 216.
Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2).
Specification, ace. of 215.
Spondee 313 ; for anapaest 322 ; for
dactyl 321 ; for iambus or trochee
315, 318, 319, 320. Spondaic hex-
ameter verse 321 (4).
Stem and root 26 (2). Stems of
verbs 81-84, 125-141 : see Con-
tents, p. xviii. Simple stem 81
(2).
Strophe and antistrophe 318 (4).
Subject 191, modified 191 (N. 2) ; of
finite vb. 192 (1), omitted 192
( N. 1 ) ; of infin. 192 ( 2 ), 298 (§ 269,
N.), omitted 192 (3); infin. or
sentence as subj. 193 (N. 2); agree-
ment of subj. w. finite vb. 193 ; of
passive 243, 244.
Subjective genitive 219 (2).
Subjunctive 80; pers. endings and
formation 146; peculiar /;i.(-forms
158 (N. 2, 4) ; in vbs. in wm 368
(N. 5); Ionic forms 153 (12), in 2
aor. act. of /ii-form 171 (7) ; peri-
phr. forms in perf. 150 (1, 2), 85
(end). Tenses : pres. and aor. 248,
249 (1), perf. 249 (2). General
uses 257 (2) : in final cl. 260 (1) ;
in obj. cl. w. 6irus or ws (for fut.
indie. ) 261 ; w. /ui^ after vbs. of
fearing 262; in prptasis 265 (1),
269 (1), in gen. suppos. 266 (a),
270 ; w. di' or k4 in prot. 254, 269,
270, in poetry without &v 269 (N.
2), 271 (N. 2); iu apod. w. dv or k4
(Epic) 255 (2), 291; in cond. rel.
sent, (as in prot.) 276 (3), in gen.
suppos. 276 (end), by assim. 277
(1), w. ^ws, &c., until 279, w. irpiv
280 ; in exhortations 290 (end), w.
dye, &c. 291 (top); in prohibitions
(nor. ) w. /xtJ 291 ; w. ov fir/ 292 ; in
(|ut'stions of doubt 291, retained in
indirect form 284 ; in rel. cl. of
purpose (Hom«r.) 278 (N, 1);
-J^
31)2
ENGLISH INDEX.
iV
* i
li
I' i
m 'I
changed to opt. in indir. discourse
after past tenses 282.
Subscript, iota 6 (N.).
Substantive 28 (N.) : see Noun.
Suffixes 181.
Superlative degree 64-67.
Suppositions, general and particular
265, 266.
Surds and sonants 8 (2, N.).
Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 226 (2).
Swearing, particles of, w. accus. 216.
Syllaba anceps at end of verse 315
(5).
Syllabic augment 119 ; of plupf. 121
(4).
Syllables 17; division of 17 (N.);
quantity of 17, 18 ; long and short
in verse 312.
Syncope 13 (2); in nouns 47, 48;
in verb stems 134 {b) ; in feet 315
(2). ,
Synizesis 10.
Systems, tense 82 (4) ; anapaestic,
trochaic, and iambic 323.
Taste, vbs, signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2).
Tau-class of verbs 126 (III.).
Teaching, vbs. of w. two accus. 217,
214 (N. 4).
Temporal augment 119 (6), 119 (end),
121 (3); of diphthongs 122 ; omis-
sion of 124. Temporal sentences:
see Relative.
Tense stems and sys 'ms 81-84 ;
formation of 135-141 ; table of 141.
Tenses 80 ; piimary and secondary
80, 248 ; of indie. 246, 247 ; of de-
X)end. moods 248-251 ; of partic.
252 ; gnomic, 252, 253 ; iterative
253. See Present, Imperfect, &c.
Tetrameter 317 (2) ; trochaic 318 (2) ;
iambic 319 (end); dactylic 321
(3) ; anapaestic 323 (4).
Thesis 311 ; not Greek 0iaii 311 (foot-
note).
Threats, vbs. expr. w. dat. 230 (2).
Time, ace. of (extent) 216 ; gen. of
(within which) 227 ; dat. of (poet-
ic) 235 ; expr. by partic. 300, 301
(N. 1).
Tmesis 241 (end).
Touching, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (1).
Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 320.
Transitive verbs 192 (top).
Trial ol, vbs. signif. to make, w. gen.
222 (1).
Tribrach 313 ; for trochee or iambus
314 (N. 1), 318, 319.
Trimeter 317 (2) ; iambic (acatal.)
320 (4), in English 320 (end).
Tripody, trochaic 319 (top).
Trochee 313. Trochaic rhythms 318,
319.
Trust, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2).
Unclothe, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
217.
Understand, vb3. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2).
Union, &c. vbs. implying, w. dat.
233.
Value, genitive of 227.
Vau or Digamma 6 (N. 2); as numer-
al 68; dropped in noun stem 45
(N. 1), 46 (N.) ; in verb stems 123
(N. 2), 126 (2), 128 (3), 139 (rf,
N. 1).
Verbals 180 (2), 181 (top). Verbal
nouns and adj. w. object, gen. 219
(3), 227 (end), with obj. accus. 213
(N. 3). Verbals in tos 150 (3); in
T^os or T^v 150 (3), 305, 306, 235
(4).
Verbs, conjugation and formation of
79-179 : see Contents, pp. xvii.,
xviii. ; syntax of 243-306 : see
Contents, pp. xxii.-xxvii.
Verses 316 (2) ; catalectic and acata-
lectic 316 (3).
Vocative case 27 (3) ; sing, of 3d
decl. 38 ; in addresses 213 (2).
Voices 79 (1) ; uses of 243-246. See
Active, Middle, Passive.
Vowels 6 ; oi)en and close 6 (§ 2, N.).
Vowel declension (1st and 2d) 28,
35. Vowel stems of nouns 28, 31
(N.), 35 (top); of verbs 82 (3),
131 (end), 133 (6), w. vowel length-
ened 131 (1); with <r added 132
(2). Connecting vowels 143 {i),
144.
ENGLISH INDEX.
393
Want, verbs signif. 223.
307(1 ) ''^'' ''^"*'"' *° ^' '^' P*'"°-
Whole, ^<jn. of (partitive) 219, 220
•Vishes, expr. by opt. 289 (1); by
second, tenses of indie. 290 (2) •
by Ui^eAoi* w. infin. 290 (N !)•
Wondering, vbs. of, w. ,l 274, 287
i^)i sometimes w. Su 274 (§ 228,
■'^
■'^f.
i
1 ,
l
'■(
f
(
OBEEK TEXT-BOOKS.
49
White's First Lessons in Greek.
Prepared to accompauy Goodwiu's Greek Grammar, and designed as an
Introduction either to his Greek Reader or to liis Helectiona /row. Xi'un.
phon and llcrodotim, or to the Anab(i»in of Xenopiion. Ily iloiiN W;i,-
LIAMR WHrrB, Ph.D., Professor of Greek in Harvard University. 12rao.
Half-morocco, x + 280 pages. Mailing Price, ^VM; Introduction, 91.20;
Allowance for old book, 25 cents.
A SERIES of eighty lessons, with progressive Greek-English
and English-Greek Exercises, taken mainly from the Jirst four
books of Xenophon'n Anabasis. The Exercises consist wholly of
complete sentences, followed by a series of Additional Exercises
on Forms, and complete Vocabularies. These les.sons are care-
fully graded, and do not follow the order of arrangement of the
Grammar, but begin the study of the verb with the second lesson,
and then pursue it alternately with that of the remaining parts of
speech.
Alexander Kerr, Prof, of Greek,
University of Wisconsin: The best
book for beginners which I have ever
examined.
E. H. Wilion, Prin. of High School,
Middletovm, Conn. : It is the best
book for beginners in Greek I have
ever used.
Companion of Parailel References to Hadiey and
Allen's Oreek Grammar.
Designed to accompany the second edition of A Series of First Lessons
in Oreek. By John Williams White, Ph.D. iv + 45 pages. This
pamphlet accompanies all copies of White's First Lessons m Greek free
of charge, when so ordered, and thoroughly adapts the First Lessons in
Oreek to use with Hadiey & Allen's Grammar. Exact parallels have
been found to almost all the references in the Lessons, and the new
references are more than simple parallels : they are made to present the
particular point or subject fully and completely.
Leighton's New Gree/i Lessons.
With references to Hadiey' s Greek Grammar as well as to Goodwin's
New Greek Grammar. Intended as an Introduction to Xenophon's
Anabasis or to Goodwin's Greek Reader. By R. F. Leiohton, Ph.D.
(Lips.), Principal of the Fall River High School, Mass. 12mo. Half-
morocco. 283 pages. Mailing price, Sl.30; for introduction, $1.20-,
allowance, 25 cents.
A BOUT seventy easy and well-graded lessons, both Greek and
English, introduce the pupil to the first book of Xenophon's
Anabasis, from which the Exercises and Vocabularies are mainly
selected. The amount of matter to be translated into Greek is
sufficient to prepare a student for most American colleges.
■■*?»
•
If
I' if
vi >.
MV '
50
GREEK TEXT-BOOKS.
First Four Books of Xenophon's Anabasis,
With an illustrated Vocabulary. Edited by Professors W. "W. Goodwin
and John Williams White, of Harvard University. 12mo. Halt
morocco. 355 pages. Mailing Price, $1.65; Introduction, $1.60 ; Allow-
ance, 25 cents.
Without Yocabulaxy. Mailing Price, $1.10; Introduction, $1.00;
Allowance, 25 cents.
rpHE Notes are copious, and much gramniatieal aid is given,
chiefly in the form of references to the Grammar.
A colored map is added, giving the route of the Ten Thousand:
Until Professor White's Illustrated Vocabulary is ready, Profe&
8or Crosby's complete Lexicon will be bound with this edition.
I
Goodwin's Greek Reader.
Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin, of Harvard University, l^aio.
Half morocco. 384 pages. Mailing Price, $1.65 ; Introduction, $1.50 ;
Allowance, 26 cents.
/CONSISTING of Selections from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus,
and Thucydides; being the full amount of Greek Prose
required for admission to Harvard Univemty. With colored
maps, notes, and references to the revised and enlarged edition of
Goodwin's Greek Grammar.
Cebes' Tablet.
Edited with Introduction, Notes, Vocabulary, and Grammatical Ques-
tions, by Richard Parsons, Professor oi Greek, Ohio Wesleyan Univ.
12mo. Cloth. M pages. Mailing Price, 85 cents; for introd., 75 cents.
T>ESIDES being an entertaining and instructive allegory, in the
form of a lively dialogue, Cebes' Tablet is moderately easy to
construe, and not «oove the comprehension of a boy of fourteen.
As a drill-book on forms and constructions, especially on inter-
rogatives and conditional sentences, the work should come into use,
to say nothing of its own intrinsic excellence. Particular attention
is invited to the feature of questions. Recommended for the second
or third term's work as an alternative book to the Anabasis.
A. E. Wells, Prof, of Greek, Ar-
tioch Collerfe: The Anabasis never
seemed to me interesting enough to
the average student to make a fit
introduction to Greek literature. I
think this will meet my need exactly,
GKEEK TEXT-BOOKS.
61
18,
V. Goodwin
2ino. Hall
L.50 ; Allow-
tion, $1.00;
d is given,
•
Thousand*,
ady, Pro£e&
edition.
ersity. I'^joo.
iiction, $1.50;
), Herodotus,
Greek Prose
^ith colored
ed edition of
matical Ques-
^esleyan Univ.
•od., 75 cents.
egory, in the
•ately easy to
fourteen .
ally on inter-
ome into use,
liar attention
or the second
abasis.
to make a fit
literature. 1
y need exactly.
Seymour's School Iliad.
With Introduction, Commentary, and Illustrated Vocabulary, by Thomas
D. SuYMOUK, Professor of Greek in Yale College.
Books I.-III. Square liimo. Half-leather. 371 pages. Mailing price,
$1.35 ; for iutroductiou, $1.25 ; allowance, oO cents.
Books I.-VI. 478 pages. Mailing price, $1.75; for introduction, $1.60;
allowance, 40 cents.
rriHIS is believed to be without exception the ideal Iliad for school
use. The introduction, which contains forty-five pages, pie-
seiits, in a concise but systematic form, the most important facts
regarding Homeric life, the Homeiic poem, Homeric style, syntax,
dia>,ct, and vei'se. The text is printed in the large and cioar type
that has distinguished tho College Series of Greek Authors. The
commentary has been adapted to the wants of l)eginners in Homer.
The notes are copious for the first three books. They are less copi-
ous for Books IV. Lo VI., but the commentary on Book VI, is
fuller than that on Books IV. and V. One finds numberless evi-
dences that the editor did h^s work not only in a careful and in a
painstaking and sisholarly way, but with personal pleasure and with
sympathetic regard for the difficulties of beginners. The vocabu-
lary described below contains more than twenty wood-cuts, most
of which are new in this country.
A. H. Buck. Prof, of Greek, Boston
Univ. : In this book i)oth editor and
publisher seem to me to have done
their best to furnish a positive and
valuable help to an easy and ade-
quate preparation for college work
in Greek poetry, and thus to have
made a notable contribution to the
cause of classical learning.
Angle Clara Ghapin, Prof, of
Greek, Wellesley Coll. : It seems to
me particularly rich in what may be
called literary apparatus. With such
a guide a teacher will have no excuse
for teaching the Iliad as merely " a
queer kind of prose," as Professor
Seymour says. (Dec. 16, 1889.)
William Gtoodell Frost, Prof, of
Greek Language and Literature,'
Oberlin, Coll.: The Introduction is
admirable for its selection of mate-
rial, and sound in the views ex-
pressed. Of course the Vocabulary
is a feature which appeals at once to
every student of Homer. I observe
at random through both Vocabulary
and notes numerous felicities which
reveal conscientious and loving care.
I can hardly see how the volume as
a whole could be improved.
Charles Forster Smith, Prof, of
Greek, Vande.rbilt Univ., Nashville,
Tenn. : I do not doubt that it will be
universally conceded to be the beat
school edition of any part of the Iliad
that has yet been put on the Ameri-
can market. I shall recommend Pro-
fessor Seymour's Iliad to all the
schools that fit boys for us.
'%«»*•,•'■,■
»■
I
h '
II
52
GREEK TEXT-BOOKS.
IP
K I
I'
If
•., i
'1:
*"^"'l
1: ->**■■ ■^■'-^'
iii-
,,
^!-
.y
j.v)*W»|-
■"Hs^:.
:i\
•
I
W. A. Bobinson, Prof, of Greek,
Lchiffh L'nic. : It seems to me to be
easily lirst of all American editions.
Alexander Kerr, Prof, of Greek,
University of Wisconsin : My im-
pression upon receiving a copy of
Seymour's Iliad was that Ginn &
Company had surpassed themselves,
if that were possible. Seymour's
Iliad in its present form has in my
opinion no competitor, and, of course,
I shall recommend it to uiy classes
in elementary Greek.
Sobert Sbarp, Prof, of Greek,
Tidane Urdversity, La. : The Sey-
mour's Iliad I regard as much the
best, botli for convenience and for
the judicious help afforded the stu-
dent, of uU the editions for the class-
room that have come into my hands.
Homeric Vocabulary.
A Concise Vocabulary to the First Six Books of Homer's Iliad. By
Thomas D. Seymour of Yale College. Square 12mo. Cloth, x + 105
pages. Mailing price, 80 cents ; for introduction, 75 cents.
A SPECIAL Vocabulary to Homer is open to little objection,
if any, since the words are found nearly in their original
significations and constructions. Its advantages are obvious.
This Vocabulary has not been compiled from other dictionaries,
but has been made from the poem itself. The maker has endeav-
ored to give nothing but what is important for the accurate and
appreciative reading of the Iliad, and yet to show the original and
derived meanings of the words, and to suggest translations which
should be both simple and dignified.
K. B. Youngman, Prof, of Greek,
Lafayette Colleue : It is the best of
all. From cover to cover it speaks
the praise of editor and publisher.
The thing that pleases me most is
the abundant, but not burdensome,
quotation from Virgil, Horace, Mil-
ton, and the Bible, showing similar-
ity of thought, expression, habit, and
experience. This cannot fail to add
much interest to the study of Homer.
John B. Kieffer, Prof, of Latin
and Greek, Franklin and Marshall
College: The introduction and the
notes are precisely what the student
needs, and not least amongst the ex-
cellences of the book is the judicious
care that has been exercised in ex-
cluding things the student does not
need. T'.a execution of the book
leaves nothing to be desired.
Charles M. Moss, Prof, of Greek
Language and Literature, Illinois
Wesleyan University: The vocabu-
lary, I think, is a wove in the right
direction,— toward saving students
a needless waste of time. It is well
enough on paper to talk about a stu-'| most telling use of.
dent's getting so much from use of a
large lexicon ; but that advantage is
mostly imaginary, if I may judge
from thirteen years' experience in
the class-room. What is needed id
something that will give what a stu-
dent (not a professor) can make the
of. of Greek,
s the best of
rer it speaks
id publisher.
> me most is
burdensome,
Horace, Mil-
(ving similar-
)n, habit, and
)t fail to add
idy of Homer.
rof. of Latin
und Marshall
ition and the
,t the student
longst the ex-
the judicious
jrcised in ex-
dent does not
of the book
lesired.
's Iliad. By
loth, x + 105
e objection,
leir original
Dvious.
dictionaries,
has endeav-
accurate and
original and
ations which
advantage is
I may judge
experience in
is needed \a
ve wliat a stu-
can make the
GREEK TEXT-BOOKS.
58
Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek
¥erb.
Rewritten and Enlarged. By William Watson Goodwin, LL.D., Eliot
Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University. 8vo. Cloth.
xxxii + 464 pages. Mailing Price, $2.15 ; Introduction Price, $2.00.
T)ERHAPS no other work of scholarship has enjoyed the unique
and unchallenged preeminence of Professor Goodwin's Syntax
of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Published both in
England and in America, it has long been the standard for the
English-speaking students of two continents.
It is only necessary to say of the new edition that it is a
most careful revision and a judicious enlargement of the pre-
vious one. Full use has been made of all contributions, Ameri-
can and foreign, to the discussion of the subjects here treated,
as well as of the author's own further investigations and maturer
judgments.
The work is presented as something indispensable to all stu-
dents and teachers of Greek.
A copy of the Table of Contents, which contains twenty-two
pages, will be sent to any teacher who desires to see the scope
of the work. Letters endorsing the work in the strongest terms
and emphasizing its practical value have been received from the
most eminent scholars, both American and British, but the pub-
lication of recommendations would be superfluous.
Selections from Xenophon and Herodotus.
With Notes adapted to the revised edition of Goodwin's Greek Grammar,
and copperplate maps. Edited by W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., LL.D., Eliot
Professor of Greek Literature, and John Williams White, Ph.D.,
Professor of Greek in Harvard College. 12mo. Half-morocco, vii + 397
pages. Mailing Price, $1.65; for introduction, $1.50.
Greek Inflection.
By B. F. Harding, Head Master of the Belmont School, Belmont, Mass.
12mo. Cloth. 54 pages. Mailing price, 55 cts. ; for introduction, 50 cts.
"[RESIGNED to economize time for the teacher, by furnishing a
large number of words for ready use, as paradigms, in the
cl»,S8-room, and at the same time to suggest a systematic and sei*
entific treatment of the noun and verb.
^**»fc,r.
11
m
If I
/ Ml
: '^
I
'•^m
I,!; -v*^
i
54
.*•■> '-v;^
HF -"^-r^i
i V
GREEK TEXT-BOOKS.
The Irregular Verbs of Attic Prose.
Their Forms, Prominent Meanings, and Important Compounds ; together
with Lists of Related Words and English Derivatives. By Addison
HoouE, Professor of Greek in the University of Mississippi. 12mo.
Cloth. xii + ';i68 pages. Mailing price, $1.(J0; to teachers, and for
introduction, $1.50.
rpHE material treated in this book is here much fuller than in
the lists of Irregular Verbs in the grammars, and much more
accessible than in the lexicons.
The book contains after the Regular Verbs, — pure, mute, and
liquid, — the Irregular Verbs of Attic Prose in alphabetical order.
Prominent meanings and special uses of frequent occurrence are
given, often illustrated by translated examples. The most impor-
tant compounds are added, and also many related words, — forming
a very practical sort of introduction to word-formation. The first
declension alore is represented by about 400 substantives, and this
indicates the vange of vocabulary. The English Derivatives, of
which there are over 450, will prove, it is hoped, an attractive fea-
ture to teachers and students alike. To the latter they will be an
additional support in learning some five or six hundred Greek
words, and will broaden their knowledge of their own tongue.
George M . Forbes, Prof, of Greek,
University of Rochester, N,Y.: I
have examined it with great care, and
and arrangement, and is destined to
become a favorite.
W. H. Appleton, Prof, of Greek,
Swarthmore College: I have long
thought that such a book was greatly
needed, and I shall put it in use at
once with my classes. I have no
doubt that it will prove to be all
that it seems to promise.
find it admirably adapted to supple-
ment grammar and dictionary. I
shall recommend it to my students.
Angle Clara Chapin, Prof, of
Greek, Wellesley College: It is a
model of convenient classification
Medea of Euripides. "
Edited, with Notes and an Introduction by Frederick D. Allen, Ph.D.,
Professor of Classical Philology in Harvard University. 12mo. Cloth.
141 pages. Mailing price, $1.10; for introduction, $1.00.
rPHE Introduction contains a full discussion of all the principal
questions arising in a study of this play.
(Edipus Tyrdnnus of Sophocles.
Edited, with aq Introduction, Notes, and full Explanation of the Metres,
by John Williams White, Ph.D., Professor of Greek in Harvard Uni-
versity. 12mo. Clotli. 219 pages. Mailing price, $1.25 ; for introduction,
$1.12.
luds ; together
By Addison
isippi. 12mo.
lers, and for
lUer than in
much more
e, mute, and
letical order,
currence are
most impor<
8, — forming
1. The first
ves, and this
srivatives, of
ttractive fea-
ey will be an
idred Greek
tongue,
is destined to
rof. of Greek,
I have loug
)k was greatly
it it in use at
I. I have no
ove to be all
ie.
t^ H^ ctOlxMx 6d. QlillXjul,
.L^
t^lll,
t'\ ItlPCtVi r^;^T(^, ^^Kuj^ ^f^i/-,
1 U-lcL^Lt:'
Va.v T^t^u.^'T^' ^^a.t,n)^ ^ccKu.v ^'|<Li^
,H
Allen, Ph.D.,
12mo. Cloth.
the principal
i^-**;^-
of the Metres,
Harvard Uni-
r introdaction.